Strengthening India’s Statistical Ecosystem: MoSPI’s Initiative to Develop a Robust District Domestic Product (DDP) Framework

  • 02 Nov 2025

In News:

India’s statistical architecture is undergoing a major transformation as the Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation (MoSPI) moves toward developing a bottom-up District Domestic Product (DDP) framework.

The initiative seeks to address long-standing limitations in district-level economic measurement by integrating two critical datasets—the Annual Survey of Unincorporated Sector Enterprises (ASUSE) and the Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS). Beginning January 2025, the combined use of these datasets aims to provide more accurate, granular and timely insights into India’s local economic activity, enabling evidence-based policymaking at the district level.

For decades, most states have relied on top-down allocation methods to estimate DDP, proportionately distributing Gross State Domestic Product based on outdated demographic indicators such as population. This approach produces “near-identical growth rates across districts”, obscuring regional disparities. Recognising this gap, MoSPI has initiated a shift toward a bottom-up estimation model in partnership with state governments. By directly capturing enterprise-level and labour market data from each district, the new framework is expected to radically improve the precision of district economic accounts.

The ASUSE forms the backbone of this strategy. Covering the unincorporated non-agricultural sector—which includes micro, household-based and small enterprises across manufacturing, trade and services—ASUSE produces detailed information on operations, investment patterns, workforce size and value addition. Previously released annually, the survey now offers quarterly data, enhancing frequency and granularity. Given the dominance of the unorganised sector in India’s economy, ASUSE provides an indispensable window into local economic activity.

The PLFS, conducted monthly by the National Statistical Office (NSO), complements ASUSE by capturing labour force participation, employment conditions, earnings and occupational structures in both rural and urban areas. Together, the two datasets reflect the dual pillars of district economies—enterprise activity and labour engagement. MoSPI notes that large enterprises are easy to identify, but district-level output is primarily driven by households, nano units and MSMEs, which both surveys cover extensively.

By combining these datasets, MoSPI aims to compute DDP through:

(a) bottom-up aggregation of district-level enterprise and labour data;

(b) integration of informal sector output; and

(c) alignment of statistical systems with decentralised planning structures.

This marks a paradigm shift in India’s economic measurement, aligning with the government’s emphasis on data-driven governance under Viksit Bharat @2047.

The initiative is part of a broader overhaul of the statistical system. Several complementary efforts are underway:

  • The Annual Survey of Service Sector Enterprises (ASSSE), launching in January 2026, will map the incorporated services sector.
  • The National Household Income Survey (NHIS), beginning February 2026, aims to measure income distribution and inequality—despite traditional challenges of under-reporting.
  • A forward-looking capital expenditure survey has been introduced to track investment trends.
  • MoSPI is also expanding public access to over 250 datasets, including GST aggregates, e-Vahan registrations and trade statistics, to strengthen national accounts and support research.

Despite these advancements, challenges remain. Accurate data capture from unincorporated enterprises is difficult, statistical capacity varies across states, and integrating multiple datasets raises risks of double-counting. Yet experts view the reform as a critical step toward improving the granularity, reliability and timeliness of India’s economic statistics. With several states already experimenting with district-level estimation, MoSPI’s framework could soon enable standardised and credible DDP measurement nationwide, transforming local governance and development planning.

The Employability Crisis in India: Rethinking Academia–Industry Collaboration

  • 01 Nov 2025

In News:

India is grappling with a growing employability crisis, underscored by the fact that only 42.6% of graduates are considered job-ready. This mismatch between academic training and labour market needs has become a structural challenge, affecting productivity, economic growth, and youth aspirations. The crisis signals a systemic misalignment rather than a shortage of talent.

Understanding Employability

Employability today goes beyond academic qualifications. It includes the ability to:

  • Acquire and apply knowledge in real-world contexts.
  • Adapt to evolving technologies and workplace demands.
  • Engage in lifelong learning, unlearning, and relearning.
  • Demonstrate soft skills, value creation, and ethical behaviour.

Modern industries require graduates who combine technical capability with communication, teamwork, problem-solving, and a growth mindset.

 

Causes of the Academia–Industry Divide

Academic Factors

  • Outdated Curriculum: Syllabi often fail to match rapid technological changes, new job roles, and automation trends.
  • Theory-Oriented Pedagogy: Learning remains exam-centric with limited exposure to practical projects, internships, or problem-solving environments.
  • Soft Skills Deficit: Institutions provide little training in communication, adaptability, workplace behaviour, and emotional intelligence.

Industry Factors

  • High Expectations: Employers expect “ready-to-deploy” graduates but invest minimally in onboarding or mentoring.
  • Rapid Technological Shifts: Industry skill needs evolve faster than academia can adjust, widening the skills gap.
  • Weak Collaboration: Companies often view academic institutions as outdated, resulting in minimal engagement in curriculum design or research.
  • Short-Term Approach: Recruitment is prioritised over building robust, long-term skill ecosystems.

 

Government and Institutional Initiatives

  • National Education Policy (NEP) 2020: Encourages experiential learning, flexibility, internships, and stronger industry linkages.
  • AICTE Internship Mandate: Requires engineering students to undergo industrial exposure.
  • Skill India Mission: Strengthens vocational education through Sector Skill Councils aligned with market needs.
  • NASSCOM FutureSkills PRIME: Upskills youth in digital technologies such as AI, data analytics, and cybersecurity.

These initiatives aim to modernise learning pathways and improve alignment with industry demands.

 

Challenges in Implementation

Despite reforms, several structural challenges persist:

  • Curricular Inertia: Bureaucratic hurdles delay rapid updates in university syllabi.
  • Fragmented Skills Ecosystem: Weak coordination among government, academia, and industry limits policy effectiveness.
  • Faculty Skill Gaps: Many educators lack exposure to new technologies and contemporary workplace practices.
  • Urban–Rural Divide: Smaller and rural institutions suffer from poor infrastructure and limited corporate linkages.
  • Low Industry Investment: Companies underinvest in academia–industry partnerships and long-term talent development.

 

Way Forward

  • Structural Reforms
    • Curriculum Co-Design: Regular, collaborative revision of syllabi with inputs from employers, universities, and policymakers.
    • Dual-Learning Model: Embed apprenticeships, live projects, and work-integrated learning into higher education.
    • Faculty Immersion: Promote faculty internships, industry sabbaticals, and continuous upskilling.
  • Skills and Ethics
    • Soft Skills & Ethics Labs: Establish dedicated centres for communication, workplace ethics, and emotional intelligence.
    • Outcome-Based Tracking: Use data to monitor alumni career trajectories and skill relevance.
  • Industry Engagement: Incentivise long-term corporate participation in curriculum development, research, and training.

 

Conclusion

India’s employability challenge is fundamentally an issue of alignment, not ability. Bridging the gap between academia and industry requires shared responsibility, continuous innovation, and sustained collaboration. When education becomes practical, dynamic, ethical, and closely connected to the world of work, India can unlock its demographic potential and build a resilient, future-ready workforce.

 

Lokpal of India

  • 31 Oct 2025

In News:

The Lokpal of India, established under the Lokpal and Lokayuktas Act, 2013, was envisaged as an independent anti-corruption ombudsman capable of investigating complaints against high public officials, including the Prime Minister, Union Ministers, MPs and government officials.

Conceived in the backdrop of the 2011 anti-corruption movement, the institution began functioning meaningfully only in 2019, when the first Lokpal was constituted—marking a long-awaited step in strengthening mechanisms for integrity and transparency in governance.

Mandate and Powers

  • The Lokpal is empowered to conduct inquiries and investigations under the Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988.
  • Its jurisdiction extends to all public servants—Groups A to D—besides heads of government-funded institutions.
  • It possesses quasi-judicial powers, including summoning witnesses, demanding documents, ordering asset freezes, and recommending prosecution.
  • Crucially, it maintains supervisory authority over the CBI in cases referred by it, reinforcing independent and credible investigations.
  • The Lokpal’s composition includes a Chairperson and up to eight members—half of them judicial. As of 2025, Justice A.M. Khanwilkar (retd.) serves as Chairperson, supported by a seven-member team. Members are appointed by the President upon the recommendation of a selection committee comprising the Prime Minister, Speaker of Lok Sabha, Leader of Opposition, Chief Justice of India, and an eminent jurist.

Performance Crisis and Data Trends

Despite its powerful mandate, the Lokpal’s performance has raised serious concerns. Since inception, it has received 6,955 complaints, yet only 289 preliminary inquiries have been ordered. Out of these, a mere seven cases have progressed to the prosecution stage—an alarming indicator of institutional underutilisation.

The declining public engagement is sharper still. Annual complaints peaked at 2,469 in 2022–23 but plummeted to 233 in 2025, suggesting fading public confidence. Nearly 90% of all complaints were received in its first four years (2019–2023), while the past three years recorded only 691 complaints combined.

Civil society groups have criticised the procedural rigidity of the Lokpal. Activists point out that many complaints are dismissed on technical grounds such as format errors, while substantive allegations remain unaddressed. Further, the Lokpal’s failure to upload annual reports since 2021–22 has generated questions about its transparency and accountability.

Institutional Weaknesses and Controversies

A major lacuna has been the delayed operationalisation of the prosecution wing, notified only in June 2025—twelve years after the enactment of the Lokpal Act—severely constraining its ability to pursue legal action. The credibility of the institution also came under public scrutiny when it issued a tender to procure seven BMW 330Li luxury cars for its Chairperson and members. Critics argue that an anti-corruption body must demonstrate fiscal restraint and ethical prudence in its own functioning.

Way Forward

Strengthening the Lokpal requires structural, procedural, and ethical reforms. A real-time digital dashboard should be created to enable public tracking of cases and reduce opacity. Complaint formats must be simplified to ensure accessibility for ordinary citizens. Institutional autonomy must be reinforced with adequate staffing for inquiry and prosecution wings. Annual reports should be mandatorily published and tabled in Parliament. Above all, Lokpal must cultivate public trust by adopting austerity and demonstrating moral credibility.

Conclusion

The Lokpal was created to be the custodian of public integrity—an independent safeguard against high-level corruption. However, its diminishing complaint inflow, administrative inertia, and controversies signal a crisis of legitimacy. Revitalising the institution through stronger transparency, greater accountability, and ethical restraint is essential if it is to fulfil its constitutional promise of clean and accountable governance.

Labelling AI-Generated Content in India: Towards Responsible Digital Governance

  • 25 Oct 2025

In News:

The Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology (MeitY) has proposed amendments to the Information Technology (Intermediary Guidelines and Digital Media Ethics Code) Rules, 2021, mandating the labelling and disclosure of AI-generated content on social media platforms. The move comes amid growing public concern over deepfakes and synthetic media, which have begun to challenge democratic discourse, individual privacy, and digital trust.

The Rise of AI-Generated Content and Deepfake Concerns

India is experiencing a rapid surge in the use of artificial intelligence (AI) for content creation across entertainment, advertising, and online communication. However, this technological boom has also led to the proliferation of deepfakes — hyper-realistic videos, images, and audio clips generated by AI that mimic real individuals or events.

The issue gained national prominence in 2023, when a manipulated video of a popular actor went viral, prompting outrage and prompting Prime Minister Narendra Modi to call deepfakes a new “crisis.” These incidents have exposed how synthetic content can be weaponised for political propaganda, misinformation, financial fraud, and reputational harm.

Key Provisions of the Draft Rules

The proposed amendments introduce a comprehensive framework to enhance transparency and accountability in digital content creation:

  • Mandatory Self-Declaration:Users uploading content on platforms such as YouTube, Instagram, or X (formerly Twitter) must declare whether their material is AI-generated or synthetic.
  • Dual Labelling Mechanism:
    • Embedded Label: AI-generated visuals and audio must carry a visible watermark or label covering at least 10% of the surface area or duration.
    • Platform-Level Label: A visible disclaimer will appear wherever such content is displayed online.
  • Platform Accountability:If users fail to disclose synthetic content, platforms must proactively detect and label it using AI-based detection tools. Non-compliance could lead to loss of safe harbour protection under Section 79 of the IT Act, making intermediaries legally liable for misinformation.
  • Metadata Requirement:AI-generated material must include a permanent, traceable metadata identifier embedded at the time of creation to ensure accountability.
  • Scope of Application:The rule extends beyond social media to AI content generation tools like OpenAI’s Sora and Google’s Gemini, requiring built-in watermarking mechanisms.

Rationale and Policy Objectives

The policy aims to ensure that users in a democracy can distinguish between authentic and synthetic content. By mandating labelling and traceability, the government seeks to curb misinformation, protect democratic integrity, and uphold public trust in the digital ecosystem.

The ministry’s note emphasizes that AI-generated misinformation poses risks to national security, elections, and social stability, making proactive governance essential. Previously, such misuse was addressed under general impersonation and fraud provisions of the IT Act, 2000, but the evolving sophistication of generative AI tools now demands specific regulatory safeguards.

Global Context

India’s initiative aligns with global best practices.

  • China (2025): Introduced mandatory AI labelling for deepfakes, voice synthesis, and chatbots with visible and hidden watermarks.
  • European Union: Under its AI Act, mandates user notification when interacting with AI systems.
  • United States: Developing federal standards for content authenticity and AI watermarking.

By adopting a binding legal framework, India positions itself among the early regulators of generative AI, setting a precedent for responsible innovation.

Implementation Challenges and the Way Forward

While the proposal has been broadly welcomed, challenges persist. Detecting AI-generated content across diverse languages and formats requires sophisticated detection infrastructure. Excessive compliance burdens may also affect startups and smaller creators in India’s expanding $12 billion AI ecosystem.

The government has invited public and industry feedback until November 6, 2025, signaling openness to iterative policy design. Successful implementation will depend on multi-stakeholder cooperation, technological innovation, and digital literacy among users.

Conclusion

The proposed amendments mark a decisive shift in India’s digital governance—from reactive moderation to preventive transparency. By mandating AI content labelling, India aims to balance technological innovation with ethical responsibility, ensuring that the age of artificial intelligence strengthens rather than undermines truth, democracy, and public trust.

Status of Elephants in India: New Census Establishes a Scientific Baseline for Conservation

  • 23 Oct 2025

In News:

The Wildlife Institute of India (WII) has released its report titled “Status of Elephants in India”, marking a new chapter in the country’s elephant conservation efforts. The study estimates 22,446 elephants across four major landscapes — the first time a DNA-based census method has been used. Although the figure appears lower than the 2017 estimate of 29,964 elephants, experts clarify that this does not represent a population decline but a fresh scientific baseline for future monitoring.

Evolution of Elephant Population Estimation in India

India’s elephant counts have evolved significantly since the first census in 1929 in the then United Province (now Uttar Pradesh and Uttarakhand). Early surveys relied on direct visual counts and averaging of sightings. With the launch of Project Elephant in 1992, the estimation process became more structured, with five-yearly assessments using methods such as total count, dung count, and transect sampling.

However, since different States adopted varied techniques, results were often inconsistent and incomparable. To overcome this, synchronised elephant censuses were conducted in 2005, 2010, and 2017 using uniform methods like total count and line transect dung count, but observer bias and overcounting remained major issues.

Recognising these limitations, India adopted a new scientific framework under the Synchronous All-India Elephant Estimation (SAIEE) 2021–25, shifting from visual to genetic sampling for more accurate and comparable results.

SAIEE 2021–25: A Scientific Overhaul

The SAIEE 2021–25 represents the most comprehensive and methodologically advanced elephant census in India. The country was divided into 100 sq. km cells, further split into 4 sq. km grids, each uniquely coded to ensure spatial accuracy. Enumerators covered over 6.6 lakh km, surveying nearly 1.9 lakh transects, and collected 21,056 dung samples for DNA extraction.

The census was carried out in three phases:

  1. Field data collection on animal signs, dung, vegetation, and human disturbances.
  2. Habitat and human impact assessment, including forest cover and patch size.
  3. Spatial abundance modelling using habitat and human interface data.

This shift to DNA-based identification eliminates duplication errors, allowing scientists to create a uniform national baseline for long-term monitoring and conservation.

Findings: The Landscape of Elephants

The report identifies four major elephant-bearing regions in India:

  • Western Ghats (Karnataka, Kerala, Tamil Nadu) – The strongest habitat, hosting 11,934 elephants (53%), with Karnataka alone having 6,013.
  • North Eastern Hills and Brahmaputra Flood Plains – About 22% of the national population, led by Assam with 4,159 elephants.
  • Shivalik Hills and Gangetic Plains – Around 9%, mostly in Uttarakhand.
  • Central India and Eastern Ghats – About 8%, with Odisha as a key habitat.

This highlights the Western Ghats as India’s most critical elephant stronghold, while the Northeast remains vital for transboundary populations.

Emerging Challenges: Fragmentation and Conflict

The report warns that habitat fragmentation due to commercial plantations, mining, linear infrastructure, and encroachments is severely impacting elephant movement. This has triggered increasing human-elephant conflict, as herds venture into new areas in search of food and connectivity.

In Karnataka, Tamil Nadu, and Kerala — which together host the majority of India’s elephants — conflicts have led to hundreds of human and elephant fatalities. Similar patterns are emerging in Andhra Pradesh and parts of central India, where elephants have recolonised regions after nearly two centuries.

Conservation Outlook

Experts emphasise that habitat connectivity and coexistence must be central to future conservation strategies. The new DNA-based baseline offers a reliable foundation for policy interventions, habitat restoration, and conflict mitigation.

Community participation, awareness programmes, and integration of Elephant Corridors under Project Elephant are essential to ensure long-term survival of Elephas maximus in India.

Conclusion

India’s transition to a DNA-based elephant census marks a scientific milestone in wildlife monitoring. While the numbers suggest a smaller population than before, the shift represents a more precise and globally aligned approach to conservation. With over half of Asia’s elephants residing in India, the findings of the WII’s study underscore an urgent need to balance development with ecological sensitivity, ensuring that India’s national heritage animal continues to thrive in its natural habitats.

Poverty Measurement in India: Revisiting the Rangarajan Line and the Rise of Multidimensional Poverty

  • 21 Oct 2025

In News:

The debate on poverty measurement in India has gained renewed significance with the Reserve Bank of India’s Department of Economic and Policy Research (DEPR) updating state-wise poverty estimates using the 2022–23 Household Consumption Expenditure Survey (HCES). This marks the first major recalibration of the C. Rangarajan Committee’s poverty line, originally formulated in 2014, and reflects shifting paradigms in assessing deprivation in India.

Revisiting the Rangarajan Framework

The Rangarajan Committee was tasked with redefining poverty beyond the earlier Tendulkar methodology. It fixed the poverty line at ?972 per capita per month in rural India and ?1,407 in urban areas (2011–12 prices), categorising about 29.5% of the population as poor. Its poverty basket focused on minimum nutritional requirements along with basic spending on health, education, fuel, clothing, and rent. Unlike later approaches, it offered a strict consumption-based benchmark rooted in monetary expenditure.

Updated Poverty Trends: State-wise Insights

RBI economists reconstructed poverty lines for 20 major states based on HCES 2022–23 data using a new price index aligned with the original poverty line basket rather than Consumer Price Index weights. The findings highlight remarkable improvements, with major reductions observed in traditionally backward states:

  • Odisha: Rural poverty fell from 47.8% (2011–12) to 8.6% (2022–23)
  • Bihar: Urban poverty dropped from 50.8% to 9.1%
  • Kerala: Rural poverty declined to 1.4%; Himachal Pradesh’s urban poverty fell to 2%
  • Lowest poverty levels: Rural Himachal Pradesh (0.4%) and urban Tamil Nadu (1.9%)
  • Highest poverty levels: Chhattisgarh (25.1% rural; 13.3% urban)

These transformations reflect improved rural infrastructure, livelihood programmes, PDS reforms, and social transfers. Yet persistent poverty in central Indian states underscores uneven development and structural gaps in employment quality, agrarian distress, and welfare delivery.

Methodological Continuity and Debate

Poverty estimates vary sharply across institutions, illustrating the sensitivity of measurement frameworks:

  • SBI (2023–24): ~4–5% poverty
  • World Bank (2022): 10.2% poverty in 2019
  • IMF (2022): 0.8% in 2019 (including food transfers)

These disparities stem from differing inflation adjustments, survey datasets, and treatment of welfare subsidies. They also fuel a longstanding debate: can income-based poverty capture human deprivation comprehensively, especially in a transforming economy with evolving consumption patterns?

Shift to Multidimensional Poverty

Official focus has now decisively shifted to multidimensional poverty aligned with SDG frameworks. India’s Multidimensional Poverty Index (MPI) evaluates deprivation across twelve indicators spanning health, education, and living standards. According to NITI Aayog (2024), 24.82 crore people exited multidimensional poverty between 2013–14 and 2022–23, reducing MPI from 29.17% to 11.28%. This highlights the impact of welfare architecture—PDS expansion, Ujjwala, Saubhagya, Jal Jeevan Mission, Swachh Bharat, and financial inclusion.

Way Forward

  • Regular poverty line updates reflecting new consumption patterns and regional price realities
  • Integration of income and multidimensional metrics for balanced welfare planning
  • Timely survey releases and transparent data to strengthen evidence-based policymaking
  • Targeted interventions for lagging states like Chhattisgarh, Jharkhand, and parts of UP
  • Leveraging digital delivery systems to minimise leakages and enhance inclusivity

Conclusion

India’s poverty trajectory reflects a dual narrative—sharp improvements driven by welfare provisioning and growth, yet uneven progress across regions and methodological contestation. While the Rangarajan line continues to serve as a benchmark for monetary poverty, the dominance of multidimensional metrics signals a shift towards understanding deprivation as a matter of human capability, not merely income. Ensuring sustained and equitable poverty reduction will require methodological rigor, policy innovation, and heightened focus on lagging geographies to achieve inclusive development.

Google’s $15 Billion AI Data Centre in Andhra Pradesh

  • 18 Oct 2025

In News:

Google’s announcement of a USD 15-billion investment to establish an Artificial Intelligence (AI) data centre in Visakhapatnam marks a transformational moment in India’s digital infrastructure landscape. The initiative, the largest single investment by Google in India, comes amid a geo-economic context of recalibrating India-US relations and the government’s emphasis on technological self-reliance and swadeshi digital systems. The project positions India as an emerging hub in global AI capability and computing power.

Why AI Data Centres Matter

AI-focused data centres differ fundamentally from conventional facilities. While traditional data centres are built around CPU-based servers to support cloud storage, websites, and enterprise applications, AI data centres rely on high-performance GPUs to handle data-heavy and compute-intensive workloads such as generative AI, advanced analytics, image/video processing, and deep-learning models. This makes them significantly more power-intensive and infrastructure-demanding, requiring robust energy supply and advanced cooling systems.

According to estimates cited by Google, the Visakhapatnam AI hub is expected to add at least USD 15 billion to the US GDP between 2026 and 2030 through increased AI adoption and cloud-driven activity, demonstrating the cross-border economic impact of such investments.

Partnerships and Green Infrastructure

The facility is being developed in partnership with AdaniConneX and Airtel, leveraging the same backbone used for Google’s global platforms like Search, YouTube, and Workspace. The project includes building a major subsea cable landing station, linking eastern India to Google’s expansive global cable network, enhancing international data routes and reducing latency.

A key dimension of the partnership lies in sustainable power and energy independence. AdaniConneX, a joint venture between Adani Enterprises and EdgeConneX, will provide 100% clean energy, supported by new transmission lines, renewable generation, and energy storage facilities in Andhra Pradesh. This aligns with India’s climate commitments and enhances grid resilience.

Economic Impact and Capacity Expansion

India’s data centre industry, currently valued at ~USD 10 billion with USD 1.2 billion in FY24 revenue, is projected to add 795 MW of capacity by 2027 — reaching 1.8 GW. Google’s project alone is expected to generate nearly 1.88 lakh direct and indirect jobs, strengthening regional development and high-skilled employment.

However, high capital costs and limited job intensity remain policy concerns. Approximately 40% of capex in data centres goes towards electrical systems, and 65% of operating costs are attributed to electricity, with ~?60–70 crore required per MW of capacity. This necessitates a careful assessment of incentives and long-term strategic benefits.

Energy Security and the Nuclear Option

The International Energy Agency (IEA) predicts that global data-centre electricity demand may double by 2026, raising questions around sustainability. While renewable energy remains the mainstay, its intermittency has prompted policy consideration of nuclear energy as a round-the-clock clean power source — a trend already visible in the United States and now emerging in India’s energy strategy.

Conclusion

Google’s AI hub in Visakhapatnam represents a strategic convergence of digital infrastructure, clean-energy innovation, and global technological cooperation. For India, it underscores the dual challenge of expanding digital capability while ensuring energy security and environmental sustainability. The success of this initiative will influence India’s journey toward becoming a global digital superpower underpinned by resilient, sovereign, and sustainable compute ecosystems.

2025 Nobel Prize in Economic Sciences: Understanding Innovation-Driven Growth

  • 16 Oct 2025

In News:

The 2025 Nobel Prize in Economic Sciences has been awarded to Joel Mokyr, Philippe Aghion, and Peter Howitt for their seminal contributions to explaining how innovation drives long-term economic growth. Their work collectively answers a fundamental question in development economics: why has sustained growth become the norm in the last two centuries, despite millennia of stagnation? While Mokyr approaches the issue through economic history, Aghion and Howitt construct a formal model illustrating the dynamics of innovation and competition in modern economies.

Mokyr’s Framework: Useful Knowledge and Openness to Change

Joel Mokyr argues that economic stagnation persisted through most of human history because innovation lacked a strong scientific foundation. Prior to the Industrial Revolution, technological progress was primarily prescriptive—people knew how to produce goods but not why processes worked as they did. This limited systematic improvement.

The transformation began during the Scientific Revolution (16th–17th centuries) when controlled experimentation, measurement, and reproducibility became central to knowledge creation. This generated “useful knowledge”—a synergy of propositional (scientific principles) and prescriptive (practical techniques) knowledge. Examples include improvements in the steam engine driven by insights into atmospheric pressure and advancements in steel production based on understanding carbon reduction in iron.

However, knowledge alone was not sufficient. Societal openness to change, a hallmark of Enlightenment thought, enabled technological disruption. Acceptance of new ideas, weakening of entrenched elites, and institutional reforms—from the British Parliament curbing aristocratic privileges to society’s rejection of Luddite resistance to machinery—allowed innovations to diffuse widely. According to Mokyr, skills-based human capital and a culture supportive of disruption are crucial pillars of sustained growth.

Aghion–Howitt’s Creative Destruction Model

Drawing on Joseph Schumpeter’s concept of creative destruction, Aghion and Howitt develop a rigorous macroeconomic model explaining how innovation displaces old technologies and firms, generating productivity gains. Their model shows that firms invest in research and development (R&D) to secure temporary monopoly power through patents. This monopoly incentivizes innovation, yet it is continually threatened by newer technologies. Thus, growth emerges from a constant cycle of competition, firm turnover, and technological leaps.

Importantly, their general equilibrium framework links household savings, financial markets, production decisions, and innovation incentives, demonstrating that micro-level disruptions are essential for macro-level stability. Empirical trends—such as high annual firm entry and exit rates in developed economies—support their argument.

Policy Implications

The Nobel findings highlight key contemporary debates:

  • R&D Subsidies: Innovation has positive spillovers beyond private profit. Public funding can correct under-investment, but excessive subsidies risk waste where gains are marginal.
  • Social Safety Nets: Creative destruction benefits economies but harms displaced workers and firms. A balanced welfare ecosystem ensures societies remain open to technological change.
  • Skilling and Human Capital: To convert ideas into output, governments must invest in education, vocational training, and research ecosystems.

Conclusion

The 2025 Nobel laureates collectively establish that economic growth is neither automatic nor guaranteed—it is the result of science-based knowledge creation, institutional openness, and dynamic competition. For emerging economies like India, fostering innovation-driven growth requires strong research systems, regulatory flexibility, investment in human capital, and social policies that cushion transition shocks. Their work underscores that sustainable progress lies in embracing change, not resisting it.

India’s Grain-Driven Ethanol Transition: Shifting Paradigms in Biofuel Policy

  • 15 Oct 2025

In News:

India’s ethanol blending programme, originally launched to reduce oil imports and stabilise the sugar industry, is undergoing a transformative shift. What began as a sugarcane-centric initiative has evolved into a grain-based ethanol ecosystem, reflecting structural changes in agricultural markets, energy policy, and rural industrialisation. For the first time, grain-derived ethanol—predominantly from maize—has surpassed sugarcane-based production, marking a pivotal moment in India’s biofuel sector.

Evolution of Ethanol Blending

The Ethanol Blending Programme (EBP) was initially designed to create additional revenue streams for sugar mills and ensure timely payments to cane growers. Early production relied on C-heavy molasses, a by-product of sugar extraction. Policy reforms in 2018 incentivised diversion of B-heavy molasses and even direct cane juice toward ethanol, raising supplies from 38 crore litres in 2013-14 to nearly 189 crore litres by 2018-19, and increasing blending levels from 1.6% to nearly 5%. This stabilised the sugar economy and boosted rural incomes.

Rise of Grain-Based Ethanol

A crucial turning point came when the government permitted ethanol production from grains such as maize, rice, and damaged foodgrains, offering differential pricing to attract investment. Grain-based distilleries rapidly expanded across Punjab, Haryana, Bihar, Madhya Pradesh, Maharashtra, Karnataka, and other states, with over ?40,000 crore invested in facilities capable of using multiple feedstocks.

By 2023-24, of the 672.49 crore litres supplied to Oil Marketing Companies (OMCs), almost 60% came from grains, with maize accounting for the largest share. In 2024-25, grain-based ethanol procurement is expected to reach 620 crore litres, with maize alone contributing about 420 crore litres. Drought-induced sugarcane shortages and more attractive prices—?71.86 per litre for maize-based ethanol versus ?57.97–65.61 per litre for cane-based routes—accelerated the shift.

Capacity and Policy Dynamics

India today hosts 499 distilleries with an annual ethanol capacity of 1,822 crore litres. Against a 20% blending target, OMCs sought 1,050 crore litres for 2025-26, but received offers exceeding 1,776 crore litres—signalling emerging overcapacity. While this capacity enhances energy security and reduces crude imports (over $160 billion annually), it introduces new challenges in balancing supply, food security, and price stability.

Challenges: Food Security, Sustainability, and Market Balance

India now faces a classic food-versus-fuel dilemma. Producing ~420 crore litres of maize ethanol consumes over 11 million tonnes of maize, nearly 26% of national output. With maize being vital for poultry and livestock feed, diversion to fuel can raise feed costs and food inflation. Similarly, viability of rice-based ethanol hinges on surplus FCI stocks—an uncertain variable.

Environmental concerns are also emerging. While ethanol reduces carbon emissions, grain-based production increases pressure on water, land, and fertiliser use, particularly in maize-growing regions.

Way Forward

Policy refinements are underway to ensure a balanced biofuel strategy. A dual-feedstock approach—leveraging both cane and grains—along with scaling second-generation (2G) biofuels from agricultural waste, is expected to drive future growth. Adequate stock monitoring, sustainable cultivation practices, and technological innovation will be critical for achieving the 20% blending target by 2025-26 without compromising food security.

Conclusion

India’s ethanol revolution demonstrates strategic economic diversification, rural industrialisation, and commitment to energy transition. However, sustaining this momentum requires calibrated policies aligning energy security with agricultural sustainability, food availability, and environmental stewardship—critical considerations for a resilient and self-reliant biofuel future.

Credit Reforms to Deepen Financial Markets

  • 13 Oct 2025

In News:

India’s journey toward Viksit Bharat 2047 hinges on simultaneously nurturing human capital and modernising financial institutions. Two recent developments reflect this integrated approach: the Viksit Bharat Buildathon 2025 and the Reserve Bank of India’s initiatives to strengthen financial markets and internationalise the rupee. Together, they illustrate India's twin strategy of empowering youth as innovation leaders while deepening economic capacity and regional influence.

Fostering a Culture of Innovation: Viksit Bharat Buildathon 2025

  • The Viksit Bharat Buildathon, launched by the Ministry of Education in collaboration with NITI Aayog’s Atal Innovation Mission, is India’s largest school-level hackathon, engaging 1 crore students across classes 6–12.
  • Aligned with NEP 2020, it aims to build problem-solving aptitude and innovation competencies from grassroots levels. Students work in teams to design prototypes based on four themes central to India’s development discourse—Atmanirbhar Bharat, Swadeshi, Vocal for Local, and Samriddh Bharat.
  • The event adopts a phased structure: registrations (September), nationwide live build on 13 October 2025, and final evaluation by December. With Rs 1 crore award pool and dedicated mentorship from innovation networks and higher education institutions, it incentivises early exposure to experiential learning, creativity, and entrepreneurship. Importantly, it prioritises participation from Aspirational Districts, tribal belts, and frontier regions, promoting inclusivity in innovation ecosystems.
  • By integrating rural and underserved communities, the initiative aligns with the principle of technology-enabled social justice and fosters an innovation-ready workforce. It positions schoolchildren not merely as future beneficiaries but as current contributors to nation-building—a step crucial for demographic dividend utilisation.

Rewiring India’s Financial System: RBI’s Strategic Reforms

Parallelly, the Reserve Bank of India has initiated significant policy reforms to bolster India’s financial depth and global standing. It has permitted banks to finance corporate mergers and acquisitions—a domain previously dominated by NBFCs—allowing formal banking channels to support corporate consolidation, expansion, and competitiveness. This move reflects confidence in banking sector resilience and recognises that scale and efficiency are essential for domestic firms in a globalising economy.

In a landmark regional diplomacy initiative, RBI has authorised Indian banks and their overseas branches to provide rupee-denominated loans to residents of neighbouring countries. This step supports rupee internationalisation, reduces dependence on the US dollar for regional transactions, and enhances India’s financial influence, especially amid global currency contestations.

Additional measures—such as raising the limit for loans against shares to Rs 1 crore, enabling investment of surplus Special Rupee Vostro Account balances in corporate bonds, and widening currency benchmarking—will deepen capital markets, enhance liquidity, and improve foreign participation confidence.

Conclusion

The Buildathon and RBI reforms, though sectorally distinct, serve a shared national objective: building a self-reliant, innovation-driven, globally confident India. While one invests in future innovators and inclusive talent pipelines, the other strengthens the institutional financial ecosystem needed to support economic expansion and regional leadership. Together, they represent India’s holistic developmental approach—nurturing minds, empowering markets, and globalising national capabilities in pursuit of Viksit Bharat.

‘Breathable Art’: Blending Creativity and Sustainability for Cleaner Air in Urban India

  • 12 Oct 2025

In News:

The Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEFCC) recently inaugurated “Breathable Art” — an innovative living installation at Swarn Jayanti Park, Rohini, Delhi. Conceived under the Breath of Change – Clean Air, Blue Skies’ campaign, the initiative aims to combine artistic expression with ecological functionality to promote awareness on air quality, sustainability, and urban environmental stewardship.

About the Initiative

  • Breathable Art is a pioneering “living structure” created from air-purifying plants and eco-friendly materials.
  • Sponsored by MoEFCC and supported by the Commission for Air Quality Management (CAQM) and Delhi Development Authority (DDA), it forms part of the Environmental Information, Awareness, Capacity Building and Livelihood Programme (EIACP) under the Environment Education, Awareness, Research and Skill Development (EEARSD) scheme.
  • The installation integrates art, science, and community engagement — transforming a public space into an interactive platform for environmental education.
  • Visitors can scan QR codes placed around the installation to learn about the plants’ role in air purification and sustainable living practices. This interactive element aims to make environmental learning participatory and accessible.

Features and Ecological Role

The structure uses a mix of air-purifying plant species — such as Areca Palm, Bamboo Palm, Money Plant, Snake Plant, Spider Plant, Parijat, Peace Lily, Arrowhead, Weeping Fig, and Zigzag Plant. These species are recognized for their capacity to absorb harmful pollutants like formaldehyde and benzene, regulate humidity, and enhance oxygen concentration — particularly valuable during Delhi’s winter months when air quality deteriorates sharply.

By embedding these plants into an aesthetically designed structure, Breathable Art offers a passive yet effective solution to urban air pollution. It also enhances local biodiversity and contributes to microclimate regulation within its surroundings.

Community and Educational Dimensions

Beyond its environmental function, Breathable Art serves as:

  • An Educational Hub: Hosting students, eco-clubs, and community members for awareness sessions on clean air and sustainable living.
  • A Community Catalyst: Encouraging participation of Resident Welfare Associations (RWAs), schools, and volunteers in maintaining and replicating such models across the city.
  • A Strategic Urban Intervention: Targeting pollution hotspots to promote green urban aesthetics and inspire behavioral change.

This aligns with India’s broader approach of nature-based solutions for urban environmental management — emphasizing community participation, low-cost interventions, and local ecological resilience.

Significance and Way Forward

  • Delhi, one of the world’s most polluted capitals, continues to face critical air quality challenges. Initiatives like Breathable Art highlight how creative, sustainable, and participatory approaches can complement policy-driven measures such as the National Clean Air Programme (NCAP).
  • By merging environmental science with public art, the project redefines sustainability as a lived, experiential practice rather than a distant policy goal. It underscores the principle that environmental consciousness begins with individual action and community involvement.
  • As urban India grapples with escalating pollution, Breathable Art serves as a replicable model for integrating ecological awareness into everyday spaces — inspiring cleaner, greener, and more mindful cities.

Conclusion:
Breathable Art is not merely an installation but a vision — where art, environment, and community converge to remind citizens that sustainability begins with a single breath. It symbolizes India’s evolving approach to environmental governance — creative, participatory, and rooted in harmony with nature.

Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR)

  • 10 Oct 2025

In News:

India’s judiciary faces an unprecedented crisis of pendency and delay, with over 4.57 crore cases pending across various courts, according to the National Judicial Data Grid (NJDG). Of these, the Supreme Court has about 81,768 cases, and High Courts collectively hold around 62.9 lakh cases. The situation underscores an urgent need to adopt efficient and accessible mechanisms like Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) to ensure timely and inclusive justice.

Understanding ADR

Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) refers to a set of methods that allow parties to settle disputes outside traditional court systems. It includes:

  • Arbitration: A binding process where a neutral arbitrator delivers a decision.
  • Conciliation: A non-binding process facilitated by a conciliator to promote settlement.
  • Mediation: A voluntary and confidential dialogue process led by a neutral mediator.
  • Judicial Settlement / Lok Adalat: Court-referred or community-level settlement platforms.

ADR processes are based on consensus, flexibility, and confidentiality, allowing parties to preserve relationships while saving time and resources.

Why ADR Is Crucial for India

The India Justice Report 2025 highlights critical inefficiencies within India’s justice system — including 33% vacancy in High Courts and 21% in District Courts. Judges in states such as Uttar Pradesh, Himachal Pradesh, and Kerala handle workloads exceeding 4,000 cases each. Prolonged pendency not only delays justice but also undermines trust in legal institutions.

ADR addresses these challenges by offering:

  • Speed and Efficiency: Arbitration and mediation significantly reduce case duration compared to conventional litigation.
  • Cost-Effectiveness: Reduced procedural formalities make justice affordable and accessible.
  • Ease of Doing Business: ADR, especially in commercial disputes, enhances investor confidence by ensuring timely contract enforcement.
  • Social Inclusion: Mediation and Lok Adalats provide participatory platforms, particularly beneficial for rural and marginalized communities.

Legal and Constitutional Framework

The foundation of ADR in India rests on multiple legal provisions:

  • Article 39A of the Constitution mandates equal access to justice and free legal aid.
  • Section 89 of the Code of Civil Procedure (1908) legally recognizes ADR processes such as arbitration, conciliation, and mediation.
  • The Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 (amended in 2021) provides the institutional framework, stipulating a 180-day resolution period and creating the Indian Arbitration Council.
  • The Mediation Act, 2023 introduces mandatory pre-litigation mediation for civil and commercial disputes, encouraging resolution before approaching courts.

Additionally, Lok Adalats, functioning under the Legal Services Authorities Act, 1987, operationalize Article 39A’s spirit. They include Permanent Lok Adalats, National Lok Adalats, and e-Lok Adalats, offering binding decisions without appeal, thus ensuring swift justice at the grassroots level.

Global and Cultural Resonance

ADR aligns with international standards like the UNCITRAL Model Law, making it essential for cross-border commercial arbitration and foreign investment. At the same time, it resonates with India’s civilisational ethos of collective consensus, reflected in the traditional “Panch Parmeshwar” doctrine — a principle recently highlighted by the Law Minister as a model for community-based dispute resolution.

Conclusion

In an overburdened judicial ecosystem, Alternative Dispute Resolution represents a pragmatic and human-centered reform. Strengthening ADR through legal awareness, institutional support, and public participation can transform India’s justice system into one that is efficient, inclusive, and globally credible. By embracing ADR, India not only advances its constitutional mandate of “speedy justice for all” but also revives its age-old tradition of resolving disputes through dialogue and consensus.

Sharp Decline in Child Marriages in India

  • 09 Oct 2025

In News:

A recent survey by Just Rights for Children (JRC), a coalition of over 250 child protection NGOs, has reported a significant decline in child marriages across India. The trend underscores that legal enforcement, community engagement, and multi-sectoral collaboration can collectively transform entrenched social practices that violate children’s rights.

Significance of the Decline

  • Human Rights Perspective: Child marriage undermines the fundamental rights of children—particularly girls—to education, health, and personal autonomy. Its reduction reflects progress toward SDG-5 (Gender Equality) and India’s commitments under the UN Convention on the Rights of the Child (UNCRC).
  • Health and Demographic Gains: Early marriages often precipitate early pregnancies, increasing risks of maternal mortality, low birth weight, and malnutrition. Delaying marriage improves reproductive health and supports demographic stability by spacing births.
  • Educational and Economic Empowerment: Girls who remain in school gain greater social mobility and earning potential. Extended education creates a multiplier effect, reducing inter-generational poverty and enhancing overall human capital.
  • Social Norms Transformation: The steep decline challenges the perception that child marriage is inevitable, showing that communities respond to visible enforcement and positive examples of girls pursuing education.

Key Survey Findings

  • Assam recorded the highest decline (84%), followed by Maharashtra and Bihar (70% each), Rajasthan (66%), and Karnataka (55%).
  • While three children were married every minute during 2019–21, by 2025, only three cases per day were reported.
  • Awareness of the Bal Vivah Mukt Bharat campaign reached 99% of respondents.
  • In 31% of surveyed villages, all girls aged 6–18 attended school, although Bihar lagged behind.
  • Poverty (91%) and safety concerns (44%) remain major drivers of child marriage.

Drivers of the Decline

  • Legal Deterrence: Enforcement under the Prohibition of Child Marriage Act, 2006—FIRs and arrests—proved highly effective. Assam’s proactive approach set a national benchmark.
  • Awareness Campaigns: Nationwide outreach through schools, media, and Panchayats via Bal Vivah Mukt Bharat fostered community ownership over child rights.
  • Community-Based Mechanisms: Karnataka employed helplines and Child Welfare Committees (CWCs), while empowering Panchayat Development Officers to register marriages, preventing around 2,000 child marriages in 2021.
  • Multi-Sectoral Collaboration: Integration of legal, social, and economic interventions through state governments, police, education departments, and civil society reinforced enforcement and awareness.

Remaining Challenges

  • Under-reporting and hidden marriages, especially in rural and tribal regions.
  • Entrenched social norms linked to caste, honour, and family prestige.
  • Economic vulnerability, which still drives early marriages in poor households.
  • Institutional capacity gaps, including inadequate training and resources for frontline workers.
  • Need for robust data to ensure reported progress reflects reality.

Policy Recommendations

  • Mandatory Marriage Registration linked with Aadhaar and education databases.
  • Targeted Social Protection, expanding schemes like Kanyashree and conditional cash transfers to encourage education and delayed marriage.
  • Education and Safety Measures, including improved school infrastructure, transport, and security for girls.
  • Grassroots Empowerment, strengthening Panchayats, CWCs, and helplines for early detection.
  • Normative Change, involving mass communication, role models, and religious/community leaders.
  • Monitoring and Evaluation, through third-party audits, longitudinal surveys, and state dashboards.

Conclusion

India’s decline in child marriages is a landmark achievement in rights-based social reform. The country must now aim to reduce prevalence below 5% by 2030, aligning with the UN Sustainable Development Goals, thereby ensuring that every child’s future is determined by choice, education, and opportunity, rather than compulsion.

Ethics at the Heart of Global Climate Action

  • 07 Oct 2025

In News:

As the world approaches COP30 in Brazil (2025), the role of ethics in climate governance has been revived through the launch of the Global Ethical Stocktake. This initiative aims to place justice, equity, responsibility, and intergenerational fairness at the core of global climate action, complementing the scientific urgency highlighted by rising emissions and warming temperatures.

Ethical Dimensions of Climate Action:

  • Justice and Equity:
    • The principle of common but differentiated responsibilities under the UNFCCC reflects fairness—developed nations bear historical responsibility, while developing nations require space for sustainable growth.
    • The Paris Agreement’s “leave no one behind” principle embodies distributive justice.
  • Intergenerational Responsibility:
    • Present decisions affect the survival prospects of future generations. Ethical stewardship, not exploitation, is essential.
    • In 2025, the International Court of Justice reaffirmed intergenerational equity as central to climate treaties.
  • Human Rights Linkage:
    • Access to food, water, housing, and a healthy environment is inseparable from the right to life (Article 21, Indian Constitution).
    • The Inter-American Court (2024) declared the right to a safe climate a fundamental human right.
  • Integrity and Credibility:
    • The gap between climate promises and delivery undermines trust. Ethical governance requires accountability, transparency, and scientific rigor in Nationally Determined Contributions (NDCs).
    • Corporate greenwashing erodes credibility, emphasizing the need for ethical corporate responsibility.
  • Solidarity with the Vulnerable:
    • Marginalized groups, Indigenous peoples, and communities in the Global South face disproportionate risks. Ethical climate action ensures inclusion and empathy in adaptation strategies.
    • Community-based initiatives, such as the Himachal Pradesh snow leopard survey, illustrate ethics of inclusion in environmental stewardship.

Role of Ethics in Governance:

  • Guiding Negotiators: Ethics reminds negotiators of moral responsibility, where delays equate to human suffering and ecosystem loss.
  • Embedding Frameworks: Initiatives like the Global Ethical Stocktake institutionalize ethics alongside scientific assessments.
  • Judicial Oversight: Courts link morality with law, compelling states to respect climate and human rights obligations.
  • Corporate Responsibility: Businesses must adopt ethical approaches to avoid tokenistic climate pledges.

Ethics in the Indian Context:

  • Constitutional Mandates:
    • Article 48A – Duty of the State to protect the environment.
    • Article 51A(g) – Duty of citizens to protect natural resources.
  • Judicial Precedents: Vellore Citizens’ Forum vs Union of India (1996) upheld the precautionary principle and polluter pays principle.
  • Gandhian Philosophy: Trusteeship aligns with sustainable consumption and responsibility toward nature.

Challenges:

  • National interest vs. global good delays climate finance and technology transfer.
  • Political polarization and denialism hinder consensus despite rising urgency.
  • Greenwashing and weak enforcement erode accountability.
  • Adaptation finance remains underfunded, leaving vulnerable populations exposed.

Way Forward:

  • Institutionalize the Global Ethical Stocktake to align climate action with justice and equity.
  • Implement just transition policies protecting livelihoods while shifting from fossil fuels.
  • Strengthen ethical climate jurisprudence to ensure rights-based accountability.
  • Promote ethical leadership and integrate climate ethics into education and policymaking.

Conclusion:
Climate change is as much a moral challenge as a scientific one. Ethics—anchored in justice, responsibility, solidarity, and intergenerational equity—must guide global action. Embedding ethics into negotiations, law, community initiatives, and corporate practices is essential to restore credibility, build trust, and ensure a liveable planet for present and future generations.

Heritage Management and Conservation in India

  • 06 Oct 2025

In News:

  • India’s rich cultural and architectural legacy, reflected in thousands of ancient monuments and archaeological sites, has long been under the stewardship of the Archaeological Survey of India (ASI).
  • Established in 1861, the ASI functions under the Ministry of Culture and enforces the Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains Act, 1958, and the Antiquities and Art Treasures Act, 1972.
  • However, with over 3,700 protected monuments under its care, the ASI’s capacity constraints have often resulted in delays and maintenance backlogs.
  • Recognizing this challenge, the government has initiated a landmark policy shift to introduce public-private partnerships (PPP) in heritage conservation — marking a major reform in India’s cultural governance.

The Policy Shift

  • For the first time, the core conservation of protected monuments will no longer be ASI’s exclusive domain. Under the new model, private players, corporates, and public sector undertakings can directly fund and implement conservation projects under ASI’s supervision. This move seeks to expand capacity, accelerate timelines, and leverage private expertise, while retaining strict professional and regulatory oversight.
  • All projects will be monitored by the ASI and must comply with the National Policy for Conservation of Ancient Monuments, Archaeological Sites and Remains (2014). The initiative aims to balance modernization and preservation by fostering collaboration between government, industry, and civil society.

Institutional Framework and Implementation

  • The reforms will operate through the National Culture Fund (NCF), established in 1996 with an initial government corpus of ?20 crore.
      • The NCF enables donors to contribute directly to heritage projects and offers 100% CSR tax exemptions, incentivizing private participation.
  • To ensure professional standards, the Ministry of Culture will empanel conservation architects of national repute, who will guide donors in planning and executing projects. The Detailed Project Reports (DPRs) will require ASI approval before implementation.
  • Private donors, guided by these architects, can hire external implementing agencies experienced in restoring structures over 100 years old. Initially, a list of 250 monuments requiring urgent conservation will be released for donor selection.

Track Record of the National Culture Fund

Since its inception, the NCF has mobilized around ?140 crore in corporate and public donations, supporting over 100 conservation projects. Notable examples include:

  • Bhuleshwar Temple (Pune),
  • British Residency (Hyderabad),
  • Group of Monuments at Mandu,
  • Purana Qila and Red Fort site museums (New Delhi),
  • Ongoing work at Vikramshila (Bihar), Deobaloda (Chhattisgarh), and Singorgarh Fort (Madhya Pradesh).

Significance and Safeguards

  • The PPP model represents a shift from state monopoly to collaborative stewardship, ensuring accountability, transparency, and efficiency.
  • The ASI retains its supervisory authority, maintaining consistency with India’s constitutional framework, where heritage conservation falls under both Union and State jurisdictions, as outlined in the Seventh Schedule and Article 253.
  • Qualified conservation architects, empanelled through due diligence, will ensure technical integrity, while all financial contributions must pass through the NCF to prevent misuse. The government views this as a cautious, phased reform, initially assigning private players a supplementary role to test the model’s viability.

Comparison with Past Initiatives

Unlike the earlier ‘Adopt a Heritage’ scheme, which allowed corporates to develop tourist amenities such as cafes and restrooms as “monument mitras,” the current initiative extends to core conservation work. This marks a decisive evolution from heritage promotion to heritage preservation.

Conclusion

India’s new heritage management framework reflects a pragmatic blend of Aatmanirbhar Bharat, cultural preservation, and corporate participation. By integrating private sector efficiency with ASI’s institutional expertise, the model promises to make heritage conservation financially sustainable, technologically advanced, and socially participatory — ensuring that India’s timeless legacy endures through collective stewardship.

India’s Deep-Sea Mineral Exploration in the Indian Ocean

  • 05 Oct 2025

In News:

India has achieved a major milestone in deep-sea exploration by signing a new 15-year contract with the International Seabed Authority (ISA) for the exclusive exploration of Polymetallic Sulphides (PMS) in a 10,000 sq km area of the Carlsberg Ridge in the Indian Ocean.

With this agreement, India has become the first country in the world to hold two PMS exploration contracts, commanding the largest area allocated globally for such exploration. This advancement marks a blend of scientific progress, strategic foresight, and economic opportunity within India’s broader Blue Economy vision.

Polymetallic Sulphides and Their Significance

Polymetallic Sulphides are mineral-rich deposits found on the ocean floor, primarily near hydrothermal vents along mid-ocean ridges. Formed through interactions between seawater and magma beneath the Earth’s crust, they contain valuable metals such as copper, zinc, lead, gold, silver, and trace rare elements.

For India, these minerals are crucial for high-technology industries, renewable energy systems, and green technologies. Given the country’s limited terrestrial reserves, deep-sea exploration ensures resource security, supports the energy transition, and reduces import dependence on critical minerals.

India’s Deep Ocean Initiatives

India’s engagement with the ISA dates back over three decades. It was among the earliest countries to receive an area for polymetallic nodule exploration, earning the status of a “Pioneer Investor.” The first PMS exploration contract was signed in 2016 for the Central and Southwest Indian Ridges, and the latest agreement in 2025 extends exploration to the Carlsberg Ridge, located near 2°N latitude — significantly closer to India than the earlier sites.

The National Centre for Polar and Ocean Research (NCPOR) in Goa, under the Ministry of Earth Sciences (MoES), will begin exploration operations in 2026, employing geophysical, hydrographic, and near-seabed surveys.

These efforts are supported by the Deep Ocean Mission, launched by the Government of India to develop seabed mining technology, autonomous underwater vehicles (AUVs), and the Matsya submersible under the Samudrayaan Mission. This ecosystem strengthens India’s capacity for scientific research, environmental assessment, and mineral resource utilisation.

The Carlsberg Ridge: A Strategic and Scientific Hub

The Carlsberg Ridge is a part of the mid-ocean ridge system formed by the divergence of the Indian and Somali plates about 40 million years ago. With a spreading rate of 2.4–3.3 cm per year, it features hydrothermal vent systems ideal for PMS deposits. Its proximity to India enhances logistical feasibility and strategic relevance. The region’s exploration will expand understanding of deep-sea geology, marine ecosystems, and plate tectonics, while supporting India’s long-term maritime interests.

Exploration Challenges and Governance

PMS exploration is among the most technically demanding deep-sea missions, occurring at depths of 2,000–5,000 metres in rugged, volcanic terrains. It demands multidisciplinary collaboration across marine geology, geophysics, biology, and ocean engineering, supported by dynamic-positioning vessels, AUVs, and ROVs.

The ISA, functioning under the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS), regulates seabed exploration beyond national jurisdictions. Applications must meet rigorous standards of environmental protection, financial capability, and scientific planning before approval.

Future Prospects

Beyond PMS, India has applied for exploration rights over cobalt-rich ferromanganese crusts on the Afanasy-Nikitin Seamount in the Central Indian Ocean, aligning with its Blue Economy and resource security goals. Hosting the 8th ISA Annual Contractors’ Meeting in Goa underscores India’s growing leadership in global seabed research governance.

Conclusion

India’s twin PMS contracts with the ISA mark a historic milestone in ocean science, resource diplomacy, and sustainable technology development. By combining strategic exploration, indigenous innovation, and environmental stewardship, India is positioning itself at the forefront of responsible deep-sea resource management — a critical pillar of its vision for a self-reliant and resilient Blue Economy.

Corporate Average Fuel Efficiency (CAFE) 3 Norms

  • 03 Oct 2025

In News:

  • India has proposed the Corporate Average Fuel Efficiency (CAFE) 3 norms, drafted by the Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), aiming to tighten fuel efficiency standards, reduce vehicular emissions, and promote electric and alternative fuel vehicles.
  • First introduced in 2017, CAFE norms regulate fuel consumption and CO? emissions for passenger vehicles weighing up to 3,500 kg, including petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, hybrid, and electric vehicles.
  • The earlier iteration, CAFE 2 (2022-23), capped fuel consumption at 4.78 litres/100 km and CO? emissions at 113 g/km, with penalties for non-compliance.

Need for CAFE 3

Current Indian norms inadvertently favourheavier vehicles like SUVs while imposing stringent targets on smaller cars, unlike international practices in the USA, EU, China, and Japan, where light vehicles enjoy relaxed emission standards. CAFE 3 seeks to align India with global best practices, revive the small car segment, and incentivisegreen mobility, particularly electric vehicles (EVs) and hybrids.

Key Features of CAFE 3 Norms

1. Applicability

  • Targets M1 category passenger vehicles (seating up to nine people, maximum weight 3,500 kg).
  • Non-compliance will attract penalties under the Energy Conservation Act, 2001.

2. Efficiency Targets

  • Efficiency formula: [0.002 × (W – 1170) + c], measured in petrol-equivalent litres/100 km, where W is fleet weight, 1,170 kg is a fixed constant, 0.002 is a multiplier, and ‘c’ decreases yearly from 3.7264 (FY28) to 3.0139 (FY32).
  • Lighter vehicles benefit from easier compliance, motivating manufacturers to focus on small cars.
  • Additional relaxation: 3.0 g CO?/km (capped at 9 g/km) for compact cars (<909 kg, ≤1200 cc engine, ≤4,000 mm length).

3. Incentives for EVs and Alternative Fuels

  • Super credits: Each EV sold counts three times toward fleet compliance; plug-in hybrids 2.5×, strong hybrids 2×, flex-fuel ethanol vehicles 1.5×.
  • Carbon Neutrality Factor (CNF): Offers relaxation based on fuel type (e.g., E20–E30 petrol vehicles 8% CNF; strong hybrids 22.3%).

4. Emissions Pooling

  • Up to three manufacturers can form a pool, treated as a single entity for compliance.
  • Pool managers are legally responsible for penalties, allowing strategic partnerships, cost-sharing, and smoother adherence to targets.

Policy Complementarities

  • GST reforms (GST 2.0) reduced taxes on small cars from 28% to 18%, complementing the relaxation measures under CAFE 3.
  • By incentivisingEVs, hybrids, and small vehicles, the norms aim to reduce oil import dependency and advance India’s climate commitments under the Paris Agreement.

Challenges

  • Industry adaptation: Transitioning fleets to comply with stricter norms while managing costs.
  • Consumer acceptance: Affordability and infrastructure readiness for EVs and hybrids.
  • Infrastructure readiness: Charging and fuel infrastructure for alternative vehicles needs significant expansion.

Conclusion

CAFE 3 represents a transformative step in India’s vehicular emission regulation, combining fuel efficiency improvements, emission reductions, and green mobility incentives. By aligning with global practices, reviving the small car segment, and encouraging electric and hybrid vehicles, the norms have the potential to accelerate sustainable transportation while addressing environmental and energy security goals. Successful implementation will require coordinated action between manufacturers, policymakers, and consumers to build a cleaner, efficient, and resilient automotive sector in India.

Reimagining Green Economy through Landscapes

  • 02 Oct 2025

In News:

India stands at a critical juncture where the pursuit of economic growth must align with environmental sustainability. The transition to a green economy offers an opportunity to reshape the country’s development paradigm—one that integrates ecological balance, inclusive livelihoods, and technological innovation within a landscape-driven framework.

India’s Green Economy: Growth and Scope

India’s bioeconomy has expanded remarkably from $10 billion in 2014 to $165.7 billion in 2024, growing sixteenfold and accounting for 4.25% of the national GDP. This growth, driven by over 10,000 bio-based start-ups, spans biofuels, bioplastics, pharmaceuticals, and bioinformatics. The industrial bioeconomy contributes nearly half the sectoral share, while India’s achievements—such as 20% ethanol blending in petrol and becoming the third-largest pharmaceutical producer by volume—reflect the scale of progress.

A green economy, however, extends beyond bio-based industries. It encompasses low-carbon growth, circular resource use, ecosystem restoration, and inclusive employment. By 2030, it is estimated to create 35 million green jobs, strengthening India’s resilience against climate shocks and enhancing energy security under Aatmanirbhar Bharat.

Challenges in the Green Transition

Despite this momentum, India’s green growth exhibits deep regional and socio-economic disparities. Urban centers like Maharashtra, Karnataka, and Gujarat dominate green investments, while the North-Eastern and tribal states contribute less than 6% despite abundant natural resources. This spatial imbalance mirrors unequal access to clean energy, irrigation, and digital infrastructure.

Simultaneously, energy transition dilemmas persist. While renewables are expanding, fossil fuel subsidies—still around 40%—undermine emission reduction efforts. In agriculture, solar pump deployment risks groundwater depletion, highlighting the complexity of balancing environmental and livelihood goals. Hard-to-abate sectors such as steel, cement, and power, which contribute nearly 23% of GHG emissions, face prohibitive costs for green technologies—often four times higher than conventional alternatives.

Social inclusion remains another challenge. Women hold only 11% of rooftop solar jobs, and their share in technical green roles is as low as 1–3%. Similarly, tribal and marginalised communities remain passive beneficiaries rather than active stakeholders in climate action.

Reimagining the Green Economy through Landscapes

A landscape-based approach can make India’s green transition more inclusive and ecologically coherent. Landscapes represent interconnected systems of land, water, biodiversity, and human activity. Integrating these systems through participatory planning—from village to national level—can enhance ecosystem services such as air and water regulation, soil fertility, and climate moderation.

Institutionally, leveraging 2.5 lakh Panchayati Raj Institutions (PRIs) and 12 million women-led Self-Help Groups (SHGs) can embed community ownership into green initiatives. Promoting tribal-led bioeconomy models based on non-timber forest produce, agro-waste reuse, and medicinal flora can align conservation with livelihoods.

Technology and fiscal innovation must complement this vision—through green budgeting, public procurement of sustainable products, and expansion of 5G/6G labs for greening digital infrastructure. Decentralised waste management and circular economy practices are vital, especially as urban areas generate 75% of India’s solid waste.

Conclusion

India’s green transformation must evolve from a sectoral to a landscape-driven, community-based model that harmonises economic growth with ecological integrity. Empowering local institutions, mainstreaming gender, and integrating traditional knowledge with modern innovation will be crucial to achieving a just and resilient green future. By 2047, the goal should not merely be higher GDP, but ecological regeneration, social equity, and global climate leadership.

National Security Act (NSA)

  • 01 Oct 2025

Context:
The detention of climate activist Sonam Wangchuk under the National Security Act (NSA), 1980, has reignited a long-standing debate on the balance between national security and civil liberties in India. Wangchuk, who has been leading the movement for Ladakh’s statehood and Sixth Schedule protections, was detained following alleged provocative speeches that, according to the administration, triggered violent protests in Leh leading to four deaths and several injuries. His case illustrates the continuing tension between state power and individual freedoms under India’s preventive detention framework.

Understanding Preventive Detention in India

Preventive detention refers to the practice of detaining an individual not for a crime already committed, but to prevent them from acting in a manner considered prejudicial to public order, security, or essential supplies. Unlike punitive detention, which follows conviction through due process, preventive detention is anticipatory in nature—aimed at averting potential threats before they materialise.

The Constitutional sanction for preventive detention is provided under Article 22 (Clauses 3–7), which permits Parliament and State legislatures to enact laws allowing such detention. A person can be held for up to three months without approval from an Advisory Board of judges, and longer if such approval is obtained. However, detainees are denied the right to legal counsel before the Advisory Board, and authorities may withhold information on grounds of public interest—limiting transparency and accountability.

Evolution of Preventive Detention Laws

Preventive detention has deep colonial roots, beginning with wartime laws such as the Defence of India Acts and the Rowlatt Act (1919). Post-Independence, the Preventive Detention Act, 1950, institutionalised this power, followed by the Maintenance of Internal Security Act (MISA), 1971, which gained notoriety during the Emergency (1975–77). Although MISA was repealed in 1978, preventive detention returned with the National Security Act (NSA), 1980, reflecting the persistence of this legal mechanism in India’s security architecture.

Provisions and Safeguards under the NSA

The NSA empowers the Central and State governments, as well as authorisedDistrict Magistrates and Police Commissioners, to detain individuals to prevent actions “prejudicial to India’s defence, foreign relations, national security, public order, or essential supplies.”

  • Detention orders operate like arrest warrants, allowing transfer across states and detention up to 12 months.
  • Grounds for detention must be communicated within 5 to 15 days, and the detainee can submit a representation to the government.
  • An Advisory Board of High Court judges must review the case within three weeks and order release if “no sufficient cause” exists.

However, no legal representation is allowed before the Board, and the government may withhold crucial information—leaving wide discretion in official hands.

Use and Misuse: Judicial and Public Concerns

Over the decades, NSA has been used in cases involving separatists, radical preachers, gangsters, and protesters. Notable instances include the detention of Amritpal Singh (2023), Bhim Army chief Chandrashekhar Azad (2017), and Dr. Kafeel Khan (2020). Courts have repeatedly intervened in cases of misuse, emphasising that the Act cannot be a substitute for ordinary criminal law. The Supreme Court’s 2012 ruling striking down detention for kerosene black-marketing underscored this misuse.

Critics argue that preventive detention contradicts the spirit of fundamental rights under Articles 19, 21, and 22, allowing incarceration without trial and enabling governments to suppress dissent under the guise of maintaining order. Scholars contend that Article 22 itself legitimises preventive detention, reflecting what Erich Fromm described as a “fear of freedom”—a societal tendency to trade liberty for perceived security.

Conclusion

The National Security Act remains one of India’s most powerful yet controversial laws. While it provides governments with a vital tool to prevent threats to national security and public order, its frequent and often arbitrary invocation erodes constitutional guarantees of liberty and due process.
The detention of Sonam Wangchuk serves as a stark reminder that preventive detention laws, though constitutionally sanctioned, sit uneasily within a democratic framework. India’s challenge lies in ensuring that security imperatives do not eclipse fundamental freedoms, reaffirming the Constitution’s promise of liberty, justice, and accountability.

Inflation: A Double-Edged Sword for Economic Growth and Fiscal Stability

  • 30 Sep 2025

In News:

Inflation, the sustained rise in general price levels, remains one of the most debated macroeconomic phenomena. While high inflation erodes purchasing power and destabilizes economies, moderate and predictable inflation is often considered essential for sustained growth and fiscal stability. Its impact, however, varies depending on the broader economic context and the balance between price stability and growth objectives.

Understanding Inflation and Its Role

Economists typically define inflation as a result of “too much money chasing too few goods.” Moderate inflation signals expanding demand and healthy economic activity, while very high or negative inflation (deflation) indicates structural imbalances. Central banks, such as the U.S. Federal Reserve and the Reserve Bank of India (RBI), usually target a low but positive inflation rate — around 2% — to maintain price stability and incentivize investment.

Mild inflation helps prevent deflation, which discourages spending and investment as consumers postpone purchases in anticipation of falling prices. The British economist John Maynard Keynes argued that a small amount of inflation encourages consumption, supports employment, and sustains aggregate demand. This aligns with the concept of the Phillips Curve, which once suggested a trade-off between inflation and unemployment, though the relationship has weakened in recent decades.

Economic Benefits of Moderate Inflation

A modest level of inflation can stimulate economic activity when idle capacity and underutilized labor exist. Rising prices encourage producers to expand output, generating more employment and income. Borrowers, including businesses and households, also benefit since debts can be repaid with “cheaper” money, thus encouraging borrowing and spending. Fixed-rate homeowners and long-term debtors gain, as the real value of their obligations declines over time.

For governments, inflation contributes positively to nominal GDP growth, the key denominator in fiscal ratios such as the debt-to-GDP ratio and fiscal deficit. Higher nominal GDP, driven partly by price growth, increases tax collections and helps meet revenue and deficit targets. Hence, inflation, within manageable limits, supports both macroeconomic stability and fiscal sustainability.

Challenges of High or Low Inflation

Excessive inflation, however, leads to declining real incomes, uncertainty, and reduced investment. Rising input and borrowing costs can trigger stagflation — a combination of stagnant growth and high inflation. On the other hand, very low inflation, as seen in India recently with CPI inflation at 2.07% (August 2025) and WPI at 0.52%, presents a different set of challenges.

While subdued prices benefit consumers, they constrain the government’s fiscal arithmetic. Lower inflation suppresses nominal GDP growth — the sum of real growth and inflation — reducing tax revenue growth and widening fiscal gaps. The Union Budget 2025–26 projected nominal GDP growth at 10.1%, but with low price levels, actual growth has trailed this target, weakening revenue collection and straining fiscal balances.

Moreover, persistently low inflation can reflect weak demand and investment sentiment. Although corporate profits have risen due to falling input costs, private capital expenditure remains sluggish, suggesting that firms are not reinvesting profits into productive capacity — a sign of demand-side weakness rather than efficiency gains.

Conclusion

Inflation’s impact on an economy depends on its source, magnitude, and persistence. Moderate inflation supports economic dynamism, government finances, and debt sustainability. However, extremes on either side — hyperinflation or deflation — can destabilize the macroeconomic framework. For India, the policy challenge lies in maintaining a delicate balance: ensuring that inflation stays within the target range to protect consumers while sustaining enough price growth to support investment, job creation, and fiscal health.

Fixing Timelines for Governors

  • 29 Sep 2025

In News:

The Supreme Court of India is currently examining a Presidential reference on whether fixed timelines can be prescribed for Governors and the President in giving assent to Bills passed by State legislatures. The reference arises from growing concerns over delays in assent, which have triggered debates about the balance of power, federalism, and accountability within India’s constitutional framework.

Constitutional Provisions

Under Article 200 of the Constitution, when a Bill is passed by a State legislature, it is presented to the Governor for assent. The Governor may:

  1. Grant assent.
  2. Withhold assent.
  3. Reserve the Bill for the President’s consideration.
  4. Return the Bill (if not a Money Bill) with a message for reconsideration.

If the legislature passes the Bill again, the Governor is constitutionally obliged to grant assent. Article 201 governs the President’s assent to Bills reserved by Governors. Notably, neither Article prescribes a timeframe for decision-making, allowing for indefinite delays, which some States view as a de facto pocket veto.

The Current Debate

States such as Tamil Nadu, Kerala, Punjab, and Telangana have raised complaints about Governors withholding or delaying assent, often stalling critical legislative reforms. The Supreme Court is tasked with determining whether judicially enforceable timelines can be set to prevent such inaction, while ensuring the Governor’s discretion is respected.

Proponents argue that indefinite delays undermine parliamentary democracy and the functioning of elected governments. Critics caution that imposing strict timelines could limit constitutional discretion and upset the delicate Centre-State balance. The Union government has maintained that Governors operate within their constitutional mandate and that delays may result from the need for scrutiny or consultation with the Centre.

Judicial Precedents

Earlier rulings, including Shamsher Singh v. State of Punjab (1974) and NabamRebia v. Deputy Speaker (2016), emphasized that Governors are generally bound by the aid and advice of the Council of Ministers, except in exceptional circumstances. The current reference under Article 143 seeks to clarify whether inaction can be constitutionally limited through prescribed timelines, ensuring accountability without undermining constitutional checks.

Implications for Federalism

  1. Strengthening Legislative Authority: Time-bound assent would reinforce the role of elected State legislatures, reducing the scope for executive interference.
  2. Preventing Political Deadlocks: Clear timelines could mitigate friction between Governors and State governments, facilitating smoother legislative functioning.
  3. Judicial Oversight: The Supreme Court’s intervention could clarify constitutional ambiguities affecting Centre-State relations, setting a precedent for other offices where delays impact governance.
  4. Balancing Discretion and Accountability: A measured approach could preserve the Governor’s discretionary powers while ensuring responsiveness to elected governments.

Conclusion

The question of whether timelines can be fixed for Governors and the President is more than a procedural issue—it reflects the tensions inherent in India’s federal design. Governors are intended as neutral constitutional authorities, yet their actions are often perceived through the prism of partisan politics. By addressing this grey area, the Supreme Court has an opportunity to redefine Centre-State dynamics, strengthen legislative authority, and enhance accountability within India’s parliamentary democracy. The ruling will have far-reaching implications for federal governance, political neutrality, and the balance of power in the legislative process.

Artificial Intelligence and India’s Global Race

  • 28 Sep 2025

In News:

Artificial Intelligence (AI) is reshaping the global technological and economic order, influencing sectors from healthcare to defence. For India, AI represents both a transformative development tool and a strategic domain crucial for economic competitiveness and national security.

India’s Position in the Global AI Landscape

India has entered the AI race with significant momentum, backed by a vast digital ecosystem and growing policy support. The government’s India AI Mission, with an outlay of ?10,372 crore, seeks to enhance AI infrastructure, computing power, and research capacity. With over one billion smartphone users and 20 billion monthly UPI transactions, India offers a data-rich environment that can power AI development at scale.

However, compared to the United States ($20 billion) and China ($30 billion) in AI investments during 2024, India’s funding remains modest. While India boasts a talent base of over 18 million software professionals and has integrated AI into school curricula, it still lags in advanced research output and patent generation.

Opportunities for India’s Development

AI holds immense potential to drive India’s socio-economic transformation:

  • Healthcare: AI-assisted diagnostics and predictive models can enhance early disease detection, telemedicine outreach, and epidemic forecasting.
  • Education: Initiatives like the Bhashini Project enable real-time language translation, improving accessibility and inclusivity in classrooms and governance.
  • Agriculture: AI-driven precision farming and weather-based advisories can help small farmers optimise productivity and manage climate risks.
  • Finance: Tools such as “Hello UPI” and AI-based fraud detection can deepen rural financial inclusion and strengthen digital security.
  • Disaster Management: States like Odisha employ AI in cyclone prediction and geospatial mapping, showcasing AI’s role in saving lives and resources.

Together, these applications align with India’s broader developmental goals of inclusion, sustainability, and resilience.

Challenges in India’s AI Ecosystem

Despite its promise, India faces structural and institutional constraints:

  • Infrastructure Deficit: Limited access to high-end GPUs and slow expansion of data centres constrain computational capacity.
  • R&D Weakness: India contributes barely 1.4% of global AI research papers and produces less than 2% of global AI PhDs, reflecting a shallow innovation base.
  • Regulatory Lag: The outdated IT Act (2000) continues to govern digital activities, lacking provisions for algorithmic transparency, accountability, and data ethics.
  • Talent Gap: The focus on short-term certification courses produces surface-level skills rather than deep AI expertise.
  • Geopolitical Pressure: The US, EU, and China lead in developing Large Language Models (LLMs), while India risks remaining a consumer market rather than a producer of foundational AI technologies.

Way Forward

A robust AI ecosystem requires a multi-dimensional approach:

  • Strengthen Research and Innovation: Enhance public funding for fundamental AI research and incentivise private R&D.
  • Human Capital Development: Expand AI training beyond elite institutions and develop teacher capacity for advanced AI pedagogy.
  • Regulatory Reforms: Enact a Digital India Act and an AI-specific ethical charter inspired by the EU AI Act, ensuring safety without stifling innovation.
  • Public–Private Collaboration: Establish AI innovation hubs focused on healthcare, agriculture, and sustainability.
  • Global Partnerships: Engage with international initiatives and leverage India’s leadership in G20 and BRICS to promote responsible AI governance.

Conclusion

India’s AI trajectory stands at a decisive juncture. With its digital depth, demographic advantage, and policy intent, the country can harness AI to drive inclusive growth and global leadership. Yet, without addressing gaps in research, regulation, and ethics, India risks being a user rather than a creator in the AI revolution. Balancing innovation with responsibility will determine whether India can truly emerge as a leading power in the AI-driven century.

River Pollution in India

  • 27 Sep 2025

In News:

Rivers are the lifelines of India, sustaining agriculture, industry, and millions of livelihoods. Yet, rapid urbanisation, untreated sewage, industrial effluents, and agricultural runoff have severely degraded many river ecosystems. According to the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), river pollution remains a critical environmental and public health challenge.

Status of River Pollution

The CPCB’s 2023 assessment indicates a marginal reduction in polluted river stretches. Out of 271 rivers across 32 states and Union Territories, 296 stretches were identified as polluted, down from 311 in the previous assessment. Maharashtra continues to report the highest number of polluted stretches (54), followed by Kerala (31), Madhya Pradesh and Manipur (18 each), and Karnataka (14).

 

Polluted stretches are defined as two or more consecutive locations where the biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) exceeds 3 mg/L, rendering water unfit for bathing. BOD measures the oxygen consumed by microorganisms in decomposing organic matter, serving as a key indicator of organic pollution. The CPCB classifies polluted stretches into five priority categories, with Priority I (BOD >30 mg/L) representing the most contaminated stretches requiring urgent remediation. Currently, 37 stretches fall under Priority I, including the Yamuna (Delhi), Sabarmati (Ahmedabad), Chambal (Madhya Pradesh), and Tungabhadra (Karnataka).

 

However, despite marginal improvements, certain rivers have recorded deterioration in water quality. Notable examples include the Jhelum (J&K), Ganga and Sikrahna (Bihar), Hasdeo and Mahanadi (Chhattisgarh), Cauvery and Tungabhadra (Karnataka), Periyar (Kerala), and Krishna (Telangana).

Major Causes

  • Untreated Sewage: Urban centres generate over 72,000 million litres/day (MLD) of sewage, with only 30% treated.
  • Industrial Effluents: Chemical, textile, and other industrial hubs discharge toxic waste despite regulatory frameworks.
  • Agricultural Runoff: Fertilisers and pesticides enter rivers during monsoons, affecting aquatic ecosystems.
  • Encroachments and Sand Mining: These activities degrade riverbeds and floodplains, compounding pollution impacts.

Impacts

Polluted rivers compromise aquatic biodiversity, pose health risks via waterborne diseases, and lead to economic losses in fisheries and agriculture. Social unrest, as seen along the Yamuna and Ganga, underscores the public concern over deteriorating river health.

Institutional Interventions

In 2018, the National Green Tribunal (NGT) mandated states and the Centre to prepare river rejuvenation action plans. The CPCB, in collaboration with State Pollution Control Boards, monitors water quality at over 2,155 locations on 645 rivers under the National Water Quality Monitoring Programme. Recommended measures include catchment and basin management, floodplain protection, and sewage treatment.

While initiatives such as the Namami Gange Mission, Jal Jeevan Mission, and promotion of decentralised sewage treatment plants show progress, persistent infrastructure gaps, coordination failures, and urbanisation pressures remain major challenges.

Way Forward

Sustainable river rejuvenation requires holistic approaches—strengthening sewage treatment, enforcing industrial compliance, controlling agricultural runoff, and fostering community participation. Integrating scientific monitoring with participatory governance can help restore rivers as ecological lifelines while ensuring water security, public health, and environmental sustainability.

H-1B Visa Overhaul and Its Implications for India–US Tech Relations

  • 26 Sep 2025

In News:

The United States government has announced a sweeping change to its H-1B visa programme, introducing a $100,000 annual entry fee per visa effective September 21, 2025. Framed as a measure to protect American workers, this move has significant geopolitical and economic implications, particularly for India, whose citizens constitute over 70% of all H-1B beneficiaries annually.

What the New Rule Entails

Under the new proclamation signed by President Donald Trump, no petition filed for an H-1B worker outside the US will be approved unless the sponsoring employer pays the $100,000 fee upfront. Applications without proof of payment will be denied at consular processing. The rule applies to new entrants or those seeking re-entry after travel, though workers already in the US on valid H-1B status are exempt.

The order, valid for 12 months with scope for review, also directs the Department of Labor to raise wage levels for H-1B jobs and asks the Department of Homeland Security (DHS) to prioritise petitions offering higher salaries. A discretionary clause empowers DHS to waive the fee for specific individuals, companies, or entire industries if deemed in the “national interest.” However, the proclamation does not define which sectors qualify—though healthcare, defence, and critical technology are likely candidates.

Rationale and Political Context

Immigration has become a central and polarising issue in US politics. Public concern on immigration rose from 2.1% in 2012 to 14.6% in 2024 as a top voter priority. Trump’s political narrative has long linked immigration—both low-skilled and skilled—to job displacement and wage depression among the American working class. The H-1B programme, originally designed to attract top global talent in STEM (Science, Technology, Engineering, and Mathematics) fields, is now portrayed by nativist factions as a vehicle for outsourcing and wage suppression.

Data from the US Citizenship and Immigration Services (USCIS) indicate that nearly 70% of H-1B approvals for Indian workers in FY2023 were for salaries below $100,000, while the median US IT salary was $104,420.

Economic and Industrial Impact

The fee fundamentally alters the cost structure of hiring global talent. The new surcharge, in addition to existing statutory fees, transforms the H-1B from a skill-mobility programme into a premium channel accessible mainly to top-tier corporations or sectors granted exemptions.

Big Tech firms such as Amazon, Microsoft, Meta, Google, and Apple—already the largest H-1B sponsors—face millions in additional costs. Indian IT service giants like Infosys, TCS, Wipro, and HCL, who rely on the visa for onsite client delivery, are particularly vulnerable. The policy may push more work to offshore hubs in Bengaluru, Hyderabad, and Pune, reinforcing India’s role as a global back-office and development centre rather than an onsite service provider.

Startups, universities, and research labs, often operating on tight budgets, may scale back recruitment or face disruption to innovation and research projects if waivers are not granted.

Implications for India

For India, this measure could limit opportunities for young professionals transitioning from student visas (OPT) to H-1Bs, while families already in the US may face travel restrictions and uncertainty. However, it may also spur reshoring of tech investment to India, as multinational firms expand local operations to mitigate costs.

Conclusion

The $100,000 H-1B fee marks a decisive shift in US immigration policy—from selective reform to fiscal deterrence. While it may serve short-term political optics of job protectionism, it risks undermining America’s long-standing advantage in global innovation. For India, the challenge lies in turning this disruption into opportunity—by strengthening domestic tech ecosystems, skilling talent, and positioning itself as a preferred global innovation hub amid shifting international labour dynamics.

State Finances publication 2025 by CAG

  • 25 Sep 2025

In News:

The Comptroller and Auditor General (CAG) of India released the State Finances Publication 2025, providing a comprehensive assessment of revenue, expenditure, debt, and fiscal sustainability across India’s 28 states. The report highlights critical trends in committed expenditure, salary and subsidy bills, and public debt, offering insights for policy planning and fiscal management.

Salary and Subsidy Expenditure

  • Over the last decade (2013-14 to 2022-23), states’ salary bills have grown 2.5 times, reaching ?16.6 lakh crore, forming the largest component of committed expenditure.
  • Subsidy spending, defined as day-to-day operations that do not create or enhance assets, more than trebled to ?3.09 lakh crore, accounting for 8.61% of total revenue expenditure.
  • The distribution of subsidy expenditure is highly uneven. In 2022-23, Punjab, Gujarat, Andhra Pradesh, and Rajasthan spent over 10% of their total expenditure on subsidies, with Punjab at 17%, the highest among states. By contrast, 10 states, including Sikkim, Nagaland, Kerala, and Goa, reported subsidies below 2%, and Arunachal Pradesh recorded no subsidy spending.

Committed Expenditure Patterns

Committed expenditure, comprising salaries, pensions, and interest payments, constituted 43.49% of states’ revenue expenditure in FY 2022-23. The share varied widely across states:

  • Nagaland: 74%
  • Kerala: 63%
  • Tamil Nadu: 51%
  • Andhra Pradesh: 42%
  • Telangana: 41%
  • Karnataka: 33%
  • Maharashtra: 32%

In total, 15 states reported committed expenditure exceeding 50% of revenue expenditure, seven between 40–50%, and six below 40%. The report indicates that committed expenditure and subsidies together have frequently exceeded states’ own tax revenues, reaching 102% in 2013-14 and 134% in 2020-21, signaling fiscal pressure and limited flexibility.

Public Debt and Fiscal Risk

Public debt has risen 3.4 times over the last decade, reaching ?59.6 lakh crore, approximately 23% of the combined Gross State Domestic Product (GSDP). This increase in debt, coupled with rising committed expenditure, poses medium-term fiscal risks, necessitating prudent fiscal management and reforms.

Union Tax Devolution and Revenue Sources

States’ major revenue sources include own taxes and non-tax revenues, grants-in-aid, and their share of Union taxes. Between 2013-14 and 2022-23, states’ average share of Union taxes remained around 27% of total revenue receipts, with FY 2022-23 showing the same share.

Distribution of devolved taxes is concentrated:

  • Top 5 states (UP, Bihar, MP, West Bengal, Maharashtra) received 50% of devolved taxes.
  • Southern states’ shares: Tamil Nadu 4.08%, Andhra Pradesh 4.02%, Karnataka 3.65%, Telangana 2.07%, and Kerala 1.93%.

Policy Implications

The CAG report underscores the rising fiscal pressures on states due to expanding salary bills, high subsidies, and growing debt. With committed expenditure consuming a large portion of revenue, states have limited fiscal space for development and capital investment. The findings highlight the need for targeted reforms in public expenditure management, subsidy rationalisation, and debt sustainability, ensuring that states can maintain service delivery without compromising fiscal health.

Mana Mitra: Andhra Pradesh’s WhatsApp Governance Model

  • 24 Sep 2025

In News:

  • The Central Government, through the Department of Administrative Reforms and Public Grievances (DARPG), has decided to study and replicate Andhra Pradesh’s “WhatsApp Governance Model”, recognized as a national best practice in e-governance.
  • The announcement came during the 28th National Conference on e-Governance 2025, held in Visakhapatnam on the theme “Viksit Bharat: Civil Service and Digital Transformation.”

About Mana Mitra

  • Mana Mitra, launched by the Andhra Pradesh government in January 2025, is India’s first WhatsApp-based governance platform.
  • It integrates 36 departments and provides 738 citizen services through a single WhatsApp number — 9552300009 — ensuring accessibility, efficiency, and transparency in public service delivery.

Objectives

  • Ease of Access: Deliver services through WhatsApp, a widely used platform, reducing citizens’ dependence on physical offices.
  • Transparency & Trust: Digital certificates are issued with QR-coded verification, minimizing fraud and fake documentation.
  • Inclusivity: Brings governance to the mobile phones of rural and remote citizens, fostering last-mile digital inclusion.

How It Works

  • Single-Number Access: Citizens initiate a chat by sending “Hi” on WhatsApp.
  • Menu-Driven Services: A chatbot guides users through departments and available services—education, revenue, endowments, RTC, tourism, and health.
  • Instant Document Delivery: Documents such as income and caste certificates, hall tickets, and tax receipts are generated digitally with verifiable QR codes.
  • Real-Time Dashboard: Tracks service delivery, ensuring accountability and performance monitoring.
  • Next-Gen Tech Integration: Future phases will use AI chatbots, voice-based assistance, and blockchain authentication for secure transactions.

Key Features

  • Wide Coverage: 738 services across 36 departments.
  • Security: Built-in encryption and QR verification to prevent misuse.
  • Partnership with Meta: Ensures robust backend infrastructure and global-grade security.
  • Scalability: Phase-II aims to include AI, voice, and real-time grievance redressal systems.

Significance and Impacts

  • Citizen-Centric Governance: Empowers citizens by providing services at their fingertips, in line with the vision of Minimum Government, Maximum Governance.
  • Administrative Efficiency: Reduces paperwork, manual processing, and delays through automation.
  • Cost and Time Savings: Citizens save travel and administrative costs; departments save on manpower and logistics.
  • Digital Inclusion: Leverages WhatsApp’s nearly 500 million Indian users, ensuring access even in areas with limited digital literacy.
  • Model for Replication: DARPG recognized it as a national model to be documented and replicated across all states.

Challenges

  • Digital Divide: Connectivity issues in remote and tribal regions can hinder equitable access.
  • Cybersecurity Threats: Phishing, fake accounts, or data breaches must be prevented through strong encryption and verification systems.
  • Capacity Building: Frontline staff need training for effective digital grievance handling.
  • Data Privacy: Must comply with the Digital Personal Data Protection Act (DPDPA) 2023.
  • Scalability and Reliability: Systems must withstand heavy user loads without technical failures.

Way Forward

  • AI & Voice Integration: Enable predictive service delivery and multilingual assistance.
  • Strengthen Cybersecurity: Introduce two-factor authentication and blockchain-based certification.
  • Enhance Digital Literacy: Awareness campaigns targeting rural, elderly, and marginalized populations.
  • Institutionalization: Provide legislative backing to make WhatsApp governance legally accountable.
  • Nationwide Replication: Integrate with platforms like DigiLocker, UPI, and CoWIN to create a unified digital service ecosystem.

The 28th National Conference on e-Governance 2025

  • Venue: Visakhapatnam, Andhra Pradesh.
  • Organizers: DARPG and the Ministry of Electronics & IT in collaboration with the AP Government.
  • Theme:Viksit Bharat: Civil Service and Digital Transformation.
  • Participants: Delegates from 28 States and 8 Union Territories, including 70 speakers.
  • Focus Areas:
    • AI for Viksit Bharat: Driving inclusive and scalable solutions.
    • Cybersecurity and digital sovereignty in e-governance.
    • Gram Panchayat-level innovations and agri-stack development.
    • Role of subsea cables and AI data centers in digital infrastructure.

Conclusion

Mana Mitra represents a transformative step in India’s digital governance journey, bridging citizens and the state through a simple yet powerful medium — WhatsApp. By ensuring transparency, efficiency, and inclusivity, it exemplifies how technology can democratize governance. If successfully replicated nationwide, this model could become a cornerstone of Viksit Bharat 2047, bringing governance truly “to the people’s fingertips.”

Rising State Debt in India: CAG’s Decadal Analysis and Fiscal Implications

  • 22 Sep 2025

In News:

The Comptroller and Auditor General (CAG) of India has released a first-of-its-kind decadal report (2013–14 to 2022–23) analysing the fiscal health of Indian states, highlighting a worrying surge in public debt and its implications for fiscal sustainability and cooperative federalism.

Understanding Public Debt

  • Public debt arises when government expenditure exceeds revenue from taxes and other receipts, prompting borrowing to bridge the fiscal gap. For states, such debt includes liabilities under the Consolidated Fund of the State, comprising internal debt and loans and advances from the Centre.
  • Internal debt consists of marketable securities like government bonds and treasury bills, and non-marketable debt such as loans from financial institutions like LIC and NABARD or the Reserve Bank’s Ways and Means Advances (WMA).
  • The Debt-to-GSDP ratio is a key indicator of fiscal sustainability, reflecting a state’s capacity to service its debt. A higher ratio implies greater fiscal stress.
  • The NK Singh Committee on FRBM (2016) recommended a combined general government debt ceiling of 60% of GDP — 40% for the Centre and 20% for states.

Key Findings of the CAG Report

  • The CAG report reveals that the aggregate public debt of 28 states trebled over the past decade — from ?17.57 lakh crore in 2013–14 to ?59.60 lakh crore in 2022–23.
  • As a share of combined GSDP, debt rose from 16.66% to 22.96%, with state debt accounting for 22.17% of India’s GDP in FY 2022–23.

Inter-State Variations

Fiscal vulnerability varies widely:

  • Highest debt-to-GSDP ratios: Punjab (40.35%), Nagaland (37.15%), and West Bengal (33.70%).
  • Lowest ratios: Odisha (8.45%), Maharashtra (14.64%), and Gujarat (16.37%).
    As of March 2023, eight states had debt exceeding 30% of GSDP, while six states maintained it below 20%.

Debt Sustainability and Composition

  • The states’ debt-to-revenue receipts ratio ranged from 128% (2014–15) to 191% (2020–21), averaging about 150% of total receipts.
  • The debt-to-GSDP ratio oscillated between 17–25%, with a sharp rise during the COVID-19 pandemic year (2020–21) due to falling GSDP and increased borrowing for relief and GST compensation.
  • Major sources of debt include open market borrowings, RBI advances, institutional loans, and back-to-back loans from the Centre in lieu of GST shortfall and capital assistance.

Fiscal Management Concerns

  • The report flags a violation of the “golden rule of borrowing”, which stipulates that governments should borrow only for capital formation, not to finance revenue expenditure.
  • Eleven states, including Andhra Pradesh, Punjab, Kerala, and West Bengal, used borrowings to fund current expenses.
  • In Andhra Pradesh, only 17% of borrowings went to capital expenditure; in Punjab, 26%.

Such practices threaten fiscal sustainability, crowd out productive investments, and risk pushing states into a debt trap, thereby undermining macroeconomic stability.

Way Forward

  • Fiscal Discipline: States must prioritise borrowing for productive infrastructure and avoid financing recurring expenditure.
  • Debt Management Reforms:Operationalising the Public Debt Management Agency (PDMA) could ensure transparency and better coordination in debt operations.
  • Revenue Strengthening: Enhancing tax buoyancy, rationalising subsidies, and diversifying revenue bases can reduce dependence on central transfers.
  • Adherence to FRBM Targets: States should align fiscal deficit and debt ratios with FRBM norms to ensure long-term sustainability.
  • Institutional Oversight: Strengthening State Finance Commissions and CAG monitoring can promote accountable and sustainable fiscal federalism.

Conclusion

The surge in state-level debt underscores the growing strain on subnational fiscal capacity. While borrowing is essential for development, unchecked debt accumulation and non-productive spending threaten fiscal stability. Ensuring fiscal prudence, efficient debt management, and adherence to reform frameworks like FRBM are vital to preserving India’s long-term macroeconomic resilience and cooperative federal balance.

WAVES Bazaar 2.0

  • 21 Sep 2025

In News:

India’s media and entertainment (M&E) industry is experiencing rapid digital transformation, fueled by rising global collaborations and the growing influence of independent creators. To channel this momentum and establish India as a global content hub, the Ministry of Information and Broadcasting (I&B) launched WAVES Bazaar in January 2025—a first-of-its-kind hybrid content marketplace that connects creators, investors, and distributors across various media segments.

Now entering its second phase, WAVES Bazaar is expanding with AI-driven matchmaking, online pitching sessions, and secure viewing rooms—initiatives aimed at strengthening India’s creative ecosystem and democratizing access for new talent.

About WAVES Bazaar

WAVES Bazaar serves as a digital platform bringing together diverse stakeholders from films, television, animation, gaming, music, radio, advertising, and podcasts. It allows creators to network, pitch ideas, and collaborate with OTT platforms, production houses, distributors, and financiers.

Key Features of the Second Phase

  • Online Pitching and Viewing Rooms:Budding creators will now be able to pitch directly to production houses, OTT platforms, and investors through virtual sessions. The addition of secure online viewing rooms will allow content buyers to preview projects safely, ensuring transparency and intellectual property protection.
  • AI-Driven Matchmaking and Profiling:Artificial Intelligence will enhance the platform’s efficiency by recommending suitable collaborators—such as financiers, distributors, or genre-specific buyers—based on project details. The system will also support automated profile building, pitch deck creation, and project scoring, guiding creators to improve their market visibility.
  • Skill Development and Knowledge Hub:The second phase introduces a knowledge ecosystem comprising webinars and masterclasses by industry experts. These sessions aim to bridge the knowledge gap for emerging creators and provide mentorship on project development, financing, and global trends.
  • Global Outreach and Co-Production Opportunities:WAVES Bazaar will expand its international footprint through delegations and participation in global festivals. It also seeks to strengthen co-production treaties with partner countries, promoting cross-border collaboration and investment in India’s creative sectors.

Significance for India’s Creative Economy

The initiative aligns with India’s ambition to become a global content hub by enabling equal opportunities for small and independent creators. It aims to diversify creative exports beyond films into music, gaming, animation, podcasts, and short-form content, while also enhancing India’s soft power and digital cultural economy.

By integrating technology, mentorship, and market access, WAVES Bazaar could emerge as the central gateway for Indian creative exports, fostering innovation and sustainable growth in the sector.

Challenges and Way Forward

While the portal’s potential is immense, its success will depend on addressing data security, ensuring inclusive access for regional creators, and maintaining long-term international partnerships. If implemented effectively, WAVES Bazaar 2.0 can position India as a leading creative powerhouse, bridging the gap between talent and opportunity in the global digital age.

Rising Extreme Rainfall in the Himalayas

  • 20 Sep 2025

In News:

The 2025 monsoon season has witnessed intense and destructive rainfall across North India, particularly in the Himalayan states of Uttarakhand, Himachal Pradesh, and Jammu & Kashmir. Cloudbursts, landslides, and flash floods have resulted in widespread devastation, exposing the growing vulnerability of India’s mountain ecosystems and urban regions. The intensification of monsoon rainfall can be traced to the complex interplay of global climate change, regional topography, and anthropogenic factors such as urbanisation and deforestation.

Scientific Basis of Intensified Rainfall

Dry regions like northwestern India lie at the confluence of tropical and extratropical systems. Moist monsoon currents from the Bay of Bengal and Arabian Sea increasingly collide with western disturbances, producing strong atmospheric instability and torrential rainfall. This interaction has become more frequent as climate change alters the behaviour of mid-latitude westerlies.

Global warming weakens and destabilises the jet stream, allowing westerly troughs to extend southward and interact with the monsoon more often. A warmer atmosphere holds more moisture, intensifying the hydrological cycle and leading to heavier downpours. These processes have made events like the recent Udhampur (630 mm in 24 hours) and Leh (59 mm in two days) rainfall episodes more common, even in regions historically considered semi-arid.

Why the Himalayas Are More Vulnerable

The Himalayas sit at the convergence of moist tropical monsoon winds and mid-latitude westerlies, creating ideal conditions for orographic uplift and deep convection that trigger extreme precipitation and cloudbursts. When moisture-laden air is forced up steep slopes, it cools rapidly and condenses into intense, localised storms.

Climate change compounds this natural vulnerability. Rapid Arctic warming is weakening the jet stream, causing slower and more meandering weather systems that linger over regions, leading to prolonged heavy rainfall. Similar dynamics have been linked to the Pakistan floods (2010), Germany (2021), and West Asia (2024) events.

In mountainous terrain, rainfall that would be manageable in coastal plains becomes catastrophic — flash floods and landslides occur as water cascades downhill, carrying debris, loose soil, and boulders. Over the last month, such incidents have been recorded in Mandi, Kullu, Dharali, Tharali, and Jammu, destroying homes and cutting off roads.

Challenges in Prediction and Preparedness

Despite technological advances, forecasting cloudbursts remains challenging. Current systems employ Doppler Weather Radars (DWRs), satellites (INSAT-3D/3DR, GPM, Himawari), rain gauges, and high-resolution numerical weather prediction (NWP) models. However, coverage in Himalayan terrain is sparse, satellite resolution is coarse, and models require ultra-fine grid scales (<1 km) with precise initial conditions.

Improved dense observation networks, enhanced process-based models, and integration of AI/ML techniques for real-time data assimilation are critical for reliable nowcasting.

Urban and Developmental Pressures

Rapid urbanisation, deforestation, and construction on unstable slopes have magnified the flood risks in both mountain towns and plains cities. Urban drainage systems, designed for rainfall of only 10–20 mm/hour, are ill-equipped for cloudbursts exceeding 100 mm/hour. Concretised surfaces increase runoff, while encroachments block natural drainage, turning heavy rain into urban deluges.

Mitigation demands a multi-pronged approach—redesigning stormwater systems, enforcing land-use regulations, restoring natural water channels, and incorporating climate risk assessments in infrastructure planning.

Conclusion

The increasing frequency of extreme rainfall and cloudbursts in India’s Himalayan and urban regions reflects the intersection of climate dynamics, fragile topography, and unsustainable development. Strengthening early warning systems, integrating scientific forecasting with local planning, and promoting climate-resilient infrastructure are essential to mitigate future disasters. The Himalayan crisis underscores a broader reality—climate change is no longer a distant threat but an unfolding challenge demanding immediate, coordinated action.

SEBI Announces Major Market Reforms to Enhance Investment and Governance

  • 18 Sep 2025

In News:

The Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI) recently announced a set of comprehensive reforms aimed at improving foreign investment inflows, easing IPO norms for large issuers, strengthening governance in market infrastructure institutions (MIIs), and promoting financial inclusion. These reforms are introduced amid heightened global uncertainty, with foreign portfolio investors (FPIs) withdrawing over ?63,500 crore from Indian markets since July 2025 due to weak earnings, high valuations, and international trade tensions.

SWAGAT-FI: Single Window Access for Foreign Investors

A cornerstone of SEBI’s reforms is the Single Window Automatic &Generalised Access for Trusted Foreign Investors (SWAGAT-FI) framework, designed to simplify investment access for FPIs and Foreign Venture Capital Investors (FVCIs).

Eligibility and Scope:

  • Sovereign wealth funds, central banks, regulated public retail funds (mutual funds, insurance companies, pension funds).
  • Existing FPIs meeting criteria can migrate to SWAGAT-FI status.

Features:

  • Unified registration and KYC cycle, reducing repeated compliance.
  • Exemption from the 50% cap on contributions by NRIs, OCIs, and resident Indians.
  • Simplified access through the India Market Access portal, reducing regulatory complexity.
  • Implementation over a six-month timeline, aiming to restore investor confidence and enhance India’s global competitiveness.

Relaxed IPO Norms for Large Companies

To encourage large issuers to raise capital efficiently:

  • Companies with market capitalization of ?1–5 lakh crore must now offer 2.75–2.8% of post-issue market cap, down from 5%.
  • Minimum public offer for mega-IPOs raised to ?6,250 crore.
  • Public shareholding timeline relaxed: Firms with <15% float at listing get 10 years to meet 25% minimum, and those with ≥15% float get 5 years.
  • Anchor investor quota increased from one-third to 40%, reserving one-third for domestic mutual funds and the rest for life insurers and pension funds.

These measures help promoters reduce immediate dilution while facilitating broad investor participation.

Strengthened Governance in Market Infrastructure Institutions

SEBI has introduced structural reforms to improve transparency and accountability in exchanges and clearing corporations:

  • Two executive directors appointed to oversee critical operations (trading, clearing, settlement) and regulatory compliance (risk, investor grievances).
  • Defined roles and responsibilities for Managing Directors and Key Managerial Personnel to enhance succession planning.
  • Scale-based thresholds introduced for material related-party transactions.
  • Separate AIF schemes for accredited investors with flexible compliance norms.

Mutual Fund and Retail Investor Reforms

To promote financial inclusion and investor protection:

  • Maximum exit load reduced from 5% to 3%.
  • Distributor incentives revised to encourage inflows from B-30 cities and women investors.
  • Enhanced transparency in investor reporting and compliance requirements.

Significance and Implications

  • For India’s markets: Provides operational flexibility for large issuers, simplifies compliance, and reduces procedural hurdles for trusted foreign investors.
  • For global competitiveness: Positions India as a stable, long-term investment hub amid capital volatility.
  • For retail investors: Encourages broader participation from smaller cities and underrepresented groups, aligning with inclusive financial growth objectives.

Overall, SEBI’s reforms reflect a balance between market facilitation, investor protection, and governance standards, reinforcing India’s ambition to be an attractive, transparent, and globally competitive capital market.

India-Mauritius Relations

  • 17 Sep 2025

In News:

India and Mauritius share deep-rooted historical, cultural, and economic ties, which have been further strengthened through recent diplomatic engagements. In September 2025, Prime Minister Narendra Modi met Mauritius PM Navinchandra Ramgoolam in Varanasi, reaffirming the partnership as more than a diplomatic arrangement, describing it as a “family bond” rooted in shared history, values, and strategic interests.

Special Economic Package and Development Cooperation

During the meeting, India announced a special economic package worth $680 million, aimed at supporting Mauritius in infrastructure, healthcare, defence preparedness, and maritime security. Key components of the package include:

  • Healthcare: Establishment of a 500-bed Sir Seewoosagur Ramgoolam National Hospital, an AYUSH Centre of Excellence, and a Veterinary School and Animal Hospital. The first Jan Aushadhi Kendra outside India was also inaugurated.
  • Infrastructure: Development of roads, highways, ring roads, and the ATC Tower at SSR International Airport.
  • Strategic and Maritime Security: Assistance in Exclusive Economic Zone (EEZ) surveillance, hydrographic surveys, navigation charting, and maritime domain awareness over the next five years.
  • Chagos Marine Protected Area: India will support Mauritius in monitoring, developing, and protecting the Chagos EEZ, following Mauritius’ sovereignty agreement with the UK.

These initiatives are positioned as hard and soft power diplomacy, enhancing India’s strategic reach in the Indian Ocean while improving Mauritius’ development and security capabilities.

Economic and Technological Cooperation

Mauritius is one of India’s closest economic partners in Africa, ranking as the second-largest source of FDI into India after Singapore. The two nations signed the Comprehensive Economic Cooperation and Partnership Agreement (CECPA) in 2021, India’s first trade deal with an African country. Last year, UPI and RuPay services were launched in Mauritius, and both nations are now exploring trade in local currencies.

India also supports academic and civil service capacity building through collaborations between IIT Madras, Indian Institute of Plantation Management, and the University of Mauritius, as well as the launch of Mission Karmayogi training modules.

Geopolitical and Strategic Significance

Mauritius views India as a trusted partner and net security provider in the Indian Ocean, reinforcing a free, open, and secure maritime domain. India’s support aligns with its Neighbourhood First and Vision Mahasagar policies, countering the growing influence of China, Russia, Iran, and Gulf nations in the region. By assisting Mauritius with EEZ surveillance and maritime capacity building, India strengthens its strategic leverage while bolstering Mauritius’ sovereignty, particularly in the Chagos Archipelago.

Cultural and People-to-People Connect

The bond between the two nations is also cultural and historical. Approximately 70% of Mauritius’ 1.3 million population are of Indian descent, and Indian culture, traditions, and languages are deeply embedded in daily life. During the Varanasi visit, the Mauritian Prime Minister participated in the Ganga Aarti and planned prayers at Shri Kashi Vishwanath Dham, highlighting the symbolic spiritual dimension of bilateral relations.

Conclusion

India’s multi-dimensional engagement with Mauritius demonstrates a blend of strategic foresight, development diplomacy, and cultural affinity. Through the special economic package, maritime cooperation, and people-centric initiatives, India not only strengthens Mauritius’ development and security but also consolidates its influence in a geopolitically vital part of the Indian Ocean, fostering mutual prosperity, stability, and strategic partnership.

Judicial Pendency in the Supreme Court

  • 16 Sep 2025

In News:

The Supreme Court of India, the apex guardian of constitutional justice, is witnessing an unprecedented surge in pendency, reflecting deeper structural and procedural challenges in the judicial system. As of 2025, according to the National Judicial Data Grid (NJDG), the number of pending cases has reached an all-time high of 88,492, comprising 69,605 civil and 18,887 criminal cases. This marks a 35% rise in five years, even as the Court functions at its full sanctioned strength of 34 judges.

Causes of Rising Pendency

  • Several systemic factors have contributed to this backlog. Despite digitization and virtual hearing reforms, the rate of disposal lags behind fresh filings — in August 2025 alone, 7,080 cases were filed while only 5,667 were disposed of, indicating a disposal rate of around 80%.
  • The limited number of working days, frequent adjournments, and procedural complexities hinder case progression. India’s judge-to-population ratio remains alarmingly low at 21 judges per million people, far below the recommended 50. Moreover, the indiscriminate filing of Special Leave Petitions (SLPs) under Article 136 has transformed the Court into a general appellate body rather than a constitutional one.
  • The government, as the largest litigant, contributes nearly 50% of total cases, many of which are repetitive or avoidable. In addition, outdated infrastructure, slow AI integration, and underutilization of Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) mechanisms like arbitration and mediation continue to strain the system.

Implications of Judicial Delay

The consequences of prolonged pendency are far-reaching. The oft-quoted maxim “justice delayed is justice denied” holds especially true in India, where delays erode public trust and institutional credibility. Prolonged trials lead to social injustice, particularly for vulnerable groups awaiting resolution of criminal and civil disputes.

Economically, legal uncertainty deters investment, slows contract enforcement, and raises transaction costs. The Indian Justice Report 2025 highlights that over 76% of prisoners are undertrials, leading to chronic prison overcrowding — a direct fallout of judicial delays.

Reform Measures and Innovations

  • The Supreme Court has initiated multiple steps under its “Unclogging the Docket” initiative. The Differentiated Case Management (DCM) system categorizes cases based on complexity, allowing short and infructuous cases to be fast-tracked. This reform has achieved a disposal rate of 104%, setting a benchmark for judicial efficiency.
  • Arrears Committees monitor long-pending cases and ensure compliance with the Malimath Committee recommendations, which advocate stricter timelines and reduced adjournments. Structural reforms like increasing judicial capacity, reducing vacation periods, and filling vacancies promptly have also been proposed.
  • Legislative changes such as the Arbitration and Conciliation (Amendment) Acts of 2015 & 2019, the Commercial Courts Act (2018), and amendments to the Negotiable Instruments Act (2018) aim to streamline procedures and promote out-of-court settlements.
  • Technological innovations like e-filing, virtual hearings, and the National Judicial Data Grid (NJDG) have improved transparency, though integration across courts remains incomplete. The Chief Justice’s recent move to convert part of the summer recess into working days underscores an institutional willingness to reform.

Way Forward

Experts have long advocated for dividing the Supreme Court into a Constitutional Division (for fundamental rights and constitutional issues) and a Legal Division (for statutory appeals), as proposed by the 10th and 11th Law Commissions. Expanding judicial strength, adopting AI-based case management, and promoting ADR mechanisms are equally vital.

Conclusion

The mounting pendency in the Supreme Court underscores a structural crisis demanding urgent multi-pronged reforms. While the Court’s efficiency initiatives and government’s prompt action on judicial appointments are encouraging, sustainable change requires institutional restructuring, procedural streamlining, and technological modernization. Upholding the ideal of “Speedy Justice as a Fundamental Right” is imperative for maintaining the faith of citizens in India’s democratic and judicial institutions.

India’s Export Challenges

  • 12 Sep 2025

In News:

India’s merchandise and services exports, once a key driver of economic growth, face mounting challenges amid global protectionism and domestic structural constraints. Recently, the imposition of a 50% tariff by the United States, which accounts for roughly 20% of India’s exports, threatens stagnation in the country’s largest trading partner market, highlighting vulnerabilities in export competitiveness.

Historical Export Trends

Between 1990 and 2010, India’s exports as a share of GDP rose from 7.1% to 20.4%, supported by liberalisation, reforms, and global integration. Merchandise and services exports contributed jointly, with sectors such as textiles, pharmaceuticals, and IT-BPM emerging as strong performers. However, from 2010 to 2024, India’s export growth decelerated; the GDP share dipped to 17.7% by 2020, recovering only marginally to 21.2% by 2024, while India’s global merchandise share rose modestly from 0.51% (1990) to 1.81% (2024). Most of the early gains were concentrated in the first two decades of liberalisation.

Sector-wise performance shows uneven growth: agricultural exports increased from 0.85% to 2.22%, fuel and mining exports surged from 0.32% to 2.62%, led by petroleum, while manufacturing, despite tripling to 1.73%, continues to lag. Services exports have outperformed goods, rising from 2.9% of global share in 2010 to 4.2% in 2024, largely concentrated in IT, telecom, and business services.

Structural Challenges

India’s exports confront multiple structural constraints:

  1. Tariff Shock from US: The punitive 50% tariffs jeopardise India’s most buoyant market and compound the effects of a global slowdown.
  2. Competitiveness Erosion: Rising production costs, inefficient logistics, and regulatory complexity reduce India’s global manufacturing edge.
  3. Overdependence on Services: India’s services exports are twice that of goods, with IT/ITES dominating and other sectors contributing only around 40%.
  4. Narrow Manufacturing Base: While textiles, pharma, steel, and chemicals perform well, high-value sectors such as electronics, precision machinery, and advanced materials remain underrepresented.
  5. Global Headwinds: Protectionist policies, reshoring trends, non-tariff barriers, and a weakened WTO dispute settlement system limit India’s options.

Policy Initiatives

Several steps have been undertaken to revive exports:

  • Export Promotion Mission (EPM 2025): Sector-specific programs like NiryatProtsahan (credit facilitation) and Niryat Disha (market access, branding, logistics).
  • RoDTEP Scheme: Refunds hidden central, state, and local taxes on exports, expanded to steel, pharma, and chemicals.
  • Simplified EPCG Scheme: Facilitates duty-free import of capital goods, with eased compliance.
  • BHARATI Initiative for Agri-Food Exports: APEDA’s 2025 program to incubate 100 startups with AI quality checks and blockchain traceability.
  • E-Commerce Export Hubs: Warehousing, customs clearance, and logistics support for MSMEs.

Way Forward

  • Enhance Manufacturing Competitiveness: Improve logistics efficiency (from 13–14% of GDP to global benchmark 8%), integrate with global value chains, and focus on electronics, EVs, green technologies, and semiconductors.
  • Diversify Export Markets: Reduce dependence on US/EU markets by targeting Africa, Latin America, and ASEAN; leverage FTAs with UAE, Australia, and UK.
  • Deepen Services Export Base: Expand beyond IT to healthcare, tourism, education, financial and creative services.
  • Agriculture and Fuels: Promote agro-processing, value addition in petrochemicals, and branded exports.
  • Policy and Institutional Support: Advocate WTO reforms, pursue bilateral/multilateral agreements, and incentivise R&D and quality upgradation in MSMEs.

Conclusion

India’s exports face weak merchandise growth, concentrated services reliance, and external shocks such as US tariffs. A multi-pronged strategy—strengthening manufacturing, diversifying markets, deepening services, and fostering value addition—remains critical to reclaim India’s global export momentum and support sustainable economic growth.

Should Reservations Exceed the 50% Cap?

  • 11 Sep 2025

Context:

The question of whether caste-based reservations should cross the 50% threshold has re-emerged in policy and judicial debates. Political commitments promising higher quotas, demands for deeper social justice, and judicial reviews—such as the Supreme Court’s recent notice on applying the creamy layer rule to Scheduled Castes (SCs) and Scheduled Tribes (STs)—have intensified the discussion.

Constitutional Framework

Articles15 and 16 of the Constitution enshrine equality in access to education and public employment while empowering the state to frame special provisions for Socially and Educationally Backward Classes (SEBCs), OBCs, SCs, and STs. At present, the reservation percentages at the Union level are:

  • OBCs – 27%, SCs – 15%, STs – 7.5%, and EWS – 10%.This brings the total to 59.5%, already breaching the ceiling in practice. The debate centres on whether these provisions are exceptions to the rule of equality or instruments for achieving substantive equality.

Judicial Trajectory of the 50% Ceiling

  • Balaji v. State of Mysore (1962): Declared that reservations should remain “reasonable” and introduced the 50% benchmark.
  • State of Kerala v. N.M. Thomas (1975): Shifted focus toward substantive equality, treating reservations as a means to realise real equality.
  • Indra Sawhney v. Union of India (1992): Reaffirmed the 50% cap, upheld 27% OBC quota, and introduced the creamy layer exclusion.
  • Janhit Abhiyan (2022): Validated the 10% EWS quota, clarifying that the 50% ceiling applied only to caste-based quotas, thereby legitimising its breach.
  • State of Punjab v. Davinder Singh (2024): Suggested extending the creamy layer principle to SCs and STs for equitable distribution of benefits.

Thus, the 50% rule is not a constitutional mandate but a judicially crafted balance.

Arguments for Raising the Ceiling

  • Population Profile: Backward classes make up over 60% of India’s population (Mandal Commission, state surveys), yet reservations remain capped.
  • Political Demand: States like Bihar have sought quotas up to 85%, citing under-representation.
  • Unequal Access Within OBCs: The Rohini Commission reported that 97% of OBC benefits go to 25% of sub-castes, leaving ~1,000 groups unrepresented. Expanding and sub-categorising quotas could address this.
  • Substantive Equality: Addressing historical disadvantages may require flexibility in ceilings.
  • Precedents: Tamil Nadu, Maharashtra, and Haryana have legislated beyond the 50% cap, reflecting local realities.

Arguments Against Breaching the Cap

  • Judicial Safeguards: The 50% rule maintains a balance between equity and merit.
  • Unfilled Vacancies: Nearly 40–50% of reserved seats remain vacant; raising quotas without systemic reform will not resolve this.
  • Creamy Layer Issues: Without stricter exclusions, higher quotas may further consolidate benefits among dominant groups.
  • Efficiency Concerns: Excessive reservations could undermine administrative performance.
  • Alternative Tools: Skill-building, better implementation, and private-sector inclusion can deliver justice without endlessly expanding quotas.

Way Ahead

  • Caste Census (2027): Data-driven policy-making requires updated and accurate caste data.
  • Sub-Categorisation: Implement Rohini Commission recommendations for fairer distribution within OBCs.
  • Prioritisation Within SCs/STs: A two-tier system to protect the most deprived sections.
  • Flexible Ceiling: Replace rigid caps with evidence-based, contextual ceilings.
  • Beyond Reservations: Focus on education, entrepreneurship, healthcare, and livelihood generation.

Conclusion

The 50% ceiling emerged from judicial interpretation rather than constitutional text. While it has served as a stabilising principle, social realities demand a more nuanced approach. Instead of mechanically raising quotas, India must pursue a data-backed, sub-categorised, and efficiency-oriented reservation framework, complemented by investments in human development. This ensures that affirmative action remains an empowerment tool for the truly disadvantaged rather than a political instrument.

Land Subsidence in Uttarakhand

  • 10 Sep 2025

Introduction

  • Uttarakhand, a state already prone to natural calamities such as cloudbursts, flash floods, and landslides, is witnessing a new and alarming hazard—land subsidence.
  • The phenomenon has recently surfaced in Chamoli district’s Nanda Nagar, destroying homes, displacing families, and highlighting the fragile ecological balance of the Himalayan region.

Understanding Land Subsidence

Land subsidence is the gradual settling or sudden sinking of the Earth’s surface, caused when the ground loses its ability to support weight. It may occur due to:

  • Natural factors: seismic or volcanic activity, collapse of underground cavities, or compaction of fine-grained deposits.
  • Anthropogenic factors: excessive groundwater extraction, mining, subsurface energy withdrawal, or unregulated construction.

Globally, nearly 12 million sq. km of land is susceptible to subsidence, with major hotspots in the USA, China, Iran, Indonesia, Vietnam, and Japan. In India, the Himalayas are increasingly vulnerable due to their fragile geology and unplanned development pressures.

The Chamoli Crisis

  • In Nanda Nagar, Band Bazar and Lakshmi Market have become epicentres of subsidence. To date, seven buildings have been destroyed and 16 more are at risk, with cracks widening daily. Water seepage from underground fissures has aggravated fears, prompting diversion efforts by Jal Sansthan using pipelines.
  • The disaster has displaced several families. While temporary relief camps have been established in wedding halls, many residents have opted for rented houses due to lack of facilities. 18 families have shifted voluntarily, while only a few essential volunteers remain in the camps. Authorities have provided tin sheets, tarpaulins, and fodder for livestock.
  • Local administration and police are engaged in evacuation, restricting access to high-risk areas, and issuing rainfall-triggered alerts. Political representatives, including the local MLA, have assured compensation of ?5 lakh per affected family, aligning it with earlier precedents in nearby Thrali.

Causes and Concerns

The Chamoli episode underlines how over-extraction of groundwater and unregulated urbanisation exacerbate subsidence in mountain ecosystems. Groundwater overexploitation reduces pressure in aquifers, compacting porous formations and triggering ground collapse. Additionally, Himalayan terrain, already tectonically active, becomes more unstable with haphazard infrastructure expansion, tunnelling for hydropower, and inadequate drainage systems.

Impacts

  • Infrastructure damage: Buildings, roads, and markets are rendered unsafe.
  • Displacement: Families lose homes and livelihoods, straining relief systems.
  • Water management challenges: Seepage alters drainage gradients and may increase risks of flooding and salinity intrusion.
  • Security implications: Frequent disasters weaken borderland resilience in strategically sensitive districts like Chamoli.

Government Response

Authorities have taken short-term measures including relocation, compensation, and infrastructure support. Police and disaster management teams are actively engaged in restricting hazardous zone entry and ensuring safety. Yet, the lack of long-term risk assessment and early warning systems remains a critical gap.

Way Forward

  • Scientific mapping of subsidence-prone areas using satellite and ground-based surveys.
  • Regulated groundwater extraction and promotion of rainwater harvesting.
  • Disaster-resilient urban planning with strict building codes in ecologically fragile zones.
  • Community preparedness through awareness, relocation plans, and livelihood diversification.
  • Integrated Himalayan policy, balancing development needs with ecological sustainability.

Conclusion

The Nanda Nagar subsidence crisis is not an isolated incident but part of a broader trend of human-induced ecological stress in fragile Himalayan ecosystems. As disasters intensify in frequency and scale, climate-resilient planning and sustainable resource management must become central to India’s mountain development strategy. Addressing land subsidence requires coordinated scientific, administrative, and community-level interventions to safeguard lives, infrastructure, and ecosystems.

Gender Imbalance in the Supreme Court of India

  • 08 Sep 2025

In News:

The Supreme Court of India, the apex judicial body, suffers from a severe gender imbalance, raising questions about inclusivity, representation, and public trust. With the retirement of Justice Sudhanshu Dhulia in August 2025, only one woman judge, Justice B.V. Nagarathna, remains out of a sanctioned strength of 34 judges.

Historically, since 1950, only 11 women judges (3.8%) have been appointed to the Court, beginning with Justice Fathima Beevi in 1989. This under-representation is stark, considering the constitutional guarantees of equality under Articles 14, 15, and 16.

Causes of Gender Imbalance

Several structural and societal factors contribute to this disparity:

  • Opaque Collegium System: Judicial appointments are governed by the Collegium, led by the Chief Justice of India and four senior judges. Criteria for selection are neither public nor institutionalised, unlike considerations for caste, religion, or regional representation. Gender, notably, is not treated as a mandatory criterion.
  • Late Elevation and Short Tenures: Women judges are often appointed later in their careers, limiting their tenure and chances of rising to senior positions or entering the Collegium. Of the 11 women judges to date, only five have served in the Collegium, and the first woman CJI, Justice Nagarathna, is scheduled for a brief 36-day tenure in 2027.
  • Barriers from the Legal Profession: Very few women lawyers are elevated directly from the Bar; only Justice Indu Malhotra has achieved this. Structural biases, gender stereotypes, and lack of mentorship impede women’s career progression in law.
  • Institutional and Societal Resistance: Male-dominated professional culture and low political prioritisation of gender diversity exacerbate the exclusion of women from the judiciary.

Implications

  • On the Judiciary: The lack of women judges narrows the Court’s perspectives, undermines legitimacy, and limits jurisprudential growth, particularly on gender-sensitive issues. Short tenures prevent women from influencing appointments or policy within the judiciary.
  • On Society: The gender gap weakens citizens’ trust in the judiciary, discourages aspiring women lawyers, and contradicts the spirit of constitutional morality. A judiciary that does not reflect societal diversity risks democratic and representative deficits.

Way Forward

  • Institutional Reforms: Appointment resolutions should mandate gender diversity. Criteria and reasons for appointments must be publicly disclosed.
  • Pipeline Development: Increase women judges in High Courts, encourage women from the Bar through mentorship, and create structured pathways to the higher judiciary.
  • Policy Anchoring: Adopt a written diversity policy, integrating constitutional morality and substantive equality, as recommended by the 2nd Administrative Reforms Commission.
  • Global Lessons: Countries like Canada and the UK institutionalise diversity in their top courts; India can adopt similar frameworks.

Conclusion

Bridging the gender gap in the Supreme Court is not mere tokenism—it is a constitutional and ethical imperative. Women judges bring unique perspectives, enrich judicial reasoning, and strengthen public confidence in justice. To uphold its credibility as India’s guardian of equality, the Supreme Court must institutionalise gender diversity, ensuring that the judiciary reflects the society it serves.

Revisiting RTE Exemption for Minority Schools

  • 07 Sep 2025

In News:

The Supreme Court has recently reopened the debate on whether minority institutions should be exempt from the Right to Education (RTE) Act, questioning the validity of the 2014 Pramati Educational and Cultural Trust judgment, which granted blanket immunity to minority schools—both aided and unaided—from RTE provisions. This issue lies at the intersection of Article 21A (Right to Education) and Article 30(1) (minority rights to establish and administer institutions), raising questions of inclusivity, equality, and constitutional morality.

The RTE Act and Its Objectives

Enacted in 2009, the RTE Act operationalises Article 21A, guaranteeing free and compulsory education for children aged 6–14 years. Its key mandates include:

  • Government schools: Free education for all.
  • Aided schools: Free seats proportional to state funding.
  • Private unaided schools: Reservation of 25% seats at entry level for disadvantaged children (Section 12(1)(c)), with state reimbursement.

The Act also prescribes standards on infrastructure, pupil-teacher ratios, teacher eligibility, and prohibits corporal punishment and capitation fees. Rooted in child-centric philosophy, RTE aims to build inclusive classrooms as spaces of democracy, equality, and social justice.

The 2014 Pramati Judgment

A five-judge Constitution Bench ruled that applying RTE to minority institutions violated Article 30(1). It held that enforcing quotas and norms could alter their composition, thereby infringing minority rights. Consequently, both aided and unaided minority schools were exempted from RTE obligations.

Fallout

  • Many private schools sought minority status to escape compliance.
  • Exemption diluted inclusivity, particularly the 25% quota, undermining the spirit of Article 21A.
  • Loopholes allowed elite minority institutions to function without admitting disadvantaged children—even from their own communities.

The 2025 Reconsideration

In September 2025, while hearing a case on the applicability of the Teacher Eligibility Test (TET) to minority schools, a two-judge bench led by Justice Dipankar Datta observed that Pramati had gone too far. The Court argued that:

  • Articles 21A and 30 must co-exist. Institutional autonomy cannot override children’s rights.
  • Standards like qualified teachers and infrastructure do not erode minority character.
  • Blanket exemption weakens inclusivity and creates a “regulatory loophole.”
  • Compliance with the 25% quota could be interpreted flexibly, e.g., by prioritising disadvantaged children from the same minority group.

Since only a larger bench can overturn Pramati, the matter has been referred to the Chief Justice of India for constitution of a bigger bench.

Challenges Ahead

  • Legal Precedent: Overturning a Constitution Bench ruling requires judicial restraint and careful balancing.
  • Autonomy vs Inclusivity: Reconciling group rights with universal child rights is constitutionally complex.
  • Weak Enforcement: Even where RTE applies, compliance remains patchy.
  • Social Resistance: Elite institutions and parents often resist socio-economic mixing in classrooms.

Implications

  • For Education: Denial of access to elite minority schools undermines equity and India’s democratic ethos.
  • For the Constitution: Current exemption skews the balance, privileging institutional rights over individual rights.
  • For Society: Misuse of minority status widens educational inequality, weakening India’s human capital base.

Way Forward

  • Judicial Harmonisation: Larger benches must strike a balance, clarifying that autonomy does not equal immunity.
  • Policy Realignment: At minimum, teacher qualifications and infrastructure norms should apply to all schools.
  • Strengthening Public Schools: Improving government schools can reduce over-reliance on private/minority institutions.
  • Social Awareness: Campaigns to highlight inclusive classrooms as spaces of democratic socialisation are vital.

Conclusion

The exemption of minority schools from RTE is not merely a legal question but a test of constitutional morality. Upholding the child’s right to inclusive education must prevail over institutional privileges. The forthcoming larger bench decision offers an opportunity to harmoniseArticles 21A and 30, reaffirming that education is not a privilege of groups but a universal right essential to democracy and nation-building.

Pulses Production in India: Pathways to Atmanirbharta

  • 06 Sep 2025

In News:

Pulses hold a unique place in India’s agricultural economy, food security, and nutritional well-being. As a protein-rich staple in largely vegetarian diets, they not only address malnutrition but also contribute to sustainable farming through nitrogen fixation, low water requirements, and reduced carbon emissions. Despite being the world’s largest producer and consumer of pulses, India continues to import sizeable quantities, making self-reliance a critical national goal.

Current Scenario and Progress

India cultivates 12 pulse crops across kharif, rabi, and summer seasons, supported by diverse agro-climatic conditions. Production, however, is highly concentrated—Madhya Pradesh, Maharashtra, and Rajasthan together account for over 55% of total output, while the top 10 states contribute more than 91%.

Historically, the sector suffered from low yields and import dependence. Production declined to 16.35 million tonnes (MT) in 2015–16, forcing imports of nearly 6 MT. However, government interventions such as the National Food Security Mission (NFSM) and higher Minimum Support Prices (MSP) have significantly reversed this trend. By 2022–23, production surged by 59.4% to 26.06 MT, while productivity improved by 38%. Import dependence fell from 29% to just 10.4%, marking substantial progress.

Yet, challenges remain. Nearly 80% of pulses cultivation is rain-fed, leaving it vulnerable to monsoon fluctuations. The sector supports the livelihood of over five crore farmers, making policy stability and targeted support crucial.

NITI Aayog’s Roadmap

Recognising the pivotal role of pulses, NITI Aayog released a report titled “Strategies and Pathways for Accelerating Growth in Pulses towards the Goal of Atmanirbharta” in September 2025. The report projects domestic production to reach 30.59 MT by 2030 and 45.79 MT by 2047, thereby reducing imports and strengthening India’s food sovereignty.

Key Recommendations:

  1. Area Retention and Diversification – Establish region-specific crop clusters to optimise land use.
  2. Technology Adoption – Promote customised technologies suited for varied agro-ecological zones.
  3. Seed Quality and Distribution – Ensure timely availability of high-quality seeds, with special focus on 111 high-potential districts that account for 75% of national output.
  4. Cluster-Based Hubs – Implement the “One Block–One Seed Village” model through farmer producer organisations (FPOs) to enhance productivity.
  5. Mission for Atmanirbharta in Pulses – A six-year initiative targeting key crops such as pigeonpea, black gram, and lentil to fast-track self-sufficiency.

According to NITI Aayog, India could achieve self-sufficiency in pulses within the next decade if the current pace of growth is sustained.

Nutritional and Environmental Significance

Pulses are indispensable in addressing India’s protein deficiency and micronutrient gaps, particularly in iron and folate. Their role in combating hidden hunger makes them vital to achieving Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) related to nutrition.

Environmentally, pulses act as natural soil enrichers through nitrogen fixation, reduce dependence on chemical fertilisers, and have a lower water footprint compared to cereals. Thus, scaling up their production aligns with both climate resilience and sustainable agriculture goals.

Conclusion

India has made commendable progress in reducing import dependence and improving productivity in pulses production over the past decade. However, achieving complete self-sufficiency requires sustained, region-specific strategies, robust seed systems, and technology-driven interventions. NITI Aayog’s roadmap, backed by focused initiatives like the Mission for Atmanirbharta in Pulses, provides a viable pathway.

By 2047, India not only aims to meet its domestic demand but also emerge as a global leader in pulses production—ensuring food security, nutritional well-being, and environmental sustainability for its growing population.

Regulating Social Media in India

  • 03 Sep 2025

In News:

The Supreme Court of India, in a recent case concerning derogatory remarks by comedians, observed that social media influencers commercialise free speech, often blurring the line between legitimate expression and harmful speech. It stressed that while humour and satire are constitutionally protected, derogatory jokes against vulnerable groups perpetuate stigma and undermine inclusivity. The Court urged the Union Government to frame effective guidelines with enforceable consequences to ensure accountability in the digital space. This development underscores the growing debate on the regulation of social media in India.

Judicial Observations and Recommendations

  • Commercialisation& Accountability: Free speech is increasingly monetised by influencers, creating overlaps with prohibited speech. Such expression cannot become a shield for targeting disadvantaged groups.
  • Humour vs. Dignity: The Court emphasised that humour should not compromise dignity, particularly of persons with disabilities, women, children, minorities, and senior citizens.
  • Guidelines with Consequences: Directed the Union Government, in consultation with industry bodies, to frame proportionate and enforceable rules.
  • Digital Responsibility: Called for sensitisation and ethical conduct on social media, along with unconditional apologies for derogatory remarks.

Existing Legal and Regulatory Framework

  • Information Technology Act, 2000 – Principal legislation for digital communication.
    • Section 79(1): Provides safe harbour to intermediaries if they act neutrally.
    • Section 69A: Allows government to block content for sovereignty, security, and public order.
  • IT (Intermediary Guidelines and Digital Media Ethics Code) Rules, 2021 – Mandates due diligence, grievance redressal, and removal of unlawful content.
  • 2023 Amendment – Required intermediaries to remove false/misleading content about the government; however, its enforcement was stayed by SC.
  • Key Judicial Precedents:
    • Shreya Singhal v. Union of India (2015): Struck down Section 66A of IT Act for vagueness, reaffirming free speech under Article 19(1)(a).
    • K.S. Puttaswamy v. Union of India (2017): Recognised privacy as a fundamental right under Article 21, shaping later data protection measures.

Need for Regulation

  • Protecting Vulnerable Groups: Prevents cyberbullying, trolling, and derogatory content.
  • Curbing Misinformation & Hate Speech: Essential to check fake news, deepfakes, and extremist propaganda that threaten social harmony and security.
  • Mental Health Safeguards: Addresses anxiety, depression, and addictive behaviours linked to excessive use.
  • Influencer Accountability: Prevents consumer harm through undisclosed endorsements and fraudulent promotions.
  • Data Privacy & Security: Ensures user rights under Article 21 are not compromised by exploitative data practices.
  • Balancing Free Speech & Responsibility: Draws boundaries within Article 19(2) restrictions (public order, morality, security).

Challenges in Regulation

  • High Volume & Anonymity: Makes monitoring difficult.
  • Transparency Gaps: Platforms’ opaque moderation policies lack accountability.
  • Defining Harmful Content: Subjectivity and cultural sensitivities complicate consensus.
  • Risk of Overreach: Regulations can be misused as censorship.
  • Cross-Border Jurisdiction: Large share of harmful content originates outside India.
  • Political Neutrality Concerns: Allegations of bias in content moderation decisions.

Way Forward

  • Comprehensive Legal Framework: Update IT Act with the proposed Digital India Act, ensuring balance of rights and responsibilities.
  • Algorithmic Transparency: Mandate audits, reporting, and oversight of AI-driven content moderation.
  • Institutional Capacity: Invest in cyber forensic labs and AI-enabled monitoring.
  • Digital Literacy Campaigns: Encourage ethical online behaviour and awareness of misinformation.
  • Global Cooperation: Strengthen cross-border regulatory partnerships and multi-stakeholder governance.

Conclusion

Regulating social media in India requires a balanced approach—one that safeguards freedom of expression under Article 19(1)(a) while addressing harms that erode dignity, social harmony, and democratic discourse. A mix of robust laws, technological innovation, ethical guidelines, and digital literacy can build a safe, inclusive, and accountable digital ecosystem aligned with India’s constitutional vision of justice, liberty, equality, and fraternity.

Civil Society in India: Strengthening Democracy and Human Dignity

  • 02 Sep 2025

Introduction

Civil Society Organizations (CSOs) form the third pillar of democracy beyond the state and market, playing a crucial role in mobilizing communities, protecting rights, and addressing gaps in governance. From social reform movements of the 19th century to present-day advocacy for rights, CSOs have evolved into indispensable actors shaping India’s democratic landscape.

Evolution of Civil Society in India

  • Ancient–Medieval roots: Guided by concepts of dharma, daan, and karma, religious and social movements emphasized community service.
  • Pre-independence era: Organizations like Brahmo Samaj (1828), Theosophical Society (1879), and Ramakrishna Mission (1897) linked voluntary action with reform. Gandhiji’s philosophy of constructive work and self-reliance inspired mass mobilization.
  • Post-independence: The First Five-Year Plan (1951–56) recognized voluntary action in development. The Panchayati Raj system deepened community participation. During the 1965–67 droughts, foreign aid through NGOs strengthened India’s civil society base.
  • Contemporary era: CSOs shifted from welfare delivery to a rights-based approach, visible in the Chipko (1973) and Narmada Bachao (1985) movements, and campaigns for RTI, MGNREGA, RTE, and food security.

Today, India has around 1.5 million NGOs engaging over 19 million volunteers, though most remain small and resource-constrained.

Role of Civil Society in a Democracy

  • Accountability and Transparency: Groups like Mazdoor Kisan Shakti Sangathan spearheaded the RTI Act (2005), strengthening citizen oversight. CSOs monitor elections, detect fraud, and counter corruption.
  • Citizen Empowerment: They spread awareness of laws and rights, enabling participation of marginalized groups. For instance, Jagori and Swayam advanced women’s rights, while SEWA empowered informal sector workers.
  • Social Justice and Inclusion: CSOs amplify voices of women, Dalits, Adivasis, and persons with disabilities. The Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act (2016) was shaped through sustained advocacy.
  • Service Delivery and Humanitarian Work: During COVID-19, organizations like Goonj launched relief programmes. In healthcare, civil society has been pivotal in palliative care, advocating for dignity of terminally ill patients by mobilising volunteers, spreading awareness, and supplementing public health gaps.
  • Leadership and Political Socialization: CSOs nurture grassroots leadership, especially among women in Panchayati Raj Institutions, challenging entrenched hierarchies.
  • Global Governance: Indian CSOs engage with international human rights, climate change, and sustainable development discourses, influencing domestic reforms.

Challenges Facing Civil Society

  • Regulatory hurdles: The FCRA (2010) and its 2020 amendment have restricted foreign funding, reducing financial independence.
  • Funding constraints: Overdependence on international donors and weak domestic philanthropy limit sustainability.
  • Internal undemocracy: Lack of transparency and inclusive decision-making undermines credibility.
  • State–CSO friction: Governments often view rights-based activism as adversarial, creating tensions.
  • Representation gaps: Elite capture and urban bias may sideline grassroots voices.
  • Volunteer retention and professionalism remain persistent challenges.

Way Forward

  • Enhancing transparency: Mandatory impact audits and a national CSO database can strengthen trust.
  • Institutionalized consultation: Formal representation of CSOs in policy committees ensures evidence-based policymaking.
  • Diversified funding: Domestic philanthropy, CSR initiatives, and social impact investing must be promoted.
  • Simplified regulation: A single-window digital compliance system for registrations and reporting can reduce bureaucratic friction.
  • Boosting volunteerism: Integrating service into school and university curricula can create a culture of civic participation.

Conclusion

Civil society in India has evolved from religious charity to rights-based activism, standing as a bridge between state and society. From advocating landmark legislations like RTI to ensuring the dignity of palliative care patients, CSOs embody participatory democracy in action. Strengthening their autonomy, inclusivity, and accountability is essential for a resilient, equitable, and responsive democracy.

Haryana’s New Forest Definition and Its Implications for the Aravallis

  • 29 Aug 2025

Introduction

The debate on what constitutes a “forest” in India has resurfaced with the Haryana government’s recent notification defining forests based on “dictionary meaning.” While the state claims its definition aligns with Supreme Court precedents, environmentalists warn that it narrows the scope of protection, particularly threatening the fragile Aravalli ecosystem. The issue reflects the larger legal and ecological contestation over forest governance in India, especially after the 2023 amendment to the Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980 (FCA).

Haryana’s Definition of Forests

As per the notification (August 18, 2025), a patch of land qualifies as forest if:

  • It covers at least 5 hectares in isolation or 2 hectares if contiguous with government-notified forests.
  • It has a canopy density of 40% or more.

The definition excludes linear or compact plantations (along roads, canals, railways), agro-forestry plantations, and orchards outside notified forests. Officials argue this provides clarity for surveys mandated by the Supreme Court, but critics fear it sets thresholds too high for naturally sparse ecosystems like the Aravallis.

Supreme Court Directives

In March 2025, the Supreme Court directed all States/UTs to define forests and begin mapping them, in line with the 2011 Lafarge Umiam Mining guidelines. These guidelines mandate:

  • A GIS-based decision-support system.
  • District-wise mapping of forest-like areas, community lands, eco-sensitive zones, wildlife corridors, and previously diverted forest lands.
  • Accountability of Chief Secretaries for non-compliance.

This directive came during hearings on petitions challenging the 2023 FCA amendment (Ashok Kumar Sharma, IFS (Retd) &Ors. vs Union of India).

Godavarman Case and FCA Amendment

The FCA, 1980 originally restricted dereservation and diversion of forest land without Central approval. In the 1996 Godavarman case, the Supreme Court broadened “forest” to its dictionary meaning, bringing all statutorily recognised or naturally forested areas under FCA protection.

However, the 2023 amendment limited FCA applicability to:

  1. Notified forests, and
  2. Lands recorded as forests in government records.

The government argued that the Godavarman interpretation hindered developmental projects, even minor ones. Retired IFS officers and NGOs contested this, alleging dilution of forest safeguards. In February 2024, the Court ordered States to continue applying the Godavarman definition until the matter is resolved.

Implications for the Aravallis

The Aravalli range, spread across Haryana, Delhi, Rajasthan, and Gujarat, is ecologically critical for groundwater recharge, biodiversity, and as a green buffer against desertification. Its vegetation is naturally stunted, thorny, and scrub-like due to low rainfall (300–600 mm annually) and rocky terrain. Experts argue that imposing a 40% canopy cover threshold would exclude much of the Aravallis, leaving it open to urbanisation, illegal mining, and real estate encroachments.

Furthermore, the minimum area thresholds (2–5 hectares) are considered too high for a dry state like Haryana, where smaller forest patches play a vital ecological role. Analysts call the state’s approach violative of the Godavarman principle, which recognised even small and degraded forests under FCA protection.

Conclusion

Haryana’s restrictive definition exemplifies the ongoing tension between developmental priorities and ecological safeguards. While compliance with the Supreme Court’s directive is necessary, adopting narrow thresholds risks excluding ecologically fragile zones from legal protection. The debate underscores the need for a balanced, scientifically informed, and ecologically sensitive framework, recognising regional variations in vegetation and ensuring long-term sustainability of ecosystems like the Aravallis.

Criminalisation of Politics in India

  • 28 Aug 2025

In News:

The criminalisation of politics—the entry of individuals facing serious criminal charges into legislative bodies—remains one of the gravest challenges to Indian democracy. Despite repeated judicial observations and public debates, the problem has only deepened over the past decade, threatening the integrity of representative institutions.

Scale of the Problem

Recent data highlights the alarming rise in lawmakers with serious criminal records. In the Lok Sabha, the share of MPs with such cases has increased from 14% in 2009 to 31% in 2024, more than doubling in just 15 years. Certain states reflect extreme cases: Telangana (71% of MPs), Bihar (48%), and Uttar Pradesh (34 MPs, the highest in absolute numbers).

At the state level, the trend is equally stark. In 2024, nearly 29% of MLAs (around 1,200) faced serious criminal charges. Andhra Pradesh (56%), Telangana (50%), and Uttar Pradesh (154 MLAs or 38%) illustrate how deeply entrenched the issue has become.

These figures cover offences punishable by five years or more, including non-bailable crimes such as murder, kidnapping, and corruption, thereby going beyond minor infractions.

Causes of Criminalisation

Several systemic factors perpetuate this trend:

  • Electoral Financing – High campaign costs create incentives for parties to field “winnable” candidates, many of whom have criminal clout and access to large financial resources.
  • Weak Enforcement of Laws – While conviction leads to disqualification under the Representation of the People Act (RPA), slow judicial processes allow accused legislators to contest multiple elections.
  • Patronage Politics – Candidates with criminal backgrounds often command local influence, mobilise voters, and provide muscle power for parties, making them electorally attractive.
  • Voter Rationality – In certain constituencies, voters see such candidates as problem-solvers who can deliver despite weak state capacity, reinforcing their acceptability.

Consequences for Democracy

The rising criminalisation of politics undermines the rule of law and corrodes democratic legitimacy. Legislators facing serious charges may prioritise personal or group interests over public welfare. Policy decisions risk being distorted by vested interests, while governance is compromised by declining ethical standards. Over time, this erodes citizen trust in institutions, weakens the credibility of Parliament and Assemblies, and fuels cynicism about democratic accountability.

Judicial and Institutional Responses

The Supreme Court has repeatedly emphasised the need to curb criminalisation. In Lily Thomas v. Union of India (2013), it ruled that convicted legislators would be immediately disqualified. In Public Interest Foundation v. Union of India (2018), it directed parties to publish criminal antecedents of candidates, citing the “urgent need for cleansing politics.”

The Election Commission of India (ECI) has also recommended barring candidates against whom charges have been framed for serious offences. However, political consensus on reforms remains elusive.

Way Forward

Addressing this structural malaise requires a multi-pronged strategy:

  • Legal Reforms – Amend the RPA to disqualify candidates at the stage of framing of charges for heinous crimes.
  • Judicial Fast-Tracking – Establish special courts for speedy trial of cases against politicians.
  • Political Will – Parties must adopt internal reforms, refusing tickets to tainted candidates, with penalties for violations.
  • Voter Awareness – Civil society campaigns and public disclosure of candidate records can empower voters to make informed choices.
  • State Capacity – Strengthening law enforcement and reducing reliance on “muscle power” will make clean candidates more competitive.

Conclusion

The criminalisation of politics is not merely a legal or electoral issue but a crisis of democratic legitimacy. With nearly one-third of legislators facing serious charges, India risks normalising the presence of alleged criminals in the highest law-making bodies. Urgent institutional, legal, and political reforms are essential to reverse this trend and safeguard the constitutional promise of “purity of elections” and the rule of law.

Nari Shakti and India’s Economic Transformation

  • 27 Aug 2025

In News:

Women’s participation in India’s workforce has witnessed a remarkable turnaround in recent years, emerging as a cornerstone of the country’s economic transformation and a critical driver for the vision of Viksit Bharat 2047.

Data from the Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS) shows that the female workforce participation rate (WPR) nearly doubled from 22% in 2017-18 to 40.3% in 2023-24, while the unemployment rate (UR) fell from 5.6% to 3.2% during the same period. This trend reflects not only improved economic opportunities but also the success of multiple policy interventions promoting gender-inclusive growth.

Rising Participation Across Sectors

The surge in women’s employment has been particularly pronounced in rural India, with a 96% rise in female employment, compared to 43% in urban areas. Importantly, self-employment among women grew from 51.9% to 67.4%, showcasing the increasing entrepreneurial orientation of India’s female workforce. Formal employment has also expanded, with 1.56 crore women joining the formal workforce in the last seven years as per EPFO payroll data. Additionally, over 16.6 crore women workers have registered on the e-Shram portal, providing them access to social security schemes.

Education, Employability, and Skills

Employability of women has improved significantly. Reports show that employability among female graduates rose from 42% in 2013 to 47.5% in 2024, while women with postgraduate education saw their WPR increase from 34.5% to 40% between 2017 and 2024. The India Skills Report 2025 projects that more than half of Indian graduates will be globally employable, marking a substantial improvement in skill readiness.

Policy Push for Women-Led Development

Government initiatives have been central to this transformation. The gender budget increased by 429% in the last decade, reaching ?4.49 lakh crore in FY 2025-26, supporting more than 70 central schemes and 400 state-level initiatives targeted at female entrepreneurship and welfare.

Flagship programmes like Startup India have created a thriving ecosystem where nearly half of DPIIT-registered startups have at least one-woman director. Schemes such as PM Mudra Yojana (with women receiving 68% of 35.38 crore loans worth ?14.72 lakh crore) and PM SVANidhi (where 44% of beneficiaries are women) have provided critical financial inclusion. Complementary initiatives like Namo Drone Didi, Deendayal Antyodaya Yojana–NRLM, and the Lakhpati Didi scheme are equipping women with resources to become economically self-reliant.

Women-Led MSMEs and Job Creation

The rise of women-led MSMEs further reflects this shift. Their number almost doubled from 1 crore in 2010-11 to 1.92 crore in 2023-24, generating 89 lakh additional jobs for women between FY21–FY23. The share of women-owned establishments grew from 17.4% to 26.2% in the same period. This expansion highlights the growing role of women as both job creators and drivers of inclusive growth.

Towards Viksit Bharat 2047

Women are no longer seen as mere beneficiaries of welfare schemes but as leaders of India’s growth story. From rural entrepreneurs to corporate directors, their contributions are reshaping the economy. Achieving the vision of 70% women workforce participation by 2047 is now integral to India’s developmental roadmap.

Conclusion

India is undergoing a paradigm shift from women’s development to women-led development. The surge in women’s employment, financial inclusion, and entrepreneurship reflects both a social transformation and an economic imperative. As Nari Shakti takes centre stage, empowering women through education, skills, and supportive policies will be crucial for India to achieve inclusive and sustainable growth on its path to Viksit Bharat.

Kerala: India’s First Fully Digitally Literate State

  • 26 Aug 2025

In News:

Kerala has become the first fully digitally literate state in India, marking a historic milestone in bridging the digital divide. The achievement follows the successful completion of Phase I of the Digi Kerala project, a grassroots initiative aimed at equipping citizens with essential digital skills.

Origins of the Digital Literacy Movement

Kerala’s digital literacy journey began with the Akshaya Project in 2002, launched by President A.P.J. Abdul Kalam, which aimed to make at least one member of every family digitally literate.

The recent drive was inspired by the Digi Pullampara initiative (2021) in Thiruvananthapuram, where local officials trained daily wage labourers and MGNREGS workers in basic smartphone-based services to prevent loss of wages due to long queues at banks. The success of Pullampara, which became the state’s first fully digitally literate panchayat, laid the foundation for statewide expansion.

Survey and Training Model

The programme followed a mass literacy campaign model reminiscent of Kerala’s 1980s literacy drive. Surveys covered 1.51 crore individuals across 83.45 lakh households, identifying 21.88 lakh digitally illiterate persons. Of these, 21.87 lakh (99.98%) successfully completed training and evaluation.

Training included 15 basic digital tasks such as making voice/video calls, using WhatsApp, accessing e-governance platforms, and conducting digital transactions. Volunteers—drawn from NSS units, Kudumbashree groups, SC/ST promoters, and libraries—delivered training at worksites, neighbourhood groups, and homes, ensuring inclusivity. Evaluations required participants to perform at least six out of the 15 tasks, with retraining provided where necessary.

Inclusivity and Grassroots Orientation

Unlike the National Digital Literacy Mission (NDLM) and Digital Saksharta Abhiyan (DISHA), which capped training at 60 years of age, Kerala’s programme included all age groups—even centenarians. Data shows 15,221 trainees above 90 years, and over 7.77 lakh between 60–75 years benefitted. Women (13 lakh), men (8 lakh), and 1,644 transgender persons also participated, showcasing inclusivity.

The programme also targeted marginalized communities and homemakers, ensuring that digital literacy did not remain confined to urban or privileged groups.

Integration with Kerala’s Digital Ecosystem

Kerala’s digital literacy drive is not a standalone initiative but part of a larger ecosystem:

  • Kerala Fibre Optic Network (KFON): Provides universal internet access, including free connections to BPL families.
  • K-SMART (Kerala Solutions for Managing Administrative Reformation and Transformation): Integrates all local self-government services onto a single digital platform.
  • Digi Kerala 2.0: Expands the mission beyond basic literacy to include cyber fraud awareness, misinformation detection, and advanced e-governance training.

This smartphone-centric approach reflects ground realities, where mobile phones are the most accessible digital tool for citizens.

National Context

Digital literacy in India remains limited: only 38% households are digitally literate (61% in urban, 25% in rural areas). Past initiatives like NDLM and DISHA trained over 53 lakh people, while PMGDISHA (Pradhan Mantri Gramin Digital Saksharta Abhiyan) has trained 6.39 crore individuals till March 2024. Kerala’s model stands out for its grassroots orientation, inclusivity, and integration with governance.

Significance

  • Governance & Transparency: Enhances access to schemes like Ayushman Bharat, PM-Kisan, and Jan Dhan, while enabling online grievance redressal and RTI filing.
  • Socio-Economic Empowerment: Equips women, elderly, and marginalized groups with livelihood-relevant skills.
  • Disaster Resilience: Ensures continuity of education, services, and financial transactions during crises such as pandemics.
  • Scalable Model: Provides a blueprint for other states under the Digital India mission, focusing not only on infrastructure but also on citizen capacity.

Conclusion

Kerala’s declaration as the first fully digitally literate state represents more than a symbolic achievement; it reflects a transformative model of participatory governance, inclusivity, and socio-economic empowerment. By bridging the last-mile digital divide, Kerala positions itself as a leader in India’s march towards a digitally empowered society.

Migrant Disenfranchisement in India: A Democratic Challenge

  • 24 Aug 2025

In News:

India, the world’s largest democracy, faces a silent yet critical challenge: the systematic disenfranchisement of internal migrants. Recent reports indicate that during the Special Intensive Revision (SIR) of Bihar’s electoral rolls, nearly 3.5 million voters—about 4.4% of the state’s electorate—were removed. Most affected are migrant workers who were absent during house-to-house verification and subsequently labelled as “permanently migrated,” effectively losing the right to vote both at their home and destination states. This development underscores a structural weakness in India’s electoral system and highlights the democratic deficit faced by mobile citizens.

Understanding Migrant Disenfranchisement

Migrant disenfranchisement occurs when workers are excluded from voting due to absence from their home constituencies and lack of registration in destination states. This results in a “political limbo,” particularly for circular and split-family migrants, who move seasonally for economic survival. Bihar alone has around 7 million annual out-migrants, many of whom live in rented accommodations, slums, or temporary worksites, often lacking the documentation required for voter registration.

Legal Framework and Safeguards

The Representation of the People Acts, 1950 & 1951, guarantees citizens the right to be enrolled in their ordinary residence constituency. ERONET facilitates continuous updating of electoral rolls, and the Election Commission of India (ECI) has proposed portability measures such as “One Nation, One Voter ID,” though these remain largely unimplemented. Proxy voting exists for overseas Indians but does not extend to internal migrants. Civil society initiatives, including surveys in Kerala, have highlighted gaps in voter registration and access for mobile populations.

Structural Causes of Disenfranchisement

  • Sedentary Electoral Framework: Voter registration is tied to fixed residence and physical verification, disadvantaging migrants in transient living conditions.
  • Circular and Split-Family Migration: Seasonal migration is often misread as permanent relocation, prompting administrative deletion from rolls.
  • Administrative and Social Barriers: Migrants face bureaucratic hurdles, digital illiteracy, and social exclusion, while host states may discourage enrolment due to perceived political consequences.
  • Regionalism and Sub-Nationalism: Migrants are frequently viewed as outsiders, and domicile norms for jobs can restrict political participation.

Consequences
Disenfranchisement deepens inequalities and disproportionately affects poor, seasonal, and vulnerable populations, including women near border areas. Bihar’s average voter turnout (53.2%) lags behind Gujarat (66.4%) and Karnataka (70.7%), reflecting the systemic exclusion of mobile citizens. The result is a two-tier democracy where the economically marginalized are politically voiceless.

Way Forward

  • Portable Voter Identity: Develop Aadhaar-linked, mobile electoral IDs enabling voting across home and work constituencies, with privacy safeguards.
  • Cross-State Coordination: EC should implement cross-verification before deletion and enable temporary voter registration for seasonal migrants.
  • Civil Society Outreach: Panchayats and NGOs can facilitate re-enrolment campaigns, replicating Kerala’s successful survey models.
  • Policy Harmonisation: Align electoral reforms with labour codes and welfare portability, recognising circular migration as an economic reality.

Conclusion
India’s democracy depends on the participation of all citizens, including migrants whose remittances underpin state economies. Without urgent reforms to ensure portable voter rights, inter-state coordination, and inclusive outreach, millions risk losing their political voice. Addressing migrant disenfranchisement is not merely an administrative task but a fundamental imperative for a representative and inclusive democracy.

Constitution (130th Amendment) Bill, 2025

  • 23 Aug 2025

In News:

  • The Constitution (One Hundred and Thirtieth Amendment) Bill, 2025, represents a significant step in strengthening constitutional morality and accountability of those holding high executive offices.
  • It seeks to amend Articles 75, 164, and 239AA to provide for the automatic removal of the Prime Minister, Chief Ministers, and Ministers in the Union and state governments, if they remain under judicial custody for a prolonged period on charges of serious criminal offences.
  • The Bill also extends similar provisions to Union Territories, including Delhi, Puducherry, and Jammu & Kashmir, through amendments in relevant legislations.

Key Provisions of the Bill

  • Grounds for Removal:Applicable when a Minister is accused of an offence punishable with imprisonment of five years or more and has been in custody for 30 consecutive days.
  • Procedure:
    • At the Union level, the President must remove a Minister on the advice of the Prime Minister by the 31st day.
    • At the state level, Governors act on the advice of Chief Ministers.
    • In Delhi, the President acts on the Chief Minister’s advice.
    • For the Prime Minister or Chief Minister, resignation is mandatory on the 31st day of custody; otherwise, their office will stand vacated automatically.
  • Reappointment:The Bill does not bar reappointment after release from custody, ensuring due process for those acquitted.

Rationale and Objectives

  • Constitutional Morality: Upholding values of integrity in governance and preventing the spectacle of governments being run from prisons.
  • Public Trust: Protecting the legitimacy of the executive by ensuring that leaders under grave suspicion cannot continue in office.
  • Good Governance: Preventing misuse of official machinery by incarcerated Ministers.

The Statement of Objects and Reasons highlights that the Bill aims to keep executive positions free from “any ray of suspicion,” thereby strengthening public confidence in democratic institutions.

Challenges and Concerns

  • Opposition’s Objections: Concerns about misuse of investigative agencies and politically motivated arrests have been raised. Critics argue that automatic disqualification on custody, without conviction, may undermine the presumption of innocence.
  • Judicial Safeguards: The reliance on timely judicial intervention (bail within 30 days) assumes speedy functioning of courts, which may not always be realistic.
  • Federal Sensitivities: Extending the provision to Union Territories, particularly Delhi and Jammu & Kashmir, may invite political contestation.

Significance

The 130th Amendment Bill underscores India’s evolving constitutional morality by mandating that executive authority cannot coexist with criminal custody. By including the Prime Minister within its scope, the Bill strengthens democratic accountability, contrasting sharply with earlier attempts at immunity. If passed, it will create a robust ethical standard for public office, ensuring that governance is not conducted under the shadow of criminality, while allowing reappointment post-exoneration to balance fairness.

In essence, the Bill reflects an effort to reconcile democratic legitimacy, public morality, and constitutional governance, thereby reinforcing citizens’ faith in the integrity of the Indian executive.

Why India needs a national space law urgently

  • 22 Aug 2025

In News:

India’s space programme has made remarkable strides in recent years, with missions such as Chandrayaan-3, the upcoming Gaganyaan human spaceflight, and plans for the Bharat Antariksh Station. Alongside, private participation in launch services, satellite communication, and space-based applications has grown significantly. However, despite being a signatory to key international treaties like the Outer Space Treaty (OST) 1967, India still lacks a comprehensive national space legislation. This gap creates uncertainty for private enterprises, investors, and regulators, making a space law an urgent necessity.

International Context and Treaty Obligations

The OST of 1967 provides foundational principles:

  • Outer space as the common heritage of mankind with no claims of sovereignty.
  • Activities limited to peaceful purposes and free scientific exploration.
  • State responsibility for activities conducted by both government and non-government actors.
  • Liability of states for damage caused by space objects launched from their territory.

While India is bound by these obligations, the treaty is not self-executing. National legislation is required to translate these commitments into enforceable domestic rules. Many countries such as the U.S., Luxembourg, Japan, and UAE have enacted laws clarifying ownership, licensing, and liability frameworks, thereby attracting global investments in their space sectors.

India’s Current Approach

India has followed an incremental strategy, relying on policies and guidelines rather than legislation:

  • Indian Space Policy, 2023 opens space activities to private players.
  • IN-SPACe Norms and Guidelines, 2024 provides authorization mechanisms.
  • Catalogue of Indian Standards for Space Industry, 2023 ensures safety and quality.

However, these are executive measures without statutory authority. The Indian National Space Promotion and Authorisation Centre (IN-SPACe) currently functions without legal backing, undermining its ability to act as a credible single-window regulator.

Key Challenges in the Absence of a Law

  • Regulatory Fragmentation: Space activities involve multiple ministries (Defence, Telecom, Commerce, DoS), leading to duplication and delays. For instance, satellite communication projects require parallel clearances from DoT, Defence, and ISRO.
  • Liability Concerns: Under OST, India is internationally liable for damages caused by private launches. Without domestic liability-sharing norms, startups face prohibitive insurance costs.
  • FDI Uncertainty: India allows partial FDI in satellite manufacturing, but unclear automatic routes deter investors. Competitor nations offer liberal FDI frameworks, drawing startups away.
  • Intellectual Property Issues: Ambiguity in IP ownership discourages innovation and risks talent migration to IP-friendly jurisdictions.
  • Innovation Barriers: Overlapping clearances and unclear rules delay project timelines, stifling private-sector growth.

Way Forward

  • Comprehensive Space Activities Law: Clearly define licensing, liability, insurance, IP rights, and dispute resolution in line with OST.
  • Statutory Empowerment of IN-SPACe: Grant it legal authority as an independent single-window regulator with transparent, time-bound processes.
  • Insurance Framework: Establish government-backed reinsurance pools to make liability coverage affordable for startups.
  • Liberalised FDI Norms: Allow 100% FDI in satellite component manufacturing under the automatic route with safeguards for national security.
  • IP and Innovation Ecosystem: Protect private patents, encourage industry–academia collaboration, and retain domestic talent.

Conclusion

India stands at a decisive moment in its space journey. The absence of a comprehensive space law risks slowing down private participation, deterring investment, and exposing the country to unmitigated liability under international law. Enacting robust legislation would not only provide clarity and predictability but also align India with global best practices, nurture its commercial space ecosystem, and position it as a trusted global leader in space governance. With India aspiring to host major international space events and expand its presence in global markets, the urgency for a national space law has never been greater.

“Master of the Roster” Controversy: Balancing Judicial Independence & Accountability

  • 20 Aug 2025

Context

A recent incident involving the Supreme Court’s censure of an Allahabad High Court judge has reignited debate about the apex court’s authority over High Courts’ internal administration—specifically, the Chief Justice’s exclusive “Master of the Roster” (MoR) power. The case, involving Justice Prashant Kumar, raised broader issues of judicial discipline, institutional autonomy, and constitutional hierarchy.

The Incident & Its Fallout

A Bench led by Justices Pardiwala and Mahadevan directed that Justice Prashant Kumar be removed from the criminal roster and paired with a senior judge after an “erroneous” judgment. This triggered objections from the Allahabad High Court, which argued it constituted a breach of its administrative autonomy. Following communications from the Chief Justice of India, the Supreme Court clarified that its ruling did not intend to infringe on the Chief Justice’s MoR powers.

Constitutional Principles at Stake

  • Master of the Roster Principle:
    • Entrails the exclusive right of a Chief Justice—High Court or Supreme Court—to constitute benches and allocate cases. Key precedents affirm this prerogative: State of Rajasthan v. Prakash Chand (1998), State of Rajasthan v. Devi Dayal (1959), and Mayavaram Financial Corporation (Madras HC, 1991).
  • Supreme Court’s Binding Authority:
    • Article 141 mandates that decisions of the Supreme Court are binding throughout India.
    • Article 142 empowers the Court to issue orders necessary for “complete justice,” enabling it to take corrective measures.
  • Judicial Independence vs. Oversight:
    • High Courts enjoy constitutional autonomy (Art. 214), and the Supreme Court lacks superintendence over them. Yet, the integrated judiciary framework permits intervention when integrity or rule of law is at stake. In Tirupati Balaji Developers (2004), the SC described itself as the “elder brother,” not an administrative overlord.

Issues Raised

  • Scope of SC Intervention: Can the Supreme Court issue administrative directives affecting a High Court Chief Justice’s roster authority?
  • Judicial Discipline vs. Undermining Autonomy: How can errors be corrected without compromising institutional independence?
  • Use of Article 142: Does preventive intervention under this provision set a precedent for future interventions?
  • Separation within the Judiciary: Where is the line between hierarchical oversight and judicial autonomy?

In-House Mechanism vs. Public Correction

While serious misconduct among judges is typically addressed through confidential in-house procedures or through impeachment by Parliament, the Supreme Court’s public directive in open court was corrective rather than punitive. The approach—pairing the errant judge with a senior adjudicator—was meant to enhance judicial quality while signaling accountability.

Way Forward

  • Define clear guidelines elucidating when the Supreme Court may legitimately intervene in High Courts’ administrative matters.
  • Strengthen internal supervisory mechanisms to address judicial errors without resorting to public admonishment.
  • Enhance capacity-building, mentorship, and training to minimize repeated lapses in judicial decisions.

Conclusion

The MoR principle is a foundational safeguard of judicial independence, but it does not immune the judiciary from scrutiny or intervention when errors threaten the rule of law. The Supreme Court’s constitutional powers under Article 142 enable exceptional corrective action—but such powers must be exercised judiciously to preserve institutional autonomy and public trust.

US–China Trade Truce and the Role of Agricultural Imports in Geoeconomics

  • 19 Aug 2025

In News:

The United States and China, the world’s two largest economies, have extended their trade truce for another 90 days until November 10, 2025, averting a sharp escalation of tariffs. The pause keeps US duties on Chinese goods at 30% (against a threatened 145%) and Chinese tariffs on US shipments at 10% (down from an earlier 125%). This temporary reprieve reflects the complex mix of economics, politics, and strategic leverage shaping bilateral relations.

Tariffs and Negotiation Dynamics

Since his return to office, US President Donald Trump has pursued aggressive tariff measures to reduce America’s $300 billion trade deficit with China (2024), arguing that higher duties encourage domestic production and investment. Beijing retaliated with counter-tariffs and restrictions, sparking a tit-for-tat escalation that threatened global supply chains.

The extension of the truce provides space for negotiations over trade imbalances, unfair practices, national security concerns, and market access. It also underscores the challenges of balancing protectionism with the risks of inflation, uncertainty for businesses, and potential disruption to global economic stability.

China’s Leverage: Rare Earths and Agriculture

Beijing has strategically wielded two levers of influence. First, it controls the global supply chain of rare-earth elements and magnets, crucial for the US auto, aerospace, defence, and semiconductor industries. Second, it has employed its role as a major importer of agricultural commodities as a “trump card.”

US farm exports to China fell sharply from $13.1 billion (Jan–June 2024) to $6.4 billion (Jan–June 2025), continuing a downward trend from the 2022 peak of $40.7 billion. The steepest decline has been in soybean exports, dropping from $17.9 billion (2022) to just $2.5 billion (Jan–June 2025). China has redirected much of its soybean imports—74.7 million tonnes in 2024—to Brazil, Argentina, and Canada, significantly hurting American “corn belt” states and livestock producers reliant on feed crops.

Beyond soybeans, imports of US corn, sorghum, barley, cotton, beef, pork, poultry, and tree nuts such as almonds and pistachios have also contracted. This has created pressure on Trump from politically influential farm states, prompting him to publicly urge Beijing to expand soybean purchases.

Impact on the US and India

While American agricultural exports to China have fallen by 51.3% (Jan–June 2025 over 2024), those to India have surged 49.1% in the same period. India has emerged as the largest market for US tree nuts, importing over $1.1 billion in 2024, with a 42.8% year-on-year rise in early 2025. At the same time, the US has become India’s largest buyer of seafood, with frozen shrimp exports worth $1.9 billion in 2024–25.

This divergence highlights India’s growing importance in US agricultural trade, even as tariff disputes persist—Washington recently doubled duties on Indian imports to 50%, citing penalties linked to Russian oil purchases.

Broader Strategic Context

The US–China trade confrontation extends beyond tariffs and agriculture. Issues under negotiation include curbs on semiconductor exports, the role of Chinese platforms like TikTok, and energy security linked to Russian oil purchases. Beijing emphasizes “win-win cooperation,” while Washington continues to pursue coercive tools to address trade imbalances and safeguard national security.

Conclusion

The current trade truce reflects a fragile pause rather than resolution. China’s use of agriculture and rare earths as instruments of economic statecraft illustrates the growing intertwining of trade, technology, and geopolitics. For the US, balancing domestic political pressures from farmers and industries with long-term strategic objectives remains a challenge. For India, the shifting trade landscape offers both opportunities for greater market access and risks of tariff retaliation, underlining the complexity of navigating major power rivalries.

Documenting India’s Endangered Languages

  • 18 Aug 2025

Context:

India is home to one of the world’s richest linguistic landscapes, with the 2011 Census recording over 2,800 mother tongues, of which 1,369 were classified as recognized languages. However, many languages remain vulnerable: those spoken by fewer than 10,000 people are categorized as endangered.

According to the Scheme for Protection and Preservation of Endangered Languages (SPPEL) of the Central Institute of Indian Languages (CIIL), 117 endangered languages have been identified, and efforts are underway to document nearly 500 lesser-known languages in the future.

The Case of the Toda Tribe

The Toda tribe of the Nilgiri Hills in Tamil Nadu exemplifies India’s efforts at language preservation. Toda is a proto-South Dravidian language without a native script, spoken by only a few thousand people today. Traditionally oral, it encapsulates the community’s myths, rituals, and ecological knowledge. Under SPPEL, Toda elders have collaborated with linguists to record stories, songs, and vocabulary, producing primers in the Tamil script for schoolchildren and uploading digital archives to Sanchika, CIIL’s online repository launched in 2025. This initiative not only preserves linguistic material but also strengthens cultural identity.

Government and Institutional Efforts

SPPEL employs a systematic process of recording, transcription, grammar construction, cultural documentation, and digital archiving. Advanced tools—such as high-end audio-video equipment and linguistic analysis software—are used to create bilingual dictionaries, pictorial glossaries, and ethno-linguistic profiles.

Complementary schemes also support linguistic diversity. The Ministry of Tribal Affairs, through the TRI-ECE initiative, has funded AI-based translation tools to convert Hindi/English text into tribal languages. The Ministry of Culture promotes folk and tribal arts through programs such as the National Mission for Cultural Mapping and the Rashtriya Sanskriti Mahotsavs, while the Sahitya Akademi organizes annual tribal writers’ meets. These interventions align with the National Education Policy 2020, which emphasizes multilingual education.

Global Perspective

The erosion of linguistic diversity is not unique to India. UNESCO estimates that nearly half of the world’s 7,000 languages are endangered, with the loss of each language erasing irreplaceable cultural heritage. Recognizing this, UNESCO has declared 2022–2032 as the International Decade of Indigenous Languages, urging global stakeholders to act. The International Day of the World’s Indigenous Peoples (August 9) further highlights indigenous rights and cultural preservation.

Technology has emerged as both a challenge and a solution. While AI systems often appropriate indigenous knowledge without consent, initiatives such as New Zealand’s Te Hiku Media for M?ori and Polynesian reef conservation projects demonstrate AI’s potential for revitalization. In India, the integration of AI into language preservation efforts reflects this global trend.

Way Forward

Preserving endangered languages is critical for safeguarding traditional ecological knowledge, oral heritage, and cultural diversity. India’s multilingual character—where 22.9 crore people are bilingual and 8.6 crore are trilingual—creates opportunities for inclusive education models that protect minor languages while enabling wider communication. Community-driven documentation, AI-enabled tools, and government support can ensure continuity across generations.

As UNESCO Director-General Audrey Azoulay has noted, “Language is what makes us human. When people’s freedom to use their language is not guaranteed, this limits their freedom of thought and expression.” For India, the preservation of endangered languages is not merely cultural—it is a matter of equity, identity, and sustainable development.

Judicial Pendency in India

  • 14 Aug 2025

In News:

The Indian judiciary today faces an unprecedented backlog of over 5 crore pending cases across all levels—Supreme Court, High Courts, and District Courts. This crisis not only weakens the justice delivery system but also erodes citizen trust in governance and constitutional values.

Magnitude of Pendency

As of mid-2025:

  • District Courts account for nearly 90% of pendency, with 4.6 crore+ cases.
  • High Courts face a backlog of 63.3 lakh+ cases.
  • The Supreme Court has 86,700+ pending cases.

A notable disparity exists between criminal and civil case disposal. While 85.3% of criminal cases in High Courts are resolved within a year, only 38.7% of civil cases in district courts meet this timeline. Alarmingly, nearly 20% of civil cases remain unresolved for more than five years. The Chief Justice of India has flagged the issue of excessive caution in granting bail as one contributor to this delay.

Causes of Judicial Pendency

  • Low Judge-Population Ratio: With only 15 judges per 10 lakh population, India lags behind the Law Commission’s recommendation of 50 judges per million. Though women constitute 38% of lower judiciary, their representation in High Courts remains at just 14%.
  • Adjournment Culture: Excessive adjournments worsen pendency. A Delhi High Court study found 70% of delayed cases involved over three adjournments, leading to the infamous “tareek pe tareek” phenomenon.
  • Underutilized ADR: Mediation, arbitration, and conciliation are not fully tapped despite their cost-effectiveness. Absence of comprehensive ADR performance data further hampers evaluation.
  • Rising Litigation: Greater legal awareness, increasing PILs, and non-meritorious cases fuel the backlog. Notably, nearly half of pending cases involve government departments, where routine appeals prolong litigation.
  • Structural Deficits: Shortage of courtrooms, staff, weak ICT systems, delays in evidence and witness availability, and lack of case management frameworks further strain judicial functioning.

Reform Initiatives

  • National Mission for Justice Delivery and Legal Reforms (2011): Enhancing access and efficiency.
  • e-Courts Project: Paperless filing, virtual hearings, faster processing.
  • Fast Track Special Courts: Speedy trials for specific offences.
  • Tele-Law & Nyaya Bandhu: Expanding legal aid through technology and pro bono services.
  • Appointments: Between 2014–2024, 62 Supreme Court and 976 High Court judges were appointed; district courts saw strength rise from 19,518 to 25,609.

Lok Adalats remain highly effective, having disposed of 27.5 crore cases between 2021–2025.

Strengthening the Judicial System

  • Capacity Expansion: Raise judge strength to 50 per million, expedite appointments, enhance collegium transparency, and establish specialized courts.
  • Infrastructure & Technology: Create a National Judicial Infrastructure Authority, expand e-Courts, use AI for case clustering and tracking, and adopt tools like FASTER for electronic transmission of orders.
  • Procedural Reforms: Enforce strict limits on adjournments, adopt summary trials, pre-trial conferences, and time-bound hearings.
  • Promote ADR: Effective implementation of the Mediation Act, 2023, expansion of arbitration centres, and scaling up of Lok Adalats can significantly reduce court burden.
  • Legal Access: Strengthen Tele-Law, legal aid clinics, and NALSA’s outreach for marginalized groups.

Conclusion

India’s judiciary stands at a crossroads. The sheer volume of pending cases undermines the principle that “justice delayed is justice denied.” Addressing judicial vacancies, modernizing infrastructure, embracing technology, and institutionalizing ADR mechanisms are no longer policy options but constitutional imperatives. Strengthening the justice delivery system is vital not only for effective governance but also for sustaining the rule of law and democratic trust.

ESG Oversight and the Challenge of Greenwashing in India

  • 13 Aug 2025

Introduction

Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG) practices are increasingly shaping corporate accountability and sustainable development worldwide. In India, where environmental degradation, social inequality, and governance failures remain pressing challenges, ESG assumes even greater significance. Recognising rising risks of greenwashing—the practice of making false or exaggerated sustainability claims—a Parliamentary Standing Committee on Finance has recently recommended the establishment of a dedicated ESG oversight body under the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA).

Understanding ESG

  • Environmental: Evaluates a company’s impact on the climate, energy use, waste management, and biodiversity.
  • Social: Measures inclusivity, labour standards, community engagement, and equitable growth.
  • Governance: Focuses on transparency, ethical decision-making, compliance, and protection of shareholder interests.

In India, ESG is critical because of:

  • Climate vulnerability: India experienced 322 extreme weather days in 2024 (CSE), making sustainability practices urgent.
  • Social concerns: Persistent poverty and inequality require businesses to prioritise inclusivity.
  • Governance needs: Strong corporate ethics help attract investment and build long-term trust.

Key Recommendations of the Standing Committee

  • ESG Oversight Authority: A specialised body under MCA to verify sustainability claims, detect fraud, and design sector-specific ESG guidelines.
  • Strengthening Legal Mandate: Amendments to the Companies Act, 2013 to embed ESG responsibilities into directors’ duties, making sustainability a core element of business strategy.
  • Support for MSMEs: Providing frameworks and guidance to help small enterprises adopt ESG without excessive compliance burden.
  • Deterrence Measures: Faster penalties for false claims to curb greenwashing.
  • Strengthening Institutions: Empowering SFIO and NFRA to detect financial crimes linked with ESG misreporting.
  • CSR Transparency: Better monitoring to ensure Corporate Social Responsibility efforts are genuine and impactful.

India’s ESG Initiatives

  • SEBI’s BRSR Framework: Mandates top 1,000 listed companies to disclose ESG performance, aligned with international norms like GRI and SASB.
  • CSR Mandate (Companies Act, 2013): Encourages companies to invest in social and environmental causes.
  • Green Rating Project (CSE): Rates industries on environmental performance.

The Challenge of Greenwashing

Greenwashing undermines ESG credibility by misleading consumers and investors. It often involves vague labels (“eco-friendly,” “natural”), token CSR activities, or misuse of traditional systems like Ayurveda to project sustainability without genuine practices.

Factors driving greenwashing in India

  • Eco-consumerism: Rising demand for sustainable goods, especially among youth.
  • Weak enforcement: Non-mandatory standards like BIS Eco-Mark limit accountability.
  • Fragmented regulations: ESG rules spread across multiple agencies, creating compliance gaps.
  • Cultural exploitation: Misuse of heritage-based terms for marketing.
  • CSR marketing: Highlighting symbolic actions while continuing harmful operations.

Regulatory Safeguards

  • Consumer Protection Act, 2019: Central Consumer Protection Authority can penalise misleading environmental claims.
  • ASCI Guidelines: Ensure environmental claims in advertising are evidence-based.
  • Plastic Waste Management Rules: Aim to regulate reduction claims, though gaps remain.

Conclusion

The rise of ESG reflects India’s journey towards balancing economic growth with sustainability and ethics. However, greenwashing threatens this transition, diluting genuine efforts. The Parliamentary Committee’s recommendation for a centralised ESG oversight authority is timely, offering a pathway to ensure accountability, strengthen investor confidence, and align India’s corporate governance with global sustainability standards.

For India, integrating ESG into the corporate ethos is not merely regulatory compliance—it is a strategic imperative for long-term resilience, social equity, and climate security.

Groundwater Contamination in India

  • 12 Aug 2025

Introduction:

Groundwater is the backbone of India’s water economy, meeting more than 85% of rural drinking water needs and nearly 65% of irrigation requirements. Traditionally considered a safe and abundant source, aquifers are now increasingly threatened by rising contamination. The presence of nitrates, fluoride, arsenic, uranium, heavy metals, and pathogens in groundwater is creating a silent but severe public health and environmental crisis.

Scale of the Crisis

The 2024 Central Ground Water Board (CGWB) Report highlights contamination across 440 districts, exposing millions to serious health risks. Unlike droughts or floods, groundwater contamination is invisible, cumulative, and often irreversible, making it a formidable challenge to long-term water security.

Sources of Contamination

1. Anthropogenic (Human-Induced):

  • Agricultural runoff: Excessive use of fertilisers and pesticides leads to nitrate and phosphate leaching.
  • Industrial discharge: Toxic heavy metals like lead, cadmium, and mercury infiltrate aquifers.
  • Sewage & septic leakage: Untreated wastewater contaminates rural and peri-urban groundwater.
  • Fuel leakage: Petroleum seepage further pollutes drinking water sources.

2. Geogenic (Natural):

  • Fluoride: Naturally present in rocks, aggravated by over-extraction.
  • Arsenic: Mobilised in Gangetic aquifers due to pumping.
  • Uranium: Present in certain geological formations, worsened by phosphate fertiliser use.

Key Contaminants and Health Impacts

Contaminant

Source

Health Impacts

Hotspot Regions

Nitrates

Fertilisers, sewage

“Blue Baby Syndrome”, cancer risk

Punjab, Haryana, Karnataka

Fluoride

Geogenic, fertilisers

Dental & skeletal fluorosis

Rajasthan, Andhra Pradesh, Telangana

Arsenic

Geogenic, over-pumping

Skin lesions, gangrene, cancer

Bihar, W. Bengal, Uttar Pradesh

Uranium

Geogenic, fertilisers

Kidney & organ toxicity

Punjab (Malwa), Rajasthan

Heavy Metals

Industrial waste

Neurological damage, anaemia

Kanpur, Vapi

Pathogens

Sewage leaks

Cholera, dysentery, hepatitis

Odisha, Uttar Pradesh

  • Fluoride contamination affects 230 districts, with 66 million people suffering from fluorosis.
  • In Jhabua (M.P.), fluoride exceeds 5 mg/L, affecting nearly 40% of tribal children.
  • Arsenic in the Gangetic belt has led to skin cancer, gangrene, and respiratory illness.
  • Uranium levels in Punjab’s Malwa region exceed WHO limits, causing kidney and organ damage.
  • Hospital admissions due to nitrate-linked illnesses rose by 28% in five years.

Structural and Governance Challenges

  • Fragmented Institutional Framework: CGWB, CPCB, SPCBs, and Ministry of Jal Shakti work in silos.
  • Weak Legal Enforcement: The Water Act, 1974 scarcely covers groundwater quality.
  • Poor Monitoring: Infrequent testing, outdated equipment, lack of real-time public data.
  • Over-Extraction: Falling water tables concentrate contaminants and draw geogenic toxins.
  • Waste Mismanagement: Industrial discharges and poor sewage treatment remain unchecked.

Policy and Reform Recommendations

1. Legal & Institutional Strengthening

  • Empower CGWB with statutory powers for regulation.
  • Create a National Groundwater Pollution Control Framework.

2. Monitoring & Surveillance

  • Deploy real-time quality sensors and remote sensing tools.
  • Integrate groundwater monitoring with public health systems (HMIS, IHIP).

3. Targeted Mitigation

  • Establish arsenic and fluoride removal plants in hotspots.
  • Expand Jal Jeevan Mission’s piped water supply to reduce reliance on contaminated wells.

4. Industrial & Wastewater Management

  • Mandate Zero Liquid Discharge (ZLD) for industries.
  • Regulate landfills and industrial clusters with stringent penalties.

5. Agricultural Reforms

  • Promote organic farming and integrated nutrient management.
  • Rationalisefertiliser use through pricing reforms and farmer awareness.

6. Community Engagement

  • Involve panchayats, SHGs, and water user groups in quality monitoring.
  • Launch school-based water literacy campaigns for behavioural change.

Conclusion

Groundwater contamination in India is more than an environmental issue; it is a public health emergency with far-reaching consequences for society, economy, and sustainability. If left unaddressed, millions will continue to suffer chronic illnesses, agricultural productivity will decline, and water insecurity will worsen. A comprehensive strategy combining science, governance, technology, and community participation is urgently required. Without immediate intervention, India risks an irreversible water and health crisis, undermining both its developmental trajectory and the well-being of future generations.

Medical Tourism in India

  • 10 Aug 2025

In News:

India has emerged as one of the leading destinations for medical tourism, attracting foreign patients due to its cost-effective treatments, advanced healthcare infrastructure, and traditional wellness systems. The surge in foreign tourist arrivals (FTAs) for medical purposes highlights the sector’s growing role in India’s economy, diplomacy, and healthcare landscape.

Current Trends in Medical Tourism

  • Between January–April 2025, India recorded 1,31,856 medical FTAs, accounting for 4.1% of total FTAs in this period.
  • In 2024, medical FTAs stood at 6.44 lakh, a sharp increase from 1.82 lakh in 2020, indicating robust growth despite global pandemic disruptions.
  • Top source countries (2024):
    • Bangladesh – 4.82 lakh arrivals (largest contributor).
    • Iraq – 32,008 arrivals.
    • Somalia – 11,717 arrivals.
    • Oman – 10,431 arrivals.
    • Uzbekistan – 8,921 arrivals.

This surge reflects both India’s healthcare competitiveness and rising global demand for affordable, high-quality treatment.

Why India attracts Medical Tourists

  1. Affordability & Quality – Advanced medical procedures at a fraction of Western costs.
  2. Specialised Expertise – Strong presence in cardiology, orthopaedics, oncology, organ transplants, and IVF.
  3. Traditional Wellness – Ayurveda, Yoga, and naturopathy complement allopathic care, attracting wellness tourists.
  4. Regulatory Support – Extension of e-Medical visa and attendant visa facilities to 171 countries, easing travel for patients.
  5. Integrated Ecosystem – Hospitals, facilitators, hotels, airlines, and regulatory bodies work together under the ‘Heal in India’ initiative.

Government Initiatives

  • National Efforts:
    • ‘Heal in India’ campaign (Ministry of Health & Family Welfare) promoting India as a global healthcare hub.
    • Encouraging public-private partnerships (PPP) to expand hospital capacity, improve service delivery, and enhance medical infrastructure.
    • Branding and showcasing India’s medical expertise at international platforms.
  • Visa Facilitation:E-medical visa/e-medical attendant visa for 171 countries to smoothen entry of international patients.
  • State-level Initiatives (Case Study: Gujarat):
    • Registration of wellness retreats on official tourism websites.
    • Participation in global health & wellness exhibitions, seminars, and conferences.
    • Familiarisation trips (FAM) for industry stakeholders to promote wellness centres.
    • Training paramedical staff to improve quality of care for foreign patients.
    • Use of social media and global outreach to project Gujarat’s health infrastructure and wellness potential.

Economic & Strategic Significance

  • Foreign Exchange Earnings – Growing inflows from high-value medical travellers.
  • Employment Generation – Creation of jobs in healthcare, tourism, and allied sectors.
  • Soft Power & Health Diplomacy – India’s outreach in medical care strengthens its global image and fosters bilateral goodwill, especially with neighbouring and developing countries.
  • Regional Leadership – With Bangladesh, Iraq, and African nations as major contributors, medical tourism strengthens India’s role as a regional healthcare hub.

Challenges

  • Uneven distribution of healthcare infrastructure across states.
  • Regulatory concerns regarding quality assurance in smaller hospitals and clinics.
  • High dependence on a few source countries.
  • Competition from emerging medical tourism destinations like Thailand, Singapore, and Turkey.

Way Forward

  • Standardisation& Accreditation – Enforcing global quality standards across hospitals to build trust.
  • Digital Integration – Expanding telemedicine, AI-based diagnostics, and digital health records for seamless cross-border care.
  • Wellness Tourism Synergy – Combining allopathic treatments with Ayush-based wellness offerings.
  • Infrastructure Development – Strengthening airports, medical hubs, and hospitality sectors near healthcare clusters.
  • Diversification of Source Countries – Targeting Africa, Middle East, and Latin America for expansion.

Conclusion

India’s medical tourism sector is a sunrise industry, merging healthcare excellence with tourism potential. With over 1.3 lakh medical FTAs in early 2025 alone, the sector underscores India’s strength as a global healthcare destination. By addressing challenges and scaling up initiatives like ‘Heal in India’, India can transform medical tourism into a key pillar of economic growth, soft power, and international diplomacy.

Ethanol Blending

  • 07 Aug 2025

Introduction:

India has achieved a significant milestone in its clean energy transition by rolling out E20 fuel (20% ethanol blended petrol) nationwide in 2025, five years ahead of the original 2030 target. The initiative aligns with the Ethanol Blended Petrol (EBP) Programme, launched in 2003, and marks a sharp rise from just 1.5% ethanol blending in 2014 to 20% in 2025.

The policy aims to enhance energy security, reduce carbon emissions, cut crude oil imports, and support farmers. However, concerns have emerged regarding its impact on vehicle performance, consumer costs, and technical feasibility.

Ethanol Blending: Policy Context

  • Nature of Fuel: Ethanol is an alcohol-based biofuel derived mainly from sugarcane, maize, and biomass.
  • Benefits:
    • Reduces dependency on crude imports (saving ~?1.36 lakh crore in foreign exchange).
    • Provides ?1.18 lakh crore to farmers, boosting rural incomes.
    • Cuts CO? emissions by ~698 lakh tonnes.
    • Strengthens domestic biofuel industry (ethanol production rose from 38 crore litres in 2014 to 661 crore litres in 2025).
  • Global Context: Ethanol blending is used in several countries (e.g., USA, Brazil) to curb fossil fuel reliance.

Economic and Environmental Gains

  • Macroeconomic Benefits:
    • Estimated to lower crude oil imports by ?50,000 crore annually.
    • Strengthened India’s energy self-reliance under the National Bio-Energy Programme.
  • Environmental Benefits:
    • Lower greenhouse gas emissions.
    • Promotion of renewable energy use.
  • Agricultural Support: Higher demand for sugarcane and related feedstock increases farmer incomes.

Challenges and Concerns

1. Vehicle Compatibility Issues

  • Vehicles manufactured before April 2023 are not designed for E20 and risk damage.
  • Hero MotoCorp & TVS highlight the need to replace rubber, elastomer, and plastic components (e.g., gaskets, O-rings, fuel tubes) with ethanol-compatible materials.
  • Ethanol’s corrosive nature leads to:
    • Metal corrosion (fuel tanks, injectors, exhausts).
    • Degradation of rubber/plastic parts.
    • Moisture absorption (phase separation in fuel).
    • Altered air-fuel ratio causing knocking, poor combustion, and reduced performance.

2. Drop in Fuel Efficiency

  • Government stance: Mileage loss is “marginal” (1–2% for calibrated vehicles; 3–6% for others), reducible by engine tuning.
  • Independent experts: Real-world mileage drop may be 6–7%, raising consumer costs.
  • Many consumers report higher fuel consumption, sluggish acceleration, and reduced efficiency in older vehicles.

3. Consumer Concerns

  • Rising fuel expenses due to frequent refuelling.
  • Lack of consumer choice between E20 and pure petrol.
  • Demand for awareness campaigns and clear labelling at fuel stations.

Industry and Policy Response

  • Automobile manufacturers are producing E20-compliant vehicles since April 2023.
  • Retrofitting advisories issued for older models.
  • Government maintains that minor modifications (rubber part replacements, engine recalibration) can mitigate risks at low costs.

Future Outlook: Beyond E20

  • Discussions are underway on higher blends (E30, E40).
  • Experts warn of greater risks:
    • More severe corrosion and efficiency loss.
    • Need for dual fuel dispensing infrastructure.
    • Retrofitting or phased replacement of older vehicles.
  • Policy direction must balance energy security goals with consumer interests.

Conclusion

The rollout of E20 fuel represents a major stride in India’s path toward sustainable energy and reduced import dependence. However, the transition is accompanied by technical, economic, and consumer-level challenges, particularly for pre-2023 vehicles.

Going forward, India’s ethanol blending strategy must ensure:

  • Consumer awareness and choice.
  • Targeted retrofitting supportfor older vehicles.
  • Sustainable ethanol production without compromising food security or causing ecological stress.

Balancing macroeconomic and environmental gains with micro-level consumer impacts will determine the long-term success of India’s ethanol blending programme.

Five Years of the National Education Policy 2020

  • 05 Aug 2025

In News:

The National Education Policy (NEP) 2020, India’s third education policy since Independence, was envisioned as a transformative roadmap to make India a “global knowledge superpower.” Five years since its launch, the policy has driven important reforms in both school and higher education. However, progress has been uneven—while curriculum redesign, early childhood education, and digital learning have taken shape, federal tensions, institutional inertia, and funding constraints continue to slow its full realization.

Key Gains in School Education

The NEP replaced the 10+2 structure with a 5+3+3+4 model (foundational, preparatory, middle, secondary). The National Curriculum Framework (2023) set competency-based outcomes, and NCERT released new textbooks for classes 1–8, integrating subjects such as history and geography into a single volume.

Early childhood care and education (ECCE) has gained traction through the JaaduiPitara kits and a national ECCE curriculum. Delhi, Karnataka, and Kerala have enforced the minimum age of six for class 1. However, improving Anganwadi training and infrastructure remains critical.

Under NIPUN Bharat (2021), literacy and numeracy by class 3 became a national focus. Yet, survey data show proficiency levels at 64% (language) and 60% (math)—progressive but below NEP’s universal goals.

Higher Education Reforms

One of NEP’s boldest ideas, the Academic Bank of Credits (ABC) and National Credit Framework (NCrF), introduced flexibility with multiple entry-exit options: a certificate after one year, a diploma after two, and a four-year degree. While nearly 90% of HEIs report multidisciplinary curricula, only 36% have implemented multiple entry-exit, and just 64% maintain ABC records, indicating patchy adoption.

The Common University Entrance Test (CUET), introduced in 2022, streamlined admissions by replacing multiple entrance exams. Global outreach expanded, with IIT Madras (Zanzibar), IIT Delhi (Abu Dhabi), and IIM Ahmedabad (Dubai) opening campuses abroad, while foreign universities such as the University of Southampton entered India.

Digital education emerged as a strong adoption area: 96% of HEIs use SWAYAM/DIKSHA, and 94% invested in digital infrastructure. Yet, equitable access and integration of MOOCs into degree programs remain challenges.

Reforms in Progress

  • Board exams: From 2026, CBSE will allow class 10 students to appear twice a year to reduce stress.
  • Holistic assessment: PARAKH has developed competency-based report cards, though most boards are yet to implement them.
  • Four-year undergraduate degrees: Adopted by some central universities and Kerala, but slowed by faculty shortages and weak infrastructure.
  • Mother tongue instruction: Encouraged till class 5, with NCERT preparing multilingual textbooks.

Sticking Points and Bottlenecks

Some reforms remain stalled:

  • Three-language formula has been rejected by Tamil Nadu as linguistic imposition.
  • Teacher education reform lags, with the National Curriculum Framework for Teacher Education still pending.
  • Higher Education Commission of India (HECI), meant to replace UGC, remains in draft stage.
  • Breakfast alongside midday meals, recommended by NEP, was rejected due to financial constraints.

Federalism poses a key hurdle. Kerala, Tamil Nadu, and West Bengal refused to adopt PM-SHRI schools, citing central overreach, leading to funding freezes under Samagra Shiksha. Karnataka oscillated—adopting and later scrapping the four-year UG model—while pursuing its own state education policy.

Conclusion

Five years on, NEP 2020 has delivered structural reforms in school curricula, foundational learning, higher education flexibility, and digital adoption. Yet, its transformative potential remains unrealized due to limited faculty capacity, uneven state cooperation, and financial bottlenecks. For NEP to succeed, the Union and states must collaborate, ensuring adequate funding, teacher training, and institutional autonomy. Without resolving these foundational issues, the NEP risks remaining a vision more on paper than in classrooms.

Slums in Flood-Prone Areas: India’s Dual Challenge of Urbanisation and Climate Risks

  • 04 Aug 2025

In News:

A global study published in Nature Cities has revealed that India has the highest number of slum clusters in flood-prone areas worldwide, underscoring the nexus between rapid urbanisation, poverty, and increasing climate-related risks. This trend highlights both developmental and governance challenges for India as it seeks to balance inclusive growth with climate resilience.

Global Trends in Flood Risk and Slum Settlements

  • India at the Forefront: Over 158 million slum dwellers live in flood-prone areas in India, particularly in the Ganga delta. Nearly 40% of slum residents inhabit high-risk urban and peri-urban zones.
  • Regional Pattern: India is followed by Indonesia, Bangladesh, and Pakistan in terms of vulnerable populations. Globally, slum dwellers are 32% more likely to reside in floodplains than other communities.
  • Global South Impact: About 33% of informal settlements in low- and middle-income countries are already exposed to flooding. Hotspots include Rwanda, Morocco, and coastal Brazil.
  • Cities at Risk: High slum density correlates with flood-prone megacities such as Mumbai and Jakarta.

Drivers of Flood Vulnerability in India

  • Riverine Floods: Frequent in the Brahmaputra, Ganga, and Krishna basins, driven by monsoon rains, snowmelt, and dam-related issues.
  • Urban Expansion: Between 1985–2015, India ranked third globally in urban growth into flood-prone areas. Cities like Mumbai and Bengaluru have expanded into natural floodplains.
  • Flash Floods: Incidents rose from 132 (2020) to 184 (2022), with severe events in Himachal Pradesh (2025), Wayanad (2024), Ladakh (2024), and Sikkim (2023).
    • 75% of flash floods stem from a mix of extreme rainfall and saturated soils.
  • Climate Change: Between 1981–2020, extreme rainfall events doubled, with monsoon rains intensifying by 56%, raising flood frequency.
  • Poor Drainage & Encroachments: Urban floods in Delhi, Mumbai, Hyderabad, and Chennai worsened by clogged drains and plastic waste (e.g., Chennai floods 2015).
  • Weak Local Planning: Absence of region-specific flood risk assessments hampers effective urban land-use planning and disaster preparedness.

Slums in India: Extent and Challenges

  • Definitions:
    • Pranab Sen Committee (2010) – compact settlements of ≥20 households with poor housing, sanitation, and water facilities.
    • UN-Habitat – lack of durable housing, secure tenure, sufficient living space, safe water, or sanitation.
  • Census 2011: 17% of urban India lived in 1.39 crore slum households.
  • NSSO 2012: 33,510 slums identified nationwide.
  • Hotspot States: Maharashtra, Andhra Pradesh, Uttar Pradesh, and West Bengal.
  • Major Cities: Mumbai and Kolkata host some of the densest slum populations.
  • Regulation: The Slum Areas (Improvement and Clearance) Act, 1956 governs slum rehabilitation in Union Territories; “Land” and “Colonisation” are State subjects.

Existing Initiatives

  • Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana – Urban (PMAY-U): Pucca houses with amenities; as of Dec 2024, 118.64 lakh houses sanctioned, 29 lakh for slum dwellers.
  • AMRUT & Smart Cities Mission: Infrastructure upgrades in water, sanitation, and drainage.
  • Swachh Bharat Mission – Urban 2.0: Target of garbage-free cities.
  • IFLOWS-Mumbai and CFLOWS-Chennai: Integrated flood warning systems.

Way Forward: Towards Sustainable Urban Flood and Slum Management

  • Region-Specific Flood Strategies: Based on topography and soil; integrate into the National Disaster Management Plan (NDMP).
  • Restrict Expansion into Floodplains: Enforce zoning laws and incorporate flood-resilient infrastructure under Smart Cities Mission.
  • Sustainable Urban Drainage Systems (SUDS): Rain gardens, permeable pavements, and green spaces.
  • Upgrading Slums: Use PMAY-U for resilient housing, raised plinths, and better drainage.
  • Data-Driven Risk Mapping: Use NRSC, IMD, and satellite imagery to monitor risks and emerging hotspots.
  • Sponge City Model: Adopt Shanghai-style rainwater absorption systems; Mumbai has begun implementing this.
  • Eco-Restoration of Water Bodies: Revive urban lakes/wetlands (e.g., Jakkur Lake in Bengaluru) for natural flood control.
  • Climate Adaptation Mainstreaming: Integrate climate resilience into urban planning and housing policies.

Conclusion

India’s dual challenge of informal urbanisation and intensifying floods poses a direct threat to sustainable urban development. As the 2030 Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) approach, urgent focus is needed on SDG 11 (Sustainable Cities), SDG 6 (Clean Water and Sanitation), and SDG 1 (No Poverty).
Strengthening governance, upgrading slum infrastructure, and integrating climate resilience into planning are critical to safeguard millions living at the intersection of poverty and environmental risk.

Surrogacy Age Cap Debate before the Supreme Court

  • 02 Aug 2025

Background – The Legal Framework on Surrogacy in India

India has been a global hub for assisted reproductive technologies (ART) and surrogacy for many years. To address ethical concerns, prevent exploitation, and regulate practices, Parliament enacted two laws in 2021:

  • The Assisted Reproductive Technology (Regulation) Act, 2021
  • The Surrogacy (Regulation) Act, 2021

These Acts, effective from January 2022, prohibit commercial surrogacy and allow only altruistic surrogacy (where a woman volunteers without financial compensation, apart from medical expenses and insurance).

Key Provisions:

  • Age limits:
    • Married woman (intending mother): 23–50 years
    • Married man (intending father): 26–55 years
    • Single women: only widows or divorcees aged 35–45 years
  • Certificate of essentiality: Proof of infertility, parentage order, and insurance for the surrogate are mandatory.
  • Purpose of the law: To prevent commodification of reproduction, ensure surrogacy is used only for genuine medical necessity, and safeguard the health of both surrogate and child.

The Case before the Supreme Court

Recently, the Supreme Court reserved judgment in a set of petitions challenging the age caps under these Acts.

Petitioners’ Concerns:

  • Many couples had already begun fertility procedures before January 2022, but became ineligible midway due to the new law.
  • Example: A couple aged 62 (husband) and 56 (wife) lost their only child in 2018, started fertility treatment in 2019, but after a failed embryo transfer in 2022, they were barred from further surrogacy attempts due to age restrictions.
  • They argue that applying the age limits retrospectively is unfair, as no “grandfather clause” was provided to protect ongoing cases.

Constitutional Arguments:

  • Article 14 (Right to Equality): Age-based exclusion is arbitrary.
  • Article 21 (Right to Life & Personal Liberty): Reproductive autonomy and the right to family are integral to personal liberty.
  • Discrimination against unmarried women: The law only allows widows and divorcees to access surrogacy, excluding single, never-married women.

Government’s Stand

  • Age limits reflect natural reproductive timelines and medical safety.
  • Advanced parental age poses risks:
    • Higher complications for the surrogate.
    • Genetic/epigenetic risks for the child.
    • Concerns about parents’ ability to provide long-term care.
  • Provisions align with international best practices in reproductive health.

Supreme Court’s Observations

The Bench, led by Justices B.V. Nagarathna and K.V. Viswanathan, raised critical questions:

  • Why prohibit surrogacy at advanced ages when natural late pregnancies are not barred?
  • The intent of the law was to regulate commercial surrogacy, not to deny genuine parenthood.
  • The absence of compassionate transitional provisions is problematic: “Stop, no children! Look how harsh it is,” remarked Justice Nagarathna.

Ethical and Social Dimensions

  • Balancing Autonomy and State Regulation:Reproductive choice vs. state’s role in safeguarding health and welfare.
  • Rights of Single Women:Exclusion of unmarried women raises concerns of gender equality and individual autonomy.
  • Best Interests of the Child:Child’s welfare, upbringing, and stability are central concerns in surrogacy regulation.
  • Medical Ethics:Need to prevent exploitation of surrogates and maintain ethical standards in ART practices.

Broader Constitutional Questions

  • Right to Parenthood as a Fundamental Right? The Court has earlier recognised reproductive rights as part of Article 21.
  • Equality vs. Reasonable Classification: Can the state justify different treatment based on age or marital status?
  • Legislative Gaps: The lack of a grandfather clause highlights issues in legislative foresight and transitional justice.

Conclusion

The Supreme Court’s verdict will be pivotal in shaping India’s approach to assisted reproduction. At stake is the balance between medical ethics, legislative intent, and individual reproductive rights.

The outcome may not only determine the fate of couples stuck mid-process but could also set precedents for:

  • Expanding reproductive rights,
  • Recognising unmarried women’s autonomy
  • Ensuring compassionate legal transitions in sensitive health matters.

NISAR Mission: A Landmark in Indo-US Space Cooperation and Earth Observation

  • 29 Jul 2025

In News:

The upcoming launch of the NASA-ISRO Synthetic Aperture Radar (NISAR) satellite represents a landmark in Indo-U.S. collaboration in space science. Scheduled for deployment from Sriharikota onboard a GSLV Mk-II rocket, NISAR is poised to become one of the most sophisticated Earth observation missions globally, with wide-ranging scientific, environmental, and developmental implications.

Background and Mission Overview

NISAR, developed jointly by NASA and ISRO over the past decade at a cost of approximately ?12,000 crore, is designed to provide high-resolution, all-weather, day-and-night radar imaging of the Earth’s surface. It is the first satellite globally to incorporate dual-frequency synthetic aperture radar (SAR)—combining NASA’s L-band radar (1.257 GHz) and ISRO’s S-band radar (3.2 GHz).

This dual-frequency capability enables it to penetrate forest canopies and surface layers, allowing comprehensive monitoring of dynamic Earth processes such as land deformation, biomass change, glacier dynamics, and infrastructure stability.

Technical Capabilities and Orbit

The satellite will operate from a sun-synchronous polar orbit at an altitude of 747 km. It features a 12-metre deployable mesh antenna and uses SweepSAR technology for electronically steering radar beams. With a 240 km swath width and spatial resolution between 3–10 meters, it can revisit every point on Earth every 12 days, facilitating consistent long-term monitoring.

Applications Across Critical Sectors

NISAR’s data will address six broad thematic areas:

  • Solid Earth Processes: Detecting earthquakes, landslides, and urban subsidence.
  • Ecosystem Dynamics: Estimating forest biomass, carbon stocks, and biodiversity changes.
  • Cryosphere Studies: Tracking glacier movements and polar ice thickness.
  • Coastal Monitoring: Observing shoreline erosion and marine hazards.
  • Disaster Management: Generating damage proxy maps within five hours of events like floods or cyclones.
  • Agriculture and Infrastructure: Supporting food security, yield estimation, and infrastructure health monitoring.

India-specific applications include real-time soil moisture analysis, crop forecasting, flood mapping, and disaster relief planning. The S-band will be operated more intensively over Indian territory, addressing national developmental priorities.

Collaborative Contributions

The mission reflects a balanced international partnership. ISRO has provided the spacecraft bus, S-band radar, telemetry systems, and launch services, while NASA has contributed the L-band radar, antenna system, onboard electronics, and global data infrastructure. Final integration and testing were conducted in Bengaluru, reinforcing India's growing capability in complex space missions.

Data Policy and Accessibility

Following an open data policy, NISAR will make its data freely accessible to scientists, governments, and the public. ISRO’s Shadnagar ground station and Antarctica node will handle domestic reception and processing, while NASA will manage global downlink via its Near Earth Network.

Significance for India and the World

NISAR enhances India’s Earth observation portfolio and strengthens climate resilience, agricultural sustainability, and disaster preparedness. It also elevates India’s profile in global space diplomacy, aligning with goals under climate action, SDGs, and science diplomacy.

In conclusion, NISAR is not just a technological achievement but a strategic asset for planetary monitoring and sustainable development, embodying the spirit of science for global good and showcasing India’s capacity to lead in international space cooperation.

PM Modi’s Visit to the Maldives: A Strategic Reset in India’s Indian Ocean Diplomacy

  • 28 Jul 2025

In News:

Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s visit to the Maldives in July 2025 marked a significant diplomatic milestone, especially as it came amid shifting regional dynamics. Invited as the Guest of Honour for the 60th Independence Day celebrations, this was his third visit to the Maldives and the first by a foreign Head of Government under President Mohamed Muizzu's tenure. The event also symbolised a remarkable shift from the earlier phase of strained bilateral ties to renewed strategic alignment.

Diplomatic and Developmental Engagements

The visit featured a multifaceted agenda underscoring India’s "Neighbourhood First" and "Vision MAHASAGAR" policies. A commemorative stamp was released jointly by both leaders to mark 60 years of India-Maldives diplomatic relations, symbolised through traditional maritime vessels—India’s Uru boat and Maldives’ Vadhu Dhoni—highlighting shared Indian Ocean heritage.

 

India handed over two BHISHM Health Cubes—portable medical kits capable of treating 200 casualties and sustaining medical staff for 72 hours—demonstrating commitment to regional humanitarian support. PM Modi also inaugurated the new Ministry of Defence building in Malé, constructed with Indian assistance, enhancing Maldives’ institutional capacity.

A series of high-impact projects were launched, including:

  • 3,300 social housing units in Hulhumale under Indian Buyer’s Credit,
  • Road and drainage infrastructure in Addu City,
  • Six community development initiatives, and
  • 72 vehicles and utility equipment to support local governance.

Economic Assistance and Strategic Commitments

India extended a Line of Credit (LoC) worth ?4,850 crore, notably in Indian Rupees—marking the first such transaction for Maldives. This aims to address Maldives’ twin deficit crisis and reduce dependence on foreign currency. Additionally, an agreement was signed to reduce annual debt repayments from $51 million to $29 million, providing significant fiscal relief.

Other announcements included the launch of negotiations for an India-Maldives Free Trade Agreement (IMFTA) and joint climate action through synchronized tree-planting campaigns: India’s Ek Ped Maa Ke Naam and Maldives’ 5 Million Tree Pledge.

Diplomatic Turnaround: From 'India Out' to 'India In'

The symbolism of this visit lies in its contrast to recent tensions. After assuming office in 2023, President Muizzu’s administration aligned more closely with China and ran a vocally anti-India campaign. Early signals—including calls to remove Indian military personnel—suggested a possible strategic rupture. However, India opted for diplomatic engagement over confrontation, facilitating dialogue at COP28 and replacing its military presence with civilian HAL technicians in May 2024.

This calculated patience coincided with Maldives’ economic vulnerabilities, limited Chinese assistance, and the ruling PNC’s consolidation of power. The tide began to turn with high-level Maldivian visits to India and the announcement of a shared vision for maritime and economic cooperation in late 2024.

Conclusion

President Muizzu’s recent statement that "Maldives will not do anything to harm India's security interests" reflects a diplomatic recalibration driven by pragmatism and mutual necessity. The invitation extended to PM Modi for a ceremonial role in Maldives' Independence Day, once unthinkable amid the 'India Out' rhetoric, stands as a testament to the success of India’s calibrated diplomacy in the Indian Ocean region.

India’s Early Achievement of Climate Targets

  • 25 Jul 2025

In News:

India has achieved a key milestone in its climate commitments under the Paris Agreement by fulfilling one of its core targets five years ahead of schedule. As of June 2025, non-fossil fuel sources contribute over 50% of India’s installed electricity generation capacity — a significant achievement originally set for 2030.

According to the Ministry of Power, India’s installed capacity reached 484.82 GW, of which 242.78 GW is from non-fossil sources like solar, wind, large hydropower, and nuclear energy. This rapid growth, particularly in solar (24 GW added in 2024 alone), underlines India’s leadership in renewable energy deployment. However, it also highlights key structural challenges in decarbonizing the broader energy economy.

India’s updated Nationally Determined Contributions (NDCs) under the Paris Climate Agreement (2015) comprise three primary targets for 2030:

  1. At least 50% of installed electricity capacity from non-fossil fuel sources.
  2. 45% reduction in emissions intensity (GHG emissions per unit of GDP) from 2005 levels.
  3. Creation of an additional 2.5–3 billion tonnes of CO?-equivalent carbon sink through increased forest and tree cover.

Substantial progress is also evident in the other two targets. By 2020, India had already reduced its emissions intensity by 36%, and given current economic and technological trajectories, the 45% target by 2030 appears achievable. On the forestry front, India added 2.29 billion tonnes of carbon sink by 2021. Given the annual increase of around 150 million tonnes CO? equivalent reported in the India State of Forest Report (ISFR), the carbon sink target may already be met by 2023, although official confirmation is pending.

Yet, these achievements warrant a closer look. Electricity comprises less than 22% of India’s total energy consumption. Most energy use — particularly in transport, industry, and residential sectors — still relies on direct combustion of fossil fuels like coal, oil, and gas. Furthermore, while non-fossil sources account for over 50% of capacity, they contribute only 28% to actual electricity generation due to intermittency in renewables. Consequently, clean energy forms only around 6% of India’s total energy consumption, which though modest, aligns with the global average.

The road ahead is demanding. India must now focus on decarbonizing non-power sectors through accelerated adoption of electric mobility, green hydrogen, energy-efficient technologies, and clean cooking solutions. Scaling stable power sources like nuclear and hydro is crucial to complement solar and wind. India's Small Modular Reactor (SMR) program remains in the R&D phase and is unlikely to contribute significantly by 2030.

Internationally, India’s climate leadership contrasts with the underperformance of many developed nations, especially regarding climate finance and technology transfer. While India has met and even surpassed its targets, its ability to raise ambition depends on receiving support as promised under the Paris Agreement.

In conclusion, India’s early success in achieving climate targets reflects a commitment to sustainable growth, but true climate leadership will require systemic decarbonization across all sectors, just energy transitions, and global equity in climate action.

Feeding Community Dogs: Balancing Constitutional Compassion with Public Order in India

  • 23 Jul 2025

Context:

The issue of feeding stray or community dogs has evolved into a contentious legal and social debate in India. A recent case involving a Noida resident, allegedly harassed for feeding stray dogs in the common areas of her housing society, once again brought this matter to the judicial spotlight. While the Supreme Court refrained from issuing a specific directive, it observed that citizens should consider feeding strays within their own homes—an observation that, while not binding, reignited debate on reconciling individual compassion with community concerns.

Legal Framework: The ABC Rules, 2023

The Animal Birth Control (ABC) Rules, 2023, framed under the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals Act, 1960, serve as the primary legal instrument governing the care of community animals. These rules replaced the 2001 version and introduced the term “community animals” instead of “stray dogs,” recognizing them as territorial beings who coexist with human residents.

Rule 20 of the ABC Rules mandates that Resident Welfare Associations (RWAs) or local bodies must facilitate the feeding of community dogs if any resident voluntarily chooses to do so. Designated feeding spots must be located away from high-footfall zones like staircases, entrances, and children’s play areas. Cleanliness and fixed feeding times are essential requirements. Additionally, the Rules lay down a dispute resolution mechanism involving veterinary officers, police representatives, and local welfare groups.

Constitutional and Ethical Dimensions

The legal protection of animals finds support in Article 21 of the Constitution. In the 2014 Animal Welfare Board of India vs. A. Nagaraja case, the Supreme Court interpreted the right to life and liberty to include animal life. Further, Article 51A(g) enshrines the fundamental duty of citizens to show compassion to all living beings. Thus, feeding community dogs is not merely an act of personal kindness but a constitutional obligation.

The petitioner in the Noida case was arguably fulfilling this duty. Allegedly harassed by her RWA president—who reportedly destroyed water pots and killed sterilised dogs—she faced institutional apathy when authorities failed to act. Her appeal to the Allahabad High Court was dismissed, citing inconvenience to the "common man," despite the ABC Rules’ clear guidelines.

Judicial Precedents and Clarifications

Contrary to popular media interpretation, the Supreme Court in the current case did not issue an order compelling the petitioner to feed dogs at home. Observations made during hearings are not judicial directions. Notably, the apex court had earlier stayed a 2022 Bombay High Court (Nagpur Bench) order that banned public feeding and required adopters to take dogs home—asserting that such rules violate statutory rights and compassionate duties.

Conclusion

Feeding community dogs intersects with animal rights, public safety, and civic coexistence. The ABC Rules, 2023, strike a legal and ethical balance between compassion and community order. Sterilisation and designated feeding are not only humane solutions but also public health imperatives. Going forward, increased awareness, community dialogue, and strict adherence to legal norms are vital to avoid polarisation and ensure harmonious urban living.

U.S. Designation of The Resistance Front (TRF)

  • 22 Jul 2025

In News:

India’s sustained diplomatic campaign against cross-border terrorism received a significant fillip with the United States designating The Resistance Front (TRF) as a Foreign Terrorist Organization (FTO) and a Specially Designated Global Terrorist (SDGT). The decision, announced by U.S. Secretary of State Marco Rubio, marks a strong step in countering global terror networks and reaffirms the deepening Indo-U.S. cooperation in counter-terrorism.

The TRF is widely recognized as a proxy outfit of the Pakistan-based Lashkar-e-Taiba (LeT), formed soon after the abrogation of Article 370 in 2019. Projecting itself as an indigenous, secular “resistance” movement, TRF has sought to legitimize militancy under a veneer of local identity while continuing to rely on the operational, logistical, and financial support of LeT and Pakistan’s Inter-Services Intelligence (ISI). Its rebranding strategy is aimed at evading scrutiny by international watchdogs such as the Financial Action Task Force (FATF).

TRF has claimed responsibility for several high-profile terror attacks in Jammu and Kashmir, including the Pahalgam attack in April 2025, which killed 26 tourists. Other attacks attributed to it include the Ganderbal killings (October 2024), Reasi bus attack (June 2024), and a 2020 shooting in Lal Chowk, Srinagar. Its leadership, including current chief Sheikh Sajjad Gul and spokesperson Ahmad Khalid, operate largely from Pakistani soil.

The group also runs an elaborate digital propaganda and recruitment ecosystem. Portals like KashmirFight and Jhelum Media House disseminate extremist narratives, claim responsibility for attacks, and operate as fronts for psychological operations and radicalization. These digital tools further complicate counter-terrorism efforts, allowing TRF to recruit and spread misinformation under the guise of human rights advocacy.

India banned TRF under the Unlawful Activities Prevention Act (UAPA), 1967, in January 2023, recognizing its existential threat to national security. India has consistently provided evidence of TRF’s linkages with LeT and other Pakistan-backed outfits like Jaish-e-Mohammed (JeM) in its submissions to the UN 1267 Sanctions Committee, responsible for imposing sanctions on terror-linked entities.

The U.S. designation of TRF as an FTO and SDGT is not just symbolic. It imposes concrete legal and financial restrictions, making it illegal for U.S. individuals or entities to provide support to the group. The move mandates American financial institutions to block any assets tied to TRF and enables further actions through the Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC). These actions aim to globally isolate the outfit and can also trigger secondary sanctions against foreign entities that deal with it.

India has welcomed this move, calling it a “strong affirmation” of India-U.S. cooperation in the fight against terrorism. The Ministry of External Affairs (MEA) emphasized that such steps are vital to dismantle terror infrastructure and hold proxy actors accountable. The decision also underscores a growing international consensus on the need for zero tolerance towards terrorism.

This development marks a pivotal moment in India’s counter-terror diplomacy and reinforces the need for global synergy in combating the evolving threat of state-sponsored and hybrid terrorism.

The Need to Protect India’s Linguistic Secularism

  • 20 Jul 2025

In News:

India’s identity as a democratic and pluralistic society rests not only on its religious diversity but also on its remarkable linguistic heterogeneity. According to the 2011 Census, India is home to 121 languages and 270 mother tongues, with 22 languages recognized under the Eighth Schedule of the Constitution. This linguistic diversity forms a critical part of India’s secular ethos, often overshadowed by the more frequently discussed religious dimension of secularism.

Unlike the Western model of secularism, which advocates a strict separation between religion and state, India’s secularism is inclusive and interventionist. It allows the state to engage positively in ensuring equality among different religious and linguistic groups. The Indian state does not privilege any single religion or language but guarantees all communities the right to preserve their cultural and linguistic identity.

This commitment is constitutionally enshrined. Article 343 declares Hindi in Devanagari script as the official language of the Union, but also provides space for states to choose their own official languages. Article 29 guarantees every section of citizens the right to conserve their distinct language, script, or culture. The Eighth Schedule ensures recognition and development support for 22 scheduled languages, while allowing the space for inclusion of others over time. This decentralized and accommodating approach prevents linguistic hegemony while nurturing India’s cultural mosaic.

However, recent incidents of language-based violence and exclusion — such as attacks on non-Marathi speakers in Maharashtra — signal growing tensions rooted in identity politics. While movements to preserve linguistic heritage are legitimate, they must not mutate into exclusionary practices. Historical resistance to Hindi imposition in Tamil Nadu and similar sentiments in Northeastern states stem from real concerns over cultural erasure and centralisation of linguistic power.

Such developments point to the misuse of linguistic identity as a political mobilization tool, undermining the foundational values of unity in diversity. The imposition of one language, directly or indirectly, poses a threat not just to federalism but also to the democratic fabric of the country. Language cannot be a tool for dominance; it must be a bridge for mutual respect and integration.

It is crucial to note that India does not have a national language, only an official language at the Union level. The Constitution deliberately avoids conferring national status to any language to prevent alienation and protect linguistic plurality. The respect for all languages, including non-scheduled ones and dialects, is central to India’s linguistic secularism.

Therefore, the responsibility lies with political parties, civil society, media, and educational institutions to nurture this ethos. The political class, in particular, must refrain from exploiting linguistic emotions for electoral gains. Instead, they should promote policies that encourage multilingual education, cultural exchange, and preservation of regional languages.

In an increasingly globalized and polarized world, India’s linguistic secularism must be viewed not as a passive principle but as an active commitment — essential for national unity, inclusive development, and constitutional morality. Only by valuing each language equally can India uphold the promise of democratic citizenship and cultural dignity for all.

Safe Harbour Doctrine

  • 21 Jul 2025

In News:

In a significant development shaping India’s digital governance framework, the Centre has defended its expanded use of Section 79 of the Information Technology Act and the Sahyog Portal to compel online intermediaries—including social media platforms—to remove or disable unlawful content. The debate, currently before the Karnataka High Court, arises from a challenge by platform X (formerly Twitter), which terms the Sahyog Portal a "censorship portal."

Safe Harbour vs. Government Oversight: The Legal Framework

Section 79 of the IT Act grants “safe harbour” protection to intermediaries from liability over third-party content, provided they act upon government takedown notices. However, failure to comply may lead to the withdrawal of this immunity. By contrast, Section 69A empowers the government to block content under specific grounds such as national security, public order, or foreign relations, in line with Article 19(2) of the Constitution, and backed by procedural safeguards.

Platform X argues that the Centre is bypassing Section 69A’s narrower and more legally constrained provisions by issuing de facto blocking orders under Section 79, without adequate procedural checks. This, it contends, infringes upon digital freedom of expression.

Sahyog Portal and the Government's Rationale

The Sahyog Portal, developed under the Indian Cyber Crime Coordination Centre (I4C) of the Ministry of Home Affairs, has onboarded 38 intermediaries as of March 2025—including Google, Microsoft, Amazon, Telegram, and YouTube. Meta has allowed API-based integration, while X has refused, citing legal overreach.

Defending its stance, the government argues that algorithmic content curation systems—unlike traditional editorial processes—operate at unprecedented speed and scale, without human oversight or transparency. These systems can amplify harmful or misleading content, targeting users individually in ways that traditional media cannot. Moreover, the anonymity and pseudonymity offered by online platforms, along with encrypted messaging, encourage unaccountable and extreme speech, posing serious risks to public order.

Algorithmic Curation vs. Traditional Editorial Control

The government contends that in traditional media, editors and broadcasters act as gatekeepers, ensuring a degree of content quality and moderation. Social media algorithms, however, lack such discretion, often functioning without clear standards, and thereby require regulatory intervention distinct from that applied to conventional media.

This foundational difference, the government argues, justifies a broader interpretive scope under Section 79 to address a wider class of “unlawful content” that may not directly fall under the remit of Section 69A but still demands intervention.

Balancing Freedom of Speech with Public Interest

At the heart of the issue lies the constitutional balancing of free speech (Article 19(1)(a)) with reasonable restrictions (Article 19(2)). While Section 69A aligns with specific constitutional limitations, the government argues that a broader net under Section 79 is needed to tackle content harmful to national security, social harmony, and public order—even if it doesn’t squarely fall within 19(2).

In its submission, the Centre emphasizes that the matter should be viewed not only from the lens of content creators but also from the rights and safety of content recipients and society at large.

Conclusion

This case marks a crucial intersection of digital freedom, platform responsibility, and state regulation. The government's bid to reinterpret Section 79 reflects the growing challenges of algorithmic governance in the digital era. The Karnataka High Court’s verdict will likely set a precedent in defining the limits of intermediary liability, scope of safe harbour, and the State’s role in regulating online content—all central to India’s evolving digital constitutionalism.

Cybersecurity Threats from Southeast Asia: Rising Cyber Frauds Targeting India

  • 19 Jul 2025

Introduction

Cybersecurity has emerged as a critical component of national security in the digital era. India, with its expanding digital footprint, is increasingly facing threats from transnational cybercrime syndicates. A recent analysis by the Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA) reveals a staggering Rs 1,000 crore loss per month due to cyber frauds originating from Southeast Asian countries, posing a serious threat to the Indian economy and internal security.

Magnitude of the Threat

  • According to the Indian Cyber Crime Coordination Centre (I4C) under MHA: In the first five months of 2025, cyber frauds caused a total loss of around Rs 7,000 crore.
  • Over 50% of the losses were attributed to networks operating from Cambodia, Myanmar, Laos, Thailand, and Vietnam.

Modus Operandi

  • Fraud Centers: Operate from high-security scam compounds, primarily in Cambodia (45 identified), Laos (5), and Myanmar (1), allegedly run by Chinese operators.
  • Forced Labor: Trafficked individuals, including more than 5,000 Indians, were reportedly forced to carry out cyber frauds under coercion.
  • Types of Scams:
    • Stock trading/investment scams
    • Digital arrest scams
    • Task-based/investment-based scams

Recruitment Networks and Source States

  • Recruitment agents operate largely from:
    • Maharashtra (59 agents)
    • Tamil Nadu (51)
    • Jammu & Kashmir (46)
    • Uttar Pradesh (41)
    • Delhi (38)
  • Travel Routes Tracked:
    • Routes include India to Cambodia via Dubai, China, Thailand, Vietnam, Singapore, etc.
    • Cities involved include Mumbai, Chennai, Delhi, Jaipur, Lucknow, Kochi, and Kolkata.

Government Response

  • Diplomatic Engagement:
    • Cambodian officials met Indian authorities (MEA and Central agencies) in Delhi.
    • Requested geographical coordinates of scam centers for local enforcement action.
  • Inter-Ministerial Committee: Formed to identify systemic loopholes in banking, telecom, and immigration sectors.
  • CBI Investigation: Registered FIRs against PoS agents involved in issuing ghost SIM cards aiding cybercrime.

Wider Implications

  • Global Human Trafficking Concern: Victims from Africa, East Asia, South Asia, Central Asia, Europe, and the Americas have been found in these compounds.
  • Transnational Organized Crime: The scams highlight growing cooperation between international criminal networks, using digital tools to exploit vulnerabilities across borders.

Conclusion

The scale and transnational nature of cyber frauds targeting India from Southeast Asia require a coordinated national and international response. Strengthening cyber intelligence, cross-border cooperation, digital infrastructure resilience, and public awareness are vital to securing India's cyberspace. Proactive steps such as bilateral cooperation, inter-agency coordination, and targeted enforcement are crucial to mitigate this growing internal security threat.

AI 171 Crash

  • 16 Jul 2025

In News:

On June 12, 2025, Air India flight AI 171, a Boeing 787-8 Dreamliner en route from Ahmedabad to London Gatwick, tragically crashed shortly after takeoff, killing 260 people—including 19 on the ground—in what is now the deadliest aviation disaster involving an Indian airline in four decades. A preliminary report by the Aircraft Accident Investigation Bureau (AAIB) has placed the aircraft’s fuel control switches at the centre of the crash investigation.

Fuel Control Switches: Function and Design

Fuel control switches are critical safety components that regulate the flow of fuel to aircraft engines. On a Boeing 787, equipped in this case with two GE engines, these switches are located below the thrust levers and are spring-loaded and bracket-protected to prevent accidental activation. They require a deliberate two-step manual action—lifting the switch and moving it between two positions:

  • RUN: Allows fuel flow for engine operation.
  • CUTOFF: Cuts fuel flow, effectively shutting down the engine.

These switches are typically used on the ground for engine startup and shutdown, and only in-flight during an engine failure or critical damage. Modern twin-engine aircraft like the 787 are capable of continuing flight on a single engine, making the simultaneous use of both switches highly unusual and dangerous.

Sequence of Events: Preliminary Findings

According to flight data from the Flight Data Recorder (FDR) and Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR), both engine fuel control switches were moved from ‘RUN’ to ‘CUTOFF’ within seconds of each other, shortly after takeoff. This led to simultaneous loss of thrust in both engines. Moments later, both switches were returned to the ‘RUN’ position, but by then the aircraft had lost critical altitude and control.

The cockpit recording captured one pilot asking the other why the fuel was cut off. The other responded that he had not done so. The pilots—Captain Sumeet Sabharwal with over 8,600 flying hours on the 787, and Co-pilot Clive Kundar with 1,100 hours—were both adequately experienced.

Technical and Human Factors under scrutiny

Aviation experts argue that accidental activation of both switches is nearly impossible due to the stop-lock mechanism and protective brackets. However, speculation persists over a possible technical malfunction, human error, or incorrect engine identification. A theory suggests that one engine may have failed and the pilots mistakenly shut down the working engine, though this remains unconfirmed.

Attention has also turned to the switches themselves, manufactured by Honeywell (Part No. 4TL837-3D). A 2018 FAA advisory had flagged potential issues with their locking mechanisms but did not mandate corrective action. Air India reportedly did not conduct voluntary checks, raising questions about maintenance protocols.

Conclusion:

The AI 171 crash highlights critical lapses in cockpit procedures, technical maintenance, and possibly design flaws. It underscores the need for stringent implementation of safety advisories, thorough crew training, and the use of redundant safety mechanisms. As investigations continue, the incident may prompt global regulatory reviews on cockpit ergonomics and fuel system safety protocols, reinforcing the imperative of fail-safe systems in civil aviation.

Maharashtra’s Special Public Security Bill, 2024

  • 15 Jul 2025

In News:

The Maharashtra Special Public Security Bill, 2024, passed by the Legislative Assembly, aims to combat “urban Maoism” and left-wing extremism (LWE). Modeled on the Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Act (UAPA), the Bill introduces stringent provisions to identify and dismantle urban support networks aiding insurgents. However, it has generated significant legal and civil liberty concerns due to its vague definitions, broad executive powers, and pre-trial punitive measures.

Understanding Urban Maoism

Urban Maoism refers to the strategy of the banned CPI (Maoist) to infiltrate cities and mobilise intellectuals, students, professionals, and minorities through NGOs, protests, and media campaigns. This ideology, outlined in the 2004 document Strategies and Tactics of Indian Revolution (STIR), aims to build urban logistical support for rural armed struggles while operating under the legal guise of activism, journalism, or civil society work. Notable examples include the Elgar Parishad case (2018), where activists were arrested for alleged Maoist links following Bhima Koregaon violence.

Key Provisions of the Bill

The Bill allows the government to declare an organisation “unlawful” and penalises individuals associated with it—whether through membership, fundraising, or aiding operations. It defines “unlawful activity” as interference with public order, use of criminal force against officials, incitement to disobedience of the law, or even disrupting communication systems. Punishments range from 2 to 7 years of imprisonment along with fines. All offences are cognizable and non-bailable.

A major provision allows pre-trial forfeiture of property belonging to accused persons or organisations, with only 15 days’ notice. While the affected party can appeal to the High Court within 30 days, the initial declaration is confirmed only by an Advisory Board comprising High Court-qualified persons.

Constitutional and Legal Concerns

Civil society and legal experts argue that the Bill risks criminalising legitimate dissent and peaceful protest, given its ambiguous phrasing like “practising disobedience” or “generating apprehension in the public.” Unlike the UAPA, which requires a higher threshold for proving threat to national integrity, Maharashtra’s Bill introduces lower benchmarks that could conflate dissent with sedition.

The pre-trial forfeiture of property mirrors provisions in the Prevention of Money Laundering Act (PMLA), yet lacks equivalent safeguards like adjudication by a quasi-judicial body. Moreover, principles of natural justice, such as presumption of innocence and burden of proof on the state, appear diluted.

Broader Implications

While the state’s intent to counter urban LWE influence is valid—especially given the shift of Maoist strategies from forested hinterlands to urban centres—the means adopted pose risks to constitutional rights and federal norms. The legislation exemplifies a growing trend where extraordinary laws designed for national threats are adapted at the state level, potentially disrupting the balance between security imperatives and civil liberties.

Conclusion

The Maharashtra Special Public Security Bill reflects the complex challenge of safeguarding national security while upholding democratic freedoms. Any future enactment must incorporate judicial oversight, clearer definitions, and proportionate safeguards to ensure that the fight against extremism does not erode the fundamental rights enshrined in the Constitution.

India’s Reinvigorated Outreach to the Global South

  • 14 Jul 2025

In News:

India’s foreign policy has witnessed a dynamic recalibration with Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s expansive visit to Brazil, Ghana, Trinidad & Tobago, Argentina, and Namibia. While participation in the BRICS Summit in Rio de Janeiro was central, the broader aim was to deepen India’s leadership role within the Global South — a diverse group of developing nations in Asia, Africa, Latin America, and Oceania.

Reclaiming Leadership in the Global South

India has long championed the cause of the Global South, grounded in its non-aligned foreign policy legacy and postcolonial solidarity. This identity was rejuvenated through:

  • Hosting two Voice of the Global South Summits (2023, 2024), giving a platform to over 125 developing countries.
  • Advocating for and securing African Union’s permanent membership in the G20 during its presidency, symbolizing India’s commitment to an inclusive global governance architecture.

These initiatives portray India as a bridge between the Global North and South, positioning itself as a leader that represents the interests of the voiceless in multilateral forums.

Diplomatic Course Correction: The Gaza Challenge

India’s explicit support for Israel during the Gaza conflict (post-October 7, 2023) triggered discomfort among many Global South countries, especially in the Arab and African regions that strongly support the Palestinian cause. Consequences included:

  • India’s defeat to Pakistan in the UNESCO Executive Board Vice-Chair election.
  • Limited engagement from key Global South nations in the Second Voice of the Global South Summit.

Recognizing these diplomatic setbacks, India recalibrated its stance. At the BRICS Foreign Ministers’ Meeting (2024) and the 2025 Rio BRICS Summit, India joined in expressing grave concern over Israeli military operations in Gaza and condemned strikes on Iran, signaling a return to its balanced, multivector diplomacy.

Strategic Gains at BRICS: Securing Core Interests

India also used the BRICS platform to secure vital national interests. The BRICS Leaders’ Declaration condemned the Pahalgam terror attack in Kashmir and called for combating terrorism, including cross-border terror financing. This was diplomatically significant, given:

  • China’s prior reluctance to name Pakistan-based terror actors.
  • BRICS’ growing relevance in shaping global narratives.

India’s success in inserting its security concerns into multilateral dialogue marks a maturing assertiveness in diplomacy.

Countering China, Offering Alternatives

India’s proactive outreach also serves to counter China’s rising influence in the Global South. Unlike Beijing’s Belt and Road Initiative, India emphasizes:

  • Transparent, demand-driven development assistance.
  • Capacity-building and digital partnerships.
  • Ethical, sustainable models of cooperation.

Through initiatives like International Solar Alliance, Digital Public Infrastructure partnerships, and humanitarian aid, India offers a democratic, credible alternative to Chinese financing and infrastructure diplomacy.

Conclusion:

India’s current foreign policy trajectory reflects a delicate balancing act—protecting strategic partnerships with global powers while retaining the trust of fellow developing nations. As global multipolarity deepens, India’s role as a consensus builder, ethical voice, and pragmatic actor will shape its success in becoming the leading voice of the Global South.

The Role of ‘Invisible’ Trade in India’s Foreign Exchange Earnings

  • 11 Jul 2025

In News:

India's foreign trade landscape has undergone a fundamental transformation, with "invisible" trade—comprising services exports and private remittance inflows—emerging as a dominant contributor to foreign exchange earnings. Traditionally, international trade is associated with the export and import of physical goods. However, the increasing weight of intangibles such as services and remittances has positioned India as the “office of the world” in contrast to China’s role as the “factory of the world.”

Trends in India’s Visible vs Invisible Trade

India’s merchandise exports rose from $66.3 billion in 2003–04 to $456.1 billion in 2022–23, before dipping slightly to $441.8 billion in 2024–25. While goods exports have fluctuated with global economic cycles, invisibles have exhibited resilient and consistent growth.

  • Invisible receipts increased from $53.5 billion in 2003–04 to $233.6 billion in 2013–14, and further to $576.5 billion in 2024–25.
  • In 2024–25, invisible receipts exceeded merchandise exports by $135 billion, reversing the trend from a decade earlier.

Composition of Invisible Earnings

  • Services Exports:
    • Valued at $387.5 billion in 2024–25, up from $26.9 billion in 2003–04.
    • Software services remain dominant ($180.6 billion), but significant growth has also been noted in business, financial, and communication services ($118 billion).
  • Private Transfers (Remittances):
    • Amounted to $135.4 billion in 2024–25, up from $22.2 billion in 2003–04.
    • Reflects the export of Indian human capital, with inflows from expatriates, especially in the Gulf and North America.

Economic Significance

  • Current Account Management: India’s merchandise trade deficit ballooned to $287.2 billion in 2024–25, but this was substantially offset by a net invisible surplus of $263.8 billion, keeping the current account deficit at $23.4 billion, lower than 2013–14 levels.
  • Geopolitical Immunity: Invisible earnings have remained relatively insulated from global trade tensions, protectionist tariffs, and geopolitical shocks. Unlike goods trade, services have not been significantly impacted by events such as the pandemic or global conflicts.
  • Limited Policy Support, High Impact: Despite minimal reliance on FTAs, tariff negotiations, or production-linked incentives, invisibles have flourished—highlighting the natural comparative advantage India holds in the global services and remittances market.

Comparison with China

China recorded a merchandise trade surplus of $768 billion in 2024, but faced a deficit of $344.1 billion on the invisibles front. In contrast, India posted a services trade surplus of $188.8 billion, emphasizing its role as a global service hub rather than a manufacturing powerhouse.

Conclusion

India’s foreign trade narrative has shifted decisively towards intangible exports. With robust growth in services and remittances, invisibles have become the invisible hand stabilizing India’s external sector. For sustained macroeconomic resilience, policymakers must now institutionalize support for the services sector, facilitate human capital mobility, and leverage digital infrastructure to enhance India’s global footprint in knowledge-based trade.

India’s Emerging Equity Model

  • 09 Jul 2025

In News:

According to the World Bank’s latest estimates, India has emerged as the fourth most income-equal country in the world, registering a Gini Index of 25.5 in 2022–23. This significant milestone places India just behind the Slovak Republic, Slovenia, and Belarus, surpassing many advanced and developing economies in income equality.

This achievement is paralleled by a sharp decline in extreme poverty—from 16.2% in 2011–12 to 2.3% in 2022–23—with over 171 million people lifted out of poverty in the past decade. It reflects the combined impact of sustained economic growth and the Indian state’s proactive welfare architecture.

Understanding the Gini Index and India’s Ranking

The Gini Index measures income inequality on a scale from 0 (perfect equality) to 100 (maximum inequality). With a score of 25.5, India falls into the "moderately low inequality" bracket (25–30), indicating a fair distribution of income. This is in sharp contrast to countries like China (35.7) and the United States (41.8). India's position is particularly noteworthy given its population size and diversity.

Poverty Reduction as a Catalyst for Equality

A key driver of this improved equality has been the drastic reduction in poverty, based on the World Bank’s threshold of $2.15/day (PPP). The decline to 2.3% extreme poverty signals successful poverty alleviation through targeted welfare, representing one of the most remarkable social transitions globally in the last decade.

Government Schemes and Inclusive Interventions

India’s equity gains are not accidental but the result of well-designed and executed social policies, supported by digital infrastructure and targeted delivery.

1. Financial Inclusion and DBT

  • PM Jan Dhan Yojana enabled over 55 crore bank accounts, promoting financial access across rural and urban populations.
  • Aadhaar-linked Direct Benefit Transfers (DBT) reduced leakages, saving ?3.48 lakh crore by March 2023.

2. Health Security: Ayushman Bharat provides ?5 lakh insurance coverage, with over 41 crore beneficiaries enhancing access to secondary and tertiary healthcare.

3. Food Security: PM Garib Kalyan Anna Yojana (PMGKAY) ensured food availability to 80 crore people during COVID-19 and beyond, securing nutrition and resilience.

4. Livelihood Support: Stand-Up India and PM Vishwakarma Yojana support entrepreneurship, skilling and credit access for SCs, STs, women, and traditional artisans.

A Model of Equity-Oriented Growth

India has demonstrated that inclusive digital governance, if integrated with fiscal discipline and political will, can lead to tangible socioeconomic transformation. The convergence of growth, inclusion, and resilience sets a strong foundation for social equity.

A Social Welfare Department official aptly noted, “The Gini Index of 25.5 reflects real change—better access to jobs, food, healthcare, and dignity.”

Global Context and India’s Unique Approach

Unlike Scandinavian countries that rely on entrenched welfare states, India’s equality model stems from scalable digital infrastructure, direct cash transfers, and community-centric schemes. Among 167 countries surveyed, India’s outcome stands as a beacon for other developing nations striving to achieve balanced and sustainable development.

Employment-Linked Incentive (ELI) Scheme

  • 07 Jul 2025

In News:

The Government of India has approved the Employment-Linked Incentive (ELI) Scheme with an outlay of ?99,446 crore, aimed at promoting formal employment generation, particularly in the manufacturing sector. Announced in the 2024–25 Union Budget, the scheme is part of a broader employment strategy that includes internships, skill development, and youth engagement initiatives.

Key Features of the Scheme

The ELI scheme, operational from August 1, 2025 to July 31, 2027, targets the creation of over 3.5 crore jobs. Of these, 1.92 crore newly employed individuals are expected to benefit directly. It is being implemented through the Employees Provident Fund Organisation (EPFO).

For eligible new recruits earning up to ?1 lakh/month:

  • EPFO will transfer one month’s EPF wage (up to ?15,000) in two instalments—after 6 and 12 months of continuous service.
  • Part of the incentive will be deposited in a fixed savings instrument, withdrawable later by the employee.

Incentives for employers include:

  • ?3,000 per employee/month for two years for each new employee retained for at least six months.
  • For the manufacturing sector, this benefit may extend into the third and fourth years.

Who Benefits?

The scheme primarily benefits:

  • New entrants into the formal labour market.
  • Labour-intensive sectors, especially manufacturing.
  • Employers incentivized to sustain job creation.
  • Small businesses, if implementation is expanded inclusively.

Industry Response

The industry has largely welcomed the initiative. According to FICCI’s former president, it is an “innovative” step that rewards both employees and employers. The Confederation of Indian Industry (CII) noted its potential to reshape India’s employment architecture.

However, Laghu Udyog Bharati, representing micro and small businesses, emphasized the need to include units with less than 20 employees, which dominate India’s enterprise landscape. Entrepreneurs’ associations also called for simplified and direct reimbursement models linked to verified payroll data, particularly under the MSME Ministry.

Trade Union Perspectives

While the Bharatiya Mazdoor Sangh (BMS) cautiously endorsed the scheme, other central trade unions criticized it for allegedly favoring corporates. They compared it to the Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) Scheme of 2020, where funds reportedly failed to create jobs and ended up benefiting large firms. Unions have demanded expansion of social security coverage and improved quality of employment, rather than subsidizing private sector wage bills.

Concerns and Challenges

Key concerns include:

  • The role of EPFO, traditionally a custodian of worker savings, now being tasked with implementing a government-funded job creation scheme.
  • Lack of clarity on fund disbursement responsibilities, raising doubts over accountability and oversight.
  • Fear of misuse, given past precedents of incentive leakage.
  • The structural issue of economic slowdown and stagnant worker incomes, which the scheme doesn’t directly address.

Conclusion

The ELI Scheme is a bold intervention in India’s formal employment landscape, combining wage subsidies with retention incentives. However, for it to be truly transformative, it must ensure inclusive coverage, maintain transparency, and be integrated into a broader strategy that enhances domestic demand and quality of employment. As India aims for equitable economic growth, effective implementation and stakeholder trust will be critical to its success.

A New BHARAT: Establishing India-Specific Parameters for Healthy Ageing

  • 05 Jul 2025

Introduction

As India advances toward becoming a super-aged society by the middle of this century, the focus must shift from merely increasing lifespan to enhancing healthspan—the period of life spent in good health. Recognising this, the Indian Institute of Science (IISc), Bengaluru, launched a pioneering research initiative titled BHARAT (Biomarkers of Healthy Aging, Resilience, Adversity, and Transitions). It aims to map physiological, genetic, environmental, and socio-economic indicators that define healthy ageing in the Indian context.

The Need for India-Specific Healthy Ageing Parameters

Global research in ageing has largely been Western-centric, leading to the development of diagnostic thresholds, biomarkers, and treatment regimes based on non-Indian populations. This lack of contextual relevance often results in misdiagnosis and inappropriate treatments in countries like India. For instance, biomarkers such as cholesterol, vitamin D, or C-reactive protein (CRP) may exhibit different baseline levels among Indians due to genetic, nutritional, and environmental factors, but are often interpreted using Western standards.

Furthermore, while life expectancy has increased globally, the incidence of age-related disorders like Parkinson’s and dementia is projected to rise sharply in India—by 168% and 200%, respectively, by 2050. Thus, there is an urgent need to identify early biomarkers that can predict organ deterioration before the onset of overt disease.

BHARAT Study: Objectives and Methodology

BHARAT is part of IISc’s Longevity India Programme, and seeks to establish a Bharat Baseline—a reference for what is physiologically normal for the Indian population across age groups. It will build a comprehensive, multidimensional database that includes:

  • Genomic biomarkers (genetic predisposition to diseases)
  • Proteomic and metabolic profiles (pathway-level health indicators)
  • Environmental and lifestyle factors (pollution exposure, dietary habits)

Crucially, it acknowledges that chronological age does not always match biological age, and seeks to develop more nuanced, organ-specific age markers that could enable preventive and personalised interventions.

Role of Artificial Intelligence

Given the complexity and volume of biological and lifestyle data, artificial intelligence (AI) and machine learning models are essential tools in this initiative. These technologies will aid in pattern recognition, risk prediction, and simulation of intervention outcomes, ultimately helping researchers select the most effective strategies before launching costly human trials.

Challenges and the Way Ahead

India’s vast genetic, geographic, and socio-economic diversity presents both opportunities and challenges. The BHARAT team faces hurdles such as:

  • Difficulty in recruiting healthy adult volunteers
  • Securing long-term public and private funding
  • Scaling the study to ensure pan-India representation

However, the potential impact is profound. By building an India-specific ageing dataset, BHARAT can influence the development of better diagnostics, public health policies, and preventive healthcare systems for an ageing population.

Conclusion

The BHARAT study marks a critical shift in India’s biomedical research priorities, focusing not only on longevity but on quality of life during ageing. As India prepares to navigate the challenges of demographic transition, initiatives like BHARAT will be instrumental in creating a resilient, inclusive, and health-aware society, rooted in evidence that reflects its own people.

Changing Patterns in Agricultural Output

  • 04 Jul 2025

In News:

The Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation (MoSPI) recently released the “Value of Output from Agriculture and Allied Sectors” report (June 2025), revealing significant structural changes in India’s agricultural production and consumption over the past decade. The data reflects a shift away from staple cereals toward high-value crops such as fruits, vegetables, and spices—mirroring broader socio-economic transformations.

Key Findings: Rise of High-Value Crops

The Gross Value of Output (GVO)—the total value of agricultural production before deducting input costs—highlights changing food habits and production priorities. Between 2011–12 and 2023–24, the GVO of several non-traditional crops rose sharply. For example:

  • Strawberries saw a 40-fold rise in GVO at constant prices (from ?1.32 crore to ?55.4 crore), and nearly 80-fold at current prices.
  • Pomegranate GVO quadrupled to ?9,231 crore.
  • Parmal (parwal) and pumpkin increased by 17 and 10 times, respectively.
  • Mushroom and dry ginger witnessed 3.5x and 285% growth, the latter aided by improved agro-processing infrastructure.

This transformation indicates increasing demand for horticultural and niche crops with higher returns, aligning with government focus on nutritional security and export diversification.

Declining Importance of Cereals

Contrasting the rise of high-value crops is the decline in cereal dominance. The share of cereals in agricultural GVO fell from 17.6% (2011–12) to 14.5% (2023–24). Simultaneously, consumption data shows cereals’ share in urban MPCE dropped from 6.61% to 3.74%, and in rural MPCE from 10.69% to 4.97% over the same period. This trend aligns with Engel’s Law, where rising incomes lead to a shift in spending from staples to diversified food categories.

Rising Animal Product Consumption

The share of meat in agricultural GVO increased from 5% to 7.5%, reflecting higher protein intake as incomes grew. However, its GVO growth (131%) was still lower than that of some horticultural produce like strawberry (4,000%).

Changing Consumption Patterns

Data from the 2023–24 Household Consumption Expenditure Survey (HCES) supports this structural shift. The share of fresh fruits in rural MPCE rose slightly from 2.25% to 2.66%, while in urban areas it slightly declined. Yet, a 2024 study co-authored by Shamika Ravi indicates broader accessibility, with the proportion of rural households consuming fresh fruits increasing from 63.8% to 90.3%, especially among the bottom 20% income group.

Policy and Economic Implications

This transition from staple grains to high-value crops is driven by technological advancements, shifting consumer preferences, nutritional awareness, export potential, and government support for crop diversification. It reflects a move toward a more resilient, market-oriented agricultural system.

However, challenges remain in ensuring equitable access to high-value markets, stabilizing prices, and addressing risks associated with monoculture trends.

Conclusion

The MoSPI data reveals a critical inflection point in Indian agriculture. While traditional staples are declining in prominence, the rise of high-value horticulture and livestock signals both economic opportunity and the need for targeted policy to support inclusive, nutrition-sensitive agricultural growth.

Conserving the Western Ghats

  • 03 Jul 2025

Context:

The Western Ghats, a UNESCO World Heritage Site and one of the world’s eight hottest biodiversity hotspots, stretch across six Indian states—Gujarat, Maharashtra, Goa, Karnataka, Kerala, and Tamil Nadu. Rich in endemic flora and fauna, they play a critical role in influencing the Indian monsoon, regulating climate, and sustaining major river systems like the Godavari, Krishna, and Kaveri. However, this ecologically sensitive region faces growing environmental and governance challenges.

Renowned ecologist Madhav Gadgil has strongly advocated for a community-led conservation model, citing the failures of top-down forest bureaucracy and the neglect of the Forest Rights Act (FRA), 2006. He argues that without empowering local communities, conservation efforts will remain ineffective.

Geological and Ecological Background

The Western Ghats are ancient, formed through Precambrian cratonic uplift and Deccan Traps volcanism over 600 million years ago. The western edge of the Deccan Plateau subsided post-Gondwana breakup, forming the escarpments we see today. Over time, monsoon-fed rivers carved deep valleys, resulting in the current terrain of lateritic plateaus and ridges.

With over 7,400 species—many of them endemic—the region is home to unique ecosystems. Yet, despite its ecological importance, conservation has suffered due to flawed governance, industrial exploitation, and neglect of community rights.

Challenges in Western Ghats Conservation

  • Flawed Forest Governance:Government agencies often rely on outdated and inflated forest data. For instance, Gadgil's 1975 study in Uttara Kannada revealed bamboo stocks were overestimated tenfold to justify resource extraction.
  • Industrial Pollution:Unregulated industries operate in fragile zones. The Grasim Rayon Factory in Kerala discharged mercury into the Chaliyar River, decimating fisheries and affecting tribal livelihoods.
  • Non-implementation of FRA (2006):Despite legal entitlements, Community Forest Rights (CFR) remain unimplemented in most districts, particularly in Kerala and Karnataka.
  • Monoculture Plantations:Replacement of native forests with eucalyptus and acacia has led to biodiversity loss, declining soil health, and reduced pollinator populations, as seen in Wayanad.
  • Forest Fires from Unsustainable Practices:Fire-based tendu leaf collection methods degrade forest cover. For instance, Gadchiroli and Karnataka have witnessed increased fire incidents.
  • Inaccessible Ecological Data:Forest data remains aggregated and delayed. Studies using NRSC and Global Forest Watch have exposed discrepancies in official forest cover claims.

Committee Recommendations

  • WGEEP (2011), led by Gadgil, advocated for Ecologically Sensitive Area (ESA) zoning, Gram Sabha-led conservation, and strict implementation of CFR.
  • The Kasturirangan Committee (2013) diluted these recommendations by reducing ESA coverage and favouring development-centric governance.

Way Forward

  • Implement CFR Provisions: E.g., Pachgaon in Maharashtra demonstrates how CFR-based governance can lead to sustainable bamboo harvesting and fire prevention.
  • Promote Democratic Decentralisation: Empowering Gram Sabhas, as in Kerala’s VSS model, ensures accountability and local participation.
  • Modernise Ecological Monitoring: Tools like Google Earth and Bhuvan offer real-time forest tracking, countering manipulated datasets.
  • Ban Unsustainable Industries in ESA: SC orders on mining bans in wildlife corridors must be enforced, especially in states like Goa and Kerala.
  • Support Biodiversity-Friendly Livelihoods: NTFP-based enterprises, eco-tourism, and agroforestry, like Wayanad tribal co-operatives selling organic turmeric and wild honey, can align conservation with income.

Conclusion

The Western Ghats are central to India’s ecological, hydrological, and cultural stability. Conservation rooted in community empowerment, transparent governance, and ecological integrity is essential. Only a democratic, decentralized, and data-driven model, as envisioned by Gadgil, can secure the future of this ecological treasure.

Statistical Report on Value of Output from Agriculture and Allied Sectors (2011–12 to 2023–24)

  • 02 Jul 2025

In News:

The National Statistics Office (NSO), under the Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation, released its annual publication, Statistical Report on Value of Output from Agriculture and Allied Sectors (2011–12 to 2023–24). This comprehensive report provides granular data on output values across crop, livestock, forestry, and fisheries sectors at both current and constant (2011–12) prices, offering crucial insights into trends, sectoral contributions, and regional dynamics in Indian agriculture.

Growth Trajectory and Sectoral Contributions

The Gross Value Added (GVA) of agriculture and allied sectors at current prices rose by 225%, from ?1,502 thousand crore in 2011–12 to ?4,878 thousand crore in 2023–24. At constant prices, the Gross Value of Output (GVO) increased by 54.6%, from ?1,908 thousand crore to ?2,949 thousand crore during the same period.

The crop sector remained the backbone of the agricultural economy, contributing ?1,595 thousand crore or 54.1% of the total GVO in 2023–24. Within this, cereals and fruits & vegetables together formed 52.5% of the crop output. Notably, paddy and wheat alone accounted for 85% of cereal GVO. Five states—Uttar Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh, Punjab, Telangana, and Haryana—contributed 53% of the total cereal output, with Uttar Pradesh maintaining its top position despite a decline in share from 18.6% to 17.2%.

Shifting Dynamics in Horticulture

The horticulture sector has witnessed dynamic changes. In fruits, banana (?47,000 crore) surpassed mango (?46,100 crore) in 2023–24, breaking mango’s longstanding dominance. In the vegetable group, potato retained its lead, with GVO rising from ?21,300 crore to ?37,200 crore between 2011–12 and 2023–24.

Floriculture emerged as a growing commercial interest, with its GVO nearly doubling from ?17,400 crore to ?28,100 crore. The shifts in leading states in the production of fruits, vegetables, and floriculture underscore regional diversification in agricultural growth.

Rise of Livestock and Allied Sectors

The livestock sector experienced substantial growth, with its GVO nearly doubling from ?488 thousand crore to ?919 thousand crore. While milk remained the dominant product, its share slightly decreased from 67.2% to 65.9%, whereas meat products increased their share from 19.7% to 24.1%.

In the condiments and spices category, Madhya Pradesh emerged as the top contributor with a 19.2% share, followed by Karnataka (16.6%) and Gujarat (15.5%).

The forestry and logging sector saw a moderate increase in GVO from ?149 thousand crore to ?227 thousand crore. Significantly, the share of industrial wood surged from 49.9% to 70.2%, indicating growing commercialization.

Emerging Importance of Fisheries

The fishing and aquaculture sector is becoming increasingly vital, with its contribution to total agricultural GVO rising from 4.2% to 7.0% over the period. While inland fish share declined from 57.7% to 50.2%, marine fish increased from 42.3% to 49.8%. States like West Bengal and Andhra Pradesh witnessed substantial structural shifts in fisheries production patterns.

China-Led Trilateral Nexus: A Strategic Challenge for India

  • 01 Jul 2025

Context:

In a significant development, China recently hosted the first China-Pakistan-Bangladesh trilateral dialogue in Kunming, following a similar China-Pakistan-Afghanistan meeting. These efforts signal Beijing’s strategic push to consolidate its influence in South Asia, creating new geopolitical challenges for India.

Understanding the Emerging Nexus

The trilateral arrangements—China-Pakistan-Bangladesh and China-Pakistan-Afghanistan—are part of China’s broader strategic framework to establish deeper regional roots. China drives the agenda, with Pakistan gaining strategic relevance, while Bangladesh and Afghanistan are drawn in for economic, political, and connectivity incentives.

Motivations Behind the Trilateralism

  • China aims to dilute India’s regional influence, expand the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI), and leverage Pakistan to complicate India's neighbourhood strategy.
  • Pakistan seeks Chinese economic and strategic backing to offset India, especially after facing diplomatic isolation globally.
  • Bangladesh and Afghanistan are attracted by Chinese infrastructure investment, diplomatic weight, and development assurances in a multipolar Asia.

Historical Context

  • 1962 Indo-China War: Set the foundation for Sino-Pakistan convergence as a counterweight to India.
  • 1965 Siliguri Strategy: Pakistan attempted to encircle India with support from China, Nepal, and East Pakistan, a strategy echoing today.
  • China’s Shielding at UNSC: Regular blocking of India’s attempts to designate Pakistan-based terrorists, such as Lashkar-e-Taiba operatives, at the United Nations.
  • Operation Sindoor, 2025: Pakistan deployed Chinese drones and radars; Beijing criticized India’s counterstrike, reaffirming its alliance.

Implications for India

  • Security Threats: China-Pakistan cooperation now gains a regional sheen, legitimizing their cross-border strategies, e.g., the Pahalgam attack (2025).
  • Diplomatic Setbacks: China’s increasing footprint in Dhaka and Kabul limits India’s traditional influence.
  • Strategic Encroachment: Enhanced trilateralism boosts BRI's presence in South Asia, undercutting India-led alternatives like BBIN or the Chabahar corridor.

Impact on South Asian Stability

  • Regional Polarization: Smaller nations are forced to balance between India and China, causing strategic fragmentation.
  • Risk of Proxy Conflicts: Chinese cover may embolden Pakistan’s use of cross-border terrorism.
  • Dilution of Regional Forums: SAARC and other platforms may become ineffective under Chinese influence.

Way Forward for India

  • Assert Strategic Redlines: India must clearly articulate consequences for neighbours compromising its sovereignty.
  • Deepen Regional Cooperation: Utilize BIMSTEC, IORA, and the Indo-Pacific frameworks to counterbalance Chinese presence.
  • Economic Diplomacy: Increase targeted investments, credit lines, and market access to offer credible alternatives to BRI.
  • Defence Engagement: Expand military and strategic ties with Bangladesh, Maldives, and Afghanistan.
  • Narrative Building: Promote India as a cooperative, non-hegemonic regional partner to counter Chinese narratives.

Conclusion
The China-led trilateral dialogues mark a recalibration in South Asia’s geopolitical landscape aimed at constraining India’s rise. India’s response must be multifaceted—merging strategic assertiveness with regional diplomacy and economic outreach. A confident and inclusive India can safeguard its interests and lead a stable, multipolar South Asian order.

Foreign Universities in India: A New Era in Higher Education

  • 30 Jun 2025

Context:

India is witnessing a transformative moment in its higher education sector with globally reputed foreign universities preparing to set up campuses within the country. Enabled by the UGC (Setting up and Operation of Campuses of Foreign Higher Educational Institutions in India) Regulations, 2023, and inspired by the vision of the National Education Policy (NEP) 2020, this move could reshape the academic landscape. Locations such as GIFT City (Gujarat) and Navi Mumbai have been identified as early sites for these institutions. As of mid-2025, seven universities from the UK, five from Australia, and one each from the US, Canada, and Italy have initiated or secured regulatory approvals.

Drivers of Foreign University Interest in India

  • Demographic and Economic Potential:India hosts over 40 million students in higher education, with a Gross Enrolment Ratio (GER) below 30% (AISHE 2021–22), indicating untapped potential. A growing urban middle class, rising aspirations, and the need for globally competitive education have made India an attractive destination.
  • Global Decline in Student Numbers:Countries in the Global North face declining domestic enrolments due to falling birth rates. In 2023, international students accounted for 22% in the UK, 24% in Australia, and 30% in Canada. Top U.S. universities reported up to 27% international enrolments, underscoring their reliance on overseas students for revenue.
  • Policy Tightening in Host Nations:Visa caps and policy restrictions in Australia, the UK, and Canada have constrained student inflows. Consequently, foreign institutions are exploring in-country campuses in emerging markets like India to maintain their global reach and financial sustainability.

Opportunities and Advantages

  • Academic Diversification: Indian students will gain access to internationally benchmarked curricula, faculty, and research ecosystems without the need to go abroad.
  • Cost-Effective Alternative: For students unable to afford international education, foreign campuses in India provide a more affordable and accessible option.
  • Quality Enhancement: The presence of foreign institutions could push Indian universities to raise academic standards through competition and collaboration.
  • Regional Education Hub: India may also attract students from South Asia and Africa, enhancing its regional soft power.

Challenges Ahead

  • Affordability: Tuition fees at foreign university campuses may still be beyond the reach of average Indian households, potentially limiting their impact to elite segments unless subsidized.
  • Mixed Global Precedents: Similar ventures in China and Southeast Asia have seen varied success, with some facing regulatory and financial hurdles.
  • Regulatory and Cultural Complexities: India’s bureaucratic processes, socio-cultural diversity, and policy uncertainties could pose operational challenges.
  • Modest Initial Scale: In the short term, student intake and institutional presence are expected to be limited, with success depending on market response and adaptability.

Regulatory Framework and Future Outlook

The UGC’s FHEI Regulations, 2023, provide foreign institutions with autonomy in curriculum design, faculty recruitment, admissions, and repatriation of surplus funds. Only top 500 globally ranked universities, or those with exceptional expertise in niche domains, are eligible. These reforms reflect India’s commitment to making higher education globally competitive.

If effectively implemented, foreign campuses can act as catalysts for academic reform, foster global partnerships, and elevate India’s position as an education hub. However, ensuring affordability, equitable access, and academic integrity will be key to long-term success.

Strait of Hormuz Blockade

  • 29 Jun 2025

Context:

The recent approval by Iran’s Parliament to potentially close the Strait of Hormuz, pending a final decision by its Supreme National Security Council, has intensified global concerns about energy security and geopolitical stability. This comes in response to U.S. strikes on Iranian military sites, marking a serious escalation in the Gulf region.

Strategic Significance of the Strait of Hormuz

  • The Strait of Hormuz is a 33 km-wide maritime chokepoint linking the Persian Gulf with the Gulf of Oman and, subsequently, the Arabian Sea. It handles over 25% of global seaborne oil trade, 20% of global oil consumption, and 20% of LNG trade, primarily from Qatar.
  • The geographical location of the strait—falling within Iranian and Omani territorial waters—makes it one of the most sensitive energy corridors globally.
  • The strait’s vulnerability is compounded by its narrow 3 km-wide navigational channels, making it susceptible to blockades, naval mines, missile strikes, or cyberattacks.
  • Historically, Iran has issued such threats without actual closure, even during periods of conflict, largely due to its own dependency on the strait for oil exports, especially to China.

Implications of a Blockade

A complete or even partial blockade could have catastrophic global impacts:

  • Disruption of Global Energy Supply: With no alternative sea route, any disruption would curtaildaily movement of 20 million barrels of oil, causingsharp price spikes.
  • Limited Overland Alternatives: Saudi Arabia’s East-West pipeline (5 million bpd) and the UAE’s Fujairah pipeline (1.8 million bpd) cannot compensate for the loss of Hormuz transit.
  • Higher Shipping and Insurance Costs: Perceived risk increases freight rates, insurance premiums, and logistical expenses globally.

Impact on India

India, the third-largest crude oil consumer, imports over 85% of its oil and 50% of its natural gas. In May 2025 alone, 47% of India’s crude imports passed through the Strait of Hormuz. Disruption would result in:

  • Price Volatility: Even if supplies are not entirely blocked, oil and gas prices will spike, stressing the economy.
  • Macroeconomic Stress: A surge in energy prices could widen the trade deficit, weaken the rupee, reduce forex reserves, and raise inflation.
  • Competitive Pressure: If Iran’s exports to China are blocked, Beijing may seek oil from other producers, increasing global demand and costs, impacting India’s energy budget.

India’s Resilience and Strategic Measures

Despite the vulnerabilities, India has certain buffers:

  • Diversification of Energy Sources: Imports from Russia, the U.S., Africa, and Latin America are not dependent on Hormuz. Russian oil arrives via the Suez Canal or Cape of Good Hope, while Qatar’s LNG also uses alternate maritime routes.
  • Strategic Reserves: India maintains 9–10 days’ worth of strategic oil reserves for emergencies.
  • Government Policy Levers: In case of a prolonged crisis, the government may offer price subsidies for diesel and LPG to contain inflation.

Conclusion

The Strait of Hormuz remains a vital artery of global energy supply and a flashpoint of geopolitical tensions. While India has taken commendable steps toward energy diversification and crisis preparedness, continued diplomatic engagement in West Asia, investments in energy alternatives, and strengthening strategic reserves will be key to mitigating the fallout from any potential blockade.

Fossil Fuel Financing in 2024

  • 28 Jun 2025

In News:

In a stark contradiction to global climate goals, the world’s 65 largest banks increased their fossil fuel financing by $162 billion in 2024, reaching a total of $869 billion, up from $707 billion in 2023, according to the Fossil Fuel Finance Report 2025. This trend threatens to derail global commitments under the Paris Agreement and undermines the International Energy Agency’s (IEA) roadmap to achieving net-zero emissions by 2050.

India’s Position:

Among global lenders, the State Bank of India (SBI) was the only Indian bank featured in the top 65, rising from the 49th to 47th position. SBI’s fossil fuel financing increased modestly by $65 million, taking its 2024 total to $2.62 billion. Cumulatively, between 2021 and 2024, SBI extended $10.6 billion to fossil fuel projects. In contrast, JPMorgan Chase topped the global list with $53.5 billion in 2024 alone.

Despite this, SBI has also signalled intent to transition. It has pledged to become net zero by 2055, and aims to ensure that 7.5% of its domestic advances are green by 2030. As of March 2024, SBI had sanctioned ?20,558 crore in sustainable finance. However, this dual-track financing model raises questions about the coherence of India's green finance agenda.

Global Setbacks and Policy Rollbacks

2024 witnessed a rollback in climate-related financial commitments, particularly in the United States. The withdrawal of the US from the Paris Agreement, scheduled to take effect in 2026, was accompanied by policy shifts like exiting the Net Zero Banking Alliance and the Network for Greening the Financial System (NGFS). Major banks such as Wells Fargo abandoned their net-zero commitments, signaling a broader retreat from climate-aligned finance.

This global trend is no longer confined to North America. European banks, traditionally viewed as progressive, also weakened fossil fuel exclusion policies. The result: a global rise in fossil fuel merger and acquisition financing, which reached $82.9 billion in 2024, up by $19.2 billion from 2023. Although M&As do not directly add infrastructure, they consolidate fossil fuel power at a time when the world urgently needs to pivot to renewables.

Indian Banks and the Coal Dilemma

Indian financial institutions, barring a few exceptions like Federal Bank and RBL Bank, lack explicit coal exclusion policies. According to Climate Risk Horizons, this constitutes a major blind spot. The economics of energy is shifting — renewables and storage are now often cheaper than coal, making continued fossil fuel investments financially and environmentally risky.

Conclusion

The rise in fossil fuel financing reflects a disconnect between climate rhetoric and financial action, threatening the global transition to clean energy. For India, this highlights the need for a coherent climate finance strategy, integrating environmental, financial, and developmental priorities. As a signatory to the Paris Agreement and a G20 economy, India must not only align public finance with green goals but also push for global financial reforms that discourage fossil fuel dependencies and reward sustainable investments.

Reforming India’s Food and Fertiliser Subsidies

  • 25 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s food and fertiliser subsidy regime has played a critical role in ensuring food security and supporting farm productivity. However, with extreme poverty declining from 27.1% in 2011 to a historic low of 5.3% in 2022, and the combined food and fertiliser subsidy bill exceeding ?3.5 lakh crore in FY26, there is a growing policy imperative to reimagine these subsidies for greater efficiency, fiscal prudence, and long-term sustainability.

The Current Landscape

Food and fertiliser subsidies in India are a mix of direct and indirect support mechanisms. Direct subsidies include schemes like PM-KISAN, while indirect subsidies include low-cost foodgrains under the National Food Security Act (NFSA) and price-controlled fertilisers. As per government data:

  • Food subsidy is budgeted at ?2.03 lakh crore, reaching over 800 million beneficiaries through the Public Distribution System (PDS).
  • Fertiliser subsidy is pegged at ?1.56 lakh crore, driven by rising global prices and a skewed demand for urea.

Challenges in the Current Subsidy System

  • Mismatch Between Poverty and Coverage: Despite poverty falling to 5.3%, 84% of households still possess ration cards, many of whom are no longer poor. This reflects poor targeting and leads to welfare leakages.
  • Nutritional Deficiency in PDS: The PDS remains cereal-centric, primarily distributing rice and wheat, while nutrition insecurity persists due to insufficient supply of pulses, edible oils, and micronutrients.
  • Fertiliser Misuse: The overuse of nitrogen-based fertilisers (particularly urea) has caused an ecological imbalance, deteriorating soil health and reducing long-term farm productivity.
  • Fiscal Constraints: Massive subsidy expenditures are crowding out investments in rural infrastructure such as irrigation, cold storage, and extension services—critical for doubling farmer incomes.
  • Leakages and Ghost Beneficiaries: Despite digitisation and Aadhaar seeding, leakages continue in both PDS and fertiliser channels, with instances like card cancellations in Jharkhand pointing to persistent inefficiencies.

Government Initiatives So Far

  • PMGKAY during COVID-19 extended free foodgrains to NFSA beneficiaries, and has now been merged with NFSA provisions.
  • Digitisation of ration cards and Aadhaar-enabled ePoS machines are being used to plug PDS leakages.
  • Neem-coated urea and the Nutrient-Based Subsidy (NBS) policy aim to reduce misuse and promote balanced fertilisation.
  • Direct Benefit Transfer (DBT) for fertilisers is being piloted to streamline subsidy flows and reduce diversion.

Reform Measures Needed

  • Targeting and Gradation: Use PM-KISAN, SECC, and Aadhaar-linked databases to better identify the poorest 15% households and gradually taper subsidies for others.
  • Digital Food Coupons: Introduce ?700/month digital wallets or coupons for nutrient-rich food purchases (pulses, eggs, milk), improving dietary diversity and nutrition security.
  • Fertiliser Coupons & Price Rationalisation: Introduce fertiliser coupons, deregulate prices, and incentivise eco-friendly inputs like bio-fertilisers and organic compost.
  • Improve Monitoring: Strengthen data triangulation using land records, crop surveys, and income data to reduce inclusion/exclusion errors.
  • Farmer Sensitisation: Communicate the rationale for reforms clearly to farmers to avoid mistrust or resistance, as witnessed during earlier protests.

Conclusion

India’s welfare architecture must evolve with its changing socio-economic landscape. With poverty rates at historic lows, continued universal subsidies are both fiscally unsustainable and inefficient. Smartly targeted reforms in food and fertiliser subsidies are vital for improving nutritional outcomes, restoring soil health, and ensuring optimal allocation of public resources. A calibrated transition to a more efficient, inclusive, and sustainable system will enhance welfare delivery without compromising economic growth.

The Rising Cost of Imports: A Concern for India's Food Security and Farmers

  • 21 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s increasing dependence on imports of pulses and edible oils has raised serious concerns about agricultural sustainability, trade deficits, and farmer welfare. Despite policy claims of self-reliance in agriculture, recent trends highlight structural imbalances in domestic production and pricing mechanisms, especially for pulses and oilseeds.

Farmers at the Receiving End

Farmers cultivating pulses and oilseeds, such as moong, chana, masoor, and soyabean, are struggling due to poor price realization and lack of systematic procurement at Minimum Support Prices (MSP). Rao Gulab Singh Lodhi, a farmer from Madhya Pradesh, harvested 90 quintals of moong in summer 2025. Despite an MSP of ?8,682/quintal, he had to sell his produce in the open market at ?6,000/quintal due to the absence of procurement infrastructure. Soyabean prices, too, are well below MSP, selling at ?4,100–4,200/quintal against an MSP of ?5,328 (for 2025–26).

Unlike rice and wheat, for which procurement is extensive and assured, pulses and oilseeds lack institutional support, even in regions where agro-climatic conditions favour their cultivation. This discourages farmers from growing these critical crops, despite using high-yielding and climate-resilient varieties.

Pulses: From Self-Reliance to Import Surge

India witnessed a record 7.3 million tonnes (mt) of pulses imports worth $5.5 billion in 2024–25, surpassing the previous high of 6.6 mt in 2016–17. This comes after years of reduced imports, thanks to improved domestic production which had peaked at 27.3 mt in 2021–22.

However, the El Niño-induced drought in 2023–24 brought down production to 24.2 mt, leading to higher retail inflation in pulses and prompting duty cuts on imports. While these imports helped control prices—with CPI inflation in pulses falling to –8.2% by May 2025—they also depressed mandi prices. In Maharashtra, arhar and chana are currently trading below MSPs, impacting farmer incomes.

Major pulse imports in 2024–25 included:

  • 2.2 mt of yellow/white peas (Canada, Russia),
  • 1.6 mt of chana (Australia),
  • 1.2 mt each of arhar and masoor (Africa, Canada, Australia),
  • 0.8 mt of urad (Myanmar, Brazil).

Edible Oils: Worsening Import Dependency

India’s vegetable oil imports more than doubled in a decade—from 7.9 mt in 2013–14 to 16.4 mt in 2024–25. In value terms, imports jumped from $7.2 billion to $20.8 billion, driven partly by global supply disruptions (e.g., Russia-Ukraine war) and high domestic consumption.

India now imports over 60% of its edible oil needs, with palm (7.9 mt), soyabean (4.8 mt), and sunflower oil (3.5 mt) forming the bulk. In May 2025, CPI inflation for vegetable oils stood at 17.9%. In response, the Centre slashed import duties on crude palm, soyabean, and sunflower oil from 20% to 10%, reducing the overall tariff to 16.5%.

While the move may lower consumer prices, industry bodies like the Soyabean Processors Association of India have warned it will "flood the market with cheap imports", making domestic oilseed cultivation less viable. Farmers may shift to alternative crops in the coming kharif season, further weakening India’s self-sufficiency goals.

Conclusion

India’s growing import reliance for essential food commodities like pulses and edible oils, coupled with poor farm-level price realization and weak procurement systems, undermines the objectives of food security and self-reliance. Sustainable import substitution must be driven by robust domestic production incentives, fair pricing mechanisms, and resilient procurement frameworks—especially for non-cereal crops.

Why Governments Revise GDP Base Year and Why India’s 2026 Revision Matters

  • 20 Jun 2025

Context:

The Gross Domestic Product (GDP) is the most critical metric used to measure the size and performance of a country’s economy. The "base year" is the reference year against which future GDP growth is calculated. India’s current GDP base year is 2011–12. The government, through the Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation (MoSPI), is now preparing to revise it to 2022–23, with the updated series to be released in February 2026.

Why GDP Base Years are Revised

Base year revisions are necessary to reflect structural changes in the economy, incorporate improved and updated data sources, and align with global statistical standards. GDP calculation, by its definition—the market value of all final goods and services produced in an economy—requires accurate, timely, and sectorally-relevant data. However, India’s economy evolves rapidly, particularly with the expansion of the services sector and changes in consumption, production, and labour patterns.

Past revisions (seven since 1948-49) reflect efforts to modernize methodology and include newer data sources, such as the shift from decennial Census-based workforce estimates to five-yearly Employment-Unemployment Surveys by the NSSO. This aligns with the National Statistical Commission’s recommendation of rebasing economic indices every five years.

The last revision occurred in 2015 (base year changed to 2011–12), following which methodological changes attracted controversy. Experts, including former Chief Economic Advisor Arvind Subramanian, argued that the revised methodology overestimated India’s GDP growth, especially in manufacturing, due to reliance on corporate database MCA-21 over the traditional Annual Survey of Industries.

Why the 2026 Revision Is Crucial

The 2026 revision comes after India missed a base year update in 2017–18 due to data-related concerns. Two key surveys—the Consumer Expenditure Survey (CES) and the Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS)—faced credibility and methodological challenges. The 2017-18 CES suggested rising poverty, while the PLFS showed a 45-year high in unemployment—trends contrary to government narratives. These issues led to scrapping the proposed 2017–18 base year.

Additionally, disruptive policy changes like demonetisation (2016) and the rollout of GST (2017), followed by the COVID-19 pandemic, meant the following years were not "normal" reference points. The 2022–23 base year is likely to mark the first post-pandemic stable year suitable for a revised series.

This revision is especially significant as India is poised to become the world’s third-largest economy by nominal GDP. At such a juncture, the quality, accuracy, and global credibility of GDP data will directly influence investor confidence, credit ratings, and policymaking.

The base year revision will also extend to other indicators: the Index of Industrial Production (IIP) will be revised to 2022–23, and the Consumer Price Index (CPI) to 2023–24. These changes ensure that inflation and industrial output metrics remain reflective of present-day consumption and production structures.

Conclusion

Revising the GDP base year is not merely a technical exercise—it is central to economic governance. The upcoming 2026 revision must restore faith in India's statistical systems, offer a transparent methodology, and align with international best practices. Its credibility will shape India’s economic narrative for the decade to come, both domestically and on the global stage.

Israel–Iran Strike 2025

  • 15 Jun 2025

In News:

On June 13, 2025, Israel launched a large-scale military strike on Iran, targeting nuclear and military sites in Tehran. The attack resulted in the deaths of Iran’s Revolutionary Guard chief and two top nuclear scientists, marking a sharp escalation in the long-running shadow conflict between Israel and Iran.

Backdrop: Iran’s Nuclear Programme and Global Concerns

Iran claims its nuclear programme is peaceful, aimed at energy production and medical research. However, international skepticism remains high. The International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) recently declared Iran in breach of its non-proliferation obligations for the first time in two decades, citing a lack of transparency, failure to account for undeclared nuclear material, and enrichment of uranium up to 60% purity, dangerously close to weapons-grade (90%). According to reports, Iran possesses enough stockpiled uranium to build up to nine nuclear weapons, raising alarm globally.

Israel’s Strategic Calculus and the Execution of the Strike

Israel has long opposed Iran’s nuclear ambitions and the 2015 nuclear deal (JCPOA). The June 2025 assault was the culmination of years of covert operations, including the 2020 assassination of Mohsen Fakhrizadeh and earlier strikes on Iran-linked targets. The latest strike, targeting nuclear and missile facilities as well as residences of top scientists and generals, is seen as the most severe blow to Iran since the 1979 revolution.

The collapse of Iran’s regional deterrence network—its so-called “axis of resistance”—following the fall of Syrian President Bashar al-Assad in December 2024 played a critical role. With Syria no longer serving as a strategic corridor between Tehran and Hezbollah, Israel perceived an opportune moment to act.

US Foreign Policy Shift and Trump’s Role

The re-election of President Donald Trump in 2024 introduced a more confrontational posture toward Iran. Although the U.S. initially delayed the planned May strike to explore diplomacy, the failure of talks led to U.S. backing for the June operation, using military pressure as leverage for a new nuclear deal demanding Iran's full disarmament.

Regional Fallout and Global Economic Implications

The strike triggered an immediate 8% rise in global oil prices, exposing energy vulnerabilities across oil-importing nations. Particularly affected is India, which imports over 80% of its crude oil. Though India imports little directly from Iran, it depends heavily on Gulf producers like Iraq, Saudi Arabia, and the UAE, whose exports transit through the Strait of Hormuz—a vital chokepoint now under threat.

Further, disruptions in Red Sea and Suez Canal shipping routes may force Indian exporters to reroute via the Cape of Good Hope, increasing transit times by 15–20 days and pushing shipping costs up by 40–50%.

Market Response and Strategic Concerns

While oil prices are expected to stabilise due to global reserves and supply diversification, gold prices surged above ?1 lakh per 10g as investors moved to safer assets. The broader geopolitical uncertainty may stoke inflationary pressures, affecting global and Indian economic stability.

Conclusion

The Israel–Iran conflict, while regionally contained for now, holds serious global implications—challenging non-proliferation efforts, disrupting energy security, and threatening global economic stability. For India, the crisis underscores the need for diversified energy sourcing, geopolitical agility, and resilient export infrastructure to mitigate such strategic shocks.

Iran’s Non-Compliance with IAEA Safeguards

  • 16 Jun 2025

In News:

In a pivotal move, the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) Board of Governors, recently passed a resolution declaring Iran in breach of its 1974 Comprehensive Safeguards Agreement. This marks the first formal non-compliance declaration since 2006 and signals a possible escalation of Iran’s nuclear issue to the United Nations Security Council (UNSC). The resolution was passed with 19 votes in favour, 3 against (China, Russia, Venezuela), and 11 abstentions.

What led to the resolution?

The IAEA expressed grave concern over Iran’s failure to explain uranium traces found at three undeclared sites—Lavisan-Shian, Varamin, and Turquzabad. These sites, suspected to be part of an undeclared nuclear program until the early 2000s, reflect Iran’s longstanding reluctance to grant the IAEA full access and credible information.

The IAEA resolution cited Iran’s “many failures” since 2019 to provide timely cooperation. This includes Iran’s inability to account for undeclared nuclear material and activities, in violation of its obligations under the Non-Proliferation Treaty (NPT) and its 1974 Safeguards Agreement.

IAEA Safeguards and Article XII.C

Under the 1974 Safeguards Agreement, Iran is legally required to:

  • Declare all nuclear materials and maintain detailed inventories.
  • Notify the IAEA about any new nuclear facilities.
  • Allow routine and special inspections and surveillance.

The IAEA’s inability to verify the absence of nuclear material diversion for weaponisation constitutes a major safeguard failure.

The resolution was passed under Article XII.C of the IAEA Statute, which grants the Board powers to:

  • Demand corrective actions.
  • Suspend technical assistance.
  • Notify all member states.
  • Refer the case to the UNSC.

This rare Article has only been invoked six times before—against Iraq, North Korea, Iran (2006), Libya, Romania, and Syria.

Iran’s Response and Regional Tensions

Iran denounced the resolution as “political” and retaliated by:

  • Announcing plans for a new underground uranium enrichment facility.
  • Upgrading centrifuges at Fordow.
  • Placing air defence systems on alert.
  • Threatening “proportional measures” in response to Israeli and Western pressure.

A day after the IAEA resolution, Israel launched preliminary airstrikes on Iranian nuclear sites and declared a state of emergency. Iran reportedly mobilised drones in response, escalating military tensions in the region.

Broader Geopolitical Implications

This development coincides with the October 2025 deadline for the expiration of U.N. sanctions relief under the 2015 Iran Nuclear Deal (JCPOA). The U.S., which exited the JCPOA in 2018, has signaled support for “special inspections” of Iranian sites. Meanwhile, back-channel talks in Oman remain stalled, and the threat of sanctions “snapback” looms large.

The IAEA also maintains $1.5 million worth of peaceful nuclear projects in Iran, including in radiopharmaceuticals and desalination—now potentially at risk.

What lies ahead?

Iran now has a limited window to respond. If it fails to provide adequate clarifications, the Board may escalate the issue to the UNSC, which could result in renewed sanctions or binding resolutions. A follow-up Board meeting and vote is expected in September 2025.

Conclusion

The IAEA’s resolution represents a critical juncture in global non-proliferation diplomacy. It underscores the challenges of verification in the absence of cooperation and the rising tensions in the Middle East nuclear landscape. For India and the world, this raises important questions on nuclear governance, energy diplomacy, and regional stability.

 

Childhood Obesity in India: A Growing Public Health Challenge

  • 14 Jun 2025

Introduction

Childhood obesity has emerged as a serious public health concern in India, mirroring global trends. A recent study places India among the top countries grappling with rising obesity among children. This phenomenon, once limited to affluent sections, is now widespread across urban and semi-urban regions, driven by a complex interplay of dietary, behavioural, genetic, and socio-economic factors.

Understanding the Causes

  • Dietary Shifts and Unhealthy Eating Habits: The increasing consumption of calorie-dense, ultra-processed foods, sugary beverages, and fast food is one of the primary contributors to childhood obesity. Traditional, balanced home-cooked meals are being replaced due to changing family dynamics and time constraints, leading to poor nutritional choices among children.
  • Sedentary Lifestyle and Screen Time: The decline in physical activity among children is alarming. Excessive screen exposure through television, mobile phones, and video games, coupled with a lack of safe outdoor spaces and diminishing emphasis on physical education in schools, has led to a largely sedentary routine among adolescents.
  • Genetic and Medical Predispositions: Genetic predisposition plays a significant role. Children with a family history of obesity are more susceptible. Medical conditions like hypothyroidism and insulin resistance further increase vulnerability.

Consequences of Childhood Obesity

  • Physical Health Risks: Obese children are at an elevated risk of early-onset non-communicable diseases (NCDs) such as Type 2 diabetes, cardiovascular ailments, hypertension, and musculoskeletal disorders. They may also experience early puberty and related hormonal imbalances.
  • Psychosocial Impact: Beyond physical health, obesity in children is linked to psychological distress. Affected children often face bullying, social exclusion, low self-esteem, and are more prone to depression and anxiety. These challenges can persist into adulthood, impacting mental well-being and social functioning.

Preventive Strategies: The Role of Family, Schools, and Policy

  • Parental Involvement and Home Environment
    • Promoting home-cooked nutritious meals over packaged or junk food.
    • Integrating physical activities like walking, yoga, or family sports into daily routines.
    • Educating children on food labels, nutrition, and healthy choices.
    • Involving children in meal preparation and encouraging mindful eating practices.
  • School-based Interventions
    • Making physical education compulsory and structured in the school curriculum.
    • Conducting regular health screenings and awareness campaigns.
    • Promoting healthy food environments in school canteens and classrooms.
    • Organizing workshops on nutrition, mental health, and lifestyle habits.
  • Health Monitoring and Medical Intervention
    • Periodic health check-ups to identify early signs of obesity and related conditions.
    • Early medical and nutritional interventions to prevent progression to severe obesity or associated NCDs.

Policy Imperatives and Way Forward

Given its long-term implications on public health and healthcare burden, childhood obesity must be addressed through a multi-sectoral approach involving:

  • Policy frameworks that regulate food marketing targeted at children, particularly unhealthy snacks and beverages.
  • Urban planning that ensures safe public spaces for physical activity and sports infrastructure in schools.
  • Integration with national health programmes like the Rashtriya Bal Swasthya Karyakram (RBSK) and POSHAN Abhiyan to monitor and support child nutrition holistically.
  • Mass awareness campaigns to de-stigmatize obesity and promote healthy behaviours.

Conclusion

Childhood obesity is no longer a concern confined to individuals—it is a looming public health challenge with intergenerational consequences. If not addressed early, it risks leading to a population burdened by NCDs and compromised productivity. Collaborative action by parents, educational institutions, healthcare providers, and government agencies is critical to reversing this trend and ensuring a healthier future for India’s children.

Mental Healthcare in India

  • 13 Jun 2025

Introduction

Mental health has long been neglected in mainstream healthcare discourse. However, recent developments, especially in the post-pandemic era, have sparked a paradigm shift in both public perception and policy priorities. With the Mental Healthcare Act, 2017 and subsequent directives from the Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority of India (IRDAI), mental health is now legally and practically on par with physical health in India’s insurance ecosystem.

Global and National Context

  • According to the World Health Organization (WHO), mental health conditions affect 1 in 5 adults globally, resulting in over $1 trillion in productivity loss annually.
  • In India, increased awareness and policy changes have led to mental health coverage being integrated into mainstream health insurance.

Policy Milestones and Insurance Evolution

  • Mental Healthcare Act, 2017: A landmark legislation mandating equal treatment of mental and physical illnesses.
  • IRDAI Directives: Instructed insurers to include mental illness in their policy coverage.
  • Health Insurance Trends:
    • Mental health–related claims (for therapy, stress, anxiety medication) have risen by 30–50% over the past 2–3 years.
    • Outpatient Department (OPD) benefits now cover therapy, counselling, and psychiatric consultations.

Demographic and Behavioural Trends

1. Young Adults (25–35 years)

  • Major drivers of insurance adoption for mental health.
  • Key stressors include work-life imbalance, digital overload, and financial pressures.
  • Show preference for app-based therapy and digital mental health platforms.

2. Women

  • Higher uptake of mental health-inclusive policies.
  • Insurance aligned with life-stage challenges (e.g., pregnancy, menopause, caregiving).
  • Reflects increased cultural recognition of women’s emotional well-being needs.

3. Urban-Rural Divide

  • Tier-1 cities account for over 50% of mental health insurance uptake.
  • Better therapy networks, progressive employers, and higher digital literacy.
  • Tier-2 cities showing promising growth in awareness and access.

Workplace Shifts

  • Growing emphasis on mental wellness programs.
  • Initiatives include:
    • Stress management workshops
    • In-house counsellor access
    • Flexible work arrangements
  • Indicates an evolving perception of mental health as integral to employee well-being.

Challenges Ahead

  • Despite broader coverage, utilisation remains low due to:
    • Lack of awareness about existing benefits (e.g., OPD coverage, cashless therapy).
    • Social stigma and low mental health literacy.
    • Accessibility gaps in rural and semi-urban areas.

Way Forward

  • Awareness Campaigns: Promote knowledge of insurance entitlements and available services.
  • Capacity Building: Increase mental health professionals and digital outreach platforms.
  • School and Workplace Integration: Embed emotional literacy and psychological support in institutions.
  • Insurance Product Innovation: Develop simplified, accessible plans tailored to diverse demographic needs.
  • Data Collection and Monitoring: Use claim trends to shape targeted mental health interventions.

Conclusion

Mental healthcare in India is at a pivotal moment. The convergence of legal reform, insurance innovation, and shifting public attitudes is laying the foundation for a more inclusive and responsive mental health system. However, inclusion on paper must translate to accessibility in practice. Bridging this gap requires sustained efforts in awareness, education, and empathetic policy implementation.

Mental health is no longer an afterthought — it is an essential pillar of human well-being and economic productivity.

 

U.K.–EU Reset: A Strategic Gateway for India

  • 11 Jun 2025

In News:

The recent diplomatic overture by the United Kingdom under Prime Minister Keir Starmer to reset relations with the European Union (EU) marks a pivotal moment in Euro-Atlantic cooperation. Though the development appears Eurocentric, its implications for India are profound — ranging from trade facilitation and foreign policy realignment to diaspora and talent mobility. For India, this evolving Western convergence offers a unique opportunity to recalibrate its economic and strategic engagements.

Redefining India’s Trade Corridors

The renewed UK-EU cooperation — covering food safety, fisheries, customs, and border controls — has the potential to ease operational frictions for Indian exporters that emerged post-Brexit.

  • Current Trade Landscape: In FY2024, India’s exports to the EU stood at $86 billion, and to the U.K. at $12 billion, reflecting the strategic importance of these partners.
  • Post-Brexit Challenges: Indian businesses, especially in pharmaceuticals, textiles, and agri-products, faced dual regulatory requirements.
  • Reset Opportunities: A harmonised regulatory framework can reduce compliance redundancies and lower costs. India, which meets over 25% of the U.K.’s pharmaceutical demand, could benefit from unified drug approvals.
  • Sectoral Impact:
    • Indian seafood exports (worth approx. $7.38 billion) could see improved access if sanitary and phytosanitary norms are streamlined.
    • However, SMEs may face challenges in adapting to tighter European standards.

Policy Recommendation: India must bolster its export competitiveness through schemes like RoDTEP, PLI, and enhanced certification infrastructure to meet higher technical standards.

Deepening Strategic and Diplomatic Ties

A more aligned U.K.-EU foreign and defence policy creates new avenues for India to build deeper multilateral and trilateral engagements.

  • Existing Frameworks:
    • India–EU: Strategic Partnership Roadmap to 2025
    • India–U.K.: Comprehensive Strategic Partnership (2022), covering cybersecurity, climate, and maritime security
  • Potential Synergies:
    • Enhanced coordination in forums like the UN, G-20, and WTO
    • Scope for defence collaboration in the Indo-Pacific through joint naval exercises, technology transfers, and intelligence sharing

India’s partnerships with France, Germany, and the U.K. already focus on defence modernisation and green technologies. A coordinated U.K.–EU posture could formalise India’s role in shaping Western responses to strategic challenges in Asia, especially China’s assertiveness.

Global South Leadership: India can also leverage this alignment to push for climate finance, digital public infrastructure, and multilateral reform, reinforcing its leadership role post-G20 2023.

Reimagining Talent Mobility and Diaspora Engagement

India possesses the world’s largest diaspora, with significant populations in the U.K. and EU.

  • Mobility Trends:
    • In 2024, the U.K. issued over 1,10,000 student visas to Indian nationals.
    • Post-Brexit, mobility of Indian professionals to the EU was curtailed.
  • Potential Reset:
    • Renewed U.K.–EU coordination on border and migration policy may enable partial mobility reintegration.
    • India’s migration pacts with France, Germany, and Portugal could benefit from a wider U.K.–EU framework.

This realignment could lay the groundwork for a semi-integrated talent corridor, enhancing the movement of students, skilled professionals, and researchers.

Conclusion: Strategic Imperatives for India

The U.K.–EU reset is more than a European internal realignment — it is a geostrategic moment that India must strategically exploit. Whether through trade harmonisation, defence diplomacy, or diaspora engagement, India stands to gain significantly. However, to capitalise on this, India must:

  • Accelerate trade facilitation and infrastructure modernisation
  • Strengthen its regulatory frameworks
  • Enhance institutional diplomatic coordination
  • Assertively position itself in multilateral platforms

This convergence of economic and diplomatic opportunity presents India with a chance to reshape its place in the evolving global order.

Scaling India's Apparel Sector for Export Growth

  • 10 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s textiles and apparel (T&A) sector is one of its oldest and most employment-intensive industries, contributing 2.3% to GDP and employing over 45 million people, making it the second-largest employer after agriculture. Despite this, India’s share in global apparel trade has remained stagnant at around 3% for two decades—far below its potential. With global apparel trade at $529.3 billion, India’s contribution stands at just $15.7 billion, and the ambitious target of $40 billion in exports by 2030 remains distant unless bold structural reforms are initiated.

Structural Challenges

The fragmentation of the industry is a major bottleneck. Over 80% of apparel units are MSMEs, operating with limited scale, informal labour, and poor integration. In contrast, countries like China, Vietnam, and Bangladesh have achieved scale by setting up large, export-oriented factories or coordinated "buying houses" to pool capacity.

India’s cost of capital (≈9%) also hampers competitiveness, compared to 3–4.5% in China and Vietnam. Further, rigid labour laws, such as mandatory 2x overtime pay, discourage formal employment. Supply chains are dispersed, increasing delivery timelines and logistics costs. These issues are compounded by low female labour force participation, despite women comprising 70% of the workforce in leading apparel hubs.

Success Story: Shahi Exports

The example of Shahi Exports illustrates what is achievable with scale, professionalism, and inclusive practices. From a 15-member unit in 1974, it has evolved into India’s largest apparel exporter, employing over 100,000 workers (70% women) across 50+ factories in 8 states, with over $1 billion in revenue. It shows that Indian firms can scale and compete globally, but organic growth alone is too slow to meet national export goals.

Policy Reforms: A Way Forward

To unlock the sector’s full potential, transformative policy measures are required:

  • Capital Access for Scale: A 25–30% capital subsidy and a 5–7 year tax holiday for units with 1,000+ machines would help achieve viable scale. Linking incentives to size, as proposed under PLI 2.0, is essential.
  • Flexible Labour Norms: Labour reforms, such as rationalising overtime pay to 1.25x (ILO standard), and easing compliance can encourage formal hiring. Linking MGNREGA funds (25–30%) to wage subsidies in garment units can promote productive, formal employment.
  • Skilling for Demand: Schemes like SAMARTH should be expanded for short-cycle, demand-driven training, especially for women and youth, to bridge the skills gap in the sector.
  • Cluster-Based Development: At least two PM MITRA Parks should be designated as garment hubs in labour-abundant, low-cost states like Uttar Pradesh and Madhya Pradesh to reduce migration, cut costs, and promote inclusive industrialisation.
  • Export-Linked Incentives (ELI): Shift from production-linked to export-linked schemes that reward global competitiveness, not just output.

Conclusion

The apparel sector offers a rare opportunity to generate mass employment, promote inclusive growth, and boost exports. But without scale, reforms, and a strategic policy shift, the $40 billion export dream will remain elusive. India must act swiftly to replicate success stories like Shahi Exports, not over decades, but within years. The time for bold policy innovation is now.

Reforming Research Procurement in India

  • 09 Jun 2025

In News:

In a landmark move to boost scientific research and innovation, the Finance Ministry of India recently announced a series of reforms easing the procurement norms for scientific equipment. This policy shift addresses long-standing grievances from the research community about sub-standard materials, procedural delays, and restricted autonomy due to rigid procurement rules under the Government e-Marketplace (GEM).

Background: Challenges with GEM Procurement

The GEM portal, launched to promote “Make in India” procurement, mandated government institutions to source all goods through it. However, scientists highlighted serious concerns about its inefficiency, especially the inability to procure high-quality, customised scientific instruments required for cutting-edge research. Delays in procurement approvals and the necessity to first prove non-availability on GEM further hindered project timelines and research output.

Key Policy Reforms and Amendments

To rectify these issues, the government amended the General Financial Rules (GFR), introducing the following major changes:

  • Exemption from GEM Mandate:
    • Select scientific institutions and universities are now allowed to procure equipment and consumables outside the GEM portal.
    • This restores procurement autonomy to Directors, Vice-Chancellors, and Chancellors—similar to the pre-GEM era—enabling timely purchases from specialised, quality vendors.
  • Enhanced Financial Autonomy:
    • Without Quotation: Procurement limit increased from ?1 lakh to ?2 lakh for direct purchases.
    • Purchase Committee Limit: Raised from ?10 lakh to ?25 lakh, enabling quicker institutional decision-making.
    • Tender Enquiry Ceiling: Enhanced from ?50 lakh to ?1 crore, facilitating mid-level procurements efficiently.
    • These changes reflect inflation adjustments and reduce the administrative burden on research institutions.
  • Global Tender Enquiry (GTE):
    • Directors and Vice-Chancellors are now authorised to approve GTEs up to ?200 crore, a responsibility earlier restricted to departmental Secretaries.
    • This decentralisation helps avoid bottlenecks and streamlines large-scale procurements critical for advanced R&D.

Strategic Relevance and Broader Objectives

These reforms are strategically aligned with India’s aspirations under Atmanirbhar Bharat and its goal to emerge as a global science and technology leader. By reducing bureaucratic hurdles, enhancing institutional autonomy, and ensuring timely access to world-class research tools, the reforms empower innovation across sectors like health, defence, space, and agriculture.

Institutions benefitting from these measures include:

  • Department of Science and Technology (DST)
  • Department of Biotechnology (DBT)
  • Council of Scientific and Industrial Research (CSIR)
  • Department of Atomic Energy (DAE)
  • Indian Council of Medical Research (ICMR)
  • Indian Council of Agricultural Research (ICAR)
  • Defence Research and Development Organisation (DRDO)
  • Postgraduate research institutions under central and state universities

Conclusion

The revised GFR norms signify a progressive policy intervention aimed at creating a facilitative research ecosystem in India. By streamlining procurement, restoring institutional trust, and removing operational roadblocks, the government has responded positively to the scientific community's demands. As acknowledged by Science Minister Jitendra Singh, this reform is not just administrative; it is transformative—unlocking India's potential for innovation and scientific excellence.

India’s Decline in Extreme Poverty: A Decade of Significant Gains

  • 08 Jun 2025

In News:

According to the latest World Bank estimates, India’s extreme poverty has sharply declined from 27.1% in 2011-12 to 5.3% in 2022-23, based on an updated $3/day consumption threshold adjusted for 2021 purchasing power parity (PPP). In absolute terms, the number of extremely poor people has reduced from 344.47 million to 75.24 million, indicating 269 million people were lifted out of extreme poverty during this period.

The progress is more striking when viewed under the previous poverty line of $2.15/day (2017 prices). Under this standard, the extreme poverty rate fell from 16.2% to 2.3%, translating to a drop in the number of poor from 205.93 million to 33.66 million—a reduction of 172 million individuals.

Even as the poverty threshold was raised globally, India managed to outperform most developing countries. The lower-middle-income (LMIC) poverty rate, measured at a higher threshold of $4.20/day, also fell substantially—from 57.7% in 2011-12 to 23.9% in 2022-23. This decline reduced the number of people under LMIC poverty from 732.48 million to 342.32 million over 11 years.

The fall in poverty occurred despite high inflation during the decade. When adjusted for domestic inflation, even the $3/day threshold (new benchmark) is higher than the inflation-adjusted $2.60/day from previous estimates, making the achievement more credible.

The World Bank estimates also reveal stark differences in poverty distribution:

  • The top five populous states—Uttar Pradesh, Maharashtra, Bihar, West Bengal, and Madhya Pradesh—accounted for 65% of extreme poverty in 2011-12, but still made up 54% in 2022-23.
  • Rural India still shows significant poverty, with 90% of rural individuals reporting average monthly per capita expenditures below Rs 5,763, and the bottom 5% class spending just Rs 1,677.
  • Urban poverty is relatively lower, with 25.78% in the bottom 40%, compared to 45.44% in rural areas.
  • Educational attainment remains a strong poverty determinant; in 2022-23, 35.1% of Indians without schooling lived below the LMIC poverty line, compared to 14.9% with post-secondary education.

In terms of non-monetary deprivation, India also recorded improvement. As per the Multidimensional Poverty Index (MPI), which considers factors such as access to education, electricity, water, and sanitation, multidimensional poverty fell from 53.8% in 2005-06 to 15.5% in 2022-23. NITI Aayog estimates it to be 11.28%, down from 29.17% in 2013-14.

To ensure continued tracking, NITI Aayog is planning a new income-based extreme poverty measure with broader consultation. Meanwhile, the Household Consumption Expenditure Survey (HCES) 2023-24 indicates a 45.4% rise in rural consumption and 38% in urban consumption, reinforcing the World Bank’s findings.

Conclusion

India’s remarkable poverty reduction over the last decade reflects successful economic reforms, social welfare schemes, and increased consumption. However, regional, educational, and rural-urban disparities persist, necessitating continued policy focus, data refinement, and inclusive growth strategies.

Empowering India’s Elderly through Age-Tech

  • 14 Apr 2025

In News:

India is undergoing a demographic transition, with its senior citizen population (aged 60+) currently at 15 crore, projected to rise to 32 crore by 2050. This unprecedented ageing poses socio-economic challenges, especially in urban areas like Bengaluru, where shrinking family structures leave many elderly citizens isolated and purposeless. To address these concerns, a new sector—age-tech—is emerging, leveraging technology to support the physical, emotional, and cognitive well-being of the elderly.

Understanding Age-Tech and its Role

Age-tech refers to technology-driven solutions tailored to the elderly’s needs. Bengaluru has emerged as a hub of innovation in this domain. Platforms like Sukoon Unlimited, founded in 2024, create communities where seniors engage in emotional counselling, volunteering, group therapies, and concierge services. Notably, both service providers and receivers are senior citizens, fostering peer support and a sense of purpose. Sukoon’s community has grown from 200 to 6,000 members across 400 towns in a year.

Technology is also being used to combat loneliness. WHO in 2022 highlighted that one in four older adults suffers from social isolation, increasing mortality risk. AI-powered conversational tools are being employed by platforms like Sukoon to provide companionship in over 100 languages.

Employment and Purpose in Silver Years

Age-tech also facilitates post-retirement employment. Wisdom Circle, for instance, connects retired professionals with employers seeking experienced talent. With 95,000 users and 1,500 companies onboard, it promotes hybrid and part-time roles. Beyond financial gain, seniors are driven by the need for relevance and contribution to society—many even apply for lower-paid or non-profit roles.

Addressing Cognitive and Physical Health

The cognitive health of seniors is another pressing concern. Over 80 lakh Indians currently suffer from dementia. Ivory, a cognitive health start-up, offers neuroscience-backed assessments to detect risks early and recommends personalized brain training. It has over 30,000 users, predominantly women from urban areas.

Orthopaedic health is also crucial. Around 50% of seniors need assistance with basic mobility. TransleadMedtech, an IISc-incubated start-up, has developed assistive chairs and commodes to aid mobility without power sources. With rising knee replacements, such innovations are critical for safety and dignity in ageing.

Challenges and the Digital Divide

Despite potential, age-tech faces hurdles. Experts warn that over-engineering tech can alienate elderly users. Solutions must be designed with the user’s needs, not just tech potential, in mind. The urban-rural divide is stark—most services target urban, financially independent seniors, excluding rural and low-income populations.

Additionally, rapid digitisation has excluded many elderly from essential services like transport and e-commerce. Digital illiteracy also exposes them to scams. Startups like Elderra work to bridge this gap by training seniors in basic digital tools.

Way Forward

For age-tech to become inclusive, the government must play an enabling role. Public-private partnerships can make these services affordable and accessible. Ageing with dignity should be a national priority, combining technology, policy, and empathy to ensure India’s elderly are not left behind in the digital era.

Revisiting NREGA Wage Rates: A Case for Urgent Reform

  • 12 Apr 2025

In News:

The Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (MGNREGA) is the world’s largest public employment programme, aimed at ensuring livelihood security through guaranteed rural employment. However, a recent report by the Parliamentary Standing Committee on Rural Development and Panchayati Raj (April 2025) underscores a critical challenge: the wage rates under MGNREGA are increasingly inadequate, failing to provide even subsistence-level income.

With over 25 crore registered workers, the scheme is central to rural welfare. Yet, its effectiveness is diluted due to systemic underpayment. For FY 2025–26, MGNREGA wages vary from ?241 in Nagaland to ?400 in Haryana, averaging only ?294 nationally—a meagre 5% increase from the previous year. In many states, this rate is significantly lower than the prevailing minimum wage, in some cases by over ?200, raising serious questions about wage fairness and constitutional obligations.

Legal and Policy Background

Section 6 of the MGNREGA Act permits the Centre to fix wage rates independently of the Minimum Wages Act, 1948, though the wage cannot be below ?60. Historically, from 2005 to 2009, NREGA wages matched each state’s minimum agricultural wage. However, the Centre capped NREGA wages at ?100 in 2009 due to financial concerns, leading to payments falling below statutory minimum wages—a move that the Karnataka High Court (2011) and Supreme Court (2012) found violative of labour rights.

In response to mounting concerns, wage indexation to the Consumer Price Index for Agricultural Labourers (CPI-AL) began in FY 2011–12, with 2009 as the base year. Nevertheless, CPI-AL is narrow in scope compared to CPI-Rural (CPI-R), which better reflects the cost of living for rural workers across sectors.

Ignored Recommendations and Institutional Apathy

Several expert bodies have urged wage revisions. The Jean Dreze Committee (2010) advocated aligning NREGA wages with state minimum wages or, at the very least, indexing them effectively. The Mahendra Dev Committee (2014) recommended CPI-R-based indexing with an updated base year, while the Anoop Satpathy Committee (2019) proposed a national floor wage of ?375 (at July 2018 prices). However, the Centre has largely disregarded these suggestions, citing fiscal constraints.

Only a few states, including Odisha and Himachal Pradesh, have supplemented NREGA wages from their own budgets. Most continue with the Centre’s insufficient rates, causing regional disparities and undermining the constitutional promise of equal pay for equal work (Article 39).

Need for Course Correction

The current wage structure risks violating Article 23 of the Constitution, as flagged in the Supreme Court’s 1983 Sanjit Roy vs State of Rajasthan verdict, which held that paying less than the minimum wage constitutes “forced labour.”

Moreover, stagnant wages have contributed to declining worker participation. The Standing Committee rightly argues that current wages do not meet basic daily expenses and recommends a minimum daily wage of ?400. Without wage parity and realistic indexation, the scheme fails to uphold its foundational promise of dignified rural employment.

Conclusion

MGNREGA is more than a welfare scheme—it is a statutory right. To realize its full potential in promoting rural livelihoods and inclusive growth, wage reforms are imperative. Revising NREGA wages to reflect minimum wage laws, inflation trends, and regional parity is not just an economic necessity—it is a constitutional obligation.

Kashmir Rail Link: A Strategic and Developmental Milestone

  • 07 Jun 2025

In News:

The launch of the Vande Bharat Express between Katra and Srinagar by Prime Minister Narendra Modi marks a transformative chapter in Jammu and Kashmir’s infrastructural journey. The long-awaited completion of the Udhampur-Srinagar-Baramulla Rail Link (USBRL) is not merely a technological feat, but a symbol of national integration, economic upliftment, and inclusive development in the Kashmir Valley.

Historical Background

The evolution of rail connectivity in Jammu and Kashmir dates back to the colonial era when, in 1897, a 40–45 km rail line linked Jammu to Sialkot (now in Pakistan). Subsequent plans to extend railways to Srinagar in the early 20th century were shelved. After the 1947 Partition, Jammu was cut off from the rail grid as Sialkot became part of Pakistan. The region had to wait until 1975 for the inauguration of the Pathankot–Jammu line. The Jammu–Udhampur line, started in 1983, was completed only in 2004.

In 1994, the rail project was further extended to include Srinagar and Baramulla, and the USBRL was declared a national project in 2002, with the initial estimated cost of ?2,500 crore.

USBRL: Engineering Triumph

The fully operational 272 km USBRL has been completed at a revised cost of ?43,780 crore. It includes 36 tunnels, 943 bridges, and several record-setting engineering marvels in the seismically active, snow-covered terrain of the Shivalik and Pir Panjal ranges.

  • Chenab Bridge: The world’s tallest railway arch bridge, 359 meters above the riverbed, surpassing even the Eiffel Tower. Designed to withstand wind speeds of 260 km/h and extreme temperatures, it spans 1,315 meters and has a life expectancy of 120 years.
  • Anji Khad Bridge: India’s first cable-stayed rail bridge, located in Reasi, towers 331 meters above the river and stretches 725 meters. Its iconic inverted Y-shaped pylon is supported by 96 high-tensile cables.
  • Tunnel T-49: At 12.77 km, it is India’s longest transport tunnel, located in Ramban district, designed to ensure seamless all-weather connectivity.

Strategic and Socio-Economic Significance

This rail link is a game-changer for the region. By reducing Katra–Srinagar travel time to just 3 hours, it ensures year-round, all-weather accessibility, even during harsh Himalayan winters. The connectivity is critical not only for civilians but also for the rapid movement of security personnel in this strategically sensitive region.

Economically, the rail link is poised to boost trade and tourism. It will facilitate the quicker and more cost-effective transport of local produce such as apples, walnuts, saffron, pashmina, and handicrafts, thereby integrating the Valley with national markets. Reduced logistics costs will also lower the prices of essential goods imported into Kashmir.

Way Forward

The upcoming extension to Jammu Tawi aims to further enhance nationwide connectivity to Srinagar. This project stands as a testament to India’s commitment to inclusive development, national unity, and strategic infrastructure in border regions. With its blend of engineering excellence and socio-political impact, the USBRL reinforces the vision of a Viksit Bharat that leaves no region behind.

Tiger Conservation in India

  • 06 Jun 2025

In News:

India, which hosts over 70% of the world’s wild tiger population, holds a dual responsibility of pride and stewardship. The near-collapse of tiger numbers in 2006, with populations falling to around 1,400 and local extinctions in Sariska and Panna, prompted a national awakening. Strengthened interventions such as the formation of the National Tiger Conservation Authority (NTCA) and Project Tiger rejuvenation efforts helped India register over 3,600 tigers in the 2023 census, reflecting significant progress.

From Crisis to Recovery: Institutional Response

The disappearance of tigers due to poaching, habitat degradation, and poor monitoring led to structural reforms post-2006. The NTCA (established in 2005) ensured stricter protocols, better surveillance, and habitat restoration. India now boasts 53 Tiger Reserves, with central and southern states like Madhya Pradesh, Karnataka, and Uttarakhand emerging as conservation success stories.

Emerging Challenge: Prey Base Decline

Despite rising tiger numbers nationally, several reserves in eastern and central India—such as Guru Ghasidas, Indravati, Udanti-Sitanadi (Chhattisgarh), Palamau (Jharkhand), and Simlipal and Satkosia (Odisha)—have shown worrying trends of tiger decline. The core issue is not direct poaching but the fall in prey density, especially species like chital, sambar, and gaur. Scientific evidence indicates that tiger viability is closely tied to prey abundance, with a threshold of at least 10–15 prey animals per sq km required for stable populations.

Socioeconomic Roots of Ecological Depletion

Many affected reserves lie in poverty-stricken tribal regions. In the absence of alternative protein sources and sustainable livelihoods, communities turn to bushmeat hunting using traditional snares and traps. This not only reduces herbivore populations but also threatens predator survival. Palamau Reserve is a stark example where both large herbivores and tigers have nearly vanished under such pressures.

Institutional Recommendations and Ecological Restoration

The NTCA-WII 2023 report recommends short-term herbivore breeding enclosures but recognizes their limitations in rewilding success. A sustainable solution lies in habitat quality enhancement and involving communities in conservation. Some reserves still retain dense forests, providing an ecological foundation for revival. The decline of left-wing extremism in many areas also opens avenues for focused conservation interventions.

Towards Inclusive Conservation: Eco-Tourism and Livelihoods

Prosperous reserves like Bandhavgarh and Ranthambore benefit from conservation-linked tourism and community participation. In contrast, remote and underdeveloped areas lack such economic linkages. Promoting inclusive eco-tourism, skill development, and income-generation activities—such as SHGs, poultry farming, and forest produce marketing—can transform local attitudes.

Way Forward: Integrated, People-Centric Approaches

India must adopt multidimensional strategies combining ecological, institutional, and social measures:

  • Implement prey recovery plans in Tiger Conservation Plans (TCPs).
  • Provide targeted funding and technical support to underperforming states.
  • Restore grasslands, ensure wildlife corridors, and adopt technology (drones, AI) for monitoring.
  • Recognize community forest rights, promote Gram Sabha governance, and expand MGNREGA to conservation-linked jobs.

Conclusion

India’s tiger conservation success is laudable but remains precarious if prey depletion continues unchecked. The path ahead demands a shift from protectionism to participatory conservation—rooted in equity, ecological integrity, and community empowerment. The survival of the tiger is not merely a wildlife concern, but a test of India’s commitment to sustainable development and inclusive environmental governance.

Population Census 2027

  • 05 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s next population census is scheduled to be completed by March 1, 2027, marking a historic return to the decennial exercise after a 16-year gap—the longest in independent India’s history. Announced by the Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA), this census will be India’s first digital census and the first to include caste enumeration since Independence.

The census will be conducted intwo phases:

  1. House Listing and Housing Schedule
  2. Population Enumeration (including caste data)

The enumeration process will run from April 1, 2026 to February 28, 2027, with March 1, 2027, set as the reference date for most of India. For Ladakh and snow-bound areas of J&K, Himachal Pradesh, and Uttarakhand, the reference date will be October 1, 2026.

This exercise will be conducted under the Census Act, 1948 and the Census Rules, 1990. A gazette notification, expected on June 16, 2025, will formally announce the schedule. Around 25–30 lakh enumerators, largely schoolteachers, will be retrained to use a custom mobile app—a key component of the digital data collection process.

A major inclusion in this census is caste enumeration, extending beyond the current Scheduled Caste (SC) and Scheduled Tribe (ST) data. A separate input field will record caste data for all categories, making it a potentially transformative tool for targeted welfare policies and social justice initiatives.

However, the 2027 Census is not just a demographic exercise—it holds critical constitutional and political significance, especially in the context of delimitation and women's political reservation.

Under Articles 81 and 82 of the Constitution, the next delimitation of Lok Sabha and State Assembly constituencies must be based on the first census after 2026. The current 543 Lok Sabha seats are still based on the 1971 Census. The 42nd Constitutional Amendment (1976) had frozen seat redistribution, which was extended by the 84th Amendment (2002) until after 2026.

Once census data is finalized (likely by late 2027), Parliament must pass a Delimitation Act, following which a Delimitation Commission—headed by a retired Supreme Court judge and including the Chief Election Commissioner—will be constituted. This commission will determine the new seat allocation formula based on population per constituency.

Importantly, the implementation of 33% reservation for women in Parliament and State Assemblies, as mandated by the Women’s Reservation Act, is contingent upon the completion of this delimitation exercise.

This has triggered concerns, particularly from southern states like Tamil Nadu, which have seen slower population growth due to effective family planning. Redistribution based solely on population may reduce their parliamentary representation, leading to demands—such as by Tamil Nadu CM M.K. Stalin—for extending the status quo based on the 1971 census until 2056.

Political opposition has also criticized the delayed timeline, with Congress terming the 23-month postponement from 2021 as administrative inefficiency.

Moreover, there was no mention of updating the National Population Register (NPR), which is the first step towards the controversial National Register of Citizens (NRC).

In sum, Census 2027 is not just a statistical necessity but a politically sensitive and constitutionally mandated process, central to the future of electoral representation, gender justice, and federal balance in India.

India’s Green Economy: A Catalyst for Employment and Sustainable Development

  • 04 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s transition to a green economy is not only central to achieving its environmental and climate goals but is also emerging as a powerful engine for economic growth and employment generation.

According to a recent report by NLB Services, India’s green sector is expected to generate approximately 7.29 million new jobs by FY2027–28, with the figure projected to rise to 35 million by 2047, aligning with India’s long-term net-zero commitments.

Understanding the Green Economy

A green economy encompasses sectors and activities that contribute to ecological sustainability, low-carbon development, and resource efficiency, while also promoting inclusive employment. It integrates environmental goals with economic planning, thus creating green jobs in areas such as renewable energy, electric mobility, sustainable construction, waste management, and green agriculture.

Sectoral and Regional Dynamics

The most significant employment potential lies in industries such as renewable energy, electric vehicles (EVs), green infrastructure, sustainable textiles, and waste-to-energy solutions. These sectors have witnessed rising investments and policy focus under national missions such as PM-KUSUM, Faster Adoption and Manufacturing of Hybrid and Electric Vehicles (FAME), and the National Hydrogen Mission.

While metropolitan areas like Mumbai, Bengaluru, and Delhi remain hubs for green employment, tier II and III cities are poised to play a crucial role in the decentralisation of the green economy. Cities such as Jaipur, Coimbatore, Bhubaneswar, Visakhapatnam, and Indore are projected to account for 35–40% of the green job creation by FY28, primarily in logistics, warehousing, sustainable agriculture, and urban waste management.

Evolving Skill Demands

The transition towards green employment is redefining workforce skill requirements. Modern green jobs demand a blend of environmental sustainability expertise and technological proficiency, particularly in AI, IoT, GIS, blockchain, and data analytics. This digital integration is reshaping job profiles and creating pathways for future-ready employment.

In response, industries are shifting hiring strategies to focus more on skill-based recruitment rather than conventional degrees. There is also a growing emphasis on industry-academia collaborations to align curricula with the evolving demands of the green economy, thus fostering climate-literate and digitally equipped professionals.

Gender Inclusion and Equity Challenges

Despite the promising employment potential, women currently constitute only 11–12% of the green workforce in India. Barriers include limited access to STEM education, workplace safety concerns, and socio-cultural constraints. However, progressive employers are increasingly adopting inclusive hiring practices, promoting women-centric skill development programmes, and partnering with training agencies to build a more diverse and equitable green talent pipeline. These efforts are expected to improve female participation by 12–15% in the next 5–6 years.

Economic Significance

India’s green economy is expected to contribute significantly to national GDP. Its valuation is projected to reach $1 trillion by 2030, and expand to $15 trillion by 2070, supporting India’s target of achieving net-zero emissions by 2070. Thus, it offers a dual dividend—economic prosperity and environmental security.

Conclusion:
India’s green transition presents a transformative opportunity to simultaneously address climate change, unemployment, and regional disparities. With appropriate policy support, capacity building, and inclusivity, the green economy can become the bedrock of sustainable and equitable growth.

Technology Industry and Climate Goals

  • 03 Jun 2025

Introduction

The global technology sector, while being a driver of economic growth and innovation, is also a significant contributor to greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions. With the rapid expansion of cloud computing and digital services, data centres—the backbone of the digital economy—consume massive amounts of energy, primarily for cooling.

A recent landmark study by Microsoft and WSP Global, published in Nature, highlights the potential of advanced cooling technologies to significantly reduce the environmental footprint of data centres.

The Problem: Heat and Emissions from Data Centres

  • Energy Consumption: In modern data centres, cooling systems consume nearly as much electricity as computing itself.
  • Heat Management: As chips become smaller and faster, they generate more heat. Without effective cooling, systems overheat, leading to failure and reduced efficiency.
  • Climate Targets: The Information and Communications Technology (ICT) sector aims to reduce emissions by 42% by 2030 (from 2015 levels) and achieve net-zero by mid-century.

Cooling Innovations: The Game-Changers

1. Cold Plate Cooling (Direct-to-Chip Cooling)

  • Coolant flows through microchannels on a plate attached directly to the chip.
  • Reduces the need for energy-intensive air conditioning.
  • Heat is transferred away efficiently and silently.

2. Immersion Cooling

  • Entire hardware systems are submerged in thermally conductive, non-conductive liquid.
  • Uses one-phase (liquid remains stable) or two-phase (liquid vaporises and condenses) systems.
  • Ensures near-total heat dissipation and longer component life.

Environmental Impact (Study Findings):

Compared to traditional air cooling:

  • GHG Emissions by 15–21%
  • Energy Use by 15–20%
  • Water Consumption by 31–52%

With 100% renewable energy:

  • Emissions by 85–90%
  • Water use by 55–85%

Tech Industry’s Broader Climate Actions

  • Carbon Credits: Google, Netflix, and others invest in verified carbon offsets.
  • Blockchain for Carbon Markets: Ensures transparency; used by Indian IT firms for ESG compliance.
  • Renewable Energy: Tech giants like Apple, Meta, and Amazon power operations with green energy.
  • Indian Leadership: Infosys, Reliance, and Tech Mahindra lead in green operations using AI and energy-efficient systems.

Challenges and Limitations

  • Lifecycle Trade-offs: Coolant production and disposal can offset benefits.
  • Capital Cost: Retrofitting old data centres is expensive.
  • Regulatory Issues: Lack of global standards for coolants and fragmented carbon credit policies.
  • Dependence on Grid: Benefits are reduced if electricity is still coal-based.
  • Slow Deployment: Complex designs and supply chain delays hinder implementation.

Way Forward

  • Life Cycle Assessments (LCAs): Evaluate true environmental costs over the product lifecycle.
  • Unified Carbon Standards: Develop global frameworks for carbon credit verification and climate disclosures.
  • Government Support: Provide tax incentives, green finance, and subsidies for early adopters.
  • Strengthen R&D: Focus on low-impact coolants and AI-driven cooling systems.
  • Public-Private Partnerships: Encourage innovation through collaboration among tech firms, startups, and governments.

Conclusion

The technology industry stands at a crossroads where sustainable innovation is essential. Cooling technologies like cold plates and immersion cooling, coupled with renewable energy adoption and carbon offset mechanisms, can enable the ICT sector to significantly reduce its environmental footprint. With effective policy support and strategic innovation, the tech sector can become a pillar of global climate action.

Urban Flooding in India: A Growing Challenge and the Path to Resilience

  • 02 Jun 2025

In News:

Urban flooding has emerged as a critical challenge in India’s rapidly urbanising landscape. Cities like Delhi, Mumbai, Bengaluru, and Chennai face recurrent inundations, leading to loss of life, infrastructure damage, and economic disruptions. This crisis stems from a combination of outdated urban drainage systems, rapid concretisation, encroachment on natural water bodies, and climate change-induced extreme weather events.

The Urban Drainage Crisis

Urban drainage refers to the infrastructure that manages rainwater and prevents flooding. However, over 70% of India’s urban areas lack scientifically designed stormwater systems (MoHUA, 2019). Mumbai’s stormwater drains, originally built in the 1860s, can handle only 25 mm of rainfall per hour, while rainfall events often exceed 100 mm/hour. Delhi's drainage is based on 1976 norms, incapable of handling current rainfall intensities, such as the 185.9 mm received in a single day in May 2025. Bengaluru’s network is outdated, with over 65% of its lakes encroached and connected stormwater drains severely undersized.

Key causes of urban flooding include:

  • Natural Factors: Intensifying short-duration rainfalls due to climate change, low-lying topographies.
  • Man-made Factors: Unplanned urbanisation, loss of wetlands, illegal constructions, outdated design standards, infiltration of sewage into stormwater lines, and poor maintenance.

Economic and Environmental Impacts

Floods cause the highest economic damage among natural disasters in India. In 2024, Mumbai received 300 mm of rain in six hours, crippling the city’s transport and health systems. Chennai’s monsoon floods in 2024 led to massive waterlogging due to blocked drains and concretised surfaces.

Urbanisation has drastically increased impervious surfaces, reducing natural infiltration and increasing runoff. Nashik, for instance, witnessed rapid impervious expansion, contributing significantly to urban flooding.

Technological Solutions: GIS and Remote Sensing

To tackle urban flooding, advanced tools like Geographic Information Systems (GIS) and remote sensing are being deployed:

  • Satellite Monitoring: ISRO and NRSC use high-resolution imagery to monitor rainfall, land use, and flood-prone zones. LiDAR-generated Digital Elevation Models (DEMs) help map vulnerable areas.
  • Hydrological Modelling: Tools like HEC-HMS and HEC-RAS simulate flood scenarios and help plan mitigation strategies.
  • Urban Drainage Mapping: GIS assists in identifying drainage bottlenecks and encroachments. For instance, GIS studies in Ahmedabad and West Bengal’s Keleghai Basin have enabled flood risk zoning.

Government Interventions

Several policies and programs support flood mitigation:

  • AMRUT 2.0 and Smart Cities Mission: Promote integrated stormwater systems and sustainable urban drainage.
  • Model Building Bye Laws (2016): Mandate rainwater harvesting.
  • Jal Shakti Abhiyan, Atal Bhujal Yojana, and Amrit Sarovar Mission: Encourage water body rejuvenation and groundwater recharge.
  • NDMA Guidelines: Recommend real-time flood forecasting and risk mitigation using satellite data.

Future Directions

Moving forward, flood resilience must be built through:

  • Green Infrastructure: Restoring wetlands, using bioswales and permeable pavements.
  • Smart Drainage Systems: IoT-enabled sensors for real-time monitoring and early warnings.
  • AI Integration: Enhancing prediction models using real-time meteorological data.
  • Policy Enforcement: Preventing illegal constructions on floodplains and drainage channels.
  • Community Engagement: Raising awareness on waste disposal and flood preparedness.

Conclusion

Urban flooding in India reflects the failure to integrate environmental planning into urbanisation. However, with the aid of emerging technologies, inter-agency coordination, and proactive governance, Indian cities can transform from reactive flood responses to resilient urban systems. A holistic approach combining infrastructure, nature-based solutions, and data-driven policies is essential for sustainable urban development.

Bridging the Gender Gap: Insights from “Women and Men in India 2024”

  • 09 Apr 2025

In News:

The Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation (MoSPI) recently released the 26th edition of “Women and Men in India 2024: Selected Indicators and Data”, a flagship publication that offers a gender-disaggregated statistical portrait of India. This comprehensive document provides valuable insights into the progress, challenges, and opportunities in achieving gender equality across various socio-economic spheres.

Purpose and Scope

Drawing from official statistics across Ministries and Departments, the publication covers vital areas such as population dynamics, education, health, economic participation, and political representation, highlighting disparities and gains across gender lines. It also reflects urban-rural divides and regional variations, thus enabling data-driven policymaking for inclusive development.

Education: Moving Towards Gender Parity

India has shown consistent improvements in Gender Parity Index (GPI) in education. Primary and higher secondary levels have maintained high GPI values, indicating strong female enrolment rates. While upper primary and elementary levels witnessed some fluctuations, they largely remained close to parity, demonstrating the impact of initiatives like Beti Bachao, Beti Padhao and expanding access to girls’ education.

Labour Force and Financial Inclusion

Women’s Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR) has seen a marked improvement, rising from 49.8% in 2017-18 to 60.1% in 2023-24 (usual status for ages 15+). This indicates a gradual integration of women into the formal and informal workforce, though structural and cultural barriers persist.

In the financial sector, women now own 39.2% of all bank accounts and contribute 39.7% of total deposits. Their participation is especially prominent in rural India, where they make up 42.2% of account holders, showcasing the success of financial inclusion efforts under the Pradhan Mantri Jan Dhan Yojana.

Digital and Entrepreneurial Engagement

A notable trend is the sharp rise in DEMAT accounts, suggesting increased retail participation in capital markets. From March 2021 to November 2024, the total DEMAT accounts quadrupled from 33.26 million to 143.02 million. While men still dominate in terms of numbers, female participation also grew fourfold, rising from 6.67 million to 27.71 million in this period.

Encouragingly, female-led proprietary establishments across sectors such as manufacturing, trade, and services have shown a rising trend over 2021–24, indicating growing entrepreneurial confidence.

Additionally, startups with at least one woman director recognized by DPIIT rose from 1,943 in 2017 to 17,405 in 2024, underscoring the rise of women in innovation and enterprise.

Political Participation and Electoral Empowerment

Electoral data reflects the deepening roots of women’s political empowerment. The number of total electors rose from 173.2 million in 1952 to 978 million in 2024, with increasing female voter registration. Female voter turnout, which was 67.2% in 2019, stood at 65.8% in 2024. Notably, the gender gap in voting has narrowed, with female turnout surpassing male turnout in 2024, signaling a positive shift in political engagement.

Conclusion

The “Women and Men in India 2024” report is more than a statistical compendium—it is a mirror to India’s gender realities. While progress is evident in domains like education, financial inclusion, and entrepreneurship, persistent gaps remain. For India to achieve true gender equity, these insights must inform targeted, data-driven policies that empower women across all sectors, making gender equality central to the nation’s development discourse.

Prescribing Preventive Medicine for a Healthy India

  • 08 Apr 2025

In News:

As India aspires to become a $5 trillion economy and a global powerhouse, it must confront a growing public health crisis — the rising tide of non-communicable diseases (NCDs). Often called the "silent epidemic," NCDs are now the leading cause of death in India, responsible for approximately two-thirds of all mortalities. A preventive health-care mindset is the need of the hour — one that aims to "heal before there is a need to heal."

The Burden of NCDs: A Growing Threat

India has undergone a significant epidemiological transition, with communicable diseases declining but NCDs surging. Chronic ailments such as heart disease, diabetes, cancer, stroke, and chronic respiratory conditions now claim 5–6 million lives annually. Worryingly, these diseases are increasingly affecting younger populations, with 22% of Indians over the age of 30 at risk of dying from an NCD before 70.

This threatens India’s demographic dividend and economic productivity. Young patients in their 30s and 40s are presenting with heart ailments and diabetic complications, reflecting a national health crisis.

Economic Impact: A Drain on Development

The economic cost of NCDs is staggering. Reduced workforce participation and productivity losses are already costing India 5–10% of its GDP annually. A joint study by the World Economic Forum and Harvard School of Public Health estimated that India could lose $3.5–4 trillion due to NCDs between 2012 and 2030. Clearly, investment in preventive care is not a burden, but a strategic economic necessity.

Lifestyle and Environmental Triggers

Most NCDs are preventable. Key risk factors include:

  • Sedentary lifestyles
  • Unhealthy diets
  • Tobacco and alcohol use
  • Air pollution
  • Genetic predisposition

About 80% of premature cases of heart disease, stroke, and diabetes can be prevented by lifestyle modification. With 22–23% of Indian adults overweight, tackling obesity is critical. Regular 30 minutes of moderate physical activity, healthy diets low in sugar and fat, and pollution control are essential pillars of preventive health.

Early Detection and Screening: A Lifesaver

Early diagnosis through regular screenings from age 40 (or earlier with family history) enables timely intervention. This includes:

  • Hypertension and diabetes checks
  • Mammography for breast cancer
  • HPV testing for cervical cancer
  • Colon polyp screening

Early detection helps prevent complications — e.g., controlling blood pressure to prevent stroke, or detecting early-stage cancer.

Technology and AI: Catalysts for Preventive Care

India’s 750+ million smartphone users present a unique opportunity. Mobile apps, wearables, and health trackers can promote awareness and monitor health in real time.

Artificial Intelligence (AI) can:

  • Predict individual disease risk through data modelling
  • Generate health risk scores
  • Detect anomalies in X-rays or CT scans (e.g., lung nodules, fatty liver)

Used responsibly, AI enhances accuracy and access while keeping care humane and patient-centric.

Creating a Preventive Ecosystem

Preventive care must become a national mindset. Key stakeholders include:

  • Individuals: Adopt healthy habits and regular check-ups.
  • Workplaces: Implement employee wellness programmes.
  • Healthcare providers: Shift from curative to preventive approaches.
  • Government: Expand initiatives like the National Programme for Prevention and Control of NCDs and Health and Wellness Centres.

Policy measures must also be aligned — urban design should promote exercise, school curricula should include nutrition education, and food industry norms must limit unhealthy ingredients.

Conclusion

Preventive medicine is more than a health intervention — it is a development imperative. By encouraging early detection, healthy lifestyles, and technology-enabled care, India can reduce disease burden, enhance productivity, and safeguard its economic ambitions. Every individual’s choice matters. Scaled across 1.4 billion people, these choices will shape not just personal well-being but the health and prosperity of the nation.

Child Sexual Abuse in India

  • 31 May 2025

Context:

A landmark global study published in The Lancet has brought to light the disturbing scale of child sexual abuse (CSA) worldwide. Using data from 204 countries (1990–2023), the study by the Institute for Health Metrics and Evaluation found that 18.9% of women and 14.8% of men globally were victims of CSA. In India, 30.8% of women and 13.5% of men reported having experienced sexual violence before turning 18, placing it among the countries with the highest prevalence for women.

The research revealed that most abuse begins in childhood, with 67% of girls and 72% of boys facing their first abuse before 18. A staggering 26.9% of Indian women and 9.4% of men aged 20–24 continue to report having been abused during their childhood, indicating the persistence of this crisis.

Context and Contributing Factors

CSA in India is exacerbated by societal stigma, patriarchal norms, and underreporting, particularly among boys. Male survivors face additional silence due to entrenched ideas of masculinity and victim-blaming. Abuse often occurs in familiar settings, including homes and schools, with digital exploitation emerging as a growing threat.

Furthermore, regional disparities persist. Urban areas report more digital abuse, while rural areas suffer from familial exploitation compounded by lack of awareness and legal access. States like Kerala and Maharashtra show better reporting, while Bihar and Uttar Pradesh lag.

Legal and Institutional Response

India enacted the Protection of Children from Sexual Offences (POCSO) Act in 2012, a gender-neutral law covering a wide range of sexual offences with child-friendly procedures. However, implementation gaps remain:

  • Conviction rates below 30%
  • Backlogged trials
  • Insufficient training for police and judiciary

Additionally, mental health services for survivors are scarce, and sex education in schools remains inadequate, leaving children vulnerable and uninformed.

Civil Society and Global Comparisons

NGOs such as Save the Children, Kailash Satyarthi Children’s Foundation, and HAQ have played key roles in rehabilitation and awareness. International best practices offer valuable lessons:

  • Nordic countries integrate mandatory sex education.
  • Australia uses public awareness and national offender registries.

Recommendations and Way Forward

A multisectoral, prevention-focused approach is vital:

  • Legal Reforms
    • Fast-track POCSO courts
    • Child-friendly police units
    • Sensitisation training for frontline staff
  • Education System Overhaul
    • Include modules on “safe/unsafe touch” and digital safety
    • Train teachers to detect and report CSA
  • Community Engagement
    • Empower Panchayats and child welfare committees
    • Conduct grassroots campaigns to break the culture of silence
  • Technological Safeguards
    • Strengthen helplines like Childline 1098
    • Collaborate with tech platforms for safer digital ecosystems
  • Research and Data Collection
    • Create a national CSA data repository
    • Promote evidence-based policymaking through academic and NGO partnerships

Conclusion

The Lancet study underscores that CSA is not merely a criminal issue—it is a public health and social emergency. Laws like POCSO, while crucial, are not enough. What is needed is a coordinated, empathetic, and data-driven strategy that spans homes, schools, communities, and cyberspace. Only then can India safeguard its children not just from predators, but from institutional neglect and societal apathy.

Deputy Speaker of Lok Sabha

  • 30 May 2025

In News:

The office of the Deputy Speaker of the Lok Sabha, though not explicitly bound by rigid timelines, holds constitutional and democratic significance in India's parliamentary democracy. Under Article 93 of the Constitution, the Lok Sabha must elect a Speaker and Deputy Speaker from among its members "as soon as may be." Despite this mandate, the Deputy Speaker’s post has remained vacant since June 2019, reflecting a deepening divergence from constitutional propriety and democratic convention.

Constitutional Framework and Election Process

The Deputy Speaker is elected by Lok Sabha members, with the election date fixed by the Speaker and communicated through a parliamentary bulletin. As per Article 94, the Deputy Speaker remains in office until resignation, disqualification, or removal by a resolution supported by a majority. If the seat falls vacant, the House must elect a replacement. Constitutionally, under Article 95, the Deputy Speaker exercises all powers of the Speaker in their absence, including presiding over sessions, maintaining order, and ensuring legislative discipline.

While the Constitution does not mandate a time frame for this election, the phrase “as soon as may be” is intended to ensure prompt appointment to avoid any constitutional vacuum. However, the absence of legal compulsion has been misinterpreted, leading to prolonged delays.

Functions and Powers

The Deputy Speaker assists the Speaker in running the House and steps in as presiding officer when the Speaker is absent. In legislative committees, if nominated, the Deputy Speaker automatically assumes chairmanship. Distinctively, unlike the Speaker, the Deputy Speaker may participate in debates and vote on all matters when not presiding. When chairing, however, the Deputy Speaker can only vote in case of a tie. The salary of the Deputy Speaker is charged on the Consolidated Fund of India, ensuring financial independence from executive discretion.

Parliamentary Convention and Historical Practice

India's parliamentary practice, inspired by the Westminster model, has traditionally ensured balance by allocating the Deputy Speaker’s post to the Opposition, especially since the post-Emergency era. Notable examples include G.G. Swell (1969–77) and Godey Murahari (1977–79), both from Opposition parties. The intent has been to uphold a power-sharing mechanism and offer space for dissent within the House's functioning.

Democratic Concerns Arising from Prolonged Vacancy

The continued absence of a Deputy Speaker through the 17th and now 18th Lok Sabha raises serious concerns. It undermines Articles 93–95, and violates Rule 8 of the Lok Sabha Rules (1952), which mandates timely election post a formal motion. The delay centralizes authority in the Speaker—typically from the ruling party—and distorts the democratic balance between treasury and Opposition benches.

Moreover, the non-appointment sidelines the principles of consensus-based governance and institutional checks and balances, weakening parliamentary accountability. It also poses risks during any potential Speaker vacancy, potentially triggering a constitutional crisis.

Conclusion

The Deputy Speaker's post is not a ceremonial redundancy but a constitutional necessity for balanced legislative functioning. Upholding this institution is critical for the health of India’s democracy. The ongoing vacancy reflects not just administrative inaction but a gradual erosion of parliamentary conventions, warranting urgent political consensus and constitutional fidelity.

NITI Aayog Recommends Dedicated Credit Support and Reforms to Boost Medium Enterprises

  • 28 May 2025

In News:

Medium enterprises (MEs), a vital yet under-recognized segment of India’s MSME ecosystem, have long faced significant challenges, especially in accessing affordable and timely credit. Though they constitute only about 0.3% of registered MSMEs, medium enterprises contribute nearly 40% of MSME exports, highlighting their critical role in India’s industrial growth and global trade competitiveness.

Significance of Medium Enterprises in the Indian Economy

The MSME sector as a whole contributes around 29% to India’s GDP and employs over 60% of the workforce. However, while micro and small enterprises dominate in number (97% and 2.7% respectively), medium enterprises represent a minuscule share by count but a disproportionately large share in exports and innovation. Medium enterprises have a turnover range of ?100–500 crore and investment in plant and machinery between ?25–125 crore, as per the revised FY26 classification norms announced in the Union Budget 2025-26.

Credit Gap and Financing Challenges

NITI Aayog’s 2025 report, Designing Policy for Medium Enterprises, reveals a credit deficit of approximately $10 billion faced by medium enterprises. This gap stems from institutional biases and structural constraints. Unlike micro units that benefit extensively from priority sector lending, medium enterprises receive fewer such loans and face borrowing costs about 4% higher than those for large companies. Moreover, out of 18 government MSME schemes, only 8 specifically target medium enterprises, which receive less than 18% of total scheme funds (?5,442 crore overall). The absence of dedicated working capital schemes exacerbates liquidity issues, limiting growth and scale-up prospects.

NITI Aayog’s Key Policy Recommendations

  • Working Capital Financing Scheme: A sector-specific loan scheme, administered by the Ministry of MSME, is proposed to provide medium enterprises with working capital loans capped at ?25 crore, with individual requests up to ?5 crore. Loans would be linked to enterprise turnover and offered at concessional interest rates, addressing their substantial capital needs.
  • Medium Enterprise Credit Card: To meet immediate liquidity requirements—such as payroll, inventory, and equipment maintenance—a credit card facility with a pre-approved limit of ?5 crore is recommended. This facility would follow market interest rates but include a repayment grace period.
  • Expedited Credit Disbursal via Retail Banks: Leveraging local retail banks for faster fund distribution under MSME ministry supervision aims to reduce bureaucratic delays and enhance timely access to credit.
  • Technology and Skilling Initiatives: The report advocates transforming existing MSME technology centres into ‘India MSME 4.0 Competence Centres’ tailored to sectoral and regional demands, spanning industries like engineering, electronics, and specialized manufacturing. It also proposes incorporating medium enterprise-specific modules into entrepreneurship training and skilling programmes to bridge labour skill mismatches.
  • Digital Access and Compliance Support: NITI Aayog recommends creating a dedicated sub-portal within the Udyam platform that facilitates scheme discovery, compliance guidance, and AI-powered navigation to help medium enterprises efficiently access government resources.

Broader Structural Challenges

Apart from financing, medium enterprises face low adoption of advanced technologies, limited R&D support, inadequate sector-specific testing infrastructure, and a disconnect between training programmes and industry needs. These gaps impede innovation and scalability.

Strategic Importance and Policy Outlook

NITI Aayog emphasizes that medium enterprises have the potential to be major employment generators and innovation drivers if provided focused policy attention and financial support. Drawing lessons from global examples like Germany’s Mittelstand and Italy’s fashion industry, the report envisions India’s medium enterprises evolving into globally competitive firms over the next decade.

The medium sector’s formal labour structure also makes it key to transitioning India’s economy from informal to formal. Therefore, a coordinated and inclusive policy framework focusing on finance, technology, skill development, and digital infrastructure is vital to unlock this segment’s full potential and enhance India’s industrial competitiveness, export growth, and self-reliance.

India Becomes the 4th Largest Economy

  • 26 May 2025

In News:

In a significant milestone for the Indian economy, India has officially surpassed Japan to become the 4th largest economy in the world in nominal GDP terms, as per the IMF World Economic Outlook (April 2025). According to NITI Aayog CEO B.V.R. Subrahmanyam, India’s GDP now stands at $4.19 trillion, marginally higher than Japan’s $4.18 trillion. This marks a historic moment, reflecting a shift in the global economic order and reaffirming India's rising stature on the world stage.

From Fifth to Fourth: A Decade of Accelerated Growth

India’s economic rise has been particularly notable over the past decade. From a GDP of $2 trillion in 2014, India has more than doubled its output to cross the $4 trillion mark in 2025. This rapid expansion has also been accompanied by a sharp rise in per capita income, which has grown from $1,438 in 2014 to $2,880 in 2025. In global rankings, India moved from the 5th position in 2024 to 4th in 2025, overtaking Japan and trailing only the United States, China, and Germany.

Factors Driving the Surge

India’s ascent is the result of multiple structural reforms and policy initiatives undertaken in recent years. Programs such as Digital India, Atmanirbhar Bharat, and the Production Linked Incentive (PLI) scheme have enhanced domestic manufacturing, boosted digital infrastructure, and encouraged self-reliance. The government’s focus on ease of doing business, tax reforms (GST, corporate tax rationalisation), and large-scale infrastructure investment under schemes like Gati Shakti have further catalysed growth.

Despite global trends towards supply chain diversification and reshoring, India continues to attract foreign companies due to its cost-effective labor, large consumer base, and improving logistics. For instance, companies like Apple continue to expand their operations in India, viewing it as a reliable manufacturing hub.

Strategic and Geopolitical Implications

India’s new economic position carries significant geopolitical weight. As the 4th largest economy, India’s influence in global financial institutions, climate negotiations, trade partnerships, and multilateral forums such as G20 and BRICS is set to grow. The achievement enhances investor confidence, thereby potentially increasing foreign direct investment (FDI) inflows.

Domestically, this growth presents an opportunity for addressing structural issues such as unemployment, regional disparities, and income inequality. The challenge ahead lies in ensuring that growth remains inclusive, sustainable, and innovation-driven.

Future Outlook

According to NITI Aayog, India is poised to surpass Germany within the next 2.5–3 years, potentially becoming the third-largest economy globally. For this, sustaining macroeconomic stability, boosting exports, enhancing skill development, and transitioning to a green economy will be crucial.

Conclusion

India’s rise to the 4th largest economy marks a defining moment in its development trajectory. It reflects not just statistical growth, but also the success of structural reforms, demographic potential, and policy resilience. As India prepares for its next leap, balancing economic dynamism with social equity will be the key to truly becoming a global economic leader.

Structural Shift in India’s Remittance Landscape

  • 07 Apr 2025

In News:

According to the RBI’s latest Remittances Survey (2023–24), there has been a significant structural transformation in India's inward remittance patterns. Advanced Economies (AEs) — led by the United States, the United Kingdom, Canada, Singapore, and Australia — have overtaken the Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC) nations as the primary sources of remittances. This shift holds major implications for India’s migration, financial inflows, and socio-economic planning.

Changing Source Geography of Remittances

India’s total remittance inflow touched USD 118.7 billion in 2023–24, doubling since 2011. The United States alone accounted for 27.7%, followed by the UAE (19.2%), the UK (10.8%), Saudi Arabia (6.7%), and Singapore (6.6%). This marks a departure from the earlier dominance of the Gulf region, whose collective share has dropped to 38%, while Advanced Economies now contribute over 50%.

The top recipient states of these remittances in India are Maharashtra (20.5%), Kerala, and Tamil Nadu.

Factors Behind the Shift

1. Evolving Migration Trends:There has been a surge in professional, high-skilled Indian migrants heading to AEs, particularly in sectors like STEM, finance, and healthcare. These migrants tend to earn higher wages, have stronger job security, and remit more per capita compared to their low-skilled counterparts in the Gulf.

2. Declining Opportunities in the GCC:Several Gulf countries have implemented nationalisation policies like Saudi Arabia’s “Nitaqat,” which prioritise local hiring. Moreover, automation and economic diversification have reduced demand for foreign low-skilled workers. This, combined with COVID-19-induced job losses and return migration, has contributed to the decline in remittances from the region.

3. Education-Driven Migration:Countries like the UK, Australia, and Canada have emerged as popular education destinations. For instance, Indian migration to the UK tripled from 76,000 in 2020 to 250,000 in 2023. Post-study work opportunities and migration partnerships like the India-UK “Migration and Mobility Partnership” (2021) have bolstered this trend.

4. Cost and Mode of Transfers:Digitalisation has reduced remittance costs to India below the global average, although it still exceeds the SDG target of 3% for a US$200 transfer. Nonetheless, cash-based transactions remain significant for smaller amounts.

Economic and Policy Implications

1. Macroeconomic Importance:Remittances contribute about 3–3.5% of India’s GDP, consistently surpassing FDI and Official Development Assistance (ODA). They help finance nearly half of the merchandise trade deficit and act as buffers against external economic shocks.

2. Household-Level Impact:Remittances are pivotal for improving living standards, enabling expenditure on food, healthcare, and education. In Kerala, for instance, remittances account for over 36% of the state's domestic product.

3. Policy Challenges and Recommendations:

  • Skill Alignment: Training systems must align with global job markets to prevent ‘wilful deskilling’ — where highly educated migrants take up low-skilled jobs.
  • Migration Diplomacy: India must proactively negotiate bilateral/multilateral mobility agreements to secure rights, fair wages, and career progression for migrants.
  • Diaspora Engagement: Policies should encourage productive use of remittances (e.g., investments, health, education) and tap diaspora networks for technology and knowledge transfer.

Conclusion

India’s remittance ecosystem is transitioning from Gulf-led low-skilled flows to knowledge-intensive, high-value contributions from Advanced Economies. Sustaining this trend will require strategic migration governance, skill reforms, and deepened engagement with the global Indian diaspora.

India’s Employment Challenge: Bridging the Gap Between Labour& Capital in the Era of Technological Transformation

  • 06 Apr 2025

Context:

India is experiencing a paradoxical trend — despite a rapidly expanding working-age population and rising production capacity, the generation of formal employment opportunities remains insufficient. Since 2017–18, while the working-age population has increased by approximately 9 crore, formal sector jobs have grown by only 6 crore, indicating an annual shortfall of around 50 lakh jobs. This mismatch is further compounded by the dominance of self-employment and informal sector jobs, especially in rural areas, raising concerns about both the quality and sustainability of employment.

Structural Shift Towards Capital-Intensive Growth

The country’s production systems are increasingly exhibiting capital-intensive tendencies — even in traditionally labour-intensive sectors such as textiles and food processing. This phenomenon, often referred to as "skill-biased technological change," is driven by two broad factors:

  • Demand-Side Factors: The pressure to enhance productivity and reduce costs incentivises adoption of automated and capital-intensive technologies, especially in high-value manufacturing and services.
  • Supply-Side Constraints: A shortage of skilled and technically trained labour impedes the effective utilisation of labour resources. Less than 10% of India’s workforce has received formal vocational or technical training, and most youth entering the labour market lack industry-relevant skills.

The declining cost of technology, coupled with stagnant real wages and rigid labour laws in some states, further tilts the balance in favour of machines over human labour.

Policy Interventions and Challenges

The Government of India has initiated schemes such as the Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) Scheme and the Employment Linked Incentive (ELI) Scheme to address the employment deficit.

  • PLI Scheme: While it aims to boost manufacturing output, the scheme is heavily focused on high-tech sectors like electronics, drones, and IT hardware — which are capital- and skill-intensive. Despite this, the highest job creation under the PLI has been observed in food processing and pharmaceuticals, suggesting a disconnect between investment focus and employment potential.
  • ELI Scheme: Designed to subsidise the cost of hiring untrained workers in labour-intensive sectors, the ELI provides short-term financial support via EPFO contributions. However, its long-term efficacy in ensuring sustainable skilling and employment remains uncertain due to lack of outcome data and short subsidy duration (2–3 years).

Need for a Cohesive Labour-Capital Policy Framework

India’s employment challenge cannot be addressed through fragmented policies. A cohesive framework is required that integrates:

  • Industrial Policy with Skilling Policy: Ministries responsible for industrial production, labour, and skilling must work in tandem to ensure the availability of a workforce with skills that are aligned with the demands of emerging sectors.
  • Incentive Structuring: The current flat subsidies under ELI could be modified into a graded structure, where higher transfers are provided for higher levels of certified skill acquisition, encouraging continuous skill upgrading.
  • Skill Supply Chain Reform: Skill development institutions like ITIs and vocational centres should be incentivised based on placement rates and wage outcomes, not just enrolments or certifications.
  • Labour Law Flexibility: State-level reforms in labour regulations are essential to reduce the cost of employing formal workers and to encourage job creation, especially in micro, small, and medium enterprises (MSMEs).

Way Forward for a Viksit Bharat (Developed India)

As India transitions towards becoming a high-value production economy, it must simultaneously invest in its human capital. This requires:

  • Dynamic Skill Development Programs: Adaptive skilling strategies must be designed to align with evolving technological trends such as Artificial Intelligence (AI), robotics, and green energy.
  • Data-Driven Employment Policies: Regular labour market surveys and outcome tracking of employment schemes are critical for evidence-based policymaking.
  • Support for Labour-Intensive Sectors: Focused support to industries with high employment elasticity, such as textiles, leather, food processing, tourism, and construction, can yield substantial job creation.

In conclusion, advancing the agenda of Viksit Bharat demands equal emphasis on capital and labour. Without a strong and skilled workforce, India's demographic dividend risks turning into a demographic burden. Therefore, employment generation must be at the core of India’s development policy, with a strategic vision that links skilling, production, and structural transformation.

Waqf (Amendment) Bill, 2025

  • 05 Apr 2025

In News:

The Waqf (Amendment) Bill, 2025, tabled in the Lok Sabha on April 2, 2025, seeks to amend the Waqf Act, 1995, which governs the administration of waqf properties in India. The revised Bill incorporates the recommendations of a Joint Parliamentary Committee (JPC) and has sparked significant political and community debate due to its proposed structural and procedural reforms.

1. Retention and Restriction of ‘Waqf by User’ Doctrine

  • Background: The doctrine allows property to be treated as waqf based on uninterrupted communal usage, even without formal documentation.
  • Revised Provision: Retains ‘waqf by user’ for properties registered before the enactment of the law but prohibits its use for future claims.
  • Criticism: The introduction of a clause requiring individuals to prove Islamic practice for five years to establish waqf status is seen as exclusionary and arbitrary.

2. Inclusion of Non-Muslims in Waqf Institutions

  • Provisions:
    • Mandates the inclusion of at least two non-Muslims in the Central Waqf Council and State Waqf Boards.
    • Removes the requirement that the CEO of a Waqf Board be Muslim.
    • Redefines Waqf Tribunals to include a district judge, a Joint Secretary-level officer, and a Muslim law expert.
  • Criticism: Raises questions about community autonomy in religious affairs under Article 26 of the Constitution.
  • Government's Justification: Aims to enhance expertise, transparency, and administrative efficiency.

3. Enhanced Government Oversight in Waqf Property Surveys

  • New Mechanism:
    • Surveys to be conducted by senior officials above the rank of District Collector.
    • Such officers will serve as the final authority in determining whether land is waqf or government-owned.
    • Tribunal jurisdiction curtailed in such disputes.
  • Implications:
    • Centralizes decision-making within the state bureaucracy.
    • Raises concerns about executive overreach and weakening of judicial oversight in waqf matters.

4. Centralised Registration and Digital Governance

  • Digital Portal:
    • Mandatory online registration of all waqf properties within six months.
    • Extensions can be granted by waqf tribunals upon demonstration of "sufficient cause."
  • Objective: To curb encroachment, enhance transparency, and create a uniform digital record of waqf assets.

5. Application of the Limitation Act, 1963

  • Change Introduced: Repeals Section 107 of the Waqf Act, 1995, which exempted waqf properties from the statutory limitation period.
  • Implication: Allows claims of adverse possession after 12 years; may legitimize longstanding illegal occupations of waqf land.
  • Opposition View: Seen as a move that undermines waqf rights and aids encroachers.

6. Judicial Review and Appeals

  • Revised Provision:
    • Waqf tribunal decisions are no longer final.
    • Appeals can be made to the High Court within 90 days.
    • Courts can dismiss suits if properties are not registered within the stipulated time unless “sufficient cause” is shown.
  • Impact: Enhances judicial scrutiny but also limits access to justice in certain cases through procedural conditions.

Critical Analysis

  • Pros:
    • Encourages transparency and formalisation of waqf governance.
    • Introduces checks against misuse and encroachments.
    • Provides a digital framework for property management.
  • Cons:
    • Risks state interference in religious institutions, impacting minority rights under Articles 25–28.
    • Exclusion of oral traditions may erase significant community practices and histories.
    • Implementation challenges due to administrative overburden and community mistrust.

Conclusion

The Waqf (Amendment) Bill, 2025, represents a significant shift in the governance of waqf properties by increasing state oversight, standardising processes, and promoting digital reforms. However, it raises serious questions about religious autonomy, federal balance, and minority rights. A careful balance between administrative efficiency and constitutional guarantees is essential to ensure inclusive and equitable governance.

India–US Civil Nuclear Deal

  • 01 Apr 2025

Context:

Nearly two decades after the landmark India–US Civil Nuclear Agreement (123 Agreement) was signed in 2007, a major operational milestone has been achieved. In March 2025, the US Department of Energy (DoE) granted regulatory clearance under “10CFR810” of the US Atomic Energy Act (1954), allowing Holtec International, a US-based nuclear engineering firm, to transfer unclassified Small Modular Reactor (SMR) technology to three Indian private entities: Holtec Asia (its subsidiary), Tata Consulting Engineers (TCE), and Larsen & Toubro (L&T).

Key Regulatory and Safeguard Provisions

  • Authorization Duration: 10 years, subject to a five-year review.
  • Safeguards: Technology to be used only for peaceful nuclear activities under IAEA safeguards.
  • Restrictions:
    • No retransfer to other Indian or foreign entities without US approval.
    • Prohibited for military/naval propulsion or enrichment purposes.
    • No access to Sensitive Nuclear Technology.
  • Compliance: Holtec is required to file quarterly progress reports to the US DoE.

Strategic and Technological Significance for India

  • Modernizing India's Nuclear Fleet: India's nuclear program has traditionally relied on Pressurised Heavy Water Reactors (PHWRs) using natural uranium. The transfer of SMR technology based on Pressurised Water Reactors (PWRs) represents a shift towards the global mainstream of nuclear reactor technology.
  • Boost to Domestic Manufacturing: Collaboration with Indian firms like L&T and TCE can localize manufacturing and engineering, promoting Make in India and self-reliance in nuclear energy technology.
  • Entry into Global SMR Supply Chain: This development aligns India with an emerging global trend, as SMRs (30–300 MWe) are increasingly viewed as crucial for decarbonization and energy security.
  • Strategic Counterbalance to China: As China advances its SMR technology for energy diplomacy in the Global South, this India–US initiative presents a geopolitical counterweight, especially as both nations face challenges in independently competing with China’s scale and state-led investments.

Legal and Policy Bottlenecks

  • Civil Liability for Nuclear Damage Act, 2010: Cited by foreign companies as a barrier due to concerns about supplier liability in case of accidents.
  • Atomic Energy Act, 1962: Needs amendments to permit private sector participation in nuclear generation, currently reserved for public sector undertakings like NPCIL and NTPC.
  • Despite Holtec's request, these PSUs were not included in the initial authorization due to pending non-proliferation assurances from the Indian government. However, they may be added later, contingent on further diplomatic progress.

Way Forward and Future Prospects

  • Holtec’s Expansion Plans: Its non-nuclear manufacturing unit in Dahej, Gujarat is poised for expansion, with a potential doubling of its workforce once SMR manufacturing begins.
  • Partnership Pipeline:
    • TCE for engineering design.
    • L&T for high-precision nuclear component manufacturing.
    • Future engagement with NPCIL and NTPC as operators of Holtec’s SMR-300 reactors.
  • Clean Energy Strategy: SMRs are positioned as a key component of India's low-carbon energy transition, addressing both rising power demands and global climate commitments.

Conclusion

The US’s clearance for technology transfer to Indian private firms marks a pivotal operational step in the long-stalled India–US civil nuclear partnership. It opens the door for India to enter the global SMR market, boosts its domestic nuclear industry, and strengthens strategic cooperation with the US. However, legal reforms and institutional readiness remain critical for realizing the full potential of this deal.

Why India needs stable urban forests

  • 24 May 2025

In News:

Urban forests are increasingly emerging as critical ecological buffers amidst India’s rapidly expanding cities. The recent controversy over the Kancha Gachibowli forest in Hyderabad—where 400 acres of urban forest land were earmarked for industrial development—has reignited debates on sustainable urbanisation and environmental governance. The Supreme Court’s intervention to halt further deforestation underscores the urgent need to prioritise ecological assets in urban planning.

Importance of Urban Forests

Urban forests such as Kancha Gachibowli (Hyderabad), Aarey (Mumbai), Turahalli (Bengaluru), Neela Hauz and the Ridge (Delhi), and Dol Ka Baadh (Jaipur) play a vital role in maintaining ecological balance within metropolitan environments. Their multifaceted contributions include:

  • Air Pollution Mitigation: Urban forests absorb pollutants such as PM2.5 and PM10, which are major contributors to urban air pollution from vehicular emissions and construction activity.
    • A 2006 study by the USDA Forest Service found that one hectare of forest can remove approximately one ton of air pollutants annually.
    • In November 2024, the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) recorded a hazardous AQI of 494 in Delhi, highlighting the urgent need for natural air purifiers.
  • Climate Regulation: These forests help reduce the urban heat island effect, control stormwater runoff, and mitigate urban flooding and erosion.
  • Carbon Sequestration: Trees in urban forests trap atmospheric carbon, contributing to climate change mitigation efforts.
  • Biodiversity Preservation: They serve as urban habitats for endangered birds, insects, and other fauna, supporting biodiversity within city limits.
  • Socio-Cultural Benefits: Urban forests offer green spaces for recreation, promote mental well-being, and enhance the overall livability of urban areas.

Threats and Challenges

Despite their importance, urban forests in India face increasing threats due to:

  • Unregulated Urban Expansion: Urban planning often disregards ecological sustainability, prioritising infrastructure and industrial development over green spaces.
  • Lack of Legal Clarity: State governments sometimes contest the status of forest lands, as seen in Telangana’s claim over Kancha Gachibowli, undermining forest protections.
  • Real Estate Pressures: Encroachments and land-use changes for commercial gain are frequent, with environmental concerns often sidelined.

Judicial Interventions and Constitutional Provisions

Indian courts have played a pivotal role in safeguarding urban forests:

  • T.N. GodavarmanThirumulpad Case (1996): Expanded the definition of "forest" to include areas recorded as forest in government records, irrespective of ownership or classification.
  • Delhi High Court (2015): Directed the protection and notification of the Delhi Ridge forest.
  • Supreme Court Stay on Aarey Tree Felling (2020): Responded to civil society petitions to preserve Mumbai’s Aarey forest.
  • Rajasthan High Court Suo Motu Action (2024): Intervened against deforestation in biodiversity-rich Baran district.

Constitutional Backing:

  • Article 21: Guarantees the Right to Life, interpreted by courts to include the right to a clean and healthy environment.
  • Article 48A: Directs the State to protect and improve the environment.
  • Article 51A(g): Makes it a fundamental duty of citizens to protect the natural environment.

Policy Interventions: Nagar Van Yojana

In response to growing ecological concerns, the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF&CC) launched the Nagar Van Yojana in 2020 with the goal of developing 1,000 urban forests by 2027.

  • As per the India State of Forest Report 2023, the initiative has already led to an increase of 1,445.81 sq km in tree and forest cover in urban areas.
  • The scheme aligns with other policy frameworks such as the National Forest Policy (1988) and the National Mission for Green India (2014), which promote afforestation and ecological restoration.

Way Forward

To ensure sustainable urbanisation, India must:

  • Integrate ecological planning into urban masterplans, with mandatory forest inventories and zoning protections.
  • Strengthen legal protections for notified and unnotified forests within urban areas.
  • Foster community participation and civil society engagement in urban environmental stewardship.
  • Promote green infrastructure through Smart Cities and AMRUT missions.

Conclusion

Urban forests are not peripheral luxuries but ecological necessities. Their conservation is essential for ensuring environmental resilience, public health, and urban quality of life. As India continues its urbanisation journey, a harmonious balance between development and ecological preservation is indispensable.

Overfishing in India

  • 23 May 2025

Context:

India, the second-largest fish-producing nation globally, contributes around 8% to world fish production. With an estimated marine fisheries potential of 5.31 million tonnes, India’s sector has reached its maximum sustainable yield, currently stabilizing at 3–4 million tonnes annually. However, this apparent success masks deep ecological and socio-economic distress, primarily due to overfishing.

Inequity and Overexploitation

Despite their 90% share in the fishing population, small-scale fishers harvest merely 10% of the total catch, while mechanised trawlers dominate volumes. This has left three-fourths of marine fisher families below the poverty line. Escalating the problem is the race to increase yields using more powerful engines and finer mesh nets—leading to marginal gains at steep ecological and financial costs.

Trawling operations, especially shrimp trawlers, demonstrate the magnitude of bycatch—where for every kilogram of shrimp, over 10 kg of juvenile and non-target species are discarded. Such practices degrade marine biodiversity, deplete spawning stocks, and destabilise food webs. Examples from Canada’s cod fishery (1992) and California’s sardine fishery collapse (1960s–80s) show the irreversible impacts of mismanaged stocks.

Policy Fragmentation and Regulatory Loopholes

Each coastal state in India governs its marine fisheries through its own Marine Fisheries Regulation Act (MFRA), resulting in a regulatory patchwork. Fishers exploit these inconsistencies—for example, landing juvenile fish legally in one state that are protected in another. This undermines conservation and facilitates laundering of protected species.

Moreover, the fish-meal and fish-oil (FMFO) industry fuels ecological damage by incentivising bycatch. Much of this low-value catch is processed into meal, mostly for export, depriving domestic consumers and aquaculture of vital nutritional inputs.

Government Initiatives

The Union Budget 2025–26 allocated a record ?2,703.67 crore to the fisheries sector, focusing on the sustainable harnessing of resources from the EEZ and high seas, especially around Lakshadweep and the Andaman & Nicobar Islands. Key schemes include:

  • Pradhan Mantri MatsyaSampada Yojana (PMMSY): Focuses on inland fisheries and aquaculture for food security.
  • Blue Revolution Scheme: Enhances productivity in marine and inland fisheries.
  • Technological Interventions: Satellite-based vessel tracking, Oceansat for forecasting Potential Fishing Zones (PFZ), and GIS mapping are being deployed.

Path to Sustainability

India’s National Policy on Marine Fisheries (2017) embeds sustainability at its core, promoting measures like:

  • 61-day uniform fishing bans during monsoons;
  • Prohibitions on harmful methods like pair and bull trawling, and LED light usage;
  • Promotion of mariculture, artificial reefs, and sea ranching.

Successful models abroad offer direction. New Zealand’s Quota Management System (QMS) aligns catch limits with stock assessments and uses transferable quotas to regulate fishing. India could pilot such a model for its mechanised fleet.

Domestically, Kerala’s enforcement of a Minimum Legal Size (MLS) for threadfin bream boosted catches by 41% in one season. Scaling such practices nationally can ensure ecological recovery and economic benefits.

Way Forward

India must urgently move towards a unified, science-based regulatory framework, including:

  • National MLS norms,
  • Gear restrictions to reduce juvenile catch,
  • Scientific catch limits,
  • Closed seasons aligned with spawning cycles.

Simultaneously, fisher cooperatives must be empowered, FMFO quotas capped, and consumer awareness campaigns launched to encourage demand for legally sized, sustainable seafood.

In conclusion, India stands at a critical juncture. Ignoring overfishing risks deepening poverty and ecological collapse. The solutions—rooted in science, equity, and sustainability—are within reach and must be swiftly implemented to safeguard marine wealth and livelihoods for future generations.

Judicial Independence vs Accountability

  • 22 May 2025

Context:

The recent controversy surrounding Justice Yashwant Varma and the subsequent remarks by Vice President Jagdeep Dhankhar have reignited a crucial debate in Indian constitutional discourse: How can the judiciary remain independent while also being held accountable? At the heart of this debate lies the tension between institutional autonomy and the growing demand for transparency in judicial conduct.

The Varma Case: Catalyst for a Larger Debate

In March 2024, unaccounted cash was reportedly found at the residence of Justice Yashwant Varma, then serving on the Delhi High Court. Following the discovery, he was transferred to the Allahabad High Court. An in-house inquiry conducted by the Supreme Court found him culpable, yet it dismissed a petition seeking criminal investigation, forwarding the report instead to the President and Prime Minister.

Vice President Dhankhar questioned the constitutional basis of the in-house mechanism and called for a re-examination of the K Veeraswami judgment (1991), suggesting that the current legal framework grants excessive immunity to judges and hampers accountability.

Constitutional Safeguards and In-House Procedures

The Indian Constitution protects judicial independence through Article 124, which stipulates that judges of the Supreme Court and High Courts can only be removed through impeachment—a process that requires a special majority in Parliament. However, this safeguard has made judicial removal politically difficult. Despite several attempts, no judge has ever been successfully impeached since independence.

To address ethical complaints, the judiciary devised the in-house inquiry mechanism, wherein a panel headed by senior judges examines allegations against fellow judges. While this preserves the judiciary’s autonomy, the mechanism lacks statutory backing and has no power to impose penalties or recommend criminal prosecution.

The Veeraswami Judgment: Balancing Act or Bottleneck?

In the K Veeraswami case, the Supreme Court ruled that a judge could be treated as a public servant under the Prevention of Corruption Act. However, it mandated that any criminal case against a judge could proceed only with the approval of the Chief Justice of India (CJI), not the executive. This was intended to prevent misuse of prosecutorial powers and ensure judicial independence.

Critics argue that this judgment has created a judicial monopoly over sanctioning investigations, undermining public accountability. In practice, criminal prosecution against judges remains extremely rare. Notably, in 2019, then CJI Ranjan Gogoi sanctioned an FIR against Justice S.N. Shukla of the Allahabad High Court—one of the few instances of such approval.

Towards a Transparent and Accountable Judiciary

The current episode underscores a critical gap in India’s judicial accountability mechanisms. While independence is essential to prevent executive interference, absolute immunity risks eroding public confidence in the judiciary. The lack of transparency and enforceability in in-house inquiries has further exacerbated this perception.

There is a growing case for revisiting the Veeraswami judgment, possibly through constitutional or legislative reform, to allow limited and well-regulated avenues for criminal investigation into judicial misconduct—without compromising judicial independence.

Conclusion

A nuanced balance must be struck between judicial independence and accountability. India’s democracy cannot afford a judiciary that is either vulnerable to political manipulation or immune from public scrutiny. Strengthening internal accountability frameworks, reinforcing institutional checks, and ensuring transparency in disciplinary processes are essential to uphold both the dignity and integrity of the judiciary.

Live Baiting and the Conservation Dilemma

  • 20 May 2025

Context:

In recent years, India's tiger conservation practices have come under scrutiny due to the continued use of live baiting, particularly for feeding injured or aging tigers. While originally a hunting tactic used by British colonialists—placing prey like buffalo or goats to lure tigers for easy shooting—live baiting found new life in post-independence India as a tourism tool in reserves like Sariska. This practice was officially banned in 1982 by Prime Minister Indira Gandhi, yet it persists in conflict scenarios and as a means of care for ailing tigers.

National Policy and Ecological Concerns

According to the Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) of the National Tiger Conservation Authority (NTCA), live baiting for tourism is prohibited, and its use for injured or old tigers is “not advisable.” The SOP emphasizes minimal human intervention, underscoring that wildlife conservation must adhere to the principle of survival of the fittest. Artificial feeding undermines this, fostering dependency, disrupting natural selection, and increasing the risk of human-wildlife conflict.

Despite these guidelines, many reserves continue the practice under humanitarian or public pressure. Feeding wild tigers, even as an emergency measure, is permitted only in exceptional cases—such as when an injured tigress with dependent cubs cannot hunt. Experts like Valmik Thapar recommend baiting no more than once every two weeks and only for a short duration of up to three months.

Case Studies Highlighting Consequences

The tragic case of Kankati, a 23-month-old tigress in Ranthambore, illustrates the dangers of early habituation. Raised on live bait after her mother, Arrowhead, fell ill, Kankati and her siblings lost their fear of humans. She has since killed two people, raising alarms about human safety in reserves.

Similar outcomes have been observed in the cases of T36, T37, and Simba—young tigers raised on bait following the deaths of their mothers. Without learning essential hunting skills, these tigers either perished prematurely or became threats to others. Even aging icons like Machhli and T2 were kept alive unnaturally with bait; while Machhli survived on human-provided food for seven years, T2 died too weak to kill.

The Cultural Shift Toward Over-Intervention

A growing culture of emotional overreach is increasingly shaping wildlife management. Tourists now demand treatment for limping or injured tigers, triggering unnecessary tranquilizations and medical interventions. From transporting prey animals to creating artificial water sources during dry spells, reserves like Corbett, Kanha, Bandipur, and Pench are altering ecosystems to sustain tigers artificially.

This overmanagement leads to unnatural survival of weaker individuals, overcrowding, and territorial conflicts—not just between tigers but also between tigers and humans. Experts caution that such interference only weakens the ecological integrity of tiger populations.

Conclusion: Let Nature Lead

Veteran conservationists argue that wild tigers do not require pet-like care. The most effective conservation strategy remains the preservation of natural habitats and prey bases, with minimal human interference. Misplaced kindness, though emotionally compelling, endangers both tiger and human populations by disrupting nature’s balance.

For India to achieve sustainable tiger conservation, it must resist populist interventions and re-anchor policies in ecological wisdom—protect, don’t pamper.

Kolkata-Northeast Sea Route and the Strategic Highway Project

  • 19 May 2025

In News:

India’s northeast has long faced logistical isolation due to its geographical constraints and overdependence on the narrow Siliguri Corridor, also known as the Chicken’s Neck. A recent strategic initiative aims to transform this scenario through the creation of a multi-modal connectivity route that bypasses Bangladesh and directly links the Northeast to the sea via Myanmar and Kolkata. This development gains added relevance in light of recent remarks by Bangladesh’s interim leader Muhammad Yunus, who described Northeast India as “landlocked” and dependent solely on Dhaka for maritime access—a claim that India seeks to counter through tangible connectivity upgrades.

Kaladan Multi-Modal Transit Transport Project (KMTTP)

At the heart of this initiative lies the Kaladan Multi-Modal Transit Transport Project (KMTTP), a flagship project under India’s Act East Policy, designed to connect the eastern seaport of Kolkata to the landlocked Northeast through Myanmar. The project includes:

  • Sea Leg: Kolkata Port to Sittwe Port in Myanmar (~539 km).
  • Inland Waterway: From Sittwe to Paletwa via the Kaladan River (~158 km).
  • Road Leg in Myanmar: Paletwa to Zorinpui on the India-Myanmar border (~110 km).
  • Indian Extension: Zorinpui to Lawngtlai and Aizawl in Mizoram, connecting to the national highway network.

This corridor not only reduces reliance on routes through Bangladesh but also serves as a strategic counterbalance in India’s regional geopolitics, particularly in strengthening ties with Southeast Asia and enhancing its maritime influence in the Bay of Bengal.

Strategic Shillong-Silchar Highway

Complementing the KMTTP is the construction of a 166.8 km four-lane high-speed highway from Mawlyngkhung (near Shillong) to Panchgram (near Silchar) along NH-6. This is the first high-speed corridor in the North-East and the first in a hilly terrain, and is slated for completion by 2030. The project is being developed under the Hybrid Annuity Model (HAM) at a cost of ?22,864 crore, with implementation by NHIDCL for the Ministry of Road Transport and Highways (MoRTH).

The highway will include:

  • 19 major bridges, 153 minor bridges, 326 culverts
  • 22 underpasses, 26 overpasses, 8 subways, and 34 viaducts

It will reduce travel time between Shillong and Silchar from 8.5 to 5 hours and act as a crucial link to states like Mizoram, Tripura, and Manipur. More significantly, it will integrate with the Kaladan route, offering a direct link to Kolkata via Myanmar and the Bay of Bengal.

Strategic and Economic Significance

This integrated connectivity initiative holds multi-dimensional importance:

  • Reduces dependency on Bangladesh and the Siliguri Corridor
  • Enhances trade and people-to-people ties with ASEAN nations
  • Strengthens regional integration under the Act East Policy
  • Boosts economic development in the North-East through improved logistics
  • Improves India’s strategic posture in the Indo-Pacific and Bay of Bengal

In conclusion, the Kolkata-Northeast sea route and supporting infrastructure like the Shillong-Silchar highway represent a decisive step towards bridging geographical constraints, boosting regional development, and reinforcing India’s strategic autonomy in the eastern frontier.

Operation Sindoor

  • 18 May 2025

In News:

Operation Sindoor marked a significant leap in India's military and technological prowess, not only achieving its strategic objectives but also demonstrating the operational maturity of Made-in-Indiadefence systems. The operation was characterised by a multi-layered approach involving precision strikes, air defence, unmanned systems, and advanced surveillance tools—most of which were indigenously developed.

Precision and Navigation Capabilities

One of the defining features of Operation Sindoor was the pinpoint accuracy of strikes deep inside Pakistan and Pakistan-occupied Kashmir. Specific terrorist camps and infrastructure were destroyed with minimal collateral damage, underlining India’s commitment to responsible military engagement. This precision was enabled by a combination of advanced guidance systems and real-time data from space-based and ground-based assets.

India's indigenous Navigation with Indian Constellation (NavIC) system, offering positional accuracy of 10–20 cm, played a pivotal role. High-resolution satellites such as Cartosat, RISAT, and EOS provided real-time imagery, allowing sub-metre targeting. These capabilities are a result of sustained investments by DRDO and ISRO and reflect the prioritisation of guidance and navigation as a critical technology domain in DRDO’s 2023 R&D roadmap.

Lethality and Advanced Weapon Systems

The destruction caused during Operation Sindoor also demonstrated the high lethality of Indian weapon systems. Deep penetration warheads, advanced fusing mechanisms, and powerful propulsion systems—developed under the Integrated Guided Missile Development Programme—were central to the operation’s success. The likely use of the BrahMos missile, equipped with state-of-the-art guidance and propulsion, underscores the maturity of indigenous missile technology.

Emerging technologies such as Directed Energy Weapons (DEWs), including laser-based systems, were reportedly deployed to neutralise incoming drones. DEWs have been a priority sector for the Defence Ministry since 2022, and DRDO showcased them during the 2025 Republic Day Parade.

Integrated Air Defence and Radar Systems

A critical success factor in Operation Sindoor was India’s ability to neutralise almost every aerial threat, including drones and missiles. This was achieved through a combination of imported and indigenous systems. The S-400 Triumph, along with DRDO-developed radars like Rajendra, Rohini, LLTR, and low-level 3D radars, formed a robust air defence network. These systems enabled accurate detection, tracking, and interception of aerial threats.

Cutting-edge R&D continues in radar technologies, including AI-powered signal processing, stealth detection, and foliage-penetrating radars, which will further enhance India’s battlefield awareness and response capability.

Role of Unmanned Systems

For the first time in an India-Pakistan conflict, drones played a decisive role. Indian UAVs executed deep strikes into Pakistani territory, while enemy drone swarms were largely neutralised. India also deployed upgraded Bofors guns and SAMAR systems to counter low-flying threats. The success of unmanned platforms indicates a paradigm shift towards hybrid warfare, with manned-unmanned teaming becoming a future norm.

However, to sustain this capability, India must strengthen its domestic manufacturing base, ensure secure raw material supply chains, and foster collaboration between industry, academia, and the armed forces.

Conclusion:
Operation Sindoor represents a watershed moment in India’s defence preparedness. It validated years of indigenous R&D and affirmed India’s self-reliant defence posture. As warfare evolves, India’s ability to synergise space, cyber, and kinetic capabilities with unmanned platforms will be critical in ensuring strategic deterrence and national security.

Road Safety in India

  • 16 May 2025

Context:

India is at a critical juncture in its mobility transformation. With over 6.3 million km of road network, the second-largest globally, the nation faces a paradox: rapid urbanisation and vehicle growth have brought both economic momentum and a rising toll of road fatalities. In 2022, India recorded 1.68 lakh road deaths, translating to 12.2 deaths per 1 lakh population—substantially higher than countries like Japan (2.5) and the UK (2.6). These crashes cost India 3% of its GDP annually, eroding human capital and stalling development.

Road Safety as a Fundamental Right

The right to safe mobility stems from Article 21 of the Constitution, which guarantees the right to life. This makes road safety not merely a technical issue but a public good and a human right. With India’s urban population expected to reach 50% by 2047, ensuring the safety of all road users—particularly pedestrians, cyclists, elderly, and children—is essential for inclusive development.

Key Challenges in India’s Road Safety Landscape

  • Human Error: About 78% of crashes are due to driver fault—overspeeding, drunk driving, and poor lane discipline.
  • Infrastructure Gaps: Over 5,000 black spots, inadequate pedestrian zones, and unscientific road designs persist across urban and rural areas.
  • Weak Enforcement: Despite the Motor Vehicles (Amendment) Act, 2019, enforcement is inconsistent, and deterrence is weak.
  • Emergency Care Deficits: Rural areas suffer from delayed trauma response, poor ambulance coverage, and lack of cashless care.
  • Fragmented Governance: Overlapping responsibilities between Centre and States lead to diluted accountability and suboptimal implementation.

Government Response: The Four Es Framework

  • Engineering: Mandatory safety audits, black spot rectification, e-DAR digital accident recording, and vehicle safety mandates (airbags, ABS, Bharat NCAP ratings).
  • Enforcement: e-Challans, CCTV-based monitoring, automated vehicle fitness testing, and stricter penalties under the MV Act.
  • Education: Road Safety Advocacy Scheme, National Road Safety Month, driver training centres in every district.
  • Emergency Care: Good Samaritan protections, ambulances with paramedics at toll plazas, and pilot cashless treatment schemes.

Strategic Roadmap:

  • Safe System Approach: Design roads that are forgiving of human error—wider footpaths, dedicated cycling lanes, pedestrian islands, and speed calming measures.
  • National Road Safety Authority: A unified central body to integrate policy, funding, and enforcement between Centre and States.
  • Innovative Financing: Mandate auto manufacturers to channel CSR funds into road safety initiatives for 20–25 years, supporting infrastructure, trauma care, and R&D.
  • Data-Driven Policies: Strengthen digital accident databases to enable evidence-based decision-making and real-time response.
  • Capital Investment: Adopt the World Bank’s recommendation of $109 billion investment over a decade to halve road deaths by 2030.

Conclusion

Road safety is not an adjunct concern—it is integral to India’s Vision of Viksit Bharat 2047. Reducing road fatalities is essential for economic productivity, public health, and constitutional morality. A coordinated, inclusive, and adequately financed national strategy can transform India’s roads from death traps into pathways of safe, equitable mobility.

Voter ID Rules in India

  • 15 May 2025

Context:

Recent developments surrounding the deportation of Pakistani nationals from India, many of whom reportedly held Indian identity documents such as Voter IDs, Aadhaar, and ration cards, have sparked concern over the integrity of the electoral rolls and the effectiveness of the voter verification process. This issue holds significant implications for the sanctity of India’s democratic system, particularly with regard to voter eligibility and the legal safeguards against electoral fraud.

Constitutional and Legal Provisions

Under Article 326 of the Indian Constitution, the right to vote is granted to every citizen of India aged 18 years and above, provided they are not disqualified under any law. The Representation of the People Act, 1950, particularly Section 16, lays down conditions for disqualification from voter registration, including non-citizenship, unsound mind (as declared by a competent court), and legal disqualification due to corrupt practices.

To register as a new elector, applicants must fill out Form 6 of the Election Commission of India (ECI). While proof of age and address are mandatory, no separate citizenship document is required. Instead, a self-declared statement affirming Indian citizenship is submitted. However, under Section 31 of the RP Act, submitting false information, particularly with respect to citizenship, can attract legal penalties including imprisonment of up to one year, a fine, or both.

Verification and Role of Electoral Authorities

The onus of verifying the eligibility of voters lies primarily with the Electoral Registration Officer (ERO), assisted by Booth Level Officers (BLOs). These authorities are empowered to conduct investigations, hold hearings, and scrutinize documents before accepting applications. In cases of doubt or objections, the ERO must assess all evidence independently and ensure that non-citizens are not included in the electoral roll.

Citizenship is typically assumed unless there is a reason to believe otherwise. However, in instances of objection, the applicant bears the initial burden of proof to establish citizenship. For internal migrants or married women lacking documentation, alternative proofs such as prior voter registration or certificates from local authorities may be accepted.

Issues of Non-Citizens Holding Voter IDs

Instances of non-citizens obtaining Indian voter IDs have occurred in the past and are not isolated. The ECI has previously identified and removed such names from the electoral roll following investigations. In such cases, legal proceedings are initiated against individuals who fraudulently secured voter registration.

The current incident involving deported Pakistani nationals allegedly holding Indian Voter IDs brings this issue back into focus. It highlights systemic lapses in identity verification and raises concerns over the use of forged or easily obtainable documents to exploit electoral loopholes.

Current Measures and Challenges

To curb such malpractices, the ECI has initiated a linkage between Aadhaar and Voter ID cards to detect and eliminate duplicates and ineligible entries. However, this initiative has limitations, as Aadhaar is not proof of citizenship. Non-citizens can still possess Aadhaar cards, making this linkage an insufficient standalone measure for verifying voter eligibility.

Conclusion

The integrity of India’s electoral system is foundational to its democracy. While the legal framework governing voter registration is robust, implementation gaps, documentation loopholes, and lax verification processes expose vulnerabilities. Strengthening the verification mechanisms, enhancing accountability of electoral officers, and exploring alternative digital authentication methods are imperative to safeguard the electoral roll from misuse and to uphold the principle of “one citizen, one vote.”

Delhi’s unprecedented Pre-Monsoon Rainfall

  • 14 May 2025

In News:

On May 2, 2024, Delhi witnessed one of its most intense pre-monsoon weather events in over a century, recording the second-highest single-day rainfall for May since 1901, surpassed only by 119.3 mm in 2021. This extreme event, though meteorologically significant, also underscores critical vulnerabilities in urban disaster preparedness and climate resilience.

Meteorological Dynamics behind the event

This rare weather event was driven by a complex interplay of meteorological phenomena. Delhi became the focal point for two moisture-laden wind systems: easterlies from the Bay of Bengal and southerlies from the Arabian Sea. Their collision over the National Capital Region created a low-level convergence zone, which forced moisture-rich air upward, initiating intense convective activity.

Compounding this situation was the presence of troughs—elongated low-pressure systems—that enhanced instability and facilitated vertical atmospheric lifting. As the moist air ascended, it cooled rapidly, forming towering cumulonimbus clouds reaching altitudes of over 13 km. These clouds, commonly associated with thunderstorms and intense rainfall, released torrential downpours over the city.

Additionally, the region was under the influence of a Western Disturbance, coupled with upper-air cyclonic circulations over Rajasthan and Punjab. These systems altered wind patterns, induced powerful vertical lifts, and further fed moisture into the storm system through an active monsoon trough extending from Madhya Pradesh to Kerala.

Timing and Transitional Weather

The event occurred during May, a transitional month for northern India as it shifts from spring to the monsoon phase. This seasonal flux often leads to volatile weather, but the scale and intensity observed this year were unusual and alarming. Factors such as strong westerly surface winds (up to 54 kmph) and cool descending winds from the Himalayas further enhanced convection, creating a perfect storm scenario.

Impacts on Urban Infrastructure

The heavy rainfall overwhelmed Delhi’s urban infrastructure. Several parts of the city faced severe waterlogging, power outages, flight disruptions, and, tragically, five deaths due to weather-related accidents. The lack of adequate stormwater drainage systems, combined with high urban density and poor land-use planning, exacerbated the crisis.

Broader Implications for Policy and Planning

This event serves as a wake-up call for urban disaster management and climate adaptation. With climate variability increasing the frequency and intensity of extreme weather events, Indian cities—especially megacities like Delhi—must invest in climate-resilient infrastructure.

Policymakers must:

  • Strengthen early warning systems and inter-agency coordination.
  • Enhance urban planning with a focus on green infrastructure and permeable surfaces.
  • Improve data integration across meteorological and civic bodies for real-time response.
  • Mainstream climate risk assessments in city development plans.

Conclusion

Delhi’s record-breaking rainfall is not just a weather anomaly but a symptom of deeper systemic vulnerabilities. It emphasizes the urgent need for holistic, science-backed urban resilience strategies to safeguard lives, infrastructure, and ecological balance in a rapidly urbanizing and warming world.

Plastic Pollution in the Indian Himalayas

  • 13 May 2025

In News:

The fragile ecosystems of the Indian Himalayas are increasingly threatened by mounting plastic pollution. According to the Himalayan Cleanup (THC) 2024 report, over 70% of the plastic waste collected in this region is non-recyclable, posing a severe environmental and ecological challenge. This pollution not only endangers biodiversity but also impacts the livelihoods and health of mountain communities reliant on pristine natural resources.

Nature and Sources of Plastic Pollution

The report highlights that more than 80% of plastic debris in the Himalayas stems from single-use food and beverage packaging. These include instant noodles, energy drinks, and snack wrappers, with prominent brands such as Wai Wai, Maggi, Sting, Mountain Dew, Lays, and Bingo contributing substantially to the waste load. A striking 71% of this plastic waste comprises multi-layered plastics (MLPs), which are notoriously difficult to recycle due to their composite nature and lack of viable recycling markets.

Multi-layered plastics form nearly 68.5% of the total waste, rendering traditional recycling methods ineffective. These plastics often end up as litter in remote mountain areas, where waste collection and management infrastructure is minimal or absent, exacerbating environmental degradation.

Environmental and Socioeconomic Implications

Plastic pollution in the Himalayas disrupts fragile mountain ecosystems, threatening native flora and fauna. The persistence of non-biodegradable waste affects soil quality, water sources, and the aesthetic and cultural value of the region. Moreover, plastic litter contributes to microplastic contamination in water bodies, entering food chains and posing health risks to local populations and wildlife alike.

Economically, the growing plastic menace undermines tourism, a vital livelihood source in many Himalayan districts. Untouched landscapes attract visitors, but increasing waste reduces their appeal, impacting local economies dependent on sustainable tourism.

Policy Recommendations from the THC 2024 Report

To address this mounting crisis, the report recommends comprehensive policy and administrative measures:

  • Ban on Multi-Layered Plastics (MLPs): Given that MLPs constitute nearly 68.5% of plastic waste and are largely non-recyclable, the report calls for an immediate ban on their manufacture, sale, and distribution, especially in sensitive ecological zones such as the Himalayas.
  • Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR): The report urges policymakers to enforce stringent EPR frameworks, holding manufacturers and brands accountable for the lifecycle of their packaging waste. This would incentivize producers to innovate sustainable packaging solutions and participate actively in waste collection and recycling.
  • Restrict Junk Food and Energy Drinks near Schools: Recognizing the health and environmental impact, the report recommends banning the sale of such products near educational institutions to curb littering and reduce children’s exposure to unhealthy food items.
  • Mandatory Front-of-Pack Labelling: To inform consumers about the environmental and health risks, the report advocates mandatory clear labelling on high-risk products, promoting responsible consumption.
  • Transition from Recycling to Waste-Redesign: The focus should shift from merely recycling waste to redesigning packaging to eliminate waste generation at source. Adopting a ‘design-out-waste’ approach can significantly reduce plastic pollution.
  • Empowering Local Governance: The report emphasizes strengthening rural and mountain municipalities by providing technical resources, funding, and training in waste management to enhance local capacity to handle plastic waste effectively.

Conclusion

The Himalayan plastic pollution crisis underscores the urgent need for coordinated action involving governments, industries, and local communities. Effective implementation of bans on non-recyclable plastics, coupled with robust producer responsibility laws and community-based waste management, can restore the ecological balance of the Himalayas. Additionally, fostering public awareness and promoting sustainable consumption patterns remain crucial in preserving this ecologically sensitive and culturally significant region for future generations.

Operation Sindoor and the Emerging Imperative of Digital Warfare in India’s National Security

  • 12 May 2025

In News:

On May 7, India launched Operation Sindoor, targeting terrorist bases in Pakistan in response to the Pahalgam terrorist attack on April 22. This military action quickly became a case study in how modern warfare extends beyond physical battlegrounds to include digital and information domains.

Managing Information During Conflict

Following the operation, India’s Ministry of Defence issued an advisory on May 9 urging media, digital platforms, and individuals to avoid live or real-time reporting of military movements. The Press Information Bureau (PIB) also stressed sharing only official updates to counter the spread of misinformation. This advisory was crucial after fake news, including false claims that the INS Vikrant aircraft carrier attacked Pakistani ports, spread rapidly on social media and TV channels. The misinformation originated from a fraudulent social media account pretending to be the INS Vikrant, causing panic and confusion, which was then amplified by Pakistani sources.

Hybrid Nature of Modern Conflicts

Modern conflicts have evolved into “hybrid wars” that combine traditional military operations with sophisticated information warfare. Research from King’s College London highlights how states use both traditional and social media platforms for “perception management”—influencing public opinion to strengthen domestic support or destabilise opponents. In such environments, misinformation spreads rapidly due to media pressure to break news first, public anxiety seeking instant updates, and social media algorithms that prioritise sensational content regardless of accuracy.

Cyber Warfare: The Invisible Battlefield

Digital warfare also includes cyberattacks on critical infrastructure and military networks. Since the Pahalgam attack, India has faced several cyber intrusions originating from Pakistani and spoofed networks. Cyber operations now run parallel to physical conflicts, forming a multi-domain battlespace where controlling information flow and disrupting enemy networks are as vital as territorial gains.

Recent global examples include Russia’s cyberattacks on Ukraine during the 2022 invasion and retaliatory cyber operations by Ukrainian hackers. Similarly, after Hamas’s October 2023 attack, Israel faced massive cyber assaults and widespread disinformation campaigns on social media using AI-generated content.

Challenges in Cyber Conflict

Cyber warfare is especially challenging because attacks are remote, anonymous, and difficult to attribute. Attackers hide behind proxies and compromised systems, complicating diplomatic responses and exposing gaps in international laws governing cyber conflicts. As tensions rise, India may encounter more frequent and sophisticated cyberattacks targeting its infrastructure, military communications, and financial systems, alongside conventional military threats.

India’s Preparedness Strategy

To tackle these challenges, India must adopt a comprehensive strategy combining legal, diplomatic, and technological measures:

  • Legal: Strengthen cybersecurity laws under the Information Technology Act and push for international agreements to regulate state-sponsored cyberattacks.
  • Diplomatic: Enhance cooperation in global forums like the UN Group of Governmental Experts (GGE) and partner with technologically advanced nations to identify and counter hostile cyber activities.
  • Technological: Invest heavily in cyber defence and offence capabilities. Critical infrastructure must be fortified through security audits, network segmentation, and resilient backups. Agencies such as the National Critical Information Infrastructure Protection Centre (NCIIPC) and CERT-In need enhanced capacities to detect and respond to threats. Regulators should promote continuous network monitoring and public awareness on cybersecurity, exemplified by the Reserve Bank of India’s directives to banks.

Conclusion

The digital battlefield—comprising misinformation and cyberattacks—demands a coordinated government response and active citizen engagement. As conventional and digital warfare increasingly overlap, India’s national security depends on not only military preparedness but also information resilience and cybersecurity. With well-planned, multi-dimensional strategies, India can effectively confront emerging digital threats and secure its sovereignty in an increasingly complex geopolitical environment.

Child Labour in India

  • 10 May 2025

In News:

Despite a comprehensive constitutional and legal framework designed to prohibit child labour, India continues to face the persistent challenge of millions of children engaged in hazardous and exploitative work. The prevalence of child labour in sectors such as matchstick factories, brick kilns, leather processing units, and construction sites highlights the gap between legal intent and ground realities.

Defining Child Labour

Child labour involves employing children in work that deprives them of their childhood, interferes with education, and is harmful mentally, physically, socially, or morally. It constitutes a violation of basic child rights and hampers the child’s overall development.

Legal and Constitutional Framework

India’s fight against child labour is backed by strong constitutional provisions and statutes:

  • Constitutional Safeguards:
    • Article 24 prohibits the employment of children below 14 years in factories, mines, and hazardous occupations.
    • Directive Principles (Articles 39(e) and 39(f)) direct the State to protect children from exploitation and ensure their development.
  • Statutory Measures:
    • The Child and Adolescent Labour (Prohibition and Regulation) Act, 1986 (amended in 2016) prohibits employment of children under 14 and restricts adolescents (14–18 years) from hazardous work. However, it permits work in family enterprises after school hours, a provision often misused.
    • The Juvenile Justice (Care and Protection) Act, 2015 treats child labour victims as children in need of care and protection.
    • The Right to Education Act, 2009 mandates free and compulsory education for children aged 6–14, indirectly aiming to reduce child labour by keeping children in schools.
  • Judicial Interventions:
    • The Supreme Court has reinforced child rights under Article 21 (Right to Life with dignity), with landmark rulings emphasizing the state’s duty to eradicate child labour(e.g., M.C. Mehta v. State of Tamil Nadu, 1996).

Magnitude and Ground Realities

According to UNICEF’s analysis of the Periodic Labour Force Survey (2018-19), approximately 18 to 33 lakh children are engaged in labour in India. Nearly half of these children work within their families, making detection and intervention difficult. The worst-affected sectors include agriculture, fireworks, glass-making, leather tanning, mining, and construction.

Children working in these sectors face hazardous conditions involving exposure to toxic substances, long working hours, and physical and verbal abuse. This leads to long-term damage to their physical health, mental well-being, and education prospects. The lack of access to sanitation and healthcare further exacerbates their vulnerability.

Enforcement Challenges

Despite the severity of the problem, enforcement remains weak. In 2021, only 613 cases under the Child Labour Act were registered, indicating a large enforcement gap. Additionally, data on child labour is outdated and fragmented, with the last Census conducted in 2011 and poor disaggregation of data by gender and rural-urban divide. Coordination between labour departments, police, and child welfare agencies is inadequate.

Instances like the 2024 Madhya Pradesh distillery case, where 58 children were rescued after working long hours in hazardous conditions, expose the failures in inspection and enforcement at the state level.

Root Causes

Poverty remains the primary driver of child labour. The International Labour Organization highlights that child labour is both a cause and consequence of poverty. Families often push children into work due to economic necessity, especially when adult unemployment is high (estimated 6 million unemployed adults). Malnutrition and deprivation perpetuate this cycle, with India accounting for half of the world's wasted children.

Way Forward

To effectively combat child labour, India must focus on:

  • Strengthening Enforcement:Establishing a National Child Labour Enforcement Grid integrating labour inspectors, district magistrates, Juvenile Justice Boards, NGOs, and Child Welfare Committees to ensure coordinated action.
  • Closing Legal Gaps:Revisiting the “family enterprise” exemption and mandating compulsory reporting and rehabilitation of child labourers under the Juvenile Justice Act.
  • Improving Data Systems:Fast-tracking the 2021 Census and including child labour modules in PLFS and NFHS, leveraging technology like geo-tagging and mobile apps for real-time monitoring.
  • Linking Education and Welfare:Strengthening schemes like Samagra Shiksha, PM POSHAN, and Anganwadi services, alongside conditional cash transfers to incentivize withdrawal of children from labour.
  • Raising Awareness:Scaling up mass communication campaigns to change societal attitudes toward child labour.

Conclusion

While India’s legal framework against child labour is among the strongest globally, enforcement weaknesses and socio-economic realities hinder progress. Addressing poverty, improving governance, and ensuring children’s right to education and protection are imperative to break the cycle of child labour and promote a just and equitable society.

Mental Health Insurance Coverage in India

  • 09 May 2025

Context:

Mental health insurance coverage in India remains critically inadequate despite rising awareness of mental health issues. According to the RiseUP for a Better Tomorrow: Mental Health Report 2025, mental health accounts for less than 1% of total health insurance claims, reflecting a glaring disparity in healthcare priorities. This neglect persists despite a robust legal and regulatory framework aimed at promoting mental health coverage.

The Mental Healthcare Act, 2017 legally mandates that mental health be treated on par with physical health in insurance policies. In line with this, the Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority of India (IRDAI) issued guidelines in 2019 requiring insurers to include mental health illnesses in coverage plans. However, implementation remains patchy, especially in group insurance policies. Many plans continue to exclude essential mental health services, undermining legislative intent.

Current insurance offerings are heavily skewed towards hospitalization for severe mental illnesses, with minimal coverage for outpatient care—counselling, therapy, and medication—which forms the backbone of mental healthcare. Only 17% of insured individuals have access to outpatient mental health services. Additionally, schemes like Ayushman Bharat offer limited support for mental health, and common exclusions such as substance abuse and self-inflicted injuries reduce the scope of coverage.

On the demand side, awareness is a significant barrier. Around 42% of people are unaware of their mental health coverage, while 83% of organizations report low utilization of mental health insurance. Out-of-pocket expenses still account for 60–70% of mental healthcare costs (NMHS 2015–16), adding to the economic burden. A staggering 70–90% of individuals with mental disorders remain untreated, largely due to poor insurance access.

From the supply perspective, policy design is often modeled on physical health, failing to account for the chronic and outpatient nature of many mental health conditions. Nearly 50% of respondents in the RiseUP report cited high treatment costs as a deterrent to seeking care, a concern aggravated by restrictive policies and long claim settlement periods. Furthermore, the limited empanelment of mental health professionals constrains access for insured individuals.

Social stigma continues to be a pervasive barrier. Nearly half of the surveyed individuals fear discrimination if their mental health needs are revealed. This stigma leads to underreporting and delays in seeking care, further deepening the treatment gap.

Government initiatives like the National Mental Health Programme (NMHP) and Tele-MANAS are promising steps but require integration with insurance mechanisms to be effective. Seamless coordination between public services and insurance schemes is crucial.

Way Forward:

There is a pressing need to redesign insurance policies to comprehensively include outpatient mental health care, increase awareness through targeted campaigns, reduce stigma through public health messaging, streamline claims processing, and expand provider networks. Regulatory bodies like IRDAI must ensure compliance through audits and penalties, while employers should be incentivized to offer robust mental health coverage.

Conclusion:
Expanding mental health insurance is vital for a healthier, more inclusive, and productive society. Achieving this calls for a multi-stakeholder approach involving legal enforcement, policy reform, public education, and systemic coordination between government and private actors.

India’s Human Development Index 2025

  • 08 May 2025

In News:

India has made steady progress in the Human Development Index (HDI), improving its rank from 133rd in 2022 to 130th in 2023 among 193 countries. Its HDI value rose from 0.676 to 0.685, reflecting advancements in key areas such as health, education, and income. Despite these gains, significant challenges, particularly inequality, continue to limit India’s overall human development.

Understanding India’s HDI Progress

The HDI is a composite measure that captures a country’s average achievements in three core dimensions: health (life expectancy), education (years of schooling), and income (gross national income per capita). India currently belongs to the ‘medium human development’ category and is approaching the threshold for ‘high human development’ (an HDI value of 0.700).

Several factors have driven India’s recent improvement:

  • Health: Life expectancy increased markedly from 58.6 years in 1990 to 72 years in 2023. This improvement is supported by flagship health schemes like Ayushman Bharat, the National Rural Health Mission, Janani Suraksha Yojana, and PoshanAbhiyaan, which have enhanced healthcare access and nutrition.
  • Education: The expected years of schooling grew from 8.2 years in 1990 to 13 years in 2023, while mean years of schooling rose from 4.1 to 6.9 years. Policies such as the Right to Education Act and the National Education Policy 2020 have played critical roles in improving educational quality and accessibility.
  • Income: India’s per capita Gross National Income surged from $2,167 in 1990 to $9,046 in 2023. Social welfare programs like MGNREGA and Jan Dhan Yojana have contributed to this growth by lifting approximately 135 million people out of multidimensional poverty between 2015-16 and 2019-21.

Persistent Challenges: Inequality and Gender Disparity

Inequality poses a major impediment to India’s HDI progress. It is estimated that disparities reduce India’s HDI by 30.7%, one of the highest losses in South Asia. The wealthiest 10% earn nearly 57% of the national income, while the poorest 50% share only 13%. Gender inequality further complicates the picture: India’s Gender Development Index (GDI) stands at 0.874, with female HDI (0.631) significantly lower than male HDI (0.722). Despite policy efforts, female labor force participation and political representation remain limited.

Regional and Global Context

Regionally, India lags behind neighbors like China (75th) and Sri Lanka (89th) but shares a similar HDI value with Bangladesh (130th), and surpasses Nepal (145th) and Pakistan (168th). Globally, the 2025 Human Development Report highlights a slowdown in HDI growth—the slowest since 1990—but emphasizes the transformative role of Artificial Intelligence (AI) in fostering inclusive development. India holds 20% of global AI researchers, positioning it to harness AI’s potential in sectors such as healthcare, education, and productivity.

Strategic Innovations and National Initiatives

India’s pursuit of sustainable development complements its HDI goals through key initiatives:

  • Scientists have developed a metal-free catalyst leveraging mechanical energy for sustainable hydrogen fuel production, supporting the National Green Hydrogen Mission to promote clean energy.
  • The Indian Navy’s deployment of INS Sharda to the Maldives for its inaugural Humanitarian Assistance and Disaster Relief (HADR) exercise under the MAHASAGAR vision showcases India’s leadership in regional disaster preparedness and maritime security.
  • Developments in regional defense, such as Iran’s unveiling of the solid-fuel GhassemBasir medium-range missile, highlight ongoing security challenges necessitating vigilance and capability enhancement.

Way Forward

To advance into the ‘high human development’ category, India must:

  • Implement targeted policies to reduce income and gender inequalities.
  • Invest in quality education and healthcare, especially for underserved populations.
  • Promote inclusive economic growth benefiting marginalized groups.
  • Leverage emerging technologies like AI responsibly to enhance public services without deepening disparities.
  • Strengthen regional cooperation and disaster resilience to protect socio-economic gains.

Conclusion

India’s HDI improvement reflects meaningful progress in health, education, and income. Yet, to fully realize its human development potential, India must tackle persistent inequalities and strategically harness technological innovations alongside regional cooperation. With sustained, inclusive efforts, India can continue its upward trajectory toward equitable growth and global leadership.

16th Finance Commission

  • 06 May 2025

In News:

The 16th Finance Commission (FC), constituted under Article 280 of the Constitution in December 2023, and chaired by Arvind Panagariya, faces a formidable task: redefining the contours of fiscal federalism for the period 2026–2031 amidst growing demands for fiscal autonomy by states and mounting fiscal pressures on the Union government.

The central concern is the shrinking divisible tax pool. Though the 15th Finance Commission recommended a 41% share of the divisible pool for states (reduced from 42% due to the reorganization of Jammu & Kashmir), the effective share received by states has hovered around 32%, owing to the increasing use of cesses and surcharges, which are not shared. According to RBI data, the divisible pool has shrunk from 88.6% in 2011–12 to 78.9% in 2021–22 of the Centre’s gross tax revenue. Consequently, many states are demanding that their share be increased to 50%, and a cap be placed on cesses and surcharges.

However, expanding transfers is fiscally challenging. The Union government is already borrowing to fund grants to states, raising concerns over sustainability and fiscal priorities. States account for nearly 60% of general government expenditure, and their argument for greater fiscal autonomy is not unfounded. A possible resolution lies not in increasing total transfers, but in restructuring the compositionshifting from tied to untied transfers.

The overreliance on Centrally Sponsored Schemes (CSS), which dictate how funds must be spent, has constrained state-level innovation and discretion. Rationalizing CSS and expanding untied transfers would empower states to prioritize their unique developmental needs. However, this is politically sensitive, as CSS often serve national priorities and electoral interests.

Yet, more untied funds come with trade-offs. Several states, including Karnataka and Punjab, are grappling with rising revenue deficits, indicating growing expenditure on salaries, interest payments, and subsidies rather than capital investment. This raises the risk that untied funds may be diverted to populist schemes, such as non-merit subsidies or quasi-universal cash transfers. A report by Axis Bank notes that 14 states have launched income transfer schemes, amounting to 0.6% of GDP, raising concerns about the long-term fiscal discipline.

A key question is whether increased untied transfers will improve inter-state equity in public service delivery. Low-income states like Bihar have far lower per capita spending on health, education, and infrastructure. Without accountability frameworks, there is a risk that increased autonomy may not translate into equitable development outcomes.

Moreover, the third tier of governance—local bodies—remains underfunded. Greater untied transfers could incentivize states to empower panchayats and municipalities, aligning with the principle of subsidiarity and deepening democratic decentralization.

Conclusion

The 16th Finance Commission must strike a delicate balance—ensuring fiscal autonomy for states without jeopardizing national fiscal stability. It must consider capping non-divisible levies, reforming transfer mechanisms, and introducing performance-linked incentives to strengthen accountability. Only a recalibrated, transparent, and equitable devolution framework can advance India’s cooperative federalism in both spirit and practice.

Caste Data in India: The SECC 2011 and the Road Ahead

  • 05 May 2025

Context:

India has not released detailed caste-based population data since the 1931 Census, leaving a significant void in understanding the country’s socio-economic and caste demographics. The Socio Economic and Caste Census (SECC) 2011 attempted to fill this gap, but while socio-economic data was released in 2016, caste-wise data—except for total Scheduled Castes (SCs) and Scheduled Tribes (STs)—was withheld.

Historically, the 1941 Census did collect caste data, but findings were not released due to World War II. Post-independence, Indian Censuses have only collected data on SCs and STs, without disaggregating by specific caste or including Other Backward Classes (OBCs). As a result, the 1931 Census remains the last comprehensive source of caste-wise demographic data, and now serves as the baseline for any future caste enumeration, including the pandemic-delayed Census 2021.

SECC 2011: Objectives and Scope

Launched by the Ministry of Rural Development on June 29, 2011, SECC was a comprehensive door-to-door survey aimed at assessing the socio-economic status of rural and urban households across the country. Conducted in approximately 24 lakh enumeration blocks, each covering about 125 households, the SECC aimed to support evidence-based policy formulation and targeted implementation of welfare schemes. While the socio-economic part of the SECC was managed by the Rural Development Ministry, the caste data was overseen by the Ministry of Home Affairs under the Registrar General of India (RGI).

Unlike Census 2011, which is legally bound to maintain confidentiality under the Census Act, SECC data is accessible to government departments for the identification of scheme beneficiaries.

SECC vs Census 2011: Key Differences

While both exercises shared some common demographic questions—such as age, gender, literacy, and marital status—the SECC collected more granular data. For example:

  • Caste and Tribe Details: Census 2011 asked only whether a respondent belonged to SC or ST. SECC 2011 went further, asking for the exact name of the caste/tribe under categories like SC (Code 1), ST (Code 2), Other (Code 3), or No Caste/Tribe (Code 4).
  • Religion-based Caste Restrictions: In line with a 1990 government order, SECC noted that only Hindus, Sikhs, and Buddhists can be listed as SCs, while STs can belong to any religion.
  • Economic and Health Indicators: SECC asked about household assets (mobile phones, refrigerators, vehicles), housing conditions, source of lighting, water access, latrine availability, and kitchen facilities. It also collected details on disabilities (mental and physical) and chronic illnesses like TB and leprosy.
  • Employment Data: SECC captured diverse income sources in both urban (e.g., rag-picking, street vending) and rural areas (e.g., cultivation, casual labour, manual scavenging). It also recorded landholding patterns and mechanisation levels in agriculture.

Conclusion

The absence of updated, disaggregated caste data has hindered the effective formulation of policies aimed at social justice and economic equity. The SECC 2011 highlighted the possibilities of comprehensive caste enumeration but fell short in data disclosure. The upcoming Census 2021, if it includes detailed caste data, could significantly reshape India’s welfare landscape by ensuring more targeted and inclusive governance through data-driven policymaking.

Judicial Remedies and Systemic Reforms for Effective Waste Management in India

  • 04 May 2025

Context:

India is currently facing an escalating waste management crisis, exacerbated by rising urbanization, inadequate infrastructure, and weak enforcement. According to a 2024 study published in Nature, India is the world’s largest plastic polluter, emitting 9.3 million tonnes (Mt) of plastic annually—nearly 20% of global plastic emissions. This is largely due to widespread mismanaged waste, including open dumping and burning.

Despite claims of 95% national waste collection coverage, the situation on the ground reveals stark contrasts. Dumpsites outnumber sanitary landfills by a ratio of 10:1, and rural areas along with the informal sector remain excluded from official data. The actual per capita plastic waste generation in India may be as high as 0.54 kg/day, much higher than the reported 0.12 kg/day.

The problem is particularly acute in ecologically sensitive areas like the Indian Himalayan Region, where data gaps, poor infrastructure, and lack of state capacity have led to severe plastic accumulation, threatening biodiversity and public health.

According to TheEnergy and Resources Institute (TERI), India generates 62 Mt of waste annually, including 5.6 Mt of plastic waste, 7.9 Mt of hazardous waste, and 1.5 Mt of e-waste. However, only 43 Mt is collected, with 12 Mt treated, and 31 Mt remains untreated in waste yards.

Institutional and Legal Framework

India has implemented several regulatory frameworks under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986, such as the Solid Waste Management Rules (2016), Plastic Waste Management Rules (2016), and the E-Waste Management Rules (2022). The Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR) mechanism mandates producers to manage the entire lifecycle of products. As of 2022, EPR has been extended to plastic packaging, battery waste, and used oil.

Initiatives like Swachh Bharat Mission (SBM) and Waste to Wealth have promoted community engagement and technology use. SBM Urban 2.0 aims to create "Garbage Free Cities" by enhancing material recovery and waste-to-energy infrastructure. By 2024, 4.75 lakh villages had solid waste systems, and 5.14 lakh had liquid waste management systems.

Challenges

However, implementation gaps persist. Waste audits are inconsistent, especially in rural areas governed by Panchayati Raj institutions. Infrastructure for segregation, recycling, and recovery is insufficient. Establishing kiosks and MRFs in remote areas remains a logistical and financial challenge.

Way Forward: Judicial and Systemic Interventions

A promising approach is the use of continuing mandamus by the judiciary. In the 2025 Vellore District Environment Monitoring Committee vs. District Collector case, the Supreme Court emphasized remediation under the “polluter pays” principle. Judicial mandates for compliance, third-party audits, and public data transparency can significantly enhance accountability.

Technological tools like geotagging waste infrastructure on EPR portals can improve tracking and efficiency. Local bodies must be integrated with MRFs, recyclers, and EPR kiosks for seamless waste flow.

Additionally, product redesign for circularity, international cooperation through platforms like GACERE, and citizen engagement are critical to building a sustainable waste management ecosystem.

Bonded Labour in India

  • 03 May 2025

Context:

Despite constitutional safeguards and decades-old abolition laws, bonded labour continues to haunt India’s informal economy. Marked by coercion, caste oppression, and systemic apathy, this form of modern slavery traps millions in exploitative work conditions under the guise of debt repayment or social obligation.

Ground Reality and Human Cost

The harrowing experiences of survivors like Mukesh Adivasi from Madhya Pradesh and K. Thenmozhi from Andhra Pradesh underscore the brutality of bonded labour. Lured by paltry advances (?500–?2,000), these individuals were trafficked across states, subjected to 14–16 hours of daily toil, and endured beatings, confinement, and psychological trauma. Their stories reflect the plight of an estimated 1.84 crore bonded labourers, as acknowledged by the Ministry of Labour and Employment (MoLE) in 2016.

However, between 2016 and 2021, only 12,760 individuals were officially rescued and rehabilitated — less than 1% of the total. Achieving the 2030 rehabilitation target would require rescuing over 11 lakh individuals annually, a goal far from the current trajectory.

Structural and Social Triggers

Bonded labour is not merely an economic issue but a complex interplay of poverty, caste discrimination, and weak governance. Immediate triggers include emergencies like illness, job loss, or dowries, pushing families to seek advances from exploitative employers. However, deeper systemic factors — such as caste-based exclusion (over 80% of bonded labourers belong to SC/ST/OBCs), illiteracy, and employer monopolies in rural credit and labour markets — perpetuate this cycle.

The Global Slavery Index lists India among the countries with the highest prevalence of modern slavery. Studies from states like Punjab reveal that 84% of bonded workers belong to backward castes, reinforcing the role of social stratification in this injustice.

Policy Gaps and Legal Shortcomings

Though bonded labour was abolished under the Bonded Labour System (Abolition) Act, 1976, enforcement remains weak. Many states deny its existence or fail to report cases, delaying rehabilitation. The Trafficking of Persons Bill, 2018, criticised for excluding bonded labour, further highlights legislative gaps.

Labour law reforms have exacerbated vulnerabilities. The Labour Codes (2019–2020) undermined unionisation and collective bargaining — vital tools once advocated by B.R. Ambedkar for worker empowerment.

Additionally, 90% of India’s workforce is in the informal sector (NSSO, 2023), lacking formal contracts, social security, or grievance redressal. This unregulated landscape fosters exploitation, especially among migrants fleeing climate distress and rural unemployment.

Way Forward

  • Enforcement Reforms: Empower District Vigilance Committees with legal powers; digitise complaint tracking and link it with Aadhaar-based databases.
  • Legal Overhaul: Amend labour codes to restore union rights and introduce caste-sensitive protections.
  • Social Empowerment: Launch targeted rehabilitation schemes for SC/ST communities, offer skill training and land rights, and use vernacular media for rights education.
  • Transparency and Data: Establish a national registry of rescued bonded labourers to monitor their reintegration and prevent re-trafficking.

Conclusion

Bonded labour in India represents a fundamental failure of justice, governance, and social equity. Real transformation requires a multi-pronged approach — strengthening laws, empowering vulnerable communities, and confronting the caste-class nexus of exploitation. Until then, India’s economic growth will remain morally compromised by the invisible chains of forced labour.

India’s Decade of Progress in Poverty Reduction

  • 01 May 2025

In News:

The World Bank’s Spring 2025 Poverty and Equity Brief has lauded India for lifting 171 million people out of extreme poverty between 2011-12 and 2022-23, reducing the poverty rate from 16.2% to 2.3%. This achievement underscores India’s sustained commitment to inclusive development, driven by economic growth, targeted welfare interventions, and improved access to essential services.

Key Findings:

The Poverty and Equity Briefs (PEBs), published biannually by the World Bank, assess poverty trends using international benchmarks (USD 2.15/day for extreme poverty, USD 3.65/day for lower-middle-income poverty), and include multidimensional poverty indicators and Gini Index estimates for income inequality.

  • Rural and Urban Progress:
    • Rural extreme poverty declined from 18.4% to 2.8%.
    • Urban extreme poverty fell from 10.7% to 1.1%.
    • The rural-urban poverty gap narrowed significantly, indicating more balanced regional development.
  • Lower-Middle-Income Poverty (USD 3.65/day line):
    • National poverty fell from 61.8% to 28.1%, lifting 378 million people out of poverty.
    • Rural poverty declined from 69% to 32.5%, and urban from 43.5% to 17.2%.
  • State-wise Contribution:Uttar Pradesh, Maharashtra, Bihar, West Bengal, and Madhya Pradesh—accounting for 65% of India’s poor in 2011—contributed two-thirds of the total poverty reduction by 2022-23.
  • Multidimensional Poverty:
    • MPI fell from 53.8% (2005-06) to 16.4% (2019-21).
    • By 2022-23, it further reduced to 15.5%, indicating improvements in health, education, and living standards.
  • Income Inequality:India’s Gini Index improved from 28.8 to 25.5, signaling a modest reduction in income disparities.

Employment and Structural Shifts

Employment growth has been robust post-2021:

  • Female employment has increased, though still only 31%, with a 234 million gender gap in paid work.
  • Urban unemployment declined to 6.6% in Q1 FY24-25, the lowest since 2017-18.
  • A shift from rural to urban employment was noted among men, while rural women increasingly engage in agricultural self-employment.

Persistent Social Challenges

Despite progress, several social challenges persist:

  • Marginalized communities (SCs/STs) face limited access to quality education, healthcare, and formal jobs.
  • Malnutrition and health disparities remain despite schemes like POSHAN Abhiyaan.
  • Water and energy poverty still affect large segments—49.8% of rural households lack piped water (NFHS-5), and many still rely on biomass despite the Ujjwala Yojana.
  • Mental poverty due to chronic stress, unemployment (29% among graduates), and social stigma hinders productivity.
  • Environmental degradation from unsustainable resource use affects the poorest most, worsening poverty cycles.

Policy Recommendations

To build on this progress, India must:

  • Strengthen affirmative action and welfare delivery (e.g., PMJDY, DDU-GKY, Aadhaar-based targeting).
  • Promote gender equality through effective implementation of BetiBachaoBetiPadhao, SSY, and gender-inclusive job creation.
  • Expand clean energy and water access via solar microgrids and the Jal Jeevan Mission.
  • Scale up mental health services using ASHA workers and awareness campaigns.

Conclusion

India’s success in drastically reducing poverty—both monetary and multidimensional—demonstrates the impact of focused development policies. However, the path ahead requires deeper reforms targeting inequality, gender disparity, and service delivery inefficiencies to ensure sustained, inclusive growth.

Myanmar-Thailand Earthquake 2025

  • 30 Mar 2025

In News:

Recently, a devastating 7.7 magnitude earthquake struck central Myanmar near Mandalay, resulting in catastrophic destruction across Myanmar and Thailand. The tremor, the strongest in the region in 75 years and globally the most powerful in two years, occurred at a shallow depth of 10 km, amplifying its destructive impact.

Human and Structural Impact

In Myanmar, at least 144 people were killed and 730 injured, while in Thailand, particularly Bangkok, eight deaths were confirmed, including three from a 33-storey building collapse. The death toll is expected to rise as search and rescue operations continue. Infrastructure damage was widespread—residential buildings, pagodas, a dam, and a 90-year-old bridge in Myanmar collapsed. In Bangkok, high-rises swayed dangerously, rapid transit systems shut down, and panic gripped the city. Over 90 people were reported missing in Bangkok’s construction site collapse.

The quake severely impacted regions already suffering from ongoing humanitarian crises, particularly Myanmar, where a civil war has displaced over 3 million people, and 20 million are in need of assistance, according to the UN. Emergency services were hindered by damaged roads and downed power lines.

Geological Context and Causes

The earthquake was caused by strike-slip faulting along the Sagaing Fault, a major tectonic boundary between the Indian and Eurasian plates. This north-south fault is highly seismically active and has been responsible for several past quakes, including those in 1839 (M 8.3), 1912 (M 7.9), and 2016 (M 6.9).

Shallow-focus earthquakes like this one, occurring at just 10 km depth, tend to cause significant surface damage due to minimal energy dissipation before the seismic waves reach the surface. Additionally, seismic waves radiate along the entire fault line, affecting regions far beyond the epicenter, including China’s Yunnan and Sichuan provinces, where structural damage and injuries were also reported.

Preparedness and Vulnerabilities

Myanmar's infrastructure is ill-prepared for high-magnitude earthquakes, especially in the Mandalay region where modern seismic-resistant construction is limited. The USGS estimated potential fatalities between 10,000 and 100,000, and economic losses up to 70% of Myanmar’s GDP, underscoring the country’s vulnerability. The affected area lies in the central region of the country, less accustomed to high-magnitude tremors than the traditionally more seismically active western regions.

International and Regional Response

Myanmar declared a state of emergency in six regions, including Naypyidaw and Mandalay. Thailand’s city hall declared Bangkok a disaster zone to mobilize emergency responses. Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi offered immediate support, stating that Indian authorities and the Ministry of External Affairs are in touch with both governments. The disaster also holds diplomatic relevance, with Bangkok set to host the BIMSTEC Summit, highlighting the importance of regional disaster cooperation.

Conclusion

The 2025 Myanmar-Thailand earthquake exposes the urgent need for seismic resilience, urban preparedness, and regional disaster response cooperation in South and Southeast Asia. With climate change and tectonic vulnerabilities intersecting, India and neighboring nations must integrate robust disaster management frameworks into developmental planning and regional diplomacy.

Judges’ Asset Disclosure in India

  • 29 Mar 2025

In News:

The recent recovery of large sums of cash from the residence of Delhi High Court judge Justice Yashwant Varma has reignited the debate over transparency and accountability in India’s higher judiciary. This incident underscores the pressing need for a legal framework mandating the public disclosure of assets by judges of the Supreme Court and High Courts—currently one of the few segments of public office bearers exempt from such transparency norms.

Current Norms and Judicial Practice

In 1997, the Supreme Court under then Chief Justice J.S. Verma adopted a resolution requiring judges to declare their assets (including those of spouses and dependents) to the Chief Justice. However, this was an internal exercise, with no provision for public disclosure.

In 2009, responding to public pressure and a Right to Information (RTI) application, the Supreme Court resolved to allow voluntary disclosures on its website. While asset declarations were briefly published starting November 2009, the practice faded. Since 2018, the SC website has not been updated, and declarations by current or former judges are no longer publicly available.

In a landmark judgment in 2019, the Supreme Court ruled that judges' assets and liabilities are not “personal information” and hence fall within the scope of RTI. Despite this, judicial compliance with voluntary disclosures remains minimal.

High Court Practices and Resistance

As of March 1, 2024, only 97 of the 770 sitting High Court judges (less than 13%) across seven High Courts (Delhi, Punjab & Haryana, Himachal Pradesh, Madras, Chhattisgarh, Kerala, and Karnataka) have publicly declared their assets. Many High Courts have outright rejected RTI applications or passed resolutions opposing the idea of asset disclosure. For example, in 2012, the Uttarakhand High Court strongly objected to bringing judges’ assets under RTI. The Allahabad High Court, and several others including Rajasthan, Gujarat, and Bombay, have also denied such information under RTI citing exemptions.

Comparison with Other Public Servants

In stark contrast, civil servants, ministers, and elected representatives in India are bound by law or convention to publicly disclose their assets:

  • Civil Servants: Must annually declare assets to their cadre-controlling authority; many states such as Gujarat and Kerala make this information accessible via RTI.
  • Union Ministers and MPs: Since 2009, ministers submit asset declarations to the Prime Minister’s Office (PMO), which are available on its website. MPs submit declarations to the Speaker or Chairperson, which can be accessed through RTI.
  • Election Candidates: A 2002 Supreme Court judgment mandates detailed public asset disclosure as part of the nomination process. Even minor errors can disqualify a candidate.

Legislative Recommendations and the Way Forward

Recognizing the gap, the Parliamentary Standing Committee on Personnel, Public Grievances, Law and Justice recommended in 2023 that legislation be introduced to mandate asset disclosures by judges. However, no progress has been made on this front.

In a democratic setup, the judiciary must not only be impartial but also seen as such. Mandatory public asset disclosure is a vital step toward strengthening judicial accountability and restoring public trust in the institution. Balancing judicial independence with transparency is essential for good governance and ethical public administration.

India’s E-Retail Landscape

  • 28 Mar 2025

Context:

India’s e-retail sector has emerged as a global frontrunner, surpassing the United States in terms of online shopper base and attaining a Gross Merchandise Value (GMV) of $60 billion in 2024. Despite this milestone, the sector’s growth rate halved from historical averages of 20% to 10–12% in 2024. This deceleration is attributed primarily to macroeconomic headwinds—particularly high inflation and stagnation in real wages, which have also slowed private consumption growth from 11% (2017–19) to 8% (2022–24).

Structural Drivers and Government Support

Notwithstanding short-term sluggishness, India’s long-term e-retail outlook remains promising. Key government initiatives—such as Digital India, Make in India, Startup India, and Skill India—have laid a strong digital foundation. The Government e-Marketplace (GeM) crossed ?4 lakh crore GMV in FY24, reflecting growing public sector adoption of digital commerce.

Policy reforms have facilitated e-commerce expansion:

  • 100% FDI in B2B e-commerce
  • Implementation of Consumer Protection (E-commerce) Rules, 2020
  • Strengthening digital infrastructure through 5G rollout
  • The CSC-ONDC partnership aims to democratize access to digital markets in rural areas.

Key Growth Trends Shaping the Sector

The Flipkart–Bain & Company report identifies three transformative trends:

  1. Quick Commerce:Quick commerce now commands over two-thirds of e-grocery orders and constitutes 10% of total e-retail spending. It is projected to grow at over 40% CAGR until 2030, driven by faster deliveries, increasing product categories, and geographic expansion into Tier-2 and Tier-3 cities.
  2. Trend-First Commerce:Particularly dominant in fashion, this segment caters to consumers who prioritize latest trends and styles. Trend-first fashion alone is forecasted to grow fourfold to $8–10 billion by 2028, with more than half of the sales occurring online.
  3. Hyper-Value Commerce:This model emphasizes ultra-low-priced assortments aimed at lower-middle-income consumers. Its share of e-retail GMV has increased from 5% in 2021 to over 12% in 2024, gaining momentum in smaller towns and cities.

Demographic and Regional Shifts

The e-retail customer and seller base is witnessing increasing diversification:

  • Since 2020, 60% of new shoppers have emerged from Tier-3 or smaller cities.
  • The Northeastern states show 1.2 times higher e-retail penetration compared to the national average.
  • Similarly, 60% of new sellers since 2021 are from Tier-2 or smaller towns, indicating broad-based entrepreneurial participation.

Future Outlook

E-retail is expected to reach a GMV of $170–190 billion by 2030, growing at over 18% annually. A key inflection point will be when India’s GDP per capita crosses the $3,500–4,000 threshold, historically associated with significant upticks in discretionary digital spending. By 2030, one in ten retail dollars is projected to be spent online, with high-frequency categories such as grocery, lifestyle, and general merchandise accounting for two-thirds of e-retail expenditure.

Conclusion

India’s e-retail sector reflects the dynamic interplay of technology, policy, and socio-economic shifts. While macroeconomic challenges have tempered short-term growth, strong structural fundamentals and strategic disruptions position the sector for robust expansion. The transformation of digital commerce, particularly through inclusivity and value-driven models, is not only reshaping consumer behavior but also holds significant implications for employment, urbanization, and digital governance in India’s developmental journey.

India’s Deep Tech Ecosystem & the Government’s ?20,000 Crore Funding Initiative

  • 27 Mar 2025

Context:

India’s deep technology (deep tech) sector is emerging as a key driver of transformative innovation, leveraging advanced scientific breakthroughs to address complex challenges across sectors such as defence, healthcare, artificial intelligence (AI), biotechnology, aerospace, and renewable energy. Deep tech encompasses disruptive technologies including AI and machine learning, quantum computing, biotechnology, advanced materials, robotics, and aerospace systems.

Growth and Potential of India’s Deep Tech Sector

India’s deep tech ecosystem has seen rapid expansion in recent years. According to NASSCOM’s 2024 report, over 3,600 deep tech startups operate in India, with 480 new startups launched in 2023 alone, doubling the number from the previous year. While India ranks as the third-largest startup ecosystem globally, its deep tech sector ranks sixth worldwide. This growth reflects a rising blend of entrepreneurial ambition, government support, and increasing collaboration between academic institutions, research organisations, and industry.

Government initiatives such as the Draft National DeepTech Start-up Policy, the National Quantum Mission, India AI Mission, and substantial venture capital funds (e.g., ?1,000 crore for space tech startups) underscore India’s commitment to strengthening this ecosystem. Programmes like the Atal Innovation Mission, NITI Aayog’s innovation initiatives, and Start-up India provide critical support through incubators, accelerators, and funding mechanisms.

The ?20,000 Crore Deep Tech Fund

In the Union Budget 2024-25, Finance Minister announced a ?20,000 crore allocation as a 50-year interest-free loan to private sector-driven deep tech research and innovation. The fund aims to catalyse cutting-edge R&D and position India as a global leader in disruptive technologies.

However, the Parliamentary Standing Committee on Science and Technology, Environment, Forests and Climate Change has raised significant concerns about this scheme. While acknowledging the boldness of the initiative, the Committee warned of risks including potential misallocation of funds, national security implications, and low return on investment for the government. It expressed doubts over the competence of fund managers in selecting impactful projects, cautioning that private entities might benefit disproportionately at public expense.

The Committee suggested that directing such substantial funding toward government research institutions might yield more measurable impact. It emphasized the need for transparency, accountability, and a robust framework to guide the implementation of the fund.

Underutilisation of Scientific Research Funds and Reviving Public Sector Units

The Committee also flagged suboptimal utilisation of allocated funds by the Department of Scientific and Industrial Research, with over half of the budget remaining unused late into the financial year. A significant portion (62%) is consumed by salaries and pensions, leaving limited funds for actual research and infrastructure development.

Further, the Committee highlighted concerns over the poor condition of two public sector undertakings under the Department of Biotechnology—BIBCOL and IVCOL. It recommended their revival to ensure affordable vaccine availability domestically and improve India’s position in the global vaccine market, especially for exports.

Policy Recommendations and Future Outlook

To unlock the full potential of deep tech innovation, the Committee and experts suggest multiple policy measures for Budget 2025 and beyond:

  • Ensuring long-term, patient capital through government grants and venture capital funds to meet the high risk and capital-intensive nature of deep tech ventures.
  • Strengthening intellectual property rights and establishing commercialisation hubs for startups.
  • Enhancing public-private partnerships and specialised talent development through tailored skilling and certifications in AI, robotics, and quantum computing.
  • Modernising infrastructure by establishing research hubs, technology parks, and national facilities such as wind tunnels.
  • Streamlining regulatory frameworks for faster deployment of emerging technologies like autonomous vehicles and drones.
  • Promoting sustainability by incentivising green and climate tech innovations.

Conclusion:

India’s deep tech sector is poised for a transformative leap, but its success hinges on addressing governance, funding utilisation, and ecosystem-building challenges. The government’s strategic interventions and sound policy frameworks will be crucial in translating India’s scientific prowess into global technological leadership.

Universal and Equitable Tuberculosis Care in India

  • 26 Mar 2025

In News:

India has made significant strides in tuberculosis (TB) care, exemplified by a 17.7% reduction in TB incidence from 237 to 195 per lakh population between 2015 and 2023. This progress reflects a comprehensive approach incorporating rapid molecular testing, new drug regimens, enhanced nutritional support, and community engagement. However, to achieve universal health coverage (UHC) and eliminate TB by 2025, as targeted by the National Tuberculosis Elimination Programme (NTEP), further integration and decentralization of services are crucial.

Key Developments in TB Care

India’s efforts to combat TB have included the roll-out of the BPaLM regimen (a combination of four drugs: Bedaquiline, Pretomanid, Linezolid, and Moxifloxacin), which shortens the treatment period for drug-resistant TB.

Additionally, the Ni-kshayPoshan Yojana (NPY), which provides nutritional support of ?1,000 per month to TB patients, addresses the need for holistic care. Community participation has also been enhanced through the inclusion of TB survivors as “TB champions,” promoting awareness and treatment adherence at the grassroots level.

Furthermore, TB care has been integrated into the Ayushman Bharat scheme, ensuring that TB services are available through the Pradhan Mantri Jan Arogya Yojana (PMJAY) and Ayushman Arogya Mandirs (AAMs), which offer comprehensive primary health care across India. These efforts aim to decentralize TB care, ensuring that treatment is accessible at the community level, reducing delays in diagnosis, and minimizing out-of-pocket expenses for patients.

Challenges to Achieving Equitable TB Care

Despite these advancements, challenges persist. Over 50% of TB patients seek treatment in the private sector, where standards are inconsistent, leading to delays and higher costs. The private sector’s underreporting further complicates the efforts to ensure complete coverage and comprehensive care. Additionally, barriers such as gender, caste, disability, and socio-economic status often affect TB diagnosis and treatment outcomes. These social determinants necessitate a targeted approach to ensure equitable access to care.

TB services in India have largely remained vertical, with distinct TB care pathways separate from general healthcare services. Integrating TB care into the broader public health system is critical for the country’s goal of achieving UHC. Another challenge is the lack of integrated care that combines TB treatment with screening for other diseases like chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), diabetes, and mental health conditions.

Recommendations

India must focus on five key strategies to enhance TB care and achieve UHC:

  • Person-Centered Care: Model programs like Tamil Nadu’s KasanoiErappilaThittam, which identifies vulnerable populations and provides tailored care, should be scaled up nationwide.
  • Intersectionality: Address the intersection of gender, caste, disability, and socio-economic status to ensure that marginalized groups are not left behind.
  • Integrated Care: TB care should be integrated with the broader healthcare system, including screenings for non-communicable diseases (NCDs) and mental health issues, using tools like AI-enabled diagnostics.
  • Financial Protection: Expanding social protection measures such as wage-loss schemes, livelihood support, and extended nutritional assistance will reduce financial barriers for TB patients.
  • Awareness and Communication: A multi-platform public education campaign similar to the one used during the COVID-19 pandemic is essential to dispel myths, reduce stigma, and promote early detection and treatment.

Conclusion

India’s ambitious goal to eliminate TB by 2025, ahead of the global target, is a crucial step toward achieving UHC. By strengthening integrated, person-centered, and equitable care, addressing the social determinants of health, and promoting community-driven initiatives, India can lead the global fight against TB and set a benchmark for future health interventions.

Tracking Migration in India

  • 25 Mar 2025

In News:

The Covid-19 pandemic significantly altered migration patterns in India, with a massive reverse migration from urban areas to rural regions. The first lockdown saw 44.13 million people migrating, followed by 26.3 million during the second lockdown. These migrants, mostly low-wage workers, faced hardships like wage theft, food insecurity, and a lack of healthcare. Many, reliant on remittances, were economically strained.

Rebound of Rural-to-Urban Migration

Five years post-pandemic, migration trends have largely reverted to pre-Covid patterns. The rural economy struggled to accommodate returning migrants, offering limited job opportunities and low wages, leading many to return to urban centers. Rural distress and urban aspirations, supported by schemes like the Smart Cities Mission, continue to drive migration. Projections suggest that by 2026, 40% of India’s population will reside in urban areas. Additionally, climate change is intensifying migration, especially in agrarian states like Odisha, where disrupted agriculture forces people to migrate.

Shifts in International Migration

International migration also experienced changes post-Covid. While Indian emigrants faced challenges like job losses and poor living conditions abroad, remittances remained resilient, reaching $83.15 billion in 2020. Migration patterns shifted, with increasing numbers moving to Europe, particularly skilled professionals benefiting from the EU Blue Card program. Migration to Africa has also risen, driven by growth in sectors like IT and healthcare. The pandemic also fueled a rise in student migration, with the number of student emigrants from Kerala nearly doubling from 1.29 lakh in 2018 to 2.5 lakh in 2023.

Governance Challenges in Migration

Despite changes in migration patterns, several governance challenges persist. The lack of up-to-date migration data, compounded by delays in the 2021 Census and outdated figures from the Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS), hampers effective policy-making. The Ministry of External Affairs' data underrepresents seasonal and temporary migrants, while illegal migration remains largely untracked.

Moreover, social security schemes remain inadequately implemented. The e-Shram portal, designed for unorganised workers, faces limited uptake due to digital exclusion and awareness gaps. Similarly, the One Nation One Ration Card (ONORC) scheme only covers part of the migrant population. Legal protections for migrant workers, like those under the Inter-State Migrant Workmen Act, 1979, remain weak, and the implementation of new Labour Codes introduced in 2020 is still incomplete.

Vulnerabilities and Gaps in Support

Certain vulnerable groups, such as migrant women and children, are often neglected in migration policies. Women face risks of trafficking and exploitation, while children suffer from disrupted education and inadequate healthcare. Climate-induced migration, resulting from floods and droughts, is also under-addressed in disaster management and climate adaptation policies, leaving communities unsupported during distress-induced mobility.

Recommendations for Strengthening Migration Governance

To address these challenges, India must strengthen migration governance:

  • Robust Migration Data Systems: Expand Kerala’s migration surveys to other states for better national data systems.
  • National Migration Policy: Expedite the NITI Aayog’s draft policy to ensure inter-ministerial coordination and gender-sensitive provisions.
  • International Migration Frameworks: Enhance labour mobility agreements with emerging destinations like Europe and Africa, along with skill-building initiatives.
  • Improved Social Security Access: Implement the Code on Social Security, 2020, and ensure portability of benefits across states.
  • One-Stop Migrant Facilitation Centers: Establish urban centers to assist migrants with registration, legal aid, and grievance redressal.
  • Address Vulnerable Groups: Develop policies protecting migrant women and children, ensuring education and healthcare access.
  • Climate-Induced Migration: Integrate climate migration in national policies for adequate community support.

Conclusion

Migration in India has largely returned to urban centers, but governance remains a challenge. Strengthening migration data, enhancing social security systems, and improving coordination at all levels of government will ensure that migration serves as a tool for development and the welfare of millions of migrants across India.

India’s 5G Revolution

  • 21 Mar 2025

Context:
India is undergoing a digital transformation powered by rapid expansion in mobile broadband. According to Nokia’s Mobile Broadband Index (MBiT) Report 2024, India’s average monthly data usage per user reached an all-time high of 27.5 GB. The exponential growth in 5G adoption, traffic, and device readiness reflects a critical shift in the country’s telecom and digital infrastructure landscape.

Key Trends in Data Consumption and 5G Expansion

The report highlights several key trends that underline India's accelerating digital momentum:

  • Average Data Consumption: The average mobile user in India consumed 27.5 GB/month in 2024, underlining the growing demand for video streaming, social media, and real-time applications.
  • Surge in 5G Traffic: 5G data traffic tripled over the past year, with projections indicating it will overtake 4G by Q1 2026. The shift is especially noticeable in urban areas.
  • Metro-Centric 5G Usage: In India’s metro circles, 5G now accounts for 43% of total mobile broadband usage, up from 20% in 2023, suggesting early saturation and readiness in Tier 1 cities.
  • Rural Uptake Rising: While metros lead the way, Category B and C circles are witnessing strong growth in 5G uptake, aided by affordable smartphones and increased network coverage.
  • Device Readiness: There were 271 million active 5G devices in India in 2024, doubling year-on-year. By 2025, 90% of replaced smartphones are expected to be 5G-enabled, indicating widespread device transition.
  • Fixed Wireless Access (FWA): Users with 5G FWA consume 12 times more data than typical mobile users, showing the potential of 5G in delivering high-speed home internet in underserved areas.

Implications for India’s Digital Future

  • Economic Growth and Innovation: The 5G revolution is expected to unlock new avenues in fintech, ed-tech, health-tech, and smart manufacturing. Higher data speeds and lower latency will enhance productivity and efficiency across sectors.
  • Bridging the Digital Divide: Increasing rural adoption of 5G, aided by government and private investments, can significantly reduce the urban-rural connectivity gap and foster inclusive development.
  • Employment and Start-up Ecosystem: The emergence of a robust 5G ecosystem will create demand for new skills, boosting employment in AI, IoT, cloud computing, and edge technologies.
  • Network Transformation: The transition from 4G to 5G marks a fundamental change in telecom infrastructure, requiring upgradation in backhaul capacity, spectrum efficiency, and fibre penetration.

Challenges and the Road Ahead

Despite rapid adoption, challenges remain. Ensuring affordable access in rural areas, addressing cybersecurity risks, and enhancing digital literacy are vital. Policy coherence, right-of-way (RoW) reforms, and spectrum management will determine the pace and inclusivity of 5G deployment.

Conclusion

India’s 5G journey marks a pivotal step toward becoming a digitally empowered society. With supportive policy frameworks, private sector innovation, and public investment in digital infrastructure, the country is well-positioned to leverage 5G as a tool for economic transformation, digital inclusion, and technological leadership.

Criminalization of Politics in India

  • 20 Mar 2025

Introduction

The increasing presence of individuals with criminal backgrounds in legislative bodies has emerged as a serious concern for Indian democracy. The phenomenon, commonly referred to as the criminalization of politics, undermines constitutional values and erodes public confidence in democratic institutions. Data released by the Association for Democratic Reforms (ADR) has brought renewed focus to this persistent challenge.

Current Scenario and Data Highlights

As per ADR’s recent analyses (2024–2025):

  • 44% of Lok Sabha MPs and 45% of MLAs across the country have disclosed criminal cases in their election affidavits. Notably, 29% of these cases involve grave charges like murder, attempt to murder, and crimes against women.
  • States such as Andhra Pradesh (79%), Telangana and Kerala (69%), and Bihar (66%) have the highest number of legislators with criminal records.
  • Among the accused are 54 MLAs charged with murder, 226 with attempted murder, and 127 with crimes against women, including 13 with rape charges.
  • 23% of women legislators also face criminal allegations, indicating the pervasive nature of the issue across gender lines.
  • A significant number of legislators with serious cases are also high net-worth individuals, particularly from Andhra Pradesh and Telangana, showing a concerning link between money power and political success.

Underlying Causes

Several structural and political factors contribute to the criminalization of India's electoral system:

  • Inadequate Legal Provisions: Individuals are permitted to contest elections until conviction, as reaffirmed in the Public Interest Foundation vs. Union of India (2018) judgment.
  • Judicial Delays: The absence of speedy trials enables accused politicians to continue in office without legal resolution.
  • Political Utility of Strongmen: In regions with weak law enforcement, candidates with criminal backgrounds are perceived as effective enforcers or community protectors.
  • Party Prioritization of Winnability: Political parties often ignore criminal records when nominating candidates who are likely to win.
  • Influence of Money and Muscle Power: Many such candidates possess substantial financial and coercive clout, which aids their electoral prospects.
  • Limited Voter Awareness: Despite the mandatory disclosure of criminal cases, there is insufficient public engagement with this information.

Impact on Governance and Democracy

The influence of criminal elements in politics has multiple adverse consequences:

  • It undermines democratic legitimacy and weakens public faith in elected institutions.
  • Policy-making is compromised, as legislators with vested interests may act contrary to public welfare.
  • The dominance of such individuals fosters a culture of impunity, worsening governance and law and order.
  • Ethical standards decline, discouraging professionals and clean candidates from entering public life.

Judicial and Institutional Measures

Key interventions include:

  • In Lily Thomas vs. Union of India (2013), the Supreme Court ruled that convicted legislators receiving a sentence of two years or more must be disqualified immediately.
  • In 2020, the apex court mandated political parties to publicly explain why candidates with criminal records were chosen.

Reform Measures

To counter this trend, a multi-pronged approach is required:

  • Amend election laws to bar candidates with serious charges from contesting, especially if charges are framed by a court.
  • Set up fast-track courts for time-bound trials of political candidates, as recommended by the Supreme Court.
  • Implement state funding of elections to curb the role of black money, as advised by the Indrajit Gupta Committee.
  • Enhance voter literacy through outreach campaigns and digital platforms.
  • Strengthen accountability of political parties by enforcing penalties for repeated nomination of tainted candidates.
  • Empower the Election Commission to refuse recognition or symbols to non-compliant parties.

Conclusion

The entrenchment of criminal elements in politics is a serious challenge to India's democratic aspirations. Addressing it requires urgent legal reforms, institutional vigilance, political responsibility, and an informed electorate. Only through collective effort can the ideals of clean and ethical governance be restored.

Electoral Reforms in India

  • 19 Mar 2025

In News:

The Election Commission of India (ECI) has initiated discussions with political parties to address growing concerns over the integrity of India’s electoral process. Allegations regarding the manipulation of electoral rolls, duplicate voter IDs, and issues with the conduct of elections have prompted the need for reforms to ensure transparency and fairness.

Legal Framework Governing Elections

The Constitution of India and several key legislative acts outline the processes and authority for conducting elections:

  • Article 324 of the Constitution gives the Election Commission the authority to supervise electoral rolls and conduct elections.
  • Representation of the People Act, 1950 and 1951 establish the legal framework for elections and the preparation of electoral rolls.
  • Registration of Electors Rules, 1960 govern the procedures for the inclusion, correction, and deletion of names in the electoral rolls.
  • Delimitation Act, 2002 ensures the redrawing of constituency boundaries based on the latest census data.

The evolution of voting methods in India has progressed from paper ballots to Electronic Voting Machines (EVMs) with Voter Verifiable Paper Audit Trail (VVPAT) since 2004, enhancing the credibility of the process.

Challenges in the Electoral Process

Several concerns have emerged over the years:

  • EVM and VVPAT Concerns: Opposition parties have raised fears of EVM tampering, demanding a return to paper ballots. The Supreme Court has dismissed such demands, requiring a sample check of VVPAT-EVM matching in a limited number of machines per constituency.
  • Electoral Roll Manipulation: Allegations of fake voters and duplicate voter IDs were raised, particularly in Maharashtra and Delhi. The EC has attributed these discrepancies to the earlier decentralized system of issuing voter IDs, which has now been streamlined through the ERONET platform.
  • Campaign Issues: Star campaigners have often violated the Model Code of Conduct (MCC) by making inflammatory and divisive remarks. Moreover, political parties overspend on campaigns, exceeding legal limits, which undermines electoral integrity. The criminalization of politics is another critical issue, with 46% of elected MPs in 2024 facing criminal charges, including serious offenses.

Proposed Reforms

To address these challenges, several reforms are needed:

  • Voting and Counting Reforms:
    • VVPAT Verification: A scientific approach to VVPAT-EVM matching should be implemented. Full manual verification should be triggered if discrepancies are found in any region.
    • Totaliser Machines: The EC’s proposal to use totaliser machines to aggregate votes from multiple EVMs before results are disclosed should be adopted to protect voter anonymity.
    • Addressing Duplicate EPICs: Linking Aadhaar with EPIC IDs could help eliminate duplicate voter IDs, provided privacy concerns are addressed.
  • Campaign and Electoral Reforms:
    • Stronger Enforcement of the MCC: The EC should be empowered to revoke a party's “Star Campaigner” status for serious violations, depriving them of expenditure relief.
    • Election Expenditure Regulation: The law should be amended to set limits on political party expenditure, which currently remains unrestricted.
    • Criminalization of Politics: The Supreme Court’s directive for candidates to disclose their criminal records should be strictly enforced, requiring such declarations in widely circulated media.

Committee Recommendations

  • Vohra Committee (1993): Recommended tracking criminal-politician links and addressing the role of black money in elections.
  • Law Commission (2014): Suggested disqualifying politicians charged with serious offenses and increasing penalties for false affidavits.
  • 2nd Administrative Reforms Commission: Advocated for state funding of elections to reduce the influence of illicit money.

Way Forward

To strengthen the electoral process, the Election Commission should be granted greater powers to verify criminal records and financial disclosures of candidates. Fast-track courts should be established to expedite cases involving elected officials facing serious charges. Transparency should be increased by mandating real-time disclosure of political funding and expenditures. Furthermore, voter awareness and civil society engagement should be promoted to enhance accountability in the electoral process.

Public Health Education in India

  • 18 Mar 2025

In News:

India’s public health education sector stands at a critical juncture. Despite rapid academic expansion—with over 100 institutions now offering Master of Public Health (MPH) and related programs—the sector faces mounting challenges related to employment, quality, and funding. While international aid has declined, domestic investment remains limited, exacerbating systemic issues in workforce development.

Public Health: Constitutional and Strategic Significance

Article 47 of the Indian Constitution mandates the State to improve public health. A well-trained public health workforce is essential to achieve health equity, manage non-communicable diseases, address pandemics like COVID-19, and ensure effective delivery of health services at all levels.

Evolution and Growth of Public Health Education

Public health education in India has roots in colonial institutions, notably the All India Institute of Hygiene and Public Health, Kolkata (1932). Post-independence, community medicine was integrated into medical curricula. However, it was the launch of the National Rural Health Mission (2005) that marked a turning point, creating space for non-medical professionals in public health. Since then, MPH programs have proliferated—from just one institution in 2000 to over 100 today.

Government Initiatives

Key government efforts to strengthen public health education and training include:

  • National Health Mission (NHM): Enhances public health systems and skill development.
  • PM Swasthya Suraksha Yojana (PMSSY): Expands infrastructure and education through AIIMS-like institutions.
  • Fellowship in Public Health Management (FPHM): Builds leadership capacities.
  • National Programme for Prevention and Control of Non-Communicable Diseases (NP-NCD) and Integrated Disease Surveillance Programme (IDSP): Promote epidemiology and disease control training.

Persistent Challenges

  • Employment Mismatch: A surge in MPH graduates has not been matched by job creation. Entry-level roles receive thousands of applications, and dedicated public health cadres in states remain underdeveloped.
  • Lack of Regulation and Standardization: No central regulatory body ensures consistent curricula or quality standards. MPH programs are not under the purview of the NMC or UGC.
  • Faculty Shortages and Weak Practical Training: Institutions often lack experienced faculty and real-world training integration, leaving graduates underprepared.
  • Uneven Institutional Spread: States like Assam, Bihar, and Jharkhand have few or no public health colleges, deepening regional disparities.
  • Funding Deficits: India's public health education receives minimal investment. For instance, the Data Protection Board was allocated just ?2 crore—reflecting systemic underfunding. International aid cuts, such as those from USAID, further strain the sector.
  • Low Private Sector Absorption: Private hospitals prefer management professionals over MPH graduates. Development sector roles, heavily reliant on foreign grants, offer limited stability.

Way Forward

  • Establish Public Health Cadres: States must create dedicated employment frameworks at all administrative levels.
  • Regulate Education Quality: A Public Health Education Council under UGC/NMC should standardize curricula, faculty norms, and institutional benchmarks.
  • Expand Institutional Capacity: Encourage public-private partnerships to open MPH colleges in underserved regions.
  • Promote Experiential Learning: Mandate field training through internships in NHM, IDSP, and WHO-linked programs.
  • Encourage Private Sector Hiring: Offer incentives for hiring MPH graduates in corporate and hospital settings.
  • Increase Domestic Investment: Boost government funding for public health education and research, reducing reliance on foreign donors.

Conclusion

India’s public health education must transition from fragmented expansion to structured, quality-driven growth. Strengthening regulation, employment pathways, and training infrastructure is crucial for building a resilient health system and fulfilling the constitutional promise of health for all.

India–New Zealand Free Trade Agreement (FTA) Negotiations

  • 17 Mar 2025

In News:

India and New Zealand have officially resumed negotiations for a Comprehensive Economic Cooperation Agreement (CECA) after a prolonged hiatus since 2015. This strategic move aims to enhance bilateral trade, deepen economic interdependence, and strengthen regional cooperation in the Indo-Pacific.

Background and Significance

The FTA talks, first initiated in 2010, were stalled due to differences, particularly over India’s high tariffs on New Zealand’s dairy and agricultural exports. The revival of discussions during New Zealand Prime Minister Christopher Luxon's official visit to India in 2025 signals a renewed commitment towards building a balanced, ambitious, and mutually beneficial trade framework.

The bilateral trade relationship, though modest, has shown robust growth. In 2023–24, India exported goods worth $538 million to New Zealand and imported $335 million, generating a trade surplus of $203 million. By December 2024, exports rose by 21.49%, and imports surged by 78.72%, narrowing the trade surplus to $33 million.

Key Objectives of the India–New Zealand FTA

  • Enhance supply chain integration.
  • Improve market access for goods, services, and investments.
  • Strengthen economic resilience and bilateral commercial ties.
  • Facilitate trade through the Authorized Economic Operators Mutual Recognition Arrangement (AEO-MRA).

India’s major exports to New Zealand include pharmaceuticals, machinery, textiles, and precious stones, while imports largely consist of wool, aluminum, fruits, and steel products.

Strategic and Geopolitical Dimensions

Beyond economics, the agreement holds strategic significance:

  • A defense cooperation MoU was signed to institutionalize military engagements and promote maritime collaboration.
  • New Zealand expressed intent to join India’s Indo-Pacific Oceans Initiative (IPOI).
  • Both nations pledged support for a free, open, inclusive Indo-Pacific, aligning with the UNCLOS-based rules-based international order.
  • New Zealand reiterated support for India’s permanent membership in the reformed UNSC and entry into the Nuclear Suppliers Group (NSG).

 

Sectoral Cooperation and Emerging Areas

  • Climate Change and Sustainability:
    • New Zealand joined India-led initiatives like the International Solar Alliance (ISA) and Coalition for Disaster Resilient Infrastructure (CDRI).
    • Both countries committed to joint action under the Paris Agreement and Sendai Framework.
  • Education and Skill Development:
    • A renewed Education Cooperation Arrangement was signed to boost academic partnerships, student mobility, and vocational training.
    • Plans are underway to commemorate 100 years of sports relations in 2026, coupled with a new MoU on sports cooperation.
  • Diaspora and People-to-People Ties:
    • The Indian diaspora forms 6% of New Zealand’s population, playing a pivotal role in cultural and economic relations.
    • India raised concerns regarding pro-Khalistan activities, and New Zealand assured cooperation in addressing such issues.

Opportunities and Complementarities

India’s Strategic Importance to New Zealand:

  • Large market with a growing middle class and rising demand for dairy, meat, and high-value agricultural exports.
  • Largest source of skilled migrants and second-largest source of international students.
  • Booming digital economy offers collaboration potential in fintech, AI, and digital services.

New Zealand’s Relevance to India:

  • Expertise in sustainable farming and dairy technology supports India’s agricultural reforms.
  • Recognized climate tech sector aligns with India’s clean energy transition.
  • Potential buyer of India’s defense equipment and surveillance systems, enhancing maritime security amid Indo-Pacific tensions.

Challenges in Bilateral Relations

  • Stalled FTA negotiations due to tariff sensitivities, particularly in the dairy sector.
  • Non-tariff barriers (NTBs) affecting Indian exports like fruits and vegetables.
  • Low trade volumes and limited awareness of New Zealand’s economic strengths among Indian businesses.
  • Divergences in geopolitical alignments, with New Zealand’s reliance on China creating potential strategic friction.

Way Forward

  • Conclude FTA negotiations through dialogue and sectoral agreements in pharmaceuticals, technology, and horticulture.
  • Consider an interim Early Harvest Agreement, akin to India–Australia ECTA, to fast-track gains.
  • Enhance market access by reducing NTBs, fast-tracking Mutual Recognition Arrangements (MRAs), and organizing trade expos and B2B interactions.
  • Leverage climate and renewable energy cooperation, strengthen defense collaboration, and institutionalize maritime security mechanisms.

Conclusion

The renewed India–New Zealand FTA negotiations mark a pivotal step in recalibrating bilateral economic and strategic relations. Anchored in democratic values and shared Indo-Pacific interests, the partnership is poised to evolve into a multi-dimensional engagement encompassing trade, technology, climate resilience, and defense cooperation. The agreement, if concluded, could serve as a model for equitable North–South economic partnerships in a multipolar world order.

Battling India’s Infodemic

  • 16 Mar 2025

In News:

India, with over 95.04 crore internet users, faces a growing crisis of misinformation and disinformation. The spread of fake news has surged, particularly during the COVID-19 pandemic, where misinformation increased by 214%, making India responsible for one in six pieces of global fake news related to the pandemic. This infodemic is fueled by unregulated social media platforms, AI-driven disinformation, and weak legal frameworks. As digital platforms become the primary source of news, addressing the spread of fake news is critical for maintaining public trust and democratic integrity.

Factors Driving the Infodemic

1. Unregulated Social Media: Platforms like WhatsApp, Facebook, and YouTube are major conduits for misinformation. The viral nature of content on these platforms often leads to false information reaching millions before fact-checking can occur. For instance, during the COVID-19 crisis, false cures and misleading health information spread rapidly on WhatsApp, creating public panic.

2. AI and Deepfakes: AI-powered tools have enabled the creation of deepfake content, including videos, audio, and images that mimic real people. During the 2024 Lok Sabha elections, deepfakes reinforced political biases, influencing voter sentiment. Similarly, AI-generated propaganda has played a role in amplifying social divides, as seen in global elections.

3. Political Manipulation: Fake news has become a political weapon, particularly during election cycles. In India’s 2024 elections, AI-generated speeches and content contributed to voter polarization. The use of algorithmic echo chambers exacerbates this by curating content that reinforces biases, thereby fostering ideological divides.

4. Weak Legal and Fact-Checking Mechanisms: India lacks a comprehensive legal framework to counter fake news. Existing laws, such as the Information Technology Act, 2000 and the Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita, address certain aspects of disinformation but fail to tackle the broader, evolving issue. The Election Commission of India (ECI) is under-resourced to handle the volume of misinformation during elections, further complicating efforts.

Challenges in Countering the Infodemic

1. Legal Gaps: Current laws are insufficient to address the modern challenges posed by fake news, particularly with the rise of AI-generated content. The Digital Personal Data Protection Act (DPDP), 2023, while a step forward, faces implementation challenges, and ad hoc measures like internet shutdowns only offer temporary solutions.

2. Sluggish Response by Tech Platforms: Social media giants like Meta, X, and YouTube have been criticized for their slow response in removing fake news. For instance, X’s "Community Notes" program has struggled to counter misinformation in real-time, allowing malicious actors to exploit the system before action is taken.

3. Lack of Awareness and Digital Literacy: Many users in India struggle to distinguish between credible and fake news, especially in rural areas where digital literacy is limited. This lack of awareness has led to tragic consequences, such as mob lynchings triggered by fake news spread on platforms like WhatsApp.

International Models and the Way Forward

1. Strong Legal Framework: Countries like Singapore and Germany have enacted robust laws to combat fake news. Singapore’s Protection from Online Falsehoods and Manipulation Act imposes severe penalties for spreading deliberate misinformation. Similarly, Germany’s NetzDG Law mandates that social media platforms remove fake news within 24 hours or face heavy fines. India could draw lessons from these models, ensuring any new law balances freedom of speech with the need to curb harmful misinformation.

2. AI Regulation and Transparency: India must enforce strict regulations on AI-generated content, including mandatory labeling of deepfakes and AI-driven media. The EU's AI Act and Finland's digital literacy initiatives provide useful frameworks for promoting transparency and user awareness.

3. Strengthening the Election Commission: The ECI needs enhanced resources and clear guidelines for countering misinformation, particularly during elections. Collaborating with fact-checkers and media outlets can improve response times and effectiveness.

4. Digital Literacy Campaigns: A nationwide initiative, similar to Finland’s digital literacy program, is essential to educate the public on identifying fake news. Empowering citizens with the tools to critically evaluate information will reduce the spread and impact of misinformation.

Conclusion

India’s battle against fake news requires urgent legal intervention, especially as deepfakes and AI-driven misinformation continue to evolve. A comprehensive framework—one that protects free speech while holding platforms accountable for the spread of disinformation—is essential to preserve the integrity of democratic processes. The introduction of strict regulations, coupled with initiatives to boost digital literacy, will help safeguard public trust and social harmony in the digital age.

NBFC Stress and Systemic Risks in India’s Financial System

  • 14 Mar 2025

In News:

The International Monetary Fund (IMF), in its report titled India Financial System Stability Assessment, has flagged significant vulnerabilities in India’s financial architecture, particularly arising from the Non-Banking Financial Companies (NBFCs) sector. Despite overall resilience post-pandemic, the increasing interconnectedness and exposure of NBFCs pose emerging systemic risks.

A major concern highlighted is the concentration of NBFC lending to the power sector. In FY 2024, 63% of power sector loans were provided by just three large Infrastructure Financing NBFCs—an increase from 55% in FY 2020. This overexposure, particularly by state-owned NBFCs such as IREDA, raises red flags given the inherent risks in infrastructure financing, including delays, cost overruns, and revenue shortfalls. The report notes that 56% of NBFC lending was financed by market instruments like corporate bonds and mutual funds, heightening the risk of contagion in case of financial distress.

NBFCs differ structurally from banks. They cannot accept demand deposits, lack deposit insurance coverage, and have no direct access to Reserve Bank of India (RBI) liquidity windows. Consequently, any shock in their repayment capacity can lead to asset-liability mismatches, potentially spilling over into banks, mutual funds, and bond markets, amplifying systemic risks.

The IMF also examined stress scenarios such as stagflation—a situation characterized by slow economic growth and high inflation. In such cases, public sector banks (PSBs) are particularly vulnerable. The Capital Adequacy Ratio (CAR) of PSBs could fall to the regulatory minimum of 9% under stress, threatening their ability to absorb losses. This is concerning, as the RBI mandates a minimum CAR of 12% for PSBs. The IMF recommends that PSBs retain earnings instead of paying dividends to strengthen their capital buffers and support credit flow during downturns.

While banks and NBFCs have shown broad resilience, ‘weak tails’ exist—non-systemic NBFCs and urban cooperative banks with below-minimum or even negative capital. This underscores the need for strengthened regulatory oversight, especially over state-owned NBFCs, which currently enjoy relaxed prudential norms. The IMF calls for uniform regulation across public and private NBFCs to ensure a level playing field and greater financial stability.

The report also emphasizes the need for improved data sharing and systemic risk monitoring, especially related to NBFC exposures, household credit, and climate-linked financial risks. Physical and transition risks remain moderate but are notable in monsoon-dependent agriculture and carbon-intensive industries like thermal power.

Recommendations include:

  • Extending the cybersecurity risk framework to major NBFCs.
  • Implementing IFRS-9 based credit risk assessments and countercyclical capital buffers.
  • Improving insolvency and bankruptcy resolution mechanisms to reduce recovery time and enhance credit discipline.

India’s financial system is becoming more diverse and inclusive, with rising digital financial access and market participation. However, to sustain growth and resilience, proactive reforms in NBFC regulation, capital adequacy, and systemic risk management are essential.

UN Women’s Report 2025

  • 12 Mar 2025

Context:
Marking the 30th anniversary of the Beijing Declaration and Platform for Action (1995)—a landmark global framework for achieving gender equality—the UN Women’s Report 2025 presents a sobering assessment of the status of women’s rights worldwide. Released ahead of International Women’s Day 2025, the report reflects a disturbing pattern: while there has been measurable progress, recent years have witnessed an alarming backlash against gender equality in many parts of the world.

Key Findings

  • Backsliding of Women’s Rights: Nearly one in four countries reported a backlash against women’s rights, often linked to democratic erosion and rise of authoritarian or conservative forces. The report warns of "anti-rights actors" systematically working to undermine legal and policy gains made over decades.
  • Escalation in Gender-Based Violence

The world continues to grapple with high levels of violence against women:

    • A woman or girl is killed every 10 minutes by an intimate partner or family member.
    • Conflict-related sexual violence has risen 50% since 2022, with 95% of victims being women and girls.

These trends point to both persistent patriarchal norms and the failure of protective systems, especially in conflict and humanitarian settings.

  • Legal and Political Disempowerment

Despite notable legislative progress:

  • Women globally have only 64% of the legal rights enjoyed by men.
  • Only 87 countries have ever had a female head of state.
  • Women occupy just 26% of parliamentary seats, even though this figure has doubled since 1995.

These gaps reflect the structural barriers and gender biases embedded in political systems and governance.

  • Economic and Health Inequities
    • 10% of women and girls live in extreme poverty.
    • Young women (ages 15–24) face limited access to family planning, impacting health and autonomy.
    • Maternal mortality has remained stagnant since 2015, reflecting uneven healthcare access.

Positive Developments

Despite the challenges, there are signs of progress:

  • 88% of countries now have laws against violence towards women.
  • Most countries have banned workplace discrimination.
  • 44% of countries are working to improve education and training for women.
  • Female legislative representation has more than doubled since 1995.

UN Women’s Roadmap for Gender Equality (2030)

To address setbacks and accelerate progress, the report outlines a five-pronged strategy:

  • Digital Inclusion – Ensure equitable access to digital technologies.
  • Social Protection – Invest in universal healthcare, education, and safety nets.
  • Zero Gender-Based Violence – Strengthen laws, services, and public awareness.
  • Equal Decision-Making – Promote women's leadership in all sectors.
  • Gender-Sensitive Crisis Response – Integrate gender priorities in humanitarian aid.

Conclusion

The UN Women’s Report 2025 underscores a critical paradox: legal and policy advancements coexist with deep-rooted inequalities and growing resistance to gender justice. As UN Secretary-General António Guterres aptly noted, “Instead of mainstreaming equal rights, we’re seeing the mainstreaming of misogyny.” Achieving SDG 5 (Gender Equality) by 2030 demands sustained political will, democratic resilience, and transformative reforms. For India and the global community, this is both a warning and an opportunity—to reaffirm their commitment to gender justice and inclusive development.

USAID Funding in India

  • 11 Mar 2025

In News:

The United States Agency for International Development (USAID) has been a major development partner for India, contributing over $2.8 billion in Official Development Assistance (ODA) since 2001. While initial assistance focused on food aid, recent decades saw a shift toward public health, environmental sustainability, digital infrastructure, and institutional capacity building.

Between 2022 and 2024, India received substantial aid from USAID — $228 million in 2022, $175 million in 2023, and $151 million in 2024 (as of December). A significant portion of this funding targeted health and population programs, including polio eradication, maternal and child health, tuberculosis (TB), HIV/AIDS, and Covid-19 response.

In 2022 alone, $120 million was allocated to Covid-19 control, alongside support for healthcare infrastructure and awareness campaigns.

USAID also supported India’s environmental goals, providing funds for air pollution control, clean water initiatives, and climate resilience, with $17.12 million allocated in 2024. Additionally, USAID backed India's technological advancement by exploring secure 5G Open Radio Access Network (O-RAN) systems, aligning with the U.S. Indo-Pacific strategy aimed at countering China’s influence.

However, the January 20, 2025 Executive Order by the U.S. administration directed a halt to foreign aid and restructuring of USAID. Although initially stayed by a U.S. Federal Court in February, the Supreme Court’s March 5 verdict upheld the aid cuts, jeopardizing thousands of ongoing development projects globally, including in India.

This decision critically affects India’s public health landscape. For instance, the ‘Breaking the Barriers’ TB awareness program in Karnataka, Bihar, Telangana, and Assam — funded with $7 million between 2022–23 — is being discontinued. The President’s Emergency Plan for AIDS Relief (PEPFAR), another major source of HIV/AIDS support, also faces disruption, risking higher infection and mortality rates. The cuts particularly threaten NGOs like Karnataka Health Promotion Trust (KHPT), which relied on USAID for operational continuity.

Beyond health, the withdrawal of USAID support may create a strategic vacuum in South Asia, enabling greater Chinese geopolitical and economic influence. Legal uncertainty around development aid has also raised concerns about the stability of global health and environmental partnerships.

Way Forward for India

  • Diversify donor engagement: India must strengthen development ties with consistent partners like Japan ($2.97B in 2022), the EU ($383.5M), and Germany ($235M).
  • Increase domestic investments in public health, sanitation, and clean energy to reduce dependence on external aid.
  • Boost private sector and philanthropic partnerships to ensure continuity of key health and environmental programs.
  • Strengthen indigenous R&D capacity, especially in digital infrastructure and vaccine development.
  • Diplomatic dialogue with U.S. policymakers can explore possibilities for reinstating targeted support.

Conclusion

The scaling back of USAID poses significant challenges to India's public health, environmental sustainability, and strategic autonomy. However, it also presents an opportunity for India to reinforce its developmental sovereignty through diversified funding, innovation, and international cooperation.

Over-Centralisation and Federal Health Governance in India

  • 10 Mar 2025

Introduction

India’s health governance follows a quasi-federal structure where health is constitutionally a State subject. However, increasing centralisation, particularly in medical education and national health schemes, is raising concerns over States’ autonomy and the effectiveness of federal health policies.

Judicial Push Towards Centralisation

The recent Supreme Court ruling in Dr. Tanvi Behl vs Shrey Goyal (2025) declared domicile-based reservations in post-graduate (PG) medical admissions unconstitutional, citing Article 14 and the principle of meritocracy. This decision, however, overlooks the critical link between State investments in medical education and their ability to retain specialists within local health systems. Domicile quotas served as a strategic tool to ensure a stable, locally adapted healthcare workforce, especially amid chronic specialist shortages.

Striking down such quotas may discourage States from investing in medical institutions if their graduates are siphoned off to other regions. Unlike central institutions like AIIMS or PGIMER, which enjoy selection autonomy, State medical colleges now face limited control over admissions, weakening their role as pillars of regional health systems.

Centralisation Through Policy and Institutions

Beyond judiciary-led centralisation, several national initiatives have expanded the Centre's role:

  • National Health Mission (NHM): While implemented by States, funding and guidelines remain Centre-dominated.
  • Ayushman Bharat (2018) and AB Digital Mission: These schemes shifted healthcare financing and data control towards the Centre, reducing the relevance of State-run insurance programs.
  • National Medical Commission Act (2019): Replacing the MCI, this law enhanced the Centre's control over medical education regulation.
  • Epidemic and Disaster Management Acts: Empower the Centre during health emergencies, as witnessed during COVID-19.

Consequences of Over-Centralisation

Excessive centralisation undermines India’s diverse health needs and local governance:

  • Limited Responsiveness to Local Needs: Uniform policies ignore State-specific demographics. For instance, Kerala requires elderly care, while Bihar and UP demand maternal and child health focus.
  • Reduced Decision-Making Power: States lose flexibility in tailoring central schemes, as seen with Ayushman Bharat PM-JAY.
  • Bureaucratic Inefficiencies: Delays in fund disbursal under centrally sponsored schemes hinder timely execution.
  • Weakening of Local Health Systems: Panchayats and municipal bodies—crucial to grassroots delivery—are often bypassed in favour of top-down mechanisms.

Meritocracy vs Social Equity

The rigid focus on merit in PG admissions disregards structural inequalities. As seen in recent NEET-PG cutoffs being lowered to zero percentile to fill seats, the current meritocratic model is flawed. Regional representation and public service outcomes should be considered in defining ‘merit’, aligning medical education with societal needs.

Way Forward

  • Restore State Autonomy in Admissions: States should be empowered to design admissions aligned with local healthcare priorities.
  • Fiscal and Functional Decentralisation: Grant flexibility in using central funds and reduce bureaucratic controls.
  • Strengthen Cooperative Federalism: Institutionalise Centre-State coordination in health planning and policy-making.
  • Invest in Local Systems: Enhance capacities of State health departments and grassroots governance bodies.

Conclusion

While central guidance is essential for national health objectives, excessive centralisation risks weakening India’s federal health architecture. A balanced approach rooted in cooperative federalism is vital to create an inclusive, efficient, and resilient healthcare system for all.

AI and the Justice System: A Tool for Reform in India

  • 09 Mar 2025

In News:

Artificial Intelligence (AI) is reshaping governance globally, with nations like the United States and China making significant investments in AI-led legal and policing reforms. The U.S. government’s $100 billion Stargate AI Initiative and China’s development of cost-effective large language models (LLMs) like QWQ and DeepSeek highlight the competitive race for technological dominance. For India, grappling with over 50 million pending cases, AI offers a transformative opportunity to enhance efficiency, transparency, and trust in its criminal justice system.

AI in Law Enforcement and Crime Prevention

India’s SMART policing initiative—Strategic, Meticulous, Adaptable, Reliable, Transparent—can be significantly enhanced through AI integration. AI tools such as Automated FIR registration (e.g., Mumbai Police’s AI-assisted e-FIR system) reduce administrative burdens and accelerate complaint processing. Predictive policing, using crime mapping and data analysis like that piloted by Delhi Police, helps identify crime hotspots. AI-enabled facial recognition systems, like the Automated Facial Recognition System (AFRS) of NCRB, assist in criminal identification.

Cybersecurity also benefits from AI. Organizations like CERT-In deploy AI to counter phishing, ransomware, and deepfake threats. Banks and law enforcement utilize AI-based fraud detection systems, such as those powered by RBI’s CRILC, to flag suspicious transactions. AI tools are increasingly used to detect deepfakes and synthetic media, enhancing digital forensics.

Moreover, AI can assist in real-time crime analysis. Field-level policing data—such as offender patterns and patrol routes—can feed AI models to guide proactive interventions. Supervisory efficiency improves through AI-powered collation and analysis of data at the district level, allowing redeployment of personnel from administrative roles to core policing duties.

AI in the Judicial System

In courts, AI supports the e-Courts Project by digitizing case files, reducing delays in documentation and improving record management. Tools like SUPACE (Supreme Court Portal for Assistance in Court Efficiency) assist judges in legal research, precedent identification, and judgment writing. AI-driven real-time transcription systems, being piloted in the U.S., can improve transparency and reduce dependence on manual record-keeping.

AI also plays a role in bail and sentencing decisions. For instance, the Delhi High Court is exploring AI-based risk assessment tools to promote consistency. Additionally, AI tools can detect anomalies in legal documents, preventing delays due to forged or inaccurate filings.

Challenges and the Way Forward

The integration of AI into justice faces several challenges. AI models trained on biased data, as seen in the U.S. tool COMPAS, can perpetuate systemic inequities. Privacy concerns are also paramount and must align with India’s Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023. Implementation gaps include the lack of AI literacy among legal and police personnel and the absence of a comprehensive regulatory framework, as highlighted by the B.N. Srikrishna Committee.

To overcome these, India must establish a central AI Justice Task Force, expand AI usage in high courts, formulate ethical AI standards aligned with NITI Aayog’s AI strategy, and invest in AI training programs for judicial and law enforcement staff.

Conclusion

AI offers a critical path to revitalizing India’s overstretched justice system. If implemented responsibly, it can streamline policing, reduce judicial delays, and enhance public trust. A technology-first approach, combined with ethical safeguards, will be key to ensuring that justice in India becomes not only swift but also fair and inclusive.

India’s Textile Industry

  • 08 Mar 2025

Context:

India’s textile and apparel industry is one of the largest globally, contributing significantly to the economy through employment, exports, and industrial output. It accounts for 2.3% of India’s GDP (projected to rise to 5% by 2030), 13% of industrial production, and 12% of total exports. Employing over 4.5 crore people, it is second only to agriculture in job creation. Yet, despite its scale, India lags behind competitors like China, Vietnam, and Bangladesh in global exports.

Current Status and Strengths

India is the world’s second-largest producer of cotton and man-made fibres (MMFs) such as polyester and viscose. Cotton alone engages over 60 lakh farmers, mainly in Gujarat, Maharashtra, and Telangana. The country is also a global leader in jute and technical textiles. The textile and apparel market is projected to reach USD 350 billion by 2030.

FY24 exports stood at USD 35.9 billion, a marginal increase from USD 33.4 billion in FY20. Key destinations include the US, EU, and UAE. Yet, apparel exports have declined from USD 15.5 billion in FY20 to USD 14.5 billion in FY24. While cotton textile exports rose to USD 12.3 billion, growth has remained modest.

Challenges Holding Back the Sector

  • Fragmented Supply Chains: India’s textile value chain is highly fragmented, concentrated in MSME clusters with regional specializations (e.g., Tiruppur for knitwear, Surat for polyester). This hampers integration and increases logistics costs. In contrast, competitors operate vertically integrated “fibre-to-fashion” hubs.
  • High Raw Material Costs: Quality Control Orders (QCOs) on polyester and viscose restrict cheaper imports. As a result, domestic fibres are significantly costlier—polyester by 33–36% and viscose by 14–16% compared to China.
  • Lack of FTAs: Unlike Vietnam and Bangladesh, India lacks preferential trade agreements with major markets like the EU and the US. This undermines price competitiveness and limits market access.
  • Regulatory Burden: Complex customs and compliance procedures increase operational costs, particularly for small exporters. In contrast, simplified systems in competing nations reduce red tape.
  • Sustainability Pressures: Global markets now demand higher environmental compliance—renewable energy use, water recycling, and traceability. EU regulations (2021–2024) affect 20% of India’s textile exports. MSMEs find it difficult to adapt without financial support.
  • Low Per Capita Fibre Consumption: Despite being a major producer, India’s fibre consumption is just 5.5 kg per capita—half the global average.

Way Forward

  • Supply Chain Integration: Develop MITRA textile parks and “fibre-to-fashion” hubs to reduce costs and improve efficiency.
  • Raw Material Reforms: Reassess QCOs to allow controlled imports and reduce input prices.
  • Trade Policy: Secure FTAs with key markets to enhance export competitiveness.
  • Labour Productivity: Set up housing near textile clusters (as in China) to improve worker efficiency and reduce attrition.
  • Boost MMF Usage: Promote domestic MMF consumption through targeted incentives.
  • Green Transition: Provide financial and technical support to MSMEs to adopt sustainable practices and enter the recycled textile market, projected to reach USD 400 million in India.

With structural reforms and global alignment, India’s textile industry holds immense potential to emerge as a global leader while promoting sustainable, inclusive growth.

India-Qatar Relations

  • 07 Mar 2025

In News:

India and Qatar have significantly deepened their bilateral relationship, particularly with the recent state visit of Qatar’s Amir, Sheikh Tamim Bin Hamad Al-Thani, to India. This visit marked a pivotal moment, as both countries elevated their ties to a "strategic partnership," exploring avenues for collaboration in energy, trade, and diplomacy.

Evolution of India-Qatar Relations

India's relationship with the Gulf region is multifaceted, encompassing economic, cultural, and people-to-people ties. Qatar holds a special place in India’s foreign policy due to its strategic position in the Middle East, its influence in the LNG market, and its robust ties with both Western powers and regional players such as Israel and Afghanistan. As one of the largest suppliers of LNG to India, Qatar’s energy significance is paramount.

India has consistently prioritized relations with the Gulf, with the Prime Minister placing special emphasis on strengthening ties. The recent visits by India’s External Affairs Minister to Qatar underscore the diplomatic importance of this relationship.

Key Outcomes of the Amir’s Visit

The visit of Sheikh Tamim Bin Hamad Al-Thani resulted in several key agreements and developments:

  • Strategic Partnership:India and Qatar upgraded their relationship to a "strategic partnership," signaling enhanced cooperation across various domains such as energy security, trade, and investment. This move aligns Qatar with India’s other strategic Gulf partners like the UAE, Saudi Arabia, and Oman, reinforcing regional cooperation under the Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC).
  • Economic and Trade Cooperation:The two countries committed to doubling bilateral trade from $14 billion to $28 billion over the next five years. Qatar also pledged $10 billion in new investments in India, particularly in the infrastructure, energy, and technology sectors. Several agreements on economic cooperation, youth affairs, and double taxation avoidance were also signed, aimed at facilitating business activities.
  • Energy Cooperation:A landmark agreement between QatarEnergy and India’s Petronet LNG extended their LNG supply deal for 20 years, marking the largest-ever LNG agreement. This deal secures India’s long-term energy needs and diversifies its energy sources, ensuring stable pricing for LNG imports.
  • Free Trade Agreement (FTA) Possibilities:Discussions were held on a potential India-Qatar Free Trade Agreement (FTA) to boost trade relations. While Qatar has existing FTAs with countries like China, a similar agreement with India could further enhance trade and investment flows. However, India must ensure safeguards to prevent the dumping of third-party goods through Qatar.
  • Resolution of Diplomatic Setback:Bilateral relations were strained in 2022 following the arrest of eight Indian Navy personnel in Qatar on espionage charges. The Amir’s decision to pardon these individuals removed a significant diplomatic roadblock, improving goodwill between the two countries.

Challenges and the Way Forward

Despite the positive developments, challenges persist:

  • Economic and Trade Barriers:Non-tariff barriers and bureaucratic hurdles remain significant obstacles to smoother business transactions. Moreover, Qatar’s investments in India are still limited compared to other Gulf nations, despite its substantial sovereign wealth fund. India must encourage greater Qatari participation in sectors like infrastructure, startups, and energy exploration.
  • Political and Security Risks:The volatile security situation in the Middle East, particularly tensions between Iran and Israel, poses risks to India’s energy supply chains. Any diplomatic tensions between Qatar and its Gulf neighbors could indirectly affect India’s trade interests.
  • Labor and Migration Issues:India must continue to advocate for better working conditions and legal protections for Indian workers in Qatar. Ensuring the welfare of Indian expatriates, including seamless remittance flows and social security benefits, is essential for strengthening bilateral ties.

Conclusion

The elevation of India-Qatar relations to a strategic partnership marks a new chapter in their ties, positioning Qatar as a critical partner in India’s energy security and trade. As India’s influence in the Middle East and global energy markets grows, its relationship with Qatar will play an increasingly important role in shaping the region’s geopolitical landscape. The continued focus on economic cooperation, energy security, and labor welfare will be vital to sustaining and expanding this crucial partnership.

Centring Care in India’s Economic Policy

  • 06 Mar 2025

In News:

The Union Budget 2025 has seen a significant increase in the allocation for gender-responsive fiscal policies, with a record ?4,49,028.68 crore allocated to the Gender Budget (GB). This represents a 37.3% increase from the previous year, marking 8.86% of the total Budget. However, this increase is largely attributed to the inclusion of PM Garib Kalyan Anna Yojana, which constitutes 24% of the GB, rather than substantial investments in care infrastructure or gender-responsive schemes. This highlights the persistent underestimation of unpaid care and domestic work (UCDW) in India’s economic planning.

The Care Work Crisis: An Overlooked Economic Reality

Globally, women bear the brunt of unpaid care work (UCDW), spending an average of 17.8% of their time on such tasks. In India, this burden is particularly severe. Indian women spend 40% more time on UCDW compared to women in South Africa and China. As per the International LabourOrganisation (ILO), 53% of Indian women remain outside the labour force due to caregiving responsibilities, while only 1.1% of men face similar barriers. This deep-rooted gender inequality reinforces women’s economic disempowerment.

For marginalized women in low-income households, the burden is exacerbated. Many women juggle 17–19 hours of daily labour, balancing paid work with domestic duties, resulting in severe time poverty and poor health. Feminist economists from the Global South emphasize that in India, unpaid work extends beyond household care to include tasks such as family farming, water collection, and fuel gathering. Women often spend up to 73% of their time on these tasks due to limited infrastructure in basic services such as water, sanitation, and clean energy.

Missed Opportunities in the 2025 Budget

Despite the record increase in the Gender Budget, the 2025 Union Budgetmisses critical opportunities to address the care work crisis. The Economic Survey 2023-24 recognized care infrastructure as pivotal for women’s empowerment, yet the budget failed to translate this into significant fiscal commitments. The Jal Jeevan Mission (JJM), which aims to provide 100% potable water coverage by 2028, is a positive step but suffers from funding delays and implementation gaps. While the JJM budget increased by 195% over Revised Estimates, it saw a decline of 4.51% from last year’s Budget Estimates, underscoring allocation and spending mismatches.

Policy Recommendations: The Three R Framework

To address these systemic issues, the Economic Survey 2023-24 suggests that public investment of 2% of GDP in care infrastructure could generate 11 million jobs and reduce the care burden on women. The Three R frameworkRecognise, Reduce, Redistribute, and Represent — provides a holistic approach to creating a more inclusive economy:

  • Recognise: The first step is acknowledging the full extent of UCDW. India’s 2019 Time Use Survey revealed that women spend an average of seven hours daily on unpaid care tasks. Regular surveys, integrated into existing household surveys, can inform more effective policy-making.
  • Reduce: The second step involves reducing the care burden by investing in time-saving technologies and affordable care infrastructure. Expanding childcare centres, eldercare support, and assistive technologies can facilitate women’s workforce participation. The Urban Challenge Fund announced in the 2025 Budget, with ?10,000 crore allocated for FY 2025-26, can finance urban redevelopment projects that integrate care infrastructure, inspired by successful models like Bogotá’s Care Blocks.
  • Redistribute: Care responsibilities must be shifted from the household to the State and society. The Smart Cities Mission and the Urban Challenge Fund present opportunities to scale up care infrastructure in urban areas. This redistribution of care work can significantly ease the burden on women and encourage more equitable labor force participation.
  • Represent: Women’s representation in decision-making is crucial for creating gender-transformative policies. Policies designed with women’s input are shown to be six to seven times more effective in achieving gender-equitable outcomes. Therefore, promoting female leadership in governance is essential for the success of gender-responsive policies.

Conclusion:

The Union Budget 2025 has made strides in gender-responsive fiscal policies but falls short in addressing the care economy. India has a significant opportunity to set a global example by recognizing unpaid care work, investing in care infrastructure, and redistributing caregiving responsibilities. A gender-sensitive economy, with women’s participation in decision-making, will not only uplift women but also ensure more inclusive growth for the country. The current budget highlights the need for a more deliberate, well-funded strategy to treat care work as a central pillar of India’s economic development.

India Philanthropy Report 2025

  • 05 Mar 2025

In News:

The India Philanthropy Report 2025, a joint publication by Bain & Company and Dasra, presents an insightful overview of the evolving landscape of philanthropic giving in India. With private philanthropic funding projected to grow annually by 10–12% over the next five years, the report underlines the increasing role of family philanthropy and corporate social responsibility (CSR) in complementing public sector expenditure on social development.

Growth of Social Sector Funding

India's total social sector funding reached approximately ?25 lakh crore ($300 billion) in FY24, accounting for 8.3% of the GDP. Public funding continues to dominate, constituting 95% of the total with allocations towards flagship welfare schemes like MGNREGS and the Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana. Private philanthropy, however, is steadily gaining ground, contributing ?1.3 lakh crore ($16 billion) in FY24, and is expected to grow significantly by FY29.

Despite this growth, a considerable funding gap persists—estimated at ?14 lakh crore in FY24 and projected to widen to ?16 lakh crore by FY29. Bridging this deficit is critical for meeting India's Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) and the vision of Viksit Bharat@2047.

Rise of Family Philanthropy

Family philanthropy has emerged as a key driver of private social funding, accounting for around 40% of total private contributions. It spans diverse sectors including education, healthcare, gender equity, diversity and inclusion (GEDI), climate action, and social justice. Notably, 55% of family philanthropic initiatives are women-led, and around one-third involve next-generation leadership, indicating a shift towards more inclusive and innovative giving.

Structured philanthropy is becoming more prominent, with nearly 65% of family-run initiatives now managed by professional teams. The report projects that by building robust advisory infrastructure and tapping into family offices, India can unlock an additional ?50,000–55,000 crore ($6–$7 billion) in family philanthropy over the next five years.

Corporate Social Responsibility: Compliance and Concentration

Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) spending, mandated under the Companies Act, is another critical pillar. CSR expenditure is growing at a projected 10–12% per annum, driven by increased compliance and strategic integration into corporate goals. The number of CSR-compliant firms rose from 12,000 in FY22 to around 15,000 in FY23.

Family-owned businesses contribute nearly 65%–70% of total private CSR spending, with major conglomerates like Tata, Adani, Birla, and Ambani alone accounting for ?800–1,000 crore each annually. However, the sector remains top-heavy: just 2% of family-owned firms are responsible for over half of all CSR contributions.

HNIs, UHNIs, and the Philanthropic Disparity

Despite the promising trends, Indian High-Net-Worth Individuals (HNIs) and Ultra-High-Net-Worth Individuals (UHNIs) still contribute a relatively small fraction of their wealth towards philanthropy. Indian UHNIs donate only 0.1%–0.15% of their wealth, compared to 1.2%–2.5% in the US, 0.5%–1.8% in the UK, and 0.5%–1.4% in China.

In FY24, average annual philanthropic contributions from UHNIs (net worth ?1,000 crore and above) hovered around ?5 crore, while HNIs (?200–1,000 crore) contributed ?0.4–?5 crore. This indicates a large untapped potential that can significantly bolster India's development financing.

Institutionalization and Diaspora Potential

The number of family offices—dedicated institutions managing family wealth and philanthropy—has increased from 45 in 2018 to 300 in 2024, with projections to cross 500 by 2029. Institutions like Dasra, Sattva, and Bridgespan have been instrumental in supporting structured and high-impact philanthropy.

India’s diaspora, growing from 18 million in 2019 to 35 million in 2024, also presents a significant but underutilized opportunity. While diaspora philanthropy is estimated at $130 billion currently, better awareness, simplified compliance norms, and digital platforms could enhance its impact and push the potential closer to $200 billion.

Challenges and the Way Forward

Despite the optimistic outlook, several challenges hinder the full realization of philanthropic potential in India:

  • Persistent funding gaps in critical sectors like healthcare, education, and climate change.
  • Regulatory and compliance barriers, especially affecting foreign and diaspora contributions.
  • Fragmented infrastructure, with limited advisory services and high transaction costs.
  • Short-term funding models, with only 23% of family philanthropies combining grants with direct program implementation, undermining sustainable impact.

To address these, the report suggests:

  • Promoting long-term funding mechanisms, including multi-year grants.
  • Professionalizing philanthropy through structured advisory services and capacity building.
  • Unlocking diaspora contributions via simplified regulations and dedicated philanthropic platforms.
  • Enhancing collaboration across stakeholders to amplify social impact and innovation.

Conclusion

The India Philanthropy Report 2025 underscores the transformative potential of private giving, particularly through family philanthropy and CSR. While public funding remains the bedrock of India’s social development agenda, strengthening the philanthropic ecosystem—by leveraging wealth, institutions, and global networks—is vital to achieving equitable growth and meeting national development goals.

India’s Roadmap to High-Income Status by 2047

  • 04 Mar 2025

In News:

India, currently classified as a lower-middle-income economy with a Gross National Income (GNI) per capita of USD 2,540 (2023), aspires to achieve high-income status by 2047, coinciding with the centenary of its independence. A recent World Bank report titled “Becoming a High-Income Economy in a Generation” outlines the necessary reforms, challenges, and growth scenarios India must navigate to meet this ambitious target.

Growth Imperatives and Economic Targets

To transition into a high-income economy, India must sustain an average real GDP growth rate of 7.8% annually until 2047, raising its GNI per capita nearly eightfold. Historically, India grew at 6.3% (2000–2024) and has become the world’s fifth-largest economy, doubling its global share to 3.4%. However, "business-as-usual" growth (6.6%) will fall short, and only accelerated reforms can enable a successful transition—something achieved by few countries like Chile and Poland.

Key Policy Areas for Reform

  • Boosting Investment and Capital Formation:
    • Increase total investment from 33.5% to 40% of GDP by 2035 through public-private synergy.
    • Address infrastructure deficits, streamline land acquisition, and liberalize FDI norms.
    • Improve financial markets to support long-term infrastructure and SME financing.
  • Enhancing Labor Force Participation:
    • Raise overall labor force participation from 56.4% to 65%.
    • Increase female workforce participation from 35.6% to 50% by addressing socio-economic barriers and improving childcare and safety infrastructure.
    • Target job-rich sectors like manufacturing, logistics, hospitality, and care economy to generate employment.
  • Structural Transformation and Trade Integration:
    • Shift labor from agriculture (currently employing 45% of workforce) towards manufacturing and services.
    • Boost India's Global Value Chain (GVC) participation by reducing high tariffs and non-tariff barriers, particularly on intermediate and capital goods.
    • Simplify customs, improve regulatory clarity, and promote technological adoption across sectors.
  • Promoting Balanced Regional Growth:
    • Support low-income states in developing healthcare, education, and infrastructure.
    • Deepen industrial reforms and trade competitiveness in developed states through federal programs like the Urban Challenge Fund.
  • Strengthening Human Capital and Innovation:
    • Expand vocational training and R&D investments in emerging areas such as AI, biotechnology, and clean energy.
    • Encourage entrepreneurship and formalization to reduce the high informal employment rate (73%).

Challenges on the Path

India faces slowing investment rates (down from 35.8% in 2008 to 27.5% in 2024), low FDI inflows (just 1.6% of GDP), and declining trade openness (exports and imports fell from 56% of GDP in 2012 to 46% in 2023). Regulatory unpredictability and complex business processes hinder private investment.

Conclusion

India’s vision to become a high-income economy by 2047 is ambitious yet attainable, contingent on sustained growth, robust reforms, and inclusive development. Strategic policy execution in trade, labor, investment, and federal cooperation will be critical to transforming India's economic trajectory and positioning it as a global leader by its centenary year.

Growth and Challenges of India’s Private Space Sector

  • 03 Mar 2025

Introduction

India’s space sector has experienced remarkable growth, especially with the advent of the Space Sector Reforms of 2020. These reforms have opened the door for greater private sector participation, spurring innovation, investment, and commercial growth. The Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) remains at the forefront of technological advancements, while a burgeoning ecosystem of space tech startups is positioning India as a key player in the global space economy.

Private Participation in India’s Space Industry

  • Emerging Startups: Over 200 space startups have emerged, leveraging ISRO’s infrastructure such as testing, launch, and ground station facilities.
  • Regulatory and Financial Support: The Indian National Space Promotion and Authorization Center (IN-SPACe) was created to facilitate private participation in space activities. It also launched a ?1,000 crore Venture Capital Fund to accelerate innovation within the sector.
  • Commercial Arm of ISRO: Antrix Corporation, ISRO’s commercial arm, plays a crucial role in facilitating satellite launches and technology transfers, thus enhancing private capabilities.
  • Growth in Payloads: The PSLV Orbital Experimental Module (POEM) program has increased startup payloads significantly, from 6 in 2022 to 24 in 2024.

Private Investment and Startup Innovations

  • Venture Capital Investment: Private funding, particularly from MountTech Growth Fund – Kavachh (MGF-Kavachh), has been instrumental in driving growth. Over ?2,500 crore have been invested in space startups over the past three years.
  • Startup Innovations:
    • GalaxEye integrated Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR) with optical imagery, a world-first achievement in rapid data compression.
    • Pixxel is developing Firefly, the world’s most advanced hyperspectral satellite constellation.
    • InspeCity (IIT Bombay) is working on innovative in-orbit satellite repair and refueling technologies.
    • Skyroot and Agnikul are pioneering cost-effective private launch vehicles for satellite deployment.

Space Sector Reforms of 2020

The Space Sector Reforms of 2020 have been transformative in enabling greater private sector involvement across the entire spectrum of space activities, from satellite design to launch vehicle manufacturing:

  • Expansion of Private Roles: The reforms allow private companies to engage in activities such as satellite design, launch vehicle manufacturing, and ground station services.
  • Establishment of IN-SPACe: IN-SPACe was created as a regulatory body to facilitate the engagement of private entities in space activities, empowering them to operate independently from ISRO.
  • Technology Transfer: The reforms have encouraged ISRO to transfer technology to private players through NewSpace India Limited (NSIL), enabling commercialization of indigenous space technologies.

Challenges Facing India’s Space Industry

  • Funding Gaps: While venture capital interest is rising, early-stage funding remains limited, making it difficult for startups to scale effectively.
  • Talent Shortage: There is a shortage of specialized educational institutions focused on space technology. Currently, India only has one Indian Institute of Space Technology (IIST), underscoring the need for more educational institutions and industry-academia collaborations.
  • Global Competition: India faces stiff competition from countries like the US, China, and Russia, which have advanced space programs and capabilities such as reusable spacecraft and space tourism.
  • Dependence on Foreign Launch Vehicles: Despite progress in domestic launch capabilities, many startups still depend on foreign rockets like SpaceX’s Falcon-9 due to cost and scheduling constraints.

Strategic Way Forward

  • Boosting R&D and Infrastructure:
    • Expand the domestic manufacturing of satellite components through the Production Linked Incentive scheme for space-grade components.
    • Establish more space-focused educational institutions and create a dedicated space industrial corridor to boost satellite and launch vehicle manufacturing.
  • Global Collaboration:
    • Strengthen bilateral agreements with leading space agencies (NASA, ESA, Roscosmos) to foster collaboration in research and development.
    • Promote rideshare missions to reduce satellite launch costs, benefiting startups.
  • Technology Transfer and Commercialization:
    • Enhance ISRO’s technology transfer initiatives to allow startups to commercialize homegrown innovations, driving economic growth in space-related industries.

Conclusion

India’s private space sector is undergoing a transformative shift, with increasing private sector participation, supportive reforms, and growing venture capital investment. While challenges such as funding gaps, talent shortages, and global competition remain, strategic measures to enhance R&D, infrastructure, and global collaborations can position India as a leading player in the global space economy. This growth aligns with India’s broader goals of technological advancement and economic development, while also contributing to global space exploration and sustainability.

Farmers’ Share in Consumer Prices for Rabi Crops

  • 02 Mar 2025

In News:

The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) conducted a comprehensive pan-India survey during May–July 2024 to assess the farmers’ share in consumer prices for 12 major rabi crops. The survey spanned mandis and villages across 86 centres in 18 states, and included detailed inputs from farmers, traders, and retailers, with over 10,699 respondents.

Key Findings:

  • Farmers’ Share in Consumer Prices:
    • Ranged between 40% and 67% across rabi crops.
    • Wheat farmers received the highest share (67%), attributed to its status as a notified commodity under the public procurement system; about 25% of wheat farmers sold at Minimum Support Price (MSP).
    • Rice farmers received 52%, a figure consistent over previous surveys (49% in 2018, 45% in 2022), indicating stability.
    • In pulses, lentil (masoor) farmers earned 66%, and gram (chana) farmers earned 60% of the retail price.
    • In oilseeds, mustard farmers received 52%, slightly lower than the 55% found in a 2021 study.
  • Perishables vs Non-Perishables:
    • Fruits and vegetables showed lower farmer share (40–63%), due to their perishability, seasonal production, and logistical challenges.
    • The combined markup of traders and retailers exceeded 50% in most perishable crops (except tomatoes).
    • Perishables face higher post-harvest losses, quality variation, and price volatility due to climate dependency and demand-supply fluctuations.

Supply Chain and Payments:

  • The agriculture supply chain remains unorganized, especially for fruits and vegetables, with multiple intermediaries reducing transparency in pricing, logistics, and fund flows.
  • Retailer markups were typically higher than those of traders. An empirical analysis showed that:
    • Higher transaction costs (e.g., transport, labour) reduce retailer markups.
    • High post-harvest losses in perishables allow markups to be passed on to consumers.

Digital Transactions:Though cash transactions still dominate, the adoption of electronic payments saw a significant rise in 2024 across all stakeholders compared to previous surveys in 2018 and 2022.

Policy Implications:

  • A higher farmers’ share is essential to:
    • Enhance farm incomes
    • Incentivise crop diversification, particularly from cereals to pulses and oilseeds
    • Improve transparency in the agri-supply chain
  • Strengthening public procurement, digital infrastructure, and organised logistics are vital for ensuring fair price realisation by farmers.

India-EU Strategic Partnership

  • 01 Mar 2025

In News:

The recent visit of European Commission President Ursula von der Leyen to India, marked a significant recalibration in India-EU relations. Amid global geopolitical flux—characterized by U.S.-Europe divergences, China’s assertiveness, and disrupted supply chains—India and the EU are deepening cooperation in trade, technology, climate, and security. This partnership is crucial for regional stability and shaping a multipolar, rules-based global order.

Strategic and Economic Dimensions

  • Trade and Investment:The EU is India’s largest trading partner, accounting for 12.2% of India’s total trade in 2023. Bilateral goods trade reached $135 billion (FY 2023–24), and services trade stood at $53 billion. The EU is the second-largest source of FDI into India ($117.4 billion since 2000), while Indian FDI to the EU was $40 billion. Free Trade Agreement (FTA) talks, revived in 2021, aim to resolve tariff and regulatory barriers in sectors like automobiles, dairy, pharma, and IT services.
  • Technology and Digital Cooperation:The India-EU Trade and Technology Council (TTC), launched in 2022, promotes collaboration in semiconductors, AI, clean energy, and resilient supply chains. Key developments include MoUs on semiconductor R&D and high-performance computing. Challenges remain, particularly around EU data adequacy under GDPR, which affects Indian digital exporters.
  • Green Transition and Energy Security:The EU-India Clean Energy and Climate Partnership focuses on renewable energy, smart grids, and sustainable cities. A €1 billion European Investment Bank fund supports green hydrogen projects. India’s participation in European Hydrogen Week 2024 signals growing collaboration in clean energy. Initiatives like SWITCH-Asia promote sustainable consumption and circular economy practices.
  • Maritime and Defense Cooperation:Under the ESIWA framework, India and the EU are expanding maritime security ties. The EU has stationed a liaison officer at India’s Information Fusion Centre (Gurugram), and the first joint naval exercise in the Gulf of Guinea (2023) emphasized Indo-Pacific cooperation. However, defense ties remain limited due to India's stronger military relationships with Russia and the U.S.

Institutional and Societal Ties

India-EU relations date back to 1962 and were elevated to a Strategic Partnership in 2004. The Roadmap to 2025, adopted in 2020, prioritizes digital transformation, climate action, and multilateralism. The TTC’s recent meetings reaffirm commitment to tech and trade collaboration.

People-to-people ties are strengthening. Indians received over 20% of EU Blue Cards (2023–24). Over 6,000 Indian students have benefitted from Erasmus scholarships, and 2,700 researchers from Marie Sk?odowska-Curie Actions.

Key Challenges

  • Stalled FTA Talks over tariffs and market access.
  • Regulatory barriers under SPS and TBT norms.
  • Data governance divergence due to lack of EU data adequacy for India.
  • Foreign policy misalignments, especially over Russia-Ukraine.
  • Fragmented defense engagement due to EU’s limited commitment.

Way Forward

India and the EU must resolve FTA hurdles, negotiate a data-sharing framework, align Indo-Pacific strategies, and invest in alternative supply chains via IMEC. Enhanced cooperation in green tech, cybersecurity, and digital infrastructure is key. India must also reform its regulatory landscape to attract EU tech and manufacturing investments.

Conclusion

India-EU ties are entering a transformative phase. Anchored in shared democratic values and strategic interests, the partnership can promote multipolarity, sustainable development, and a resilient global governance architecture.

Reducing India's Dependence on Imported Fertilisers

  • 27 Feb 2025

Context

The Indian government is strategizing to cap or reduce the consumption of high-analysis fertilizers—Urea, Di-Ammonium Phosphate (DAP), and Muriate of Potash (MOP)—due to their heavy import dependence, rising economic burden, and adverse environmental impacts. This shift is crucial for ensuring nutrient balance, reducing foreign exchange outflows, and promoting sustainable agriculture.

India’s Dependence on Imported Fertilisers

  • MOP: India is fully dependent on imports from countries like Canada, Russia, Jordan, Israel, Turkmenistan, and Belarus, as it has no mineable potash reserves.
  • Urea: While over 85% of urea demand is met domestically, production relies on imported liquefied natural gas (LNG) from Qatar, the US, UAE, and Angola.
  • DAP: Imported both as finished fertiliser and raw materials (rock phosphate, sulphur, phosphoric acid, ammonia) mainly from Saudi Arabia, Morocco, Jordan, China, and others.

The Need to Limit High-Analysis Fertiliser Usage

Economic Concerns

  • The rupee's depreciation increases fertiliser import costs.
  • India spent ?1.75 lakh crore on fertiliser subsidies in 2023-24.
  • Subsidised urea is sold at rates far below cost, draining government resources and encouraging overuse.
  • DAP's landed price stands at ?55,150 per tonne, with production costs exceeding ?65,000 per tonne, while the government-fixed retail price remains ?27,000 per tonne, necessitating large subsidies.

Environmental Concerns

  • Excessive application of urea and DAP depletes organic carbon in soils, reduces microbial diversity, and causes groundwater contamination through nitrate leaching.
  • Soil health degradation ultimately reduces crop productivity and ecological resilience.

Governance Challenges

  • High subsidies encourage black marketing and non-agricultural diversion.
  • Lack of strict nutrient management regulations leads to soil nutrient imbalances.

The Shift Towards Balanced Fertilisation

High-analysis fertilisers like urea (46% nitrogen), DAP (46% phosphorus + 18% nitrogen), and MOP (60% potash) often lead to over-application and inefficiency. Crops instead require a balanced supply of:

  • Macronutrients (N, P, K),
  • Secondary nutrients (sulphur, calcium, magnesium),
  • Micronutrients (zinc, iron, copper, boron, manganese, molybdenum).

Balanced fertilisation ensures efficient nutrient uptake, enhances yields, preserves soil health, and optimises resource use.

Emerging Alternatives

Ammonium Phosphate Sulphate (APS – 20:20:0:13)

  • Contains 20% N, 20% P, and 13% S, but no K.
  • Sulphur-rich, making it ideal for oilseeds, pulses, maize, cotton, onion, and chilli.
  • APS manufacturing is more economical, requiring less costly phosphoric acid compared to DAP.
  • Sales surged 32.4%, from 4.9 million tonnes (2022-23) to 6.5 million tonnes (2023-24), making APS the third-most consumed fertiliser after urea and DAP.
  • Leading APS producers include Coromandel International, Paradeep Phosphates, and Mangalore Chemicals & Fertilizers.

Single Super Phosphate (SSP – 16% P, 11% S)

  • A low-cost, sulphur-rich fertiliser ideal for oilseeds and vegetable cultivation.

Nano Urea and Nano DAP

  • Developed by Indian Farmers Fertiliser Cooperative (IFFCO).
  • Enhance nutrient use efficiency by 15–20%, require lower application rates, and reduce overall fertiliser consumption.

NPKS Complex Fertilisers

  • Formulations like 10:26:26:0, 12:32:16:0, 15:15:15:0, and 14:35:14:0 provide balanced nutrients.
  • Help integrate potash application into complexes, reducing direct MOP use.
  • NPKS fertiliser sales are projected to reach 14 million tonnes in 2024-25, up from 7.3 million tonnes in 2013-14.

Biofertilisers and Organic Manure

  • Promote sustainable farming by improving soil health and reducing chemical fertiliser dependence.
  • Supported by government initiatives like the PM-PRANAM scheme.

Effectiveness of Substitutes

  • Reduces Import Costs: APS and Nano Urea reduce foreign exchange outflows.
  • Enhances Soil Health: Balanced fertilisers prevent soil degradation and restore fertility.
  • Improves Crop Yields: Trials demonstrate better nutrient absorption and yield improvements.
  • Promotes Sustainability: Encourages ecological farming practices.

Policy Support and The Way Forward

Government Initiatives

  • PM-PRANAM Scheme: Promotes alternative fertilisers.
  • Nutrient-Based Subsidy (NBS): Encourages balanced fertiliser use.
  • Soil Health Card Campaign: Educates farmers about soil-specific nutrient needs.

Strategic Recommendations

  • Subsidy Reforms: Focus subsidies on APS, Nano Urea, and complex fertilisers rather than high-analysis fertilisers.
  • Technology Adoption: Use AI-based tools like Microsoft FarmVibes AI for precision fertiliser application.
  • Domestic R&D Investment: Strengthen indigenous production of fertilisers and biofertilisers.
  • Policy Alignment: Integrate fertiliser policy with climate change and agricultural sustainability strategies.

Conclusion

India’s high dependence on imported urea, DAP, and MOP is economically unsustainable and environmentally detrimental. Transitioning towards balanced fertilisers like APS, Nano Urea, and organic alternatives is critical for ensuring long-term agricultural sustainability, reducing subsidy burdens, conserving foreign exchange, and preserving soil health. This shift requires concerted efforts through government policy, farmer education, and technological innovation.

Lokpal

  • 26 Feb 2025

Context:
In February 2025, the Supreme Court of India stayed a controversial order issued by the Lokpal, which had attempted to bring High Court judges within its jurisdiction by categorizing them as "public servants" under the Lokpal and Lokayuktas Act, 2013. The apex court termed the Lokpal’s interpretation as “very disturbing” and in contradiction with settled constitutional principles.

Understanding the Lokpal and Its Jurisdiction

Origin and Legal Framework:

  • Concept Origin: The term "Lokpal" was coined by Dr. L.M. Singhvi in 1963. The concept was originally inspired by the Swedish institution of the Ombudsman (1809).
  • Legislative Foundation: The Lokpal and Lokayuktas Act, 2013 was passed following public pressure during the Anna Hazare-led India Against Corruption movement.
  • Purpose: To act as an independent anti-corruption body with jurisdiction over high-ranking public officials.

Structure and Jurisdiction:

  • Composition:Lokpal comprises a Chairperson and up to 8 members (50% must be judicial).
  • Selection Committee: Includes the Prime Minister, Speaker of Lok Sabha, Leader of Opposition, Chief Justice of India, and an eminent jurist.
  • Jurisdiction (Section 14):
    • Prime Minister (with exceptions related to national security, international relations, etc.)
    • Union Ministers and Members of Parliament
    • Government servants (Group A-D)
    • Chairpersons, officers of public entities, and NGOs receiving foreign contributions over ?10 lakh annually

The Controversy: Inclusion of High Court Judges

The Lokpal recently issued an order stating that High Court judges qualify as public servants under the Lokpal Act. The reasoning was based on historical foundations:

  • Lokpal’s Argument:
    • High Courts were established under British-era laws like the Indian High Courts Act, 1861.
    • Article 214 of the Constitution merely recognizes these courts rather than creating them.
    • Therefore, High Court judges should fall under Lokpal’s purview, unlike Supreme Court judges who are appointed under Article 124.

Supreme Court’s Response and Constitutional Position

The Supreme Court overruled Lokpal’s interpretation, citing constitutional provisions and established legal precedent:

  • Appointment under the Constitution:
    • High Court judges are appointed under Article 217 of the Constitution.
    • Supreme Court judges are appointed under Article 124.
    • Both are constitutional functionaries and hence outside the jurisdiction of Lokpal, which is a statutory body.
  • 1991 K. Veeraswami Judgment (Five-Judge Bench):
    • Unanimously held that judges are public servants, but no criminal case can be registered against them without prior consultation with the Chief Justice of India (CJI).
    • Even if the CJI is the accused, the consultation must occur with other senior SC judges.
    • Emphasized judicial independence and the need for protection against frivolous or motivated inquiries.
  • Judicial Integrity vs Public Scrutiny:
    • While corruption among judges is not immune to scrutiny, the procedure must ensure judicial independence, prevent erosion of public trust, and protect honest judges from harassment.

Critical Analysis: Lokpal's Overreach and Constitutional Boundaries

  • Violation of Doctrine of Separation of Powers:The Lokpal's attempt to extend its reach to constitutional judges infringes on the independence of the judiciary, a basic feature of the Constitution.
  • Constitutional Supremacy vs Statutory Authority:The Lokpal, being a creation of Parliament, cannot override the constitutional safeguards provided to judges under Articles 124 and 217.
  • Judicial Precedent Binding on Statutory Bodies:Ignoring the K. Veeraswami judgment not only undermines legal precedent but also reflects a lack of institutional discipline.

Conclusion

The recent conflict between the Lokpal and the Supreme Court over jurisdictional boundaries highlights the delicate balance between ensuring accountability and preserving judicial independence. While combating corruption remains vital, procedural safeguards and constitutional norms must guide such actions. The episode reiterates the importance of institutional clarity, inter-agency respect, and adherence to constitutional principles in India's democratic framework.

Regulation of OTT Content in India: Code of Ethics and Legal Framework

  • 23 Feb 2025

In News:

The proliferation of Over-The-Top (OTT) platforms in India has transformed content consumption. However, rising concerns over obscene, vulgar, and explicit content have prompted the Ministry of Information & Broadcasting (I&B) to issue a fresh advisory urging adherence to the Code of Ethics under the Information Technology (Intermediary Guidelines and Digital Media Ethics Code) Rules, 2021 (IT Rules, 2021).

OTT platforms are digital streaming services that deliver content over the internet, bypassing traditional broadcasting. Their growing influence on public discourse, especially among youth, necessitates regulation.

Key Features of the Advisory

The advisory mandates strict compliance with the Code of Ethics under IT Rules, 2021:

  • Prohibition of unlawful and obscene content.
  • Age-based content classification and access control for ‘A’-rated content.
  • A three-tier grievance redressal mechanism:
    • Level I: Self-regulation by publishers.
    • Level II: Oversight by self-regulatory bodies.
    • Level III: Government oversight via I&B Ministry.

OTT platforms must also comply with:

  • Indecent Representation of Women (Prohibition) Act, 1986
  • Protection of Children from Sexual Offences (POCSO) Act, 2012
  • Information Technology Act, 2000
  • Bhartiya Nyay Sanhita, 2023

Recent Trigger: ‘India’s Got Latent’ Controversy

The advisory follows public outrage over vulgar remarks made by podcaster Ranveer Allahbadia on the YouTube show ‘India’s Got Latent’. The Supreme Court criticized the Centre for inadequate oversight of digital content and demanded legal action. The Parliamentary panel also sought a review of existing laws and possible amendments to strengthen content regulation.

Rationale for a Code of Ethics

  • Protecting Minors: Shields children from harmful or explicit material.
  • Preserving Public Decency: Prevents normalization of obscene content.
  • Fostering Trust: Builds accountability and transparency in content curation.

Global Best Practices

  • Ofcom (UK): Advocates age-verification, content classification, and proactive monitoring.
  • European Audiovisual Observatory: Emphasizes transparency, regular audits, and self-regulation.

Implementation Challenges

  • Enforcement gaps and inconsistent compliance across platforms.
  • Vague definitions in the rules create interpretational ambiguities.
  • Technological limitations in age verification and filtering mechanisms.
  • Creative resistance from platforms fearing curbs on artistic freedom.

Way Forward

  • Establish an independent content regulatory body for continuous oversight.
  • Foster collaboration between government, platforms, and global agencies.
  • Mandate regular content audits and public awareness campaigns.
  • Incentivize ethical compliance through certifications and recognition.

Conclusion

While digital freedom is essential, unchecked content dissemination can erode societal values. The recent advisory underscores the need for a balanced regulatory approach—one that safeguards minors and public decency while respecting creative freedoms. A robust and dynamic Code of Ethics, coupled with technological upgrades and civic awareness, is key to building a safe and responsible digital media ecosystem in India.

'Rarest of Rare' Doctrine

  • 22 Feb 2025

In News:

The application of the death penalty in India continues to evoke debate, particularly in light of contrasting verdicts such as those in the 2024 R.G. Kar Medical College case and the Sharon Raj murder case. These cases highlighted the inconsistent application of the 'rarest of rare' doctrine, a judicial principle guiding capital punishment in the country.

Evolution of the 'Rarest of Rare' Doctrine

The debate surrounding the constitutionality and application of the death penalty began with Jagmohan Singh vs. State of Uttar Pradesh (1972). The Supreme Court upheld the death penalty’s constitutionality under Article 21 (Right to Life), ruling that it did not violate Articles 14 (equality before law) or 19 (freedom of speech and expression), despite concerns over lack of sentencing guidelines.

A definitive framework emerged in Bachan Singh vs. State of Punjab (1980), where the apex court held that the death penalty should only be awarded in the 'rarest of rare' cases. However, the Court did not precisely define what constituted "rarest of rare," leaving the interpretation to judicial discretion.

To bring clarity, the Supreme Court in Machhi Singh vs. State of Punjab (1983) outlined five guiding criteria to determine such cases:

  1. Manner of the Crime – Exceptionally brutal, grotesque, or shocking to the community.
  2. Motive of the Crime – Exhibiting extreme depravity or sadistic intent.
  3. Socially Abhorrent Nature – Offenses targeting marginalized individuals or groups.
  4. Magnitude of Crime – Cases involving multiple murders or large-scale violence.
  5. Victim’s Vulnerability – When victims are children, women, elderly, or otherwise helpless.

Further, in Mithu vs. State of Punjab (1983), the Court struck down Section 303 of the IPC, which mandated the death penalty for life convicts committing murder. The judgment reaffirmed that capital punishment must remain discretionary, emphasizing judicial evaluation of aggravating and mitigating circumstances.

Case Studies: A Reflection of Judicial Discretion

  • In the R.G. Kar Medical College case, a female medical trainee was raped and murdered. Despite the brutality, the court ruled that the case did not meet the threshold of 'rarest of rare' and awarded life imprisonment to the convict.
  • Conversely, in the Sharon Raj case, a young man was poisoned by his partner in a premeditated act. The court termed it one of the 'rarest of rare' cases and awarded the death penalty, citing the calculated nature and moral depravity of the crime.

These differing verdicts underscore the subjective application of the doctrine, with considerable weight placed on judicial interpretation.

Contemporary Concerns and Legal Developments

While the doctrine aims to preserve the sanctity of life by making the death penalty an exception, its lack of statutory definition and variability in interpretation has invited criticism. In 2022, the Supreme Court referred the issue to a Constitution Bench to explore how sentencing procedures could better accommodate mitigating factors and ensure a "meaningful, real and effective" hearing before sentencing.

Conclusion

The 'rarest of rare' doctrine represents a critical balancing act between justice and retribution in India's legal system. Although it seeks to restrict capital punishment to the most egregious crimes, its ambiguous parameters and judicial discretion often lead to inconsistent outcomes. Going forward, a more standardized and transparent sentencing framework could strengthen judicial credibility and uphold constitutional morality.

Renewed India–US Civil Nuclear Cooperation

  • 21 Feb 2025

In News:

Context:

India and the United States have reaffirmed their commitment to fully realise the 123 Civil Nuclear Agreement, marking a major push to revive progress two decades after the pact was signed in 2007.

Key Gains for India

  • Technology Transfer & Localisation:The partnership envisions joint construction of US-designed nuclear reactors in India, incorporating large-scale localisation and technology transfer, reversing the US's usual "manufacture-at-home" stance.
  • Upgrading India’s Nuclear Capacity:India aims to shift from PHWRs (Pressurised Heavy Water Reactors) to globally dominant PWRs (Pressurised Water Reactors). This will allow India to scale capacity addition and modernise its nuclear fleet.
  • Entry into Small Modular Reactors (SMRs):
    • SMRs (30–300 MWe) are compact, scalable reactors viewed as essential for future clean energy demands.
    • India’s Department of Atomic Energy is exploring collaboration with Holtec International (USA) for joint manufacturing and deployment.
    • Holtec's SMR-300, supported by the US Department of Energy with $116 million, is under design review in the UK and Canada.
  • Strategic Counter to China:India–US joint ventures in SMRs could counter China’s rising influence in the Global South through its aggressive SMR diplomacy.

Economic & Industrial Impacts

  • Holtec plans a nuclear technology campus in Pune and a specialty manufacturing plant in India.
  • Existing facility in Dahej, Gujarat, can double workforce if plans are approved.
  • Legal reforms in India are being considered to attract investments from Western and Middle Eastern markets into the nuclear sector.

India: Leading the Next Phase of Global Outsourcing (Deloitte Report)

Key Findings from Deloitte’s ‘The Outsourcing Compass’ (2025)

  • Growing Demand:
    • 81% of global organizations plan to increase outsourcing over the next 3–5 years.
    • India continues to lead as a global outsourcing hub, with a projected rise as the world’s 3rd-largest economy by 2027.
  • Shift in Outsourcing Models:
    • Transition from back-office services to strategic, high-value functions like product development, AI/GenAI support, and brand management.
    • 98% of firms depend on Indian service providers for AI and GenAI capabilities.
  • Modern Contracting Approaches:
    • 36% prefer outcome-based contracts over traditional FTE-based models.
    • AI-specific clauses are being added to outsourcing contracts to enhance tracking and cost control.
  • Strategic Collaborations & Cost Efficiency:
    • Strategic-niche partnerships yield 10–25% annual cost savings; some report 15–35% savings.
    • 70% of organizations work with non-traditional providers to access innovative technologies.
  • Evolving Operating Models:
    • 55% use Global Business Services (GBS) centers for oversight; execution by third-party providers.
    • 35% adopt Build-Operate-Transfer (BOT) models to scale up while retaining control.
  • Robust Governance Structures:
    • 45% of mature outsourcing firms operate Vendor Management Offices (VMOs) to manage risks and enhance effectiveness.

Why India Remains Preferred:

  • A skilled digital workforce, thriving startup ecosystem, policy stability, and advancements in cybersecurity and vendor governance bolster India’s position.

Sovereign Green Bonds in India

  • 20 Feb 2025

Context:

India has adopted sovereign green bonds (SGrBs) as a key strategy to finance its transition to a low-carbon economy. However, these bonds have faced muted demand from investors, limiting the effectiveness of this funding source. Despite efforts to ease participation rules and attract foreign investors, the expected "greenium" (lower borrowing costs) remains weak, leading to funding shortfalls for vital green projects.

What are Sovereign Green Bonds?

Sovereign Green Bonds are issued by the government to raise capital for environmentally sustainable projects such as renewable energy, energy efficiency, and climate resilience. In India, the government established a framework for issuing these bonds in 2022. Since their introduction, India has raised nearly Rs 53,000 crore through eight issuances, with funds primarily allocated to projects like energy-efficient locomotives and metro developments.

Weak Investor Demand

Despite the government's efforts, India's SGrBs have struggled to attract investor interest. A significant issue is the limited greenium, which in India has only reached 2–3 basis points, far below the global average of 7–8 basis points. This lack of financial incentive makes these bonds less attractive compared to regular bonds. Additionally, small issue sizes and limited secondary market trading further discourage investors. Many bonds are held to maturity, stifling liquidity and market participation.

Impact on Green Initiatives

The weak demand for SGrBs has directly impacted the funding for critical green projects. Initially, India planned to raise Rs 32,061 crore from SGrB proceeds in 2024-25. However, after weak investor response, the revised estimate was reduced to Rs 25,298 crore, resulting in significant cuts to funding for projects such as grid-scale solar energy. The budget for grid-scale solar projects was slashed from Rs 10,000 crore to just Rs 1,300 crore. As a result, India is increasingly relying on general revenue to fill the funding gap.

Key Areas Affected by Funding Cuts

  • Electric Locomotive Manufacturing: Rs 12,600 crore
  • Metro Projects: Rs 8,000 crore
  • Renewable Energy (including National Green Hydrogen Mission): Rs 4,607 crore
  • Afforestation (National Mission for a Green India): Rs 124 crore

Challenges Contributing to Weak Demand

  • Lack of Social Impact Funds: India lacks a robust ecosystem of social impact funds and responsible investment mandates, which are present in other markets and drive demand for green bonds.
  • Liquidity Issues: Small bond issues and a lack of secondary market trading have made SGrBs less liquid and attractive to investors.
  • Higher Yields in Other Investment Avenues: Investors are reluctant to accept the relatively low yields of SGrBs, as they offer little financial advantage over regular bonds.

Way Forward

To improve the attractiveness of SGrBs, India could explore the issuance of sustainability bonds, which fund both green and social projects, attracting a broader base of investors. Additionally, post-issuance transparency is crucial, with detailed allocation and impact reports needed to build investor confidence. The government can also collaborate with multilateral development banks like the World Bank to back its green bonds, enhancing their credibility and attracting investment.

Furthermore, enhancing liquidity and developing a more robust market for green finance are essential steps to ensure that India can achieve its climate goals. With proper strategy and structural changes, India can enhance investor confidence and ensure sustainable funding for its green initiatives.

India's Horticulture Sector

  • 19 Feb 2025

In News:

India’s horticulture sector is crucial to its agricultural economy, encompassing the cultivation, production, processing, and marketing of fruits, vegetables, and ornamental plants. The sector includes sub-sectors like pomology (fruit cultivation), olericulture (vegetable cultivation), floriculture (flower cultivation), and arboriculture (cultivation of trees). India stands as the second-largest producer of fruits and vegetables globally, trailing only China.

In 2023-24, India’s horticultural production was estimated at 355 million tonnes, surpassing food grain production. The sector contributes 33% to the agricultural Gross Value Added (GVA), growing at an annual rate of 4-5%, outpacing cereal production.

Despite its size and importance, India’s horticulture sector faces several challenges. Post-harvest losses are significant, with about 8.1% for fruits and 7.3% for vegetables, translating into a loss of ?1.53 trillion annually. These losses are primarily due to inadequate cold storage and processing infrastructure, as well as fragmented value chains, where middlemen dominate, resulting in low farmer incomes. Farmers typically receive only 30% of the final consumer price for their produce.

Challenges in India’s Horticulture Sector

  • Infrastructure Deficit: The absence of efficient logistics, cold storage, and warehousing facilities contributes to delays and wastage of perishable horticultural crops. The cold storage capacity is concentrated in just a few states, limiting access for farmers across the country.
  • Small Operational Landholdings: Many farmers operate on small plots, limiting their ability to adopt sustainable practices and crop rotation, leading to reduced yields and soil degradation.
  • Limited Value Addition: Only 10% of India’s fruits and vegetables are processed, compared to 60-70% in developed countries, leading to distress sales and low earnings for farmers.
  • Market Linkages and Export Challenges: Indian farmers have limited access to direct markets, and the country’s export share in horticultural produce is low. Non-tariff barriers such as Sanitary and Phytosanitary (SPS) standards also hinder India's export growth.

Government Initiatives for Horticulture

Several initiatives have been launched to address these challenges:

  • Mission for Integrated Development of Horticulture (2014) aims to foster holistic growth through cluster approaches and better linkages.
  • Operation Greens, initially focused on specific crops like tomatoes, onions, and potatoes, has been extended to all horticultural crops to address price volatility.
  • The Farmer Producer Organisation (FPO) model is being promoted to help farmers collectively bargain for better prices. As of August 2024, 8,875 FPOs have been established with a target of 10,000 by 2027.
  • The Agriculture Infrastructure Fund (AIF) provides financial support for cold chains, warehouses, and processing units.

Case Study: Sahyadri FPO

A notable example of FPO success is the Sahyadri Farmer Producer Company Ltd (SFPCL) in Maharashtra, which started with 10 farmers in 2004 and has grown to include 26,500 farmers across 252 villages. With an annual turnover of ?1,549 crore (2023-24), SFPCL has become the largest grape exporter, with 90% of exports going to the EU and UAE. Farmers involved in the FPO receive 55% of the final export price, significantly higher than the typical 30% in traditional markets. This model demonstrates the potential of cooperative farming in enhancing farmers' incomes.

Way Forward: Scaling Up the Amul Model

To replicate the success of AMUL in the dairy sector, India’s horticulture sector must focus on:

  • Strengthening FPOs: Support should be provided for working capital, infrastructure, and digital integration. Leveraging platforms like the Open Network for Digital Commerce (ONDC) can enhance market access for FPOs.
  • Expanding Processing and Storage Infrastructure: Financial allocation for cold storage, processing facilities, and logistics must be increased under schemes like Operation Greens.
  • Public-Private Partnerships (PPP): Encourage collaborations between the government and private sectors to enhance food processing, distribution, and retail linkages.
  • Technology Integration: Adoption of technologies like blockchain for traceability and AI-driven price prediction models can improve market transparency and reduce distress sales.

By expanding successful models like Sahyadri FPO, India can transform its horticulture sector, enhance farmer incomes, ensure food security, and increase agri-export earnings. This approach could play a pivotal role in rural development and poverty alleviation, benefiting both farmers and consumers.

India’s Sovereign Green Bonds: Challenges and Prospects

  • 18 Feb 2025

Context:

India’s Sovereign Green Bonds (SGrBs) are a key instrument to mobilize resources for climate-resilient infrastructure and sustainable development. However, despite their potential, the bonds have struggled to attract robust investor interest, thereby limiting the government’s ability to secure a meaningful greenium—a lower cost of borrowing that typically incentivizes green finance globally.

What are Sovereign Green Bonds?

SGrBs are debt instruments issued by the Government of India to raise capital for projects that contribute to environmental sustainability and low-carbon development. They are part of India’s broader green financing strategy to meet its Net Zero target by 2070. These bonds are issued by the Ministry of Finance, under the oversight of the Department of Economic Affairs (DEA), and are guided by India’s Green Finance Framework, aligned with global green bond principles.

Application of Funds:

The proceeds from SGrBs are earmarked exclusively for green projects, ensuring transparency and impact-based investment. Key sectors financed include:

  • Electric Locomotive Manufacturing (largest beneficiary through the Ministry of Railways)
  • Urban Mobility: Metro rail and public transport systems
  • Renewable Energy: Solar, wind, and the National Green Hydrogen Mission
  • Afforestation: Under the National Mission for a Green India
  • Grid-Scale Solar Projects, though allocations here have been curtailed due to fiscal constraints

Performance and Allocation Trends:

India raised ?16,000 crore through SGrBs in FY 2022–23 and ?20,000 crore in FY 2023–24. For FY 2024–25, ?16,697 crore has been raised so far. However, due to muted investor demand, the revised fundraising estimate has been reduced from ?32,061 crore to ?25,298 crore. A fiscal gap of ?3,600 crore will be met through general revenue, reflecting limited success in expanding green finance.

Challenges:

  • Weak Greenium: Indian SGrBs offer little to no financial advantage over conventional bonds, with greenium as low as 2–3 basis points. Globally, it averages 7–8 basis points, still modest but relatively attractive.
  • Low Investor Demand: Several bond auctions witnessed under-subscription. For instance, ?7,443 crore worth of bonds were devolved to primary dealers in recent auctions due to high yield expectations from investors.
  • Illiquid Secondary Market: Small issuance sizes and a trend of holding bonds till maturity restrict active trading, deterring market participants.
  • Underdeveloped Sustainable Finance Ecosystem: India lacks dedicated ESG funds, responsible investment mandates, or regulatory incentives for green bond investments.

Recommendations:

  • Enhance Credit Guarantees: Collaborate with multilateral institutions like the World Bank or IFC to back green bonds, enhancing their creditworthiness.
  • Expand Domestic Green Investment Base: Promote ESG-focused mutual funds, offer tax incentives, and establish a regulatory framework to attract long-term green capital.
  • Improve Market Liquidity: Increase bond issuance sizes and introduce market-making mechanisms to deepen secondary market activity.
  • Leverage Public-Private Partnerships: Engage private players in project implementation to diversify and scale up green investment opportunities.

Conclusion:

India’s Sovereign Green Bonds symbolize a strategic shift toward sustainable development financing. While challenges persist, especially in market participation and pricing incentives, strengthening domestic financial ecosystems and leveraging global support can make green bonds a cornerstone of India’s climate financing roadmap.

Passive Euthanasia for Rabies Patients: SC to Hear Plea

  • 16 Feb 2025

In News:

The Supreme Court of India has recently agreed to hear a plea seeking the right to passive euthanasia for rabies patients, citing the exceptional nature of the disease and the absence of a cure. The matter, listed for hearing after two weeks, is poised to test the scope and application of the 2018 passive euthanasia ruling under Article 21 of the Constitution.

Background of the Case

  • The petition was filed by the NGO All Creatures Great and Small in 2019, challenging a Delhi High Court order (July 2019) which refused to classify rabies as an exceptional case warranting "death with dignity".
  • The Supreme Court issued notice in January 2020 to the Centre and other stakeholders, seeking their response.
  • On February 10, 2025, a bench of Justices B.R. Gavai and K. Vinod Chandran agreed to hear the matter after two weeks.

Grounds for the Plea

The NGO has urged the Court to lay down a specific protocol enabling terminally ill rabies patients or their guardians to opt for passive euthanasia under medical supervision. Key arguments include:

  • Rabies has a 100% fatality rate once symptoms appear.
  • The disease often leads to violent neurological symptoms, requiring patients to be tied or shackled to beds, stripping them of dignity and personal freedom.
  • The intense suffering and irreversible nature of rabies, coupled with the lack of any effective treatment, makes it distinct from other terminal conditions.
  • The plea seeks the creation of an exceptional legal category for rabies within the framework of the 2018 Supreme Court judgment.

Understanding Euthanasia in India

Definitions:

  • Euthanasia literally means “good death” and refers to hastening death to relieve pain and suffering.
  • Active Euthanasia involves deliberate acts to cause death (e.g., lethal injection) and remains illegal in India.
  • Passive Euthanasia involves withholding or withdrawing life support from terminally ill patients and was legalised in 2018.

Legal Milestone:

  • In the Common Cause v. Union of India (2018) case, a five-judge Constitution Bench ruled that the right to die with dignity is a part of the fundamental right to life under Article 21.
  • The verdict permitted passive euthanasia and the creation of a “living will”—a legal document allowing patients to refuse life support if in a terminal or vegetative state.

Ethical and Constitutional Dimensions

  • The plea raises significant questions about human dignity, bodily autonomy, and the limits of state intervention in end-of-life decisions.
  • It also brings focus to judicial responsibility in expanding fundamental rights, especially in the context of terminal, untreatable illnesses.

Conclusion

The outcome of this case could have far-reaching implications on medical jurisprudence and the ethics of end-of-life care in India. If the Court recognizes rabies as an exception, it may set a precedent for disease-specific passive euthanasia protocols, expanding the practical application of the 2018 ruling.

La Niña 2024–25

  • 15 Feb 2025

In News:

Despite the expected cooling influence of La Niña, January 2025 became the hottest January on record, with global average surface air temperatures 1.75°C above pre-industrial levels (1850–1900), according to the Copernicus Climate Change Service (C3S). This marked the 18th out of the last 19 months that global temperatures exceeded the 1.5°C threshold. The inability of La Niña to curb this warming trend underscores the intensifying impact of anthropogenic climate change.

Understanding La Niña and the ENSO Cycle

La Niña, meaning "The Little Girl" in Spanish, is the cool phase of the El Niño Southern Oscillation (ENSO)—a recurring climate phenomenon involving variations in oceanic and atmospheric conditions in the central and eastern tropical Pacific Ocean.

  • Phases of ENSO:
    • El Niño (warm phase): Warmer ocean temperatures in the eastern Pacific, weakening trade winds and reducing rainfall in the western Pacific.
    • La Niña (cool phase): Colder sea surface temperatures in the eastern Pacific, strengthening trade winds and enhancing rainfall in the western Pacific.
    • Neutral phase: Sea surface temperatures are near average with no dominant anomalies.
  • Mechanism: During La Niña, strengthened trade winds push warm surface waters westward, causing cold waters to upwell in the eastern Pacific. This typically results in global cooling.
  • ENSO Cycle: These phases occur every 2 to 7 years and influence weather patterns globally. The ENSO cycle leads to sea surface temperature variations between ±1°C to ±3°C from the long-term average.

The 2024–25 La Niña: A Weakened Climate Driver

  • Emergence: The current La Niña phase began in December 2024, later than anticipated. Forecasts had expected it around September 2024, giving it insufficient time to strengthen before its typical peak in the Northern Hemisphere winter.
  • Intensity: It is projected to be a mild La Niña, reducing its capacity to significantly influence global temperatures.
  • Past Events: The most recent La Niña cycle lasted from 2020 to 2023, followed by a strong El Niño through mid-2023.
  • Delayed Cooling Effect: The weaker-than-usual La Niña failed to produce the anticipated cooling, surprising scientists. As Julien Nicolas from Copernicus observed, the expected “temporary brake” on global temperatures did not materialize.

Why January 2025 Remained Hot Despite La Niña

  • Global Ocean Warming: Oceans have retained higher-than-usual warmth due to long-term climate change, diluting La Niña’s cooling influence.
  • Weak La Niña Onset: A late and weak phase meant less disruption to the prevailing warming trend. According to NOAA, La Niña events need more time and intensity to impact temperatures effectively.
  • Persistent GHG Emissions: The concentration of greenhouse gases reached record highs in 2024, adding to the Earth's heat burden. Typically, La Niña-induced rains spur vegetation growth and carbon absorption, but weaker rains in this cycle limited that effect.
  • Reduced Aerosols: Declines in atmospheric aerosols—due to cleaner air policies—lessened their usual cooling impact. Aerosols scatter solar radiation and influence cloud dynamics, contributing to temperature moderation.

Global and Regional Climatic Impacts of La Niña

Despite its weak intensity, La Niña still shaped regional weather in varied ways:

Asia

  • India: Higher monsoon rainfall (July–September) is expected. This boosts rice production but may reduce pulse output in the Indo-Gangetic Plain.
  • Southeast Asia: Nations like Indonesia, Malaysia, and the Philippines face increased rainfall—raising flood risks but aiding rice and palm oil yields.

South America

  • Southern Brazil, Uruguay, northern Argentina, and southern Bolivia face drought due to reduced rainfall, affecting soybean and maize crops.
  • Northern Brazil, Colombia, Venezuela, and parts of Ecuador and Peru receive excess rain, risking floods.

Africa

  • East Africa: Experiences dry conditions in December–January, hampering harvests in February–March.
  • Southern Africa: Receives above-average rainfall, benefitting crops like maize, wheat, sorghum, and soybeans.

Oceania

  • Australia: Faces heavy rain and possible flooding in its northern and eastern regions.

North America

  • Southern US: Experiences dry conditions.
  • Northern US, Canada, and Alaska face wetter, stormier weather.

Significance for India

  1. Agriculture: Enhanced monsoon rains improve farm productivity, especially rice.
  2. Water Resources: Better reservoir levels alleviate water stress.
  3. Energy: Increases hydropower potential.
  4. Heat Mitigation: Reduces severity of heatwaves compared to El Niño years.

Monitoring & Prediction

  • Oceanic Niño Index (ONI): Tracks 3-month average SST anomalies. Values below –0.5°C indicate La Niña.
  • Nino-3.4 Index: Confirms ENSO thresholds. Anomalies of ±0.5°C signal event onset; ±1.5°C indicates strong events.
  • Tools Used: Satellite data, trade wind strength, and ocean buoys support forecasts. La Niña can be predicted up to two years in advance if preceded by a strong El Niño.

Conclusion:

The 2024–25 La Niña's inability to cool global temperatures highlights a worrisome trend—the diminishing moderating influence of natural climate phenomena. With greenhouse gas emissions continuing to rise and natural cooling cycles weakening, urgent global action is needed to reduce emissions and mitigate climate change impacts.

Reforming Banking Regulations for a $7 Trillion Indian Economy

  • 14 Feb 2025

In News:

India’s GDP is projected to nearly double from $3.7 trillion in 2023–24 to $7 trillion by 2030–31, driven by strong digital infrastructure, financial inclusion, and supportive fiscal policies. However, to sustain this growth, robust capital formation and increased credit flow are essential.

The current banking regulatory architecture—comprising Statutory Liquidity Ratio (SLR), Cash Reserve Ratio (CRR), Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR), andPriority Sector Lending (PSL)while ensuring stability, also constrains banks’ lending capacity, particularly for the private sector and MSMEs.

Investment Needs and Private Sector Slowdown

India needs $2.5 trillion in investments, demanding an investment-to-GDP ratio of 34%. Public investment alone is insufficient due to fiscal deficit constraints, necessitating greater reliance on private capital and household savings. However, the investment-to-operating cash flow ratio for the private sector has declined from 114% in 2008–09 to 56% in 2023–24, reflecting weakening investment appetite.

Challenges in Financial Intermediation

Banks’ share in household financial savings has declined from 50% to 40%, as savers turn to higher-yield options like mutual funds. Simultaneously, banks face high regulatory pre-emptions, holding nearly 30% of deposits as non-lendable reserves, including:

  • SLR (~26%), exceeding the mandated 18% due to LCR constraints,
  • CRR (4%), which earns no interest.

These requirements reduce lendable resources, raise borrowing costs, and constrain credit growth, especially for MSMEs. Further, upcoming LCR norms for digital deposits could require banks to allocate 2–2.5% more to liquid assets, limiting credit availability further.

Need to Rationalize Regulations

Globally, LCR is the standard liquidity norm, but India uniquely mandates both SLR and LCR, leading to excessive capital retention in low-yield instruments. Additionally, India’s exclusion of CRR from High-Quality Liquid Assets (HQLA) reduces bank profitability. While Basel III emphasizes flexible, institution-specific liquidity planning, the RBI’s rigid mandates hinder optimal resource deployment.

Liquidity Access and MSME Credit Gap

Large corporates can access capital via equity and bond markets, but MSMEs remain dependent on bank credit, facing persistent shortages. PSL norms, which account for over 60% of bank lending, can distort credit risk pricing and misallocate capital. A revision is needed to align PSL with India’s changing economic structure.

Credit Growth and Exchange Rate Management

India’s credit growth lags nominal GDP growth, signaling underinvestment and risks to financial stability. Revisiting the credit-to-deposit (CD) ratio can help banks raise capital more efficiently. Meanwhile, defending the rupee against a strong dollar has drained liquidity without addressing currency overvaluation, which continues to hurt export competitiveness.

Way Forward

  • Rationalize SLR and LCR mandates to unlock liquidity and lower interest rates.
  • Revise PSL norms to reflect new growth priorities.
  • Stimulate private investment through policy stability and ease of doing business.
  • Deepen bond markets to diversify capital sources.
  • Align digital banking fees with global norms for viability.

Conclusion

India stands at a critical juncture in its economic transformation. Reforms in banking regulation, better financial intermediation, and improved credit access are pivotal to achieving the vision of a $7 trillion economy. A forward-looking regulatory framework will empower banks to act as true engines of inclusive and sustained growth.

Article 22 of the Indian Constitution

  • 12 Feb 2025

In News:

Article 22 of the Indian Constitution, enshrined in Part III under Fundamental Rights, provides critical safeguards to individuals against arbitrary arrest and detention. It ensures that liberty is not curtailed without adherence to due process. These rights are applicable to all individuals—citizens and non-citizens—except enemy aliens and those under preventive detention laws.

Key Provisions of Article 22:

  • Article 22(1): No person who is arrested shall be detained without being informed of the grounds for such arrest. The arrestee has the right to consult and be defended by a legal practitioner of their choice.
  • Article 22(2): The arrested person must be produced before the nearest magistrate within 24 hours of arrest (excluding travel time). Further detention without magistrate’s approval is unconstitutional.
  • Article 22(3): The above protections do not apply to:
    • Enemy aliens.
    • Persons detained under preventive detention laws.
  • Article 22(4): Preventive detention cannot exceed three months unless approved by an Advisory Board comprising judges of a High Court.
  • Article 22(5): The detained individual must be informed of the grounds of detention and given a chance to make a representation against it.
  • Article 22(6): Authorities may withhold facts if disclosure is deemed against public interest.
  • Article 22(7): Parliament may prescribe:
    • Circumstances under which detention can extend beyond three months without Advisory Board opinion.
    • Maximum period of detention.
    • Advisory Board procedure.

Supreme Court Ruling: Mandatory Compliance with Article 22(1)

In a recent landmark judgment, the Supreme Court reaffirmed that non-disclosure of grounds of arrest violates Articles 22(1) and 21, rendering such arrests illegal.

A bench comprising Justices A.S. Oka and N.K. Singh ruled that the obligation to inform an arrested person of the grounds of arrest is not a mere formality but a constitutional mandate. Failure to do so deprives the individual of liberty without due process, violating the fundamental rights under Article 21 (Right to Life and Liberty) as well.

Key observations of the Court:

  • Communication of Arrest Grounds: The arrested individual must be informed “as soon as may be” after arrest in a language and manner understandable to them. Merely mentioning grounds in the remand report or charge sheet does not satisfy Article 22(1).
  • Written Communication Preferred: While not mandatory, providing the grounds of arrest in writing is encouraged to avoid controversy and ensure clarity (as suggested earlier in Pankaj Bansal v. Union of India).
  • Duty of Magistrate: At the time of remand, the magistrate must verify if Article 22(1) compliance has occurred. If not, remand is unconstitutional, and the arrest stands vitiated.
  • Burden of Proof: If the accused alleges non-compliance, the Investigating Officer bears the burden to prove that Article 22(1) was followed.
  • Ground for Bail: Violation of Article 22(1) can itself be a ground for granting bail, even in cases where statutory restrictions exist.
  • Communication to Relatives (CrPC Section 50A): Justice Singh emphasized that the grounds of arrest should also be conveyed to friends, relatives, or nominated persons of the arrestee. This facilitates immediate legal recourse to secure release, reinforcing the right to liberty under Article 21.

Conclusion:
The Supreme Court’s judgment marks a crucial reaffirmation of constitutional liberties. It ensures that procedural safeguards under Articles 21 and 22 are not diluted by executive convenience and establishes a higher standard of accountability in the process of arrest and detention in India.

M23 Rebellion

  • 11 Feb 2025

In News:

The Democratic Republic of Congo (DRC) has once again become the epicenter of a severe humanitarian and geopolitical crisis. In early 2025, the M23 militia, a Tutsi-led rebel group allegedly backed by Rwanda, captured Goma, the capital of North Kivu province.

This strategic and mineral-rich city lies on the eastern border with Rwanda and has historically been a flashpoint in the region. The recent offensive has escalated the violence, displacing over 7,00,000 people, killing more than 2,900, and risking a wider regional conflict.

Historical Roots of the Conflict

The current instability can be traced back to colonial and post-independence ethnic tensions in the Great Lakes region. Under German and Belgian colonial rule, power structures in Rwanda favored the minority Tutsi population, generating long-standing resentment among the Hutus. Following Rwanda’s independence in 1962, a Hutu-majority government took power, culminating in the 1994 Rwandan Genocide, where nearly 800,000 Tutsis and moderate Hutus were killed.

Post-genocide, around 2 million Hutus, including militia members responsible for the killings, fled into eastern Congo (then Zaire), leading to the formation of over 120 armed groups, including the Democratic Forces for the Liberation of Rwanda (FDLR), a Hutu militia. Rwanda intervened in Congo in 1996 and 1998, triggering the First and Second Congo Wars, which resulted in millions of deaths and regional destabilization.

Emergence and Role of M23

The M23 (March 23 Movement) was formed in 2012 by former fighters of the Tutsi-led National Congress for the Defence of the People (CNDP), who rebelled after accusing the DRC government of violating a 2009 peace deal meant to integrate them into the national army. Led by SultaniMakenga, M23 initially captured Goma in 2012 but retreated after international pressure.

Resurfacing in 2022, M23 cited non-implementation of the agreement and vowed to protect Tutsi interests against groups like the FDLR. Since then, they have gained control of key mining regions, particularly Rubaya, rich in coltan, a critical mineral used in electronic devices. The UN estimates that M23 earns $800,000 per month from coltan production taxes, indicating that economic motives are as significant as ethnic ones.

The 2025 Escalation

On January 27, 2025, M23 rebels entered Goma and seized control of the airport by the following evening. By January 30, they had captured the city despite sporadic resistance from government forces and allied militias. The group then began advancing southward towards Bukavu, the capital of South Kivu province. The UN has confirmed reports of Rwandan troop incursions into South Kivu, while Burundian forces have joined Congolese troops in resisting the offensive.

Regional Dynamics and Rwanda’s Involvement

The Congolese government, along with the UN and Western powers, accuses Rwanda of backing M23 militarily and logistically. A 2022 UN expert report provided "solid evidence" of Rwandan troops fighting alongside M23, though Rwanda continues to deny these allegations. President Paul Kagame justifies his government's position as defensive, blaming the DRC for its alliance with the FDLR, which threatens Tutsis across the region.

Neighboring Burundi, led by President ÉvaristeNdayishimiye, has warned that Rwanda’s ambitions could spark a wider war, even threatening Burundi’s sovereignty. Uganda, meanwhile, plays a balancing role—supporting Congolese efforts against Islamic State-linked militants, while allegedly allowing M23 safe haven, as per UN reports.

Strategic and Economic Importance of Goma

Goma is not just a city; it is a strategic trade and transport hub at the heart of the DRC’s mineral wealth, particularly coltan, of which the DRC supplies nearly 40% of the world’s demand. The region is crucial for smartphone and electronics manufacturing due to coltan’s utility in capacitors.

Thus, the control of Goma and surrounding territories represents not only a military advantage but also a significant economic resource for M23 and its alleged sponsors.

Humanitarian Impact and Global Concerns

The humanitarian toll of the conflict is staggering. With over a million people displaced since M23’s resurgence, the DRC’s fragile state apparatus is further strained. Corpses reportedly lay unburied in Goma after the assault, reflecting a deep crisis of governance, security, and human rights.

Given the ethnic complexities, resource conflicts, and regional rivalries, there are growing fears of the conflict escalating into a full-fledged regional war, drawing in Rwanda, Burundi, and Uganda.

India and the Middle East

  • 10 Feb 2025

In News:

India's foreign policy has undergone a strategic shift towards West Asia, driven by imperatives of energy security, economic integration, and geopolitical balance.

The launch of theIndia-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor (IMEC)at the G20 Summit 2023 marks a key initiative aimed at reshaping global trade while deepening India’s engagement with the Middle East and Europe.

Importance of the Middle East for India

  • Energy Security:The Middle East supplies over 53% of India’s crude oil (as of January 2025). Long-term energy agreements, such as the LNG deal with Qatar (until 2048) and India-UAE green hydrogen MoUs, ensure stable energy flows. Strategic ties mitigate disruptions due to OPEC+ cuts and geopolitical tensions.
  • Trade and Economic Ties: India’s trade with the Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC) reached USD 161.59 billion in FY 2023–24. The UAE is India’s third-largest trading partner, with exports worth USD 35.6 billion. A proposed India-GCC Free Trade Agreement and operationalization of IMEC can enhance regional integration.
  • Diaspora and Remittances:Over 66% of India’s 1.34 crore NRIs live in Gulf nations. India was the world’s top remittance recipient in 2022, with USD 111 billion, a major share from the Middle East. Labor reforms in the region (e.g., Saudi Arabia’s Nitaqat) influence migrant welfare.
  • Geopolitical and Strategic Autonomy: India balances relations across regional fault lines — Iran-Saudi and Israel-Arab states — while maintaining strategic autonomy. Defense cooperation includes naval exercises (e.g., Al-Mohed Al-Hindi with Saudi Arabia) and connectivity via Chabahar Port in Iran.
  • Food and Maritime Security: The Gulf is a major destination for Indian agricultural exports (e.g., UAE imports worth USD 1.9 billion in FY 2022–23). Strategic waterways like the Red Sea and Arabian Sea are crucial for trade, though increasingly vulnerable to piracy and regional conflict.

IMEC: A Strategic Connectivity Corridor

  • IMECenvisions linking India to Europe through the Middle East via multimodal transport and digital-energy corridors, bypassing the Suez Canal. It aims to counter China’s Belt and Road Initiative (BRI).
  • Key stakeholders include India, UAE, Saudi Arabia, Jordan, Israel, and the EU. The Intergovernmental Framework Agreement (2024) lays the foundation for implementation, targeting USD 600 billion in infrastructure investment by 2027.
  • Objectives include trade facilitation, supply chain diversification, digital connectivity, and green energy collaboration. However, the Israel-Gaza conflict and regional instability have delayed execution.

Challenges

  • Energy volatility due to OPEC+ decisions and Red Sea disruptions.
  • Geopolitical unrest in Yemen, Gaza, and Iran-Israel tensions.
  • Maritime insecurity, with piracy and Houthi attacks raising shipping costs.
  • Labor rights issues, including migrant exploitation.
  • Strategic competition from China, with over USD 273 billion invested in the region since 2005.

Policy Recommendations

  • Co-develop energy infrastructure (e.g., Saudi Aramco’s stake in Indian refineries).
  • Diversify trade via an India-GCC FTA and sectoral cooperation (IT, defense, fintech).
  • Enhance maritime and digital connectivity through IMEC and joint port development.
  • Secure labor migration with skill pacts and expanded protection schemes.
  • Strengthen counter-terrorism and defense cooperation, including intelligence sharing.

Conclusion

India’s West Asia strategy is multifaceted—balancing energy diplomacy, trade, diaspora ties, and strategic connectivity. IMEC offers a transformative opportunity to position India as a central link in global supply chains, but its success depends on stable regional geopolitics and coordinated implementation.

RBI Monetary Policy Committee (MPC) cuts Repo Rate

  • 09 Feb 2025

In News:

In a landmark decision during its February 2025 meeting, the Reserve Bank of India’s (RBI) Monetary Policy Committee (MPC) reduced the repo rate by 25 basis points, from 6.5% to 6.25%, marking the first rate cut in five years (since May 2020). This move follows the Union Government’s recent cut in personal income tax, aimed at boosting consumption.

What is the Monetary Policy Committee (MPC)?

The MPC is a six-member statutory body responsible for setting India’s monetary policy. Its primary objective is price stability while ensuring economic growth. It meets bi-monthly to assess economic indicators and modify key policy rates like the repo rate, which influences overall borrowing and lending costs in the economy.

Key Highlights from the MPC Decision:

Repo Rate Cut:

  • Reduced to 6.25% from 6.5%.
  • Objective: Stimulate credit growth, investment, and consumer demand.
  • Expected Impact: Lower EMIs for borrowers, reduced interest rates on EBLR and MCLR-linked loans.

GDP Growth Outlook (FY26):

  • RBI projects 6.7% GDP growth for FY26.
  • This is slightly higher than the FY25 estimate of 6.4%, and in line with the Economic Survey’s projection of 6.3–6.8%.
  • Growth recovery is attributed to calibrated fiscal consolidation and stable private consumption.

Inflation Projections (CPI-based):

  • FY26 Inflation Estimate: 4.2%
    • Q1: 4.5%
    • Q2: 4.0%
    • Q3: 3.8%
    • Q4: 4.2%
  • CPI inflation had already dropped to 5.22% in December 2024, aided by easing food prices.
  • RBI emphasized continued transmission of past policy measures and food price moderation as drivers of disinflation.

Broader Monetary Policy Context

  • RBI will maintain a “neutral” policy stance to remain flexible amid evolving macroeconomic conditions.
  • RBI Governor Sanjay Malhotra stressed that the inflation-targeting framework has helped stabilize prices, especially post-pandemic.
  • The policy space was created by the simultaneous drop in inflation and moderate growth, allowing support for the economy without derailing price stability.

Cybersecurity & Digital Measures

  • Additional Factor Authentication (AFA) introduced for international digital payments.
  • Launch of exclusive domains:
    • "bank.in" for Indian banks
    • "fin.in" for the wider financial sector

These aim to bolster digital transaction security amid rising cyber fraud.

Forex & External Sector Outlook

  • RBI reiterated that it does not target exchange rate levels, intervening only to curb excessive volatility.
  • Ongoing global challenges include:
    • Strengthening of the US dollar
    • Higher bond yields
    • Geopolitical tensions
    • Threat of trade wars
  • These have led to capital outflows, currency depreciation, and increased financial market volatility.

Conclusion

The RBI’s rate cut signals a strategic shift towards supporting economic growth amid global uncertainties. With a moderate inflation outlook and improving macroeconomic indicators, the decision is expected to boost domestic demand and investment, while reinforcing RBI’s commitment to price and financial stability.

India’s Pursuit of a Sovereign Foundational AI Model

  • 08 Feb 2025

In News:

As artificial intelligence (AI) reshapes global economic, strategic, and technological landscapes, the question of whether India should build its own sovereign foundational AI model has gained prominence. Sovereign AI models—developed, trained, and deployed using domestic infrastructure, datasets, and expertise—are now seen as strategic assets, with countries like the US and China already establishing their own. India, however, remains dependent on foreign AI giants such as OpenAI, Google DeepMind, and Meta.

Why India Needs a Sovereign AI Model

1. Data Sovereignty and Security: India generates one of the world’s largest data pools, including sensitive data from healthcare, finance, and governance. Using foreign-built AI models risks privacy breaches and potential misuse. A homegrown model would ensure control over data and ethical AI deployment.

2. Reducing Foreign Dependence: Sovereign AI is crucial for applications in defense, cybersecurity, and governance, where reliance on foreign technology may undermine strategic autonomy. Sanctions or export controls could otherwise disrupt access to essential technologies like GPUs or software updates.

3. Cultural and Linguistic Alignment: Current global AI models are largely English-centric. A sovereign model trained on Indian languages and datasets would bridge the digital divide and make AI more inclusive. Projects like AI4Bharat’s IndicTrans2 and Sarvam AI’s Sarvam-1, a multilingual model built with Nvidia, exemplify this direction.

4. National Security and Innovation: Sovereign AI is essential in military intelligence, predictive security, and surveillance. It also fosters an innovation ecosystem, generating high-skilled jobs and encouraging academic-industry collaboration.

Challenges in Building Foundational AI Models

1. Infrastructure Gaps: India lacks cutting-edge chip manufacturing capabilities. With no agreements with firms like TSMC, India relies on imports of GPUs and processors, unlike countries developing supercomputers (e.g., Denmark’s Gefion, Japan’s AI Grid).

2. High Development Costs: Training a large AI model can cost millions. DeepSeek V3, for instance, cost $5.6 million for a single run, while India’s annual AI R&D budget remains modest compared to Big Tech’s $80 billion.

3. Fragmented Resources: Subsidized GPUs are spread thin across institutions, diluting their impact. Meta’s Llama 4, for example, used large dedicated clusters—unfeasible under current Indian frameworks.

4. Public R&D Inefficiencies: Bureaucratic red tape discourages risk-taking needed in AI research. Unlike flexible spending in firms like OpenAI, Indian R&D lacks autonomy and long-term funding.

Policy Recommendations and Way Forward

  • Invest in IndiaAI Mission: Develop a national AI infrastructure with over 10,000 GPUs, secure cloud systems, and supercomputing clusters to train and deploy large-scale models.
  • Build DPI for AI Builders: Create datasets, APIs, and platforms to support data annotation, fine-tuning, and delivery in Indian contexts.
  • Adopt a Phased Approach: Focus on sovereign models in sensitive sectors (defense, healthcare) while using global open models for non-critical applications.
  • Promote Public-Private Collaboration: Forge partnerships with companies like Nvidia or OpenAI for technology transfer and joint ventures.
  • Encourage Innovation Under Constraints: India must emulate models like Alibaba or DeepSeek, which succeeded with limited resources and targeted innovations.

Conclusion

Building a sovereign foundational AI model is not merely a technological ambition but a strategic necessity. With coordinated efforts between government, industry, and academia, India can achieve AI self-reliance—ensuring data sovereignty, inclusive growth, and a strong global presence in the AI-driven future.

MSMEs in India’s Economic Growth

  • 07 Feb 2025

In News:

In the Union Budget 2025–26, the Finance Minister proposed a significant policy shift by increasing the investment and turnover limits for MSME classification by 2.5 and 2 times respectively. This move is expected to enhance the growth prospects and scalability of India’s micro, small, and medium enterprises (MSMEs).

Economic Significance:

The MSME sector forms the backbone of the Indian economy, contributing 30% to the GDP and nearly 45% to manufacturing output. With over 1 crore registered units employing 7.5 crore people, it is the largest source of non-agricultural employment in the country. It plays a pivotal role in inclusive development, offering livelihood opportunities to the rural, urban poor, and semi-skilled workforce.

The formalization drive has been significant, with over 4 crore MSMEs registered on the Udyam portal by March 2024. Key schemes like PM Vishwakarma Yojana (?13,000 crore) and Mudra Yojana (?5.41 lakh crore disbursed in FY24) have supported artisans and first-time entrepreneurs, particularly women and marginalized communities.

Boost to Trade and Innovation:

MSMEs account for 45.73% of India’s total exports in sectors like textiles, leather, and engineering goods. Their integration into Global Value Chains (GVCs) is being facilitated by reforms in trade logistics, the GeM portal, and PLI schemes. Digital transformation is advancing rapidly, with 72% MSME transactions now digital, supported by platforms like ONDC and the RBI’s Public Tech Platform.

Women and Rural Empowerment:

Women entrepreneurs constitute 20.5% of Udyam registrations, and 68% of Mudra loans benefit them. MSMEs are also catalyzing rural industrialization by promoting agro-processing and curbing rural-urban migration through schemes like the SRI Fund and Animal Husbandry Credit Guarantee Scheme.

Key Challenges:

Despite their potential, MSMEs face critical bottlenecks:

  • Credit access remains limited; only 20% of units access formal finance. Payment delays amounting to ?10.7 lakh crore (2022) hinder working capital.
  • Regulatory burdens, inadequate infrastructure, and poor digital skills further constrain productivity.
  • Low awareness of schemes and limited integration into global ESG standards affect competitiveness.
  • The sector remains largely informal, weakening labor rights and policy outreach.

Recent Reforms & Recommendations:

To unlock MSMEs’ potential, a multi-pronged reform strategy is underway:

  • Credit Measures: Promotion of cash-flow based lending, expansion of CGTMSE, Vyapar Credit Cards, and enhanced TReDS-GeM integration.
  • Ease of Doing Business: Single-window clearances, self-certification, and stronger MSME facilitation councils.
  • Digital & Skill Upgradation: Launch of Digital MSME 2.0, apprenticeship hubs, and innovation incubators.
  • Market Access: Expansion of cluster-based models, branding support, and ONDC-GeM integration.
  • Green MSMEs: ESG-linked credit, circular economy incentives, and green certifications.
  • Formalization Push: Linking benefits to Udyam registration, backed by SIDBI-led equity support.

Conclusion:
MSMEs are central to India’s vision of a $5 trillion economy and Viksit Bharat by 2047. With increased investment thresholds, focused policy interventions, and digital empowerment, India can build a resilient, inclusive, and globally competitive MSME ecosystem.

Mental Health in India: Budget 2025–26

  • 06 Feb 2025

In News:

The Union Budget 2025–26 marks a pivotal step towards strengthening mental health infrastructure in India. An allocation of ?99,858.56 crore to the Ministry of Health and Family Welfare (MoHFW) highlights the government’s recognition of health, including mental health, as a key pillar of national development.

Key Budgetary Allocations for Mental Health (2025–26)

  • National Tele Mental Health Programme (NTMHP): Allocated ?79.6 crore to expand access to mental health services across the country.
  • National Institute of Mental Health and Neurosciences (NIMHANS): Receives support to enhance research and treatment capacity.
  • District Mental Health Programme: Implemented in 767 districts, providing training and outpatient services.
  • Ayushman Arogya Mandirs: Over 1.73 lakh SHCs and PHCs are being upgraded to offer mental health services under comprehensive primary care.

Mental Health in India: Status and Burden

  • As per WHO, mental health is the ability to realize one’s potential, cope with stress, work productively, and contribute to the community.
  • India's Burden:
    • 15% of adult Indians experience mental disorders (National Survey).
    • Mental morbidity is highest in urban metros (13.5%), followed by rural areas (6.9%) and non-metro urban zones (4.3%).
  • Global Burden (2019): Around 970 million people globally suffered from mental disorders, notably anxiety and depression.
  • Treatment Gap: Estimated at 70% to 92%, particularly acute among blue-collar workers.
  • Economic Impact: Mental health disorders result in significant productivity losses, often surpassing the direct cost of care.

Challenges in Mental Health Care in India

1. Budgetary and Policy Limitations

  • The National Mental Health Programme (NMHP) faces funding ambiguities, often subsumed under broader health allocations.
  • Limited enforcement of Mental Healthcare Act, 2017, despite mental health being a statutory right. Over 11 crore Indians suffer from mental disorders, yet 80% do not seek help.

2. Exclusion in Labour Laws

  • The Occupational Safety, Health and Working Conditions Code (OSHWC), 2020, primarily covers physical safety. Mental health is not explicitly recognized.
  • Phrases like “as far as reasonably practicable” limit employers’ obligations.
  • The Code on Social Security (CSC), 2020, does not list mental strain as an occupational disease, making compensation for stress-induced conditions difficult.

3. Neglect of Blue-Collar Mental Health

  • Mental health risks—long hours, poor conditions, job insecurity—affect blue-collar workers disproportionately.
  • Workplace mental health programs (e.g., Infosys HALE, TCS EAP) are mainly for white-collar employees.
  • Tele-MANAS, a government mental health helpline, requires voluntary calls. Low awareness and stigma among blue-collar workers dilute its effectiveness.

Policy and Structural Reforms Needed

  • Legislative Frameworks:
    • Amend OSHWC and CSC to explicitly include mental well-being and stress-related injuries as compensable conditions.
    • Update the Third Schedule of the CSC to include mental health conditions, reducing dependence on case law.
  • Awareness and Education:
    • Launch mandatory employer-led awareness campaigns on programs like Tele-MANAS and Manodarpan.
    • Community-based programs for early detection, support, and referral of mental health disorders.
  • Inclusive and Tripartite Approach:
    • Integrate employers, blue-collar workers, and mental health professionals into a unified framework under the new Labour Codes.
    • Incorporate mental health indicators into occupational safety audits.
  • Institutional Strengthening:
    • Increase capacity-building efforts by training frontline health workers, general physicians, and non-specialist cadres in mental healthcare.
    • Establish Centres of Excellence for mental health training and research.

Global and National Initiatives

  • WHO Comprehensive Mental Health Action Plan (2013–2030): Focuses on integrating mental health into primary care and strengthening community-level interventions.
  • Manodarpan Initiative: Aims at student mental health support under Atmanirbhar Bharat.
  • Kiran Helpline: Government-run suicide prevention helpline for crisis support.
  • Tele-MANAS Cells: 53 centers operational in 36 States/UTs, enhancing digital mental health care access.

Conclusion and Way Forward

The 2025–26 Budget reflects a progressive approach to mental health, particularly through investments in tele-counselling, primary care, and institutional support. However, significant gaps remain in policy, especially in addressing the mental health needs of blue-collar workers.

To transform “Satyamev Jayate” to “Shramev Jayate,” India must:

  • Institutionalize rights-based mental health protection in labour legislation.
  • Close the treatment gap through universal access and community-level awareness.
  • Recognize mental health as integral to human capital and national productivity.

Only a comprehensive, inclusive, and rights-oriented approach will ensure mental health equity in India’s development journey.

RBI’s Liquidity Infusion of ?1.5 Lakh Crore

  • 04 Feb 2025

In News:

In January 2025, the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) announced its largest monetary easing since the COVID-19 pandemic, unveiling a multi-pronged plan to inject over ?1.5 lakh crore into the money markets.

This move aims to address liquidity shortfalls caused by RBI’s forex interventions and signal possible easing in the upcoming monetary policy review.

Context: Why Liquidity Infusion Was Needed

  • Forex Intervention: RBI sold over $50 billion from its foreign exchange reserves to stabilise the rupee, in response to large-scale equity sell-offs by Foreign Institutional Investors (FIIs).
  • Impact: These interventions reduced rupee liquidity, tightened short-term interest rates, and raised borrowing costs.
  • Liquidity Deficit: Market estimates pegged the shortfall at ?3 lakh crore.

Key Liquidity Measures Announced by RBI

  • Government Bond Buy-Back: ?60,000 Crore
    • Conducted in three tranches on January 30, February 13, and February 20, 2025.
    • Objective: To inject liquidity into the banking system by repurchasing government securities before maturity.
  • 56-Day Variable Rate Repo Auction: ?50,000 Crore
    • Scheduled for February 7, 2025.
    • Enables banks to borrow short-term funds by offering government securities as collateral at a market-determined interest rate.
  • USD/INR Buy-Sell Swap Auction: $5 Billion
    • A six-month forex swap in which RBI borrows dollars in exchange for rupees and agrees to buy them back later.
    • Helps stabilize the rupee without draining rupee liquidity.

Significance of the Measures

  • Monetary Transmission: With adequate liquidity, any potential repo rate cut will be more effectively transmitted through lower lending rates, boosting investment and consumption.
  • Financial Stability: By calming money markets and moderating borrowing costs, RBI strengthens confidence amid global uncertainties.
  • Rupee Management without Liquidity Squeeze: The forex swap allows rupee liquidity to remain intact while addressing exchange rate volatility.

Governor’s Focus Areas:

In a meeting with private sector bank heads ahead of the February monetary policy review, RBI Governor Sanjay Malhotra highlighted the following priorities:

  • Financial Stability & Inclusion
  • Enhanced Digital Literacy and Credit Access
  • Improved Customer Service & Grievance Redressal
  • Cybersecurity & IT Risk Management
  • Monitoring of Third-party Service Providers
  • Countering Rising Digital Fraud

Union Budget 2025–26

  • 03 Feb 2025

In News:

Union Minister for Finance and Corporate Affairs Smt Nirmala Sitharaman presented Union Budget 2025-26 in the Parliament.

Key Highlights:

Fiscal Policy and Macroeconomic Indicators

  • Total Expenditure: ?50.65 lakh crore
  • Total Receipts (excl. borrowings): ?34.96 lakh crore
  • Fiscal Deficit: 4.4% of GDP
  • Gross Market Borrowing: ?14.82 lakh crore
  • Capital Expenditure: ?11.21 lakh crore (3.1% of GDP)

Agriculture and Allied Sectors

  • Prime Minister Dhan-Dhaanya Krishi Yojana: 100 low-productivity districts targeted; 1.7 crore farmers to benefit.
  • Mission for Aatmanirbharta in Pulses: 6-year mission on Tur, Urad, and Masoor; NAFED/NCCF to procure for 4 years.
  • Vegetables & Fruits Program: Comprehensive initiative for production, pricing, processing, and logistics.
  • Makhana Board: New board in Bihar for production, value addition, and export.
  • National Mission on High Yielding Seeds: To commercialize over 100 high-yielding seed varieties.
  • Cotton Mission: 5-year initiative to boost productivity and Extra Long Staple (ELS) varieties.
  • Fisheries: New EEZ and High Seas Framework focusing on Islands.
  • Credit through KCC: Loan limit increased from ?3 lakh to ?5 lakh.
  • Urea Plant in Assam: New plant at Namrup (12.7 lakh MT annual capacity).

MSMEs and Startups

  • MSME Classification: Investment and turnover limits doubled (2.5x & 2x).
  • Credit Cards for Micro Units: ?5 lakh limit; 10 lakh cards in year one.
  • ?10,000 Cr Fund of Funds for Startups
  • First-Time Entrepreneurs Scheme: Loans up to ?2 crore for 5 lakh women, SC/ST entrepreneurs.
  • Footwear & Leather Sector Scheme: Aims ?4 lakh crore turnover and 22 lakh jobs.
  • Toy Manufacturing Support: High-quality, eco-friendly toy ecosystem.
  • Food Tech Institute: To be established in Bihar.
  • National Manufacturing Mission: Across small, medium, and large units.

Infrastructure and Investment

  • PPP Pipeline: 3-year project pipeline to be announced.
  • ?1.5 lakh crore 50-year interest-free loans to states for CapEx.
  • Urban Challenge Fund: ?1 lakh crore outlay; ?10,000 crore for FY26.
  • Asset Monetization Plan 2025–30: Capital recycling worth ?10 lakh crore.
  • Jal Jeevan Mission: Extended to 2028 with enhanced outlay.
  • UDAN 2.0: Targeting 120 new destinations, 4 crore passengers in 10 years.
  • Maritime Development Fund: ?25,000 crore; up to 49% govt contribution.
  • Nuclear Energy Mission: ?20,000 crore outlay for Small Modular Reactors (SMRs).
  • Greenfield Airports: Announced for Bihar.

Welfare and Social Security

  • Saksham Anganwadi & Poshan 2.0: Enhanced nutritional cost norms.
  • Medical Education: 10,000 new MBBS seats; 75,000 in 5 years.
  • Day Care Cancer Centres: In all district hospitals; 200 in FY26.
  • PM SVANidhi Revamp: ?30,000 UPI-linked credit cards.
  • Online Platform Workers: E-Shram ID, PMJAY coverage.
  • Urban Livelihood Scheme: For sustainable urban worker incomes.

Education and Skilling

  • 50,000 Atal Tinkering Labs: Govt schools in 5 years.
  • Bharatiya Bhasha Pustak Scheme: Digital books in Indian languages.
  • National Skilling Centres of Excellence: With global partners.
  • AI in Education: Centre of Excellence with ?500 crore outlay.
  • IIT Expansion: Additional capacity for 6,500 students.

Innovation and R&D

  • ?20,000 crore Innovation Fund (private-led R&D).
  • Deep Tech Fund of Funds: For next-gen startups.
  • PM Research Fellowships: 10,000 fellowships with higher support.
  • 2nd Gene Bank: 10 lakh germplasm lines for food security.
  • National Geospatial Mission
  • Gyan Bharatam Mission: Conservation of 1 crore+ manuscripts.

Exports and Trade

  • Export Promotion Mission: With ministerial and sectoral targets.
  • BharatTradeNet (BTN): Unified platform for trade finance and docs.
  • GCC Framework: Promote Global Capability Centres in Tier-2 cities.

Financial Sector Reforms

  • FDI in Insurance: Raised from 74% to 100% for domestic investment.
  • NaBFID Credit Enhancement Facility: For infra bonds.
  • Grameen Credit Score: For SHGs and rural borrowers.
  • Investment Friendliness Index: To rank states in 2025.
  • Jan Vishwas Bill 2.0: Decriminalization of 100+ provisions.
  • Tonnage Tax Extended: To inland vessels.
  • Startups: Tax benefit eligibility extended to incorporation by 1 April 2030.

Taxation Reforms

Direct Taxes

  • No Personal Tax: Income up to ?12 lakh (?12.75 lakh for salaried) under new regime.
  • Revised Tax Slabs (New Regime):
    • 0–4L: Nil | 4–8L: 5% | 8–12L: 10%
    • 12–16L: 15% | 16–20L: 20% | 20–24L: 25% | 24L+: 30%
  • Standard Deduction: ?75,000
  • Compliance Relief: Trusts registration extended to 10 years.
  • TDS/TCS Rationalization: Fewer thresholds, higher limits for senior citizens and rent.
  • Tax Certainty: Safe harbour rules, startup extensions, presumptive taxation for electronics.

Indirect Taxes

  • Tariff Rationalization: Only 8 remaining tariff rates.
  • Customs Relief: ?2,600 crore forgone, key lifeline drugs exempted.
  • Support to Domestic Manufacturing:
    • EV/mobile battery manufacturing: 63 capital goods exempted
    • Ships: BCD exemption extended for 10 years
    • Marine, leather, textiles: Several BCD reductions/exemptions
  • Voluntary Compliance Scheme: Without penalty for post-clearance corrections.

Geo-Economic Fragmentation (GEF)

  • 02 Feb 2025

In News:

Geo-economic fragmentation refers to a policy-driven reversal of global economic integration, increasingly shaped by geopolitical alignments. It signifies a shift from globalization to strategically-driven economic blocs, where nations prioritize political alliances over market efficiency.

Key Characteristics

  • Emergence of friend-shoring, re-shoring, and economic nationalism.
  • Fragmentation of trade, capital flows, FDI, and migration.
  • Retreat from multilateralism, with institutions like the WTO and IMF under stress.
  • Strategic use of environmental, labor, and social standards by developed countries to impose uniform regulations, causing tensions.

Globalization to Fragmentation: Statistical Evidence

  • Trade-to-GDP Ratio: Increased from 39% (1980) to 60% (2012); now threatened by rising protectionism.
  • FDI Inflows: Rose from $54 billion (1980) to $1.5 trillion (2019); now increasingly concentrated among like-minded countries.
  • Global Economy: Expanded from $11 trillion (1980) to over $100 trillion (2022).
  • Trade Restrictions (WTO Report):
    • 2023–24: 169 new measures covering $887.7 billion in trade.
    • 2022–23: Covered $337.1 billion — shows a dramatic rise in protectionism.
  • Over 24,000 new trade and investment restrictions imposed globally between 2020–24.

IMF on Costs of GEF

  • Trade fragmentation could cause 0.2% to 7% GDP losses, especially for developing countries.
  • Current fragmentation is more costly than Cold War era, as trade now constitutes 45% of global GDP (vs. 16% then).
  • Less trade = less knowledge diffusion, innovation, and productivity gains.

Strategic Impacts: Global Supply Chains

China’s Dominance

  • 80% of global battery manufacturing.
  • 80% of solar panel components.
  • 60% of wind turbine capacity.
  • 70% of global rare earth mineral processing.
  • Dominates EV supply chains, critical mineral refining, and clean energy manufacturing.

FDI Realignment

  • FDI is increasingly relocating from China to India, Vietnam, Mexico, etc.
  • Friend-shoring reduces capital access for emerging markets.
  • Emerging economies face reduced FDI, slower growth, and technological decoupling.

India’s Strategic Response: Deregulation and Internal Growth

Policy Recommendations (Economic Survey 2024–25)

  • Amplify deregulation to lower compliance costs and boost entrepreneurship.
  • Empower SMEs to withstand global shocks and strengthen domestic manufacturing.
  • Encourage inter-state learning for best practices in economic governance.
  • Redouble efforts to boost exports and foreign investment amidst global volatility.

Rationale

  • With the decline of global cooperation, internal engines of growth become crucial.
  • Deregulation can unleash innovation, enhance productivity, and ensure resilient growth.
  • India's response must be strategic, systematic, and state-inclusive to capitalize on this global transition.

Economic Survey 2024–25

  • 01 Feb 2025

In News:

  • Released on 31st January 2025, a day before the Union Budget.
  • Prepared by the Department of Economic Affairs, Ministry of Finance.
  • Provides a comprehensive review of India’s macroeconomic trends, sectoral developments, and key policy challenges.
  • Real GDP growth estimated at 6.4% in FY25 (close to decadal average); projected between 6.3–6.8% in FY26.
  • Reflects India's resilience amidst global slowdown, supply chain disruptions, and geopolitical uncertainties.

Sector-wise Performance

Agriculture:

  • Expected growth: 3.8% in FY25.
  • Record Kharif foodgrain production: 1647.05 LMT (+5.7% YoY).
  • Growth driven by horticulture, livestock, and fisheries.
  • Supported by above-normal monsoons and robust reservoir levels.

Industry:

  • Estimated growth: 6.2% in FY25.
  • Construction, utilities, and mining contribute significantly.
  • Challenges: Sluggish export demand, climate disruptions, and festival timing variations.
  • Manufacturing PMI remains in the expansionary zone.

Services:

  • Robust growth: 7.2% in FY25.
  • Services exports up by 12.8% (April–Nov FY25) vs 5.7% in FY24.
  • Growth led by finance, real estate, public administration, and professional services.

Inflation and Price Stability

  • Retail inflation eased to 4.9% (Apr–Dec 2024) from 5.4% (FY24).
  • Food inflation remains high at 8.4%, driven by pulses and vegetables.
  • CPI expected to align with RBI's 4% target by FY26.

Investment and Infrastructure

  • Capital Expenditure grew 8.2% YoY (Jul–Nov 2024); sustained increase since FY21.
  • Infrastructure momentum:
    • 2031 km railways commissioned (Apr–Nov 2024).
    • 17 Vande Bharat trains introduced.
    • Port efficiency improved; container turnaround time reduced from 48.1 to 30.4 hours.
  • Renewable energy capacity rose by 15.8% YoY (Dec 2024).

External Sector and Trade

  • Overall exports grew by 6% (Apr–Dec 2024); merchandise exports up 1.6%.
  • Services exports surged; India now 7th largest globally.
  • FDI inflows: $55.6 billion (Apr–Nov FY25), +17.9% YoY.
  • Forex reserves at $640.3 billion (Dec 2024), covering 10.9 months of imports and 90% of external debt.
  • CAD contained at 1.2% of GDP in Q2 FY25.
  • Strong remittance inflows support BOP stability.

Fiscal Health

  • Gross Tax Revenue rose 10.7% YoY (Apr–Nov 2024).
  • Stable deficit indicators allowed for developmental expenditure.
  • State revenue expenditure grew 12%, with subsidies increasing by 25.7%.

Banking, Credit, and Financial Markets

  • Gross NPAs dropped to 2.6% (lowest in 12 years).
  • CRAR of scheduled banks at 16.7% (Sept 2024), well above regulatory norms.
  • Stock market cap to GDP ratio: 136%, higher than China (65%) and Brazil (37%).
  • Credit-GDP gap reduced to -0.3% in Q1 FY25 (from -10.3% in Q1 FY23).

Employment and Labour Market

  • Unemployment rate declined to 3.2% (2023-24) from 6.0% (2017-18).
  • Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR) and Worker-Population Ratio (WPR) improved.
  • Emphasis on AI skill development to future-proof labour markets.

Health, Education & Social Sector

  • Government health expenditure rose from 29% to 48% of total health spending (FY15–FY22).
  • Out-of-pocket expenditure dropped from 62.6% to 39.4% in the same period.
  • Education reforms aligned with NEP 2020 via programs like Samagra Shiksha, DIKSHA, PM SHRI, etc.
  • Social services spending grew at 15% CAGR (FY21–FY25).
  • Decline in Gini coefficient indicates improving consumption equality.

Policy Recommendations and Reform Agenda

  • Deregulation as central theme to boost productivity and EoDB.
  • Advocates Ease of Doing Business 2.0, led by states, targeting:
    • Simplification of compliance norms.
    • Risk-based regulation.
    • Reduction in tariffs and licensing hurdles.
  • ?50,000 crore Self-Reliant India Fund launched for MSME equity support.
  • Need for long-term infrastructure investment to achieve Viksit Bharat@2047.

Global Backdrop

  • Global GDP grew by 3.3% in 2023, with an average 3.2% growth projected over next five years (IMF).
  • Weak global manufacturing; services sector remains stronger.
  • Risks: Geopolitical tensions, trade policy fragmentation, energy transition dependence on China.

Way Forward

  • Balanced outlook for FY26 with upside from:
    • Strong rural demand.
    • Agricultural recovery.
    • Easing food inflation.
  • Challenges include:
    • Geopolitical tensions.
    • Global trade and commodity price volatility.
    • Delay in private investment materialisation.

Union Budget: understanding its formulation and implications

  • 29 Jan 2025

What is the Union Budget?

The Union Budget, referred to as the Annual Financial Statement under Article 112 of the Constitution, outlines the government's estimated receipts and expenditure for a financial year. It serves as a crucial instrument for economic policy and governance.

The Budget Division of the Department of Economic Affairs under the Ministry of Finance is responsible for preparing the Union Budget.

Key Components of the Budget

1. Expenditure

Expenditure is classified on the basis of:

  • Asset Creation and Liability Reduction:
    • Capital Expenditure: Increases assets or reduces liabilities (e.g., infrastructure, hospitals).
    • Revenue Expenditure: Does not create assets (e.g., salaries, subsidies, interest payments).
  • Sectoral Impact:
    • General Services: Administrative functions, defence, interest payments.
    • Economic Services: Agriculture, transport, rural development, etc.
    • Social Services: Education, health, welfare.
    • Grants-in-Aid and Contributions.

Development Expenditure = Economic Services + Social Services, and it too can be capital or revenue in nature.

2. Receipts

Government receipts are classified into:

  • Revenue Receipts: Do not create liabilities (e.g., tax and non-tax revenues).
  • Non-Debt Capital Receipts: Do not involve liabilities (e.g., loan recovery, disinvestment).
  • Debt-Creating Capital Receipts: Involve future liabilities (e.g., borrowings).

3. Deficit Indicators

  • Fiscal Deficit = Total Expenditure - (Revenue Receipts + Non-Debt Capital Receipts)
  • Primary Deficit = Fiscal Deficit - Interest Payments
  • Revenue Deficit = Revenue Expenditure - Revenue Receipts

Fiscal deficit reflects the net borrowing requirement of the government.

Implications of the Budget on the Economy

1. Aggregate Demand

  • Government Expenditure boosts aggregate demand.
  • Tax and Non-Tax Revenue reduces disposable income, thereby contracting demand.

Policy Interpretations:

  • Expansionary Fiscal Policy: Rise in expenditure-GDP ratio, increase in fiscal deficit.
  • Contractionary Fiscal Policy: Increase in revenue-GDP ratio, reduction in fiscal deficit.

2. Income Distribution

  • Revenue expenditure like food subsidies or MGNREGA supports lower-income groups.
  • Corporate tax concessions benefit businesses. Both may increase deficits but differ in their distributional impact.

Fiscal Rules and Their Role

Fiscal rules define policy targets to maintain macroeconomic stability. They guide the government’s borrowing and spending behaviour.

Current Framework in India

India’s fiscal framework is guided by the N.K. Singh Committee Report, which recommended:

  1. Stock Target: Maintain a specific Debt-to-GDP ratio.
  2. Flow Target: Limit Fiscal Deficit-to-GDP ratio.
  3. Composition Target: Maintain Revenue Deficit-to-GDP ratio.

Challenges in Implementation

  • India’s tax rates are largely fixed and not adjusted frequently.
  • To meet fiscal targets, the government primarily adjusts expenditure.
  • This rigidity may constrain the ability to undertake expansionary fiscal policy, especially during economic downturns or rising unemployment.

Need for Re-examination

Given persistent issues like low growth and unemployment, current fiscal rules may hinder responsive policy action. A flexible and context-specific fiscal framework is essential for ensuring both macroeconomic stability and inclusive development.

Conclusion

The Union Budget is not merely a financial statement but a tool of economic management. A nuanced understanding of its formulation, components, and policy implications is vital for evaluating government priorities and their impact on the economy and society.

Addressing Environmental Challenges and Strengthening Regulations in India

  • 28 Jan 2025

In News:

India's recent coal mining tragedy in Dima Hasao, Assam, underscores the nation's ongoing struggle with illegal and hazardous rat-hole mining, despite the National Green Tribunal's 2014 ban. This persistent exploitation, driven by industrial demand for coal, highlights the gap between environmental regulations and their enforcement, revealing a broader issue of balancing economic growth with environmental protection. As India strives to meet ambitious climate goals and sustain economic development, strengthening environmental regulations becomes critical.

Current Environmental Regulations in India

India has established a strong legal framework to protect its environment, grounded in the Indian Constitution. Articles 48A and 51A(g) direct the state and citizens to safeguard the environment, while Article 21 ensures the right to a clean and healthy environment, as interpreted by the Supreme Court. Key pollution control laws include:

  • Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974: Regulates water pollution and establishes pollution control boards at the national and state levels.
  • Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981: Controls air pollution from industrial emissions and vehicles.
  • Environment (Protection) Act, 1986: Provides overarching powers for environmental protection.
  • Plastic Waste Management Rules, 2016: Regulates plastic waste disposal and bans single-use plastics.

Other significant laws focus on forest and wildlife protection, including the Indian Forest Act, 1927, and the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, along with the National Green Tribunal (NGT) Act, 2010, which ensures quick resolution of environmental disputes.

Key Issues with Enforcement

  • Despite these stringent regulations, enforcement remains weak due to institutional limitations. Many industrial units fail to meet environmental standards, with regulatory bodies underfunded and understaffed. For example, pollution control boards in states like Uttar Pradesh and Bihar are plagued by staffing shortages, hampering their ability to monitor pollution effectively.
  • Inadequate public participation and insufficient technology adoption further exacerbate these challenges.
  • The Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) process, often bypassed or diluted, leads to development projects being approved without full consideration of their environmental impacts, particularly in ecologically sensitive areas.

Weak Enforcement and Conflict between Development and Conservation

The tension between development and conservation is evident in policies that relax environmental regulations for economic growth. The Forest (Conservation) Amendment Act, 2023, prioritizes infrastructure projects over forest preservation, undermining ecological conservation. Moreover, the rapid urbanization of cities like Gurugram and Faridabad has led to large-scale deforestation and a reduction in natural conservation zones, worsening air and water quality.

Strengthening Environmental Regulations

To address these challenges, India needs to strengthen its environmental regulatory mechanisms:

  • Enhance Enforcement: Adequate funding, skilled personnel, and advanced technology, such as AI-based pollution monitoring and drone surveillance, are essential to improve compliance.
  • EIA Reforms: The EIA process should be made more transparent and participatory, ensuring that marginalized communities are included in decision-making.
  • Promote Clean Energy: Expanding subsidies for renewable energy and encouraging industries to adopt green technologies will help reduce reliance on fossil fuels.
  • Circular Economy: Encouraging industries to adopt recycling and upcycling practices can minimize waste and reduce resource extraction.
  • Strengthen Local Involvement: Empowering local communities through decentralization under the Forest Rights Act will ensure more inclusive environmental governance.

Conclusion

India’s environmental challenges require a balanced approach, integrating sustainable development with robust environmental protections. Strengthening regulatory enforcement, reforming the EIA process, and fostering community-led conservation are essential to aligning economic growth with environmental sustainability. By addressing these gaps, India can better navigate its path toward achieving both its development goals and climate commitments.

India-Indonesia Relations

  • 27 Jan 2025

In News:

The President of Indonesia, visited India as the Chief Guest for the 76th Republic Day in January 2025. This marked the 75th anniversary of diplomatic ties, reaffirming the commitment to deepen cooperation in economic, strategic, cultural, and defense domains.

Historical Foundations

  • Ancient Civilizational Links: Trade and cultural exchanges date back to the 2nd century BCE, reflected in the influence of Hinduism and Buddhism on Indonesian society (e.g., Ramayana, Mahabharata, Borobudur, Prambanan).
  • Modern Diplomatic Ties:
    • Formalized in 1950, with a Treaty of Friendship in 1951.
    • Collaborated in the 1955 Bandung Conference and co-founded the Non-Aligned Movement (1961).
    • Indonesia’s first President Sukarno was the Guest of Honour at India’s first Republic Day in 1950.
  • Cold War and Beyond:
    • Relations cooled in the 1960s but revived in the 1980s.
    • The 1991 'Look East' Policy and the 2014 'Act East' Policy revitalized ties.
    • Strategic Partnership in 2005; upgraded to a Comprehensive Strategic Partnership in 2018.

Key Pillars of Cooperation

  • Economic and Trade Relations
    • Trade Volume: Reached USD 38.8 billion (2022–23), targeted to increase to USD 50 billion by 2025.
    • Key Imports: India imports coal, palm oil, and nickel.
    • Investment: Indian investments in Indonesia total USD 1.56 billion in infrastructure, textiles, and energy.
  • New Developments:
    • MoU on Local Currency Settlement Systems to reduce dependency on USD.
    • Focus on resolving trade barriers via forums like WGTI and BMTF.
    • Cooperation in critical minerals like nickel and bauxite.
    • BPCL to invest USD 121 million in the Nunukan gas block.
  • Military Exercises: Garuda Shakti (Army), Samudra Shakti (Navy), and participation in Milan, Komodo, Super Garuda Shield, etc.
  • Key Agreements:
    • 2018 Defense Cooperation Agreement.
    • White Shipping Information Exchange (WSIE).
    • Proposal for Bilateral Maritime Dialogue and Cyber Security Dialogue.
    • Joint vision on maritime cooperation under SAGAR (Security and Growth for All in the Region).
    • BrahMos Deal: Talks underway for Indonesia’s acquisition of BrahMos missiles (~USD 450 million).
  • Cultural Diplomacy: Shared heritage of Hindu-Buddhist traditions; India assisting in restoring Prambanan temple.
  • Tourism & Connectivity: Direct flights since 2023; India is the second-largest source of tourists to Bali.
  • New Initiatives:
    • Cultural Exchange Programme (2025–2028).
    • India reaffirmed the Kashi Cultural Pathway for heritage restoration and repatriation of artifacts.
  • Science, Technology, and Space
    • ISRO supports Indonesia’s satellite ambitions; agreement on Biak Tracking Station.
    • Renewed MoU on STEM cooperation.
    • Areas of collaboration: Quantum tech, high-performance computing, and digital public infrastructure.
  • Energy and Health Security
    • Collaboration on biofuels under the Global Biofuels Alliance.
    • Joint initiatives on mid-day meals and public distribution systems.
    • MoUs on digital health, capacity building, and traditional medicine.

Multilateral and Regional Cooperation

  • ASEAN & Indo-Pacific: Commitment to ASEAN centrality and cooperation through IPOI, India-Indonesia-Australia Trilateral, and ASEAN-India outlook.
  • Global Platforms: Collaboration in BRICS, G20, IORA, and advocacy for the Global South.
  • Climate & Disaster Resilience:
    • Joint efforts under CDRI.
    • Indonesia invited to the International Solar Alliance and Big Cat Alliance.

Key Challenges

  • Trade Imbalance: Heavy reliance on limited imports (coal, palm oil); imbalance persists as Indonesia’s trade with China is far greater (~USD 139 billion).
  • Bureaucratic & Regulatory Barriers: Slow progress on infrastructure and investment due to permit and regulatory issues.
  • Geopolitical Pressures: Indo-Pacific instability and China's expanding influence pose strategic challenges.
  • Logistical Constraints: Inadequate connectivity infrastructure hinders deeper integration.

Way Forward

  • Trade Diversification: Include sectors like tech, agriculture, and green energy.
  • Defense Deepening: Expand joint exercises, maritime patrols, and intelligence-sharing.
  • Enhance Connectivity: Boost air, sea, and digital linkages for trade and tourism.
  • Green Collaboration: Advance renewable energy and sustainable mining ventures.
  • Cultural & Educational Engagement: Promote student exchanges, scholarships (e.g., ITEC), and diaspora involvement.

Conclusion

India and Indonesia share deep-rooted civilizational links and are strategically aligned in the Indo-Pacific. Their evolving Comprehensive Strategic Partnership encompasses trade, defense, technology, and cultural diplomacy. Strengthening this partnership will not only boost bilateral growth but also ensure a stable, multipolar, and cooperative regional order.

External Commercial Borrowings (ECBs)

  • 25 Jan 2025

In News:

A recent State Bank of India (SBI) report highlights the evolving trends in investment activity and the increasing importance of External Commercial Borrowings (ECBs) in financing India's economic growth. It also reflects rising private sector participation and a robust capital formation trend.

Investment Trends in India:

  • Total Investment Announcements reached ?32.01 lakh crore during April–December 2024 (9MFY25), up 39% from the same period in FY24.
  • The private sector accounted for 70% of investments in 9MFY25, up from 56% in FY24, indicating rising business confidence.
  • Gross block of Indian corporates rose to ?106.5 lakh crore (March 2024), from ?73.94 lakh crore in March 2020—an addition of over ?8 lakh crore annually.
  • Capital Work in Progress stood at ?13.63 lakh crore, reflecting ongoing infrastructure and industrial projects.
  • Household Net Financial Savings (HNFS) improved to 5.3% of GDP in FY24 from 5.0% in FY23.
  • Investment-to-GDP ratio improved, with:
    • Government investment at 4.1% of GDP (FY23) — highest since FY12.
    • Private corporate investment rising to 11.9% in FY23, projected to reach 12.5% in FY24.

What are External Commercial Borrowings (ECBs)?

ECBs refer to loans raised by Indian entities from foreign lenders, including commercial banks, export credit agencies, and institutional investors. These borrowings are regulated by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) and used for purposes like capital expansion, modernization, and infrastructure development.

Current Status of ECBs (as of Sept–Nov 2024):

  • Outstanding ECBs stood at $190.4 billion (Sept 2024).
    • Private sector share: 63% (~$97.6 billion).
    • Public sector share: 37% (~$55.5 billion).
  • Of the total, non-Rupee and non-FDI ECBs accounted for $154.9 billion.
  • ECBs registered (April–Nov 2024): $33.8 billion, mainly for capital goods import, local capex, and new projects.
  • Cost of ECBs declined to:
    • 6.6% average during April–November 2024.
    • 5.8% in November 2024, down by 71 basis points from the previous month.
  • Hedging practices: Private companies hedge about 74% of their ECB exposure, essential for managing currency risk.

Why Are ECBs Important for India?

  • Bridging Capital Gaps: Domestic markets may not meet the capital needs of large projects.
  • Lower Interest Rates: ECBs often offer cheaper financing than domestic loans.
  • Infrastructure Financing: Key source of funds for sectors needing long-term investment.
  • Foreign Exchange Access: Supports imports, modernization, and technology adoption.
  • Private Sector Expansion: Enables firms to grow, diversify, and remain globally competitive.

Challenges and Risks:

  • Currency Risk: Rupee depreciation can raise repayment costs.
  • Interest Rate Risk: Linked to global rates (e.g., LIBOR/SOFR), which can rise unpredictably.
  • Hedging Costs: Though necessary, hedging adds to borrowing costs.
  • Global Dependency: Exposure to international financial volatility.
  • Regulatory Constraints: RBI norms on end-use, maturity, and cost ceilings can reduce flexibility.
  • Over-Borrowing Risk: Mismanagement can lead to unsustainable debt levels and strain forex reserves.

Clarification on ECB Liability Data:

  • Some media reports mistakenly cited India’s ECB stock as $273 billion.
  • The actual ECBs, as per RBI (Sept 2024), stand at $190.4 billion.
  • The inflated figure includes $72 billion in FPI (Debt), which should not be classified as ECBs.

Way Forward:

  • Regulatory Refinement: Simplify ECB rules for strategic sectors and long-term projects.
  • Encourage Hedging: Make risk management more affordable and accessible.
  • Prudent Borrowing: Promote ECBs for infrastructure, exports, and modernization rather than working capital.
  • Monitoring and Oversight: Ensure transparency and prevent over-leverage.
  • Strengthen Domestic Financing: To reduce overdependence on foreign borrowing.

Judiciary in Crisis and the Digital Transformation of India

  • 23 Jan 2025

In News:

The Indian judiciary is grappling with an unprecedented backlog of cases, while India’s digital economy is witnessing exponential growth, promising to be a key driver of future economic expansion. Simultaneously, India's strides in the space sector and emerging technologies signal its increasing role as a global innovator.

The Crisis of Judicial Pendency in India

  • Background: The Supreme Court recently permitted High Courts to appoint ad-hoc retired judges under Article 224A to address the mounting pendency of cases. This move revives a constitutional provision that had remained dormant, with only three recorded instances of its use.
  • Scale of Backlog:
    • As of January 2025, over 62 lakh cases are pending in High Courts.
    • Nearly 4 crore cases are pending in subordinate courts.
    • 30% of High Court judicial positions remain vacant.
  • Reasons for Pendency
  • Insufficient Judicial Strength: Low judge-to-population ratio.
  • Infrastructure Deficit: Poor court facilities, especially in rural areas.
  • Administrative Delays: Outdated systems and slow bureaucratic processing.
  • Rising Litigation: Increase in public awareness and socio-economic issues.
  • Adjournments & Procedural Delays: Inefficient court practices.
  • Vacancies in Appointments: Delay in filling judicial posts due to the standoff between executive and judiciary.

Constitutional Provision: Article 224A

  • Enables High Courts to appoint retired judges temporarily with the President’s consent.
  • Judges appointed under this article have full powers and jurisdiction of a regular High Court judge.
  • Supreme Court in Lok Prahari v. Union of India (2021) provided guidelines for such appointments, including limiting it to instances where judicial vacancies are not more than 20%.

Judicial Appointments Debate: Collegium vs. NJAC

  • Collegium System
    • CJI + Four senior-most judges decide appointments.
    • Criticized for lack of transparency, nepotism, and non-accountability.
  • National Judicial Appointments Commission (NJAC)
    • Proposed inclusion of judiciary, executive, and civil society (2 eminent persons).
    • Struck down by SC in 2015 to preserve judicial independence.
  • Current Debate: Rising demands for a reformed NJAC to bring in accountability while retaining independence.

Global Models of Judicial Appointments

Country                  System                           Key Feature

UK                     Judicial Appointments Commission                 Transparent, includes laypersons

South Africa     Judicial Service Commission                            Diverse representation: judiciary, politicians, academics

France                High Council of Judiciary                                Balanced approach with civil society input

Impacts of Judicial Delay

  • Delayed Justice: Undermines public trust.
  • Overcrowded Prisons: Over 70% of inmates are undertrials; prisons operate at 114% capacity.
  • Economic Costs: Delays in dispute resolution hamper business environment and economic efficiency.
  • Judicial Burnout: Overburdened judges impact quality of judgments.

Addressing Judicial Pendency

  • Short-Term Measures
    • Appointment of Ad-Hoc Judges under Article 224A.
    • Fast Track Courts for specific offenses (e.g., crimes against women, corruption).
  • Long-Term Reforms
    • Reforming Judicial Appointments: Transparent and accountable system through restructured NJAC.
    • Enhancing Collegium Transparency: Clear criteria and public disclosure.
    • Promoting ADR Mechanisms: Arbitration, mediation, and conciliation to reduce court burden.
    • Judicial Infrastructure Development: More courtrooms, modern facilities, and digitalization.

Way Forward

Judicial Reform

  • Strengthen judicial accountability while maintaining independence.
  • Incorporate global best practices in appointment systems.
  • Promote Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) and digitization of court processes

India’s Renewable Energy Revolution

  • 22 Jan 2025

Introduction

India's transition towards clean energy has accelerated, with 2024 witnessing record-breaking renewable energy (RE) installations and policy innovation. With a vision to achieve 500 GW of non-fossil fuel capacity by 2030 and net-zero emissions by 2070, India is shaping itself as a global leader in sustainable development.

What is Renewable Energy?

Renewable energy is derived from naturally replenishing sources like solar, wind, hydropower, and biomass. It plays a vital role in:

  • Reducing dependence on fossil fuels.
  • Lowering greenhouse gas emissions.
  • Ensuring long-term energy security.

India’s RE Targets and Progress

Parameter                                 Target/Status

2030 Target                              500 GW of non-fossil fuel capacity

Net Zero by                               2070

Current Status (Jan 2025)      217.62 GW of non-fossil fuel-based capacity

Short-term Goal                      50% energy capacity from renewable sources

2024: Year of Renewable Milestones

Solar Energy

  • 24.5 GW added in 2024 — a 2.8x increase over 2023.
  • 18.5 GW utility-scale solar: Rajasthan, Gujarat, Tamil Nadu contributed 71%.
  • Rooftop Solar:
    • 4.59 GW added (↑53%)
    • 7 lakh installations under PM Surya Ghar: Muft Bijli Yojana.
  • Off-grid Solar:
    • 1.48 GW added (↑182%), promoting rural energy access.

Wind Energy

  • 3.4 GW added: Gujarat (1,250 MW), Karnataka (1,135 MW), Tamil Nadu (980 MW) = 98% of new capacity.

Hydropower & Others

  • Existing hydropower plants modernized to improve efficiency.

Government Initiatives Driving Growth

Scheme/Initiative                                                Purpose

PM Surya Ghar: Muft Bijli Yojana                  Rooftop solar subsidies for households

Green Energy Corridor (GEC)                        Transmission infra for RE-rich states

Hydrogen Energy Mission                                Promote green hydrogen production

National Smart Grid Mission (NSGM)            Integration of variable RE sources into the grid

FAME Scheme                                                   Promote EV adoption, indirectly supporting RE usage

International Solar Alliance (ISA)                   Strengthen global cooperation in solar energy

Challenges in RE Expansion

  • Land Acquisition: Resistance from locals, especially in solar park areas.
  • Grid Stability: Intermittency of solar/wind leads to voltage and frequency issues.
  • Storage Gaps: Lack of large-scale battery storage limits surplus utilization.
  • E-Waste Concerns: Rising disposal of solar panels and batteries.
  • Mineral Dependency: Import reliance on lithium, cobalt, etc.
  • Regulatory Bottlenecks: Delay in approvals and lack of inter-state coordination.

Way Forward: Strategic Interventions

Technological Innovation

  • Floating Solar Projects: Utilize reservoirs to save land and reduce evaporation.
  • Decentralized Systems: Peer-to-peer trading via blockchain for energy democratization.
  • Green Hydrogen: Use surplus RE for hydrogen fuel, develop hydrogen corridors.

Infrastructure & Manufacturing

  • Renewable Energy SEZs: Promote local manufacturing and innovation.
  • Smart Grid Development: Improve grid flexibility and real-time balancing.

Environmental Management

  • Circular Economy for RE Waste: Design policies for solar panel and battery recycling.
  • Urban Integration: Incentivize rooftop installations in urban centers.

Conclusion

India’s renewable energy revolution is at a crucial juncture. With 2024 setting a strong precedent through record installations and policy progress, the path to 2030 and beyond will require addressing infrastructural, financial, and regulatory challenges. A multi-pronged, inclusive, and technology-driven approach will help India lead the global clean energy transition.

Why Indian cities need Behavioral Change Officers

  • 21 Jan 2025

Urban India at a Crossroads

India's urban population is projected to reach 40% by 2030, up from 30% in 2011. While this urban surge brings opportunities for economic and social progress, it also amplifies challenges such as:

  • Infrastructure strain
  • Environmental degradation
  • Social inequality
  • Climate impactsincluding increased frequency of floods, heatwaves, and climate-driven migration

Traditionally, governments have relied on a combination of policy reforms, infrastructure investment, and technological advancements. However, a crucial component is often overlooked: behavioral change.

The Case for Behavioral Change in Urban Governance

Urban planning and service delivery frequently overlook how citizen and provider behavior shapes outcomes. Sustained, meaningful change requires more than just awareness campaigns—it demands behaviorally-informed governance. Here's why:

  • Enhancing Service Delivery: Cities like Indore showcase how behavior change can revolutionize urban systems. Once struggling with waste management, Indore became India’s cleanest city through:
    • Door-to-door campaigns
    • Strict enforcement of segregation rules
    • Viral initiatives like the ‘Kachra Gadi’ song to shift mindsets
  • Driving Sustainability: In cities like Delhi, the odd-even vehicle rule led to a 30% reduction in traffic congestion by using simple default behavioral triggers. When people opt for public transport or energy conservation, it reduces emissions and eases city operations.
  • Improving Public Safety: Behavioral strategies also improve law enforcement and community trust. For instance, Kerala’s ‘Janamaithri Suraksha’ program emphasizes empathetic policing, resulting in stronger police-citizen relations.
  • Boosting Institutional Efficiency: Embedding behavioral insights can improve the efficiency of government schemes. The NITI Aayog’s Behavioral Insights Unit and initiatives in Uttar Pradesh and Bihar demonstrate success in using nudges to improve outcomes in areas like maternal health and welfare delivery.

Why Cities need Chief Behavioral Officers (CBOs)

To embed these insights systematically, Indian cities must institutionalize behavioral science through dedicated roles like Chief Behavioral Officers (CBOs) within Urban Local Bodies.

CBO Functions:

  • Integrate behavioral strategies into urban planning
  • Design evidence-backed nudges and campaigns
  • Collaborate with stakeholders, municipal officers, and researchers
  • Guide data-driven policy experimentation

Support Structure:

  • A small team of behavioral fellows
  • Annual Behavioral Plans aligned with city goals
  • Investment in citizen engagement platforms
  • Use of big data and surveys to uncover behavioral bottlenecks

Examples from global cities like New Orleans (via What Works Cities) show that CBOs can drive change quickly and cost-effectively.

Challenges to Behaviorally-Informed Urbanism

Despite its promise, this approach faces several roadblocks:

  • Cultural inertia and resistance to change (e.g., reluctance in waste segregation)
  • Lack of training in behavioral science among officials
  • Resource constraints in smaller municipalities
  • Fragmented coordination between departments (e.g., transport, sanitation)

Way Forward

To overcome these challenges, cities must:

  • Institutionalize behavioral roles in governance structures
  • Partner with behavioral scientists and think tanks
  • Leverage technology (e.g., mobile apps for citizen feedback)
  • Scale successful pilots (e.g., Indore’s waste model) across regions

This structured approach not only improves efficiency and citizen satisfaction, but also reduces the costs of service delivery, allowing long-term savings.

Israel-Hamas Ceasefire

  • 19 Jan 2025

In News:

After 15 months of war triggered by Hamas' October 2023 attack on Israel, a ceasefire agreement has been brokered by Qatar, Egypt, and the US, marking a fragile but significant pause in one of the most destructive phases of the Israel-Palestine conflict.

Key Features of the Ceasefire Agreement

The agreement is based on a three-phase framework proposed by US President Joe Biden in June 2024 and endorsed by the UN Security Council:

Phase I (42 days)

  • Complete ceasefire and withdrawal of Israeli forces from all populated areas in Gaza.
  • Release of 33 Israeli hostages (women, elderly, injured) by Hamas.
  • Release of 900–1,650 Palestinian prisoners, including minors and those detained since October 7, 2023.
  • Daily entry of 600 humanitarian aid trucks into Gaza.
  • Partial Israeli withdrawal from key corridors like Netzarim (splitting Gaza) and parts of the Philadelphi Corridor (Gaza-Egypt border).

Phase II

  • Release of remaining hostages, primarily male soldiers.
  • Complete Israeli military withdrawal from Gaza.
  • Details to be negotiated during Phase I; no written guarantees for its execution.

Phase III

  • Return of the remains of deceased hostages.
  • Initiation of a multi-year reconstruction plan for Gaza under international supervision.

Challenges to Implementation

Fragile Political Consensus in Israel

  • Far-right ministers (e.g., Itamar Ben-Gvir) oppose the deal, threatening to quit the government.
  • Prime Minister Netanyahu faces pressure from both hawks demanding a full military victory and moderates seeking peace.

Hamas' Demands

  • Seeks permanent ceasefire and complete Israeli withdrawal, making it unwilling to release all hostages without guarantees.
  • Israel, in contrast, insists on neutralizing Hamas militarily.

Unclear Future Governance of Gaza

  • Israel rejects both Hamas and the Palestinian Authority (PA) as future administrators.
  • Global consensus supports Palestinian-led governance, but viable alternatives remain elusive.

Wider Geopolitical Impact

Reshaping West Asia

  • Conflict escalated tensions with Hezbollah (Lebanon) and drew Israel into direct conflict with Iran.
  • Iran’s influence weakened due to losses in Hezbollah and Syria.
  • Assad regime in Syria collapsed, altering regional power dynamics.

Diplomatic Repercussions for Israel

  • Despite military dominance, Israel faces global condemnation over civilian casualties.
  • PM Netanyahu is under scrutiny at the ICC (war crimes) and ICJ (genocide allegations).
  • Israel is now diplomatically isolated, particularly after the humanitarian toll in Gaza.

Humanitarian Crisis in Gaza

  • Over 64,000 Palestinians killed (The Lancet, 2024), including large numbers of civilians.
  • Massive destruction of infrastructure—schools, hospitals, homes—rendering Gaza nearly uninhabitable.
  • Reconstruction hinges on sustained peace and international aid.

Conclusion

The ceasefire presents a rare opportunity for de-escalation in a deeply entrenched conflict. However, distrust between parties, domestic political constraints, and regional rivalries pose significant risks to its sustainability. A durable peace can only emerge through inclusive political dialogue, humanitarian prioritization, and movement toward a two-state solution.

River Interlinking in India

  • 18 Jan 2025

Context:

India, with 17% of the world’s population but only 4% of its freshwater resources, faces significant water distribution challenges. The ambitious river interlinking project aims to mitigate regional water imbalances by transferring water from surplus areas to water-deficient regions, addressing irrigation, drinking water supply, flood control, and overall development.

Background and Evolution

The idea of interlinking rivers dates back to 1858 when British engineer Captain Arthur Cotton proposed linking rivers for inland navigation. Post-independence, Dr. K.L. Rao (1972) suggested the ‘Ganga-Cauvery Link Canal,’ followed by Captain Dinshaw J. Dastur’s ‘National Garland Canal’ proposal in 1977. However, these were deemed infeasible. In 1980, the Ministry of Water Resources formulated the National Perspective Plan (NPP), identifying 30 river link projects—14 under the Himalayan component and 16 under the Peninsular component.

The National Water Development Agency (NWDA) was established in 1982 to study and implement these projects. The Supreme Court, in response to a PIL in 2002, directed the government to expedite the completion of interlinking projects.

Ken-Betwa Link Project (KBLP)

The first project under the NPP, the Ken-Betwa Link Project (KBLP), was inaugurated on December 25, 2024. It aims to provide irrigation to Bundelkhand, one of India’s most drought-prone regions, by transferring surplus water from the Ken River in Madhya Pradesh to the Betwa River in Uttar Pradesh. Covering 10.62 lakh hectares of land (8.11 lakh ha in MP and 2.51 lakh ha in UP), the project will supply drinking water to 62 lakh people and generate 103 MW of hydropower along with 27 MW of solar power. However, environmental concerns persist as it passes through the Panna Tiger Reserve.

Significance of River Interlinking

  • Water Redistribution: The scheme will transfer about 200 billion cubic meters (BCM) of water annually to water-scarce regions, ensuring equitable distribution.
  • Agricultural Benefits: It will irrigate approximately 34 million hectares of farmland, enhancing food security and increasing agricultural productivity.
  • Hydropower Generation: An estimated 34,000 MW of hydropower will be generated, supporting renewable energy expansion.
  • Flood and Drought Mitigation: Excess water will be stored in reservoirs, reducing flood risks while ensuring availability during droughts.
  • Economic Growth: Improved water availability will boost industries, generate employment, and aid in rural development.

Environmental and Social Concerns

  • Ecological Disruptions: Altering river morphology can impact sediment transport, water quality, and aquatic ecosystems.
  • Biodiversity Loss: Dams and canals may disrupt fish migration patterns and submerge forests, leading to biodiversity depletion.
  • Climate Impact: Water transfer may affect regional climate attributes, altering temperature, precipitation, and humidity levels.
  • Displacement and Social Issues: Large-scale projects often lead to displacement of communities, causing resettlement challenges and conflicts over compensation.
  • Economic Viability: High project costs and potential delays raise concerns about financial feasibility compared to alternative solutions like rainwater harvesting and local water conservation.

Conclusion

While river interlinking presents a potential solution to India’s water crisis, it must be carefully assessed against environmental and social impacts. Sustainable water management strategies, such as efficient irrigation techniques and localized conservation methods, should complement large-scale projects to ensure a balanced approach to water security and development.

 

Digital Governance in India

  • 16 Jan 2025

In News:

India is making significant strides toward digital governance, an initiative aimed at enhancing both citizen services and the capabilities of government employees. This transition to a digitally-driven framework is designed to improve the efficiency, transparency, and accountability of government operations, positioning India as a global leader in modern governance practices.

What is Digital Governance?

Digital governance refers to the application of technology to enhance the functioning of government processes. By integrating digital tools and platforms, it aims to streamline administrative operations, reduce inefficiencies, and improve public service delivery. This approach also extends to ensuring greater transparency and accountability in government dealings.

Key Initiatives in Digital Governance

India has launched several critical initiatives to modernize governance through digital means. Some of the key programs include:

  • iGOT Karmayogi Platform: The iGOT Karmayogi platform is a government initiative to provide online training to public employees. It aims to enhance public administration skills, foster expertise in data analytics, and equip employees with the necessary tools in digital technologies. This initiative aims to prepare government personnel to handle the challenges of a digitally evolving governance landscape.
  • e-Office Initiative: The e-Office program is designed to reduce paper-based work by digitizing workflows within government departments. This initiative facilitates real-time communication among offices and ensures more efficient and transparent management of tasks. It also helps streamline decision-making processes and improves the speed of governance operations.
  • Government e-Marketplace (GeM): The Government e-Marketplace (GeM) is an online platform developed to optimize procurement processes. It allows government agencies to procure goods and services efficiently, transparently, and with accountability. This platform has contributed to reducing corruption and ensuring that government purchases represent the best value for public money.
  • Cybersecurity Training for Employees: As digital operations increase, ensuring the safety of sensitive data is paramount. The cybersecurity training program for government employees is designed to enhance their ability to recognize and respond to potential cyber threats. This initiative ensures data protection, safe online practices, and cyber resilience across digital governance platforms.

Challenges in Implementing Digital Governance

Despite its benefits, India faces several challenges in the successful implementation of digital governance. These obstacles must be addressed to unlock the full potential of technology-driven governance.

  • Resistance to Technological Change: One of the key barriers to digital transformation in government is the resistance among employees to adopt new technologies. Many government officials remain accustomed to traditional, paper-based processes and are reluctant to transition to digital systems due to concerns about complexity and job security.
  • Digital Divide in Rural Areas:  While urban regions in India have better access to high-speed internet and digital infrastructure, many rural areas face significant digital divide challenges. Limited access to technology hampers the successful implementation of digital governance in these regions, restricting equitable service delivery across the country. 
  • Cybersecurity Risks: The rise of digital operations in governance increases the risk of cyberattacks and data breaches. With government data being digitized, the threat of cybercrimes becomes more pronounced, making it critical to implement robust cybersecurity measures and data protection strategies to safeguard sensitive information.
  • Lack of Incentives for Training Outcomes: Although government employees are encouraged to take part in training programs such as iGOT Karmayogi, the absence of clear incentives to complete these programs can undermine their effectiveness. Establishing tangible rewards or career progression linked to the successful completion of training would encourage employees to fully engage in capacity-building initiatives.

Solutions to Overcome Challenges

To ensure the success of digital governance, several strategies must be put in place to address the challenges identified.

  • Foster Innovation-Friendly Environments: Promoting an innovation-friendly culture within government offices can help reduce resistance to new technologies. Encouraging employees to engage with digital tools, offering regular training, and providing ongoing support will facilitate a smoother transition to a technology-driven governance system.
  • Invest in Digital Infrastructure for Rural Areas: Addressing the digital divide requires significant investment in digital infrastructure in rural and remote areas. Ensuring that these regions have reliable internet access and the necessary technological resources will empower citizens across India to benefit from digital governance.
  • Continuous Capacity-Building Programs: Establishing continuous training programs for government employees will ensure that they remain up-to-date with the latest technological trends. Regular updates to training content will help employees stay prepared to handle emerging challenges in digital governance.
  • Strengthen Cybersecurity Protocols: To mitigate cybersecurity risks, it is essential to implement stringent cybersecurity measures across all levels of government operations. This includes regular cybersecurity awareness programs, proactive threat management systems, and rigorous data protection protocols to safeguard both government data and citizens’ personal information.

Conclusion

India’s shift towards digital governance represents a significant step toward modernizing administrative systems, enhancing transparency, and improving service delivery to citizens. However, challenges such as resistance to change, the digital divide, cybersecurity risks, and the lack of clear incentives for training must be addressed. By investing in digital infrastructure, offering continuous training programs, and reinforcing cybersecurity measures, India can create an effective and secure framework for digital governance that benefits both its citizens and the government workforce.

India’s Startup Revolution

  • 15 Jan 2025

Context

India has solidified its position as one of the most dynamic startup ecosystems globally, emerging as a hub for innovation, entrepreneurship, and technological progress. However, realizing its ambition of becoming the top startup ecosystem requires addressing critical challenges and leveraging available opportunities.

Current Landscape of Indian Startups

Growth and Innovation

India ranks as the third-largest startup ecosystem in the world, following the U.S. and China. As of January 15, 2025, over 1.59 lakh startups have been officially recognized by DPIIT, with more than 120 attaining unicorn status (valuation exceeding $1 billion).

Investment Trends

Despite economic fluctuations, India's startups continue to attract significant investments. In 2022, venture capitalists infused $25 billion into the ecosystem, reaffirming India’s position as a preferred destination for global investors. Although there was a slowdown in 2023, domains like Software as a Service (SaaS) and climate tech continue to secure substantial funding.

Government Support

India’s startup-friendly policies, including Startup India, Digital India, and Atmanirbhar Bharat, have created an enabling environment. Notable initiatives include:

  • Tax incentives, faster patent approvals, and regulatory relaxations.
  • The launch of a ?10,000 crore Fund of Funds for Startups (FFS) in 2023 to improve capital accessibility.
  • The Bharat Startup Knowledge Access Registry (BHASKAR) to streamline collaboration among startups and investors.

Regional Growth

  • Tier II and III Expansion: Nearly 50% of startups are now based in emerging hubs such as Indore, Jaipur, and Ahmedabad.
  • Tamil Nadu: The state boasts a $28 billion startup ecosystem, growing at 23%. Chennai alone houses around 5,000 startups, significantly contributing to employment generation.
  • Kerala: With a $1.7 billion startup ecosystem, Kerala exhibits a compound annual growth rate of 254%, emphasizing cost-effective tech talent hiring.

Key Challenges Faced by Startups

1. Funding Constraints

The global economic downturn, coupled with rising interest rates, has limited venture capital inflows, resulting in layoffs and operational cutbacks.

2. Regulatory and Compliance Barriers

Despite government support, startups grapple with complex tax structures, evolving data protection laws, and stringent compliance requirements, including ESOP taxation policies.

3. Scaling and Market Adaptability

Many startups struggle with operational inefficiencies, limited market penetration, and inadequate infrastructure, hampering growth potential.

4. High Failure Rate

Approximately 90% of Indian startups fail within five years due to poor product-market fit, lack of financial planning, and insufficient adaptation to market needs.

5. Talent Shortages

India faces stiff competition in acquiring skilled professionals in areas like AI, cybersecurity, and machine learning, making retention increasingly difficult amid economic uncertainties.

Strategic Measures to Strengthen India’s Startup Ecosystem

1. Enhancing Policy Frameworks

  • Simplified Regulations: Streamline startup registration, funding approvals, and international business operations.
  • IP Protection: Strengthen intellectual property laws to boost R&D investment.
  • Sector-Specific Initiatives: Develop targeted policies for AI, deep tech, healthcare, and green technologies.

2. Expanding Funding Access

  • Encouraging Domestic Investment: Leverage pension and sovereign wealth funds to invest in startups.
  • Public-Private Partnerships: Foster large-scale government-industry collaboration to finance emerging ventures.
  • Decentralized Funding: Expand angel investor networks and micro-investment opportunities, particularly in Tier II and III cities.

3. Building Robust Infrastructure

  • Tech Parks and Incubation Centers: Establish state-of-the-art facilities with mentorship programs.
  • Improved Digital Connectivity: Ensure high-speed internet access in underserved regions.
  • Enhanced Logistics and Supply Chains: Strengthen infrastructure to support startup scalability.

4. Developing a Skilled Workforce

  • STEM and Entrepreneurial Education: Introduce curriculum enhancements in technical and business disciplines.
  • Upskilling Programs: Collaborate with industry leaders to train professionals in high-demand skills.
  • Diversity and Inclusion: Promote initiatives encouraging women and marginalized communities in entrepreneurship.

5. Fostering Innovation and Risk-Taking

  • Strengthened R&D Funding: Increase allocations to universities and private research sectors.
  • Encouraging Entrepreneurship: Reduce societal stigma surrounding startup failures to promote risk-taking.
  • Leveraging Domestic Challenges: Address local issues like climate change and urbanization through innovation.

6. Expanding Global Reach

  • International Collaborations: Partner with foreign accelerators and governments.
  • Ease of Cross-Border Trade: Simplify export and import regulations for startups.
  • Engaging the Indian Diaspora: Encourage successful overseas entrepreneurs to mentor and invest in Indian startups.

7. Advancing Sustainability Goals

  • Green Tech Promotion: Support startups focusing on renewable energy and circular economy initiatives.
  • Eco-Friendly Incentives: Offer financial support to ventures aligning with sustainability targets.
  • Inclusive Growth Strategies: Expand agritech, edtech, and health-tech startups in rural areas, supporting platforms like the Women Entrepreneurship Platform (WEP) by NITI Aayog.

Building a Resilient Digital Economy

To fortify India's digital economy, startups should leverage existing infrastructure like UPI and Aadhaar while capitalizing on emerging technologies such as AI, 5G, and blockchain. A robust cybersecurity framework and data protection policies will be essential to ensure investor confidence.

Genome India Project

  • 14 Jan 2025

In News:

The Genome India Project is an ambitious national initiative aimed at decoding the genetic diversity of India’s population. Launched in January 2020 by the Department of Biotechnology (DBT), the project seeks to create a comprehensive map of India’s genetic variations, offering insights that can revolutionize public health, medicine, and our understanding of human genetics.

What is Genome Sequencing?

Genome sequencing is the process of determining the complete DNA sequence of an organism’s genome. The human genome, composed of about 3 billion base pairs of DNA, contains all the genetic instructions necessary for the growth, development, and functioning of the human body. The process involves extracting DNA from a sample (often blood), breaking it into smaller fragments, and using a sequencer to decode these fragments. The data is then reassembled to reconstruct the full genome.

Key Aims and Objectives

The Genome India Project aims to address several crucial scientific and healthcare challenges:

  • Create an Exhaustive Catalog of Genetic Variations: This includes common, low-frequency, rare, and structural variations (such as Single Nucleotide Polymorphisms or SNPs).
  • Establish a Reference Haplotype Structure: This reference panel will be used for imputing missing genetic variations in future genetic studies.
  • Design Affordable Genome-wide Arrays: These arrays will be useful for research and diagnostics at a lower cost, making genetic analysis accessible.
  • Create a Biobank for Future Research: The collected DNA and plasma will be preserved for future studies to facilitate ongoing genetic research.

Genome India Project: Phase 1 and Key Findings

The project’s Phase 1 focused on sequencing the genomes of 10,074 individuals from 99 ethnic groups across India. This initiative provides a critical baseline for studying the country’s genetic diversity. Some of the key findings include:

  • 459 plant species have been identified as part of genetic diversity studies.
  • 135 million genetic variations have been uncovered, including 7 million that are unique to India, not found in global databases.
  • The project has revealed several genetic risks specific to Indian populations, such as the MYBPC3 mutation (linked to cardiac arrest) and the LAMB3 mutation (associated with a lethal skin condition), which are not commonly seen in global datasets.

This database will serve as a vital resource for researchers, contributing to the development of precision medicine, better disease diagnosis, and more personalized treatments.

Second Phase: Expanding the Scope

The second phase of the Genome India Project will focus on sequencing the genomes of individuals suffering from specific diseases. This will enable researchers to:

  • Compare the genomes of healthy individuals with those having diseases, helping identify genetic mutations responsible for conditions like cancer, diabetes, and neurodegenerative diseases.
  • Investigate rare diseases specific to Indian populations and develop therapies tailored to these conditions.

By sequencing the genomes of individuals with various conditions, the project aims to pinpoint genetic factors that contribute to the pre-disposition or causation of diseases.

Data Sharing and Security

To ensure data security and privacy, the genetic information will be made available only through managed access. Researchers interested in using the data will need to submit a proposal and collaborate with the Department of Biotechnology. The data will be stored securely at the Indian Biological Data Centre (IBDC) in Faridabad, Haryana, and anonymized to maintain confidentiality.

Why Does India Need Its Own Genetic Database?

India is home to a highly diverse population, with over 4,600 distinct ethnic groups and varying genetic backgrounds. The country’s genetic diversity, shaped by its geographical, cultural, and historical context, cannot be fully understood through datasets derived from other countries. The Genome India Project helps:

  • Identify Genetic Risk Factors: For various diseases, paving the way for developing targeted diagnostic tools and therapies.
  • Uncover Unique Variants: Some genetic mutations found in India, such as the Vaishya community’s resistance to anaesthetics, are absent in global databases.
  • Address Population-specific Health Issues: Genetic mapping enables the identification of prevalent diseases and health conditions specific to Indian populations.

Global Context and Comparison

India’s genome sequencing effort is part of a larger global movement in genomics:

  • Human Genome Project (2003): The first international effort to decode the human genome.
  • 1,000 Genome Project (2012): Published 1,092 human genome sequences.
  • UK 100,000 Genome Project (2018): Sequenced 100,000 genomes for health research.
  • European Genome Project: Aims to sequence over 1 million genomes across 24 countries.

The Genome India Project fills a crucial gap by focusing on the genetic diversity of Indian populations, which differs significantly from the genetic profiles studied in Western or European genomes.

Applications of Genome India Project

The Genome India Project has the potential to impact multiple areas:

  • Advancements in Medicine: Understanding genetic variations can lead to the development of personalized medicine, where treatments are tailored to individual genetic profiles.
  • Genetic and Infectious Disease Control: The project helps identify genetic resistance to diseases, and aids in understanding how certain populations may respond differently to drugs or vaccines.
  • Public Health Policies: Data from the project can inform health policies, especially in tackling diseases prevalent in specific regions or communities.
  • International Research Collaboration: The project aims to foster collaboration with global research communities, enhancing India’s presence in the field of genomics.

Conclusion:

The Genome India Project is a landmark initiative for India’s scientific community, enabling better understanding of the country’s genetic diversity and paving the way for breakthroughs in medicine, healthcare, and disease prevention. The ability to analyze genetic variations on such a large scale provides immense opportunities for precision medicine and personalized treatments.

Selection Process for Chief Election Commissioner (CEC)

  • 12 Jan 2025

In News:

The Chief Election Commissioner and Other Election Commissioners (Appointment, Conditions of Service and Term of Office) Act, 2023 represents a significant shift in the process of selecting the Chief Election Commissioner (CEC) and other Election Commissioners (ECs) in India. Traditionally, the senior-most Election Commissioner automatically ascended to the position of CEC. However, the new law introduced in December 2023 widens the scope for selection, allowing for a more transparent process with an expanded pool of candidates.

Key Features of the Act:

  • Election Commission Structure: The Election Commission of India is constituted by the Chief Election Commissioner (CEC) and two other Election Commissioners (ECs). The President of India appoints these members, with the number of ECs fixed periodically.
  • Appointment Process: The Act mandates that the CEC and ECs are appointed by the President based on recommendations from a Selection Committee. This committee comprises:
    • The Prime Minister (Chairperson),
    • The Leader of the Opposition in the Lok Sabha (or leader of the largest opposition party),
    • A Union Cabinet Minister appointed by the Prime Minister.
  • Search Committee: A Search Committee, chaired by the Minister of Law and Justice, prepares a panel of five candidates. The Selection Committee may choose from this panel or opt for someone outside of it.
  • Eligibility Criteria:
    • Candidates must have integrity and experience in election management.
    • They should be or have been Secretary-level officers or equivalent.
  • Term and Reappointment:
    • The term of CEC and ECs is six years or until they turn 65 years.
    • They cannot be re-appointed after their term.
  • Salary and Pension: The salary, allowances, and conditions of service of CEC and ECs are equivalent to those of a Cabinet Secretary.
  • Removal Process:
    • The CEC can be removed in the same manner as a Supreme Court Judge.
    • ECs can be removed only on the recommendation of the CEC.

Departure from Tradition:

Traditionally, the next CEC was the senior-most Election Commissioner. However, the new law opens the process, allowing the Search Committee to consider candidates outside the current pool of Election Commissioners. This widens the net and may lead to a more transparent and inclusive selection.

Concerns and Criticisms: While the Act aims to improve the selection process, it has faced scrutiny and concerns, particularly about the independence of the Election Commission:

  • Government Influence: The inclusion of the Leader of Opposition in the Selection Committee is a positive step, but critics argue that the final decision may still be influenced by the government. The government’s dominance in the Selection Committee could potentially affect the neutrality of the Commission.
  • Exclusion of the Chief Justice of India (CJI): The Supreme Court's 2023 ruling had recommended including the CJI in the committee, but the new Act excludes the CJI. This has raised concerns about the balance of power and the credibility of the Election Commission.
  • Risk of Partisanship: Former CEC O.P. Rawat expressed concerns that political changes might influence decisions, leading to a compromised credibility of the Election Commission.

Legal Challenges: Petitions challenging the exclusion of the CJI from the Selection Committee are currently pending before the Supreme Court, which is expected to address them in February 2025.

Historical Context and Legal Backdrop:

  • Article 324 of the Indian Constitution provides for the appointment of CEC and ECs by the President, but this is subject to laws passed by Parliament.
  • In 2023, the Supreme Court intervened in response to the growing concerns over the executive's unilateral control over these appointments. The Court's ruling in the Anoop Baranwal v. Union of India case led to the formation of a committee comprising the Prime Minister, Leader of Opposition, and CJI until Parliament could enact a law. This resulted in the Chief Election Commissioner and Other Election Commissioners Act, 2023, which was aligned with the Court's directions.

Implications and Way Forward:

  • Potential Government Influence: While the law aims to reduce executive control, the dominant role of the Prime Minister and the Leader of the Opposition could still allow the government to influence appointments, especially in contentious times.
  • Suggestions for Reform: The Law Commission had recommended a broader selection committee, including the CJI, to ensure a balanced and impartial selection process. The National Commission to Review the Working of the Constitution (NCRWC) also suggested a committee comprising key political figures, including the Leader of Opposition in the Rajya Sabha and the Speaker of Lok Sabha.
  • Integrity of the Election Commission: The credibility and impartiality of the Election Commission are vital for ensuring free and fair elections. It is crucial to ensure that the appointment process not only appears fair but is also free from political interference.

Conclusion:

The Chief Election Commissioner and Other Election Commissioners (Appointment, Conditions of Service and Term of Office) Act, 2023 introduces a reformed approach to the selection of the Election Commission members. While the law aims for greater transparency, it also raises concerns regarding government influence and independence. The Supreme Court’s review of the exclusion of the CJI from the Selection Committee will be pivotal in determining the future trajectory of the Election Commission’s appointment process. The evolving legal and institutional dynamics will play a significant role in shaping the electoral reforms in India.

Why Farmers Deserve Price Security

  • 11 Jan 2025

Introduction:

The future of Indian agriculture is at a crossroads. With the shrinking of the agricultural workforce and the diversion of fertile farmlands for urbanization, ensuring the sustainability of farming is a strategic imperative. Among the various support mechanisms for farmers, the Minimum Support Price (MSP) remains a central point of debate. Should there be a legal guarantee for MSP? This question has gained prominence, especially with the rising challenges in agriculture, from unpredictable climate patterns to volatile market prices.

The Decline of Agriculture and Its Impact

India’s agricultural sector faces a dual crisis: loss of both land and human resources. Prime agricultural lands across river basins, such as the Ganga-Yamuna Doab or the Krishna-Godavari delta, are being repurposed for real estate, infrastructure, and industrial projects. Additionally, the number of "serious farmers" – those deriving at least half of their income from agriculture – is dwindling. The number of operational holdings may be 146.5 million, but only a small fraction of these farmers remains committed to agriculture.

This decline threatens the future of India’s food security, as the country will need to feed a population of 1.7 billion by the 2060s. To sustain farming and ensure long-term food security, we must secure farmers' livelihoods. Price security, particularly through MSP, plays a crucial role in this context.

The Role of MSP in Securing Farmers

MSP is the government-mandated price at which it guarantees the purchase of crops if market prices fall below a certain threshold. It provides a safety net for farmers against price volatility. The process of fixing MSP involves recommendations by the Commission for Agricultural Costs and Prices (CACP), which takes into account factors such as the cost of production and market trends. Once approved by the Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs (CCEA), MSP is set for various crops, including rice, wheat, and sugarcane.

For farmers to stay in business, there must be a balance between production costs and returns. Farming is a risky business – yield losses can occur due to weather anomalies, pest attacks, or other natural factors. However, price risks can be mitigated with a guaranteed MSP. This would encourage farmers to invest in their land and adopt modern farming technologies, which would boost productivity and reduce costs.

Arguments for and Against Legal MSP Guarantee

Supporters of a legal MSP guarantee argue that it would provide financial security to farmers, protecting them from unpredictable market conditions. It would also promote crop diversification, encourage farmers to shift from water-intensive crops to those less dependent on irrigation, and inject resources into rural economies, thus addressing distress in rural areas.

However, critics highlight several challenges with a legal guarantee for MSP. The most significant concern is the fiscal burden it would impose on the government, potentially reaching Rs. 5 trillion. Furthermore, such a system could distort market dynamics, discouraging private traders and leading to a situation where the government becomes the primary buyer of agricultural produce. This could be economically unsustainable, especially for crops with low yields. Additionally, legal MSP guarantees could violate World Trade Organization (WTO) subsidy principles, adversely impacting India’s agricultural exports.

The Way Forward: A Balanced Approach

Given the challenges associated with a legal MSP guarantee, alternative measures should be explored. Price Deficiency Payment (PDP) schemes, such as those implemented in Madhya Pradesh and Haryana, could be expanded at the national level. These schemes compensate farmers for the difference between market prices and MSP, ensuring price security without the fiscal burden of procurement.

Additionally, the government can focus on improving agricultural infrastructure, such as cold storage facilities, to help farmers better access markets and increase price realization. Supporting Farmer Producer Organizations (FPOs) could also help farmers by enhancing collective bargaining power and ensuring better prices for their produce. Moreover, gradual expansion of MSP coverage to include a wider range of crops would encourage diversification, reducing the dominance of rice and wheat.

River Interlinking: Environmental Disaster or Solution?

  • 09 Jan 2025

Overview of the River Interlinking Concept

The concept of river interlinking in India traces its origins to the 19th century, when Sir Arthur Cotton first proposed inter-basin water transfer to address irrigation issues. Over time, this idea was refined by other experts. It evolved into the National Water Grid and, later, the River-Interlinking Project (ILR) under the Ministry of Water Resources. The goal is to transfer surplus water from rivers to drought-prone areas, aiming for water security, irrigation, and power generation.

Key Projects and Initiatives

  • Ken-Betwa River Link Project (KBLP): Launched in December 2024, the KBLP will link the water-surplus Ken River with the drought-stricken Betwa River. It aims to irrigate over 10 lakh hectares, supply drinking water to 62 lakh people, and generate hydropower and solar power. However, concerns over the environmental impact of building a dam within the Panna Tiger Reserve have been raised.
  • National River Linking Project (NRLP): The NRLP, formally known as the National Perspective Plan, is an ambitious proposal that includes 30 river links—14 Himalayan and 16 Peninsular—to connect India's rivers and create a giant South Asian Water Grid.

Benefits of Interlinking Rivers

  • Flood and Drought Mitigation: Redistributing water from surplus areas to drought-prone regions, such as Bundelkhand, will reduce the severity of floods and droughts.
  • Agriculture and Irrigation: Expanding irrigation systems across 35 million hectares of land could significantly boost agricultural productivity and food security.
  • Hydropower Generation: The interlinking project has the potential to generate up to 34 GW of hydropower, contributing to India's renewable energy targets.
  • Economic Growth: Improving water availability can boost industries, provide drinking water, and support economic development in underdeveloped regions.
  • Inland Waterways: The project will also contribute to the expansion of inland waterways, benefiting trade and reducing transportation costs.

Challenges and Concerns

  • Environmental Impact:
    • Biodiversity Loss: Projects like the Ken-Betwa project raise alarms about the destruction of ecologically sensitive areas, such as the Panna Tiger Reserve.
    • River Ecosystem Disruption: Altering natural river courses can harm aquatic life, disrupt deltaic ecosystems, and degrade water quality. For instance, the Sardar Sarovar Dam's impact on the Narmada river system shows the long-term consequences of such projects.
    • Pollution: The mixing of cleaner and more polluted rivers could exacerbate water contamination issues.
  • Social and Financial Costs:
    • Displacement: Large-scale interlinking projects will displace millions, especially marginalized communities and indigenous people, and disturb local livelihoods.
    • High Financial Burden: The total estimated cost of the NRLP is ?5.5 lakh crore, which does not include environmental rehabilitation costs or the long-term maintenance of the infrastructure.
  • Climate Change: Predictions suggest that climate change could affect river flows and the availability of surplus water. This might render the interlinking project ineffective in the long term.
  • Inter-State Conflicts: Water-sharing disputes, like the long-standing issues over the Cauvery and Krishna rivers, could intensify with more interlinking projects.
  • Infrastructural Challenges: Maintaining vast canal networks and reservoirs, managing sedimentation, and acquiring land for construction are logistical hurdles.

Alternative Approaches and Solutions

  • Efficient Water Management:
    • Integrated Watershed Management: Implementing a comprehensive approach to manage existing water resources can reduce the need for large-scale river transfers.
    • Groundwater Recharge: Focusing on efficient groundwater management by identifying recharge mechanisms and regulating water use is crucial for sustainability.
  • Modern Irrigation Techniques:
    • Drip Irrigation: Israel’s success with drip irrigation, which reduces water use by 25%-75%, provides an example of how modern technologies can save significant amounts of water.
  • Virtual Water: Emphasizing the import of water-intensive goods (like wheat) could save local water resources, which would otherwise be used for domestic agriculture.
  • National Waterways Project (NWP): An alternative to the interlinking project, NWP aims to improve water management by creating navigation channels that double as water distribution networks with a fraction of the land use.

Way Forward

  • Comprehensive Impact Assessments: The need for multidisciplinary studies to evaluate the environmental, social, and economic impacts of river interlinking projects cannot be overstated. Stakeholder engagement is crucial for equitable decision-making.
  • Sustainable Water Policies: A national water policy should prioritize sustainable water practices, focusing on local solutions, such as water harvesting, watershed management, and smart irrigation.
  • Focus on Regional Solutions: Smaller, state-specific projects should be prioritized to address water scarcity issues without triggering large-scale environmental degradation.

The Impact of Climate Change on Earth’s Water Cycle

  • 08 Jan 2025

In News:

Climate change is significantly affecting Earth's water cycle, leading to extreme weather events such as intense floods and prolonged droughts. According to the 2024 Global Water Monitor Report, this disruption is increasingly evident, as seen in the devastating weather patterns experienced worldwide in 2024. The report, based on data from international researchers, highlights how these changes are directly linked to rising global temperatures and the resulting shifts in precipitation patterns.

Understanding the Water Cycle

The water cycle is the continuous movement of water in various forms—solid, liquid, and gas—throughout the Earth's atmosphere, land, and bodies of water. This cycle involves processes such as:

  • Evaporation: Water from the surface of oceans, lakes, and rivers turns into vapor.
  • Transpiration: Water is absorbed by plants from the soil and released as vapor.
  • Precipitation: Water vapor condenses into clouds and falls as rain or snow, replenishing the Earth's surface.
  • Runoff and Infiltration: Precipitation either flows into rivers or infiltrates the soil, contributing to groundwater.

The water cycle is vital for maintaining the planet’s ecosystems, regulating weather patterns, and providing water for all living organisms. However, climate change is intensifying these natural processes, with far-reaching consequences.

Impact of Climate Change on the Water Cycle

As global temperatures rise, climate change is having a profound impact on the water cycle. Warmer temperatures lead to:

  • Increased evaporation: As air temperatures soar, more water evaporates into the atmosphere. For every 1°C rise in temperature, the atmosphere can hold about 7% more moisture, which exacerbates storms and increases the intensity of rainfall.
  • More intense precipitation: With more moisture in the atmosphere, storms have become more intense, leading to severe flooding in various regions.
  • Increased droughts: Warmer air also dries out the soil. This reduces the amount of water available for crops and plants, while also increasing the evaporation rate from soil, leading to longer and more intense droughts.

This disruption of the water cycle is already causing erratic weather patterns, as some regions face severe droughts, while others are experiencing extreme rainfall and floods.

Key Findings from the 2024 Global Water Monitor Report

The 2024 report presents several alarming statistics that highlight the growing impact of climate change on the water cycle:

  • Water-related disasters: In 2024, these disasters caused over 8,700 fatalities, displaced 40 million people, and resulted in economic losses exceeding $550 billion globally.
  • Dry months: There were 38% more record-dry months in 2024 than the baseline period (1995-2005), underlining the growing frequency of droughts.
  • Intense rainfall: Record-breaking rainfall occurred 27% more frequently in 2024 compared to 2000, with daily rainfall records set 52% more often. This shows the growing intensity of precipitation events.
  • Terrestrial water storage (TWS): Many dry regions faced ongoing low TWS levels, reflecting the scarcity of water in these areas, while some regions, such as parts of Africa, saw an increase in water storage.
  • Future predictions: Droughts may worsen in regions like northern South America, southern Africa, and parts of Asia, while areas like the Sahel and Europe could experience increased flood risks in the coming years.

Conclusion

The findings of the 2024 report underscore the alarming impact of climate change on the global water cycle. As temperatures continue to rise, we can expect more frequent and severe weather events, including extreme flooding and devastating droughts. These changes will affect billions of people worldwide, highlighting the urgent need for action to mitigate climate change and adapt to its consequences. Addressing this challenge requires global cooperation to reduce emissions, enhance water management systems, and protect vulnerable regions from the intensifying effects of climate change.

NITI Aayog Celebrates 10 Years

  • 06 Jan 2025

In News:

  • NITI Aayog, the National Institution for Transforming India, completed its 10th anniversary on January 1, 2025.
  • Established to replace the Planning Commission, NITI Aayog was designed to address contemporary challenges such as sustainable development, innovation, and decentralization in a dynamic, market-driven economy.

About NITI Aayog

Establishment and Mandate

  • Formation: Created through a Union Cabinet resolution in 2015.
  • Primary Mandates:
    • Overseeing the adoption and monitoring of the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs).
    • Promoting competitive and cooperative federalism between States and Union Territories.

Composition

  • Chairperson: Prime Minister of India.
  • Governing Council: Includes Chief Ministers (CMs) of all States and UTs, Lt. Governors, the Vice Chairperson, full-time members, and special invitees.
  • CEO: Appointed by the PM for a fixed tenure.

Key Achievements

Policy Advisory and Decentralized Governance

  • Shifted focus from financial allocation to policy advisory roles.
  • Promoted decentralized governance through data-driven initiatives like the SDG India Index and the Composite Water Management Index.

Innovative Initiatives

  • Aspirational Blocks Programme (2023): Focused on 500 underdeveloped blocks for 100% coverage of government schemes.
  • Atal Innovation Mission (AIM): Trained over 1 crore students through Atal Tinkering Labs and incubation centres.
  • Initiatives like e-Mobility, Green Hydrogen, and the Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) Scheme were conceptualized to drive innovation and sustainability.

Role and Functions of NITI Aayog

Strategic Advice and Federal Cooperation

  • Provides policy formulation and strategic advice to both central and state governments.
  • Fosters cooperative federalism by encouraging collaboration between the central and state governments.

Monitoring and Evaluation

  • Plays a crucial role in monitoring and evaluating policies and programs to ensure alignment with long-term goals.

Promoting Innovation and SDGs

  • NITI Aayog contributes to aligning national development programs with the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), focusing on innovation, research, and technology in critical sectors.

Key Differences Between Planning Commission and NITI Aayog

Aspect                                            Planning Commission                                                                                                              NITI Aayog

Purpose                                         Centralized planning and resource allocation.                                                Focus on cooperative federalism and policy research.

Structure                                       Led by the PM, with Deputy Chairman and full-time members.                   Led by the PM, with Vice-Chairperson, CEO, and Governing Council.

Approach                                      Top-down, centralized.                                                                                   Bottom-up, encouraging state participation.

Role in Governance                     Executive authority over policies.                                                                  Advisory body without enforcement power.

Five-Year Plans                            Formulated and implemented.                                                                        Focus on long-term development, no Five-Year Plans.

Challenges Faced by NITI Aayog

  • Limited Executive Power: Lacks authority to enforce its recommendations, restricting its influence.
  • Coordination Issues: Achieving effective collaboration between central and state governments remains challenging.
  • Data Gaps: Inconsistent state-level data hampers accurate policymaking and evaluation.
  • Resource Constraints: Limited resources hinder full implementation of initiatives.
  • Resistance to Change: Some states resist NITI Aayog's initiatives due to concerns over autonomy and alignment with local needs.

Future Vision and Planning

  • Agenda for 2030: Focus on achieving the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) in areas like poverty alleviation, education, healthcare, clean energy, and gender equality.
  • Vision for 2035: NITI Aayog's 15-year vision document aims for sustainable, inclusive growth, with an emphasis on economic growth, social equity, and environmental sustainability.
  • Innovation and Digitalization: Promotes digitalization and innovation through data-driven policymaking and regional focus on tribal and hilly areas.

Conclusion: Reflections on the First Decade

  • Despite significant achievements, NITI Aayog’s influence remains limited by its advisory role and resource constraints.
  • The shift away from centralized planning, evident since the dissolution of the Planning Commission, has sparked debate about the effectiveness of such a model in ensuring long-term development and inclusive growth.

Draft Digital Personal Data Protection Rules, 2025

  • 05 Jan 2025

In News:

The Government of India has introduced the long-awaited draft Digital Personal Data Protection Rules, 2025 to operationalize the Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023. These rules contain several significant provisions, including the controversial reintroduction of data localisation requirements, provisions for children's data protection, and measures to strengthen data fiduciaries' responsibilities.

This development holds substantial implications for both Indian citizens' data privacy and global tech companies, especially with respect to compliance, security measures, and data processing.

Data Localisation Mandates

Key Provision: The draft rules propose that certain types of personal and traffic data must be stored within India. Specifically, "significant data fiduciaries", a category that will include large tech firms such as Meta, Google, Apple, Microsoft, and Amazon, will be restricted from transferring certain data outside India.

  • Committee Oversight: A government-appointed committee will define which types of personal data cannot be transferred abroad, based on factors like national security, sovereignty, and public order.
  • Localisation Re-entry: This provision brings back data localisation, a contentious issue previously removed from the 2023 Data Protection Act after heavy lobbying by tech companies.
  • Impact on Big Tech: Companies like Meta and Google had previously voiced concerns that strict localisation rules could hinder their ability to offer services in India, with Google arguing for narrowly tailored data localisation norms.

Role and Responsibilities of Data Fiduciaries

Key Provision: The rules lay out a clear framework for data fiduciaries, defined as entities that collect and process personal data.

  • Significant Data Fiduciaries (SDFs): This subcategory will include entities that process large volumes of sensitive data, such as health and financial data. These companies will be held to higher standards of compliance and security.
  • Data Retention: Personal data can only be stored for as long as consent is valid; after which, it must be deleted.
  • Security Measures: Data fiduciaries must implement stringent measures such as encryption, access control, unauthorized access monitoring, and data backups.

Parental Consent for Children's Data

Key Provision: The draft rules include provisions aimed at protecting children's data, including mechanisms to ensure verifiable parental consent before children under 18 can use online platforms.

  • Verification Process: Platforms must verify the identity of parents or guardians using government-issued identification or digital locker services.
  • Exceptions: Health, mental health institutions, educational establishments, and daycare centers will be exempted from needing parental consent.

Data Breach Reporting and Penalties

Key Provision: In the event of a data breach, data fiduciaries are required to notify affected individuals without delay, detailing the breach's nature, potential consequences, and mitigation measures. Failure to comply with breach safeguards can result in penalties.

  • Penalties for Non-Compliance: Entities that fail to adequately protect data or prevent breaches could face fines of up to Rs 250 crore.
  • Breach Notification: The rules mandate timely reporting of all breaches, whether minor or major, and an emphasis on transparency in the breach notification process.

Safeguards for Government Data Processing

Key Provision: The draft rules seek to ensure that the government and its agencies process citizen data in a lawful manner with adequate safeguards in place.

  • Exemptions for National Security and Public Order: The rules also address concerns that the government may process data without adequate checks by stipulating lawful processing and protections when data is used for national security, foreign relations, or public order.

Compliance Challenges for Businesses

Key Challenges: The introduction of these rules will impose several challenges for businesses, particularly tech companies:

  • Consent Management: Companies will need to implement robust systems to handle consent records, allowing users to withdraw consent at any time. This will require significant infrastructure changes.
  • Data Infrastructure Overhaul: Organizations will need to invest in data collection, storage, and lifecycle management systems to ensure compliance.
  • Security Standards: Experts have raised concerns about the vagueness of certain security standards, which could lead to inconsistent implementation across sectors.

Penalties and Enforcement

Key Provisions:

  • Penalties for Non-Compliance: Entities failing to adhere to the rules may face significant financial penalties, including fines up to Rs 250 crore for serious breaches.
  • Repeat Violations: Consent managers who repeatedly violate rules could have their registration suspended or cancelled.

Conclusion:

The Digital Personal Data Protection Rules, 2025 bring important changes to India’s data privacy framework, particularly the reintroduction of data localisation and more stringent requirements for data fiduciaries. These rules aim to strengthen citizen privacy and ensure greater accountability from businesses. However, the challenges in compliance, especially for global tech firms, and the potential impact on service delivery, will need to be closely monitored as the final rules take shape.

Government Extends Special Subsidy on DAP

  • 03 Jan 2025

In News:

The Indian government has decided to extend the special subsidy on Di-Ammonium Phosphate (DAP) fertilizer for another year, a decision aimed at stabilizing farmgate prices and addressing the challenges posed by the depreciation of the Indian rupee.

Key Government Decision

  • Extension of Subsidy: The Centre has extended the Rs 3,500 per tonne special subsidy on DAP from January 1, 2025 to December 31, 2025.
  • Objective: This extension aims to contain farmgate price surges of DAP, India’s second most-consumed fertilizer, which is being impacted by the fall in the rupee's value against the US dollar.

Fertilizer Price Dynamics and Impact

  • MRP Caps on Fertilizers: Despite the decontrol of non-urea fertilizers, the government has frozen the maximum retail price (MRP) for these products.
    • Current MRPs:
      • DAP: Rs 1,350 per 50-kg bag
      • Complex fertilizers: Rs 1,300 to Rs 1,600 per 50-kg bag depending on composition.
  • Subsidy on DAP: The subsidy includes Rs 21,911 per tonne on DAP, plus the Rs 3,500 one-time special package.
  • Impact of Currency Depreciation:
    • The rupee's depreciation has made imported fertilizers significantly more expensive.
      • The landed price of DAP has increased from Rs 52,960 per tonne to Rs 54,160 due to the rupee falling from Rs 83.8 to Rs 85.7 against the dollar.
      • Including additional costs (customs, port handling, insurance, etc.), the total cost of imported DAP is now Rs 65,000 per tonne, making imports unviable without further subsidy or MRP adjustments.

Industry Concerns and Viability Issues

  • Import Viability:
    • Fertilizer companies face significant cost pressures due to rising import prices and the current MRP caps.
    • Without an increase in government subsidies or approval to revise MRPs upwards, imports will be unviable.
    • Even with the extended subsidy, companies estimate a Rs 1,500 per tonne shortfall due to currency depreciation.
  • Stock Levels and Supply Challenges:
    • Current stock levels for DAP (9.2 lakh tonnes) and complex fertilizers (23.7 lakh tonnes) are below last year's levels.
    • With inadequate imports, there are concerns about fertilizer supply for the upcoming kharif season (June-July 2025).

Government’s Strategy and Fiscal Implications

  • Compensation for Imports:
    • In September 2024, the government approved compensation for DAP imports above a benchmark price of $559.71 per tonne, based on an exchange rate of Rs 83.23 to the dollar.
    • With the rupee falling below Rs 85.7, these previous compensation calculations have become outdated.
  • Fiscal Impact:
    • The extended subsidy will cost the government an additional Rs 6,475 crore. Despite this, political implications of raising the MRP are minimal, as only non-major agricultural states are facing elections in 2025.

Future Outlook and Priorities

  • Immediate Priority: The government’s primary concern is securing adequate fertilizer stocks for the kharif season, focusing on ensuring sufficient imports of both finished fertilizers and raw materials.
  • Balancing Factors: The government will need to navigate the complex balance of maintaining fertilizer affordability for farmers, ensuring the viability of fertilizer companies, and managing fiscal constraints.

As the subsidy extension is implemented, all eyes will be on the government's ability to ensure a stable supply of fertilizers while safeguarding both farmer interests and economic sustainability in the face of an increasingly challenging exchange rate environment.

Introduction to Dr. Manmohan Singh's Economic Reforms

  • 31 Dec 2024

In News:

Dr. Manmohan Singh, a distinguished economist, played a crucial role in shaping India’s economic trajectory. His leadership, as Finance Minister (1991–96) and Prime Minister (2004–14), is particularly noted for the economic liberalization and reform policies that transformed India’s economy.

India’s Economic Crisis of 1991

  • Economic Collapse: India faced a severe balance of payments crisis, with dwindling foreign reserves and rising inflation.
  • Key Challenges: Fiscal deficit, industrial stagnation, and trade imbalances worsened by the collapse of the Soviet Union.
  • Urgent Measures: Dr. Singh was appointed Finance Minister during this crisis and initiated bold reforms to stabilize and grow the economy.

Key Reforms in 1991

  • Devaluation of the Rupee
    • Aimed at making Indian exports competitive in global markets.
    • Reduced import tariffs and liberalized foreign trade.
  • Industrial Policy Reforms
    • Abolition of Licence Raj: Deregulated the industrial sector, promoting private enterprises.
    • Reduced state control and encouraged foreign investment, leading to industrial growth.
  • Banking and Financial Reforms
    • Reduced the statutory liquidity ratio (SLR) and cash reserve ratio (CRR).
    • Allowed for more credit flow, fostering economic expansion and banking sector efficiency.
  • Global Integration
    • Introduced economic liberalization policies, integrating India with the global economy and attracting foreign investments.

Economic Growth and Social Welfare Initiatives

  • Poverty Reduction: Reforms helped lift millions out of poverty by fostering job creation and industrial growth.
  • Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (MGNREGA): Launched in 2005, providing 100 days of wage employment to rural households.
  • Right to Information (RTI) and Right to Education (RTE)
    • Empowered citizens by ensuring transparency and access to government information.
    • RTE guaranteed free and compulsory education for children aged 6-14.
  • Financial Inclusion: Aadhar project introduced to facilitate welfare delivery and financial inclusion.

Legacy of Economic Liberalization and Growth

  • Economic Growth: Under his leadership, India’s GDP grew at an average rate of 8%, establishing India as one of the fastest-growing economies.
  • Shift to a Market-Driven Economy: Reforms dismantled socialist controls, facilitating the rise of the private sector.
  • Attracting Foreign Investment: Economic liberalization and policy reforms made India an attractive destination for foreign capital.

Leadership During Political and Economic Challenges

  • Reluctant Prime Minister
    • In 2004, Singh became Prime Minister despite initial reluctance, emerging as a unifying figure during coalition politics.
    • His tenure saw India’s rise as a global economic power, particularly from 2004–2009.
  • Challenges
    • Singh’s second term was marred by allegations of corruption and policy paralysis, leading to criticism of his administration.
    • However, his personal integrity remained intact, and he maintained focus on governance.
  • Historic India-US Nuclear Deal (2008)
    • The deal marked a significant shift in India’s foreign relations and energy policies, enabling civilian nuclear trade.

Conclusion

Dr. Manmohan Singh’s economic policies are central to India's modern economic framework. His vision transformed India from a closed, socialist economy to a vibrant, globalized economy, promoting inclusive growth and institutional reforms. Despite facing challenges and criticisms, his legacy remains a testament to strategic policymaking that continues to influence India’s economic landscape.

 

Sustainable Groundwater Management in India’s Agriculture

  • 30 Dec 2024

Introduction: Groundwater Crisis and Agriculture

  • India's Agricultural Dependence on Groundwater: India is a leading producer of water-intensive crops like rice, wheat, and pulses. The country’s agricultural sector heavily depends on groundwater for irrigation, especially for paddy cultivation.
  • Over-exploitation of Groundwater: Groundwater extraction for irrigation is increasingly unsustainable, threatening agricultural sustainability in the long term.

Rising Groundwater Usage and Its Implications

  • Population Growth and Groundwater Use: Between 2016 and 2024, global population grew from 7.56 billion to 8.2 billion, and India’s population rose from 1.29 billion to 1.45 billion. Concurrently, groundwater used for irrigation increased from 38% in 2016-17 to 52% in 2023-24, exacerbating the water crisis.
  • Over-extraction in Major Paddy-Producing States: States like Rajasthan, Punjab, and Haryana have witnessed severe over-exploitation of groundwater for irrigation.
    • Rajasthan: Highest groundwater salinisation (22%) despite receiving the highest average rainfall (608 mm) among these states.
    • Punjab and Haryana: Lesser groundwater salinity due to canal irrigation and micro-irrigation systems.

Impact of Excessive Fertilizer Use on Groundwater Quality

  • Soil Salinity and Groundwater Contamination: Excessive use of fertilizers, particularly for paddy cultivation, increases soil salinity and contributes to groundwater contamination.
  • Toxic Chemicals in Groundwater: Nitrate contamination, caused by nitrogen-based fertilizers, and uranium contamination due to phosphate fertilizers are key concerns in states like Maharashtra, Telangana, Andhra Pradesh, and Tamil Nadu.
  • Health Risks: Contaminated groundwater poses health risks such as thyroid disorders, cancer, and dental fluorosis, along with reduced agricultural productivity.

Projected Impact on Future Groundwater Availability

  • Unsustainable Groundwater Levels: The Central Groundwater Board (CGWB) reports that if current practices continue, over half of the districts in Punjab could face groundwater depletion. Similarly, 21-23% of districts in Haryana and Rajasthan may experience a similar crisis.
  • Population Growth and Water Scarcity: With India’s population expected to reach 1.52 billion by 2036, the need for sustainable groundwater management becomes even more critical.

Government Initiatives for Groundwater Management

  • National Mission for Sustainable Agriculture (2014): Promotes sustainable practices like zero tillage, cover cropping, and micro-irrigation for efficient water and chemical use.
  • Pradhan Mantri Krishi Sinchai Yojana (2015): Aims to boost irrigation efficiency through drip and sprinkler irrigation methods.
  • Atal Bhujal Yojana (2019): Targets efficient groundwater management in water-stressed states like Gujarat, Haryana, Rajasthan, Maharashtra, and Uttar Pradesh.
  • Success of Government Initiatives: CGWB data shows that the percentage of districts with unsustainable groundwater levels dropped from 23% in 2016-17 to 19% in 2023-24.

Role of State Governments in Groundwater Management

  • State-Level Initiatives: States with unsustainable groundwater levels must take proactive measures to manage water resources efficiently.
    • Example - Odisha: Odisha's Integrated Irrigation Project for Climate Resilient Agriculture emphasizes irrigation efficiency and climate-smart practices, supported by World Bank funding.
  • Encouraging Resource-Efficient Agriculture: States with safe groundwater levels, like Chhattisgarh, Bihar, Jharkhand, Telangana, and Odisha, should adopt water-efficient practices to protect groundwater resources.

Conclusion: Ensuring Agricultural Sustainability and Water Security

  • Need for Urgent Action: Scaling up efforts to improve irrigation practices and groundwater management is crucial to securing India’s agricultural future.
  • Global Food Security: Protecting groundwater resources will not only ensure water security within India but also contribute to global food security amid climate challenges.
  • Blueprint for Sustainable Agriculture: States like Odisha are providing a model for sustainable water management, which can be replicated across water-stressed regions in India.

 

Surge in E-Waste Generation in India

  • 29 Dec 2024

In News:

India has seen a significant increase in electronic waste (e-waste) generation, rising by 72.54% from 1.01 million metric tonnes (MT) in 2019-20 to 1.751 million MT in 2023-24. The sharpest rise occurred between 2019-20 and 2020-21, driven by increased electronic consumption due to the COVID-19 pandemic's work-from-home and remote learning arrangements.

Environmental and Health Concerns

E-waste contains hazardous substances like arsenic, cadmium, lead, and mercury. If not properly managed, these materials can severely impact human health and the environment, contaminating soil and water sources.

Government Efforts: E-Waste Management Rules, 2022

  • Introduction of Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR): The government introduced the E-Waste (Management) Rules, 2022, effective from April 1, 2023. These rules focus on making producers responsible for the recycling of e-waste. Producers are assigned recycling targets based on the quantity of e-waste generated or products sold and must purchase EPR certificates from authorized recyclers to meet these targets.
  • Integration of Bulk Consumers: Public institutions and government offices, categorized as bulk consumers, are mandated to dispose of e-waste only through registered recyclers or refurbishers, ensuring proper treatment and recycling of the waste.
  • Expansion of E-Waste Coverage: The updated rules expanded the scope to include 106 Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE) items from FY 2023-24, up from 21 items previously covered under the 2016 E-Waste Rules.

Challenges in E-Waste Recycling and Disposal

  • Low Recycling Rates: Although the share of e-waste recycled in India has increased from 22% in 2019-20 to 43% in 2023-24, a significant 57% of e-waste remains unprocessed annually. Informal sector practices, which dominate e-waste handling, often lack the necessary environmental safeguards, leading to improper disposal and environmental contamination.
  • Lack of Infrastructure and Awareness: India faces challenges in building adequate infrastructure for e-waste collection and recycling, resulting in improper disposal in landfills. Furthermore, a lack of public awareness regarding proper disposal methods exacerbates the problem.

Global Context and India’s Position

  • India ranks as the third-largest e-waste generator globally, following China and the United States. With an increasing rate of e-waste generation, the country faces an urgent need to improve recycling efficiency and adopt sustainable disposal methods.

International and National Conventions on E-Waste

  • India is a signatory to several international conventions that govern hazardous waste management, including the Basel Convention, which regulates the transboundary movement of hazardous wastes, and the Minamata Convention, which focuses on mercury. At the national level, India has established the E-Waste (Management) Rules, 2022, and other frameworks to manage and reduce e-waste effectively.

Strategic Recommendations for Effective E-Waste Management

  • Harnessing the Informal Sector: India’s informal sector, which handles a significant portion of e-waste, must be integrated into the formal recycling systems. This can be achieved through training and financial support to ensure safe and environmentally responsible recycling practices.
  • Technological Innovations: Encouraging research into advanced recycling technologies, such as AI and IoT-based solutions for efficient e-waste collection and tracking, will be crucial for improving the e-waste management system.
  • Learning from Global Practices: Countries like the European Union (EU) and Japan have set strong examples. The EU’s Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive and Japan’s Home Appliance Recycling Law emphasize Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR) and provide models for India to adapt.

Conclusion

To address the growing e-waste challenge, India must improve its recycling infrastructure, integrate the informal sector, and adopt best practices from international models. With sustainable and effective strategies, India can mitigate the environmental and health risks posed by e-waste while promoting a circular economy.

Glass Ceiling Cracks: Women's Rising Role in the 2024 Lok Sabha Elections

  • 28 Dec 2024

Introduction:

The 2024 Lok Sabha elections marked a significant step forward for women’s participation in Indian politics. With 800 women candidates contesting across 390 constituencies, this was the highest ever since the 1957 general elections. This surge in women candidates has been a positive reflection of the evolving role of women in India's democratic processes.

Increase in Women Candidates:

  • A total of 800 women candidates participated in the 2024 elections, up from 726 in 2019.
  • The number of constituencies with no female candidate dropped to a historic low of 152, from 171 in 2019.
  • However, despite the rise in participation, only 74 women won, while 629 forfeited their deposits.

Regional Variations:

  • The highest number of women candidates were from Maharashtra (111), followed by Uttar Pradesh (80) and Tamil Nadu (77).
  • Some constituencies, like Baramati, Secunderabad, and Warangal, saw the highest participation of women, with eight candidates each.

Voter Turnout and Gender Dynamics:

  • Women voters surpassed men in voter turnout for the second consecutive time, with 65.78% women casting their vote in 2024, compared to 65.55% of men.
  • Assam’s Dhubri recorded the highest female voter turnout at 92.17%, reflecting increased female engagement in the electoral process.

Electoral Data and Gender Insights:

  • In 2024, there were 47.63 crore female electors out of 97.97 crore total voters, making up 48.62% of the electorate, a slight increase from 2019.
  • The number of female electors per 1,000 male voters reached 946, up from 926 in 2019, showing growing electoral inclusivity.

Challenges and Progress:

  • Despite the gains in women’s representation, there remain several constituencies without any female candidates, notably in states like Uttar Pradesh (30 constituencies), Bihar (15), and Gujarat (14).
  • Though women's participation has risen, the number of women who win remains disproportionately low, reflecting the challenges they face in a patriarchal political landscape.

Inclusion and Diversity:

  • The 2024 elections also saw greater inclusivity, with a rise in third-gender electors, which increased by 23.5% to 48,272.
  • Voter turnout among transgender voters nearly doubled, reaching 27.09% compared to 14.64% in 2019.
  • Additionally, the number of persons with disabilities (PwD) electors increased to 90.28 lakh, showcasing broader electoral inclusivity.

Conclusion:

The 2024 Lok Sabha elections witnessed a remarkable increase in women’s participation, both as voters and candidates. While the journey toward full gender parity in politics continues, the trends from these elections indicate a growing shift toward more inclusive electoral processes. The data released by the Election Commission further underlines this progress, showing the increasing role of women in shaping India’s democratic future.

 

Suposhit Gram Panchayat Abhiyan

  • 26 Dec 2024

In News:

On December 26, 2024, Prime Minister Narendra Modi presided over the Veer Bal Diwas celebrations at the Bharat Mandap in New Delhi. This annual event commemorates the martyrdom of the sons of Sri Guru Gobind Singh Ji and highlights the importance of nurturing the next generation. During the occasion, PM Modi also launched the ‘Suposhit Gram Panchayat Abhiyan,’ an initiative aimed at improving nutrition and well-being in rural India.

Veer Bal Diwas: Commemorating Sacrifice and Courage

Veer Bal Diwas was declared on January 9, 2022, by PM Modi to honor the sacrifices made by the young sons of Guru Gobind Singh Ji — Sahibzada Baba Zorawar Singh and Baba Fateh Singh — who were martyred in 1704. During the Mughal-Sikh battles, these two brave boys were captured and offered safety if they converted to Islam, which they refused. Their refusal to abandon their faith led to their brutal martyrdom by being bricked alive in the walls of a fort in Sirhind (Punjab). This act of resilience and unwavering faith is a cornerstone of Sikh history and culture.

Veer Bal Diwas not only commemorates their sacrifice but also serves as a reminder of the strength, faith, and courage demonstrated by all four of Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s sons. It underscores the Sikh ideals of sacrifice, courage, and dedication to faith.

Suposhit Gram Panchayat Abhiyan: Addressing Malnutrition in Rural Areas

On the same day, PM Modi launched the 'Suposhit Gram Panchayat Abhiyan', a nationwide mission focused on improving nutritional outcomes in rural areas. The initiative aims to enhance nutrition-related infrastructure and promote active community participation in tackling malnutrition. By encouraging village-level involvement, the program seeks to ensure that nutrition becomes a community-driven effort.

Key Objectives

  • Malnutrition Eradication: The initiative focuses on combating malnutrition in rural communities by improving access to better nutrition.
  • Healthy Competition: Encourages competition among villages to adopt best practices for nutrition and overall health.
  • Sustainable Development: Promotes long-term, sustainable health practices that align with India's broader goals, such as the Poshan Abhiyan and the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs).

The program aims to make rural populations active participants in improving their own well-being, strengthening community-driven initiatives for better nutritional outcomes.

Engaging Children and Fostering Patriotism

In line with Veer Bal Diwas, various events were organized to engage young minds across the nation. These initiatives not only raised awareness about the significance of the day but also fostered a culture of courage, dedication, and patriotism.

  • Online Competitions: Interactive quizzes were conducted through platforms like MyGov and MyBharat to encourage participation and understanding of Veer Bal Diwas.
  • Creative Activities: Schools, Child Care Institutions, and Anganwadi centers organized storytelling, creative writing, and poster-making contests to engage children and promote nationalistic values.

Honoring Young Achievers: PMRBP Awardees

The event also saw the presence of the recipients of the Pradhan Mantri Rashtriya Bal Puraskar (PMRBP), which recognizes children who have demonstrated exceptional abilities in various fields. The awardees, 17 in total, were presented with medals, certificates, and citation booklets by President Droupadi Murmu. These young achievers served as a source of inspiration, reinforcing the theme of celebrating youth potential on Veer Bal Diwas.

Conclusion: Strengthening the Foundation of India’s Future

The celebrations of Veer Bal Diwas and the launch of the Suposhit Gram Panchayat Abhiyan highlight the government’s commitment to nurturing India’s future by investing in its children and rural communities. By honoring historical sacrifices and fostering community-driven health and nutrition initiatives, these efforts contribute to building a resilient, prosperous India that can meet global challenges head-on. The twin focus on children’s development and rural well-being underscores India’s vision of a healthier, more inclusive society, aligned with national and global development goals.

Revitalization of India-China Relations: A Diplomatic Turning Point

  • 23 Dec 2024

In News:

The 23rd meeting between India’s National Security Adviser (NSA) and China’s Foreign Minister, held as Special Representatives (SRs), marks a pivotal moment in the complex bilateral relationship between the two nations. This dialogue, which follows years of strain exacerbated by the 2020 Galwan Valley clash, signals a renewed commitment to restoring stability and fostering peace along the border.

Special Representatives Mechanism: A Foundation for Dialogue

The SR mechanism, established in the early 2000s, has long served as a key platform for addressing bilateral disputes, particularly the contentious boundary issue. Past rounds of discussions have facilitated troop disengagement and efforts to maintain peace along the Line of Actual Control (LAC). The recent meeting, following the 2023 BRICS summit discussions between Prime Minister Narendra Modi and Chinese President Xi Jinping, demonstrates a positive step towards de-escalation, with the resumption of talks providing hope for progress.

Key Outcomes of the 23rd SR Meeting

Several significant developments emerged from the meeting, focusing on cultural, economic, and strategic cooperation:

  • Cultural and Economic Cooperation:
    • Kailash-Mansarovar Yatra: The resumption of this religious pilgrimage represents a significant cultural exchange, fostering people-to-people ties.
    • Border Trade Revival: Border trade in Sikkim has been reestablished, potentially revitalizing local economies and improving trade relations.
  • Scientific and Environmental Cooperation:
    • Trans-boundary River Data Sharing: China’s commitment to sharing crucial river data with India will aid in flood management, directly addressing India’s long-standing concerns over water security, particularly in light of China's upstream dam projects.
  • Connectivity and Exchange Programs:
    • Discussions on restarting direct flights and visa easements for students and businesses, along with enhanced journalist exchanges, signal a move toward greater normalization of relations.
  • Commitment to Border Peace:
    • Both sides have reiterated their intent to maintain peace along the border, a critical factor in reducing tensions. While China expressed a six-point consensus, India has cautiously framed the outcome as “positive directions,” reflecting a reserved optimism.

Challenges in India-China Relations

Despite the positive momentum, numerous challenges persist in the bilateral relationship:

  • Boundary Dispute:
    • The core irritant remains the unresolved border issue, with divergent perceptions of the LAC. While some disengagement has occurred, full de-escalation and demilitarization across the entire border have not yet been achieved.
  • Trust Deficit:
    • The 2020 Galwan clash has left a lasting scar on mutual trust. Additionally, China’s aggressive patrolling and policy shifts continue to raise concerns in India, necessitating vigilance in future negotiations.
  • Economic Imbalances:
    • India’s trade relationship with China remains lopsided, with a significant trade deficit. Moreover, China’s growing influence in India’s neighborhood, particularly in Pakistan, Nepal, and Sri Lanka, challenges India’s strategic interests.
  • Global Power Dynamics:
    • India’s evolving alliances, particularly with the U.S., QUAD, and I2U2 group, alongside China’s assertive stance in Taiwan and the South China Sea, complicate bilateral relations and influence global perceptions.

The Way Forward

To navigate the challenges and harness opportunities, India must adopt a balanced approach, combining diplomatic engagement, economic resilience, and strategic vigilance:

  • Confidence-Building Measures:
    • Continued disengagement and de-escalation at the LAC, coupled with increased transparency in military activities, will be critical to maintaining peace.
  • Broadening Cooperation:
    • Exploring areas of mutual interest, such as climate change, public health, and infrastructure development, could foster deeper cooperation and help transcend contentious issues.
  • Economic Realignment:
    • India must address its trade deficit by pushing for greater market access for Indian products in China. Additionally, diversifying supply chains and promoting joint ventures in renewable energy and technology can reduce dependency.
  • Multilateral Engagement:
    • Engaging through global forums like BRICS, SCO, and G20, and strengthening regional alliances, will help mitigate tensions and counterbalance China's regional influence.
  • Strategic Vigilance:
    • Strengthening ties with regional allies, particularly in the Indo-Pacific, and enhancing military preparedness will safeguard India’s strategic interests in the face of China’s assertiveness.

Conclusion

The recent meeting between India and China represents a cautious but constructive step toward stabilizing their fraught relationship. By focusing on diplomacy, strengthening economic ties, and maintaining strategic vigilance, India can navigate its complex relationship with China in a rapidly shifting global context. A careful balance of engagement and vigilance will be crucial for India’s future dealings with its powerful neighbor.

India-Sri Lanka Diplomatic Engagement

  • 22 Dec 2024

In News:

The recent visit of Sri Lankan President Anura Kumara Dissanayake (AKD) to India marked a significant moment in bilateral relations, as it was his first foreign trip since assuming office. The visit underscored key diplomatic exchanges and collaborations between the two countries, showcasing both areas of agreement and divergence.

Key Takeaways from AKD's Visit

Assurance on Anti-India Activities: One of the primary concerns for India was the use of Sri Lankan territory for activities detrimental to its security, particularly the presence of Chinese “research vessels” at Sri Lankan ports. President AKD assured Prime Minister Narendra Modi that Sri Lanka would not allow its territory to be used in ways that threaten India’s interests. This assurance is crucial, as it signals Sri Lanka's stance on maintaining regional stability, despite AKD’s perceived pro-China inclinations.

Tamil Minority Issue: Divergent Views: A notable divergence in their discussions was the issue of the Tamil minority in Sri Lanka. India has long advocated for the full implementation of the 13th Amendment to Sri Lanka’s Constitution, which would grant greater autonomy to the Tamil minority. However, AKD resisted this, reaffirming his opposition to the amendment’s full implementation. While India emphasized the importance of reconciliation and holding provincial elections, AKD focused on unity, sustainable development, and social protection, sidestepping any definitive commitments on the Tamil issue.

Sri Lanka's Assertive Diplomatic Posture: AKD’s strong parliamentary mandate has allowed him to adopt a more assertive diplomatic stance. This is evident not only in his handling of the Tamil issue but also in his approach to dealing with major powers like India and China. His administration appears to be prioritizing a more independent foreign policy, signaling a shift from previous administrations.

Bilateral Cooperation and Development Initiatives

The visit saw significant agreements on bilateral cooperation, particularly in development and connectivity. Both nations acknowledged the positive impact of India’s assistance in Sri Lanka’s socio-economic growth. Key projects discussed include:

  • Indian Housing Project: Phases III and IV.
  • Hybrid Renewable Energy Projects across three islands.
  • High-Impact Community Development Projects.
  • Digital collaborations, such as the implementation of Aadhaar and UPI systems in Sri Lanka.

Additionally, discussions focused on enhancing energy cooperation, including the supply of LNG, development of offshore wind power in the Palk Strait, and the high-capacity power grid interconnection. The resumption of passenger ferry services between key Indian and Sri Lankan ports was also a priority.

Defence and Security Cooperation

The two leaders agreed to explore a Defence Cooperation Framework and intensify collaboration on maritime surveillance, cyber security, and counter-terrorism. This aligns with India’s strategic interests in the region, as it seeks to ensure stability in the Indian Ocean and strengthen its defense ties with Sri Lanka.

Strategic Continuity Amid Leadership Change

Despite a change in leadership, the core strategic interests between India and Sri Lanka remain aligned. India views Sri Lanka’s stability as crucial to regional security, and both countries are focused on a mutually beneficial partnership. AKD’s emphasis on economic recovery and tackling corruption within Sri Lanka, as seen in his actions against political figures like Speaker Asoka Ranwala, further signals his determination to build a strong foundation for his government’s future.

Conclusion

President AKD’s visit highlighted the evolving dynamics of Sri Lanka’s foreign policy, marked by a more confident and independent approach in engaging with India. While challenges remain, especially regarding the Tamil issue, both countries have reaffirmed their commitment to deepening bilateral ties, with a focus on development, connectivity, and strategic cooperation.

Bank Credit to Women Self-Help Groups (SHGs)

  • 21 Dec 2024

Introduction

The Deendayal Antyodaya Yojana – National Rural Livelihoods Mission (DAY-NRLM) is a flagship program by the Ministry of Rural Development (MoRD) that aims to reduce poverty by empowering women, especially through Self-Help Groups (SHGs). These SHGs have been instrumental in improving financial inclusion, providing access to credit, and enhancing the economic and social status of women across India. The program has made significant strides in mobilizing women, improving their access to financial services, and facilitating entrepreneurial ventures in rural areas.

Key Features and Initiatives of DAY-NRLM

  • Self-Help Groups (SHGs):
    • Formation: DAY-NRLM supports the creation and strengthening of SHGs, primarily focusing on rural women from economically disadvantaged backgrounds.
    • Mobilization: As of 2024, over 10.05 crore women have been mobilized into 90.87 lakh SHGs across India.
    • Objective: The main goal is to reduce poverty through empowerment by providing access to financial services and sustainable livelihoods.
  • Start-up Village Entrepreneurship Programme (SVEP):
    • Support for Rural Enterprises: SVEP, a sub-scheme under DAY-NRLM, encourages SHG women and their families to set up small-scale businesses.
    • Impact: As of October 2024, 3.13 lakh rural enterprises have been supported under this initiative.
    • State-wise Distribution: The program has supported enterprises across various states, with notable contributions from Andhra Pradesh (27,651 enterprises), Kerala (34,569), and Uttar Pradesh (28,904).
  • Banking Correspondent Sakhis:
    • Role: Women in SHGs are trained as Banking Correspondent Sakhis to enhance access to banking services such as deposits, credit, remittances, pensions, and insurance in rural areas.
    • Current Deployment: 1,35,127 Sakhis have been deployed under DAY-NRLM, empowering women to be financial intermediaries in their communities.
  • Financial Support for SHGs:
    • Revolving Fund: SHGs receive funds ranging from Rs. 20,000 to Rs. 30,000 to boost their operations and financial stability.
    • Community Investment Fund: SHGs can avail of up to Rs. 2.50 lakh under the Community Investment Fund to strengthen their financial position.
    • Interest Subvention: To make bank loans more affordable, DAY-NRLM provides interest subvention to SHGs, reducing their overall credit costs.
  • Online Marketing Platform:
    • www.esaras.in: This online platform allows SHGs to market their products, improving their access to broader markets and enhancing their income-generating potential.

Impact of DAY-NRLM and SHGs

  • Financial Inclusion: SHGs play a vital role in financial inclusion by providing access to banking services, loans, and insurance to women, especially in rural and remote areas.
  • Credit Mobilization: As of November 2024, SHGs have leveraged Rs. 9.71 lakh crore in bank credit, thanks to the capitalization support provided by DAY-NRLM, including Revolving Funds and Community Investment Funds.
  • Empowerment of Women: SHGs have significantly contributed to the empowerment of women, providing them with financial independence, social support, and the ability to make decisions in their households and communities.

Challenges Faced by SHGs

  • Beneficiary Identification: Ensuring that the most marginalized individuals are included in SHGs can be challenging.
  • Training Gaps: There is a lack of quality training programs and expert trainers to build the capacity of SHG members.
  • Financial Literacy: Many SHG members have limited knowledge of formal financial services, hindering effective financial management.
  • Market Linkages: Poor integration with markets limits the growth potential of SHGs, especially in terms of product sales and business expansion.
  • Community Support: Insufficient business environment support and value chain linkages pose challenges to SHG sustainability and growth.

Government Initiatives Supporting SHGs

  • SHG-Bank Linkage Programme (SBLP): Launched by NABARD in 1992, this initiative aims to link SHGs with formal banking institutions, facilitating financial inclusion.
  • Mission for Financial Inclusion (MFI): A broader initiative to ensure that rural populations have access to affordable financial services such as savings, credit, insurance, and pensions.
  • Lakhpati Didi Initiative: Launched in 2023, this initiative empowers SHG women to adopt sustainable livelihood practices and aim for an annual household income exceeding Rs. 1 lakh.

Role of SHGs in Rural Development

  • Women Empowerment: SHGs have emerged as a powerful tool for empowering women through financial independence, social security, and the ability to make informed decisions.
  • Economic Growth: SHGs foster small-scale entrepreneurship, thereby creating local businesses that contribute to rural economic growth.
  • Social Cohesion: By promoting collective action, SHGs provide a social support system that helps in addressing common issues faced by their members, such as health, education, and safety.

Future Prospects and Way Forward

  • Technological Integration: SHGs should leverage advanced digital platforms for transaction management, record-keeping, and communication, enhancing efficiency and accessibility.
  • Reducing Informal Borrowing: Linking SHGs with formal financial institutions will reduce reliance on informal lenders, promoting financial inclusion.
  • Inclusive Approach: SHGs should adopt an inclusive model to ensure that members from diverse socio-economic backgrounds are fairly represented and benefit equally.
  • Training and Capacity Building: There is a need for more Community Resource Persons (CRPs) who can guide SHGs in beneficiary identification, financial management, and scaling their activities.

Supreme Court Directs Policy for Sacred Groves Protection

  • 20 Dec 2024

In News:

Recently, the Supreme Court of India issued a significant judgment directing the Union Government to formulate a comprehensive policy for the protection and management of sacred groves across the country. These natural spaces, traditionally safeguarded by local communities, play a crucial role in preserving both ecological diversity and cultural heritage.

What are Sacred Groves?

Sacred Groves are patches of virgin forests that are protected by local communities due to their religious and cultural significance. They represent remnants of what were once dominant ecosystems and serve as key habitats for flora and fauna. Typically, sacred groves are not just ecological reserves, but also form an integral part of local traditions, often protected due to spiritual beliefs.

Key Features of Sacred Groves:

  • Ecological Value: Sacred groves contribute significantly to biodiversity conservation.
  • Cultural Significance: These groves are revered in various religious practices and are central to local traditions.
  • Geographical Presence: Sacred groves are found in regions like Tamil Nadu, Kerala, Karnataka, Maharashtra, and parts of Rajasthan.

Supreme Court's Directive

The court's judgment was based on a plea highlighting the decline of sacred groves in Rajasthan, particularly those being lost due to deforestation and illegal land-use changes. While the Wildlife (Protection) Act of 1972 empowers state governments to declare community lands as reserves, the court recognized the need for a unified national policy to protect sacred groves as cultural reserves.

Recommendations:

  • Nationwide Survey: The Ministry of Environment, Forest, and Climate Change (MoEF&CC) was instructed to conduct a nationwide survey to map and assess sacred groves, identifying their size and extent.
  • Legal Protection: Sacred groves should be recognized as community reserves and protected under the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972.
  • State-Specific Measures: The Rajasthan government was specifically directed to carry out detailed mapping (both on-ground and satellite) of sacred groves within the state, ensuring that the groves are recognized for their ecological and cultural significance.

The Role of Sacred Groves in Conservation

Sacred groves play a pivotal role in the conservation of biodiversity. They serve as refuges for various plant and animal species, and the traditional practices associated with these groves, such as tree worship, discourage destructive activities like logging and hunting.

Ecological and Cultural Importance:

  • Sacred groves often act as critical biodiversity hotspots, preserving rare and indigenous species.
  • They help maintain clean water ecosystems and act as carbon sinks, contributing to climate mitigation.
  • Practices of non-interference with these areas have allowed flora and fauna to thrive over centuries.

Cultural Significance Across India

The importance of sacred groves is deeply embedded in India's diverse cultural heritage. They are considered the abode of deities, and various regions have unique names and rituals associated with these groves.

Examples of Sacred Groves in India:

  • Himachal Pradesh: Devban
  • Karnataka: Devarakadu
  • Kerala: Kavu
  • Rajasthan: Oran
  • Maharashtra: Devrai

Piplantri Village Model

A key example highlighted in the judgment was the Piplantri village in Rajasthan, where the community undertook a remarkable transformation of barren land into flourishing groves. The initiative, driven by local leadership, involves planting 111 trees for every girl child born, which has led to several environmental and social benefits.

Impact of Piplantri's Community Efforts:

  • Over 40 lakh trees have been planted, which has recharged the water table by 800-900 feet and lowered the local climate by 3-4°C.
  • The initiative has contributed to the reduction of female foeticide and empowered women's self-help groups.
  • The village now enjoys economic growth, better education opportunities, and increased local income.

Legal and Statutory Framework

Sacred groves are already recognized under existing Indian laws, notably the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, which allows states to declare sacred groves as community reserves. Additionally, the National Forest Policy of 1988 encourages the involvement of local communities in the conservation of forest areas, a principle supported by the Godavarman Case of 1996.

Key Legal Provisions:

  • Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972: Empowers state governments to declare sacred groves as community reserves.
  • National Forest Policy, 1988: Encourages community involvement in the conservation and protection of forests, including sacred groves.
  • Scheduled Tribes and Other Traditional Forest Dwellers (Recognition of Forest Rights) Act, 2006: Suggests empowering traditional communities as custodians of sacred groves.

Looking Ahead: The Need for Action

The Supreme Court has scheduled further hearings to assess the progress of the survey and mapping efforts by Rajasthan. The court also stressed the importance of empowering traditional communities to continue their role as custodians of sacred groves, ensuring their sustainable protection for future generations.

By recognizing the ecological and cultural significance of sacred groves and encouraging community-driven conservation efforts, the Supreme Court’s ruling sets a precedent for more inclusive environmental policies in India. This could also inspire similar initiatives in other parts of the world, promoting the protection of sacred natural spaces for their critical role in maintaining biodiversity and fostering sustainable communities.

The Costly Push for 100% Electrification of Indian Railways

  • 19 Dec 2024

Introduction

RITES Ltd., the consultancy arm of the Indian Railways, has secured two contracts to repurpose six broad gauge diesel-electric locomotives for export to African railways. These locomotives, originally designed for India’s broad gauge of 1,676 mm, will be modified for use on railways with the narrower Cape Gauge of 1,067 mm. While this is a commendable re-engineering effort, it also highlights a larger issue within Indian Railways: the unnecessary redundancy of functional diesel locomotives, leading to significant wastage of resources.

The Growing Problem of Idle Diesel Locomotives

As of March 2023, there were 585 diesel locomotives idling across the Indian Railways network due to electrification. This number has now reportedly grown to 760 locomotives, many of which still have more than 15 years of serviceable life. The root cause of this redundancy lies in the government’s mission to electrify the entire broad gauge network at an accelerated pace. This electrification push has resulted in the premature retirement of locomotives that could still serve the network for years, raising questions about the economic and environmental logic behind this decision.

The Justification for Electrification: Foreign Exchange and Environmental Concerns

The Indian government’s electrification drive is often justified on two primary grounds: saving foreign exchange by reducing the import of crude oil and reducing environmental pollution. Additionally, electrification is framed as a step toward a “green railway” powered by renewable energy sources like solar and wind. However, the reality of these claims is more complicated.

Foreign Exchange Savings: A Small Impact on National Diesel Consumption

While electrification may reduce India’s diesel consumption, the impact on national fuel use is minimal. Railways account for just 2% of the country’s total diesel consumption. A report by AC Nielsen in 2014 indicated that the transport sector consumed 70% of the total diesel, with railways accounting for only 3.24%. Even with 100% electrification, the savings in foreign exchange would have little impact on the country’s overall diesel consumption, leaving other sectors like trucking and agriculture as the main contributors.

Environmental Concerns: Shifting Pollution, Not Reducing It

The environmental argument for electrification is also flawed. Electricity in India is still largely generated from coal-fired power plants, with nearly 50% of the country’s electricity coming from coal. Since the Indian Railways is heavily involved in transporting coal, switching from diesel to electric locomotives simply shifts pollution from the tracks to the power plants. This means that the transition to electric traction will not result in a cleaner environment unless the country significantly reduces its reliance on coal. Without a substantial increase in renewable energy generation, the push for a “green railway” remains unrealistic.

The Dilemma of Retaining Diesel Locomotives for Strategic Purposes

Despite the goal of 100% electrification, a significant number of diesel locomotives will remain in service. Reports indicate that 2,500 locomotives will be kept for “disaster management” and “strategic purposes,” although it is unclear why such a large fleet is necessary for these purposes. Additionally, about 1,000 locomotives will continue to operate for several more years to meet traffic commitments. This suggests that even with a fully electrified network, Indian Railways will continue to rely on thousands of diesel locomotives, many of which have substantial residual service life left.

Financial Sustainability and Coal Dependency

The financial sustainability of this transition remains a concern. Currently, the Indian Railways generates a significant portion of its freight revenue from transporting coal—40% of its total freight earnings in 2023-24. If the railways become fully electrified, it will need to find alternative revenue sources, as coal is a primary contributor. Until non-coal freight options can replace this income, the financial health of the railways may be at risk.

Conclusion: Wasted Resources and Unmet Goals

The mission to electrify the Indian Railways, while ambitious, is an example of how vanity projects can lead to colossal waste. Thousands of diesel locomotives are being discarded prematurely, despite their potential to continue serving the network. The environmental and financial justifications for 100% electrification, while appealing in theory, fail to account for the complexities of India’s energy landscape. As a result, the drive to create a “green railway” is likely to fall short, leaving behind a legacy of wasted taxpayer money and unfinished goals.

Arctic Tundra: From Carbon Sink to Carbon Source

  • 18 Dec 2024

In News:

The Arctic tundra, a frozen, treeless biome, has historically been a vital carbon sink, absorbing vast amounts of carbon dioxide (CO?) and other greenhouse gases (GHGs). However, recent findings suggest that, for the first time in millennia, this ecosystem is emitting more carbon than it absorbs, a change that could have significant global consequences. This alarming shift was highlighted in the 2024 Arctic Report Card published by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA).

The Arctic Tundra’s Role as a Carbon Sink

The Arctic tundra plays a crucial role in regulating the Earth's climate. In typical ecosystems, plants absorb CO? through photosynthesis, and when they die, carbon is either consumed by decomposers or released back into the atmosphere. In contrast, the tundra’s cold environment significantly slows the decomposition process, trapping organic carbon in permafrost—the permanently frozen ground that underpins much of the region.

Over thousands of years, this accumulation of organic matter has resulted in the Arctic storing an estimated 1.6 trillion metric tonnes of carbon. This figure is roughly double the amount of carbon in the entire atmosphere. As such, the tundra has served as a critical carbon sink, helping to mitigate global warming by trapping vast quantities of CO?.

Shifting Dynamics: Emission of Greenhouse Gases

Recent reports indicate a dramatic shift in the Arctic tundra’s role in the carbon cycle. Rising temperatures and increasing wildfire activity have disrupted the tundra’s balance, leading it to transition from a carbon sink to a carbon source.

Impact of Rising Temperatures

The Arctic region is warming at a rate approximately four times faster than the global average. In 2024, Arctic surface air temperatures were recorded as the second-warmest on record since 1900. This rapid warming is causing permafrost to thaw, which in turn activates microbes that break down trapped organic material. As this decomposition accelerates, carbon in the form of CO? and methane (CH?)—a more potent greenhouse gas—are released into the atmosphere.

The experts, explained the process by comparing thawing permafrost to meat left out of the freezer. Similarly, thawing permafrost accelerates the breakdown of trapped carbon.

The Role of Wildfires

In addition to warming temperatures, the Arctic has experienced a surge in wildfires in recent years. 2024 marked the second-highest wildfire season on record in the region, releasing significant amounts of GHGs into the atmosphere. Wildfires exacerbate the thawing of permafrost, creating a feedback loop where increased carbon emissions contribute further to warming, which, in turn, leads to more emissions.

Between 2001 and 2020, these combined factors caused the Arctic tundra to release more carbon than it absorbed, likely for the first time in millennia.

The Global Consequences of Emission

The transition of the Arctic tundra from a carbon sink to a carbon source is alarming, as it represents a significant amplification of global climate change. The release of additional CO? and CH? into the atmosphere further accelerates the greenhouse effect, leading to higher global temperatures. This warming is already having visible consequences around the world, from extreme weather events to rising sea levels.

If the Arctic tundra continues to emit more carbon than it absorbs, it could significantly exacerbate the climate crisis. The report underscores the urgency of addressing global emissions, as reducing greenhouse gases remains the most effective way to prevent further destabilization of this sensitive ecosystem.

Mitigating the Impact: The Path Forward

Despite the alarming trends, the Arctic Report Card suggests that it is still possible to reverse this process. By reducing global GHG emissions, it may be possible to slow the thawing of permafrost and allow the Arctic tundra to regain its role as a carbon sink. Scientists emphasize that mitigating climate change on a global scale is essential to prevent further emissions from the Arctic ecosystem.

Scientists, stressed the importance of emission reductions, stating, “With lower levels of climate change, you get lower levels of emissions from permafrost… That should motivate us all to work towards more aggressive emissions reductions.”

However, current trends suggest that achieving this goal may be challenging. A recent report from the Global Carbon Project indicates that fossil fuel emissions are likely to rise in 2024, with total CO? emissions projected to reach 41.6 billion tonnes, up from 40.6 billion tonnes in 2023.

Agrarian Crisis in India

  • 15 Dec 2024

Introduction

  • Supreme Court Committee Report: A high-level committee, appointed by the Supreme Court in September 2024, submitted its interim report on November 21, 2024, highlighting the severe distress in India's agricultural sector.
  • Key Focus Areas:
    • Income crisis faced by farmers
    • Rising debt burden
    • Farmer suicides
    • Stagnation in agricultural growth
    • Impact of climate change

Key Findings of the Supreme Court Committee Report

Income Crisis in Indian Agriculture

  • Daily Earnings: Farmers earn an average of just Rs 27 per day from agricultural activities, a meager income that makes it impossible to sustain a decent standard of living.
  • Average Household Income: Agricultural households have an average monthly income of Rs 10,218, far below the basic threshold for a decent life.

Escalating Debt Burden

  • Institutional Debt: In 2022-23, Punjab's institutional debt was Rs 73,673 crore, and Haryana's was Rs 76,630 crore.
  • Non-Institutional Debt: This burden is further exacerbated by non-institutional debt, contributing 21.3% of total debt in Punjab and 32% in Haryana.

Farmer Suicides

  • High Suicide Rates: Over 400,000 farmers and agricultural workers have committed suicide since 1995, primarily due to escalating debt and financial despair.
  • Survey Findings: In Punjab, a survey found 16,606 suicides among farmers and farm workers between 2000 and 2015.

Stagnation in Agricultural Growth

  • Growth Rates: Between 2014-15 to 2022-23, Punjab's agricultural growth was a mere 2% per year, and Haryana’s was 3.38%, far below the national average.

Disproportionate Employment

  • Workforce Participation: 46% of India’s workforce is employed in agriculture, but it contributes only 15% to national income. Many farmers face disguised unemployment and underemployment.

Impact of Climate Change

  • Environmental Degradation: Climate change, water depletion, erratic rainfall, and soil degradation are further destabilizing the agricultural sector and threatening food security.

Challenges Faced by the Agricultural Sector

1. Limited Access to Credit and Finance

  • Small Farmers: 86% of Indian farmers are small and marginal, struggling to access institutional credit, which limits their ability to invest in modern agricultural inputs.

2. Fragmented Landholdings

  • Small Landholdings: The average landholding is 1.08 hectares, insufficient for large-scale, efficient farming, limiting the adoption of modern agricultural techniques.

3. Outdated Farming Practices

  • Traditional Methods: Many farmers continue using traditional, inefficient farming practices due to limited access to modern technology.

4. Water Scarcity and Irrigation Issues

  • Dependence on Monsoons: 60% of cropped area is rainfed, and only 52% of gross sown area is irrigated, exacerbating vulnerability to droughts and erratic rainfall.

5. Soil Degradation and Erosion

  • Degraded Land: 30% of India's agricultural land is affected by soil degradation, leading to lower productivity and reduced resilience to pests.

6. Inadequate Agricultural Infrastructure

  • Post-Harvest Losses: Insufficient storage, cold chain, and rural infrastructure result in 15-20% post-harvest losses, further reducing farmers' income.

Government Schemes for Farmers' Welfare

  • PM Kisan Samman Nidhi Yojana: Direct income support for farmers.
  • PM Fasal Bima Yojana (PMFBY): Crop insurance scheme.
  • PM Krishi Sinchai Yojana (PMKSY): Irrigation schemes to enhance water availability.
  • e-NAM: National electronic market for better price realization.
  • Agriculture Infrastructure Fund: Financial support for infrastructure development.
  • Promotion of Farmer Producer Organizations (FPOs): Empowering farmers through collective marketing and production.

Recommendations for Addressing the Crisis

1. Loan Waivers and Debt Relief

  • Debt Alleviation: Immediate measures to reduce the crushing debt burden through loan waivers, a key factor behind farmer suicides.

2. Legal Recognition of Minimum Support Price (MSP)

  • MSP Protection: Granting legal backing to MSP to ensure farmers receive a fair price for their produce, reducing price volatility and income insecurity.

3. Promotion of Sustainable Farming

  • Organic Farming: Encouraging organic farming and crop diversification to improve soil health and reduce dependency on a few staple crops.
  • Climate-Resilient Agriculture: Adopting water-efficient practices, drought-resistant crops, and sustainable farming techniques.

4. Agricultural Marketing Reforms

  • Market Efficiency: Improving the agricultural marketing system by establishing farmer-friendly markets and reducing intermediaries to ensure better price realization.

5. Rural Employment Generation

  • Diversification: Creating non-agricultural employment opportunities in rural areas through skill development and promoting agro-based industries.

6. Climate Adaptation Measures

  • Water Management: Enhancing water management systems and promoting rainwater harvesting.
  • Resilience to Climate Change: Investing in climate-resilient infrastructure and farming technologies.

Implications of the Findings

Economic Impact

  • Agricultural Decline: Continued neglect of the agricultural sector poses a risk to India's economy, potentially leading to long-term economic instability and increased rural-urban migration.

Food Security

  • Threat to National Food Security: Declining agricultural productivity, exacerbated by climate change and inadequate reforms, threatens the country’s ability to meet food demands.

Social Stability

  • Farmer Suicides and Unrest: The ongoing crisis, marked by widespread suicides and growing despair, risks social instability and unrest, particularly in rural regions.

Conclusion: Urgent Need for Reform

The committee’s report underscores the critical need for comprehensive reforms in India’s agricultural sector to alleviate the crisis. Immediate action is required to address the debt burden, improve incomes, and ensure sustainable agricultural practices. Legal reforms like MSP recognition and debt relief, along with investments in infrastructure and climate resilience, are key to securing a stable future for Indian agriculture.

Artificial Solar Eclipse: Why Are Satellites Trying to Block the Sun?

  • 14 Dec 2024

Introduction

The European Space Agency (ESA) has launched Proba-3, a mission that will create an artificial solar eclipse to study the Sun's atmosphere, known as the corona. This mission aims to demonstrate new technology and address unresolved questions about the Sun's outer layers.

What is an Artificial Solar Eclipse?

  • Definition: An artificial solar eclipse mimics the natural phenomenon where the moon blocks sunlight, allowing detailed observation of the Sun’s corona.
  • Created By: The eclipse is created by two satellites, which align to block the Sun's light and generate a controlled shadow for scientific study.
  • Purpose: The goal is to study the Sun’s corona, particularly to understand why it is significantly hotter than the Sun’s surface.

How Does the Proba-3 Create an Eclipse?

Launch and Spacecraft

Proba-3 was launched on December 5 from the Satish Dhawan Space Centre in India. The mission uses two satellites:

  • Coronagraph Spacecraft (CSC): This spacecraft guides the other satellite.
  • Occulter Spacecraft (OSC): This satellite has a disk that creates a controlled shadow onto the CSC.

Formation Flying

Using Precise Formation Flying (PFF) technology, the two spacecraft maintain a precise distance of 150 meters (492 feet) apart, aligning perfectly with the Sun. This alignment mimics the effect of a solar eclipse.

Precision Requirements

The eclipse will need to maintain millimetre-level accuracy for up to six hours per orbit to provide scientists with stable observational conditions.

Mission Goals

  • Demonstrating PFF Technology: One of the primary objectives of the Proba-3 mission is to demonstrate PFF technology. This involves using GPS and inter-satellite radio links for positioning, as well as maintaining a precise distance between the two spacecraft.
  • Studying the Sun’s Corona: Another goal is to understand why the corona is hotter than the Sun's surface. The onboard instruments, including a coronagraph, will help with this research. The coronagraph will block out the Sun’s bright light, enabling clearer observations of the corona.
  • ASPICCS Coronagraph: The Proba-3 coronagraph, named the Association of Spacecraft for Polarimetric and Imaging Investigation of the Corona of the Sun (ASPICCS), is designed to observe the corona in high detail, mimicking the observational conditions of a total solar eclipse.

Why Is This Such a Big Deal?

  • Revealing the Sun’s Corona: The Sun’s corona is typically invisible because it is much less bright than the Sun’s surface. It can only be seen during a solar eclipse when the Moon blocks the Sun's light.
  • Predicting Space Weather: Studying the corona helps scientists predict space weather and geomagnetic storms, which can disrupt satellites and other systems on Earth.
  • Extended Observations: Unlike natural solar eclipses, which last only a few minutes, Proba-3 can provide six hours of observation time in each orbit (approximately 19 hours and 36 minutes), allowing for continuous study of the corona.

What is Precise Formation Flying (PFF) Technology?

  • Definition: PFF technology allows satellites to maintain exact positions and orientations relative to each other in orbit.
  • Mechanism: The technology uses GPS, inter-satellite radio links, and automated control systems to ensure alignment.
  • Implementation in Proba-3: In the Proba-3 mission, the Coronagraph and Occulter spacecraft stay 150 meters apart, using PFF to maintain millimetre-level precision, which is crucial for simulating a solar eclipse.
  • Benefits: PFF enhances mission accuracy and provides a platform for advanced observational techniques that will enable more detailed studies of the Sun's corona.

Conclusion

Proba-3 is a groundbreaking mission that will offer unprecedented insights into the Sun’s corona by simulating solar eclipses using advanced satellite technology. By studying the Sun’s outer layers, scientists aim to improve our understanding of space weather and the mysterious temperature anomaly of the corona.

Impeachment of Judges

  • 12 Dec 2024

In News:

The recent controversy surrounding remarks made by Justice Shekhar Kumar Yadav of the Allahabad High Court has prompted calls for his impeachment. During an event organized by the Vishwa Hindu Parishad (VHP), Justice Yadav made statements that were perceived as communal, leading to concerns over judicial impartiality. This incident has reignited discussions about the impeachment process for judges in India, highlighting the delicate balance between judicial independence and accountability.

Impeachment Process for Judges in India

In India, the impeachment process for judges, although not explicitly mentioned in the Constitution, serves as a mechanism to ensure judicial accountability while safeguarding judicial independence. The process is outlined under Articles 124 and 218 of the Indian Constitution, which govern the removal of Supreme Court and High Court judges, respectively.

Grounds for Impeachment

Judges in India can be removed on two grounds:

  • Proved Misbehavior: Conduct that breaches the ethical standards of the judiciary.
  • Incapacity: A judge’s inability to perform judicial duties due to physical or mental infirmity.

These grounds are clearly specified to prevent arbitrary removal, ensuring that the process remains fair and just.

Steps in the Impeachment Process

  • Initiation of Motion: The process begins when a motion for impeachment is introduced in Parliament, either in the Lok Sabha or Rajya Sabha. The motion must be supported by at least 100 members of the Lok Sabha or 50 members of the Rajya Sabha. This ensures significant parliamentary backing before the motion proceeds.
  • Formation of an Inquiry Committee: If the motion is admitted, a three-member inquiry committee is constituted. This includes a Supreme Court judge, the Chief Justice of a High Court, and a distinguished jurist. The committee conducts a thorough investigation into the allegations.
  • Committee Report and Parliamentary Debate: Following the investigation, the committee submits its findings. If the judge is found guilty, the report is debated in Parliament. Both Houses must approve the motion by a special majority, which requires a two-thirds majority of members present and voting, as well as a majority of the total membership.
  • Final Removal by the President: Once the motion is passed in both Houses, it is presented to the President, who issues the removal order.

Safeguards Against Misuse

The impeachment process includes several safeguards to prevent misuse:

  • High Threshold for Initiation: The requirement for significant support from Parliament ensures that the process cannot be initiated frivolously.
  • Objective Inquiry: The inquiry committee, comprising legal experts, guarantees an impartial investigation.
  • Parliamentary Scrutiny: Both Houses of Parliament are involved, ensuring that the process undergoes democratic scrutiny.

Challenges and Precedents

Despite the rigorous process, no Supreme Court judge has been successfully impeached to date. Past attempts, such as those against Justice V. Ramaswami (1993) and Chief Justice Dipak Misra (2018), were unsuccessful. These instances demonstrate the complexities involved in the impeachment process.

Guidelines for Judges’ Public Statements

Judges in India are entitled to freedom of speech, but they are expected to exercise caution in public statements to maintain the dignity of their office. The Bangalore Principles of Judicial Conduct (2002) and the Restatement of Values of Judicial Life (1997) outline key principles for judicial conduct, including:

  • Non-Interference in Political Matters: Judges should refrain from commenting on political issues to avoid any perception of bias.
  • Impartiality: Judges must avoid statements that could prejudice ongoing cases or align them with specific ideologies.

Upholding Judicial Impartiality in a Diverse Society

To maintain impartiality, judges must interpret laws based on constitutional values of justice, equality, and secularism. Furthermore, the judiciary must ensure representation from diverse backgrounds to foster inclusivity and reduce systemic biases. Training programs focused on cultural competence and social diversity are essential to ensure that judges are sensitive to the needs of marginalized communities.

Conclusion

The impeachment process, while stringent, plays a critical role in maintaining judicial accountability in India. As seen in the case of Justice Yadav, judicial conduct, particularly public statements, must be carefully scrutinized to preserve the integrity of the judiciary. Upholding impartiality and adhering to constitutional values are paramount in ensuring that the judiciary continues to function as a neutral arbiter in India’s democracy.

Analysis of Female Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR) Trends in India: 2017-2023

  • 11 Dec 2024

In News:

The Economic Advisory Council to the Prime Minister (EAC-PM) recently released a working paper revealing critical insights into the trends of female Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR) in India from 2017-18 to 2022-23. The report highlights an overall increase in female LFPR, with rural areas experiencing more significant growth compared to urban areas. This article delves into the key findings, regional disparities, influencing factors, and government initiatives aimed at promoting female workforce participation.

Key Findings on Female LFPR

The period between 2017-18 and 2022-23 witnessed a notable rise in female LFPR, both in rural and urban regions, though rural areas saw higher gains.

Rural female LFPR surged by approximately 69%, from 24.6% to 41.5%, while urban female LFPR increased from 20.4% to 25.4%. This consistent growth was observed even after excluding unpaid family workers or household helpers, reinforcing the long-term trend of increased female workforce participation across India.

However, a significant point of discussion in the report was the regional variations in female LFPR. States like Bihar, Punjab, and Haryana have consistently reported low female LFPR, which is noteworthy considering that Punjab and Haryana are among India's wealthiest states, while Bihar is the poorest. This regional disparity suggests that economic prosperity does not automatically translate into higher female labour force participation, highlighting deeper socio-cultural and structural barriers.

Regional Disparities in Female LFPR

The report emphasizes the persistent challenges in northern and eastern India. Punjab and Haryana, despite their affluence, have struggled with low female LFPR. Cultural and societal norms in these regions may contribute to the underrepresentation of women in the workforce, particularly in rural areas where traditional gender roles are more entrenched.

On the other hand, Bihar, the poorest state in India, had the lowest female LFPR in the country, particularly in rural areas. However, there has been a significant improvement in recent years, especially among rural married women. This indicates a slow but positive shift in attitudes towards female employment in these states.

In contrast, northeastern states such as Nagaland and Arunachal Pradesh have shown significant improvements in female LFPR, particularly in rural areas. These states have demonstrated that regional and cultural factors can also create conducive environments for female workforce participation.

Demographic Factors Affecting Female LFPR

Several demographic patterns influence female LFPR, including marital status and age. The report notes that married men consistently exhibit higher LFPR compared to women. Marriage, however, has a detrimental impact on female LFPR, particularly in urban areas, where women often face greater familial and societal pressures to prioritize domestic responsibilities over formal employment.

Age dynamics also play a crucial role in female LFPR trends. The data reveals a bell-shaped curve for female participation, peaking around the age of 30-40 years and sharply declining thereafter. This is in stark contrast to male LFPR, which remains almost universally high between the ages of 30-50 before gradually declining. These trends underscore the challenges women face in sustaining their participation in the workforce due to familial responsibilities, especially after marriage and childbirth.

Government Initiatives and the Rise in Female LFPR

The government's focus on women-led development is evident through various schemes aimed at increasing female workforce participation. Programs like Mudra Loans, the Drone Didi Scheme, and the Deendayal Antyodaya Yojana have been particularly instrumental in empowering women, especially in rural areas. These initiatives provide women with access to financial resources, skill development opportunities, and avenues for entrepreneurship, all of which contribute to the rise in female LFPR.

The EAC-PM's analysis acknowledges the positive impact of these government schemes, but it also stresses the need for further research to evaluate their long-term effectiveness. While the descriptive analysis highlights a substantial increase in female LFPR between 2017-18 and 2022-23, especially in rural areas, there remains a need for continuous monitoring and assessment of these schemes to ensure their sustained impact.

Conclusion: A Positive Shift, but Challenges Remain

The increase in female LFPR across India from 2017-18 to 2022-23 signals a positive shift in employment trends, particularly in rural areas. However, regional disparities, societal norms, and demographic factors continue to pose challenges. The rise in female LFPR is encouraging, but it is essential to understand the deeper socio-economic factors that shape women's participation in the workforce.

Government schemes have contributed to this growth, but future research is necessary to gauge their long-term effects and ensure that women’s participation in the workforce is not just a short-term trend. It is crucial that the government continues to refine policies that support women in overcoming socio-cultural and economic barriers, especially in less prosperous states like Bihar, Punjab, and Haryana. Sustained efforts, including education, skill development, and gender-sensitive policies, will be key to ensuring that the rise in female LFPR is both inclusive and long-lasting.

The analysis by the EAC-PM provides an essential framework for policymakers to design more targeted interventions to address regional disparities and create a more inclusive labor market for women in India.

No-Confidence Motion Against Rajya Sabha Chairman

  • 10 Dec 2024

In News:

In December 2024, around 60 opposition MPs from the INDIA (Indian National Developmental, Inclusive Alliance) bloc submitted a notice to the Rajya Sabha Secretariat, seeking the removal of Vice President Jagdeep Dhankhar from his position as the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha. This unprecedented move has sparked significant political debate, with the opposition accusing Dhankhar of partisanship and bias in the conduct of parliamentary proceedings.

The Charges Against Jagdeep Dhankhar

Allegations of Bias and Partisanship

The opposition has raised several allegations against Dhankhar since his appointment as the Rajya Sabha Chairman in August 2022. These include:

  • Partiality towards the ruling government: The opposition claims that Dhankhar has shown bias in favor of the BJP, with accusations of repeatedly denying the Leader of the Opposition, Mallikarjun Kharge, the opportunity to respond to statements made by Prime Minister Narendra Modi and BJP President J.P. Nadda.
  • Interference in Parliamentary Debates: Opposition MPs have accused Dhankhar of disrupting their speeches and allowing ruling party members to dominate parliamentary discussions.
  • Unbecoming Remarks: The notice also refers to comments made by Dhankhar, including praising the Rashtriya Swayamsevak Sangh (RSS) and recalling his association with "so-called cultural organizations." These actions, according to the opposition, violate the non-partisan nature expected of the Chairman.

The Constitutional Framework for Removal of the Vice-President

Legal Provisions for Impeachment

The Vice-President of India, who also serves as the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha, is elected for a five-year term. Article 67 of the Indian Constitution outlines the procedure for his removal:

  • Notice Requirement: A motion for the removal of the Vice-President must be introduced in the Rajya Sabha with a prior 14-day notice.
  • Approval Process: The resolution must be passed by a majority in the Rajya Sabha and then approved by the Lok Sabha.
  • Grounds for Removal: The Vice-President can only be removed through a resolution that is supported by a majority in both Houses of Parliament.

Opposition’s Plan and Challenges

Despite lacking the necessary numbers in the Rajya Sabha to succeed in the impeachment motion, the opposition's move is aimed at sending a political message to the BJP, expressing dissatisfaction with the functioning of the Parliament under Dhankhar’s leadership.

The current session of Parliament is scheduled to end on December 20, 2024, leaving little time for the motion to gain traction. The opposition also does not have the numbers needed for a majority in the Rajya Sabha, which complicates the chances of success for the motion.

Historical Precedents for Similar Resolutions

The last notable attempt to remove a parliamentary officer occurred in 2020 when the opposition moved a no-confidence motion against Rajya Sabha Deputy Chairman Harivansh. This motion was prompted by his decision to extend the session during the contentious farm Bills debate. Although the motion was discussed, it did not result in any significant change.

Similarly, there have been instances where motions to remove Lok Sabha Speakers have been moved but not passed, such as against G.V. Mavalankar in 1951, Sardar Hukam Singh in 1966, and Balram Jakhar in 1987.

Role and Significance of the Vice-President in India

Constitutional Role

The Vice-President of India holds the second-highest constitutional office, primarily functioning as the ex-officio Chairman of the Rajya Sabha. His duties include:

  • Presiding over Rajya Sabha Sessions: The Vice-President ensures the smooth functioning of the Rajya Sabha and maintains order during debates. He does not typically vote except in the case of a tie.
  • Acting President: In the absence, resignation, or death of the President, the Vice-President assumes the role of the Acting President.

Removal Process Under Article 67

  • Article 67(b) of the Constitution specifies the process for the removal of the Vice-President, requiring a 14-day notice and approval from both Houses of Parliament. This provision ensures that any such resolution receives due consideration and is not moved hastily.

Implications for Parliamentary Democracy

  • Risks to Parliamentary Integrity: Opposition leaders have expressed concern that the current political environment is eroding the integrity of India’s parliamentary system. They argue that by misusing constitutional offices for partisan ends, the ruling government risks undermining the democratic foundations of the country.

Significance of the Move

  • Although the opposition may not succeed in removing Dhankhar, the notice serves as a powerful symbol of resistance. The move underscores the opposition’s commitment to defending the principles of parliamentary democracy and the need for impartiality in the conduct of parliamentary affairs.

Conclusion

The opposition’s push to remove Vice-President Jagdeep Dhankhar from his position as the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha highlights the growing political tensions in India’s Parliament. While the move may not succeed due to the lack of numerical support, it brings to the forefront critical issues regarding the independence of constitutional offices and the functioning of parliamentary democracy in India. The developments around this notice will continue to be a significant point of discussion as the winter session of Parliament draws to a close.

Beware of Digital Wedding Invites

  • 08 Dec 2024

In News:

In the peak wedding season, cyber fraudsters are increasingly exploiting digital wedding invitations to hack into mobile phones. These fraudulent invites, often disguised as PDF wedding cards shared on WhatsApp, contain embedded malware that allows cybercriminals to gain full access to the victim's phone. This includes access to sensitive financial data, making individuals vulnerable to fraud. The Lucknow Police Cyber Cell has issued a public warning, urging citizens to be cautious and avoid opening suspicious files.

How the Scam Works

The scam involves cybercriminals sending out malware-laden wedding invitations. Once the recipient opens the file, the malware infects their phone, enabling the fraudsters to remotely control the device. From there, they can access sensitive information, including bank account details, and may even transfer funds without the victim’s consent.

Preventive Measures and Cyber Hygiene

To protect against such scams, individuals should follow these preventive steps:

  • Avoid Suspicious Files: Do not open files from unknown senders, particularly those with extensions like APK, PIF, or VBS. It is crucial to verify the sender's number—legitimate Indian numbers typically begin with +91.
  • Turn Off Auto-Download: Disabling automatic downloads on platforms like WhatsApp can prevent files from being opened unknowingly.
  • Enable Two-Step Verification: Strengthen security by activating two-step verification on your digital accounts and setting strong passwords.
  • Report Fraud Immediately: In case of suspicious activity, contact the cybercrime helpline at 1930 or file a complaint on the official cybercrime portal (www.cybercrime.gov.in).

The Lucknow Police’s “Cyber Pathshala” campaign aims to raise awareness and educate the public on digital scams, particularly during the wedding season when these frauds are at their peak.

Cybersecurity Challenges in India

This emerging digital threat is part of a broader trend of sophisticated cybercrimes in India. Cyber fraudsters are increasingly using manipulative tactics, such as phishing, fake digital arrests, and malware attacks. In 2024, India witnessed a significant rise in ransomware attacks, frauds targeting financial institutions, and supply chain vulnerabilities.

India's legislative and institutional frameworks are evolving to address these challenges. Key measures include:

  • The Information Technology Act, 2000, which lays the foundation for tackling cybercrimes.
  • The Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023, which focuses on protecting personal data.
  • The Indian Computer Emergency Response Team (CERT-In), which coordinates national responses to cyber incidents.

Additionally, new frameworks like the National Cyber Security Policy, 2013, and initiatives such as Cyber Surakshit Bharat and the Indian Cyber Crime Coordination Centre (I4C), aim to fortify India's digital landscape and promote cybersecurity.

Emerging Cyber Threats

As India becomes more digitally connected, the threat landscape continues to evolve:

  • Digital Arrest Scams: Fraudsters impersonate law enforcement to extort money from victims, claiming they are under investigation for fictitious crimes.
  • Ransomware: Attacks on critical infrastructure, such as financial institutions and healthcare systems, have led to operational disruptions and financial losses.
  • Deepfake Technology: The rise of AI-generated deepfakes poses significant risks, including misinformation and financial fraud.
  • Internet of Things (IoT) Vulnerabilities: The rapid adoption of IoT devices has created new security challenges, with many devices lacking adequate protection.

Strategic Recommendations for Enhancing Cybersecurity

To counter these evolving threats, India must focus on several strategic areas:

  • Digital Literacy Campaigns: Nationwide efforts to improve digital literacy, particularly targeting vulnerable groups such as rural populations and senior citizens.
  • Stronger IoT Security Protocols: Mandating secure design and certification for IoT devices.
  • AI-Driven Threat Intelligence: Implementing AI-based tools for early threat detection and response in critical sectors.
  • Mandatory Cybersecurity Audits: Regular audits of critical infrastructure, especially in sectors like healthcare, banking, and utilities.
  • Public-Private Collaboration: Strengthening partnerships to address challenges such as cryptocurrency fraud, ransomware, and dark web-enabled crimes.

Conclusion

The rise of digital fraud, including the manipulation of wedding invitations for malicious purposes, highlights the need for enhanced cybersecurity measures in India. By improving public awareness, investing in technological solutions, and reinforcing legal and institutional frameworks, India can better protect its citizens from the growing threat of cybercrime. A proactive and informed approach is essential to secure the digital future of the nation.

Building on the Revival of the Manufacturing Sector

  • 07 Dec 2024

In News:

India’s manufacturing sector has shown remarkable signs of recovery and growth, thanks to strategic policy initiatives like the Production Linked Incentive (PLI) scheme. To fully capitalize on this momentum and become a global manufacturing hub, however, deeper reforms are needed.

The Success of the PLI Scheme: A Catalyst for Growth

The government’s PLI scheme has been instrumental in revitalizing key sectors like electronics, pharmaceuticals, automobiles, and textiles. It has not only boosted production but also increased exports and job creation. According to the Annual Survey of Industries (ASI) 2022-23, manufacturing output grew by an impressive 21.5%, while gross value added (GVA) increased by 7.3%. Sectors such as basic metals, refined petroleum products, food products, and motor vehicles, which are beneficiaries of the PLI scheme, contributed 58% of total manufacturing output, registering growth of 24.5%.

This success underlines the potential of India’s manufacturing sector, with the PLI scheme acting as a key enabler. However, while the recovery is promising, there are significant challenges to overcome to sustain long-term growth.

Expanding PLI Incentives to New Sectors

The PLI scheme has largely benefitted traditional industries like electronics and automotive manufacturing. To further accelerate growth, the scope of the scheme must be extended to labour-intensive sectors such as apparel, footwear, and furniture, which hold immense potential for job creation. Additionally, emerging sectors like aerospace, space technology, and maintenance, repair, and overhaul (MRO) services offer new avenues for growth. By diversifying the incentive structure to these sectors, India could establish a more robust and resilient manufacturing ecosystem.

In sectors like capital goods, where India is heavily import-dependent, the potential for reducing supply chain vulnerabilities is significant. Moreover, promoting green manufacturing and advanced technologies could further bolster India’s competitiveness in global markets.

Addressing the Divergence Between Output and Value Addition

Despite a surge in production, India’s gross value added (GVA) has not kept pace with output growth. The ASI data shows that input prices soared by 24.4% in 2022-23, indicating that while production volumes are up, industries are grappling with high input costs. A more streamlined import regime could mitigate these costs. Simplifying tariffs into a three-tier system (for raw materials, intermediates, and finished goods) would reduce input costs, enhance competitiveness, and improve integration into global value chains.

Regional Imbalance: A Barrier to Inclusive Growth

The manufacturing sector’s growth is heavily concentrated in a few states such as Maharashtra, Gujarat, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka, and Uttar Pradesh, which account for over 54% of manufacturing GVA. This concentration not only restricts equitable development but also hampers the overall growth potential of the sector. To address this, it is crucial that states actively participate in India's manufacturing growth story by implementing market reforms in land, labour, and power. Additionally, infrastructure development and investment promotion in less industrialized regions could help balance growth and ensure that the benefits of manufacturing reach all corners of the country.

Fostering MSME Growth and Enhancing Female Workforce Participation

Micro, small, and medium enterprises (MSMEs) contribute about 45% of India’s manufacturing GDP and employ around 60 million people. To scale these businesses and integrate them into global value chains, PLIs should be tailored to accommodate their needs, such as lowering capital investment thresholds and reducing production targets.

Equally important is the enhancement of female workforce participation. Studies suggest that India’s manufacturing output could increase by 9% if more women enter the workforce. The development of supportive infrastructure, such as hostels and childcare facilities, can play a pivotal role in enabling women’s participation, thus driving inclusive growth.

Conclusion: The Path Forward

To transform into a developed economy by 2047, India must continue to focus on strengthening its manufacturing sector. According to industry estimates, manufacturing’s share in Gross Value Added (GVA) can rise from 17% to 25% by 2030 and further to 27% by 2047. Achieving this will require sustained efforts to enhance competitiveness through business reforms, cost reduction, and policy support. India is well-positioned to harness its manufacturing potential, but timely and focused interventions are necessary to turn this vision into reality.

Scrapping of Windfall Gains Tax

  • 05 Dec 2024

Introduction

On December 2, 2024, the Indian government withdrew the windfall gains tax on domestic crude oil production and fuel exports (diesel, petrol, and aviation turbine fuel - ATF). This tax, initially imposed in July 2022, was introduced in response to the surge in global oil prices following Russia's invasion of Ukraine. Its removal reflects the current global oil market stability and the improved fuel supply situation in India.

What is Windfall Gains Tax?

Definition

A windfall tax is a levy imposed on unexpected profits that result from extraordinary events, such as geopolitical crises or market disruptions. In the case of India, the tax was applied to the super-normal profits of oil producers and fuel exporters due to the global energy turmoil.

Key Features

  • Domestic Crude Oil: The Special Additional Excise Duty (SAED) was imposed on domestic crude oil production.
  • Fuel Exports: A combination of SAED and Road and Infrastructure Cess (RIC) was levied on diesel, petrol, and ATF exports.

Rationale Behind the Windfall Gains Tax

Immediate Context

The tax was introduced during a period of soaring global crude oil prices, driven by the Russia-Ukraine conflict. India, which imports over 85% of its oil, faced concerns about the availability of fuels and the impact of rising prices on domestic consumption. The tax was seen as a way to:

  • Ensure Domestic Fuel Supply: By discouraging excessive fuel exports during a period of global supply chain disruptions.
  • Increase Government Revenue: The tax aimed to capture windfall profits and offset the duty cuts on domestic fuel sales.

Global Context

Other countries also implemented similar windfall taxes during this period, as energy companies saw record profits due to the price surge.

Decline in Windfall Gains Tax Revenue

Revenue Collection

The windfall gains tax initially raised significant revenue, but the amount has decreased over time due to falling global oil prices:

  • FY 2022-23: Rs 25,000 crore
  • FY 2023-24: Rs 13,000 crore
  • FY 2024-25 (so far): Rs 6,000 crore

This decline, combined with reduced oil prices, led to the tax being effectively inactive before its formal withdrawal.

Withdrawal of the Windfall Gains Tax

Reasons for the Withdrawal

  • Global Stabilization: Crude oil prices, which had exceeded $100 per barrel, have now stabilized under $75 per barrel, with no immediate signs of a significant price surge.
  • Domestic Fuel Availability: There is now a robust fuel supply in the domestic market, making the tax less necessary.
  • Declining Revenues: With the tax generating diminishing returns, it was no longer economically viable for the government to maintain it.

Impact of the Scrapping

The government's move to scrap the windfall gains tax is seen as a signal of stability and predictability in the taxation regime. It assures the oil industry that the government is confident in the stability of global oil prices and supply chains.

Criticism of the Windfall Tax

Industry Opposition

The windfall tax faced opposition from the oil industry, which argued that it:

  • Reduced Profitability: The tax limited the profits of publicly listed companies like ONGC and Reliance Industries.
  • Discouraged Oil Production: By making the taxation environment unpredictable, it deterred investment in oil exploration and production in a country that is heavily dependent on oil imports.
  • Created Uncertainty: Frequent revisions of the tax led to an unstable business environment.

Conclusion

The scrapping of the windfall gains tax is a significant policy shift. It not only provides relief to oil companies but also signals a more predictable and stable taxation regime. By withdrawing the tax, the government is fostering a conducive environment for future investments in domestic oil production and signaling its confidence in the stability of global oil prices. This move is a crucial step in ensuring that India’s energy policies remain adaptable and aligned with the evolving global market conditions.

Current Representation of Women in CAPFs

  • 04 Dec 2024

In News:

The Central Armed Police Forces (CAPFs) of India, comprising forces like CRPF, BSF, CISF, and others, play a crucial role in maintaining internal security. Women’s participation in these forces has been historically limited, but recent efforts have focused on increasing their representation. As of 2024, women constitute only 4.4% of the total personnel in CAPFs, highlighting the slow progress despite various initiatives.

Current Representation and Changes Over Time

  • Overall Representation: Women make up 4.4% of the 9.48 lakh-strong CAPFs. Within this, the Central Industrial Security Force (CISF) has the highest representation at 7.02%, followed by the Sashastra Seema Bal (SSB) at 4.43%, Border Security Force (BSF) at 4.41%, Indo-Tibetan Border Police (ITBP) at 4.05%, Assam Rifles at 4.01%, and Central Reserve Police Force (CRPF) at 3.38%.
  • Growth of Women Personnel: From 15,499 women in 2014, the number has tripled to 42,190 in 2024, reflecting a steady increase in recruitment. However, the percentage remains low despite these gains.
  • Recruitment Trends: In 2024, 835 women were recruited, with 5,469 more in the process. In 2025, 4,138 women are expected to be recruited.

Government Efforts and Parliamentary Committee Recommendations

  • Policy Measures: The government has introduced several steps to encourage women’s participation in CAPFs, such as reservations in constable-level positions: one-third for CRPF and CISF, and 14-15% for border forces like BSF, SSB, and ITBP.
  • Challenges in Recruitment: Despite these policies, recruitment has not kept pace with the targets. The 2022 Parliamentary Committee on Home Affairs expressed disappointment over the “abysmally low” number of women in CAPFs, noting that women made up only 3.68% of the forces at that time.
  • Recommendations by Parliamentary Committees:
    • The Home Affairs Committee recommended fast-tracking phase-wise recruitment of women, particularly in CISF and CRPF.
    • The Standing Committee on Personnel (2023) suggested “soft postings” for women to avoid difficult working conditions, especially in remote or strenuous terrains. It also called for reservations for transgender individuals.
    • In 2024, further steps like fee waivers, relaxed physical standards, and provisions for maternity and child care leave were introduced to make the work environment more inclusive.

Reasons Behind Low Representation

  • Cultural Barriers: Traditional gender roles and societal expectations deter many women from pursuing careers in security forces.
  • Work Environment: The demanding nature of the job, which includes postings in remote areas and high-risk operations, makes it less appealing, especially for women with family responsibilities.
  • Infrastructure Issues: Lack of adequate accommodation, sanitation facilities, and safety measures for women are deterrents to joining and retaining female personnel.

Conclusion and Future Outlook

Although the representation of women in CAPFs has seen improvement, it remains below expectations due to persistent challenges. The government’s continuous focus on recruitment reforms, better working conditions, and policy incentives will be crucial to achieve gender parity in these forces. As societal attitudes evolve and the infrastructure improves, more women may be encouraged to serve in these vital security roles. Future efforts must include targeted recruitment drives and creating a more inclusive and supportive environment to enhance women’s participation in CAPFs.

India's Gig Economy: Growth and Impact on Employment

  • 03 Dec 2024

Introduction

India’s gig economy is experiencing rapid growth, with projections indicating it will significantly contribute to the national economy and employment generation. A recent report by the Forum for Progressive Gig Workers estimates the gig economy could reach $455 billion by the end of 2024, growing at a 17% compounded annual growth rate (CAGR). By 2030, it may add 1.25% to India’s GDP and create 90 million jobs.

What is the Gig Economy?

  • Definition: The gig economy refers to a labor market based on short-term, flexible jobs, typically facilitated by digital platforms. Gig workers, also called freelancers or independent contractors, are compensated for each task they complete.
  • Key Features:
    • Flexibility in work schedule and location.
    • Task-based employment through digital platforms.
    • Common sectors: e-commerce, transportation, delivery services, and freelance work.

Status of the Gig Economy in India

  • Market Growth:
    • In 2020-21, India had 7.7 million gig workers, which is expected to grow to 23.5 million by 2029-30.
    • Key sectors contributing to growth include e-commerce, transportation, and delivery services.
  • Driving Factors:
    • Digital Penetration: With over 936 million internet subscribers and 650 million smartphone users, digital infrastructure is a key enabler of the gig economy.
    • Startup and E-commerce Growth: The rise of startups and e-commerce platforms has increased demand for flexible labor.
    • Changing Work Preferences: Younger generations seek work-life balance, opting for flexible gig work.

Gig Economy and Employment Generation

  • Contribution to GDP: The gig economy is expected to contribute 1.25% to India’s GDP by 2030.
  • Job Creation:
    • The gig economy could create up to 90 million jobs by 2030.
    • It is estimated that by 2030, gig workers will comprise 4.1% of India’s total workforce.
  • Benefits:
    • Women’s Empowerment: Gig work provides financial independence and flexibility, especially benefiting women in the workforce.
    • Regional Growth: Tier-II and Tier-III cities are seeing accelerated growth in gig work opportunities.

Challenges Faced by Gig Workers

  • Job Insecurity: Many gig workers experience instability in their employment, especially in low-skilled jobs.
  • Income Volatility: Earnings are unpredictable, and workers face difficulty in financial planning.
  • Regulatory Gaps: There is no comprehensive legal framework to protect gig workers’ rights and ensure fair working conditions.
  • Delayed Payments: A significant number of workers face delayed payments, affecting their financial well-being.
  • Skill Development: Many workers report a lack of opportunities for career advancement and skill development.

Government Initiatives for Gig Workers

  • Code on Social Security, 2020: Recognizes gig workers and aims to extend social security benefits, though it lacks comprehensive coverage.
  • e-Shram Portal & Welfare Schemes: Initiatives like Pradhan Mantri Shram Yogi Maandhan Yojana and PMJJBY aim to provide financial security to gig workers.
  • State-level Initiatives:
    • Rajasthan’s Platform-Based Gig Workers Act (2023) focuses on registration and welfare.
    • Karnataka’s bill mandates formal registration and grievance mechanisms.

The Way Forward

  • Legal Reforms: India can draw from international models like California and the Netherlands, where gig workers are reclassified as employees to ensure protections such as minimum wages and regulated working hours.
  • Portable Benefits System: Implementing a system where gig workers can access benefits like healthcare and retirement plans regardless of their employer.
  • Skill Development: Strengthening collaborations with vocational institutions to enhance skills and improve earning potential.
  • Technological Solutions: Establishing robust feedback mechanisms for workers to report exploitation and ensure fairness within the gig economy.

Conclusion

The gig economy in India is poised to become a significant driver of economic growth and job creation. However, addressing challenges such as income volatility, job insecurity, and regulatory gaps is crucial to ensuring sustainable growth.

National Mission on Natural Farming (NMNF)

  • 29 Nov 2024

In News:

The Union Cabinet recently approved the launch of the National Mission on Natural Farming (NMNF), marking a significant shift in the government's approach to agriculture. This initiative, a standalone Centrally Sponsored Scheme under the Ministry of Agriculture & Farmers' Welfare, aims to promote natural farming across India, focusing on reducing dependence on chemical fertilizers and promoting environmentally sustainable practices.

What is Natural Farming?

Natural farming, as defined by the Ministry of Agriculture, is a chemical-free agricultural method that relies on inputs derived from livestock and plant resources. The goal is to encourage farmers to adopt practices that rejuvenate soil health, improve water use efficiency, and enhance biodiversity, while reducing the harmful effects of fertilizers and pesticides on human health and the environment. The NMNF will initially target regions with high fertilizer consumption, focusing on areas where the need for sustainable farming practices is most urgent.

Evolution of Natural Farming Initiatives

The NMNF is not an entirely new concept but a scaled-up version of the Bhartiya Prakritik Krishi Paddhti (BPKP) introduced during the NDA government's second term (2019-24). The BPKP was part of the larger Paramparagat Krishi Vikas Yojna (PKVY) umbrella scheme, and natural farming was also promoted along the Ganga River under the NamamiGange initiative in 2022-23. With the renewed focus on natural farming following the 2024 elections, the government aims to extend the lessons learned from BPKP into a comprehensive mission mode, setting a clear direction for sustainable agriculture.

In Budget speech for 2024-25, it was announced a plan to initiate one crore farmers into natural farming over the next two years. The mission will be implemented through scientific institutions and willing gram panchayats, with the establishment of 10,000 bio-input resource centers (BRCs) to ensure easy access to the necessary inputs for natural farming.

Key Objectives

The NMNF aims to bring about a paradigm shift in agricultural practices by:

  • Expanding Coverage: The mission plans to bring an additional 7.5 lakh hectares of land under natural farming within the next two years. This will be achieved through the establishment of 15,000 clusters in gram panchayats, benefiting 1 crore farmers.
  • Training and Awareness: The mission will establish around 2,000 model demonstration farms at Krishi Vigyan Kendras (KVKs), Agricultural Universities (AUs), and farmers' fields. These farms will serve as hubs for training farmers in natural farming techniques and input preparation, such as Jeevamrit and Beejamrit, using locally available resources.
  • Incentivizing Local Inputs: The creation of 10,000 bio-input resource centers will provide farmers with easy access to bio-fertilizers and other natural farming inputs. The mission emphasizes the use of locally sourced inputs to reduce costs and improve the sustainability of farming practices.
  • Farmer Empowerment: 30,000 Krishi Sakhis (community resource persons) will be deployed to assist in mobilizing and guiding farmers. These trained individuals will play a key role in generating awareness and providing on-ground support to the farmers practicing natural farming.
  • Certifications and Branding: A major aspect of the mission is to establish scientific standards for natural farming produce, along with a national certification system. This will help in creating a market for organically grown produce and encourage more farmers to adopt sustainable practices.

Targeting High Fertilizer Consumption Areas

The Ministry of Agriculture has identified 228 districts in 16 states, including Uttar Pradesh, Punjab, Maharashtra, and West Bengal, where fertilizer consumption is above the national average. These districts will be prioritized for the NMNF rollout, as they have high fertilizer usage but low adoption of natural farming practices. By focusing on these areas, the mission seeks to reduce the over-dependence on chemical fertilizers and foster a transition to more sustainable farming practices.

Benefits of Natural Farming

The NMNF aims to deliver multiple benefits to farmers and the environment:

  • Cost Reduction: Natural farming practices can significantly reduce input costs by decreasing the need for costly chemical fertilizers and pesticides.
  • Soil Health and Fertility: By rejuvenating the soil through organic inputs, natural farming improves soil structure, fertility, and microbial activity, leading to long-term agricultural sustainability.
  • Climate Resilience: Natural farming enhances resilience to climate-induced challenges such as drought, floods, and waterlogging.
  • Healthier Produce: Reduced use of chemicals results in safer, healthier food, benefitting both farmers and consumers.
  • Environmental Conservation: The promotion of biodiversity, water conservation, and carbon sequestration in soil leads to a healthier environment for future generations.

Conclusion

The launch of the National Mission on Natural Farming represents a critical step toward transforming India's agricultural practices into a more sustainable and environmentally friendly model. By targeting regions with high fertilizer usage, providing farmers with the tools and knowledge for natural farming, and creating a system for certification and branding, the government hopes to make natural farming a mainstream practice. As India continues to grapple with the challenges of climate change, soil degradation, and health risks from chemical inputs, the NMNF provides a promising framework for sustainable agriculture that benefits farmers, consumers, and the environment alike.

India’s Urban Infrastructure

  • 28 Nov 2024

Introduction

India’s urban population is projected to double from 400 million to 800 million by 2050. This demographic shift presents both challenges and opportunities for transforming the country’s urban infrastructure. To meet the growing needs of urban areas, India will require an investment of approximately ?70 lakh crore by 2036, a figure significantly higher than current spending levels.

Financial Challenges in Urban Infrastructure

  • Investment Gap
    • The current annual investment in urban infrastructure stands at ?1.3 lakh crore, which is only 28% of the ?4.6 lakh crore needed annually.
    • A large portion of the existing investment, around 50%, is directed towards basic urban services, with the remainder allocated to urban transport.
  • Municipal Finances
    • Municipal finances have remained stagnant at 1% of GDP since 2002.
    • Despite increased transfers from the central and state governments, municipal bodies face financial strain.
    • The contribution of municipal own-revenue has decreased from 51% to 43%, indicating a reduced financial independence.
  • Revenue Collection Inefficiencies
    • Urban local bodies (ULBs) are collecting only a small fraction of their potential revenues, with property tax collections representing just 0.15% of GDP.
    • Cost recovery for essential services like water supply and waste management ranges between 20% and 50%, pointing to a significant funding gap.
  • Underutilization of Resources
    • Cities like Hyderabad and Chennai utilized only 50% of their capital expenditure budgets in 2018-19.
    • Central schemes such as AMRUT and the Smart Cities Mission also showed suboptimal fund utilization, with utilization rates of 80% and 70%, respectively.
  • Decline in Public-Private Partnerships (PPPs)
    • Investments through PPPs in urban infrastructure have seen a sharp decline, from ?8,353 crore in 2012 to ?467 crore in 2018.
    • This drop is attributed to limited project-specific revenues and inadequate funding mechanisms.

Structural and Administrative Challenges

  • Weak Governance and Fragmented Management
    • Fragmented governance and limited administrative autonomy hinder effective urban planning and resource allocation.
    • Municipal bodies often lack the ability to undertake long-term planning and project execution due to these governance challenges.
  • Climate Vulnerability and Sustainability: Urban areas are increasingly vulnerable to climate risks like floods and heatwaves. However, many urban infrastructure projects fail to incorporate climate resilience in their planning, exacerbating the long-term vulnerability of investments.
  • Inadequate Land Management
    • There is poor coordination between land use planning and infrastructure development, resulting in urban sprawl and inefficient transportation systems.
    • Opportunities to capitalize on the land value generated by metro and rail projects remain underutilized.

Measures for Transforming Urban Infrastructure

  • Streamline Revenue Collection: Leverage technology to improve property tax collection systems and enhance cost recovery in essential services.
  • Enhance Fund Utilization: Strengthen municipal capacities for effective project planning and incentivize the timely use of allocated grants.
  • Scale Public-Private Partnership (PPP) Investments: Develop a pipeline of bankable projects and create risk-sharing mechanisms to attract private sector investments.
  • Decouple Project Preparation from Funding: Ensure that infrastructure projects are thoroughly prepared for financial, social, and environmental sustainability before seeking funding.
  • Promote Urban Innovation: Establish urban innovation labs and encourage public-private-academic collaborations to foster the adoption of advanced technologies.
  • Empower Municipalities: Grant municipalities greater financial autonomy, enabling them to raise capital through municipal bonds and other debt mechanisms.
  • Integrated Urban Planning: Align infrastructure development with land use, transport, and housing requirements, while integrating climate resilience into planning.
  • Capacity Building: Invest in the training of municipal staff to improve governance and financial management capabilities.

Conclusion

India’s expanding urban population presents a major opportunity for economic growth. However, addressing the financial and structural challenges in urban infrastructure is crucial for harnessing this potential. By adopting a combination of short-term actions, medium-term strategies, and long-term reforms, India can create sustainable, resilient urban infrastructure that meets the growing needs of its cities, fostering inclusive development and long-term prosperity.

The Controversy around the Sambhal Mosque

  • 27 Nov 2024

Introduction

The Shahi Jama Masjid in Sambhal, Uttar Pradesh, has become a flashpoint in a larger religious and legal dispute after a petition was filed questioning its historical origins. Alleging that the mosque was built on the site of an ancient Hindu temple, the case has triggered both legal challenges and violent clashes, raising concerns about communal harmony and the protection of religious sites.

Background of the Dispute

On November 19, 2024, a petition was filed in the Sambhal district court, claiming that the 16th-century Jama Masjid was constructed over the site of an ancient Hari Har Mandir. This claim mirrors similar petitions filed in other parts of India, including Varanasi, Mathura, and Dhar, where Hindu groups have sought to alter the religious character of mosques they believe were built on temple sites. The petitioners in the Sambhal case include advocate Hari Shanker Jain, a key figure in the Gyanvapi and Mathura disputes.

Survey and Clashes

The Sambhal court ordered a survey of the mosque on November 19, 2024, to investigate the historical claims. The initial phase of the survey, conducted peacefully, involved mosque authorities and local police. However, a second survey on November 24 escalated tensions, as it was accompanied by a procession led by a local priest chanting Hindu slogans. Protests soon turned violent, leading to stone-pelting, police firing, and at least five deaths, including two teenagers. Locals accused the police of excessive force, while the police denied allegations of shooting.

The Mosque’s Historical Context

The Shahi Jama Masjid was built by Mughal Emperor Babur's general, Mir Hindu Beg, around 1528. It is one of the three mosques constructed during Babur's reign, the other two being in Panipat and Ayodhya. Architectural studies suggest it was constructed using stone masonry with plaster, and while some historians believe it was built on a pre-existing structure, the mosque’s historical context is complex. Local Hindu tradition holds that the site was originally a Vishnu temple, with the belief that Kalki, the tenth avatar of Vishnu, will arrive there.

Legal Implications: The Places of Worship Act, 1991

The dispute touches upon the Places of Worship Act, 1991, which mandates the preservation of the religious character of all places of worship as they existed on August 15, 1947. The Act was designed to prevent further disputes over religious sites, except for the Babri Masjid case, which was already under litigation at the time. The petitioners in the Sambhal case argue that the religious character of the mosque should be altered, contradicting the Act’s provisions.

Challenges to the Places of Worship Act

The Places of Worship Act has been criticized for barring judicial review and preventing any changes to the religious status of sites that existed before India’s independence. Some legal experts suggest that while an inquiry into the religious nature of a place might be permissible, changing that character would violate the Act. The ongoing legal challenges in the Supreme Court, including cases from Varanasi, Mathura, and now Sambhal, highlight the complexities of reconciling India’s legal framework with communal sensitivities.

Conclusion

The Sambhal mosque dispute underscores the challenges in balancing India’s legal framework with religious and communal dynamics. While the Places of Worship Act aims to preserve the status quo, petitions challenging it have revived contentious debates over historical monuments and their religious significance. As the legal proceedings continue, the case will likely have far-reaching implications for India’s secular fabric and the preservation of communal harmony.

29th UN Climate Change Conference (COP29)

  • 26 Nov 2024

In News:

The 29th UN Climate Change Conference (COP29), held in Baku, Azerbaijan, focused on enhancing climate finance, adaptation measures, and global cooperation.

Key Outcomes of COP29:

  • Climate Finance: A new goal was set to triple climate finance for developing countries to USD 300 billion annually by 2035. The total climate finance target aims for USD 1.3 trillion annually by 2035.
  • Carbon Markets: The conference operationalized Article 6 of the Paris Agreement, which establishes frameworks for carbon credit trading between countries. It also launched the Paris Agreement Crediting Mechanism, ensuring safeguards for human rights and the environment.
  • Transparency and Adaptation: COP29 saw 13 countries submit their Biennial Transparency Reports, promoting greater accountability. The Baku Adaptation Roadmap was launched to speed up National Adaptation Plans (NAPs) in Least Developed Countries (LDCs).
  • Gender and Inclusivity: A new Gender Action Plan was developed, and the Lima Work Programme on Gender was extended for another 10 years. Over 55,000 people, including civil society, Indigenous peoples, and youth, participated.
  • Global Climate Action: The 2024 Yearbook of Global Climate Action highlighted the role of non-Party stakeholders like businesses and sub-national actors in combating climate change.

India’s Role at COP29: India played an active role in highlighting resilient infrastructure initiatives like the Coalition for Disaster Resilient Infrastructure (CDRI) and advocated for financial resources to support Small Island Developing States (SIDS). India also pushed for solar energy adoption through the International Solar Alliance (ISA) and promoted gender-inclusive climate policies. India co-hosted the LeadIT summit with Sweden, focusing on industrial decarbonization.

Challenges at COP29:

  • Inadequate Finance: Despite ambitious targets, many countries felt the financial commitments were insufficient and distant.
  • Private Sector Dependency: The reliance on private sector contributions raised concerns about the reliability of funding.
  • Emission Reduction Gaps: There was a lack of sufficient pledges to meet the 1.5°C global warming target, with rising emissions.
  • Geopolitical Conflicts: Disputes over issues like the Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanism (CBAM) hindered progress.

India’s Carbon Credit Framework:

India introduced the Energy Conservation (Amendment) Act, 2022, establishing a domestic carbon market and setting a legislative framework for carbon credit trading. This aligns with India’s NDCs and aims to support sustainable growth while reducing emissions. However, concerns about the integrity of carbon credits and potential "greenwashing" need to be addressed through rigorous verification systems.

Conclusion:

COP29 marked progress in scaling up climate finance, carbon markets, and adaptation efforts, but significant challenges remain, especially in finance, emission reductions, and geopolitical cooperation. India's initiatives in carbon credit frameworks and resilience are steps toward a sustainable future. Moving forward, a collaborative, transparent, and adaptive approach is crucial to meet global climate goals.

Challenges in Municipal Financing

  • 25 Nov 2024

Introduction

Municipal corporations (MCs) in India are essential service providers in urban areas, but they face severe financial constraints, which hinder their ability to provide quality services. While urban India contributes almost 60% of the nation's economic output, MCs are heavily reliant on state and central government transfers, limiting their financial autonomy and operational capacity.

Key Issues in Municipal Financing

  • Limited Revenue Generation
    • Low Property Tax Revenues: Property tax, the main source of municipal revenue, contributes only 0.12% of GDP, a figure that reflects poor tax collection mechanisms and outdated property valuation systems.
    • Revenue Concentration: Over 58% of municipal revenue comes from the top 10 cities, highlighting fiscal disparity between urban areas.
    • Dependence on Government Transfers: Municipalities rely significantly on state and central transfers, constituting a large portion of their revenue. This reduces their ability to plan and execute long-term projects independently.
  • Inefficiency in Tax and Fee Collection
    • Ineffective Property Tax Systems: Existing tax formulas do not reflect actual property valuations, leading to under-taxation and revenue loss.
    • Inadequate User Charges: Fees for essential services like water supply, sanitation, and waste management are not regularly adjusted, impacting cost recovery and service quality.

Strategies for Strengthening Urban Local Bodies (ULBs)

  • Enhancing Revenue Sources
    • Property Tax Reforms: Implementing GIS-based property tax mapping and linking tax rates to actual property valuations can improve tax compliance and revenue generation.
    • Rationalising User Charges: Regular adjustments to service fees for water, sanitation, and waste management can ensure cost recovery and better service delivery.
  • Reducing Dependence on Transfers
    • State and Central Transfers: A rule-based framework for government transfers, accounting for inflation and city growth, can ensure predictability and adequate compensation for MCs.
    • Boosting Non-Tax Revenues: MCs can increase income from user fees (e.g., for urban transport and waste management) and explore public-private partnerships (PPPs) to enhance service delivery.
  • Leveraging Technology for Efficiency
    • Digitalisation and Automation: Streamlining processes through technology can reduce inefficiencies, cut down on waste, and free up resources for capital expenditure.
    • Monitoring Systems: Improved monitoring and reporting can reduce pilferage, enhance revenue collection, and ensure accountability.

Fiscal Management and Innovative Financing

  • Municipal Bonds and Innovative Financing
    • Larger MCs are already using municipal bonds to fund infrastructure projects. Smaller cities can adopt similar financing instruments to diversify funding sources and attract private investment.
    • Public-Private Partnerships (PPPs): Fostering partnerships in sectors like urban transport and waste management can attract private investment and reduce the financial burden on MCs.
  • Resource Pooling for Infrastructure Projects
    • MCs can collaborate to pool resources for large-scale projects, such as renewable energy or urban transport initiatives, overcoming fiscal constraints that individual corporations face.

Government Initiatives for Urban Governance

  • Citizen-Centric Programs
    • Swachh Sarvekshan (2017) promotes citizen participation to improve urban cleanliness.
    • Swachh Bharat Idea Book empowers citizens to propose innovative solutions to urban challenges.
  • Performance-Based Indices
    • Ease of Living Index (2017) and the Municipal Performance Index (2019) assess urban quality of life, service delivery, and governance, encouraging better performance in ULBs.

Conclusion

Empowering urban local bodies is crucial for effective urban governance and development. By improving revenue generation through reforms, reducing dependence on transfers, and adopting innovative financing mechanisms, municipal corporations can enhance their capacity to meet the growing demands of urbanization. Collaborative efforts between the government, civil society, and academia are essential to ensure sustainable urban development and better living conditions for urban residents.

The Fight for Accessibility and Dignity in Indian Prisons

  • 24 Nov 2024

Introduction

Prisons in India face numerous systemic issues, with overcrowding, abuse, and neglect being prevalent. For prisoners with disabilities, these challenges are magnified, as they struggle with basic needs and lack necessary accommodations. This issue is not only a human rights violation but also a failure in the implementation of legal protections.

Prison Conditions and Accessibility Issues for Disabled Inmates

  • Challenges Faced by Disabled Prisoners: Disabled prisoners, such as Professor G.N. Saibaba, who spent a decade in prison before being exonerated, face severe challenges in performing everyday tasks like using toilets or taking baths. His experience of being physically lifted by fellow inmates due to the lack of wheelchair accessibility highlights the systemic neglect.
  • Exclusion and Abuse: Prisoners with disabilities are particularly vulnerable to abuse, as their specific needs are ignored. The government does not track the number or conditions of disabled prisoners, which leads to neglect and mistreatment. Notably, Father Stan Swamy, who had Parkinson's disease, was denied essential items like a straw, affecting his ability to eat and drink.

Legal Framework and International Obligations

  • Constitutional Protections: The Indian Constitution guarantees rights to prisoners, including protection from torture (Article 21) and the right to fair legal processes (Article 22). The Supreme Court has reinforced the need for humane treatment in prisons through various judgments.
  • International Commitments: India has committed to international conventions such as the United Nations Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities and the Nelson Mandela Rules, which require reasonable accommodations for disabled prisoners. Despite these commitments, the practical enforcement of such rights remains minimal.
  • Domestic Legislation: The Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act, 2016, mandates the protection of disabled individuals from abuse and exploitation. However, violations like the denial of basic assistive devices to prisoners show a gap in enforcement. The Ministry of Home Affairs has issued guidelines for prison accessibility, but they have yet to be widely implemented.

Systemic Failures and Lack of Political Will

  • Overcrowding and Inadequate Infrastructure: Indian prisons house over 5.73 lakh prisoners, far exceeding their capacity. This overcrowding exacerbates the challenges faced by disabled prisoners, as the infrastructure is inadequate to meet their needs. A 2018 audit of Delhi’s prisons revealed significant accessibility gaps, such as inaccessible cells and toilets, making daily life for disabled prisoners even more difficult.
  • Political Apathy and Public Indifference: Many believe that prisoners deserve their suffering, fueling a lack of urgency in addressing prison reforms. However, the state is responsible for ensuring the rights and dignity of all prisoners, including those with disabilities. There is a need for a shift in societal attitudes to ensure that these rights are upheld.

Reforms and the Way Forward

  • Infrastructure and Accessibility: Prisons must implement universal design principles, ensuring that infrastructures are accessible to all, especially prisoners with disabilities. This includes accessible cells, toilets, and common areas, as well as functional wheelchairs.
  • Judicial and Legal Reforms: The judicial system must expedite trials, especially for undertrials, and ensure that all prisoners have access to legal representation. This would help alleviate the overcrowding crisis and improve the overall functioning of the prison system.
  • Comprehensive Rehabilitation and Welfare Programs: Prison systems need to focus on rehabilitation rather than mere punishment. Programs for skill development, education, and mental health support should be integrated into prison routines, providing prisoners with opportunities for personal growth and reintegration into society.
  • Strengthening Oversight Mechanisms: There must be greater transparency in prison management through independent oversight bodies and regular audits. A whistleblower mechanism can help report violations of prisoner rights, ensuring greater accountability.

India’s Agricultural Sector

  • 23 Nov 2024

In News:

India’s agricultural sector, which employs 42.3% of the population, is crucial to the nation’s economy. However, it faces a range of challenges that need to be addressed to ensure long-term stability, food security, and sustainable growth.

Current Performance of India’s Agricultural Sector

  • Key Agricultural Metrics and Growth
    • Foodgrain Production: India produced 330.5 million metric tonnes (MT) of foodgrains in 2022-23, maintaining its position as the world’s second-largest producer.
    • Horticulture Production: A record high of 351.92 million tonnes in horticultural production was achieved, marking a 1.37% increase from the previous year.
  • Market Outlook
    • India’s agricultural market is projected to reach USD 24 billion by 2025.
    • The food and grocery retail sector is ranked as the sixth-largest globally, with 70% of its sales generated from retail.
  • Investment and Export Trends
    • FDI in Agriculture: From April 2000 to March 2024, the agricultural services sector attracted USD 3.08 billion in foreign direct investment, while the food processing industry garnered USD 12.58 billion.
    • Agricultural Exports: India’s agricultural and processed food exports reached USD 4.34 billion in 2024-25, including products like marine products, rice, and spices.

Key Challenges Confronting India’s Agriculture

  • Climate Change and Environmental Impact:Extreme weather events, such as heatwaves and erratic rainfall, continue to impact agricultural productivity. In 2023, India experienced its second-warmest year on record, contributing to crop damage and rising food prices.
  • Water Stress and Irrigation Inefficiency: Agriculture consumes the majority of India’s water resources, but irrigation efficiency is still low. The country relies heavily on flood irrigation, which leads to significant water wastage. Only 11% of agricultural land is under micro-irrigation, far below global standards.
  • Land Fragmentation and Declining Farm Sizes: The average size of agricultural farms has decreased from 1.08 hectares in 2016-17 to 0.74 hectares in 2021-22, hindering the adoption of modern farming practices and mechanization.
  • Market Access and Price Realization: Farmers continue to face challenges in accessing fair market prices due to the dominance of intermediaries and inadequate market infrastructure. Despite reforms like e-NAM, price gaps between farm-gate and retail prices persist, leaving farmers with a smaller share of the final price.
  • Technology Adoption and Digital Divide: Although agritech is growing in India, only 30% of farmers use digital tools in agriculture, and rural digital literacy is just 25%, which limits the widespread adoption of modern farming solutions.

Addressing Structural Issues in Indian Agriculture

  • Soil Health and Sustainability:The excessive use of chemical fertilizers and mono-cropping practices has led to soil degradation. Approximately 30% of agricultural land in India is experiencing degradation, impacting productivity and sustainability. Stubble burning further exacerbates this issue, worsening air quality and soil health.
  • Crop Diversification Challenges:Many farmers are locked into the wheat-rice cycle due to Minimum Support Price (MSP) guarantees, limiting the cultivation of other crops like pulses and oilseeds. Although India is the largest producer of pulses, the domestic production is insufficient to meet the growing demand.
  • Feminisation of Agriculture:Women make up 63% of agricultural workers but own only 11-13% of the operational land, limiting their access to resources and decision-making power. This gender disparity hampers their economic security and limits their participation in agricultural development.

Conclusion

India’s agricultural sector holds immense potential but is facing significant structural challenges that must be addressed to ensure its long-term growth and sustainability. Urgent reforms are needed to address issues like climate vulnerability, inefficient irrigation, land fragmentation, and limited market access. Additionally, fostering technology adoption, improving infrastructure, and addressing gender disparities will be crucial for improving the sector's performance and securing India’s food security needs.

Reimagining Governance with AI: The Promise of GovAI

  • 20 Nov 2024

In News:

India's rapid digital transformation, coupled with the advancements in Artificial Intelligence (AI), presents a unique opportunity to reimagine governance. The concept of GovAI—using AI to enhance public administration—holds the potential to revolutionize governance, improve efficiency, and create more responsive and inclusive public systems.

Digital Transformation in Governance

  • Evolution of Digital Public Infrastructure (DPI)
    • Over the past decade, India has made significant strides in digital governance through the development of Digital Public Infrastructure (DPI). DPI has reduced inefficiencies, enhanced transparency, and improved service delivery, transforming India's governance landscape.
  • Impact of AI on Governance
    • As AI becomes a critical enabler in various sectors, its application to governance promises to deliver more efficient, inclusive, and responsive government services. The potential of AI lies in its ability to provide more with less, driving innovation across key public services.

Key Trends Driving GovAI

  • Rapid Digitalization of India
    • Currently, 90 crore Indians are connected to the Internet, with projections indicating 120 crore by 2026, positioning India as the most connected country globally.
    • Digitalization serves as the backbone for AI-driven governance, enabling efficient data collection, analysis, and informed policy-making.
  • Data as a Valuable Resource
    • The rapid digitalization of India has led to the generation of vast amounts of data. This data serves as the fuel for AI models, which can be used to enhance governance.
    • Programs like the IndiaDatasetsProgramme aim to harness government datasets for AI development while safeguarding data privacy through legislation.
  • Demand for Efficient Governance
    • The post-COVID world has underscored the need for governments to deliver better outcomes with fewer resources. AI has the potential to optimize the use of public resources, enabling more efficient and targeted governance.

India’s Leadership in AI-Driven Governance

  • Positioning India as a Global Leader
    • India’s digital governance initiatives have placed it at the forefront of AI adoption in the public sector. Through GovAI, India can solidify its position as a global leader in using technology for public good.
    • As the Chair of the Global Partnership on AI (GPAI), India is advocating for the inclusive development of AI to ensure that it benefits all nations, not just a select few.
  • Role of Innovation Ecosystem
    • India’s innovation ecosystem, comprising startups, entrepreneurs, and tech hubs, can play a crucial role in driving the development of AI models, platforms, and apps for governance.
    • A strong partnership between the government and private sector is essential to successfully deploy AI solutions across various sectors of governance.

Potential Benefits of GovAI

  • Enhanced Efficiency and Service Delivery
    • AI-powered tools, such as chatbots, can provide citizens with 24/7 assistance, streamlining public service delivery and reducing waiting times.
    • AI can help in automating processes and improving the overall efficiency of government operations.
  • Data-Driven Decision-Making
    • AI can analyze large datasets to make informed policy decisions and design targeted interventions in sectors like healthcare, education, and social welfare.
    • Data-driven insights can enhance the effectiveness of welfare schemes, improving outcomes for marginalized communities.
  • Increased Transparency and Accountability
    • AI can enhance transparency in governance by minimizing human intervention in processes, thus reducing corruption and ensuring efficient use of public resources.
    • Predictive analytics and real-time data monitoring can enable proactive governance, preventing issues before they escalate.

Challenges and Drawbacks of GovAI

  • Privacy Concerns
    • The use of AI in governance requires the collection and analysis of vast amounts of personal data, raising concerns about data privacy and surveillance.
    • Robust data protection laws must be enforced to ensure citizens' data is handled responsibly.
  • Accountability and Bias
    • AI systems may produce biased outcomes depending on the data they are trained on. Ensuring accountability for decisions made by AI systems remains a challenge, particularly when errors or biases occur.
    • Transparent mechanisms must be established to hold AI systems accountable for their actions.
  • Increased State Control and Surveillance
    • The integration of AI in governance could lead to increased state control, potentially compromising individual freedoms. Ensuring that AI is used responsibly to balance power between the government and citizens is critical.
  • Digital Divide
    • The benefits of AI in governance may not be evenly distributed across the population, exacerbating the digital divide.
    • Efforts must be made to ensure that marginalized communities, without access to digital technologies or skills, are not left behind.

Conclusion

  • Balancing Benefits and Risks
    • The integration of AI into governance systems presents significant benefits, including enhanced efficiency, transparency, and proactive governance. However, there are challenges related to privacy, accountability, and state control.
    • To ensure AI serves the public good, India must implement strong regulatory frameworks, promote transparency, and develop ethical AI systems that respect citizens’ rights and freedoms.
  • Moving Toward Maximum Governance
    • AI can help realize the vision of maximum governance, enabling more effective and targeted interventions across sectors like healthcare, security, education, and disaster management.
    • The success of GovAI will depend on a trusted partnership between the government, private sector, and innovation ecosystem, ensuring that AI technology serves the larger public interest.

Sustainable Path to Net-Zero for India

  • 19 Nov 2024

In News:

India's commitment to achieving net-zero carbon emissions by 2070 presents a significant challenge, with only 45 years remaining to reach this ambitious target. The path to net-zero requires a balancing act between economic development, energy security, and climate adaptation. India’s efforts to meet its climate goals will be shaped by multiple factors, including resource constraints, land use, and financial limitations.

Why Net-Zero at All?

  • Scientific Consensus on Climate Change
    • Climate change is a growing concern, with the global temperature rise already reaching 1.1°C above pre-industrial levels.
    • To avoid catastrophic impacts, the world needs to limit the temperature rise to 1.5°C. The remaining global carbon budget for this target is around 400-500 billion tonnes of CO?.
  • Necessity of Sharp Emission Reductions
    • Countries must drastically reduce emissions to stay within the carbon budget. Achieving net-zero emissions is essential for maintaining global climate stability.

Equity in Net-Zero Transitions

  • Developed vs. Developing Countries
    • Developed nations, historically responsible for a large share of emissions, are expected to lead the transition. However, they have not met the financial and technological support commitments for developing countries.
    • Developing nations like India, with low per capita emissions, are under pressure to balance climate action with economic development.
  • Climate Justice
    • India’s per capita emissions are among the lowest globally, but the richest 10% of Indians contribute significantly to national emissions, exacerbating inequality.
    • The impacts of climate change disproportionately affect the economically weaker sections, making the transition to net-zero not only an environmental challenge but a social justice issue as well.

The Challenge of Balancing Development and Sustainability

  • Limits of India’s Resources
    • India faces resource constraints, including land, water, and biodiversity, which limit the feasible expansion of renewable energy capacity.
    • Meeting energy demands while ensuring food security, forest cover, and biodiversity preservation becomes increasingly challenging as energy requirements rise.
  • Sustainable Consumption vs. Aspirational Lifestyles
    • India’s aspiration to emulate the developed world’s lifestyle is unsustainable due to limited resources, which could lead to severe consequences like groundwater depletion, heat stress, and biodiversity loss.
    • The focus should be on sufficiency consumption corridors, ensuring that consumption meets developmental goals without exceeding sustainable limits.

Projected Power Demand and Renewable Energy Targets

  • Rising Power Demand
    • India’s power demand could increase nine to ten-fold by 2070. Meeting this demand entirely via renewable energy requires significant expansion in energy generation capacity:
      1. 5,500 GW of solar energy
      2. 1,500 GW of wind energy
  • Land Use Constraints
    • To meet these targets, India must address land-use trade-offs. Expanding beyond 3,500 GW of solar and 900 GW of wind would require significant compromises in land availability for other uses, including agriculture and conservation.

Strategic Pathways to Net-Zero: Demand and Supply Measures

  • Demand-Side Measures
    • Energy-efficient construction: Use of better materials and passive designs to reduce cooling energy demand.
    • Urban transport: Shift to public and non-motorized transport to reduce energy consumption in cities.
    • Dietary choices: Promoting sustainable dietary practices to reduce the carbon footprint of food systems.
    • Electrification: Focus on alternative fuels and energy-efficient appliances.
  • Supply-Side Measures
    • Decentralization of Energy Production: Expanding rooftop solar panels and solar pumps for agriculture.
    • Nuclear Power Expansion: Increase nuclear energy to provide a low-carbon baseload and complement renewable sources like solar and wind, which are intermittent.

The Role of International Cooperation and Financial Support

  • Global Cooperation
    • Global climate action requires alignment between national interests, which may not always coincide, as seen in the context of the U.S. presidential election potentially influencing global climate policy.
    • India’s path to net-zero depends heavily on international climate financing, technology transfer, and collaborative efforts to address climate justice.
  • Equitable Financing for Developing Countries
    • Developed countries are expected to provide financial support to developing nations like India to achieve climate goals. However, this support has been insufficient to date.

Conclusion: India’s Balancing Act

India faces a challenging balancing act as it seeks to provide quality of life for its growing population while achieving its climate adaptation and mitigation goals. The path to net-zero will require careful management of economic growth, energy production, and resource conservation. India must focus on demand-side strategies to reduce energy consumption and increase efficiency while expanding renewable energy infrastructure in a sustainable manner. Additionally, international cooperation and financial support will be crucial in ensuring that India’s transition to net-zero is equitable, efficient, and aligned with its developmental priorities.

Khap Panchayats: Evolving Towards Modern Governance and Justice

  • 17 Nov 2024

Why in the News?

Khap Panchayats have attracted attention due to their evolving role in addressing key socio-economic issues like unemployment, education, and rural development. Modernization efforts are underway to regulate these traditional councils, integrating them into formal Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) systems for better governance, accountability, and social justice.

What are Khap Panchayats?

Definition and Origin:

Khap Panchayats are community-based councils primarily found in North India, particularly in Haryana, Uttar Pradesh, and parts of Rajasthan. These informal bodies, composed of elders from kinship groups (Khaps), have historically served as local governance bodies that resolve disputes within their communities. Their origins trace back centuries and they function alongside formal legal systems, often prioritizing customary norms over constitutional law.

Historical Role:

Historically, Khap Panchayats have maintained social order in rural areas, acting as forums for dispute resolution related to marriage, property, and community matters. While their decisions were respected within their communities, they operated parallel to formal courts, and their influence was often seen as a stabilizing force in rural society. However, their structure has also contributed to the perpetuation of patriarchal practices and social exclusion.

Issues with Khap Panchayats

  • Patriarchal Practices:Khap Panchayats have often been associated with gender inequality. They enforce rigid social norms that limit women's autonomy, particularly in matrimonial matters, inheritance rights, and personal freedoms. This has led to criticism for their role in suppressing women's rights.
  • Honor Killings and Social Conservatism:Khap Panchayats are notorious for opposing inter-caste and same-gotra marriages, at times even endorsing honor killings to preserve social order. Such practices are violations of fundamental rights and personal freedoms guaranteed by the Indian Constitution.
  • Legality Concerns:The decisions of Khap Panchayats often clash with constitutional values such as equality, personal liberty, and dignity. Their informal judgments lack legal validity and frequently violate the rule of law, raising significant concerns about their adherence to India’s legal framework.
  • Caste-based Discrimination:Khap Panchayats have been criticized for reinforcing caste hierarchies, which leads to discrimination and exclusion of marginalized communities. Their focus on preserving traditional caste structures often results in the oppression of the vulnerable, particularly lower-caste groups.

Gender Dynamics and Evolving Roles of Khap Panchayats

In recent years, some Khap Panchayats have started to show more progressive and inclusive stances, particularly in promoting gender justice:

  • Support for Women Athletes:Khap Panchayats have begun to recognize and celebrate the achievements of women, particularly in sports. Several Khap bodies have felicitated women sportspersons, contributing to a growing culture of sports among rural women. This marks a shift from their traditionally patriarchal stance.
  • Promoting Gender Justice:Notably, the MehamChaubisiKhap in Haryana has played a significant role in advocating for women’s rights and gender equality. It was involved in supporting the 2023 wrestlers' protest against sexual harassment, demonstrating a shift towards gender-related activism and social reform.

Supreme Court Ruling on Khap Panchayats:

In the landmark Shakti Vahini v. Union of India case (2018), the Supreme Court of India addressed the issue of honor killings and inter-caste marriages. The Court emphasized that honor killings violate fundamental rights and called for strict measures to prevent such crimes. The Court further directed state governments to establish special protection cells for couples facing threats from their families and communities. This ruling underscored the importance of personal liberty and freedom of choice, regardless of community or caste.

What is Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR)?

Definition and Importance:

Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) refers to methods of resolving disputes without resorting to formal litigation. These methods include mediation, arbitration, and conciliation, all of which encourage cooperative problem-solving and mutually agreeable solutions. ADR is particularly important in India due to the overburdened judicial system, which faces a backlog of cases and delays.

ADR offers several advantages, including:

  • Cost-effectiveness
  • Confidentiality
  • Flexibility
  • Improved relationships between parties involved

Types of ADR Mechanisms:

  • Arbitration: A formal process where an arbitrator resolves disputes and their decision is legally binding.
  • Conciliation: A third-party neutral assists the parties in reaching an agreement, and the recommendations can be accepted or rejected.
  • Mediation: A mediator facilitates communication between disputing parties, helping them reach a voluntary and mutually agreeable resolution.
  • Negotiation: A direct negotiation between the parties without third-party involvement, aiming for a mutually acceptable settlement.

Integrating Khap Panchayats into the Formal ADR System

Given the potential of Khap Panchayats as community-based governance bodies, integrating them into the formal ADR framework can significantly enhance their role in dispute resolution. Here are some strategies for modernizing Khap Panchayats:

  • Legal Recognition of ADR Role:Khap Panchayats can be legally recognized within the ADR framework, formalizing their role in mediation and dispute resolution, ensuring their decisions align with constitutional norms and human rights.
  • Training and Capacity Building:Khap leaders can undergo training in ADR techniques such as mediation and arbitration, equipping them with skills to resolve conflicts impartially and in line with legal standards. This would help transition Khaps from informal bodies to more structured and legally compliant dispute resolution mechanisms.
  • Legal Regulation and Oversight:Regulations can be put in place to define the scope and limitations of Khap Panchayats' authority, ensuring their decisions do not violate human rights or the constitution. Oversight mechanisms should be established to monitor their actions and prevent practices like honor killings or forced marriages.
  • Shift Towards Developmental Roles:Some Khap Panchayats are already advocating for progressive reforms in areas like unemployment, education, and rural development. By focusing on these issues, Khap Panchayats can serve as agents of social change and contribute to community development.
  • Awareness and Accountability:Awareness campaigns can educate rural communities about constitutional rights and the legal system, emphasizing the importance of formal legal frameworks and human rights. At the same time, Khap Panchayats should be held accountable for actions that undermine justice or equality.
  • Collaboration with Formal Institutions:Khap Panchayats can collaborate with local governance bodies and judicial institutions, ensuring that their decisions align with the rule of law and contribute to social justice. This would enhance their role in inclusive decision-making and legally sound governance.

Conclusion

Khap Panchayats, with their deep-rooted history and influence, have the potential to evolve into modern governance institutions. By integrating them into the formal ADR framework, aligning their practices with constitutional values, and focusing on community development, they can contribute positively to dispute resolution and social reform in rural India. This transformation will require legal regulation, training, oversight, and awareness to ensure that Khap Panchayats function as effective, equitable bodies that respect the fundamental rights of all individuals.

Net Borrowing Ceiling

  • 16 Nov 2024

In News:

  • In 2023, the central government imposed a Net Borrowing Ceiling (NBC) on Kerala, limiting its borrowing capacity to 3% of the projected Gross State Domestic Product (GSDP) for the fiscal year 2023-24.
  • Impact on Kerala’s Finances: This ceiling has significantly impacted Kerala’s ability to meet its expenditure needs and fund developmental activities, triggering political and legal disputes. Kerala has approached the Supreme Court of India, arguing that the imposition of NBC infringes upon its constitutional rights under Article 293 of the Indian Constitution.

Constitutional Provisions on Borrowing Powers

Article 292: Borrowing Powers of the Centre

  • Central Government’s Borrowing: Article 292 grants the Central Government the authority to borrow money on the security of the Consolidated Fund of India.
  • Limits on Borrowing: The extent of borrowing by the Centre is determined by laws enacted by Parliament.

Article 293: Borrowing Powers of the States

  • State Borrowing: Article 293 allows State Governments to borrow within India against the Consolidated Fund of the State. However, it imposes certain conditions:
    • If a State has outstanding loans or guarantees given by the Centre, the Centre’s consent is required to raise further loans.
    • The Central government can impose conditions when granting such consent.

Centre’s Role in State Borrowing

  • Article 293(3) allows the Centre to impose conditions on a state’s borrowing if it has existing liabilities or guarantees outstanding.
  • The Centre has wide discretion in granting or denying consent, which has been a point of contention in Kerala’s case.

The Imposition of Net Borrowing Ceiling (NBC)

Scope of the NBC

  • Comprehensive Coverage: The NBC encompasses all borrowing avenues, including open market loans, loans from financial institutions, and liabilities from State public accounts. To curb circumventing of the borrowing cap via State-owned enterprises, the NBC also covers borrowings by these entities.

Purpose of NBC

  • Fiscal Discipline: The NBC is designed to regulate borrowing and prevent states from accumulating unsustainable levels of debt, thus ensuring financial stability.
  • Transparency: By including all borrowing avenues, including off-budget borrowings by state-owned enterprises, the NBC aims to provide a clearer picture of a state’s financial health.

Arguments for the NBC

  • Macroeconomic Stability: The NBC helps maintain macroeconomic stability by controlling the borrowing levels of states, thus protecting the national economy.
  • Compliance with FRBM Act: The NBC aligns with the Fiscal Responsibility and Budget Management (FRBM) Act, aiming to keep the fiscal deficit within prescribed limits.
  • Equitable Resource Distribution: The NBC ensures that wealthier states do not disproportionately borrow, thus promoting balanced regional development.

Arguments Against the NBC

  • Erosion of Fiscal Autonomy: Critics argue that the NBC undermines the fiscal autonomy of states, as guaranteed by Article 293, by restricting their ability to make independent financial decisions.
  • Impact on Developmental Activities: States, particularly Kerala, contend that the borrowing cap restricts their ability to fund key infrastructure projects and social welfare activities.
  • Legal Concerns: The NBC’s impact on the interpretation of Article 293 raises legal questions regarding the extent of the Centre’s authority over state borrowing powers.

Fiscal Responsibility and Budget Management (FRBM) Act

Overview of the FRBM Act

  • Objective: The FRBM Act, 2003 was enacted to promote fiscal discipline and ensure long-term financial stability in India.
  • Key Features:
    • Targets a 3% fiscal deficit of GDP for the Centre.
    • Requires states to enact similar laws to control their fiscal deficit.

Amendments to FRBM Act

  • 2018 Amendment: The FRBM Amendment Act required the central government to ensure that the fiscal deficit did not exceed 3% of GDP and total public debt remained under 60% of GDP.
  • Fiscal Deficit Reduction: By 2025-26, the fiscal deficit is expected to be reduced to below 4.5% of GDP.

Way Forward: Strengthening Article 293

Guidelines for Borrowing Powers

  • Transparency in Decision-Making: The Centre should ensure that the borrowing process is transparent, with clear standards and procedures for accepting or rejecting state borrowings.
  • Consultative Process: The Centre should engage in consultations with states before imposing borrowing caps or conditions, fostering a cooperative federal structure.
  • Equitable Treatment: Borrowing restrictions should apply uniformly to all states to avoid bias or favoritism.

Strengthening Fiscal Federalism

  • Fiscal Autonomy: States should be given the flexibility to manage their finances in a way that reflects their unique economic needs and challenges.
  • Periodic Reviews: The Net Borrowing Ceiling should be reviewed periodically to account for changing economic conditions and developmental priorities.

The Need for More Women in Politics

  • 15 Nov 2024

In News:

India, the world's largest democracy, is at a crucial juncture where women’s active political participation is essential for holistic development and true democratic engagement. The year 2024 demands increased involvement of women in politics to address issues of gender inequality and ensure comprehensive policy representation.

Current Status of Women’s Political Representation in India

Women in Parliament

  • Initial Representation: In 1952, women accounted for only 4.41% of the Lok Sabha. This gradually rose to around 14.36% in the 2019 elections.
  • Recent Trends: In the 2024 elections, women made up approximately 16% of the Lok Sabha, with 74 women MPs, 43 of whom are first-time representatives.

Women in State Legislatures

  • Representation in state legislative assemblies remains low, with the highest percentages in Chhattisgarh (14.4%), West Bengal (13.7%), and Jharkhand (12.4%).

Global Comparison

  • According to the Inter-Parliamentary Union (IPU), India ranks lower than many countries in terms of female representation in parliament, with global averages standing at 26.1%. India lags behind several African and South Asian nations.

Importance of Women’s Political Empowerment

  • Enhancing Governance and Accountability: Political empowerment of women ensures better representation of gender-sensitive issues, promoting accountability in governance.
  • Breaking Patriarchal Norms: Increasing women’s participation helps challenge the patriarchal structure that dominates Indian politics and promotes inclusive governance.
  • Policy and Social Impact: Women in politics are more likely to advocate for policies that address issues like health, education, and gender equality, leading to improved societal welfare.
  • Economic Benefits: Studies suggest that women in political leadership tend to improve economic outcomes for their constituencies by prioritizing social infrastructure.

Barriers to Women’s Political Participation

  • Gender Gaps in Political Ambition: Women are less likely to pursue political careers due to gender conditioning, family pressures, and stereotypes about leadership abilities.
  • Patriarchal Culture: A deeply ingrained patriarchal society hampers women’s political involvement, with male-dominated party structures and social norms limiting opportunities.
  • High Election Costs: The financial burden of running for office often discourages women from contesting elections due to unequal access to resources.
  • Male Gatekeepers in Politics: Political parties often show a preference for male candidates, especially for higher-profile positions, hindering the rise of women leaders.
  • Criminalisation and Corruption in Politics: Growing criminalisation in politics and lack of political education further alienates women from the political process.

Key Legislative and Constitutional Measures for Women’s Political Empowerment

Legislative Measures

  • Nari Shakti VandanAdhiniyam (2023): Provides 33% reservation for women in the Lok Sabha and state assemblies.
  • 73rd and 74th Amendments (1992): Introduced 33% reservation for women in Panchayats and Municipalities.
  • Gender-Neutral Rules: Lok Sabha adopted gender-neutral rules in 2014, promoting inclusivity in legislative procedures.

Constitutional Provisions

  • Article 14 and 15: Ensure equality and non-discrimination, fundamental to women’s political participation.
  • Article 243D: Mandates 33% reservation for women in Panchayats.

International Commitments

  • CEDAW (1979): Advocates for women’s participation in political and public life.
  • Beijing Platform (1995) and SDGs (2015): Call for removing barriers to women’s participation in politics.

Measures for Promoting Women’s Political Participation

  • Quotas and Reservations: Ensuring mandatory quotas for women candidates in party tickets and legislative bodies can help bridge gender gaps.
  • Capacity Building and Training: Offering political training programs for women can empower them with the skills and resources necessary for effective political participation.
  • Strengthening Grassroots Movements: Support for Self-Help Groups (SHGs) and Panchayati Raj Institutions (PRIs) can build leadership among women at the local level.
  • Supportive Political Ecosystem: Political parties should be encouraged to nominate women for higher office positions, such as the Rajya Sabha or state legislative councils.
  • Raising Public Awareness: Public awareness campaigns focusing on the importance of women in politics can shift societal attitudes and garner wider public support.

Conclusion:

As India moves forward, the active participation of women in politics is not merely a matter of equity but an essential building block for a vibrant, inclusive, and effective democracy. Through structural reforms, public awareness, and the promotion of female leadership, India can strengthen its democratic framework, ensuring that all citizens, regardless of gender, have an equal stake in shaping the nation's future.

Inter-State Council

  • 14 Nov 2024

In News:

The Inter-State Council, which works for Centre-State and interstate coordination and cooperation, has been reconstituted with Prime Minister Narendra Modi as its chairman, all chief ministers and nine Union ministers as members and 13 Union ministers as permanent invitees.

About the Inter-State Council (ISC)

Formation of ISC

  • Establishment: Created on May 28, 1990, through a Presidential Order following the recommendations of the Sarkaria Commission (1988).
  • Headquarters: New Delhi.
  • Meetings: The Council has convened 12 times since its formation.

Constitutional Provisions

  • Not a Constitutional Body: It was established under Article 263 of the Constitution, making it a non-permanent advisory body.
  • Role: Article 263 empowers the President to create the ISC for improving coordination between States and the Union.

Powers and Functions

  • Investigate and Discuss: The ISC discusses subjects of common interest between the Centre and States.
  • Recommendations: It recommends measures for better coordination and addressing inter-state issues.
  • Deliberations: The ISC also deliberates on matters referred by the Chairman.

Composition of the ISC

  • Chairperson: Prime Minister of India.
  • Members:
    • Chief Ministers of all States and Union Territories with legislative assemblies.
    • Lieutenant Governors/Administrators of Union Territories without assemblies.
    • 6 Union Cabinet Ministers nominated by the Prime Minister.
    • Governors of States under President’s rule.
  • Standing Committee:
    • Chaired by the Union Home Minister.
    • Includes 5 Union Cabinet Ministers and 9 Chief Ministers.

Functions and Role of the ISC

Role in Centre-State Cooperation

  • Facilitates better coordination and cooperation between the Centre and States.
  • Addressing disputes related to Centre-State and Inter-State relations.

Additional Functions

  • Make Recommendations: Based on discussions, it recommends actions to align policies.
  • Promote Social Legitimacy: Through consensus-driven decisions, ISC strengthens policy acceptance among states.

Key Bodies Related to Centre-State Relations

Zonal Councils

  • Purpose: Promote interstate cooperation and coordination.
  • Constitution: There are five Zonal Councils (Northern, Central, Eastern, Western, Southern) and a separate North Eastern Council established in 1972.

River Water Dispute Tribunals

  • Function: Set up under the Inter-State River Water Disputes Act, 1956, these tribunals resolve disputes over river water sharing between States.

GST Council

  • Constitution: Established under Article 279A, the GST Council is responsible for decisions related to GST implementation, ensuring cooperative federalism.

Chief Justice of India

  • 13 Nov 2024

In News:

On November 11, 2024, Justice Sanjiv Khanna was sworn in as the 51st Chief Justice of India (CJI) at the Rashtrapati Bhavan, New Delhi, marking a significant milestone in the Indian judiciary. He succeeds Justice D.Y. Chandrachud, who retired on November 10, 2024. Justice Khanna's term as CJI will last until May 13, 2025.

Background of Justice Sanjiv Khanna

Early Life and Legal Career

  • Legal Practice: Justice Khanna began his legal career in 1983 after completing his law degree from Delhi University. He practiced in the District Courts of Delhi and handled cases in constitutional law, taxation, arbitration, and environmental law.
  • Career in Delhi High Court: He was appointed as an Additional Judge to the Delhi High Court in 2005 and became a Permanent Judge in 2006.
  • Appointment to the Supreme Court: Justice Khanna was appointed as a Supreme Court Judge in January 2019, without having served as a Chief Justice of a State High Court, and superseding 32 senior High Court judges.

Key Judicial Rulings of Justice Sanjiv Khanna

Major Constitutional Bench Decisions

  • Abrogation of Article 370: Justice Khanna was part of the Bench that upheld the abrogation of Article 370 of the Constitution, which revoked Jammu and Kashmir’s special status.
  • Electoral Bonds Scheme: He also contributed to the ruling that struck down the 2018 Electoral Bonds scheme, raising questions about the transparency of political funding.

Support for EVMs

  • Justice Khanna defended the use of Electronic Voting Machines (EVMs) and rejected calls to revert to paper ballots, emphasizing the need for technological progress and institutional trust.

Personal Liberty and Bail Decisions

  • Arvind Kejriwal’s Interim Bail: Justice Khanna granted interim bail to Delhi Chief Minister Arvind Kejriwal in the liquor policy case, underscoring personal liberty as a fundamental right.
  • Judicial Review of Bail Conditions: He also initiated discussions on setting standards for bail conditions in cases involving significant political figures.

Role of the Chief Justice of India (CJI)

Appointment Process

  • Article 124(2): A Supreme Court judge is appointed by the President of India, with the senior-most judge of the Supreme Court traditionally becoming the CJI.
  • Qualifications: The CJI must be a citizen of India and have served as a judge in a High Court for at least five years or as an advocate in a High Court for ten years.

Powers and Responsibilities

  • Master of the Roster: The CJI is the "Master of the Roster," responsible for assigning cases to specific benches and determining the court's schedule.
  • Collegium System: The CJI, along with four senior judges, forms the Collegium that recommends judicial appointments for the Supreme Court and High Courts.
  • Ad-Hoc Appointments: The CJI can also appoint ad-hoc judges to the Supreme Court under Article 127 of the Constitution.

Removal

  • A CJI can only be removed through a process initiated in Parliament, requiring a special majority in both Houses of Parliament.

Appointment of CJI in Other Countries

United States

  • The Chief Justice of the United States serves for life, with tenure continuing until impeachment or voluntary retirement.

United Kingdom

  • The Lord Chief Justice in the UK is appointed by a special panel from the Appeal Court or the Supreme Court. The tenure is life, but mandatory retirement is set at 75 years of age.

Conclusion

Justice Sanjiv Khanna’s appointment as the 51st Chief Justice of India represents a significant moment in the country's judicial history. With his extensive experience and legal acumen, he faces numerous challenges, from dealing with case pendency to navigating sensitive constitutional issues. His tenure will likely shape the future trajectory of the Indian judiciary, with a focus on upholding justice and personal liberty while addressing the evolving needs of a democratic society.

Significance of LignoSat

  • 12 Nov 2024

Introduction

  • LignoSat is the world's first satellite constructed with wood, developed to test the viability of using timber as a sustainable material in space exploration.
  • Launched on November 5, 2024, the satellite was sent to the International Space Station (ISS) aboard a SpaceX Dragon cargo capsule and will be released into orbit after a month for a six-month test.

What is LignoSat?

  • Dimensions: LignoSat measures 4 inches (10 cm) on each side and weighs 900 grams.
  • Material Composition: The satellite features panels made from magnolia wood using traditional Japanese craftsmanship, without screws or glue.
  • Development Collaboration: LignoSat was developed by Kyoto University and Sumitomo Forestry, in collaboration with various researchers and space organizations.

Purpose and Objectives of the Mission

  • Testing Timber in Space:
    • The primary goal is to study how wood performs in the extreme conditions of space, where temperatures fluctuate dramatically between -100°C to 100°C.
    • The satellite will also assess how wood interacts with space radiation and its potential to reduce the impact of radiation on sensitive electronics, such as semiconductors.
  • Space Sustainability:
    • LignoSat aims to demonstrate that wood can be a sustainable, renewable alternative to metals (like aluminium) traditionally used in spacecraft construction.
    • The satellite will help determine if wood can be used in future space missions, potentially reducing reliance on non-renewable materials.

Testing the Durability of Wood in Space

  • Challenges of Space Environment:
    • Space is an extremely harsh environment with extreme temperature variations, exposure to radiation, and the lack of water and oxygen, all of which affect material durability.
    • Unlike Earth, where wood decomposes due to moisture and oxygen, space's vacuum conditions could potentially preserve the wood's integrity, providing valuable insights into its durability.
  • Previous Use of Wood in Space:
    • Wood has already been tested in space applications: cork has been used on spacecraft to withstand re-entry conditions.
    • The LignoSat mission builds on this knowledge, aiming to test wood's performance in space's high-radiation and vacuum environment.

Potential Advantages of Using Wood in Space Exploration

  • Sustainability and Environmental Benefits:
    • Unlike conventional aluminium satellites, which generate harmful pollutants upon re-entry (e.g., aluminium oxides), LignoSat's wooden components will degrade in a more environmentally friendly manner, minimizing atmospheric pollution.
    • As space exploration increases, particularly with mega-constellations (e.g., SpaceX’s Starlink), space debris management becomes critical. Using wood could reduce the environmental impact of satellite disposal.
  • Renewable Resource:
    • Wood is a renewable resource, which offers a potential solution to the growing demand for materials used in space technology.
    • Kyoto University researchers have long been exploring the idea of building habitats on the Moon and Mars using timber, with LignoSat seen as a stepping stone to proving the material's space-grade capabilities.

LignoSat's Design and Construction

  • Hybrid Construction:
    • While the outer panels of LignoSat are made from magnolia wood, the satellite still incorporates traditional aluminium structures and electronic components inside.
    • The hybrid construction allows researchers to compare the performance of wood against conventional materials used in spacecraft.
  • Testing Methods:
    • LignoSat will orbit Earth for six months and monitor the wood’s reaction to space conditions, providing valuable data for future space missions.
    • Sensors embedded in the satellite will track various environmental factors, such as radiation exposure, temperature fluctuations, and the structural integrity of the wood.

The Long-Term Vision: Building Timber Habitats in Space

  • The research team, led by Takao Doi (astronaut and Kyoto University professor), envisions a future where timber is used for constructing space habitats on the Moon and Mars.
  • The team’s ultimate goal is to plant trees in space and develop timber houses on extraterrestrial bodies, providing a sustainable, self-sufficient environment for humans in space.

Broader Implications for Space Exploration

  • Sustainability in Space Missions:
    • LignoSat represents an innovative step toward more sustainable space technologies by investigating eco-friendly materials that can minimize the environmental impact of space missions.
    • It aligns with global efforts to make space exploration more sustainable, especially as space tourism and colonization plans grow.
  • Future Prospects:
    • If successful, LignoSat could pave the way for wood-based materials being used in spacecraft construction, not only for satellites but also for space stations and future human habitats in space.

Conclusion

  • LignoSat’s mission marks a significant milestone in space exploration by exploring wood as a sustainable material in space technology.
  • As the first wooden satellite, its results could pave the way for more eco-friendly, renewable materials in future space missions, aligning with global goals for sustainability and reducing space-related pollution.

What are the costs of population decline?

  • 11 Nov 2024

In News:

India has been witnessing significant demographic changes due to decades of family planning policies. This has led to declining fertility rates in certain States, particularly in the southern and smaller northern regions.

Introduction: Demographic Shift in India

  • Southern States’ Fertility Trends: States like Tamil Nadu, Kerala, Andhra Pradesh, and Telangana have fertility rates below the replacement level (around 1.4–1.5), while Bihar, Uttar Pradesh, and Madhya Pradesh have higher fertility rates (2.6–3).
  • Ageing Population: Southern States face the challenge of an ageing population, with Kerala projected to have 22.8% of its population aged 60+ by 2036, while Bihar will have only 11%.

Economic and Health Impact of Population Decline

  • Economic Consequences:
    • Dependency Ratio: The old-age dependency ratio (the number of elderly for every 100 working-age individuals) has increased significantly in some States. Kerala, for example, had a ratio of 26.1 in 2021, signaling a crisis point.
    • Loss of Demographic Dividend: States with declining fertility rates face the loss of a demographic dividend, i.e., the economic benefit from a large working-age population, which is increasingly burdened by elderly dependents.
    • Health Expenditure: Rising healthcare costs, especially for cardiovascular diseases in southern States, will strain public health systems. The southern States, although comprising one-fifth of India's population, spent 32% of the country’s total out-of-pocket expenditure on cardiovascular diseases in 2017-18.
  • Challenges of Low Fertility:
    • Declining Labour Force Participation: Policies encouraging higher fertility may also reduce women’s labour force participation, undermining the economic growth of these States.
    • Economic Pressures: Southern States, despite higher tax contributions, face a diminished share of central resources due to slower population growth. This is a point of concern in inter-State fiscal relations.

Political Implications of Uneven Population Growth

  • Impact on Federal Structure:
    • The uneven population growth across States will lead to significant changes in the delimitation of constituencies after the current freeze on seat allocation in Parliament expires in 2026.
    • Redistribution of Lok Sabha Seats: Northern States like Uttar Pradesh and Bihar will likely gain more seats, while southern States like Tamil Nadu, Kerala, and Andhra Pradesh will lose seats due to their declining population shares.
  • Challenges in Federal Relations:
    • Southern States’ economic contributions through taxes are disproportionate to the resources they receive from the central pool, leading to growing tensions between high-growth and slow-growth regions.
    • The shift in political power post-delimitation could increase regional disparities, potentially leading to political tensions between States.

Solutions and Policy Recommendations

  • Pro-Natalist Policies:
    • Southern States are considering pro-natalist policies to incentivize higher fertility rates. However, such measures have been largely unsuccessful internationally, especially when women’s economic independence and educational choices are restricted.
    • International Experience: Attempts to incentivize childbearing, without addressing broader socio-economic factors like gender equality, have generally failed in other nations. Maternity benefits, gender-neutral parental leave, and childcare support are key to increasing fertility sustainably.
  • Gender Equity and Work-Family Balance:
    • Work-family policies that support paid maternity and paternity leaves, affordable childcare, and gender-neutral employment policies are essential to empower women to balance family and career.
    • Studies indicate that countries with higher gender equity have better fertility rates because women are less likely to forgo childbearing for career reasons.
  • Increasing Retirement Age:
    • One way to reduce the old-age dependency ratio is to increase the retirement age, which would allow older workers to remain employed longer and support a sustainable economy.
    • Social Security and pension reforms should also be considered to accommodate the ageing workforce and reduce the economic burden on younger generations.
  • Managing Migration:
    • Migration policies should be adjusted to manage the influx of economic migrants into southern States, who contribute to the economy but continue to be counted in their home States for fiscal and political purposes.
    • Migration-based policy reforms could address the challenge of an ageing population in states with declining fertility while ensuring equitable resource distribution across States.

Uttar Pradesh Board of Madarsa Education Act, 2004

  • 09 Nov 2024

In News:

The Supreme Court recently upheld the constitutional validity of the Uttar Pradesh Board of Madarsa Education Act, 2004 (also called the Madarsa Act), while striking down certain provisions related to the granting of higher education degrees. The Court overturned the Allahabad High Court's previous decision, which had deemed the Act unconstitutional on the grounds that it violated the principle of secularism.

What is the Madarsa Act?

The Madarsa Act provides a legal framework for regulating madrasas (Islamic educational institutions) in Uttar Pradesh. The Act:

  • Establishes the Uttar Pradesh Board of Madarsa Education, which oversees the curriculum and examinations for madrasas.
  • Ensures that madrasas follow the National Council of Educational Research and Training (NCERT) curriculum for mainstream secular education alongside religious instruction.
  • Empowers the state government to create rules for regulating madrasa education.

Allahabad High Court's Ruling

In March 2024, the Allahabad High Court declared the Madarsa Act unconstitutional, citing:

  • Violation of secularism: The Court argued that the Act's emphasis on compulsory Islamic education, with modern subjects being optional, discriminated on religious grounds, violating the secular nature of the Constitution.
  • Right to Education: The Court also claimed that the Act denied quality education under Article 21A, which guarantees free and compulsory education to children.
  • Higher Education Degrees: The Act's provisions allowing the granting of Fazil and Kamil degrees were found to conflict with the University Grants Commission Act, 1956, which regulates higher education.

Supreme Court's Ruling

The Supreme Court overturned the Allahabad High Court's decision on several grounds:

  • Basic Structure Doctrine: The Court clarified that the basic structure doctrine, which applies to constitutional amendments, does not apply to ordinary legislation like the Madarsa Act. Therefore, a law cannot be struck down simply for violating secularism unless explicitly prohibited by the Constitution.
  • State's Authority to Regulate Education: The Court held that the state has the right to regulate education in minority institutions, as long as the regulation is reasonable and rational. It emphasized that the Madarsa Act does not deprive these institutions of their minority character.
  • Right to Education for Minority Institutions: Referring to a 2014 decision, the Court ruled that the Right to Education Act (RTE) does not apply to minority institutions, as it would undermine their right to impart religious education and self-administer.

Striking Down Higher Education Provisions

While upholding most of the Act, the Supreme Court struck down the provisions related to higher education degrees (Fazil and Kamil). It ruled that:

  • Section 9 of the Act, which allowed the Board to grant these degrees, is in conflict with the University Grants Commission Act, which only permits degrees to be awarded by universities recognized by the UGC.

Implications of the Ruling

  • Regulation of Madrasa Education: The ruling affirms the state's authority to ensure quality education in madrasas, balancing religious instruction with secular subjects.
  • Protection of Minority Rights: By upholding the Madarsa Act, the Court protected the rights of religious minorities to run educational institutions while ensuring they meet educational standards.
  • Focus on Inclusivity: The judgment emphasizes the integration of madrasas within the broader educational framework, ensuring that madrasa students receive quality education.

In conclusion, the Supreme Court's decision supports the regulation of madrasa education while safeguarding the rights of minority institutions, except in areas related to the granting of higher education degrees, which remain under the jurisdiction of the UGC Act.

Indus Waters Treaty (IWT)

  • 08 Nov 2024

In News:

Need for modification of the Indus Waters Treaty (IWT) amidst changing geopolitical, environmental, and demographic realities.

Background of the Indus Waters Treaty (IWT)

  • About IWT:
    • Signed in 1960 between India and Pakistan, brokered by the World Bank.
    • Governs the sharing of the Indus River system waters.
  • Historical Context:
    • Origin in the Inter-Dominion Accord of 1948 post-partition.
    • Finalized after negotiations facilitated by the World Bank in 1951.
  • Key Provisions:
    • Eastern Rivers (Ravi, Beas, Sutlej) allocated to India.
    • Western Rivers (Indus, Jhelum, Chenab) allocated to Pakistan, with limited use allowed for India (e.g., hydropower, irrigation).
    • Establishment of the Permanent Indus Commission (PIC) for cooperation and dispute resolution.

India’s Perspective

  • Rationale for Modification:
    • Increased demographic and agricultural demands.
    • Need for sustainable water management.
    • Acceleration of hydropower projects on western rivers permitted by the treaty.
  • Security Concerns: Cross-border terrorism impacting trust in treaty operations.

Pakistan’s Concerns

  • Dependence on Indus System:  Critical for agriculture and drinking water as the lower riparian state.
  • Potential Impacts of Modification:
    • Fear of reduced water availability.
    • Concerns over India’s hydropower projects altering water flow.

Current Challenges

  • Hydropower Projects: Disputes over compliance with treaty provisions regarding hydropower construction.
  • Technical Disputes: Divergent interpretations of treaty terms.
  • Political Tensions: Strained bilateral relations with minimal diplomatic engagement.
  • Climate Change Impacts: Altered precipitation patterns and glacial melt affecting water availability.

Arguments for Modifying the Treaty

  • Addressing Contemporary Challenges: Climate change, technological advancements, and increased water demand.
  • Securing National Interests:
    • Clarifications on hydropower construction.
    • Improved dispute resolution mechanisms.

Risks of Modifying the Treaty

  • Escalation of Tensions: Perceived unilateral actions by Pakistan.
  • Political Sensitivities: Domestic opposition in both countries.

Way Forward: A Balanced Approach

  • Engagement and Dialogue: Bilateral discussions with potential third-party mediation (e.g., World Bank).
  • Cooperation over Conflict: Recognizing mutual benefits of collaboration in water management.
  • Adaptation Measures: Incorporate provisions addressing climate change and technological advances.

Supreme Court Ruling on Property and Redistribution

  • 06 Nov 2024

In News:

A crucial 9-judge bench of the Supreme Court ruled on the scope of government powers over private property, with a focus on Articles 39(b) and 31C of the Constitution.

Key Issues Considered by the Court

  • Article 31C: Whether it still protects laws giving effect to Articles 39(b) and 39(c), even after amendments and past rulings.
  • Interpretation of Article 39(b): The meaning of “material resources of the community” and the limits on government acquisition.

Legal and Constitutional Background

  • Article 31C and 39(b) Overview:
    • Article 31C was introduced by the 25th Amendment (1971) to protect laws related to the distribution of resources for the common good.
    • Article 39(b) (Directive Principle of State Policy) mandates that resources should be distributed to best serve the common good.
  • Historical Context:
    • Kesavananda Bharati Case (1973): The Supreme Court affirmed the Constitution’s "basic structure," impacting the interpretation of amendments to Article 31C.
    • Minerva Mills Case (1980): The Court struck down further amendments to Article 31C.

The Supreme Court’s Ruling in 2024

  • Restoration of the Post-Kesavananda Position: The Supreme Court clarified that the interpretation of Article 31C is restricted, and the protection under this article applies only to laws implementing Articles 39(b) and 39(c), not all directive principles.
  • On Redistributing Private Property:
    • The majority opinion held that not all privately owned properties can be considered “material resources of the community” for redistribution under Article 39(b).
    • The Court dismissed the broad interpretation of "material resources" used in previous rulings (e.g., Justice Krishna Iyer’s dissent in the Ranganatha Reddy case, 1977).

Dissenting and Concurring Opinions

  • Justice Nagarathna’s Concurring Opinion:
    • Acknowledged that certain privately owned resources could be considered material resources (e.g., forests, wetlands), but emphasized a balanced approach.
    • Distinguished between personal belongings and resources that could be considered part of the public domain.
  • Justice Dhulia’s Dissent:
    • Argued for a broader interpretation, in line with past rulings, that private resources could be considered material resources if they served the public good.

Interpretation of Article 39(b)

  • Scope of the Article:
    • Article 39(b) directs the State to ensure that the ownership of material resources is distributed to serve the common good.
    • It imposes a positive obligation on the State to create policies for resource distribution, but does not authorize arbitrary expropriation of private property.
  • Private Property as Material Resources:
    • The Court clarified that private property cannot be deemed a material resource of the community unless specific conditions are met (e.g., scarcity, public welfare implications).
    • The judgment emphasized a case-by-case analysis rather than a blanket approach.

Criteria for Assessing Material Resources

The Court provided criteria to evaluate whether a private property could be considered a “material resource of the community”:

  • Nature of the Resource: What is the resource’s fundamental characteristic?
  • Impact on Public Welfare: Does the resource impact the common good or public interest?
  • Ownership Type: Is the resource privately owned or under state control?
  • Scarcity: Is the resource scarce or in finite supply?
  • Concentration of Ownership: Are the resources concentrated in the hands of a few private entities?

Implications of the Ruling

  • Protection of Private Property Rights: The ruling strengthens protections against arbitrary State acquisition of private property, reinforcing the constitutional safeguards for property rights.
  • Economic Implications: The Court noted that India’s economic trajectory has shifted from socialism to a market-based economy, and that resource redistribution policies should reflect this change.
  • Policy Shifts: The ruling marks a shift away from a socialist economic ideology towards one that emphasizes private property rights, while still considering public welfare in resource distribution.

Conclusion

  • Balancing Individual Rights with Public Welfare: The ruling underscores the importance of balancing private property rights with the need for equitable resource distribution to serve the common good.
  • Implications for Constitutional Interpretation: This judgment marks a pivotal moment in the interpretation of property rights in India, affirming the evolving nature of the Constitution in response to dynamic economic and social policies.

Does Data Justify Subdivision of Quotas?

  • 05 Nov 2024

Context

India's reservation system has long been a tool for uplifting historically marginalized communities, especially Scheduled Castes (SCs) and Scheduled Tribes (STs). However, recent debates have questioned whether the system serves its intended purpose, particularly in light of disparities within the SC groups. The need for a ‘quota-within-quota’ system has been raised to ensure more equitable outcomes across different SC subgroups.

The Reservation System: Origins and Objectives

Purpose of Reservations

  • Historical Background: Established to correct centuries of social and economic exclusion faced by SCs and STs.
  • Mechanism for Equality: Aimed to create opportunities in education, government employment, and public offices for historically marginalized groups.
  • Dr. B.R. Ambedkar’s Vision: Reservations were designed to transition from formal legal equality to substantive equality.

Challenges of the Current System

  • Despite progress, certain SC subgroups seem to have benefited more than others.
  • A Supreme Court ruling has led to calls for a 'quota-within-quota' to address intra-SC disparities.

Exploring Intra-SC Disparities: The Data Analysis

States Examined

  • Key States: Andhra Pradesh, Bihar, Punjab, Tamil Nadu, Uttar Pradesh, and West Bengal.
  • Objective: To investigate whether some SC subgroups have disproportionately benefited from the reservation system.

Findings Across States

  • Andhra Pradesh: Minor differences between SC groups (Malas vs. Madigas), with both groups showing similar socio-economic progress.
  • Tamil Nadu: No significant disparity between Adi Dravida and Pallan groups, both benefiting equally from reservations.
  • Punjab: Subdivision of quotas since 1975 has led to better outcomes for disadvantaged groups like Mazhabi Sikhs and Balmikis.
  • Bihar: The Mahadalit category, introduced in 2007, failed due to political intervention, undermining the policy’s goals.

Key Insights

  • In some states (e.g., Punjab), a subdivision of quotas has been effective in addressing intra-SC disparities.
  • In other states, like Andhra Pradesh and Tamil Nadu, the benefits of reservations are already distributed fairly evenly among SC subgroups.
  • The gap between SCs and upper-caste groups remains much larger than the gap within SCs.

The Issue of Access to Reservations

Caste Certificates as a Proxy for Access

  • Data from IHDS: Less than 50% of SC households in Uttar Pradesh and Bihar report having caste certificates, limiting access to reserved positions.
  • Better Access in Some States: Over 60-70% of SC households in Tamil Nadu and Andhra Pradesh have caste certificates.

Core Issue: Ensuring Access

  • Access Challenges: Without proper access to caste certificates, many SCs are excluded from the benefits of the reservation system.
  • Priority Area: Ensuring that all eligible SCs have access to reservations is a critical concern before considering subdivision.

The 'Quota-within-Quota' Proposal

Concept and Potential Benefits

  • Targeted Assistance: A ‘quota-within-quota’ would provide more focused help to the most disadvantaged SC subgroups, as seen in Punjab.
  • Political Considerations: However, the political motivations behind quota subdivision, as seen in Bihar, can undermine the policy’s effectiveness.

Criticism and Limitations

  • Uneven Need for Subdivision: In many states, the need for further subdivision is minimal, as the benefits of reservations are already fairly distributed.
  • Political Exploitation: The policy risks becoming a political tool rather than a genuine means of achieving social justice, as political influence often determines who is categorized as the most disadvantaged.

Addressing Inequality Beyond Reservations

Income-Based Criteria and Monetary Benefits

  • Current Approach: Monetary benefits (e.g., scholarships, lower fees) are a part of the affirmative action system.
  • Income Criterion: Should be used to determine eligibility for monetary benefits to focus assistance on those most in need.

The "Creamy Layer" Debate

  • Supreme Court’s Suggestion: The introduction of a "creamy layer" exclusion for SCs, akin to the Other Backward Classes (OBCs) model, remains contentious and requires stronger evidence.

Challenges of Economic Mobility

  • Stigma and Discrimination: Economic progress does not necessarily eliminate social stigma or discrimination, especially for historically marginalized groups.
  • Long-Term Goal: While reservations have contributed to creating a Dalit middle class, addressing stigma will require a gradual process.

The Need for Updated Data and Evidence-Based Policy

Data Deficiency

  • Lack of Comprehensive Data: The absence of updated, reliable data on caste-based disparities limits the effectiveness of any policy reform.
  • National Census Delay: India’s national Census, the only source of comprehensive data on caste, has been delayed, exacerbating the problem.

Evidence-Driven Reform

  • Importance of Data: Robust and up-to-date data is essential to assess the true impact of reservations and to make informed policy decisions.

Conclusion: Reforming the Reservation System

  • Reservations’ Success: The reservation system has played a significant role in improving the socio-economic status of SCs and STs.
  • Intra-SC Disparities: While some subgroups benefit more than others, the broader gap between SCs and upper-caste groups remains far more pronounced.
  • Focus on Access: The primary focus should be on improving access to reservations, ensuring that all eligible SCs benefit fully from affirmative action.

RBI brings back 102 tonnes gold from BoE; 60 per cent reserves in India

  • 04 Nov 2024

In News:

England over the past two-and-a-half years, reflecting a strategic shift in its approach to safeguarding gold reserves. This move marks a significant increase in the RBI's domestic gold holdings.

Rise in the RBI's Domestic Gold Holdings

  • Current Status (September 2024):The RBI's domestic gold reserves have grown to 510.46 metric tonnes, up from 295.82 metric tonnes in March 2022.
  • Reduction in Gold Held Abroad:The gold held under the custodianship of the Bank of England has decreased to 324 metric tonnes from 453.52 metric tonnes in March 2022.
  • Gold as a Share of Foreign Exchange Reserves:The proportion of gold in India's total foreign exchange reserves increased from 8.15% in March 2024 to 9.32% in September 2024.

Gold Kept in the Bank of England

  • Overview of the Bank of England's Gold Vault:The Bank of England is home to one of the largest gold vaults in the world, second only to the New York Federal Reserve, housing around 400,000 bars of gold.
  • India’s Gold Held Abroad:The RBI continues to retain 324 metric tonnes of its gold with the Bank of England and the Bank for International Settlements (BIS).
  • Additional Gold Management:Around 20 tonnes of gold are managed through gold deposit schemes.
  • Strategic Role of London’s Gold Market:Storing gold in London provides immediate access to the global London bullion market, enhancing liquidity for India’s gold assets.

Historical Context of India’s Gold Holdings

  • 1991 Balance of Payments Crisis:During a financial crisis in 1991, India had to send 47 tonnes of gold to the Bank of England to secure loans for repaying international creditors.

RBI’s Strategy to Bring Gold Back to India

  • Global Trend of Central Banks Buying Gold:Since the imposition of U.S. sanctions on Russia in 2022, central banks globally have been increasing their gold reserves as a hedge against inflation and to reduce reliance on the U.S. dollar. India has outpaced other G20 nations in this trend, surpassing Russia and China in gold purchases.
  • De-dollarisation:This shift is part of a broader strategy of de-dollarisation, aiming to diversify away from the U.S. dollar amidst rising gold prices and growing geopolitical tensions.

Significance of Repatriating Gold to India

  • Sign of Economic Strength
    • Recovery from the 1991 Crisis:The decision to repatriate gold reflects a significant improvement in India's economic position, a stark contrast to the 1991 economic crisis when India had to pledge gold for financial survival.
  • Optimizing Financial Resources
    • Reducing Storage Costs:Storing gold domestically allows the RBI to save on storage fees paid to foreign custodians, such as the Bank of England.
  • Strategic Significance
    • Enhanced Resilience Amid Global Instability:By repatriating its gold, India enhances its strategic autonomy and strengthens its economic position in a world of rising uncertainties and currency volatility.

RBI's Capacity to Safeguard Gold Domestically

  • Increasing Domestic Storage Capacity:The RBI has been increasing its domestic capacity for gold storage to accommodate rising reserves and reduce dependence on foreign gold safekeeping facilities.
  • Current Foreign Exchange Reserves:As of October 2024, India’s total foreign exchange reserves stand at $684.8 billion, sufficient to cover over 11.2 months of imports.

Diversification of Foreign Exchange Reserves

  • Mitigating Currency Risks:By increasing gold reserves, India diversifies its foreign exchange holdings, reducing reliance on any single currency and shielding itself from global currency fluctuations and economic volatility.
  • Gold as a Stable Asset:Gold serves as a stable asset, providing a safeguard against global economic shocks, and balances India’s reserves portfolio.

Gold as a Hedge against Inflation

  • Preserving Wealth amid Inflation:Gold is traditionally viewed as a hedge against inflation, maintaining or appreciating in value when other currencies weaken. By increasing its gold reserves, India positions itself to better withstand the adverse effects of inflation and ensure long-term financial stability.

Conclusion

The repatriation of gold by the RBI reflects a strategic move to bolster India's economic strength and diversify its financial assets. The decision to bring gold back to India not only signifies an improvement in India's economic fundamentals but also aligns with global trends of central banks increasing their gold reserves to ensure long-term stability and reduce reliance on the U.S. dollar.

Tackling Judicial Pendency and Adjournments in India

  • 01 Nov 2024

In News:

The issue of judicial delays and adjournments has become a significant concern in India’s judicial system. President Droupadi Murmu, while addressing the National Conference of District Judiciary in September 2024, emphasized the need to eliminate the culture of adjournments. These delays particularly affect the poor and rural populations, who often suffer in silence, avoiding court due to the fear of protracted justice.

Background of the Indian Judicial System

India’s judicial system has evolved under various legal frameworks, including the Code of Civil Procedure (CPC) and the Criminal Procedure Code (CrPC). Initially, civil courts dealt with a wide range of cases, while criminal courts focused on criminal offenses. The establishment of the Supreme Court and High Courts further strengthened India’s judicial architecture to handle constitutional and appellate cases.

To address the growing caseload, the Indian government introduced the tribunal system through the 42nd Constitutional Amendment Act, 1976, aiming to manage specialized disputes. However, despite these reforms, case pendency continues to rise.

Key Issues Contributing to Judicial Delay and Pendency

  • Judge-to-Population Ratio - India currently has 21 judges per million people, far below the recommended 50 judges per million as per the 120th Law Commission Report. The shortage of judges directly contributes to the growing backlog of cases.
  • Vacant Judicial Positions - As of late 2024, 30% of High Court positions remain vacant, exacerbating the case pendency crisis. The delay in filling these vacancies has resulted in overburdened judges, further delaying case resolution.
  • Legislative Overload - The enactment of laws without conducting prior judicial impact assessments leads to an increase in the number of cases, often without considering the capacity of the judiciary to handle them. This lack of foresight results in excessive pressure on courts.
  • Overworked Judiciary - Judges often face a heavy workload, with some handling multiple responsibilities across different courts. This overburdening leads to mental fatigue, increased errors, and prolonged decision-making.
  • Witness Delays - The absence of witnesses and delays in their appearance in court can significantly prolong the judicial process, contributing to case pendency.

Government Initiatives and Challenges

    • National Judicial Infrastructure Plan (NJIP): The NJIP aims to modernize judicial infrastructure, improving court functioning and case processing. However, its full implementation across the country remains a work in progress.
    • E-Courts Project: The E-Courts project aims to digitize the judicial process, including e-filing and virtual hearings. This initiative has shown promise in reducing procedural delays but still requires wider application.
    • Tribunal System: While tribunals were introduced to reduce the burden on regular courts, their success has been limited, and the abolition of six tribunals in 2021 has added additional pressure on High Courts.
    • Case Timeline Legislation: Laws prescribing time-bound adjudication for sensitive cases have been enacted, but due to inefficiencies in the system, deadlines are rarely met.

Recommendations for Reform

    • Enhance Judicial Strength
    • Increase the Judge-to-Population Ratio: The government should prioritize the appointment of judges to meet the 50 judges per milliontargets.
    • Fill Vacant Positions: High Courts should fill vacant positions six months in advance to ensure a steady supply of judges.
    • Judicial Impact Assessment
  • Implement Judicial Impact Assessments: The Justice M. Jagannadha Rao Committee’s recommendation for judicial impact assessments should be made mandatory. Every new Bill should assess the likely increase in judicial workload, the required number of judges, and the necessary infrastructure.
    • Promote Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR)
    • Encourage ADR Mechanisms: Mediation and arbitration should be promoted as cost-effective alternatives to court proceedings. Public awareness campaigns and legal reforms can encourage the use of ADR.
    • Strengthen Infrastructure and Technology
  • Modernize Court Infrastructure: The judiciary should invest in technology such as e-filing and virtual hearings to reduce administrative burdens and expedite case resolutions.
  • Streamline Administrative Processes: Technology can also help automate administrative tasks, thereby reducing the workload on judges and speeding up case processing.
  • Limit Adjournments
  • Stricter Norms for Adjournments: Judicial bodies should enforce stricter norms for granting adjournments, ensuring that they are not used excessively.
  • Oversight Mechanism: An independent body can monitor the frequency of adjournments and take corrective action if needed.

Conclusion

Addressing the issue of judicial adjournments and case pendency requires a comprehensive approach involving structural reforms, better resource allocation, and the adoption of technology. Strengthening the judiciary’s infrastructure, increasing judicial appointments, and promoting alternative dispute resolution are vital steps toward ensuring quicker, fairer justice. The collaborative efforts of the judiciary, government, and society at large are essential to ensuring that India’s judicial system can meet the demands of justice in a timely and efficient manner.

Analysis of Election Expenditure in India

  • 30 Oct 2024

Overview

Election expenditure has become a pressing issue in modern democracies, with growing concerns about its implications for political integrity and fair competition. In India, the skyrocketing costs of elections—both in terms of candidate spending and political party expenditure—pose significant challenges to electoral transparency, governance, and equity.

 

Current State of Election Expenditure in India

The total expenditure on elections in India has risen dramatically in recent years. For the 2024 Lok Sabha elections, the total expenditure by various political parties is estimated to reach around ?1,00,000 crores. This is a significant jump from the ?9,000 crores spent in the 1998 general elections. The expenditure per vote has also risen substantially, from ?25,000 in 1951 to ?1,400 in 2024.

The election expenditure limits for individual candidates are capped by the Election Commission of India (ECI):

  • ?95 lakh for larger states (Lok Sabha constituencies)
  • ?75 lakh for smaller states
  • ?40 lakh for legislative assembly elections in larger states
  • ?28 lakh for smaller states

However, these caps apply only to individual candidates. Political parties are not subject to any expenditure limits, allowing them to spend unlimited amounts during campaigns. This discrepancy leads to considerable financial disparities between well-funded national parties and regional or smaller parties, undermining the principle of equitable competition.

 

Global Comparisons: Election Financing and Spending Limits

Election financing varies widely across democracies, with countries like the United States and the United Kingdom adopting specific limits and regulations to curb excessive spending.

  • United States: U.S. elections are financed largely through contributions from individuals, corporations, and Political Action Committees (PACs). Notably, Super PACs—which can raise and spend unlimited funds—have exacerbated concerns over money's influence on political outcomes. The 2024 U.S. presidential election is expected to cost around $16 billion (approximately ?1,36,000 crores).
  • United Kingdom: Political parties are subject to strict expenditure limits. Each political party is allowed to spend £54,010 for each constituency, with an overall cap of £35 million for contests across all constituencies. This is aimed at ensuring that elections are not swayed by wealth alone and that smaller parties have a fighting chance.

Despite these measures, the United States still faces issues with unlimited corporate donations and the growing influence of wealthy donors, highlighting the complexities in curbing money in politics.

 

Challenges Posed by Rising Election Expenditure

The rising costs of elections present multiple challenges in India, exacerbating corruption, unfair competition, and political inequality.

a) Political Corruption and Influence

Large election expenditures are often funded by corporate donations and other private entities, creating a nexus between politicians and donors. This can lead to a quid-pro-quo relationship, where politicians may prioritize the interests of their donors over public welfare. This undermines public trust in the political system.

b) Unaccounted Money and Illegal Practices

A significant portion of the election expenditure is unaccounted for. The Centre for Media Studies (CMS) reports that in the 2019 general elections, around 25% of the total expenditure was spent on illegally distributing cash to voters. This practice, coupled with the absence of strict regulations on third-party campaigners, enables the use of black money in elections, further skewing the electoral process.

c) Uneven Playing Field

The absence of limits on party spending creates a situation where well-funded national parties have an inherent advantage over smaller regional parties and independent candidates. This financial inequality reduces the ability of under-funded candidates to compete based on ideas and merit rather than financial muscle. Furthermore, the growing influence of digital advertising and media campaigns has further widened this gap, with larger parties investing heavily in digital platforms like Google and Facebook, marginalizing those without the resources to do so.

 

Proposed Reforms to Address Election Expenditure Issues

To address these challenges, several reforms have been suggested by experts, committees, and the Election Commission. These reforms aim to curb excessive spending, ensure fairness, and increase accountability in the electoral process.

a) Capping Expenditure by Political Parties

There is a pressing need to introduce expenditure ceilings for political parties, in addition to those imposed on individual candidates. According to the 2016 Electoral Reforms Report by the Election Commission, political party spending should be capped at a level not exceeding the total expenditure limit for all candidates fielded by the party. This would level the playing field, ensuring that the influence of money is curtailed during elections.

b) State Funding of Elections

Recommendations for state funding of elections have been made by the Indrajit Gupta Committee (1998) and the Law Commission Report (1999). The state could partially finance the campaigns of recognized political parties, ensuring that candidates are not solely reliant on private donations. However, this reform faces challenges in terms of feasibility and implementation, especially regarding the mechanism for allocation of funds.

c) Regulation of Third-Party Campaigners

India should follow the example of countries like Australia, where third-party campaigners are formally registered and required to disclose their funding sources. This would help in tracking illegal contributions and ensure that election spending is transparent.

d) Ban on Government Advertisements During Election Periods

The use of government advertisements by the ruling party during the run-up to elections often leads to an uneven playing field. A ban on government-funded ads during the six months before elections would ensure that the ruling party does not gain an unfair advantage through public resources.

e) Strengthening Electoral Oversight

An independent electoral oversight body could be established to oversee campaign financing and ensure that all parties comply with spending limits. This would include measures to audit party finances, track donations, and verify spending claims, making it more difficult for parties to evade rules or use black money.

 

Conclusion: The Need for Comprehensive Electoral Reforms

The rising costs of elections in India present significant challenges to the democratic process. While expenditure limits for candidates exist, the lack of restrictions on party spending creates financial inequalities that undermine fair competition. The increasing role of corporate donations, illegal cash distribution, and unregulated third-party spending further complicates the situation.

To ensure fair elections, it is crucial that India adopts reforms such as capping political party expenditures, state funding of elections, and stronger oversight mechanisms. These steps, coupled with bipartisan political will, could help create a more equitable, transparent, and accountable electoral system, fostering greater public trust in the democratic process.

By addressing these challenges head-on, India can work toward an election system that encourages political participation based on ideas and policies rather than financial clout, ultimately strengthening the foundations of democracy.

Analysis of Growing Economic Divide in India

  • 29 Oct 2024

Overview

The Economic Advisory Council to the Prime Minister (EAC-PM)'s report titled "Relative Economic Performance of Indian States: 1960-61 to 2023-24" highlights an alarming trend of widening economic disparities across India's states, which is increasingly threatening the principles of federalism and national unity. The findings reveal significant regional imbalances in terms of contributions to the national income, per capita income, and overall economic development. This analysis delves into the key insights from the report and explores the broader implications for India's federal structure, governance, and policy approaches.

Key Insights from the Report

  • Regional Economic Disparities:
    • Western and Southern States' Dominance: States such as Maharashtra, Gujarat, Tamil Nadu, and Karnataka have consistently outperformed others. These states have benefited from higher private investments, better infrastructure, and a more business-friendly environment. They also enjoy proximity to international markets, especially coastal regions like Gujarat and Tamil Nadu, which have access to ports and export markets.
    • Underperformance of Northern and Eastern States: On the other hand, northern states (with exceptions like Delhi and Haryana) and eastern states like Bihar, Odisha, and West Bengal lag behind in economic performance. These regions face challenges such as poor infrastructure, low levels of investment, and weak governance structures, which hinder their growth potential.
  • Impact of Liberalization (1991):
    • The 1991 economic reforms marked a shift toward market-oriented growth, benefiting states that were already more industrialized or had better urban infrastructure. Southern states, in particular, adapted well to the liberalized environment, attracting higher levels of private investment and expanding their economies.
    • The liberalization process disproportionately favored urban centers like Delhi, Mumbai, Chennai, and Bengaluru, where investments were channelized into growing service sectors, technology, and industries, creating a feedback loop of wealth accumulation in these hubs. Meanwhile, the hinterland remained underdeveloped due to insufficient public investment and the lack of private sector interest in these regions.
  • Investment Disparities:
    • Private Investment: Wealthier states attract a disproportionate share of private investment, which is driven by profitability and market opportunities. These states have better infrastructure, which reduces transaction costs and increases returns on investment. In contrast, underdeveloped states struggle to attract investment due to poor governance, inadequate infrastructure, and perceived higher risks.
    • Public Investment: While the public sector still plays a role in investment, the New Economic Policies (NEP) since 1991 have shifted the focus towards private sector-driven growth. This has further widened the investment gap, as the poorer states receive less public investment relative to their needs.
  • Role of Infrastructure and Governance:
    • The availability and quality of infrastructure are significant determinants of economic performance. States with better roads, energy supply, ports, and communication networks tend to attract more investments. Additionally, good governance, characterized by reduced corruption, better policy implementation, and transparency, also plays a critical role in fostering economic development.
    • In contrast, states with weaker governance structures and poor infrastructure struggle to create an enabling environment for businesses, further compounding regional disparities.
  • Impact on Federalism:
    • The growing economic divide is leading to tensions between the Centre and state governments, particularly in wealthier states that contribute significantly to national income but feel short-changed in resource allocation. These states argue that they are not receiving a fair share of national resources in return for their contributions, leading to growing dissatisfaction with the federal system.
    • The tension is exacerbated by political factors, such as accusations from opposition-led states that the Centre uses public investment to favor states aligned with the ruling party. The growing perception of politicization of resource allocation has the potential to undermine the spirit of cooperative federalism.

Structural Causes of Regional Inequality

  • Economic and Investment Magnetism:
    • Wealthier states attract more private investments, as they offer better returns due to established markets, skilled labor, and urbanization. Cities like Mumbai, Delhi, and Bengaluru serve as economic magnets, drawing talent, technology, and capital, which further consolidates their economic dominance.
    • In contrast, states without such economic hubs or access to global markets struggle to attract investment. The absence of urban agglomerations and the concentration of wealth and resources in a few states perpetuate regional disparities.
  • Policy and Investment Bias:
    • Post-liberalization policies have disproportionately benefited the organized sector, often at the expense of the unorganized sector, which is more prevalent in poorer states. The emphasis on industrial growth and infrastructure development has largely bypassed the rural and informal sectors, which are critical in underdeveloped states.
    • The organized sector has also benefited from government support, such as tax concessions and subsidized infrastructure, which have enabled these industries to thrive in already developed regions. This has widened the gap between the haves and the have-nots.
  • Cronyism and the Black Economy:
    • Crony capitalism and the prevalence of the black economy in poorer states further exacerbate regional imbalances. In some cases, political patronage and corruption divert resources and investments from areas that need them most. This weakens the investment climate, especially in states with higher levels of informal and illegal economic activity.

Implications for Federalism

The growing economic disparity poses a serious threat to India's federal structure. The increasing dissatisfaction of wealthier states with the current fiscal arrangements and the growing demand for fairer resource allocation challenge the spirit of cooperative federalism. A well-functioning federal system relies on equitable distribution of resources and opportunities for all regions to develop.

Policy Recommendations

To address these disparities and strengthen India's federal framework, several policy measures need to be implemented:

  • Enhancing Governance and Infrastructure in Lagging States:
    • Improved governance and reducing corruption are essential in attracting both private and public investments. Additionally, there must be a focus on developing critical infrastructure, such as roads, energy, and health facilities, which are essential for economic growth.
    • States need to increase public investment in sectors like education, healthcare, and social security to improve human capital and productivity.
  • Focus on the Unorganized Sector:
    • A significant portion of the labor force in poorer states is employed in the unorganized sector. Policies should aim to formalize this sector by providing social security benefits, improving labor rights, and increasing productivity through skill development. This could help raise incomes and stimulate local demand, attracting more private investment.
  • Balancing the Organized and Unorganized Sectors:
    • While the organized sector has benefited from liberalization, more attention should be given to the unorganized sector, which forms the backbone of the economy in many poorer states. A balanced approach to economic growth, which includes both organized and unorganized sectors, can help reduce disparities.
  • Shifting Focus from Urban Centers to Hinterlands:
    • Private sector investment must be incentivized in underdeveloped regions through tax breaks, subsidies, and targeted infrastructure projects. This will encourage businesses to expand beyond the major urban centers, thus promoting a more balanced distribution of economic activities.

Conclusion

The widening economic divide in India, as revealed by the EAC-PM report, poses a significant challenge to the country's federalism and unity. To ensure inclusive and balanced development, policy reforms must focus on reducing regional disparities by improving governance, infrastructure, and investment in lagging states. A shift towards equitable growth, addressing the needs of both the organized and unorganized sectors, is essential to promoting national cohesion and ensuring sustainable economic progress across all regions.

Strengthening the Anti-Defection Law to Uphold India's Democratic Integrity

  • 28 Oct 2024

In News:

The Anti-Defection Law, introduced in 1985 through the 52nd Constitutional Amendment, aims to curb political instability caused by legislators switching parties for personal or financial reasons. While the law has helped maintain political stability, it faces several challenges, including delays in decision-making, potential bias in adjudication, and lack of transparency in party directives. These issues undermine its effectiveness in safeguarding democratic integrity.

Historical Context and Genesis

The issue of political defections, exemplified by the term "Aaya Ram, Gaya Ram," traces its origins to the 1960s when frequent party-switching destabilized governments. To address this, the Anti-Defection Law was enacted in 1985, disqualifying members who voluntarily gave up their party membership or defied party whips on critical votes. Initially effective in reducing defections, the law has faced challenges due to emerging loopholes, particularly regarding party "splits" and "mergers."

Gaps and Loopholes in the Current Law

One major loophole was the provision allowing a party split if one-third of its members defected, exploited until the 91st Amendment in 2003, which increased the threshold for mergers to two-thirds. Despite this change, defections continue, particularly through "mergers." Another issue is the role of the Speaker in deciding disqualification petitions. Given that the Speaker is often affiliated with the ruling party, their decisions are sometimes seen as biased, leading to delays in resolving defection cases. Additionally, the lack of transparency in issuing party whips has caused disputes regarding their legitimacy.

Proposed Reforms

To address these challenges, two key amendments are proposed:

  1. Fixed Time Frame for Decision-Making: A clear time frame—such as four weeks—should be established for the Speaker or an adjudicatory body to resolve defection cases. If no decision is made within this period, defecting members should automatically be disqualified.
  2. Transparency in Whips: Political parties should be required to make the issuance of whips public, either through newspaper publications or electronic communication, to ensure that members are fully informed of party positions on critical votes.

Ethical Concerns and Impact on Democracy

While the Anti-Defection Law was introduced to promote political stability, it has inadvertently stifled internal dissent within parties. Legislators are often forced to follow party lines, even when their personal convictions or constituents' interests conflict. This limits their freedom of expression and undermines the representative nature of democracy. Furthermore, the law has not fully curbed unethical practices such as "poaching" of members or defectors seeking personal gain, which continue to destabilize governments and erode public trust in the system.

The Way Forward: Political Will and Comprehensive Reforms

To strengthen the Anti-Defection Law, reforms must balance party discipline with individual freedoms. Key steps include:

  • Independent Adjudication: Establishing an independent tribunal to handle defection cases can reduce political bias and expedite the decision-making process.
  • Clear Timeframes: Setting a fixed timeline for resolving defection cases will prevent delays and ensure accountability.
  • Transparency in Whip Issuance: Ensuring public notice of party whips will reduce ambiguity and disputes.
  • Promoting Ethical Conduct: Strengthening ethical guidelines to discourage "poaching" and protect the integrity of the electoral process.

Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana (PMMY)

  • 27 Oct 2024

Introduction

The Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana (PMMY) was launched by Prime Minister Narendra Modi on April 8, 2015, with the aim of providing financial support to non-corporate, non-farm small and micro enterprises in India. Through this initiative, loans are provided to individuals and small businesses who are unable to access formal institutional finance.

In the Union Budget 2024-25, Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman announced an increase in the loan limit under PMMY from ?10 lakh to ?20 lakh, with the introduction of a new loan category, Tarun Plus, aimed at fostering growth in the entrepreneurial sector.

Key Features of the Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana

Loan Limit Increase

  • Loan Limit Raised: The loan limit has been increased from ?10 lakh to ?20 lakh for eligible entrepreneurs.
  • New Loan Category: The newly introduced Tarun Plus category caters to entrepreneurs who have previously availed and successfully repaid loans under the Tarun category.
  • Credit Guarantee: The Credit Guarantee Fund for Micro Units (CGFMU) will cover these enhanced loans, further ensuring the security of micro-enterprises.

Categories of MUDRA Loans

PMMY provides collateral-free loans through financial institutions like Scheduled Commercial Banks, Regional Rural Banks (RRBs), Small Finance Banks (SFBs), Non-Banking Financial Companies (NBFCs), and Micro Finance Institutions (MFIs). These loans are provided for income-generating activities in sectors like manufacturing, trading, services, and allied agriculture activities.

Objectives of PMMY

  1. Financial Inclusion: PMMY targets marginalized and socio-economically neglected sections of society, promoting financial inclusivity.
  2. Support to Small Businesses: By providing affordable loans, the scheme encourages small-scale entrepreneurs, particularly women and minority groups, to establish and expand their businesses.
  3. Fostering Entrepreneurship: PMMY aims to unlock the potential of India’s entrepreneurial spirit, especially in rural and underserved areas.

MUDRA: The Institutional Backbone

Role of Micro Units Development & Refinance Agency Ltd. (MUDRA)

MUDRA is the primary institution set up by the Government of India to manage and implement the Mudra Yojana. It acts as a refinancing agency that provides financial support to small and micro-enterprises by working through financial intermediaries, such as banks and micro-finance institutions.

Funding Sources

  • Scheduled Commercial Banks
  • Regional Rural Banks (RRBs)
  • Small Finance Banks (SFBs)
  • Non-Banking Financial Companies (NBFCs)
  • Micro Finance Institutions (MFIs)

Application Process

Applicants can avail loans through any of the aforementioned financial institutions or apply online via the Udyami Mitra Portal.

Benefits of Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana

  • Collateral-free Loans: No security is required to obtain loans, which reduces the financial burden on borrowers.
  • Easily Accessible: PMMY loans are available across India, making them accessible to entrepreneurs in both rural and urban areas.
  • Quick and Flexible Loans: Loans can be disbursed quickly with flexible repayment terms (up to 7 years).
  • Empowering Women Entrepreneurs: The scheme offers special incentives for women entrepreneurs, helping them to establish and grow their businesses.
  • Support to Rural Areas: Special emphasis on empowering rural enterprises and reducing regional disparities.
  • MUDRA Card: The MUDRA Card is a RuPay debit card that allows borrowers to access funds through an overdraft facility, enhancing liquidity for businesses.
  • No Default Penalty: In case of loan defaults due to unforeseen circumstances, the government will step in to reduce the burden on entrepreneurs.

Categories of Loans Under PMMY

1. Shishu Category: Loans up to ?50,000

  • Targeted at micro-enterprises at the initial stage of their business journey.

2. Kishore Category: Loans between ?50,000 and ?5 lakh

  • Targeted at enterprises looking to expand their operations and upgrade their infrastructure.

3. Tarun Category: Loans between ?5 lakh and ?10 lakh

  • For established businesses that are in need of funds to scale up.

4. Tarun Plus: Loans between ?10 lakh and ?20 lakh

  • A new category designed for entrepreneurs who have repaid loans under the Tarun category and wish to further expand their business.

Achievements of PMMY (2023-24)

  • Total Loans Sanctioned: ?5.4 trillion across 66.8 million loans in FY 2023-24.
  • Loans Disbursed: Significant amounts were disbursed under each category:
    • Shishu: ?1,08,472.51 crore
    • Kishore: ?1,00,370.49 crore
    • Tarun: ?13,454.27 crore
  • Women Borrowers: A large share of loans have gone to women entrepreneurs, ensuring gender inclusivity.
  • Minority Borrowers: The scheme also emphasizes financial empowerment of minority communities.
  • NPA Reduction: The Non-Performing Assets (NPA) in Mudra loans have reduced to 3.4% in FY 2024, compared to higher levels in earlier years.

Digital Tools and Support Systems

MUDRA MITRA App

The MUDRA MITRA mobile app helps users access information about the PMMY scheme, loan application procedures, and other resources. The app is available for download on Google Play Store and Apple App Store.

Online Loan Application

Entrepreneurs can apply for loans online via portals such as PSBloansin59minutes and Udyamimitra, providing greater convenience and accessibility.

Steps to Improve Implementation

  • Handholding Support: Assistance in submitting loan applications is available for applicants.
  • Intensive Awareness Campaigns: The government conducts publicity campaigns to raise awareness about PMMY.
  • Simplified Loan Process: The loan application forms have been simplified to encourage wider participation.
  • Performance Monitoring: Regular monitoring of PMMY implementation to ensure its success.
  • Interest Subvention: A 2% interest subvention is offered for prompt repayment of Shishu loans.

Conclusion

The Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana has been a transformative scheme in fostering entrepreneurship and ensuring financial inclusion for small and micro-businesses across India. With the recent increase in loan limits and the addition of the Tarun Plus category, the scheme continues to empower emerging entrepreneurs and provides a crucial lifeline for business growth and sustainability. By supporting women, minorities, and new entrepreneurs, PMMY has contributed significantly to economic upliftment and inclusive growth in the country.

The right to die with dignity

  • 26 Oct 2024

In News:

  • The Ministry of Health and Family Welfare's draft guidelines (October 2024) aim to implement the Supreme Court's 2018 and 2023 orders on the right to die with dignity.

Legal Context: Supreme Court Rulings and Constitutional Rights

  • Right to Refuse Treatment:
    • Common Law & Article 21: The right to refuse medical treatment is grounded in common law and is now recognized as a fundamental right under Article 21 of the Indian Constitution, following the 2018 Supreme Court judgment in Common Cause v. Union of India.
    • Supreme Court Rulings: The court's rulings in 2018 and 2023 affirmed that individuals have the constitutional right to refuse life-sustaining treatment and to die with dignity.

Withholding and Withdrawing Life-Sustaining Treatment

  • Definition and Meaning:
    • What Is Life-Sustaining Treatment? Life-sustaining treatments, such as ventilators and feeding tubes, artificially replace vital bodily functions to sustain life.
    • Withholding/Withdrawal: This refers to discontinuing these treatments when they no longer improve the patient's condition or merely prolong suffering.
  • When Is It Done?
    • End-of-Life Care: Withholding or withdrawing treatment is considered when further medical intervention is futile and would only artificially prolong the dying process.
    • Focus on Comfort: After withdrawing life-sustaining measures, the focus shifts to palliative care to alleviate pain and suffering.

Understanding Euthanasia and Misconceptions

  • What Is Euthanasia?
    • Definition: Euthanasia refers to the intentional ending of a terminally ill patient’s life by medical professionals to relieve suffering.
    • Passive Euthanasia Misconception: In India, the term "passive euthanasia" is often mistakenly used to describe withholding or withdrawing life-sustaining treatment, but this does not involve the active killing of the patient.
  • Legal Framework: The Indian Council of Medical Research (ICMR) clarified in 2018 that "passive euthanasia" is not a legally accepted practice in the country.

The Role of Doctors: Ethical Dilemmas and Shared Decision-Making

  • Is Withdrawing Treatment "Giving Up" on the Patient?
    • Not Abandonment: Withdrawing life-sustaining treatment is not about abandoning the patient but recognizing when further interventions would cause unnecessary suffering.
    • Palliative Care: The patient’s comfort and dignity are prioritized through palliative care, which focuses on pain management and emotional support for both the patient and family.
  • Doctors' Ethical Responsibility:
    • Shared Decision-Making: The process encourages a collaborative approach between doctors and the patient’s family or surrogate decision-makers. This joint decision-making ensures that the wishes of the patient are respected and relieves the doctor from bearing sole responsibility for life-and-death decisions.

Living Wills and Advance Medical Directives

  • What Is a Living Will?
    • Definition: A living will is a legal document where a person outlines their medical preferences in the event they lose decision-making capacity.
    • Eligibility and Process: Individuals aged 18 or older, who are capable of making decisions, can draft a living will, naming at least two trusted surrogate decision-makers.
    • Legal Requirements: The document must be signed in the presence of an executor, two witnesses, and notarized to be legally binding.
  • 2023 Supreme Court Guidelines: The Court simplified the procedure for making living wills to ensure that the right to die with dignity is upheld.

Medical Procedure for Withholding or Withdrawing Treatment

  • Supreme Court Guidelines
    • The Supreme Court laid out a clear procedure for withholding or withdrawing life-sustaining treatment, emphasizing patient autonomy, expert assessments, and family consent.
  • Primary and Secondary Medical Boards:
    • Primary Medical Board: The treating hospital sets up a Primary Medical Board, consisting of the treating doctor and two subject-matter experts, to assess the patient's condition and determine if life-sustaining treatment is appropriate.
    • Secondary Medical Board: A Secondary Medical Board, comprising independent experts, reviews the Primary Board's decision for added oversight.
  • Consent from Family/Surrogate Decision-Makers:
    • The patient’s wishes, as outlined in an advance directive or by a surrogate, must be respected, and their consent is essential for proceeding with treatment withdrawal.
  • Judicial Oversight:
    • Once the decision to withdraw treatment is made, the hospital is required to notify the local judicial magistrate, ensuring transparency and accountability.

Conclusion: Legal and Ethical Clarity in End-of-Life Care

  • Shared Decision-Making: The process ensures that medical teams, families, and surrogate decision-makers collaborate, preventing any medical professional from facing moral or legal dilemmas alone.
  • Protection of Autonomy: These frameworks and guidelines uphold patient autonomy, offering a legal and ethical pathway for terminally ill patients to exercise their right to die with dignity.

Biodiversity COP16

  • 23 Oct 2024

In News:

The Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD), while historically overshadowed by climate change discussions, is now gaining increasing attention due to the growing recognition of the global biodiversity crisis. This evolving prominence highlights the need for urgent action to preserve ecosystems and halt biodiversity loss, which is intimately linked with the climate crisis.

Overview of the Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD)

  • Origins and Objectives:
    • The CBD emerged from the 1992 Rio Earth Summit, alongside the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC).
    • Main Goals:
    • Protect global biodiversity.
    • Restore ecosystems.
    • Ensure equitable distribution of the benefits derived from biological resources.
  • COP16 and the Kunming-Montreal Framework:
    • The 16th Conference of Parties (COP16) marks the first meeting following the Kunming-Montreal Global Biodiversity Framework adopted at COP15 in 2022.
    • The framework sets out four key goals and 23 targets to be achieved by 2030, including:
    • Protect 30% of global lands and oceans by 2030.
    • Restore 30% of degraded ecosystems by 2030.

The Growing Convergence Between Climate Change and Biodiversity

  • Interlinkages Between Climate Change and Biodiversity:
    • Mutual Impact:
    • Climate change accelerates biodiversity loss by altering habitats and threatening species.
    • In turn, ecosystem degradation contributes to climate change by releasing greenhouse gases (GHGs) from deforestation and soil degradation.
  • Shared Drivers:
    • Both crises are driven by unsustainable human activities, including over-exploitation of natural resources, deforestation, over-consumption, and pollution.
  • Increasing Synergy:
    • There is a growing realization of the need for integrated solutions that address both climate change and biodiversity loss simultaneously.
  • Momentum for 30 x 30 Targets
  • The 30 x 30 Commitment:
    • The 30 x 30 targets are central to the Kunming-Montreal Framework, which includes:
    • Conservation of 30% of the world's lands and oceans.
    • Restoration of 30% of degraded ecosystems.
    • These targets aim to ensure the preservation of biodiversity-rich areas and the restoration of degraded ecosystems globally by 2030.
  • National Biodiversity Strategies and Action Plans (NBSAPs):
    • Countries are required to develop and submit their NBSAPs (akin to Nationally Determined Contributions (NDCs) for climate change).
    • As of now, only 32 countries have submitted their NBSAPs, with more expected during COP16.
  • High Seas Treaty:
    • A crucial agreement for achieving 30 x 30 targets is the High Seas Treaty (also called Biodiversity Beyond National Jurisdictions (BBNJ)), which focuses on:
    • Establishing protected marine areas in biodiversity-rich regions beyond national jurisdictions.
    • Ensuring regulation of human activities in these areas.

Access and Benefit Sharing: The Case of Genetic Resources

  • Genetic Resources and Their Exploitation:
    • The oceans, along with terrestrial ecosystems, harbor a wide variety of genetic resources that can be exploited for medical, commercial, and scientific purposes.
    • Advances in biotechnology and digital sequencing of genetic material have raised issues about the equitable sharing of benefits from these resources.
  • Nagoya Protocol and Benefit Sharing:
    • The Nagoya Protocol (2010) set out guidelines for the access and fair sharing of benefits derived from genetic resources.
    • At COP16, discussions will center on how genetic sequences (used in products such as medicines, crops, etc.) can be used fairly, ensuring that indigenous communities, who may be the original custodians of these resources, benefit equitably.

Finance Mechanisms for Biodiversity Conservation

  • Financial Targets:
    • One of the key goals of the Kunming-Montreal Framework is to mobilize $200 billion per year by 2030 for biodiversity conservation globally.
    • Developed countries are expected to contribute $20 billion annually to developing nations, increasing to $30 billion by 2030.
  • Phasing Out Harmful Subsidies:
    • Countries are urged to eliminate perverse incentives that harm biodiversity, such as subsidies for:
    • Over-fishing.
    • Deforestation.
    • Fossil fuel consumption.
    • The goal is to repurpose such incentives to support sustainable practices and conservation efforts.
  • New Financial Mechanisms:
    • COP16 discussions will also focus on creating innovative financial mechanisms, such as:
    • A biodiversity fund.
    • Biodiversity credits, similar to carbon credits, which would allow countries or organizations to offset their biodiversity loss by investing in conservation projects elsewhere.

Challenges and the Way Forward

  • Implementation of 30 x 30 Targets:
    • The main challenge lies in translating ambitious goals into actionable plans at the national and local levels. Countries must not only submit action plans but also implement and monitor them effectively.
  • Increased Global Cooperation:
    • Addressing biodiversity loss requires collaboration between countries, industries, and local communities to ensure that efforts are comprehensive and inclusive.
  • Public Awareness and Engagement:
    • It is crucial to raise awareness about the importance of biodiversity conservation and the urgent need for collective action to mitigate the combined threats of biodiversity loss and climate change.

Conclusion: The Need for Urgent Action

The discussions at COP16 signal an important shift in how the world addresses biodiversity and its links to climate change. As countries continue to recognize the interconnectedness of these two crises, the outcome of the CBD negotiations could play a pivotal role in shaping global environmental policy. However, meeting the ambitious goals set forth by the Kunming-Montreal Framework requires strong political will, adequate financing, and effective global cooperation.

What are the stress factors for Indian Railways?

  • 22 Oct 2024

In News:

On October 17, eight coaches of the Agartala-Lokmanya Tilak Express derailed in Assam with no casualties. On October 11, a passenger train rear-ended a stationary goods train near Chennai, also with no casualties. Indian trains have been involved in multiple accidents of late. The Balasore accident on June 2, 2023, had the greatest death toll, more than 275, yet pressure on the Railways to improve safety competes with pressures straining its subsistence.

Railway Accident Trends

  • Decline in Accidents Over Time:
    • From 1,390 accidents per year in the 1960s, railway accidents have reduced to about 80 accidents per year in the last decade.
  • Recent Consequential Accidents:
    • 34 accidents in 2021-2022
    • 48 accidents in 2022-2023
    • 40 accidents in 2023-2024
  • Primary Causes of Accidents:
    • 55.8% due to staff errors (railway personnel).
    • 28.4% due to non-staff errors.
    • 6.2% due to equipment failure.
  • Role of Signalling Failures:
    • Major accidents, such as Balasore and Kavaraipettai, were attributed to signalling system failures.

Key Safety Technologies and Measures

  • Kavach System:
    • Kavach is an automatic train protection system designed to prevent collisions by monitoring train positions and activating alarms or braking.
    • As of February 2024, Kavach was implemented on only 2% (1,465 route km) of the railway network, limiting its effectiveness.
  • Signalling System Overhaul:
    • Outdated and faulty signalling systems contribute significantly to accidents. Both Balasore and Kavaraipettai incidents were linked to failures in signalling infrastructure.

Financial Strain on Indian Railways

  • Operating Ratio (OR):
    • The Operating Ratio (OR) in 2024-2025 is estimated to be ?98.2, indicating that the Railways spends ?98.2 for every ?100 earned.
    • A higher OR reduces available funds for safety improvements and infrastructure upgrades.
  • Budgetary Constraints:
    • The 2023-24 budget showed a 7.2% reduction in capital outlay for track renewal and a 96% decrease in the Depreciation Reserve Fund, which is used to replace aging assets.
  • Revenue Imbalance:
    • Freight services account for 65% of Railways’ revenue but face capacity constraints, with 30% of the network operating at over 100% capacity.
    • Passenger services, however, continue to incur significant losses, with ?68,269 crore loss in 2021-22.

Challenges in Rail Infrastructure

  • Slow Infrastructure Development:
    • The government's Dedicated Freight Corridors (DFCs), intended to alleviate congestion, are severely delayed:
    • The Eastern DFC is the only fully operational corridor.
    • Other corridors, including the Western DFC and additional planned routes, remain incomplete.
  • Track and Equipment Maintenance:
    • Ongoing delays in upgrading and maintaining essential infrastructure (tracks, wagons, signalling) contribute to the rising number of accidents.

Loco Pilot Working Conditions

  • Extended Working Hours:
    • Loco pilots often work 12-hour shifts due to manpower shortages, leading to fatigue and increased risk of human error.
    • Stress and exhaustion are significant contributors to accidents caused by human error, including Signal Passed at Danger (SPAD).

Recommendations for Improving Railway Safety

  • Loco Pilot Vacancies:Immediate recruitment to fill the 18,799 vacant loco pilot positions to prevent overworking and reduce fatigue-related errors.
  • Expand Kavach Deployment:Accelerate the nationwide installation of the Kavach system, particularly on high-risk and high-traffic routes, to enhance safety.
  • Complete Dedicated Freight Corridors (DFCs):Expedite the completion of DFCs to ease congestion and increase freight movement efficiency.
  • Independent Railway Safety Authority:Establish an independent Railway Safety Authority with statutory powers, as recommended by the Kakodkar Committee (2012), to enforce safety standards and monitor implementation.
  • Improve Signal Infrastructure:Invest in advanced and reliable signalling systems to prevent errors stemming from outdated or malfunctioning infrastructure.
  • Regulate Working Hours:Enforce strict work hour limits to reduce fatigue among railway staff and ensure proper rest between shifts.
  • Strengthen Trackside Infrastructure:Install fencing along tracks in high-risk areas to prevent cattle run-overs, a common cause of derailments in rural and semi-urban areas.

Conclusion

  • Indian Railways faces a complex set of challenges, balancing safety requirements with financial constraints. Despite technological advancements like Kavach, its limited deployment and outdated infrastructure continue to present significant risks.
  • A holistic approach to reform is needed, including addressing manpower shortages, upgrading safety technologies, and investing in infrastructure development. This will be essential for reducing accidents, improving safety, and ensuring the long-term sustainability of India’s vast railway network.

Fortified Rice: A Strategic Initiative to Combat Micronutrient Deficiencies in India

  • 21 Oct 2024

Introduction to Rice Fortification

Fortification refers to the process of adding micronutrients, such as vitamins and minerals, to food products that are not naturally present in sufficient amounts. In India, rice fortification has been identified as a cost-effective strategy to address widespread micronutrient deficiencies, particularly iron, folic acid, and vitamin B12. These deficiencies contribute to various health problems such as anemia, stunted growth, and cognitive impairments, particularly among women and children.

Background: India’s Fortified Rice Program

India has one of the highest rates of malnutrition globally, with anemia affecting every second woman and every third child in the country. Rice is a staple food for approximately 65% of India’s population, making it an ideal vehicle for micronutrient fortification. In 2019, the Indian government launched the rice fortification initiative as part of its broader strategy to improve public health and nutrition outcomes.

In July 2024, the Union Cabinet approved the continuation of the fortified rice program under key welfare schemes, including the Pradhan Mantri Garib Kalyan Anna Yojana (PMGKAY). This initiative will run until December 2028, and aims to make fortified rice a common feature of the Public Distribution System (PDS), mid-day meals, and anganwadis, reaching millions of beneficiaries across the country.

Fortification Process and Standards

The fortification of rice involves adding essential micronutrients—iron, folic acid, and vitamin B12—to rice grains. This can be done by either coating the rice with a premix or producing extruded rice kernels that are enriched with nutrients before blending them with regular rice. According to the Food Safety and Standards Authority of India (FSSAI), every kilogram of fortified rice should contain:

  • Iron: 28 mg - 42.5 mg
  • Folic Acid: 75 - 125 micrograms
  • Vitamin B12: 0.75 - 1.25 micrograms

Scientific Safety and Efficacy of Iron Fortified Rice

The safety and effectiveness of iron-fortified rice have been under close scrutiny. Concerns were raised about whether individuals with hemoglobinopathies (such as Thalassemia and Sickle Cell Anemia) might be adversely affected by the added iron. Initially, the packaging of fortified rice carried health advisories for these individuals, but a 2023 scientific review and committee assessment concluded that there were no health risks from iron fortification for such individuals. The iron levels in fortified rice are minimal compared to the levels of iron patients with Thalassemia receive through blood transfusions, and Sickle Cell patients have naturally elevated levels of hepcidin, which limits iron absorption.

Following the review, the advisory was removed in July 2024, aligning with global practices where similar advisories are not required in countries that fortify rice.

Expansion of Fortified Rice Infrastructure

India’s rice fortification program has scaled up rapidly. As of 2024, over 21,000 rice mills have installed blending equipment to produce fortified rice, with a monthly capacity of 223 lakh metric tons (LMT). Additionally, 232 premix suppliers have the capacity to produce 75 LMT annually, significantly surpassing the requirements of the PMGKAY, which mandates the procurement of 5.2 LMT of fortified rice annually.

To ensure quality, NABL-accredited labs conduct rigorous testing on fortified rice products across the country. This infrastructure expansion supports the goal of fortifying rice distributed through welfare schemes and public safety nets.

Global Context: Rice Fortification Worldwide

Fortification of staple foods, including rice, is a globally recognized practice aimed at addressing micronutrient deficiencies in populations with limited access to diverse diets. As of 2024, 18 countries globally are actively involved in rice fortification. The World Health Organization (WHO) has endorsed rice fortification as an effective means to combat iron deficiency anemia, especially in countries like India where rice is a primary dietary staple.

Countries such as the U.S. have been fortifying rice since the late 1950s, and WHO recommends iron fortification where rice constitutes a major part of the diet.

Benefits of Iron Fortification of Rice

  • Improved Cognitive Development: Iron is crucial for brain development and cognitive function. Adequate iron intake during early childhood is linked to better cognitive performance, which can improve educational outcomes.
  • Enhanced Maternal and Infant Health: Iron deficiency during pregnancy is associated with risks such as maternal anemia and poor fetal development. Fortified rice helps reduce these risks by improving iron intake among pregnant women.
  • Reduction in Prevalence of Anemia: Regular consumption of fortified rice has been shown to improve hemoglobin levels in populations suffering from iron deficiency anemia. This has been particularly evident in pilot districts in India, where iron fortification has led to improved health outcomes among both adults and children.

Potential Risks and Challenges

  • Bioavailability of Iron: Iron bioavailability refers to the body's ability to absorb and utilize the iron from fortified foods. While iron from rice is absorbed to a lesser extent compared to meat, its fortification still contributes significantly to overall iron intake, especially in populations that consume rice regularly.
  • Overload of Iron: Excessive iron intake can lead to iron toxicity, causing oxidative stress, liver damage, and increased risk of infections. Special care must be taken to ensure that individuals with conditions like hemochromatosis or those receiving other forms of iron supplementation do not experience iron overload.
  • Technical and Social Barriers: While India has made substantial progress in infrastructure for rice fortification, challenges remain in ensuring the quality, stability, and safety of fortified rice. Moreover, ensuring affordability, accessibility, and acceptance of fortified rice among diverse population groups remains a critical concern.

Future Directions for Rice Fortification

  • Nanotechnology for Enhanced Iron Absorption: To improve the bioavailability of iron, exploring the use of nanotechnology could help encapsulate iron particles, enhancing their absorption and effectiveness in the body.
  • Biofortification Integration: Combining iron fortification with biofortification—the process of breeding rice varieties with naturally higher iron content—could provide a sustainable solution for long-term micronutrient deficiency.
  • Public-Private Partnerships: To scale up rice fortification, there is a need for collaborations between the government, private sector, and non-governmental organizations (NGOs). These partnerships can help improve distribution networks, technology development, and financial sustainability.
  • Continuous Monitoring and Evaluation: Rigorous evaluation studies, such as those being conducted by the Indian Council of Medical Research (ICMR) and NITI Aayog, will help assess the effectiveness of the rice fortification program and ensure its continuous improvement.

Conclusion: A Path to Nutritional Security

The fortification of rice in India represents a powerful tool to address the growing problem of micronutrient deficiencies, particularly iron deficiency anemia, which affects millions of people, especially women and children. By ensuring that fortified rice is integrated into government welfare schemes, India can take a significant step toward improving public health and achieving its nutritional goals.

While challenges related to bioavailability, iron overload, and implementation remain, ongoing research, technological innovation, and collaborative efforts can help mitigate these risks. As India continues to expand its rice fortification program, it offers a model for other countries facing similar nutritional challenges, reinforcing the role of fortified foods in achieving global sustainable development goals (SDGs) related to health and nutrition.

Global Hunger Index 2024

  • 17 Oct 2024

Why in the news?

India is ranked 105th among 127 countries in the Global Hunger Index (GHI) 2024, indicating a ‘serious’ level of hunger, along with Afghanistan and Pakistan, which also face hunger challenges.

According to the Global Hunger Index released on 10th October 2024, the hunger levels in 42 countries are at alarming levels, making the goal of Zero Hunger by 2030 unattainable. At this pace of progress, the world will not even attain a low hunger level until 2160. The world’s GHI score is 18.3, which is considered moderate in the severity of hunger scale.

Key Takeaways:

1. The GHI is published by Concern Worldwide and Welthungerhilfe annually to measure and track hunger at global, regional, and national levels. The purpose of the report is to create awareness and understanding of the struggle against hunger and call attention to those areas of the world where hunger levels are highest and there is a need for additional efforts.

2. GHI is calculated based on a formula that combines four indicators that together capture the multidimensional nature of hunger:

  • Undernourishment: the share of the population whose caloric intake is insufficient;
  • Child stunting: the share of children under the age of five who have low height for their age, reflecting chronic undernutrition;
  • Child wasting: the share of children under the age of five who have low weight for their height, reflecting acute undernutrition; and
  • Child mortality: the share of children who die before their fifth birthday, reflecting in part the fatal mix of inadequate nutrition and unhealthy environments.

 

3. The 2024 GHI reflects that multiple factors are posing challenges in attaining Zero Hunger. The challenges include large-scale armed conflicts, climate change indicators that are worsening faster than expected, high food prices, market disruptions, economic downturns, and debt crises in many low- and middle-income countries.

4. The report highlights the link between Gender inequality, climate change, and hunger. Gender is intertwined with climate and food security challenges in ways that respective policies and interventions often ignore. Women and girls are typically hardest hit by food insecurity and malnutrition. They also suffer disproportionately from the effects of weather extremes and climate emergencies.

5. Six countries – Somalia, Yemen, Chad, Madagascar, Burundi, and South Sudan- have levels of hunger considered alarming. This is the result of widespread human misery, undernourishment, and malnutrition.

What is Hunger?

The Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO) defines hunger as food deprivation, or undernourishment, as the habitual consumption of too few calories to provide the minimum dietary energy an individual requires to live a healthy and productive life, given that person’s sex, age, stature, and physical activity level.

6. India ranked 105th out of 125 countries in the Global Hunger Index 2024, with a score of 27.3, indicating a serious level of hunger.  Child wasting is particularly high in India. Child undernutrition in India goes hand in hand with the poor nutritional status of mothers, suggesting an intergenerational pattern of undernutrition and underscoring the need for attention to maternal health nutrition and infant feeding.

 

 

7. India’s GHI score of 27.3 is a cause for concern, especially when compared to its South Asian neighbours like Bangladesh, Nepal, and Sri Lanka, which fall into the “moderate” category

8. The performance of India on various parameters of GHI:

  • 13.7 per cent of India’s population suffers from undernourishment,
  • 35.5 per cent of children under the age of five are stunted
  • 18.7 per cent experience child wasting and
  • 2.9 per cent of children do not reach their fifth birthday.

9. The policy recommendations made in the document include strengthening accountability to international law and the enforceability of the right to adequate food, promoting gender-transformative approaches to food systems and climate policies and programs, and making investments that integrate and promote gender, climate, and food justice.

National Family Health Survey

1. The National Family Health Survey (NFHS) in India provides estimates of underweight, (low weight for age), stunting (low height for age), and wasting (low weight for height). These conditions affect preschool children (those less than 6 years of age) disproportionately and compromise a child’s physical and mental development while also increasing the vulnerability to infections.

2. According to the NFHS 5, the percentage of stunted, wasted, and underweight children is 36 per cent19 per cent and 32 per cent respectively.

(Thought Process: These data can be incorporated in your Mains Answer Writing to enrich your content.)

3. NFHS 5 highlighted that among mothers with a child between ages 6-23 months, 18 per cent reported that their child did not eat any food whatsoever — referred to as “zero-food” — in the 24 hours preceding the survey. The zero-food prevalence was 30 per cent for infants aged 6-11 months, remains worryingly high at 13 per cent among the 12-17 months old, and persists even among 18-23 months-old children at 8 per cent.

Hidden Hunger

In India, we suffer largely from “hidden hunger” which does not always manifest itself in an emaciated appearance. It is a hunger caused by the constant or recurrent lack of food of sufficient quality and quantity. It is the deprivation of vitamins and minerals, essential micronutrients that are necessary for proper growth, physical fitness, and mental development.

4. Going without food for an entire day at this critical period of a child’s development raises serious concerns related to severe food insecurity. According to the World Health Organisation, at six months of age, 33 per cent of the daily calorie intake is expected to come from food. This proportion increases to 61 per cent at 12 months of age. The recommended calorie percentages mentioned here are the minimum amount that should come from food.

5. India has a challenging task in attaining the Sustainable Development Goal (SDG) 2 of “zero hunger”. Mission Poshan 2.0, the overarching flagship programme dedicated to maternal and child nutrition, has evolved in the right direction by targeting SDG 2 “zero hunger” and focusing on food-based initiatives, including its flagship supplementary nutrition programme service as mandated by the 2013 National Food Security Act.

The Mental Health Crisis in India

  • 10 Oct 2024

In News:

India faces a significant mental health crisis, driven by various factors including economic disparities, social isolation, and changing family dynamics. The pandemic further worsened these issues, leading to detrimental effects on mental well-being.

Causes of Mental Illness

  • Socioeconomic Factors: Poverty, violence, inequality, and environmental deprivation contribute to rising mental health issues.
  • Pandemic Impact: Lockdowns and uncertainties have heightened stress levels and anxiety.
  • Adverse Life Experiences: Trauma, abuse, and dysfunctional family relationships can severely impact mental health.
  • Cultural Pressures: The urban focus on consumerism and status can lead to feelings of inadequacy and dissatisfaction.

The Shortage of Mental Health Professionals

India's mental health services are severely lacking, with only 0.75 psychiatrists per 100,000 population—far below the World Health Organization's recommendation of three. This shortage underscores the need for policy interventions and incentives to increase the supply of mental health professionals.

Government Initiatives for Mental Health

The Indian government has implemented several initiatives to improve mental health care:

  • National Mental Health Programme (NMHP): Launched in 1982 to enhance community-based mental health services.
  • Mental Healthcare Act, 2017: Decriminalized suicide attempts and introduced advanced directives for treatment choices.
  • Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act, 2017: Recognizes mental illness as a disability, enhancing rights for affected individuals.
  • Manodarpan Initiative: Provides psycho-social support to students.
  • Kiran Helpline: A suicide prevention helpline for crisis management.
  • National Tele-Mental Health Programme: Launched in 2022 to expand access to mental health services, particularly in underserved areas.

Economic Survey 2023-24

For the first time, the Economic Survey emphasized the importance of mental health in policy recommendations, calling for effective implementation of mental health initiatives to address existing gaps.

Understanding Healthy Workplaces

Defining a Healthy Workplace

A healthy workplace fosters collaboration between employers and employees to promote physical and psychological safety. It encompasses open communication, respect, and a supportive environment, crucial for addressing workplace stress, anxiety, and burnout.

Current Crisis: Overwork and Mental Health

The phenomenon of ‘Karoshi’ (death from overwork) highlights the severe consequences of workplace stress. In India, 40% of employees report high stress levels due to excessive work demands.

Ethical Perspectives on Healthy Workplaces

Creating a healthy workplace involves:

  • Fairness and Equity: Ensuring all employees have equal access to resources and opportunities.
  • Respect for Individual Dignity: Acknowledging contributions and fostering psychological safety.
  • Moral Responsibility of Employers: Providing a safe working environment and promoting mental health initiatives.
  • Transparency and Accountability: Building trust through open communication about policies and practices.
  • Promoting Work-Life Balance: Encouraging a balance between professional and personal life to prevent burnout.

Global Precedents for Work-Life Balance

Countries like Australia and France have introduced regulations, such as the ‘right to disconnect,’ allowing employees to disengage from work communications after hours.

Conclusion and Way Forward

Establishing healthy workplaces is not merely a regulatory compliance issue but an ethical commitment to employee well-being. Both employers and employees must collaborate to create an environment of psychological safety, open communication, and mutual respect. By prioritizing these principles, organizations can foster workplaces that enhance productivity and support mental health, ultimately driving innovation and improving overall well-being.

How India can harness the power of AI to become a Trailblazer

  • 08 Oct 2024

Introduction

India stands at the forefront of an AI revolution, poised to leverage its unique position for unprecedented growth and innovation. With a robust economic outlook, the nation is ready to transform its AI capabilities.

Economic Landscape

Projected Growth

  • Nomura estimates India's economy will grow at an average rate of 7% over the next five years, surpassing the IMF's global growth forecast of 3.2% for 2024.
  • Hosting the G20 and Global Partnership on AI meetings in 2023 has created a favorable geopolitical environment.

Market Potential

  • India’s AI market is expected to reach $17 billion by 2027, with a growth rate of 25-35% annually from 2024 to 2027 (Nasscom).
  • The country leads Asia Pacific in the use and adoption of Generative AI, with significant engagement from students and employees.

The Role of Industry

Driving Transformation

  • Similar to historical industrial leaders, India Inc has the potential to drive significant change across various sectors.
  • The goal is to transition from participation to leadership in the global AI ecosystem.

Sector-Specific Strategies

  • Industries must align AI capabilities with specific sectoral goals by mapping challenges, opportunities, and ambitions.

Case Study: Logistics Sector

Historical Inefficiencies

  • A decade ago, the logistics sector in India faced significant inefficiencies.

AI Integration

  • Traditional AI introduced automation and basic forecasting. Companies like PandoAI have leveraged AI to consolidate supply chain data and provide valuable analytics.
  • The integration of Generative AI can further enhance predictive capabilities and innovative solutions.

Infrastructure and Investment

Current Challenges

  • India generates 20% of the world’s data but has only 2% of global data centers, limiting technological advancement.

Government Initiatives

  • Plans to procure 10,000 GPUs in the next 18-24 months and a National Semiconductor Mission to establish a domestic chip industry.

Need for Industry Investment

  • Collaboration between government and industry is crucial to meet the growing demands for computing power.

Talent Development

Workforce Dynamics

  • Hiring of AI talent increased by 16.8% in 2023, indicating a rising focus on AI capabilities.
  • Many Indian-origin AI professionals work for international companies, highlighting the need for local opportunities.

Educational Initiatives

  • Programs like FutureSkills PRIME should be expanded to enhance talent development in AI.

Ethical Standards and Governance

Importance of Trust

  • Establishing trustworthy AI standards is essential for consumer confidence and sustainable operation.
  • Challenges such as bias and data security require robust governance frameworks.

Operationalizing Ethics

  1. Develop AI governance frameworks addressing ethical concerns and data security.
  2. Ensure transparency in AI algorithms and decision-making processes.
  3. Promote inclusive AI development by engaging diverse perspectives.
  4. Invest in ethical AI research through collaborations with academic institutions.

Conclusion

India’s commitment to a strategic vision, substantial investment, and adherence to trustworthy AI practices can position it as a global leader in the AI landscape. This is a pivotal moment for India to harness AI's transformative power, paving the way for a new era of economic prosperity.

Fairwork India Report

  • 06 Oct 2024

In News:

The Fairwork India Ratings 2024 report, which analyses the work conditions of platform workers on digital labour platforms in India, draws a picture of aggregators who are non-committal to ensuring that workers earn the local living wage and unwilling to recognise collectivisation of workers.

Key Findings:

  • Overall Performance: No platform scored above six out of ten, and none achieved top points across the five assessed principles: Fair Pay, Fair Conditions, Fair Contracts, Fair Management, and Fair Representation.
  • Study Background: This report is the sixth annual analysis conducted by the Fairwork India Team, in collaboration with the Centre for IT and Public Policy (CITAPP), IIIT-Bangalore, and Oxford University.

Analysis of Welfare Legislation

  • The report discusses the evolving nature of platform work and its implications for proposed legislation affecting gig workers in Karnataka and Jharkhand.
  • Political interest in gig workers' welfare has increased, but the effectiveness of these initiatives remains uncertain.
  • Professors Balaji Parthasarathy and Janaki Srinivasan highlight the importance of ongoing research and advocacy for improving gig worker conditions.

Methodology

  • Principles of Assessment: Platforms were evaluated based on five principles, each consisting of two points—one that could only be awarded if the first point was fulfilled.
  • Data Collection: Worker interviews were conducted across multiple cities, including Bengaluru, Chennai, Delhi, Kochi, and Thiruvananthapuram.
  • Platforms Analyzed: The study included 11 platforms from various sectors, such as logistics, food delivery, and personal care.

Detailed Findings by Principle

Fair Pay

  • First Point: Bigbasket and Urban Company were recognized for implementing a minimum wage policy ensuring workers earn at least the local minimum wage.
  • Second Point: No platform met the criteria for committing to a local living wage after work-related costs.

Fair Conditions

  • First Point: Platforms such as Amazon Flex, BigBasket, and Swiggy provided adequate safety equipment and training.
  • Second Point: BigBasket, Swiggy, Urban Company, Zepto, and Zomato offered additional protections, including accident insurance and compensation for medical-related work absences.

Fair Contracts

  • First Point: BigBasket, BluSmart, and others ensured contract accessibility and data protection protocols.

Fair Management

  • First Point: Amazon Flex, BigBasket, and several others provided due process in disciplinary decisions.
  • Second Point: BluSmart, Swiggy, Urban Company, and Zomato were noted for regular external audits and anti-discrimination policies.

Fair Representation

  • Despite increased collectivization efforts among platform workers, no platform showed a willingness to recognize collective bodies, underscoring a critical gap in worker representation.

Conclusion

The Fairwork India Ratings 2024 report highlights significant challenges in ensuring fair work conditions for platform workers in India, stressing the need for continuous advocacy and reform in the gig economy.

CONCERNS OVER JUDICIAL CONDUCT

  • 29 Sep 2024

Background

A recent incident involving Justice V Srishananda of the Karnataka High Court has raised serious concerns regarding judicial comments and conduct. During a hearing, Justice Srishananda referred to a locality in Bengaluru as being “in Pakistan” and made an objectionable remark against a female lawyer. Although he subsequently apologized, the Supreme Court, led by Chief Justice D Y Chandrachud, expressed serious concern, highlighting the rarity of such judicial reproach.

Constitutional Framework for Judicial Discipline

Impeachment: The Sole Recourse

Judges of constitutional courts, including the Supreme Court and High Courts, enjoy substantial protections to maintain independence from executive interference. However, this raises the question of accountability: who oversees the judiciary?

  • Article 124(4): This article outlines that judges can only be removed through impeachment, which requires a political process involving both Houses of Parliament. The grounds for impeachment are limited to "proved misbehaviour" or "incapacity."
  • High Standards for Impeachment: The necessity for a two-thirds majority in both Houses makes successful impeachment exceedingly rare. Historically, only five impeachment proceedings have been initiated, with only one resulting in successful impeachment (Justice Soumitra Sen).

Challenges in Addressing Judicial Misconduct

Certain actions, such as indiscipline or bias, may not meet the impeachment standard but still warrant attention. The Supreme Court faces a dilemma: how to address these issues without the option of impeachment.

Mechanisms for Judicial Accountability

Judicial Intervention

The Supreme Court can intervene through judicial action, as evidenced by past cases:

  • Contempt of Court: In 2017, the Supreme Court sentenced Calcutta High Court’s Justice C S Karnan to six months’ imprisonment for contempt. This case raised concerns about one constitutional court punishing judges of another, as it set a precarious precedent.

Transfer Policy

The Supreme Court also influences High Court judges through its Collegium system:

  • Collegium Recommendations: The Collegium recommends the transfer of judges, which can serve as a disciplinary tool. The case of Justice P D Dinakaran illustrates this practice. Facing allegations of corruption, he was transferred from Karnataka to Sikkim, a move criticized as merely “transferring corruption.”

Conclusion

The incident involving Justice Srishananda underscores the complexities of judicial accountability in India. While the Constitution provides for impeachment as the only formal recourse against errant judges, the high threshold for such proceedings necessitates alternative mechanisms for maintaining judicial integrity. The Supreme Court's ability to intervene and the use of transfer policies are critical components in addressing judicial misconduct, but they also raise questions about the balance between accountability and judicial independence.

ANALYSIS OF INDIA'S TRADE DEFICIT

  • 23 Sep 2024

Overview of the Trade Deficit

India experienced a notable increase in its trade deficit during July and August 2024, primarily due to declining exports and rising imports. This trend is indicative of both domestic challenges and global economic conditions.

Understanding Trade Deficit

A trade deficit occurs when a country's imports surpass its exports, leading to a negative trade balance. While not inherently detrimental, sustained trade deficits can result in issues such as currency depreciation, rising national debt, and pressure on local industries.

Factors Influencing India's Trade Deficit

Several key elements have contributed to the widening of India’s trade deficit in recent months:

  1. Decline in Exports
    • Oil Exports: A sharp decline was observed in petroleum exports, which dropped by 22.2% in July and 37.6% in August, influenced by both weakened global demand and falling oil prices.
    • Gems & Jewellery: This sector saw a reduction exceeding 20% in exports during both months, adversely affecting overall trade performance.
    • Pharmaceuticals and Electronics: These sectors also faced slower growth due to ongoing weak global demand.
  2. China's Economic Slowdown
    • Exports to China, particularly in materials such as stone and iron ore, diminished as China grappled with internal economic challenges and reduced infrastructure spending, negatively impacting India's export revenue.
  3. Surge in Gold Imports
    • August saw a record $10.1 billion in gold imports, more than doubling previous figures. This increase was driven by lowered import duties and heightened domestic demand for the festive season, significantly contributing to the trade deficit.
  4. Decline in Oil Imports
    • On a more positive note, India’s oil import bill decreased by nearly a third due to falling global oil prices, marking the lowest petroleum trade deficit in three years. However, this reduction did not sufficiently counterbalance deficits in other areas.

Implications of the Trade Deficit

  1. Currency Depreciation: A growing trade deficit may exert downward pressure on the Indian rupee, making imports costlier and potentially worsening the deficit further, given India's heavy reliance on imported commodities.
  2. Impact on Economic Growth: Prolonged trade deficits can hinder economic growth by reflecting diminished export competitiveness and excessive reliance on imports.
  3. Foreign Exchange Reserves: While India’s foreign exchange reserves are currently robust, a sustained deficit could deplete these reserves, complicating efforts to stabilize the rupee in the future.

Long-term Challenges and Outlook

India's trade deficit is shaped by a mixture of global and domestic influences:

  • Weak Global Demand: Economic sluggishness in developed markets, such as the U.S. and EU, reduces demand for Indian exports, particularly in pharmaceuticals and textiles.
  • China’s Economic Issues: As China seeks to offload surplus goods, India may face increased competition from cheaper imports, which could challenge domestic industries.
  • Trade Barriers and Regulations: New international trade policies, particularly in the EU regarding environmental standards, impose additional compliance burdens on Indian exporters.

Conclusion and Strategic Recommendations

While India's escalating trade deficit poses challenges, it is not an insurmountable issue. Policymakers need to adopt strategic measures to tackle underlying structural problems:

  1. Boosting Exports: Enhancing the competitiveness of export sectors through technological investment and market expansion is vital. Strengthening trade agreements can also improve market access.
  2. Reducing Non-essential Imports: Minimizing reliance on luxury imports, particularly gold, while promoting domestic manufacturing can help in balancing the trade deficit.
  3. Developing Domestic Industries: Fostering growth in sectors such as electronics and renewable energy will not only reduce import dependence but also enhance export capacity.
  4. Managing Currency and Debt: Careful management of the rupee's valuation and maintaining adequate foreign exchange reserves are crucial in mitigating trade deficit impacts.

Achieving the ambitious goal of $1 trillion in exports for both goods and services by 2030 is attainable but requires overcoming current global economic hurdles, adapting to new trade regulations, and building a self-sufficient economy. By strategically addressing these challenges, India can work toward reducing its trade deficit while maintaining economic growth.

Arctic Sea Ice Changes May Alter India's Monsoon Patterns

  • 09 Sep 2024

In News:

A study by researchers from India’s National Centre for Polar and Ocean Research (NCPOR) has found that seasonal variations in Arctic Sea ice are impacting the Indian monsoon.

What is the Indian Summer Monsoon Rainfall?

The Indian Summer Monsoon Rainfall (ISMR), occurring from July to September, is one of the most significant monsoon systems globally. During the summer, the Central Asian and Indian landmasses heat up more quickly than the surrounding oceans. This temperature difference creates a low-pressure zone at the Tropic of Cancer known as the intertropical convergence zone (ITCZ). Trade winds from the southeast are then deflected toward the Indian subcontinent due to the Coriolis effect and the low pressure they encounter after crossing the equator. As these winds pass over the Arabian Sea, they pick up moisture and bring rain to India. The southwest monsoon divides into two branches over the Indian landmass. The Arabian Sea branch delivers rain to the west coast, while the Bay of Bengal branch brings rain to the eastern and northeastern parts of India. These branches converge over Punjab and Himachal Pradesh, with the Arabian Sea branch moving inward and the Bay of Bengal branch following the Himalayas.

Complexity of the Indian Summer Monsoon Rainfall

Recent climate models have revealed that the ISMR is influenced by the surface temperatures of the Indian, Atlantic, and Pacific Oceans. Additionally, the circum-global teleconnection (CGT), a large-scale atmospheric wave at mid-latitudes, also plays a significant role in affecting the monsoon.

Influence of Arctic Sea Ice on the Indian Monsoon

The study indicates that reduced sea ice in the central Arctic results in decreased rainfall in western and peninsular India, but increased rainfall in central and northern India. Conversely, lower sea ice levels in the upper latitudes, especially in the Barents-Kara Sea region, delay the onset of the monsoon and make it more unpredictable.

Other Atmospheric Systems Influencing the Pattern

When sea ice levels in the central Arctic rise, the heat transferred from the ocean to the atmosphere triggers cyclonic circulation at lower latitudes, such as the North Atlantic. This process enhances Rossby waves—fast-moving air currents created by Earth's rotation and temperature differences—which move from west to east. These waves cause high pressure over northwest India and low pressure over the Mediterranean region, strengthening the Asian jet stream over the Caspian Sea and shifting the subtropical easterly jet northward. This shift leads to increased rainfall in western and peninsular India. On the other hand, decreased sea ice in the Barents-Kara Sea generates an anticyclonic circulation (clear skies) over northwest Europe. This disturbance affects the upper atmosphere over subtropical Asia and India, resulting in increased rainfall in northeastern India while leaving central and northwest regions drier.

Role of Climate Change

Climate change accelerates the reduction of Arctic sea ice, which intensifies the variability and unpredictability of the ISMR. Lower Arctic sea ice contributes to more frequent and severe droughts in some areas, while causing excessive rainfall and flooding in others. The study underscores the urgent need for expanded research on climate dynamics and more accurate monsoon forecasts to address these changing patterns.

A Message on the Model Code of Conduct for Leaders – From Mahabharata and Beyond

  • 24 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

In a democracy, while elections are imperative, it's equally crucial for both the populace and our leaders to retain their moral integrity, as a loss of ethical grounding could result in repercussions that extend far beyond the periodic act of political selection.

Context:

  •  Satyameva Jayate ("Truth alone triumphs") from the Mundaka Upanishad was adopted as the national motto on January 26, 1950, the day India became a Republic.
  • A day earlier, the country's Election Commission was formed with the primary responsibility of enabling citizens to exercise their democratic right to choose a government.
  • The Election Commission is expected to provide a level playing field so that candidates, political parties, and their campaigners do not unduly influence voters through excessive use of money, force, or dishonesty.

About The Model Code of Conduct (MCC):

  • The Election Commission of India introduced the Model Code of Conduct with the hope that it would encourage self-control among political stakeholders.
  • The 2019 Manual emphasized that those seeking public office should behave in a way worthy of being emulated by others.
  • The Commission considers the Code an important contribution by political parties to democracy.
  • It expects parties to exhibit model behaviour in their actions and rhetoric.
  • However, reality often deviates from this expectation. Political discourse sometimes degrades into coarse and ignoble exchanges.
  • This has led to debates on whether it should be called a moral code rather than just a model code.

The Complexity of Truth from a Philosophical Perspective:

  • Francis Bacon's Essay of Truth commences with Pilate's profound questioning, "What is truth?" - a query that resonates through the ages, its answer shrouded in layers of complexity.
  • This intricate nature finds symbolic representation in the Ashokan pillar's trio of visible lions, embodying the three dimensions of truth: my viewpoint, your perspective, and an objective third-person narrative.
  • Yet, there exists a fourth, unseen dimension - that of absolute truth, often perceived as knowable only to a higher power.
  • Amidst this philosophical labyrinth, the Election Commission of India (ECI) navigates the realm of human imperfection, striving to enforce the Model Code of Conduct (MCC) – a framework designed to curb dishonest practices during the electoral process.
  • However, expecting individuals to adhere to this model solely for the duration of elections, if they have not upheld such principles in their daily lives, could be considered a naive endeavor.

The Intersection of Morality and Law in the Electoral Process:

  • Foundations of the Model Code of Conduct (MCC):
  • At the core of the Model Code of Conduct lies a fundamental interplay between legal requirements and moral expectations.
    • Morality governs individual behaviour based on notions of right and wrong, often rooted in cultural, religious, or personal beliefs.
    • Law, conversely, comprises rules established by a governing authority to regulate conduct and ensure order and justice within society.
  • Philosophical perspectives offer valuable insights into this dynamic. Immanuel Kant's philosophy distinguishes between morality and law, viewing moral actions as those driven by a sense of duty, while societal rules govern legal actions.
    • Utilitarianism, advocated by thinkers like Jeremy Bentham and John Stuart Mill, evaluates actions based on their consequences and their contribution to the overall well-being of society.
    • In the context of the Model Code of Conduct, this perspective suggests that political behaviour should be assessed not only against legal standards but also by its broader impact on societal harmony and democratic health.
  • Legal Framework and Enforcement:
  • The legal framework encompassing the Model Code of Conduct includes specific provisions in the Indian Penal Code and the Representation of the People Act, 1951.
    • These laws define actions that constitute corrupt practices and electoral offences, providing a legal basis for enforcing the Code.
    • However, the intersection of morality and law within this framework presents unique challenges.
  • In legal terms, "mens rea" refers to the intention or knowledge of wrongdoing, and establishing mens rea is crucial for proving guilt in many cases.
    • The Model Code of Conduct implicitly addresses mens rea by prohibiting actions intended to manipulate or deceive voters, such as false promises or appeals to communal sentiments.
  • Sections 123(3) and 123(3A) of the Representation of the People Act classify appeals to caste or communal feelings as corrupt practices, punishable under the law.
    • Similarly, Section 125 prohibits promoting enmity between different groups in connection with elections.
    • These legal provisions aim to curb divisive tactics and uphold the ethical conduct envisioned by the Model Code of Conduct.
    • However, enforcement requires clear evidence linking the actions to the intent of influencing electoral outcomes.

Ethical Reflection in the Electoral Process & Lesson from Mahabharata:

  • Upholding Integrity: The imperative for ethical reflection in the electoral process stems from the need to uphold the integrity of democracy itself.
    • The conduct of elections must align with the core values of truth and fairness that underpin the democratic ethos.
  • Ethical Lesson from Mahabharata: The story of Yudhishthira in the Mahabharata, who lost his moral high ground despite technically telling the truth, underscores the importance of ethics over mere adherence to rules.
    • Ethics in elections transcends simply following the law; it involves adhering to higher standards of honesty, integrity, and fairness.
  • Moral Soundness over Legal Compliance: Ethical reflection ensures that political actions and decisions are not just legally compliant but also morally sound.
    • This is particularly crucial in a democracy, where the legitimacy of the government is derived from the consent of the governed, and this consent must be obtained through fair means.
  • Safeguarding Democratic Norms: When ethical standards are compromised, democratic norms such as transparency, accountability, and fairness are weakened.
    • This erosion can lead to a governance crisis where the authority of elected officials is questioned, undermining the very foundation upon which democracy rests.

Conclusion

“Satyameva Jayate” is not just India’s motto however it encapsulates a guiding principle that should permeate the conduct of individuals and institutions alike. The Election Commission of India's efforts to enforce the Model Code of Conduct reflect an ongoing struggle to strike a delicate balance between legal enforcement and moral persuasion. For a truly democratic society to thrive, this equilibrium must be continually sought and maintained. The pursuit of political power must never be allowed to erode the foundational value of truth upon which the democratic edifice rests. By upholding the principle of Satyameva Jayate, not just in rhetoric but in action, the integrity of the electoral process and the sanctity of democratic norms can be safeguarded, ensuring that the will of the people remains the cornerstone of governance.

 

 

 

 

SC Verdict on Newsclick Highlights the Vitality of Adhering to Due Process Beyond Formalities

  • 17 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

The Supreme Court recently ordered the release of NewsClick Editor Prabir Purkayastha after hearing his plea, challenging the arrest by Delhi Police in an Unlawful Activities Prevention Act (UAPA) case.

Context:

  • The recent ruling by the Supreme Court of India reaffirms its dedication to due process, dispelling assertions of subservience to the executive branch.
  • Through a landmark judgment, the Court underscored the indispensable role of due process, especially concerning the arrest and detention of Prabir Purkayastha, founder-editor of Newsclick.
  • This verdict emphasizes the crucial disparity between reasons for arrest and the grounds for arrest, emphasizing that the latter must be tailored to the individual and formally communicated in writing to safeguard personal liberty.

Why did the Supreme Court Invalidate Purkayastha’s Arrest?

  • The court invalidated the arrest due to the absence of provided grounds, citing a precedent set in the Pankaj Bansal case (2023).
    • This landmark ruling emphasized the constitutional right, under Article 22(1), to be informed about the grounds of arrest in writing, deeming any infringement of this right as vitiating the arrest and remand process.
  • Furthermore, the verdict underscored the fundamental and statutory right of an arrested person to receive a written copy of the grounds of arrest without exception.
    • The court criticized the clandestine manner in which the procedure was conducted, noting that the accused was deprived of the opportunity to defend himself and avail legal representation.
  • Additionally, the judgment clarified that an FIR serves to initiate criminal proceedings and is not exhaustive in detailing grounds of arrest.
    • The court emphasized that the grounds of arrest must convey specific, personal facts to the accused, distinct from general reasons for arrest.

What is the Due Process of Law?

  • Due process of law is a foundational legal principle that ensures the fair and just application of laws while protecting individual rights.
  • The concept requires the state to adhere to established legal rules and principles in every case, ensuring that all legal rights owed to a person are respected.
  • It serves as a safeguard against the arbitrary exercise of government power.

Significance:

  • Fairness and Reasonableness: Due process emphasizes fairness, reasonableness, justness, and non-arbitrariness in legal proceedings.
  • Invalidation of Inequality: Any procedural inequality in the law can be rendered invalid under due process.
  • Legislative Oversight: Courts consider legislative intent while evaluating statutes in light of due process.
  • Protection of Individual Rights: Due process emphasizes the importance of individual rights and grants courts the authority to nullify biased laws.
  • Adherence to Basic Legal Procedures: Laws must follow a fundamental process to receive state assent.

Historical Background:

  • First mentioned in a statute by British King Edward III in the 14th century.
  • The Fifth Amendment of the US Constitution (1791) introduced due process in a constitutional framework.
  • In India, due process was invoked by freedom fighters against unjust colonial laws.
  • The Constituent Assembly considered including due process in India's Constitution but ultimately adopted a "procedure established by law" instead.

Evolution through Case Laws:

  • The Supreme Court's interpretation of due process evolved over time.
  • Initial judgments, such as A K Gopalan (1950) and ADM Jabalpur (1976), limited due process by focusing on the narrow meaning of "procedure established by law."
  • The Bank Nationalisation case (1970) extended due process to property rights.
  • The landmark Maneka Gandhi case (1978) established due process as an integral part of the right to life and personal liberty, requiring laws to be reasonable, just, fair, and non-arbitrary.

Concerns Regarding the Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Act (UAPA) 1967 and Due Process of Law:

The UAPA 1967 raises concerns regarding due process of law due to several provisions that deviate from established criminal law principles. These include:

  • Extended Remand and Custody Periods: UAPA allows for 30-day remand orders instead of the usual 15 days and extends the maximum period of judicial custody before filing a chargesheet from 90 to 180 days.
    • In the 2023 Pramod Singla case, the Supreme Court highlighted the potential for abuse in preventive detention laws and emphasized the need for strict procedural adherence.
  • Controversial Bail Provisions: Section 43D(5) of the Act makes obtaining bail extremely difficult for suspects if the court believes there are reasonable grounds to presume the charges are true.
    • The accused must prove the case is false without inviting the court to evaluate evidence, which human rights defenders argue is draconian and undermines due process.
  • Expanded Scope Over Time: The Act was amended in 2004 and 2013 to broaden its coverage, including the declaration of unlawful associations, punishment for terrorist acts, and activities threatening the country's security.
    • This expanded scope, along with an increased ban on organizations from two to five years, raises concerns about potential misuse and erosion of due process protections.
  • Pendency of Cases: According to the National Crime Records Bureau (NCRB), over 12,000 people were imprisoned under such laws in 2021, with 76% being undertrials in 2022.
    • Only 18% of UAPA cases result in conviction, and there is an alarming 89% pendency rate for UAPA cases in courts.
    • This raises questions about the effectiveness and fairness of the Act in ensuring due process.

Achieving a Balance Between State Security and Due Process of Law:

Ensuring national security while preserving due process of law requires a nuanced approach that respects individual rights and maintains checks on state power. The following strategies can help achieve this balance:

  • Clear Legal Framework: Establish precise laws that define the limits and procedures for state actions in the name of security.
    • This framework should ensure accountability and prevent misuse of authority.
    • A parliamentary committee can oversee and recommend changes to security legislation.
  • Strengthened Judicial Oversight: Enhance judicial mechanisms to review and check arbitrary actions by state authorities, including scrutinizing the legality of detentions and other security measures.
    • A judicial review committee can assess cases under laws like the UAPA.
  • Independent Monitoring Bodies: Create independent bodies to monitor the implementation of security laws and investigate abuses.
    • These entities should hold state actors accountable, with organizations like the National Commission for Minorities and NHRC playing crucial roles.
  • Human Rights Training: Train law enforcement and security personnel on human rights standards, emphasizing the importance of protecting individual liberties while maintaining security.
    • Develop training programs in collaboration with institutions such as the National Police Academy.
  • Public Participation: Encourage public engagement in security policy discussions through platforms like MyGov.
    • This fosters transparency and acceptance of policies that balance security and rights.
  • International Cooperation: Collaborate with international organizations like UNESCO and press freedom groups to promote best practices, upholding press freedom and ensuring a safe environment for journalists and media workers, as outlined in the UN Plan of Action on the Safety of Journalists.

Conclusion

As India continues to evolve, it is crucial to ensure that stringent laws, such as the UAPA, do not overshadow the fundamental rights of its citizens. Achieving a balance between state security and individual liberties is vital not only for the protection of personal freedoms but also as a testament to the strength and integrity of India's democratic society. By fostering a legal and constitutional ethos that values this equilibrium, India can pave the way for continued progress, safeguarding the well-being of its people and the future of its democracy.

Elevating India's Online Gaming Industry

  • 08 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

The Prime Minister’s vision to establish India as a prominent global gaming hub has received renewed attention as he engaged with seven of the top gamers in the country.

Context:

  • The Prime Minister of India has envisioned the nation as a leading global gaming hub, recognising the potential of the online gaming industry to drive economic growth and innovation.
  • In a recent engagement with top gamers, key areas of focus were identified, including regulatory clarity, cultural integration, and diversity in the gaming landscape.
  • As India's gaming industry experiences rapid growth, it is essential to address existing challenges and devise effective strategies to propel the nation to the forefront of the global gaming arena.
  • By establishing clear regulatory guidelines, fostering partnerships, promoting skill development, encouraging original Indian content, and leveraging the country's digital infrastructure, India can unlock its full potential and emerge as a global gaming powerhouse.

Factors Driving the Growth of India's Gaming Industry:

  • Enhanced Internet Infrastructure and Connectivity: The expansion of broadband services in Tier-II and Tier-III cities via initiatives like BharatNet and the National Broadband Mission has widened the accessibility of online gaming beyond urban areas.
    • The proliferation of 4G and forthcoming 5G networks has further bolstered internet speeds and reduced latency, crucial for seamless gaming experiences.
  • Affordable Data and Smartphone Access: Decreasing costs of mobile data plans, spurred by intense competition among telecom providers, have made data more affordable and accessible for gaming enthusiasts across socio-economic segments.
    • With India's smartphone base exceeding 680 million, predominantly comprising 4G devices, mobile phones have emerged as the primary gaming platform, capturing a significant share of the market.
  • Emergence of E-sports: The inclusion of e-sports in prestigious events like the Commonwealth Games and Asian Games has elevated its status as a legitimate sporting activity.
    • The success of Indian teams on global platforms has further propelled industry growth, enhancing its profile and inspiring aspiring gamers.
  • Government Support and Regulatory Clarity: Regulations like the IT Rules 2021 have established a regulatory framework for online gaming, addressing concerns regarding content and addiction.
    • The formation of self-regulatory bodies and initiatives like the AVGC Promotion Task Force have fostered industry growth.
    • Additionally, liberalized FDI norms and government recognition of gamers have attracted international investments.
  • Robust Start-up Ecosystem: India's thriving start-up ecosystem has fostered the growth of numerous gaming companies, driving innovation and catering to diverse consumer preferences.
    • The emergence of gaming unicorns like Game 24X7, Dream11, and Mobile Premier League underscores the sector's potential and attractiveness to investors.
  • Cultural Shift and Pandemic Impact: The Covid-19 lockdown accelerated the adoption of online gaming as a virtual entertainment and socializing avenue.
    • With Indians spending an average of 4.5 hours per week on gaming post-lockdown, perceptions have evolved, recognizing gaming not just as a leisure activity but also as a viable career option.
  • Integration of Advanced Technologies: Adoption of technologies such as Augmented Reality (AR), Virtual Reality (VR), cloud gaming, and blockchain has enriched gaming experiences and spurred innovation.
    • AR and VR offer immersive gameplay, while cloud gaming ensures device-agnostic access.
    • Blockchain integration facilitates asset ownership and tokenized economies, enhancing engagement.

Key Challenges Facing India's Gaming Sector:

The Indian gaming industry faces several obstacles that must be addressed to foster sustainable growth and innovation:

  • Regulatory Ambiguity and Fragmented Policies: The absence of a cohesive regulatory framework creates uncertainty for industry players.
    • Varying state laws and regulations leads to a fragmented policy landscape, with some states banning certain online games while others adopt a more liberal approach.
  • Taxation Concerns and Sustainability Challenges: The recent imposition of a 28% Goods and Services Tax (GST) on the total face value of bets raises concerns about the long-term sustainability of the industry, particularly for smaller startups.
    • High tax rates may force smaller companies out of business, stifling innovation and hampering industry growth.
  • Infrastructure and Connectivity Challenges: Despite progress, reliable and high-speed internet connectivity remains a challenge in rural and remote areas.
    • Only 31% of the rural population uses the internet compared to 67% of urban dwellers (India Inequality Report 2022).
  • Content Localization and Cultural Relevance: Developing games and content that resonate with India's diverse cultural and linguistic landscapes presents a challenge for game developers.
    • While some games like Ludo King have successfully adapted to local tastes, many international games struggle to find similar cultural resonance.
  • Responsible Gaming and Addiction Concerns: As the gaming industry expands, concerns about gaming addiction, particularly among younger populations, must be addressed.
    • The prevalence of internet gaming disorder in Indian students ranges from 1.3% to 19.9% for the adolescent group (source).
    • The "Beware of Smartphone Zombies" signboards in Bengaluru serve as a reminder of the growing issue of digital distraction and the need for responsible gaming practices.

Strategies to Boost India's Gaming Industry:

Several measures can be adopted to enhance the gaming industry in India:

  • Regulatory Clarity: Improving regulatory clarity is crucial, particularly regarding the implementation of self-regulatory bodies mandated by the IT Rules of 2021.
    • Prompt action is needed to establish a clear and supportive framework for industry growth.
  • Dedicated Gaming Hubs and Incubators: Establishing specialized gaming hubs and incubators in major cities can foster innovation, collaboration, and talent development.
    • These hubs can provide cutting-edge infrastructure, mentorship, and resources for game developers, startups, and professionals.
  • Promote Game Development based on Indian Culture and Mythology: Encouraging and incentivizing game developers to create games inspired by India's rich cultural heritage, mythology, and folklore can help build a unique identity for Indian games, catering to both domestic and international audiences.
    • Games like "Raji: An Ancient Epic" have successfully blended Indian cultural elements with engaging gameplay.
  • Innovative Funding and Investment Models: Supporting alternative funding models like crowdfunding, venture capital investments, and public-private partnerships can assist game development and startups.
    • Global gaming companies like Ubisoft have experimented with blockchain-based assets and in-game economies, presenting opportunities for Indian companies to explore innovative funding models.
  • Empowering Women in Gaming: With women constituting 40% of India's gaming populace, they are well-positioned to lead the country's gaming revolution.
    • Supporting and empowering women in the gaming industry can unlock diverse talent, fresh perspectives, and innovative ideas to drive sector growth.
  • Cross-Industry Collaborations: Fostering collaborations between the gaming industry and other sectors, such as tourism, education, and hospitality, can help explore the potential of gamification and serious games.
    • These partnerships can lead to innovative applications of gaming technology across various domains.
  • By implementing these strategies, India can create a thriving and globally competitive gaming industry, unlocking significant economic, creative, and technological potential.

Conclusion

India's gaming industry holds immense potential for growth and innovation. To capitalize on this opportunity, it is crucial to address key challenges such as regulatory ambiguity and infrastructure limitations while promoting cultural integration and diversity in the gaming landscape. By fostering cross-industry collaborations, leveraging cutting-edge technologies, and empowering underrepresented groups, India can become a global gaming powerhouse, driving economic development and shaping the future of the gaming industry.

Constructed Wetlands: Solution for Wastewater Treatment in India

  • 07 May 2024

Why is it in the News?

Constructed wetlands ecosystems can significantly contribute to sustainable industrial progress and the preservation of water resources.

Context:

  • Industrial growth in India has led to major environmental issues, especially in managing industrial wastewater.
  • Untreated or improperly treated industrial discharge into water sources causes severe threats to ecosystems, public health, and water security.
  • With diverse sectors like manufacturing, textiles, chemicals, and mining, pollution is substantial.
  • Traditional treatment methods often fail to address the complex pollutants in industrial wastewater, demanding a shift to comprehensive, nature-based solutions.
  • Constructed wetlands offer a promising solution, providing effective treatment and significant environmental and economic benefits.
  • These unique ecosystems combine the efficiency of natural processes with human innovation, presenting an eco-friendly alternative to conventional treatment methods.

What are Constructed Wetlands?

  • A constructed wetland is a type of sustainable wastewater treatment system that is designed to look and function as a natural wetland does.
  • Constructed wetlands are created for the purpose of treating wastewater from small, rural communities in an environmentally friendly way before allowing it to return to the water system safely.
  • They are usually made up of a primary settlement tank where wastewater from the community is collected and from that, several ponds follow which are planted with wetland plants including reeds, rushes and sedges.
    • The ponds are usually gently sloped towards a river to allow water to flow very slowly through the wetland before flowing away.
    • Any particles that have been carried in the water will settle on the bottom and the plants and natural microorganisms (e.g. bacteria, algae and fungi) in the wetlands will break down and remove certain pollutants and elements e.g. phosphorus in the water.
  • Constructed wetlands are typically divided into two categories: Subsurface flow (SSF) and surface flow (SF).
    • Subsurface flow (SSF) wetlands direct wastewater through gravel beds or porous media, promoting microbial activity that degrades organic matter.
    • In contrast, surface flow (SF) wetlands demonstrate their aesthetic appeal above the water’s surface, with gently flowing streams and lush vegetation.
  • While each design exhibits distinct advantages, both variants share a unified objective: to convert pollutants into benign compounds through natural processes.
  • Plant Selection: Plants like cattails, bulrushes, and sedges are crucial for nutrient absorption and provide habitat for beneficial bacteria.
    • Their roots oxygenate the soil and support microbial processes, aiding in pollutant removal.
  • Microbial Activity: Beneath the water's surface, a complex microbial community breaks down pollutants, converting toxic substances like ammonia into benign compounds like nitrate.
    • This microbial activity occurs naturally, without external intervention.
  • Mutual Benefit: Plants and microbes engage in a symbiotic relationship where plants absorb nutrients and contaminants are trapped, while microbes break down pollutants.
    • This mutually beneficial interaction fosters a thriving ecosystem within constructed wetlands.

Nature’s Filtration System:

  • Constructed wetlands replicate the functionalities of natural wetlands but are purposefully designed to treat wastewater efficiently.
  • They comprise shallow basins adorned with wetland vegetation such as reeds, rushes and sedges.
  • As wastewater traverses through these basins, a series of physical, chemical and biological processes unfold, effectively eliminating contaminants and enhancing water quality.

Constructed wetlands present numerous benefits:

  • Cost-Effectiveness: In contrast to traditional treatment facilities, constructed wetlands frequently offer a more economical option for construction and upkeep.
    • Their construction and maintenance entail minimal energy consumption and lower operational expenses, rendering them especially appropriate for settings with limited resources.
  • Versatility: Constructed wetlands can be customised to address diverse forms of industrial wastewater, effectively managing a broad spectrum of pollutants and contaminants.
    • These wetlands can be configured as either free-water surface or subsurface flow systems, chosen based on the particular needs of the location and the characteristics of the pollutants present.
  • Environmental benefits: In addition to their primary role in wastewater treatment, constructed wetlands offer supplementary environmental advantages.
    • They function as habitats for a wide array of plant and animal species, promoting biodiversity conservation.
    • Moreover, they contribute to ecosystem services such as flood control and carbon sequestration, further enhancing their ecological significance.
  • Scalability and adaptability: Constructed wetlands are flexible in their scalability, and able to be adjusted to fit various industrial operations and spatial limitations.
    • They are versatile, accommodating both centralised and decentralised wastewater treatment methods, thereby providing adaptability in their deployment.

Constructed Wetlands Across India:

  • India boasts several remarkable locations where constructed wetlands are utilised for wastewater treatment.
  • In Delhi's Asola Bhatti Wildlife Sanctuary, a constructed wetland system purifies sewage from adjacent settlements while providing a habitat for diverse flora and fauna, contributing to regional biodiversity conservation.
  • Chennai's Perungudi and Kodungaiyur regions have integrated constructed wetlands into their decentralised wastewater treatment strategy.
    • These wetlands treat local community sewage, reducing pollutant levels and easing pressure on centralised treatment plants.
  • The Kolkata East Wetlands in West Bengal, a Ramsar site, comprises an extensive network of natural and constructed wetlands treating Kolkata's wastewater.
    • These wetlands offer livelihoods for local fishing and agricultural communities while improving water quality.
  • Palla village in Haryana uses constructed wetlands to treat wastewater from Delhi before releasing it into the Yamuna River, improving water quality and mitigating downstream pollution.
  • Auroville, a sustainable international township in Tamil Nadu, employs decentralised wastewater treatment systems featuring constructed wetlands, demonstrating a community-driven approach to wastewater management.
  • The Sariska Tiger Reserve in Rajasthan utilises constructed wetlands for treating village wastewater.
    • This initiative addresses sanitation needs while preserving the reserve's ecological integrity and wildlife habitats.

Opportunities and Challenges in the Indian Context:

Potential for Adoption:

  • In India, the potential for utilising constructed wetlands in industrial wastewater treatment is immense.
  • With its rich biodiversity and abundance of wetland ecosystems, the country presents favourable conditions for their widespread adoption.
  • The decentralised nature of industries makes constructed wetlands an appealing option for on-site or cluster-level wastewater treatment.

Challenges to Overcome:

  • Establishment of clear policies and regulatory frameworks to encourage the adoption of constructed wetlands in industrial wastewater treatment.
  • Provision of incentives and subsidies to incentivize industries to invest in sustainable wastewater management practices.
  • Raising awareness and enhancing technical expertise among stakeholders, including industry professionals, regulators, and local communities.
  • Continuous monitoring and research efforts to evaluate the performance of constructed wetlands in diverse industrial settings, including optimizing design parameters and addressing emerging challenges such as new contaminants and the impacts of climate change.

Community Involvement:

  • Engagement of local communities in the planning, design, and management of constructed wetlands fosters a sense of ownership and ensures the long-term sustainability of these systems.
  • Active participation from community members is essential for the success of constructed wetland projects.

Conclusion

Constructed wetlands present a promising solution for combating industrial wastewater pollution in India. By addressing policy, capacity-building initiatives, and community involvement, constructed wetlands have the potential to significantly contribute to sustainable industrial progress and the preservation of water resources for future generations.

EC’s Model Code Needs Reform and India Needs Model Leadership

  • 30 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

Former Election Commissioner Ashok Lavasa points out that a significant gap in the present framework is that the Model Code of Conduct for elections has not spelled out the consequences of defaults, thus diluting its deterrent effect.

Context:

  • The Model Code of Conduct (MCC) plays a pivotal role in India's electoral process, having evolved considerably since its inception to uphold fairness in elections.
  • While originally crafted to regulate conduct during elections, the MCC faces new hurdles in today's dynamic political environment.
  • Hence, it becomes imperative to delve into the historical progression of the MCC, identify existing deficiencies, and suggest strategies to bolster its implementation.

Evolution of the Model Code of Conduct (MCC):

  • Kerala was the first state to adopt a code of conduct for elections.
  • In 1960, ahead of the Assembly elections in the state, the administration prepared a draft code that covered important aspects of electioneering such as processions, political rallies, and speeches.
  • It was only in 1974, just before the mid-term general elections, that the EC released a formal MCC.
  • It also set up bureaucratic bodies at the district level to oversee its implementation.
  • So the EC, just before the 1979 Lok Sabha elections, released a revised Model Code with seven parts, with one part devoted to the party in power and what it could and could not do once elections were announced.
  • The MCC has subsequently evolved as an integral part of conducting fair and free elections.

Challenges Faced by the MCC and the Imperative for Strengthening Enforcement:

  • Escalating Violations: Political parties and candidates routinely flout the MCC's regulations, engaging in activities like hate speech, vote-buying, and spreading misinformation, undermining the trust in the electoral process and compromising its fairness and transparency.
  • Exploitation of Loopholes: In today's political landscape, there's a discernible trend of exploiting MCC loopholes to bypass its regulations.
    • With the advent of technology and social media, political entities find novel ways to propagate propaganda and target voters, evading traditional MCC constraints and necessitating revisions to address these evolving challenges.
  • Inadequate Deterrents: While the MCC sets ethical standards, it often lacks effective penalties for violations, resulting in politicians perceiving minimal risks in flouting its provisions.
    • Strengthening the MCC entails imposing clear and proportionate penalties for transgressions to foster a culture of accountability.
  • Complexity of Enforcement: India's vast and diverse electoral terrain, coupled with a surge in reported violations, strains the Election Commission's enforcement capabilities.
    • Adjudicating MCC breaches can be arduous and resource-intensive, leading to accountability delays. Streamlining enforcement procedures and enhancing the EC's capacity is pivotal for ensuring prompt and efficient MCC implementation.
  • Erosion of Public Trust: Widespread disregard for ethical norms and regulations can erode citizens' trust in the democratic process, fostering voter apathy and disenchantment.
    • Restoring public confidence in elections necessitates robust measures to strengthen the MCC and underscore the EC's dedication to upholding electoral integrity.

Proposed Reforms to Enhance MCC Enforcement:

  • Clear and Comprehensive Guidelines: The initial step towards MCC reform entails establishing clear and comprehensive guidelines delineating permissible and impermissible conduct during electoral campaigns.
    • Regular updates to these guidelines are crucial to address evolving challenges and technological advancements, enabling political entities to navigate ethical standards effectively and prevent inadvertent violations.
  • Strict Enforcement Mechanisms: Implementation of proportional penalties for infringements, such as fines, campaigning bans, and withdrawal of electoral symbols, constitutes a vital aspect of reform.
    • Streamlining enforcement procedures by the Election Commission (EC) ensures swift adjudication of cases, bolstering the MCC's credibility and deterrent impact.
  • Indirect Liability for Political Parties: Imposing penalties on parties for MCC violations, irrespective of individual culpability, incentivizes enhanced oversight over members' conduct.
    • This fosters collective responsibility within political organizations, promoting greater accountability and ethical governance.
  • Transparency and Public Accountability: Maintaining a publicly accessible database documenting all reported MCC violations and their dispositions empowers citizens to monitor regulatory compliance.
    • This transparency holds political actors accountable for their actions, reinforcing public trust in the electoral process.
  • Timely and Credible Adjudication: Prioritizing prompt resolution of violations and ensuring impartial decision-making by the EC are essential to uphold the MCC's deterrent effect.
    • Timely adjudication prevents erosion of public confidence and underscores the EC's commitment to fair electoral practices.
  • Continuous Evaluation and Revision: Vigilance in identifying areas for improvement and updating the MCC in response to emerging challenges and evolving electoral dynamics is crucial.
    • This iterative approach ensures the MCC remains relevant and effective in safeguarding India's electoral integrity.

The Role of Political Parties and Election Commission in Safeguarding Electoral Integrity:

Political Leadership's Responsibility:

  • Political leaders wield significant influence in upholding electoral integrity by adhering to ethical standards and fostering responsible conduct within their parties.
  • By exemplifying ethical leadership, politicians can instill a culture of integrity and accountability among their supporters and party members.
  • Effective self-regulation within political parties is imperative to minimize MCC violations and preserve the integrity of electoral campaigns.
  • Through a commitment to fairness, transparency, and democratic principles, leaders can instill confidence in the electoral process and encourage civic engagement among voters.

The Election Commission's Mandate:

  • As the guardian of electoral integrity, the Election Commission plays a pivotal role in impartially adjudicating MCC violations and enforcing electoral regulations.
  • Timely and decisive enforcement of the MCC is crucial for deterring violations and upholding the integrity of electoral campaigns.
  • Maintaining transparency in its actions and decisions related to MCC enforcement is essential for the EC to uphold public accountability.
  • By providing regular updates on reported violations, adjudication outcomes, and enforcement measures, the EC fosters public trust in its ability to safeguard electoral integrity.
  • Enhancing the EC's capacity for MCC enforcement is paramount for effectively addressing emerging challenges and ensuring the integrity of electoral processes.
  • This includes investing in training programs, technological infrastructure, and human resources to enable the EC to adapt to evolving electoral dynamics and enforce regulations effectively.

Conclusion

While the Model Code of Conduct (MCC) serves as a crucial bulwark against electoral misconduct, its effectiveness hinges on vigorous enforcement and adaptability to evolving scenarios. Through the adoption of suggested reforms and the cultivation of ethical leadership, India can fortify the integrity of its democratic mechanisms, guaranteeing equitable and transparent elections for its populace.

Reversing the Global Democratic Recession

  • 24 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

Despite the disillusionment, for a variety of reasons, the need to fortify democratic foundations has to be ongoing and collaborative.

Context:

  • India is in the midst of its most significant electoral exercise and it might be worthwhile to scrutinize people’s changing perceptions about their political ecosystems in both the largest democracy and other smaller democratic spaces elsewhere.
  • Such an exercise may help us understand the prevailing global situation and work on the future course of action.
  • Drawing insights from an extensive Pew Research Centre survey spanning 24 nations, examining the evolving attitudes toward democratic governance becomes imperative to grasp the broader global context and chart potential pathways forward.

Why Worldwide Decline in Confidence in Democratic Systems?

  • According to the Pew Research Centre's extensive 2023 global survey, which included 30,861 participants, there is a notable decline in faith in democratic institutions across the globe.
  • Although 77% of respondents still hold optimism for representative democracy, there is growing openness to alternative governance structures.
  • Of concern is the diminishing support for representative democracy since 2017, juxtaposed with increased approval for direct democracy, rule by experts, and authoritarian regimes.

Regional Dynamics and Emerging Trends in Perceptions of Governance:

  • Shifting Preferences Towards Expert Rule and Authoritarianism: A noticeable inclination towards endorsing rule by experts and authoritarian forms of governance is observed across different regions.
    • This trend is particularly conspicuous in nations grappling with economic instability, political turbulence, or perceived inefficiencies within democratic structures.
    • In such contexts, citizens often perceive democratic systems as sluggish and inadequate in addressing urgent challenges, fostering a growing appeal towards centralized authority and decisive leadership.
  • Influence of Socioeconomic Factors: Socioeconomic circumstances significantly shape preferences in governance.
    • Individuals from lower-income countries with limited educational access tend to show support for authoritative leadership and military rule.
    • This inclination may stem from a desire for stability and economic advancement, as authoritarian regimes are perceived as more effective in delivering immediate solutions to complex issues.
  • Cultural and Historical Context: Variations in democratic perceptions are also influenced by cultural and historical backgrounds.
    • Nations with past experiences of authoritarian rule or centralized governance structures may exhibit greater openness to authoritarian models.
    • Additionally, cultural norms regarding leadership, hierarchy, and decision-making processes impact attitudes toward democracy and alternative governance models.
  • Resistance to Authoritarian Trends in Certain Regions: Despite the rise in authoritarian sentiments in some areas, resistance to such ideologies persists in others.
    • Regions with strong traditions of liberal democracy, including Canada, Europe, Scandinavia, and the United States, continue to prioritize democratic values and institutions.
    • Here, a steadfast commitment to democratic principles, civil liberties, and the rule of law acts as a barrier against the erosion of democratic norms.

Evolution of Democratic Perceptions in India:

  • Transition towards Strong Leadership: Recent years have witnessed a discernible transformation in Indian views on democracy, characterized by a diminishing preference for representative democracy and a growing inclination towards authoritative leadership.
    • In 2017, 44% of Indians favored representative democracy, a figure that declined to 36% by 2023.
    • Conversely, support for a commanding leader with substantial authority surged from 55% in 2017 to 67% in 2023.
  • Rising Endorsement of Expert Governance: Mirroring global trends, Indian perspectives on governance have witnessed a notable uptick in backing for rule by experts and authoritarian models.
    • Support for rule by experts skyrocketed from 65% to an impressive 82% during the same period.
    • Of significant note is the remarkable preference for military rule or governance under an authoritarian figure, with a striking 85% of Indians expressing support for such models by 2023.
  • Diverse Regional Outlooks: It's crucial to acknowledge the diversity in democratic perceptions across various regions and demographic cohorts within India.
    • While certain segments may lean towards authoritarian leadership, others remain steadfast in their commitment to democratic principles and institutions.
    • Factors such as education, socioeconomic status, and cultural heritage exert considerable influence on individuals' governance preferences.

Way Forward to Reinforce Democratic Foundations:

  • Engaging Citizens in Governance: Central to a robust democracy is the active participation of citizens in decision-making processes.
    • Governments should establish channels and platforms facilitating meaningful engagement in policymaking and public affairs.
    • Initiatives like town hall meetings, participatory budgeting, citizen assemblies, and digital feedback platforms can foster citizen involvement.
  • Ensuring Information Accessibility: Transparency and access to accurate information are cornerstone principles of democratic governance.
    • Governments must ensure unhindered access to information about government actions and policies.
    • Strengthening freedom of information laws, enhancing transparency mechanisms, and supporting investigative journalism can uphold government accountability.
  • Upholding Accountability and Justice: Democratic institutions must remain accountable to the populace and uphold the rule of law.
    • Governments should institute checks and balances, foster an independent judiciary, and implement effective oversight mechanisms to prevent power abuse.
    • Additionally, efforts to promote equality before the law and safeguard the rights of marginalized groups are essential.
  • Fostering Civic Engagement: Civil society organizations play a pivotal role in advocating for citizen rights and government accountability.
    • Governments should create an enabling environment for civil society to operate freely, safeguarding freedoms of association, expression, and assembly.
    • Collaboration between government and civil society can enhance democratic governance through dialogue and cooperation.
  • Promoting Ethical Leadership: Ethical leadership and public service are vital for democratic integrity.
    • Governments should cultivate a culture of ethical conduct among officials and public servants, implementing measures to combat corruption and promote transparency.
    • Holding individuals accountable for misconduct reinforces democratic legitimacy.
  • Embracing Responsive and Inclusive Policies: Democratic governments must prioritize policies addressing the needs of all citizens, especially marginalized groups.
    • Proactive efforts to promote social justice, economic equality, and inclusivity in decision-making processes are crucial.
    • Engaging diverse stakeholders and tailoring policies to ensure inclusivity is imperative for leaving no one behind.

Conclusion

The shifting democratic perceptions highlighted in both the Pew Research Centre survey and India's democratic context emphasize the importance of reevaluating global democratic systems. By acknowledging regional nuances, comprehending evolving attitudes, and emphasizing foundational reinforcement endeavors, nations can effectively address the complexities and potentials of democratic governance in the contemporary era.

How Can India Revive its Investment Cycle

  • 20 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

Centre has been meeting its capex targets, but the trajectory of private sector and state governments is less certain.

Context:

  • Policymakers in India are grappling with the imperative task of revitalizing the investment cycle. Despite the central government's success in meeting capital expenditure (capex) targets, uncertainty clouds the trajectory of investments from the private sector and state governments.
  • Thus, a comprehensive examination of India's current investment landscape is essential, scrutinizing key indicators and trends to identify the hurdles and prospects in reigniting the investment momentum.

Overview of Investment Patterns:

  • Fluctuating Investment Rates: The investment rate, representing gross fixed capital formation as a percentage of GDP, has shown variability in recent years.
    • After dropping to 27.2% in 2020-21, there has been a slight improvement, with the rate climbing to 31.3% in 2023-24 from 30.8% in the preceding fiscal year.
    • This increase suggests a possible resurgence in investment sentiment and activity, albeit starting from a relatively low level.
  • Composition of Investments: Delving Deeper: Yet, a closer examination of investment composition reveals noteworthy nuances.
    • A significant part of the recent uptick in capital formation stems from dwelling construction, supported by government initiatives to bolster the housing sector.
    • While housing investments spur economic growth and job creation, diversification is essential for sustainable and equitable development.
  • Declining Investment in Plant and Machinery: Of particular concern is the diminishing share of investments in plant and machinery, crucial for fostering productivity, innovation, and competitiveness across sectors.
    • The allocation of investment to plant and machinery declined from 36% in 2017-18 to 30.7% in 2022-23, indicating a potential shift in investment priorities or hurdles in attracting investments in manufacturing and industrial domains.

Private Sector Investment:

  • Insights from CMIE Data: Examining private sector investment trends often involves analyzing data provided by the Centre for Monitoring the Indian Economy (CMIE), offering valuable insights into the investment intentions and actions of private enterprises.
  • Mixed Signals in Investment Intentions: Recent CMIE data reveals a nuanced picture of private sector investment in India.
    • While new investment announcements dipped to Rs 27.1 lakh crore in 2023-24 from the previous year's Rs 39 lakh crore, they still represented the second-highest figures in a decade.
    • However, it's essential to recognize that these announcements signify intentions rather than realized investments, potentially leading to disparities between planned projects and actual investments.
  • Prevalence of Private Sector Intentions: The bulk of investment intentions—around 85%—originated from the private sector, underscoring its pivotal role in driving investment dynamics.
    • Furthermore, foreign companies contributed 11% of the total investment intentions, reflecting a certain degree of confidence in India's business landscape among international investors.

Analyzing Investment Trends Across Sectors:

  • Power Sector Dynamics: Investment inflows into the power sector have surged, reflecting a strategic focus on bolstering infrastructure, particularly in renewable energy projects like solar and wind power, driven by initiatives such as the Production Linked Investment (PLI) scheme.
    • This expansion not only enhances energy security and environmental sustainability but also stimulates job creation and technological advancements.
  • Transportation Sector Insights: Investment intentions in transportation services, notably aviation, have risen sharply due to ambitious expansion plans by major airlines.
    • While these investments promise improved connectivity and economic growth, concerns persist about reliance on imported aircraft, emphasizing the need for initiatives to foster domestic manufacturing and technological capabilities.
  • Diverse Industry Investment Trends: Various industries, including chemicals, machinery, metals, and automotive sectors, have attracted substantial investment commitments, reflecting a broad spectrum of opportunities for private sector investment.
    • However, the absence of significant investments in consumer goods industries raises questions about the depth and breadth of sectoral investments.
  • Challenges in Consumer Goods: Consumer goods industries face challenges such as excess capacity, subdued demand, and high inflation, which dampen investment enthusiasm despite government incentives like the PLI scheme.
    • Lingering issues in job creation and rural demand further contribute to the subdued investment outlook in this segment.
  • Impact of State Government Spending: Reduced capital expenditure by state governments in 2022-23 to meet fiscal targets poses a challenge to the investment cycle, given their significant contribution to overall investments.
    • Budgetary constraints in state governments have a ripple effect on the broader investment landscape in the country.

Way Forward:

  • Promoting Sustainable Growth: While the rise in capital formation is encouraging, ensuring its sustainability and fostering long-term growth hinges on achieving a balanced distribution of investments across sectors.
    • Over-reliance on specific industries, like construction, may impede the economy's adaptability and hinder innovation and technological progress.
  • Policy Imperatives for Investment Stimulus: Effective policy measures are imperative to stimulate private sector investment and cultivate a favorable investment environment.
    • Streamlining regulatory frameworks, bolstering infrastructure, fostering innovation and entrepreneurship, and addressing sector-specific hurdles can incentivize private enterprises to invest in vital areas crucial for fostering economic growth and advancement."

Conclusion

Revitalizing India's investment cycle demands collaborative action from public and private stakeholders. Despite promising sectors, obstacles like sectoral disparities, muted consumer demand, and fiscal limitations at the state level impede a comprehensive rebound. Tackling these hurdles via tailored policies to spur demand, foster sectoral variety, and bolster the investment environment will be pivotal for nurturing enduring economic progress and advancement.

A Reformed UNSC is not Possible Without India as a Permanent Member

  • 13 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

At a time when India is seriously advocating structural and functional reforms in the United Nations, the global forum’s president, Dennis Francis, has expressed optimism about India’s potential to secure a permanent seat on the UN Security Council.

Context:

  • Amid India's active promotion of structural and functional reforms within the United Nations, Dennis Francis, the president of the global forum, has voiced optimism regarding India's ability to secure a permanent seat on the UN Security Council.
  • The US and other Western countries sound extremely hollow when they pontificate on strengthening democracy and the fight against terrorism even as they keep India out of P5.

What is P5 Nations in the United Nations?

  • P5 refers to the Permanent Five or Permanent Members of the United Nations Security Council.
  • These are the five countries that have a permanent seat on the Security Council, granting them significant power within the UN.

The P5 members are:

    • China
    • France
    • Russia
    • United Kingdom
    • United States
  • Most of these countries were major victors of World War II and were seen as key players in maintaining international peace and security. 
  • They hold a special privilege within the Security Council:  the right to veto any resolution.
  • This means any one of these countries can single-handedly block a resolution, regardless of how many other countries support it.
  • The P5's power and influence is a subject of some debate. Some argue that it's necessary to maintain stability, while others believe it gives these countries too much control and hinders the UN's effectiveness.

Urgent Need for Overhauling the United Nations (UN):

  • Addressing the 76th UNGA in 2021, the Prime Minister of India underscored the imperative for 'comprehensive UN reforms,' stressing that 'outmoded structures' are inadequate to tackle contemporary challenges.
  • Issues such as climate change, counterterrorism efforts, and the attainment of sustainable development goals (SDGs) were not prioritized when the UN was established seven decades ago.
    • Today, they demand urgent attention.
  • The aftermath of World War 2 has spawned numerous conflicts that persist, undermining global peace and economic advancement.
  • The Covid-19 pandemic has laid bare the fragility of the world's healthcare systems.
  • In today's multipolar world, the UN's polarized and antiquated structure is ill-suited to meet the demands of global governance.
    • Cooperation among nations is essential to prevent the abuse of selective veto power by members pursuing hegemonic agendas.

Inconsistencies in Global Perceptions of India's UNSC Candidacy:

  • In 2023, as India's G20 presidency drew to a close, the country's foreign minister noted a positive international reception to India's bid for a permanent seat on the UNSC.
  • During bilateral discussions between the Prime Minister of India and the President of the USA, a joint statement emphasized India's stance on the need for a more inclusive and representative global governance structure through UN Security Council reform.
  • In the same statement, the US expressed support for India's candidacy for a non-permanent seat on the UNSC for the term 2028-2029.
  • Beyond the US, other voices echo the call for expanding non-permanent UNSC membership.
  • The Uniting for Consensus (UFC) group, comprising twelve nations, advocates for increasing the number of non-permanent elected UNSC members from 15 to 26.
  • Formed in 1990, the UFC opposes creating new permanent national seats, arguing that the current P5 arrangement stems from post-World War 2 circumstances, and creating additional privileged positions would be detrimental to UN membership's general interests.
  • Critics point out the inconsistency of Western nations, notably the US, a permanent UNSC member, advocating for democracy and counterterrorism while simultaneously excluding India, one of the oldest UN members and the largest democracy, from the P5.
  • China presents the primary obstacle to India's pursuit of a permanent UNSC seat.

China's Influence on UNSC Reform Efforts:

  • Italy-China Collaboration within UFC: In 2023, the Deputy Prime Minister of Italy engaged in discussions with his Chinese counterpart, focusing on bilateral agreements and the situation in Ukraine.
    • During this exchange, the Deputy Prime Minister of Italy commended the productive and consistent cooperation between China and Italy concerning UNSC reform, particularly their coordination within the Uniting for Consensus (UFC) group, where China holds an observer status.
    • The presence of China as an observer suggests dim prospects for those advocating genuine reforms and expansion of the P5.
  • China's Opposition to the G4 Group: Also in 2023, the G4 Group, consisting of India, Brazil, Japan, and Germany, convened during the 78th UNGA to deliberate on the UN reform process, particularly focusing on expanding the P5.
    • Their objective is to modernize the UN's structure, which has its roots in the aftermath of World War 2.
    • However, opposition from China, Russia, and South Korea regarding Japan's participation in the G4 due to historical issues stemming from World War 2 has caused friction and disagreement among the countries involved.
  • Acknowledging India's Role: Prime Minister Jawaharlal Nehru played a pivotal role in advocating for China's inclusion as a permanent member of the UN Security Council. Notably, both the US and the Soviet Union informally offered India the UNSC seat in the early 1950s.
    • Nehru emphasized China's significance within the framework of his foreign policy.
    • However, China's actions in Tibet and its conflict with India in 1962 shattered Nehru's perception of China's global role.
    • India now stresses the importance of resolving issues such as Tibet and territories like Xinjiang and Pakistan-occupied Kashmir.
    • As a permanent UNSC member, China should remember the circumstances that led to its membership and acknowledge its responsibilities to India.

Conclusion

The international community must acknowledge that without comprehensive restructuring and democratization, untethered from its historical constraints, the United Nations (UN) will struggle to address the complexities of contemporary geopolitics and foster genuine multilateralism. Without these reforms, the aspirations for peace and prosperity will remain elusive. What's urgently required is a revamped, credible, and inclusive UN 2.0 that can effectively safeguard global peace and security.

United Nations Security Council:

  • The Security Council has primary responsibility for the maintenance of international peace and security.
  • It has 15 Members, and each Member has one vote.
  • Under the Charter of the United Nations, all Member States are obligated to comply with Council decisions.
  • The Security Council takes the lead in determining the existence of a threat to the peace or act of aggression.
  • It calls upon the parties to a dispute to settle it by peaceful means and recommends methods of adjustment or terms of settlement.
  • In some cases, the Security Council can resort to imposing sanctions or even authorizing the use of force to maintain or restore international peace and security.

Shaping India’s path to inclusive health care

  • 08 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

World Health Day, which is observed every year on April 7, unites us around health equity, an essential topic at the heart of global health and justice.

Context:

  • World Health Day, commemorated every April 7th, underscores the significance of health equity, acknowledged as a basic human entitlement by the World Health Organization (WHO).
  • Hence, it is imperative to delve into the theme "My Health, My Right," delving into the hurdles and remedies in attaining health equity in India.
  • As a country contending with multifaceted socioeconomic inequalities in healthcare access and results, this exploration becomes pivotal.

What is Health Equity?

  • Health equity, as outlined by the WHO, embodies the principle that every person should have the opportunity to attain optimal health, irrespective of their social, economic, or environmental circumstances.
  • It extends beyond mere healthcare access, addressing underlying factors such as poverty, discrimination, and resource imbalances.
  • Considering Diverse Health Outcomes: A core tenet of health equity acknowledges that health results stem from a multifaceted interplay of elements, encompassing social, economic, and environmental determinants.
    • Individuals from disadvantaged backgrounds often encounter obstacles like financial constraints, transportation limitations, and sparse healthcare facilities.
  • The Vitality of Health Equity: Health equity holds paramount importance not only ethically but also from a public health standpoint.
    • Research consistently indicates that societies fostering greater health equity typically enjoy superior health outcomes, marked by lower morbidity and mortality rates, reduced healthcare expenditures, and heightened life expectancy.
    • Conversely, persistent health disparities may precipitate societal unrest, economic strains, and a squandered human potential.

Health Equity Challenges in India:

  • Addressing Urban-Rural Disparities: India contends with pronounced healthcare inequalities between urban and rural regions, where urban areas typically boast superior healthcare infrastructure and services, while rural communities encounter obstacles like limited access to facilities, healthcare professionals, and infrastructure, resulting in inferior health outcomes compared to their urban counterparts.
  • Navigating Overcrowded Urban Slums: Urban slums present profound challenges characterized by extreme poverty, overcrowding, unsanitary conditions, and inadequate access to clean water, fostering the spread of infectious diseases and escalating morbidity and mortality rates.
    • Moreover, deficient healthcare infrastructure exacerbates health disparities as residents grapple with limited access to essential services.
  • Tackling Socioeconomic and Caste Disparities: Marginalized groups, including Scheduled Castes, Scheduled Tribes, and economically disadvantaged populations, confront elevated rates of illness and death due to restricted healthcare access, diminished health literacy, and societal prejudice.
    • These disparities intertwine with broader determinants like education, employment, and housing, perpetuating disparities in health outcomes.
  • Confronting the Burden of Non-Communicable Diseases (NCDs): Non-communicable diseases (NCDs) such as cardiovascular ailments, diabetes, and cancer pose a mounting challenge to health equity in India, constituting a substantial portion of the disease burden.
    • However, marginalized communities often face barriers to accessing preventive measures and NCD treatment, amplifying health inequalities and exacerbating existing socioeconomic gaps.
  • Navigating Shortages in Healthcare Personnel: A severe shortage of healthcare professionals, with only 0.8 doctors per 1,000 individuals according to WHO data, exacerbates health challenges, particularly in rural areas where access to primary care is limited, resulting in delayed diagnoses, substandard treatment, and compromised health outcomes.
  • Confronting Infrastructure and Resource Limitations: Inadequate healthcare infrastructure, insufficient funding, and resource limitations pose formidable obstacles to health equity in India, with many public facilities lacking essential equipment, medications, and skilled personnel.
    • Furthermore, the unequal distribution of resources aggravates urban-rural healthcare disparities, exacerbating inequities in access to quality healthcare services.

Strategies and Measures to Advance Health Equity in India:

  • Enhancing Primary Healthcare Services: A pivotal approach to fostering health equity in India involves bolstering primary healthcare provisions, especially in rural and marginalized regions.
    • This entails augmenting the accessibility and availability of primary care facilities, fortifying the skills and capabilities of frontline healthcare personnel, and ensuring the delivery of essential health services encompassing preventive care, maternal and child healthcare, and management of chronic ailments.
    • Initiatives such as the National Rural Health Mission (NRHM) and the National Urban Health Mission (NUHM) strive to extend primary healthcare access and mitigate healthcare disparities between urban and rural locales.
  • Advocating for Universal Health Coverage: Universal health coverage (UHC) stands as a cornerstone in ensuring equitable access to indispensable healthcare services devoid of financial strains.
    • Endeavors like Ayushman Bharat, India's flagship health insurance program, aspire to furnish financial safeguarding to vulnerable segments by offering comprehensive coverage for hospitalization expenses.
    • By broadening the reach of quality healthcare services and alleviating out-of-pocket costs, UHC endeavors to redress discrepancies in healthcare accessibility and enhance health outcomes for all citizens.
  • Targeting Social Determinants of Health: Attaining health equity mandates a multifaceted approach that transcends healthcare interventions to address the underlying social determinants of health, encompassing poverty, education, housing, and employment.
    • Initiatives geared towards poverty mitigation, augmenting educational and sanitation access, and fostering livelihood opportunities can wield a transformative impact on health outcomes and help ameliorate health disparities.
    • Programs like the Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (MGNREGA) furnish rural households with employment prospects, thereby fostering enhanced socioeconomic circumstances and superior health outcomes.
  • Empowering through Health Literacy: Elevating health literacy assumes paramount significance in empowering individuals to make informed health decisions and pursue equitable healthcare access.
    • Integration of health education within prevailing healthcare schemes can heighten public consciousness and advocate for preventive healthcare practices.
  • Fostering Collaborative Endeavors: Efficacious collaboration among governmental bodies, civil society, healthcare providers, and international entities constitutes a linchpin in addressing health inequities.
    • By harnessing their respective competencies and resources, these stakeholders can conceptualize culturally sensitive health initiatives tailored to the distinctive requisites of diverse communities.

Conclusion

Realizing health equity in India necessitates coordinated endeavors spanning various sectors and involving diverse stakeholders. Through targeted interventions addressing socioeconomic health determinants, bolstering healthcare infrastructure, and fostering collaborative alliances, India can progress towards a future where equitable access to superior healthcare becomes a universal norm. The pursuit of health equity transcends moral imperatives, emerging as a pivotal prerequisite for fostering sustainable development and societal advancement.

India Planning to Adopt ‘Living Wage’ Instead of ‘Minimum Wage’ by 2025

  • 06 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

India is reportedly poised to replace the minimum wage with the living wage system, with the transition anticipated to occur by next year.

Context:

  • India is reportedly considering shifting from the minimum wage to the living wage by 2025.
  • India has approached the International Labour Organization (ILO) to help it chalk out a framework to assess and operationalize the living wages.
  • India has asked the ILO to help it in “capacity building, systemic collection of data and evidence of the positive economic outcomes resulting from the implementation of living wages”.
    • Earlier in March, the United Nations agency forged an agreement on the living wage, which was also endorsed by its governing body.
  • India, a founding member of the ILO and a permanent member of its governing body since 1922, passed the Code on Wages in 2019.

What is the Current Wage System in India?

  • National Floor Level Minimum Wage (NFLMW): Established under the Code on Wages 2019, the NFLMW is determined by the government, requiring establishments to set minimum wages not below this level.
  • Flexibility in Minimum Wage Standards: Section 5 of the Code on Wages 2019 prohibits employers from setting wages below the NFLMW, though states have the discretion to revise minimum wage rates as needed.
  • Presently, the National Floor Wage stands at Rs 178 per day.

What’s a Living Wage?

  • The International Labour Organization (ILO) defines the living wage as the level of remuneration “necessary to afford a decent standard of living for workers and their families, taking into account the country's circumstances and calculated for the work performed during the normal hours of work”.
  • This decent standard of living includes being able to afford food, water, housing, education, healthcare, transportation, clothing, and other basic needs including a provision for contingencies, says the Global Living Wage Coalition.
  • The goal of a living wage is to ensure the employees get an income enough for satisfactory living standards as well as reduce poverty.

What is Minimum Wage?

  • Minimum wage refers to the legally mandated lowest level of compensation that employers must pay employees for their work over a specified period.
  • While minimum wage endeavors to prevent low pay, living wage extends beyond by ensuring income is adequate to meet necessities like food, shelter, clothing, and other essentials, addressing the risk of workers falling below the poverty line despite earning minimum wages.
  • In India, minimum wage calculation factors in variables such as the state of employment, the skill level of the worker, the nature of their job, and other pertinent factors.

Living Wage vs Minimum Wage:

  • Definition: A living wage is the income required to meet basic needs and maintain a decent standard of living, while minimum wage is the lowest legally mandated compensation for workers.
  • Purpose: A living wage seeks to address the risk of workers falling below the poverty line, while minimum wage aims to prevent low pay.
  • Mandatory vs Voluntary: Minimum wages are legally required, whereas living wages are voluntary unless the government sets the minimum wage at the living wage level.
  • Calculation: Living wages consider basic necessities and a decent standard of living, while minimum wages factor in variables like skill level, state of employment, and job nature.

Pros and Cons of Living Wages:

  • Living wage is a divisive issue. Proponents of the living wage say people get paid more, leading to a rise in employee satisfaction.
  • A boost in employee morale is likely to result in higher productivity.
  • It also saves recruitment and training costs for companies as employee turnover falls.
  • On the other hand, critics of the concept say companies may cut back on hiring if forced to pay increased wages, creating more job losses.
  • Opponents also argue that imposing a living wage means creating a wage floor, which would hurt the economy by impacting businesses, especially those that cannot pay hiked salaries.

How Does Living Wage Benefit India?

  • India has over 500 million (50-crore) workers, of which 90 percent are in the unorganized sector, noted ET.
  • The national floor level minimum wage (NFLMW) – an amount below which no state government can fix the minimum wage – was Rs 178 per day or more depending on the location in 2023.
    • This was set at Rs 176 per day in 2017 and has not been changed since then.
  • Currently, some states pay workers in the unorganized sector even below the NFLMW.
  • The Code on Wages, 2019 was passed by Parliament states that the minimum wage cannot be fixed below the national wage floor.
  • However, this code, which is binding on all states, is yet to be implemented.
  • If India replaces the minimum wages with living wages, workers are expected to earn more.
  • According to the ILO, the living wage has to be calculated following its principles and wage-setting process.

Conclusion

India's pursuit of the Sustainable Development Goals by 2030 hinges on strategic shifts, such as transitioning from minimum to living wages, to uplift millions from poverty while safeguarding their welfare. This is particularly pertinent against the backdrop of escalating income inequality, highlighting the imperative for a revamped wage system. As poverty rates decline yet inequality persists, a more equitable approach to wages becomes paramount, underscoring India's commitment to inclusive growth and social justice.

International Labor Organization (ILO):

  • The International Labor Organization (ILO) is a specialized agency of the United Nations, founded in 1919 to promote social and economic justice through the establishment of international labor standards.
  • The ILO operates with a unique tripartite structure, allowing governments, employers, and workers to engage in dialogue and decision-making on labor matters.

Key Roles and Functions:

  • Setting International Standards: The ILO develops and adopts international labor standards in the form of conventions and recommendations, covering areas such as freedom of association, collective bargaining, child labor, forced labor, and non-discrimination.
  • Technical Assistance and Capacity Building: The organization provides support to member states in enhancing their labor administration, labor inspection, employment policies, and social protection systems.
  • Monitoring and Supervision: The ILO monitors the application of international labor standards in member states, offering guidance and assistance in their implementation.
  • Research and Knowledge Sharing: The organization conducts research, collects data, and disseminates information on labor-related topics, facilitating evidence-based policy-making and dialogue.
  • The ILO plays a critical role in promoting decent work, social justice, and labor rights worldwide, fostering cooperation among its 187 member states to address labor-related challenges and achieve sustainable development.
  • The ILO headquarters are located in Geneva (Switzerland).

India’s HIV/AIDS Response

  • 01 Apr 2024

Why is it in the News?

April 1, 2004, marked a significant moment in India's fight against HIV/AIDS as Free Antiretroviral Therapy (ART) was introduced for Persons Living with HIV (PLHIV).

Context:

  • April 1, 2004, stands as a landmark moment in India's approach to addressing the HIV/AIDS epidemic, as Free Antiretroviral Therapy (ART) was introduced for Persons Living with HIV (PLHIV).
  • This initiative, conceived in response to the pressing issues of access and affordability, has emerged as a crucial intervention in the fight against the disease.
  • As we commemorate this day, it is imperative to delve into the progression and significance of India's free ART program, shedding light on its transformative impact on the nation's response to the HIV/AIDS crisis.

HIV/AIDS's Emergence and Initial Challenges:

  • Inception of a Global Health Crisis: The emergence of HIV/AIDS in the early 1980s signaled the onset of a widespread health emergency with profound implications for populations worldwide.
    • Originally detected among groups in the United States, the disease swiftly traversed borders, reaching nations like India and beyond.
    • This era was characterized by uncertainty, anxiety, and a lack of comprehension regarding the novel virus, initially dubbed GRID (Gay-Related Immune Deficiency), later renamed HIV (Human Immunodeficiency Virus) and its associated illness AIDS (Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome).
  • Absence of Effective Treatments Resulting in Dire Consequences: During the initial stages of the epidemic, HIV/AIDS was synonymous with a dire prognosis, largely due to the absence of viable treatment options.
    • Marginalized communities, including men who have sex with men, intravenous drug users, and commercial sex workers, bore the brunt of the disease's impact.
    • However, as time progressed, it became evident that HIV/AIDS transcended boundaries of gender, sexual orientation, and socioeconomic status, affecting individuals from diverse backgrounds.
  • Pervasive Social Stigma: In addition to its grave health implications, HIV/AIDS precipitated significant social stigma and discrimination.
    • Individuals living with HIV/AIDS encountered marginalization, employment loss, and social exclusion from both their communities and families.
    • This pervasive stigma compounded the challenges associated with managing HIV/AIDS and impeded effective epidemic control efforts.
  • Limited Treatment Accessibility and Exorbitant Costs of Available ART: Despite the escalating recognition of HIV/AIDS as a global health threat, access to treatment remained scant, particularly in low- and middle-income nations such as India.
    • The approval of the first antiretroviral drug, AZT (zidovudine), by the US Food and Drug Administration (US FDA) in March 1987 marked a significant milestone.
    • HAART (Highly Active Antiretroviral Therapy) represented a breakthrough in disease management, combining multiple antiretroviral drugs to suppress viral replication and bolster immune response.
  • However, the exorbitant expenses associated with HAART, reaching up to $10,000 annually per patient, rendered it inaccessible to the majority of individuals living with HIV/AIDS, especially those residing in resource-constrained settings.

The Introduction of Free ART in India and its Impact:

  • In response to the pressing issues of limited access and affordability of HIV/AIDS treatment, the Indian government embarked on a significant initiative.
  • On April 1, 2004, the government initiated the provision of Free Antiretroviral Therapy (ART) for Persons Living with HIV (PLHIV).
  • The introduction of Free ART aimed to dismantle barriers to treatment and extend life-saving medication to all PLHIV, irrespective of their financial means.
  • By offering ART at no cost, the government endeavored to ensure that access to treatment would not be hindered by financial constraints, thereby addressing a crucial gap in healthcare accessibility.

Its Role in Curbing the Epidemic

  • Enhanced Treatment Accessibility: Over the past two decades, the initiative has undergone substantial expansion, witnessing a surge in the number of ART centers from less than 10 to approximately 700, catering to around 1.8 million PLHIV.
    • This proliferation has facilitated heightened treatment access for individuals living with HIV/AIDS nationwide, including those residing in remote and underserved regions.
    • A notable outcome of the Free ART endeavor has been the remarkable enhancement in health outcomes observed among PLHIV.
  • Significant Reduction in Mortality Risk and Transmission Rates: Timely and effective treatment accessibility has transfigured HIV/AIDS from a dire prognosis to a manageable chronic ailment for many.
    • By suppressing viral load and bolstering immune response, ART has not only extended the lifespan of PLHIV but also augmented their quality of life.
    • Moreover, the Free ART initiative has played a pivotal role in curbing HIV transmission rates by ensuring treatment access for PLHIV, thereby thwarting virus dissemination within communities.
    • Research indicates that efficacious ART can substantially mitigate HIV transmission risk, contributing to the overall decline in HIV prevalence.
  • Broader Societal Benefits: Beyond its direct impact on individuals grappling with HIV/AIDS, the Free ART initiative has yielded wider societal advantages.
    • By mitigating the disease burden and forestalling fresh infections, the initiative has alleviated the societal and economic repercussions of HIV/AIDS on families, communities, and healthcare systems.
  • Supplementary Measures and Patient-Centric Approach: The success of India's ART program extends beyond free medication provision.
    • Complementary initiatives, such as complimentary diagnostic services, prevention of parent-to-child transmission programs, and management of opportunistic infections, have played pivotal roles in curbing the HIV epidemic.
  • Furthermore, the program has adopted a patient-centric strategy, furnishing stable PLHIV with two to three months' worth of medicines to minimize clinic visits and enhance treatment adherence.

Challenges and Future Prospects:

  • Delayed Initiation and Attrition in Care: A notable portion of patients presents with advanced HIV illness, evidenced by low CD4 counts, impacting treatment efficacy.
    • Furthermore, attrition in care remains a concern, as some patients discontinue treatment upon feeling well, leading to interruptions and potential drug resistance development.
  • Logistical Hurdles and Infrastructure Deficiencies: Remote and underserved regions, including those with rugged terrain, encounter hurdles in accessing vital medications and healthcare provisions.
    • Fortifying the logistical network and infrastructure for dispensing ART drugs is imperative to sustain uninterrupted treatment access for all PLHIV.
  • Involvement of the Private Sector: While the public sector assumes a pivotal role in HIV/AIDS treatment provision, fostering collaboration with the private sector is crucial.
    • Leveraging the resources and infrastructure of private healthcare entities can expand ART accessibility and reach marginalized populations, including urban dwellers.
  • Interconnected Health Program Integration: Augmenting integration with other health initiatives, encompassing hepatitis, non-communicable ailments, and mental health, holds paramount importance.
    • Given PLHIV's propensity for concurrent ailments, comprehensive and integrated healthcare services necessitate intersectoral collaboration within the healthcare spectrum.
  • Realization of Ambitious NACP Phase 5 Objectives: The ongoing fifth phase of the National AIDS Control Programme (NACP) sets forth ambitious targets, envisaging an 80% reduction in annual new HIV infections and AIDS-related mortalities by 2025.
    • Achieving these milestones demands concerted endeavors to escalate testing, enhance treatment coverage, and secure viral suppression among PLHIV.

Conclusion

India's free ART initiative has successfully combated HIV/AIDS, demonstrating the power of accessible healthcare. Its achievements emphasize the importance of political will, funding, community engagement, and patient-centered care in tackling infectious diseases. Lessons from this program will guide future public health endeavors, improving outcomes for all

Prioritizing Africa in India's Global South Perspective

  • 30 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

As Africa houses three-fourths of humanity and over 39 percent of the global GDP, there's a growing call to reform existing structures towards a more inclusive and representative system focused on development.

Context:

  • President of India, Droupadi Murmu's trip to Mauritius underscored the significance of India's ties with African nations, particularly emphasizing Mauritius' role as a pivotal partner in the Indian Ocean Region.
  • This visit reflects India's expanding involvement in Africa, characterized by joint initiatives in community development and the inauguration of critical infrastructure projects.
  • As India endeavors to bolster its standing within the Global South, it becomes imperative to comprehend the diverse facets of the India-Africa relationship, analyzing the potential opportunities it offers and the necessity for enhanced collaboration.

Analyzing India's Comprehensive Engagement with Africa:

  • Investments and Trade: India's commitment to Africa is evidenced by its burgeoning investments, which soared to $98 billion in 2023, reflecting its confidence in Africa's economic potential and its dedication to nurturing enduring partnerships.
    • Bilateral trade between India and Africa has surged to $100 billion, spanning diverse sectors like agriculture, manufacturing, technology, and services, catalyzing economic growth and diversification in both regions.
  • Developmental Projects: India's involvement in Africa extends to diverse developmental initiatives, encompassing infrastructure, healthcare, education, agriculture, and renewable energy sectors.
    • By spearheading such projects, India not only fosters economic progress in Africa but also cements diplomatic ties and goodwill.
  • Export of Scalable Solutions: Drawing on its expertise in cost-effective and scalable solutions, India has played a pivotal role in addressing various challenges confronting African nations.
    • Through initiatives spanning from eco-friendly housing to solar energy technology, Indian entities contribute to poverty alleviation and sustainable development, bolstering India's reputation as a dependable partner committed to mutual progress.
  • Mutual Prosperity and Development: India and Africa mutually benefit by capitalizing on each other's strengths and resources.
    • While India's investments stimulate economic growth, generate employment, and facilitate technology transfer in Africa, African markets offer India access to vital natural resources, new markets, and strategic collaborations.
    • This symbiotic relationship fosters economic resilience, innovation, and inclusive growth in both regions.

The Strategic Significance of India's Advocacy for Africa's Representation in Global Arenas:

  • Enhancing Africa's Representation and Influence India's active advocacy for Africa's presence in global governance platforms underscores its dedication to amplifying the voices of developing nations.
    • Recognizing Africa's substantial population and economic contribution, India emphasizes the necessity of its representation for a fairer and more inclusive international system.
    • Initiatives like supporting the African Union's inclusion in the G20 highlight India's acknowledgment of Africa's pivotal role in shaping global agendas.
  • Driving Reform and Adaptation Amidst evolving global challenges, there's a growing impetus for adapting governance structures to address emerging issues and foster sustainable development.
    • India's push for Africa's participation in global forums reflects its commitment to reforming institutions like the United Nations, International Monetary Fund, and World Bank to better reflect the interests of developing nations.
  • Fostering Strategic Partnerships India's advocacy for Africa's representation in global governance is not only driven by altruism but also strategic considerations.
    • Recognizing Africa's increasing influence, India seeks to cultivate strategic partnerships with African nations to advance its global interests.
    • By supporting Africa's involvement in decision-making processes, India enhances its diplomatic influence and strengthens its position as a leading voice in the Global South.
  • Advancing Development Goals: Aligned with its broader development agenda, India's advocacy for Africa's representation in global governance focuses on priorities such as poverty alleviation, sustainable development, and inclusive growth.
    • By championing Africa's interests in international forums, India aims to address systemic inequalities and advocate for policies benefiting vulnerable populations.
    • This advocacy spans various domains, including trade, finance, climate change, and peace and security, reflecting India's commitment to fostering a more equitable world order.

Exploring India Africa's Rich Historical Bonds and Charting a Path for Future Collaboration:

  • Legacy of Colonialism and Struggle for Liberation: India's historical relationship with Africa is deeply rooted in its fight against colonialism, with both regions sharing similar experiences of exploitation and oppression under European rule.
    • India's support for African liberation movements during the colonial era solidified a bond based on shared values of freedom and sovereignty.
  • Cultural Exchange and People-to-People Connections: Centuries of interaction between Indian traders, scholars, and missionaries with African societies have left enduring cultural legacies, enriching both regions' traditions and languages.
    • Today, vibrant Indian communities contribute to Africa's cultural diversity and economic vitality, fostering mutual understanding and cooperation.
  • Commitment to Development and Capacity-Building: India's engagement with Africa in development cooperation dates back to its early days of independence, with a focus on providing technical assistance and capacity-building support.
    • Continued collaboration in sectors such as education, healthcare, agriculture, and infrastructure underscores India's enduring commitment to Africa's progress and prosperity.
  • Exploring Economic Opportunities and Innovation: With Africa emerging as a dynamic economic hub, India stands poised to deepen its economic ties by leveraging historical bonds and cultural affinities.
    • Opportunities abound for enhanced trade, investment, and technology exchange, benefiting both regions and driving sustainable development.
  • Forging Strategic Partnerships in a Changing Global Landscape: Amid geopolitical shifts, India and Africa have the chance to strengthen strategic alliances grounded in shared values and interests.
  • By aligning diplomatic efforts and leveraging their collective strengths, both regions can wield greater influence on global issues like climate change, terrorism, and pandemics, fostering a more equitable and inclusive world order.

Conclusion

The multifaceted partnership between India and Africa presents abundant prospects for economic, political, and social collaboration. In India's pursuit of leadership within the Global South, fostering closer ties with African nations emerges as imperative. Amidst the swiftly evolving global landscape, the alignment between India and Africa signifies a potential for mutual prosperity and advancement

Understanding India’s Coal Imports

  • 29 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

In recent years, the combination of unpredictable weather patterns and rapid economic growth has resulted in significant spikes in electricity demand, posing a challenge to reliably meet the escalating requirements.

Background:

  • India has grappled with the looming threat of electricity shortages in recent years, particularly exacerbated by rising temperatures amplifying the power demand.
  • While discussions on this matter typically revolve around the deficit in domestic thermal coal and the need for imports, a more thorough investigation uncovers intricate challenges concerning logistics and regulatory interpretation.
  • Therefore, it is imperative to delve into these dimensions, shedding light on the complexities of the situation and seeking solutions to tackle the root causes.

What are the Primary Causes of Domestic Thermal Coal Shortages?

  • Transportation Infrastructure Deficiencies: A critical challenge lies in the inadequacy of transportation infrastructure, notably the railway network, which predominantly facilitates coal transportation across India.
    • Despite substantial coal production, the limited capacity of railways often hampers timely delivery to power plants, contributing to delays and inefficiencies in the coal supply chain.
  • Geographical Disparities: Complicating matters, the distribution of coal mines and power plants across diverse regions adds another layer of complexity to logistics.
    • Power plants situated far from coal mines encounter heightened logistical hurdles, facing difficulties in securing a consistent coal supply due to increased transportation time and costs.
  • Storage and Handling Limitations: Insufficient storage and handling infrastructure at both mines and power plants exacerbate challenges in managing demand and supply fluctuations.
    • Inadequate storage capacity can lead to stockpiling issues, exacerbating delays and hindering efficient coal delivery.

Balancing Alternative Domestic Sources and Imports:

  • Exploration of Alternative Domestic Sources: While alternative coal sources, like auctions organized by Coal India Ltd., present a viable domestic option, they often receive less attention compared to imports.
    • These auctions enable power plants to procure coal domestically, albeit potentially at higher prices, yet remain overlooked in favor of imported coal.
    • However, auctions offer a feasible alternative, particularly for plants not hindered by logistical constraints in accessing coal from auction sites.
  • Narrow Focus on Imports: The discourse tends to prioritize imports as the default solution for coal shortages, neglecting the potential of domestic alternatives and failing to consider the broader implications of heavy reliance on imported coal.
  • Cost Implications: Importing coal entails additional costs, including transportation, handling, and import duties, resulting in higher variable costs for coal-based electricity.
    • These expenses are often transferred to consumers through elevated electricity tariffs, burdening both households and industries.
  • Regulatory Interpretation: Misinterpretation of Ministry of Power advisories recommending coal imports as mandates further blur the distinction between alternative sources and imports.
    • While these advisories may propose importing a certain percentage of coal, they should not be perceived as obligatory requirements but rather as guidelines to be tailored to each power plant's unique circumstances.
  • Less Emphasis on Domestic Procurement Enhancement: The emphasis on imports sidelines opportunities to improve domestic coal procurement and distribution processes.
    • Addressing logistical hurdles and streamlining administrative procedures could enhance the efficiency and reliability of India's domestic coal supply chain, potentially reducing the reliance on costly imports.

Regulatory Frameworks Influencing Responses to Electricity Shortages and Coal Procurement Strategies:

  • Clarifying Advisory Interpretations: An ongoing challenge in regulatory considerations involves clarifying interpretations of advisories from government entities like the Ministry of Power.
    • While these advisories may offer recommendations for addressing coal shortages, particularly through import suggestions, they should not be misconstrued as mandates.
    • Misinterpretation can lead to unnecessary costs and burdens on consumers, as power plants may feel compelled to comply with import recommendations, disregarding potentially viable domestic alternatives.
  • Forward-Thinking Regulatory Decision-Making: Regulatory bodies overseeing electricity generation and distribution must adopt a forward-thinking approach to decision-making.
    • This entails comprehensive assessments of regulatory measures' implications on stakeholders, including consumers, power producers, and distribution utilities.
    • Analysis should weigh the costs and benefits of various coal procurement strategies, encompassing factors like transportation costs, import duties, and environmental impacts.
  • Customized Approaches for Diverse Plant Settings: Recognizing the varied challenges among power plants regarding coal shortages, regulatory bodies should tailor measures to each plant's specific circumstances.
    • Pit-head plants, closer to coal mines, may have easier access to domestic coal and encounter fewer logistical constraints compared to plants situated farther away, necessitating heavier reliance on imports.
    • Regulatory interventions should thus be nuanced and adaptable rather than uniformly applied.
  • Balancing Cost-Efficiency and Reliability: Regulators face the critical task of balancing cost and reliability in electricity supply.
    • While imports may offer prompt solutions to coal shortages, they incur substantial costs affecting consumers.
    • Therefore, regulators must meticulously evaluate the potential cost savings of domestic procurement against the reliability and security of imported coal supply, ensuring transparency and equity in decision-making.
  • Long-Term Planning and Sustainability Integration: Regulatory considerations should encompass long-term planning and sustainability objectives alongside immediate coal shortage mitigation.
    • While addressing immediate needs is crucial, regulators must also contemplate the broader ramifications of coal procurement strategies on energy security, environmental sustainability, and renewable energy transition.
    • This necessitates a forward-looking approach aligning short-term actions with long-term sustainability objectives, facilitating India's transition to a resilient and sustainable energy framework.

Conclusion

Addressing electricity shortages in India necessitates a nuanced approach that considers both logistical hurdles and regulatory complexities. While importing coal may offer a temporary solution, it does not tackle the fundamental logistics inefficiencies. India can better navigate the challenges of power generation by addressing root causes and implementing tailored solutions, ensuring a more effective response to evolving weather patterns and increasing demand for electricity

TB-Mukt Bharat India's Fight Against Tuberculosis

  • 26 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

Even though World TB Day (March 24) has passed, recognizing the needs and interests of patients and communities must form the basis of disease elimination.

What is Tuberculosis?

  • Tuberculosis (TB) is an airborne bacterial infection caused by a type of bacteria called mycobacterium tuberculosis.
  • The infection primarily attacks our lungs and if not treated early, permanent lung damage can result.
  • Tuberculosis can also spread to other parts of the body such as the intestines, bones and joints, brain, skin, and other tissues of the body.
  • It can be classified into two categories:
    • Active tuberculosis (TB) and
    • Latent tuberculosis (TB).

Causes of Tuberculosis (TB):

  • Mycobacterium tuberculosis usually spreads from person to person through airborne droplets, which are produced when the infected person coughs, sneezes, speaks, or sings.

Signs & symptoms of Tuberculosis (TB):

  • A person with latent Tuberculosis (TB) cannot spread the infection to others as it is not contagious and may not show symptoms because their immune system is protecting them from getting sick.
  • However, latent TB can develop into active TB if that individual’s immune system cannot stop the bacteria from growing and starts showing symptoms such as:
    • Bad cough that lasts for 3 weeks or longer
    • Pain in chest
    • Coughing blood or sputum
    • Fever or night sweats
    • Weight loss or no appetite
    • Chills
    • Weakness

Diagnosis of Tuberculosis (TB):

  • Tuberculosis (TB) can be tested in two ways, namely skin test and blood test.
  • These two tests only tell if a person has TB or not; if the test is positive then other tests are needed to check if it is latent TB or active TB, such as chest X-ray or CT, or acid-fast bacillus tests (sputum tests).

Treatment of Tuberculosis (TB)

  • Both latent TB and active TB can be effectively treated with antibiotics, albeit requiring different durations of treatment.
  • Complete adherence to medication is imperative for curing TB; failure to complete the prescribed course may lead to the recurrence of illness and increased difficulty in recovery.
    • For latent TB, treatment typically involves a course lasting 3-9 months, comprising 1-2 antibiotics.
    • While active TB necessitates a more extensive regimen, with doctors prescribing 2 to 4 or more antibiotics for 6-9 months or longer.
  • Ensuring proper medication adherence is crucial for individuals with latent TB to prevent its progression to active TB.
  • In many cases, significant improvement is observed within weeks of initiating treatment, with the infection becoming non-contagious.
  • Therefore, completing the full course of medication is essential to safeguard oneself and others from tuberculosis.

What is drug-resistant Tuberculosis (TB)?

  • Drug-resistant TB is when the bacteria that causes TB becomes resistant to some or all the medications.
  • Once drug-resistant TB is developed, it is very difficult to treat it.
  • It may require more and different medications with a longer period of treatment.
  • Some injectable drugs can cause loss of hearing and balance problems.

Status of TB in India:

  • India bears approximately 27% of the global burden of tuberculosis (TB), making it the country with the highest TB burden worldwide.
  • Government of India aims to eliminate tuberculosis (TB) by 2025.
  • The theme for World Tuberculosis Day (March 24) in 2024 was the same as in 2023 “Yes, we can end TB”, which reflects the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) to eliminate TB by 2030.

Challenges Confronting India in TB Elimination:

  • Drug-resistant TB Cases: India grapples with a substantial burden of drug-resistant TB, including multidrug-resistant TB (MDR-TB), necessitating more expensive, specialized drugs and prolonged treatment durations.
  • Diagnostics and Case Detection: Accurate and timely TB diagnosis remains a challenge, particularly in areas lacking access to modern diagnostic tools, leading to reliance on older, less reliable methods.
  • Poor Primary Healthcare and Infrastructure: Limited access to healthcare facilities, especially in rural and remote regions, results in delayed diagnosis and treatment, facilitating TB transmission within communities.
  • Stigma and Awareness: Stigma surrounding TB may deter individuals from seeking timely healthcare, while inadequate awareness about the disease perpetuates its prevalence.
  • Private Sector Engagement: With a significant portion of healthcare services provided by the private sector, effective TB control necessitates coordinated efforts and standardized treatment protocols between the public and private sectors.
  • Treatment Adherence: Ensuring patient adherence to the full course of TB treatment, which involves prolonged antibiotic courses, poses a significant challenge.
  • Vulnerable Populations: Certain demographics, such as migrant workers, urban slum dwellers, and individuals residing in overcrowded conditions, face heightened TB risks, requiring targeted interventions.

Initiatives by the Government of India to Eradicate TB:

  • National Tuberculosis Elimination Program (NTEP): A National Strategic Plan (2017-25) aims to eliminate TB from India by 2025.
  • Pradhan Mantri TB Mukt Bharat Abhiyan (PMTBMBA): Introduced in 2022, this initiative provides community support to TB patients, offering nutritional, diagnostic, and vocational assistance.
  • Revised National Tuberculosis Control Program (RNTCP): Launched in 1997, RNTCP has been continuously revised and strengthened to combat TB effectively.
  • Universal Drug Susceptibility Testing (DST): Efforts have been intensified to ensure universal access to drug susceptibility testing, enabling early detection of drug-resistant TB strains for tailored treatment.
  • Ni-kshay Portal: An online platform established to monitor notified TB cases effectively.
  • Introduction of New Drugs: Drugs like Bedaquiline and Delamanid for treating drug-resistant TB are provided free of cost to TB patients.
  • Research and Development (R&D) for Treatment: Studies are ongoing to explore shorter anti-tubercular drug courses, aiming to reduce treatment duration.
  • Vaccine Development: Trials are being conducted to evaluate the effectiveness of vaccines such as Immuvac and VPM1002 in preventing TB, offering promising avenues for future TB prevention strategies.

Global Efforts to Eradicate TB:

  • End TB Strategy: spearheaded by the World Health Organization (WHO), it provides a roadmap for countries to reduce TB incidence by 80%, and TB deaths by 90%, and eliminate catastrophic costs for TB-affected households by 2030.
  • World Development Report (1993): Published by WHO, it highlighted TB treatment for adults as the most cost-effective among all developmental interventions.
  • The Global Fund: a global initiative aimed at defeating HIV, TB, and malaria, striving for a healthier, safer, and more equitable future worldwide.
  • The Stop TB Partnership: a collaborative effort involving expertise from diverse country, regional, and global partners, dedicated to transforming the TB landscape and achieving the goal of ending TB by 2030.
  • Sustainable Development Goal 3: part of the United Nations' Sustainable Development Goals, it targets to end the TB epidemic by 2030, reflecting a commitment to global health and well-being.

Way Forward:

  • Development and Widespread Adoption of an Adult TB Vaccine: Prioritizing the research and development of an effective vaccine against TB for adults.
    • Ensuring widespread distribution and utilization of the vaccine to bolster TB prevention efforts globally.
  • Cost Reduction of Anti-TB Drugs: Implementing strategies to lower the production costs of essential anti-TB medications.
    • Making these drugs more accessible and affordable to all individuals in need, regardless of economic status.
  • Innovation in TB Treatment: Investing in research and development to create injection-free and orally-administered TB medications.
    • Expanding treatment options to enhance patient compliance and improve treatment outcomes.
  • Integration of AI-Assisted Radiology: Leveraging artificial intelligence (AI) technology to facilitate rapid and accurate TB diagnosis.
    • Promoting the use of handheld radiology devices equipped with AI algorithms, allowing for quick TB detection with high accuracy rates, thereby streamlining diagnostic processes and improving patient care.

Many elections, AI’s dark dimension

  • 18 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

With a series of elections to be held across the world in 2024, the potential of AI to disrupt democracies cannot be dismissed.

Context:

  • The rapid advancement of Artificial Intelligence (AI) marks a significant turning point in human history.
  • With the rise of Generative AI (GAI), the possibility of achieving Artificial General Intelligence (AGI) becomes increasingly feasible, raising questions about its potential to mimic human abilities.
  • Thus, exploring AI's profound influence on human life, particularly within electoral contexts and broader societal realms, is imperative.

What is Generative AI (GAI)?

  • Generative AI, short for Generative Artificial Intelligence, represents a branch of artificial intelligence focused on creating new content rather than simply processing or analyzing existing data.
    • Unlike traditional AI systems, which are designed to recognize patterns or make predictions based on historical data, generative AI models have the capability to generate new data that resembles real-world examples.
  • These models work by learning patterns and structures from large datasets and then using that knowledge to create new content.
    • They can produce various types of content, including images, text, audio, and even video.
      • For example, a generative AI model trained on a dataset of human faces can generate realistic-looking images of faces that have never existed before.
  • One of the key technologies behind generative AI is deep learning, particularly a type of neural network called a generative adversarial network (GAN).
    • In a GAN, two neural networks are pitted against each other: a generator and a discriminator.
    • The generator creates new data samples, while the discriminator tries to distinguish between real and fake data.
    • Through this adversarial process, the generator learns to produce increasingly realistic content.
  • Generative AI has a wide range of applications across various industries.
    • In the field of art and design, it can be used to generate new artwork, music, or even fashion designs.
    • In entertainment, it can create realistic characters and environments for video games and movies.
    • In healthcare, it can generate synthetic medical images for training diagnostic algorithms.
  • However, the technology also raises ethical concerns, such as the potential for misuse, copyright issues, and the creation of fake content.

The Role of Artificial Intelligence (AI) in Shaping Electoral Landscapes:

  • A Transformative Influence- AI's Ascendancy in Politics: The integration of artificial intelligence (AI) into electoral processes represents a profound transformation in global political dynamics.
    • As nations gear up for elections, the incorporation of AI technologies introduces new variables that require a reassessment of conventional campaign methodologies and voter outreach strategies.
    • In the context of upcoming elections, including India's extensive seven-phase general election, AI emerges as a decisive factor influencing electoral trajectories.
    • The deployment of Generative AI, with its ability to conduct dynamic simulations and replicate real-world interactions, presents unprecedented opportunities and challenges for political stakeholders and the electorate.
  • Harnessing AI for Campaign Innovation and Voter Engagement: Political entities and candidates are leveraging AI-driven tools to analyze vast datasets, craft targeted messaging, and optimize campaign blueprints.
    • AI-powered predictive analytics empower parties to pinpoint swing voters, tailor messages to specific demographics, and deploy resources more precisely.
    • Additionally, AI-enabled sentiment analysis of social media platforms furnishes real-time insights into voter attitudes and emerging concerns, informing campaign narratives and responsiveness strategies.
    • Moreover, AI's impact extends beyond campaign frameworks to encompass voter engagement and mobilization endeavors.
    • Through AI-driven chatbots, personalized interactions with voters are facilitated, addressing inquiries, disseminating information, and fostering voter participation.

What are the Concerns Regarding AI's Impact on Electoral Integrity?

  • Challenges Posed by Deep Fakes: The expanding presence of AI within electoral arenas prompts apprehensions regarding its implications for democratic processes and the integrity of elections.
    • The emergence of 'Deep Fake' technology, capable of generating convincingly realistic yet fabricated audio, video, and textual materials, presents a formidable obstacle in identifying and combatting misinformation and disinformation campaigns.
    • Deep fakes produced by AI possess the capacity to deceive voters, manipulate public opinion, and erode trust in democratic institutions, thus distorting the integrity of electoral outcomes.
  • Impact on Public Discourse and Decision-making: Moreover, the utilization of AI-powered algorithms in social media platforms for content curation and recommendation purposes raises concerns regarding filter bubbles, echo chambers, and algorithmic bias.
    • These algorithms, driven by AI, may inadvertently amplify divisive content, perpetuate existing biases, and contribute to the segmentation of public discourse, consequently influencing voter perceptions and decision-making processes.

What are AI Influences its challenges, and Mitigation Strategies?

  • As artificial intelligence (AI) permeates various spheres of society, including electoral contexts, addressing the concept of AI influence becomes increasingly critical.
  • AI influence refers to the ability of AI-driven tactics to shape human behavior and decision-making processes, often without individuals' explicit awareness or consent.
  • Challenges in Addressing AI Influence: A primary challenge in addressing AI influence is mitigating its impact on electoral dynamics.
    • AI-powered algorithms can analyze extensive data sets to predict and influence voter behavior, potentially affecting electoral outcomes in ways that may not align with democratic principles or voter preferences.
    • To counter this, safeguards must be implemented to prevent undue AI-driven influence on electoral processes and outcomes.
  • Promoting Transparency and Accountability: Transparency and accountability are crucial in addressing AI influence.
    • Electoral authorities and policymakers should establish clear guidelines and regulations governing the use of AI in political campaigns and voter engagement efforts.
    • This includes mandates for disclosing the use of AI-driven algorithms, data sources, and methodologies in campaign strategies, enhancing public awareness and understanding of AI's role in elections.
  • Protecting Democratic Values: Efforts to combat AI influence should prioritize safeguarding democratic values and electoral integrity.
    • Measures must be implemented to detect and mitigate AI-driven manipulation, such as disinformation campaigns, deep fakes, and algorithmic bias.
    • Collaborative approaches involving electoral authorities, technology firms, civil society organizations, and academia are essential to develop effective tools and techniques for detecting and countering AI-driven threats to electoral integrity.
  • Empowering Voter Literacy: Promoting media literacy and digital literacy among voters is crucial for combating AI influence.
    • By equipping voters with the skills to critically evaluate information sources, distinguish fact from fiction, and identify manipulation tactics, individuals can resist the influence of AI-driven propaganda and make informed voting decisions.
    • Educational initiatives, public awareness campaigns, and media literacy programs are vital for enhancing voter resilience against AI-driven misinformation and manipulation.

Additional Measures for Ensuring Electoral Integrity:

  • Incorporating Ethical Guidelines into AI Governance: Furthermore, the ethical dimensions of AI governance should inform the development and application of AI technologies within electoral contexts.
    • Ethical AI governance frameworks should prioritize principles such as fairness, transparency, accountability, and adherence to democratic values.
    • This entails conducting comprehensive risk assessments, ensuring transparency and explainability in algorithms, and establishing mechanisms for independent oversight and accountability.
  • Adopting Proactive Strategies: Policymakers, electoral authorities, and civil society actors should embrace proactive strategies to uphold electoral integrity and democratic principles in the age of AI.
    • Implementing robust regulatory frameworks, transparency mandates, and oversight mechanisms is crucial for mitigating the risks associated with AI-driven manipulation and disinformation campaigns.
    • Furthermore, investments in digital literacy initiatives and media literacy programs can empower voters to critically assess information sources, distinguish between fact and fiction, and resist manipulation efforts.

Way Forward:

  • The risks associated with AI pose a substantial threat, surpassing concerns regarding biases in its design and development.
  • AI systems inherently tend to manifest adversarial traits, for which effective mitigation strategies have yet to be fully realized.
  • Beyond electoral implications, India's position as a digital frontrunner necessitates a cautious approach towards AI adoption, recognizing both its potential advantages and disruptive capabilities.
  • While AI offers numerous benefits, it is imperative for the nation and its leaders to acknowledge its potential for malevolence.
  • India's prominence in digital innovation presents both opportunities and challenges, as the advancement of AI, including AGI, brings both advantages and risks.
  • Addressing the complexities of AI policy requires amplifying democratic voices and resisting the tendency to cede policymaking authority to a select few tech conglomerates.

Conclusion

The emergence of AI marks a significant milestone in human evolution, impacting electoral dynamics and social harmony in profound ways. While AI offers remarkable progress, it demands careful oversight to minimize its disruptive effects and uphold democratic values. As we venture into the realm of AI, wise decision-making and forward-thinking are essential to steer toward a future characterized by ethical AI governance and conscientious innovation.

Model Code of Conduct comes into force: Lok Sabha Elections 2024

  • 16 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

Recently, the Election Commission of India (ECI) announced that the country would vote in seven phases from April 19 to June 1 and the results will be announced on June 4. With this, the Model Code of Conduct (MCC) comes into effect.

What is the Model Code of Conduct (MCC)?

  • The Model Code of Conduct (MCC) is a set of guidelines published by the Election Commission of India (EC) for political parties and candidates to set standards of conduct during the election campaign and polling.
  • It also explains how parties can lodge complaints to the EC observers in case of dispute and instructs how the Ministers of the parties in power must conduct themselves when the MCC is in force.
  • In 2019, a new addition regarding election manifestos was added, instructing parties to not issue promises which were ‘repugnant to the ideals of the Constitution’.

Is the Model Code of Conduct (MCC) Legally Binding?

  • The MCC evolved as part of the ECI’s drive to ensure free and fair elections and was the result of a consensus among major political parties.
    • It has no statutory backing.
    • Simply put, this means anybody breaching the MCC can’t be proceeded against under any clause of the Code.
    • Everything is voluntary.
    • The EC uses moral sanction or censure for its enforcement.
  • The ECI can issue a notice to a politician or a party for an alleged breach of the MCC either on its own or based on a complaint by another party or individual.
    • Once a notice is issued, the person or party must reply in writing, either accepting fault and tendering an unconditional apology or rebutting the allegation.
    • In the latter case, if the person or party is found guilty subsequently, he/she can attract a written censure from the ECI, something that many see as a mere slap on the wrist.
  • However, several actions are listed as ‘electoral offenses’ and ‘corrupt practices’ under the Indian Penal Code (now known as Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita) and the Representation of the People Act, 1951 such as:
    • Causing tension between castes, religious or linguistic communities
    • Appealing to caste or communal feeling to secure votes
    • Using places of worship for election propaganda
    • Bribing/intimidating/impersonating voters
    • Canvassing within 100 meters of polling booths
    • Transporting voters to and from polling stations
    • Disrupting public meetings
    • Serving or distributing liquor on polling day
    • Holding public meetings 48 hours before the closing of polls
  • These actions will attract appropriate punishment as per these laws.

Previous Model Code of Conduct ‘Violations’:

  • During the 2023 Madhya Pradesh Assembly elections, Priyanka Gandhi Vadra was questioned by the ECI for alleging that Prime Minister Narendra Modi favored his "big industrialist friends" during an election rally.
  • In 2017, both BJP and Congress accused each other of violating the MCC during the Gujarat polls.
  • In 2014, Amit Shah and Azam Khan were banned from campaigning by the ECI during the Lok Sabha polls under Article 324 of the Constitution for inflammatory speeches, which was lifted after they apologized and pledged to follow the Code.

When Does MCC Come Into Force and End?

  • The MCC comes into force immediately when the election schedule is announced by the Election Commission and remains in operation till the election process is complete, i.e. results are announced.
  • The MCC applies to all elections to the Lok Sabha and State Assemblies.
  • It is also applicable for State Legislative Council elections from Local Bodies, and Graduates’ and Teachers’ Constituencies.
  • It is enforced throughout India in case of General elections, and the State up for polls in case of Legislative Assembly elections.

Who Is Bound by It?

  • All organizations, committees, corporations, and commissions (e.g. Transport authorities, Jal boards) funded wholly or partially by the Centre or State are bound by the MCC.
  • While listed political parties and candidates are bound to follow the MCC, even non-political organizations that hold campaigns favoring a political party or candidate are bound to follow specific guidelines mentioned by the EC.

How is the MCC Enforced?

  • Before holding polls for the General or State Assembly elections, the Election Commission issues guidelines to the government to shift out all officers including police who are posted in their home district, and who have completed/completed three out of four years in that district to ensure no interference.
  • The MCC is then implemented by the newly appointed officials and nodal EC officers monitor compliance.
  • No election campaigning is allowed within the constituency 48 hours before the close of polls.

What Restrictions Does the Model Code of Conduct Impose?

  • The MCC contains eight provisions dealing with general conduct, meetings, processions, polling day, polling booths, observers, the party in power, and election manifestos.
  • As soon as the code kicks in, the party in power, whether at the Centre or in the states, should ensure that it does not use its official position for campaigning.
    • Hence, no policy, project, or scheme can be announced that can influence voting behavior.
  • The party must also avoid advertising at the cost of the public exchequer or using official mass media for publicity on achievements to improve chances of victory in the elections.
  • The code also says the ministers must not combine official visits with election work or use official machinery for the same.
  • The ruling party cannot use government transport or machinery for campaigning.
  • It should also ensure that public places such as maidans etc., for holding election meetings, and facilities like the use of helipads are provided to the opposition parties on the same terms and conditions on which they are used by the party in power.
  • The issue of advertisement at the cost of the public exchequer in the newspapers and other media is also considered an offense.
  • The ruling government cannot make any ad-hoc appointments in government, public sector undertakings, etc., which may influence the voters.
  • Political parties or candidates can be criticized based only on their work record and no caste and communal sentiments can be used to lure voters.
  • Mosques, Churches, Temples, or any other places of worship should not be used for election campaigns.
  • Bribing, intimidating, or impersonation of voters is also barred.
  • Holding public meetings during the 48 hours before the hour fixed for the closing of the poll is also prohibited.
    • The 48 hours is known as “election silence”.
    • The idea is to allow a voter a campaign-free environment to reflect on events before casting her vote.

What are the Guidelines for Poll Manifestos?

  • Manifestos must not contain anything repugnant to the ideals enshrined in the Constitution.
  • They must reflect the rationale for welfare scheme promises and indicate ways to meet the financial requirements for it.
  • The manifesto documents must not be released during the prohibitory period (when MCC kicks in).

How are Violations Dealt With?

  • Any complaint regarding elections should be brought to EC observers, the Returning Officer, the local magistrate, the Chief Electoral Officer, or the Election Commission itself.
  • In response, any directions issued by the EC, Returning Officer, or District Election Officer shall be strictly complied with.

In issuing AI advisory, MEITY becomes a deity

  • 15 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

The Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology (MeitY) reportedly issued an advisory on 1 March 2024 (Advisory) to “intermediaries” and “platforms” hosting artificial Intelligence (AI) including generative AI-based models.

Context:

  • The Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology (MEITY), previously recognized as the Department of Electronics and IT (DEITY), has come under scrutiny regarding its endeavors to govern technology and the Internet.
  • It is imperative to examine MEITY's recent advisory regarding generative Artificial Intelligence (AI), exploring its legal foundation, uncertainties, and repercussions for technology regulation in India.

What is the Recent Advisory by MEITY on AI Regulation?

  • Regarding the Regulation of AI Technologies: The advisory urges tech firms to ensure that their AI models, including Large Language Models (LLMs) and Generative AI, prevent users from hosting or displaying unlawful content, addressing concerns about potential misuse.
  • Quality Assurance and Testing: It stresses the use of reliable and tested AI models while cautioning against deploying under-tested or unreliable ones without explicit permission from the Government of India, aiming to uphold quality standards and mitigate associated risks.
  • Advisory on Transparency and Accountability: The advisory highlights the importance of transparency and accountability in AI deployment, recommending appropriate labeling of AI models to acknowledge potential fallibility or unreliability, reflecting a broader commitment to ethical AI practices and user awareness of associated limitations and risks.

Analysis of Ambiguity Regarding the Legal Status of Government Advisory:

  • Lack of Statutory Authority: The uncertainty surrounding the legal status of MEITY's advisories is a key issue in assessing the government's regulatory power and its impact on stakeholders.
    • Unlike established regulatory bodies such as SEBI, MEITY lacks explicit statutory powers to issue binding directives or advisories.
    • This absence of a specific legal framework leads to interpretation challenges and questions about the enforceability of MEITY's directives.
  • Uncertainty on MEITY’s Advisory Power: The IT Act of 2000, which primarily governs technology regulation in India, does not grant MEITY the authority to issue advisories on emerging technologies like AI.
    • While the IT Act addresses electronic records, digital signatures, and cybersecurity, it does not specify MEITY's mandate to regulate AI or other technological advancements.
  • Lack of Defined Terms and References: The term "advisory" lacks a precise definition under the IT Act or other relevant legislation, allowing MEITY to issue directives that carry the weight of official recommendations without a clear legal foundation.
    • This ambiguity leaves stakeholders, including technology firms and legal experts, uncertain about the legal consequences of non-compliance with MEITY's advisories.
    • Furthermore, MEITY's advisories often lack explicit citations of legal authority or references to specific legislative provisions, contributing to perceptions of arbitrary regulatory actions.
  • Compliance Challenges: In the absence of clear penalties or enforcement mechanisms tied to MEITY's advisories, compliance becomes discretionary rather than obligatory.
    • This situation underscores the ambiguity surrounding the legal standing of MEITY's regulatory directives, raising concerns about accountability and procedural fairness in technology regulation.

Additional Concerns Regarding Government’s Advisory on AI:

  • Transparency Issues and Hasty Policymaking: MEITY's advisories, particularly those related to AI regulation, exhibit a pattern of expedited policymaking driven by media events, lacking thorough evaluation or stakeholder input.
    • Released with limited transparency, these advisories fail to provide comprehensive information, undermining the credibility of MEITY's regulatory decisions.
  • Ambiguous Terminology and Ministerial Clarifications: The recent AI advisory introduces vague terms like "bias prevention" and proposes an AI model licensing system without clear definitions or legal framework.
    • Ministerial clarifications on social media platforms add to the confusion, leaving terms undefined and enforcement mechanisms uncertain.
    • This ambiguity contributes to stakeholder uncertainty and undermines legal clarity.
  • The decline in Administrative Standards and Overreach: MEITY's reliance on advisory regulations marks a decline in administrative standards, sidestepping formal legislative processes and stakeholder consultations.
    • The extension of IT Rules, 2021, to regulate digital content further illustrates regulatory overreach.
    • Additionally, the influence of social media metrics on policy decisions reflects a departure from deliberative governance.
  • Threat to Freedom of Expression: MEITY's regulatory actions, including AI governance advisories and social media content moderation directives, risk infringing on online freedom of expression.
    • The vague and arbitrary nature of these directives may lead to self-censorship among individuals and organizations, fearing repercussions for expressing dissent or challenging government policies.
    • This suppression of free speech undermines democratic discourse and diversity in the digital realm.
  • Expansion of Surveillance and Control Measures: Digital authoritarianism often entails expanding state surveillance and control over online activities.
    • MEITY's regulatory efforts, such as implementing IT Rules, 2021, and proposing AI governance measures, could facilitate heightened government surveillance and online content censorship.
    • This erosion of digital privacy rights jeopardizes individual autonomy and fosters a climate of apprehension and self-censorship among internet users.
  • Impact on Innovation and Technological Advancement: MEITY's regulatory overreach and legal ambiguity pose substantial obstacles to innovation and technological progress in India.
    • Uncertainty surrounding compliance obligations and enforcement mechanisms discourages investment and innovation in emerging fields like AI.
    • Moreover, burdensome regulatory requirements may stifle entrepreneurship and impede the growth of India's technology sector.

Why Regulate the AI Sector?

  • The regulation of Artificial Intelligence (AI) represents an evolving landscape as governments navigate the potential benefits and pitfalls of this influential technology.

Reasons for Regulation:

  • Risk Management: AI carries the potential for bias, discrimination, privacy breaches, and safety concerns. Regulations serve to mitigate these risks effectively.
  • Transparency and Understandability: Many AI systems operate opaquely, complicating comprehension of their decision-making processes. Regulations can foster transparency and clarity.
  • Establishing Accountability: Regulatory frameworks can delineate clear lines of responsibility for the creation, deployment, and utilization of AI systems.
  • Building Public Confidence: Well-defined regulations can instill public confidence in AI technologies, promoting their conscientious development and application.

Way Forward:

  • Unified Effort: Combating the challenges posed by digital authoritarianism demands a unified effort to uphold democratic principles, foster transparency and accountability, and protect fundamental rights in the digital realm.
  • Scrutiny of MEITY’s Regulatory Measures: MEITY's regulatory initiatives must undergo thorough scrutiny and oversight to ensure alignment with democratic norms and respect for individual liberties.

Conclusion

MEITY's advisory regulations raise pertinent questions regarding its legal jurisdiction, transparency, and impact on technological advancement in India. The ambiguity in terminology, swift policy formulation, and reliance on social media for dissemination weaken the credibility and efficacy of regulatory measures. Addressing these concerns necessitates a reassessment of MEITY's regulatory strategy and a commitment to transparent, inclusive governance practices.

 

CAA Rules go against equality, federalism and India’s Constitution

  • 13 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

Although protecting persecuted individuals is commendable, the ideal solution is to grant refugee status to all, irrespective of their religious affiliation.

Context:

  • India has been engaged in heated discussions over the Citizenship Amendment Act (CAA) since its inception in 2019.
  • The recent issuance of Rules under the CAA by the Union government has sparked renewed debates concerning its impact on India's constitutional secularism.
  • Amid these discussions, it is crucial to assess the CAA's provisions, their effects on citizenship, and the wider socio-political consequences they carry.

Concerns Surrounding the Citizenship Amendment Act:

  • Selective Approach to Citizenship: The Citizenship Amendment Act (CAA) of 2019 amends India's Citizenship Act of 1955 and introduces a selective approach to granting citizenship.
    • This selective approach is a significant point of contention, as it differentiates between individuals based on their religious identity.
  • Preferential Treatment for Certain Religious Groups: The CAA expedites the citizenship process for undocumented immigrants belonging to Hindu, Sikh, Buddhist, Jain, Parsi, and Christian communities from Pakistan, Afghanistan, and Bangladesh.
    • However, the Act explicitly excludes Muslims from these provisions, which has led to considerable debate and criticism.
  • Violation of Secular Principles: Critics argue that the CAA violates the secular principles enshrined in India's Constitution.
    • Secularism, a foundational tenet of India's democratic ethos, mandates that the state remain neutral in matters of religion and guarantee equal rights and protections to all citizens, regardless of their faith.
  • Discriminatory Nature: The CAA's exclusion of Muslims from its purview has been perceived as discriminatory and runs counter to India's historical commitment to religious pluralism and tolerance.
    • This discriminatory nature has sparked widespread protests and highlighted deep divisions within Indian society regarding citizenship, identity, and secularism.
  • Upholding Constitutional Principles: The protests against the CAA underscore the importance of upholding constitutional principles and safeguarding the rights of all citizens, irrespective of their religious affiliation.
    • This controversy serves as a reminder of the need for inclusive and non-discriminatory policies that respect the diversity of India's population.

Potential Implications of the Notified Rules under the Citizenship Amendment Act:

  • Streamlined Citizenship Process: The notified Rules streamline the citizenship application process by providing clear procedures and documentation requirements.
    • This standardization can potentially expedite the citizenship-granting process, allowing eligible individuals to secure legal status more efficiently.
  • Lenient Proof Requirements: The Rules offer leniency in requirements for proof of nationality and residence, accepting various documents as evidence.
    • This flexibility may enable more individuals to establish their eligibility for citizenship under the CAA.
  • Centralisation of Authority: The notified Rules centralize the citizenship-granting process at the national level, with an empowered committee formed by the Union government now responsible for processing applications.
    • This centralisation consolidates power at the national level, potentially reducing the role of local authorities in decision-making and grassroots-level accountability.
  • Legal and Constitutional Challenges: The Rules are likely to face legal and constitutional challenges, particularly regarding their compatibility with India's constitutional principles and international legal standards.
    • Critics argue that the CAA and its accompanying Rules violate the constitutional guarantee of equality before the law (Article 14) by discriminating based on religion.
  • Contradictions and Regional Discontent: The implementation of the CAA has exposed internal contradictions within India's citizenship laws, particularly in the case of Assam.
    • The discrepancy between Section 6A of the Citizenship Act, 1955, and the provisions of the CAA has fuelled discontent among local communities and complicated the citizenship landscape.
  • Overall, the notified Rules under the Citizenship Amendment Act have significant implications for the citizenship-granting process, the balance of power between national and local authorities, and the interpretation of constitutional principles.
  • As the legal and societal debates surrounding the CAA continue, these implications will likely shape the discourse on citizenship and belonging in India.

Moving Toward Inclusive Solutions: Addressing the Concerns Raised by the Citizenship Amendment Act:

  • To address the concerns raised by the Citizenship Amendment Act (CAA) and its accompanying Rules, it is crucial to adopt a more inclusive approach that aligns with international humanitarian norms and India's commitment to secularism.

Here are some steps that can be taken:

  • Inclusive Protection for Persecuted Individuals: Instead of granting citizenship based on religious affiliation, India should consider offering refugee status to all persecuted individuals, regardless of their religion.
    • This approach would be in line with international humanitarian norms and would uphold the principle of secularism enshrined in India's Constitution.
  • Ratification of International Conventions: Ratifying international conventions such as the Geneva Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees would demonstrate India's commitment to protecting vulnerable populations and ensuring their rights.
    • This step would also bring India in line with global standards for refugee protection.
  • Reevaluation of the Citizenship Amendment Act: Given the concerns surrounding the CAA's compatibility with constitutional principles and its potential for discrimination, it is essential to reevaluate the Act's provisions.
    • This process should involve a thorough examination of the CAA's impact on vulnerable communities and its alignment with India's democratic values.
  • Upholding Constitutional Values: To ensure that the CAA and other legislation adhere to India's core values, it is crucial to reaffirm the principles of equality, non-discrimination, and secularism as outlined in the Constitution.
    • Policies and laws should be crafted to uphold these principles and protect the rights of all individuals, irrespective of their religious affiliation.
  • By taking these steps, India can work toward addressing the concerns raised by the Citizenship Amendment Act and foster a more inclusive approach to citizenship that aligns with the nation's historical commitment to diversity and pluralism.

Centre notifies implementation of Citizenship Amendment Act Rules

  • 12 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

More than four years after Parliament passed The Citizenship (Amendment) Act, 2019, the Ministry of Home Affairs on Monday notified the Rules to implement the law.

Context:

  • The Citizenship Amendment Act (CAA) of 2019 amended the Citizenship Act of 1955 to provide a pathway to Indian citizenship for migrants belonging to Hindu, Sikh, Buddhist, Jain, Parsi, or Christian communities who entered India before December 31, 2014, from Pakistan, Afghanistan, or Bangladesh.
  • The law was enacted amidst nationwide protests, particularly in Assam, and was officially notified on January 10, 2020.
  • However, the implementation of the CAA was delayed due to the absence of accompanying rules and regulations.
    • To address this issue, the Union government issued an order on May 28, 2021, empowering district collectors in 13 districts with significant migrant populations to accept citizenship applications from the groups specified in the 2019 amendment.
  • The CAA has been a subject of controversy and criticism, with opponents arguing that it violates the secular principles of the Indian constitution by excluding Muslims from its purview.
  • Supporters of the law contend that it offers relief to persecuted minorities from neighboring countries.
  • As the rules for the CAA have now been put in place, its implementation is anticipated to be a significant development in the ongoing discussions surrounding citizenship and immigration in India.

About the Citizenship (Amendment) Act (CAA) 2019:

  • The Citizenship (Amendment) Act (CAA) of 2019 is a significant amendment to India's Citizenship Act of 1955.
    • It aims to provide a pathway to citizenship for Hindu, Sikh, Parsi, Buddhist, Jain, and Christian immigrants from Pakistan, Afghanistan, and Bangladesh who have faced religious persecution and have been residing in India without documentation.
  • The CAA reduces the residency requirement for citizenship from 11 years to 5 years for eligible immigrants who entered India before December 31, 2014.
    • The Act also includes provisions for the cancellation of Overseas Citizen of India (OCI) registration in cases where the individual has violated any provision of the Citizenship Act or other applicable laws.
  • The CAA applies to individuals who have been compelled to seek shelter in India due to religious persecution.
    • However, the Act does not apply to certain areas, such as regions covered by the Sixth Schedule of the Indian Constitution (which deals with autonomous tribal-dominated regions in Assam, Meghalaya, Tripura, and Mizoram) and states with an inner-line permit regime (Arunachal Pradesh, Nagaland, and Mizoram).
  • The implementation of the CAA has faced delays due to opposition in several states, including Assam and Tripura.
    • The Act has sparked protests and legal challenges, with critics arguing that it violates the secular principles of the Indian Constitution and excludes certain persecuted groups, such as the Rohingya from Myanmar, Tibetan Buddhists from China, and Tamils from Sri Lanka.
  • The CAA has been a subject of intense debate, with supporters claiming it offers relief to persecuted minorities and opponents asserting that it discriminates against Muslims and undermines India's secular fabric.
    • The Supreme Court is currently considering multiple petitions challenging the constitutional validity of the CAA.

Citizenship Amendment Rules, 2024:

  • The Citizenship Amendment Rules, 2024 lay out a clear process for eligible refugees from Pakistan, Afghanistan, and Bangladesh to seek Indian citizenship through registration or naturalization.
    • The process begins with the submission of an application, along with an affidavit confirming the accuracy of the information provided and an affidavit from an Indian citizen vouching for the applicant's character.
  • Applicants must also provide a declaration of their familiarity with one of the languages listed in the Eighth Schedule of the Indian Constitution.
    • The application is to be submitted electronically to an empowered committee via a district-level committee, as notified by the central government.
    • The district-level committee, headed by a designated officer, is responsible for verifying the submitted documents and administering the oath of allegiance to the applicant.
  • Supporting documents that must be provided by applicants include:
    • A passport issued by the governments of Pakistan, Afghanistan, or Bangladesh
    • A birth certificate
    • Any form of identity document
    • Land or tenancy records; or any document proving that the applicant's parents, grandparents, or great-grandparents were citizens of one of the three countries.
      • These documents remain valid even beyond their expiration dates.
  • Proof of entry into India before December 31, 2014, is also required.
    • Acceptable supporting documents for this include:
    •  visa and immigration stamp
    • A registration certificate from the Foreigners Regional Registration Officer (FRRO)
    • A slip issued by the Census enumerators in India
    • A government-issued license or certificate
    • A permit in India (including a driving license
    • Aadhaar number, or ration card), or a marriage certificate issued in India.
  • Once an application is approved, the applicants will be issued a digital certificate, granting them Indian citizenship.
    • These rules provide a structured pathway for eligible refugees from the specified countries to obtain citizenship in India, offering them a chance at a new beginning and a sense of belonging in their adopted homeland.

The Mains issues and challenges associated with the CAA of 2019:

  • Legal challenge: The CAA has been challenged in the Supreme Court by the Indian Union Muslim League (IUML) and others on the grounds of discrimination and violation of fundamental rights.
  • Right to equality: Critics argue that using religion as a criterion for citizenship eligibility violates Article 14 of the Constitution, which guarantees equality before the law and equal protection under the law.
  • Targeting of Muslims: Concerns have been raised that the CAA, in conjunction with the National Register of Citizens (NRC) in Assam, may disproportionately affect Muslims and lead to their exclusion from citizenship.
  • Secularism: The use of religion as a basis for citizenship is seen by some as a violation of the principle of secularism, which is a fundamental feature of the Indian Constitution.
  • Conflict with Assam Accord: The CAA's cutoff date for determining citizenship contradicts the Assam Accord of 1985, which set a different date for identifying foreigners in the state, leading to protests and opposition in Assam and other northeastern states.
  • Widespread protests: The CAA has sparked protests across India, reflecting the complexities and sensitivities surrounding the issue of citizenship and the challenge of balancing the needs of persecuted minorities with upholding constitutional principles and addressing regional concerns.

What is the Government’s Stand?

  • The government's position on the Citizenship Amendment Act (CAA) is that Muslims have been excluded from the list of "persecuted" minorities because they constitute the majority in the Islamic countries of Pakistan, Afghanistan, and Bangladesh.
    • According to the government, the CAA aims to provide citizenship to those who have faced religious persecution in these countries.
  • However, this rationale is subject to scrutiny, as there are other persecuted minorities in these countries and elsewhere who have not been included in the CAA.
    • For instance, Tamil Hindus in Sri Lanka, Rohingya Muslims in Myanmar, and minority Muslim sects like Ahmadiyyas and Hazaras in Pakistan and Afghanistan also face persecution in their respective countries.
  • The exclusion of these groups from the CAA raises questions about the criteria used to determine which minorities are considered persecuted and eligible for Indian citizenship under the Act.

What’s Next?

  • The court will have to look into two issues:
    • Whether the special treatment given to the so-called “persecuted minorities” from the three Muslim-majority neighboring countries only is a reasonable classification under Article 14 of the constitution for granting citizenship, and
    • Whether the state is discriminating against Muslims by excluding them.
  • The Supreme Court has earlier held that the law has to clear two legal hoops to pass the equality test when it is challenged on the grounds of Article 14.
    • First, any differentiation between groups of persons must be founded on an “intelligible differentia”, and
    • Second, “that differentia must have a rational nexus to the object sought to be achieved by the Act”.
  • The SC can strike down a classification if it is found to be arbitrary. The court recently struck down the electoral bonds scheme on the ground that it was “manifestly arbitrary” — that is, “irrational, capricious or without an adequate determining principle”.

Voters must know who funds political parties. This is the right that Supreme Court has protected

  • 11 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

The Supreme Court of India has recently mandated the public disclosure of all pertinent information regarding corporate funding of political parties, with the State Bank of India and other entities directed to comply with the court's directive.

Context:

  • The recent landmark ruling by the Supreme Court's Constitution Bench, led by the Chief Justice of India, represents a pivotal moment in Indian democracy.
  • This ruling specifically addresses the legality of the Electoral Bond Scheme (EBS) initiated through the Finance Act of 2017.
  • Beyond its immediate implications, the verdict underscores fundamental principles such as equality, transparency, and proportionality concerning corporate contributions to election funding.

What is the Supreme Court verdict on the Electoral Bond Scheme?

  • Nullification of Electoral Bond Scheme: The Supreme Court declared the Electoral Bond Scheme (EBS) unconstitutional, citing concerns over unrestricted donations, anonymity of contributions via promissory notes, and exemption of corporate donors from disclosure obligations.
    • This underscores the imperative of transparency in corporate election financing, aligning with constitutional rights outlined in Article 14 (equality) and Article 19(1)(a) (right to information).
  • Immediate Cessation of Electoral Bonds and Disclosure Mandates: The Court mandated the immediate cessation of electoral bonds and directed all pertinent authorities to disclose relevant information dating back to April 12, 2019.
    • The State Bank of India's request for an extension was met with skepticism, prompting a contempt petition against them for non-compliance.
  • Guidelines on Legislative Passage via Money Bill Route: While the verdict didn't specifically address the Speaker's authority to classify bills as money bills, it offered guidance suggesting that not all legislative determinations qualify as financial or economic decisions.
    • This challenges the presumption of constitutionality and underscores the need for a nuanced approach in evaluating bills passed via the money bill route.

What is the Reason Behind SC's Scrutiny of Electoral Bond Scheme (EBS)?

  • Elimination of Donation Caps: The court closely examined the EBS due to its elimination of donation caps imposed on political parties, as outlined in the Finance Act 2017.
    • This removal of restrictions allowed for unrestricted inflow of funds into electoral campaigns, posing a potential threat to the democratic principle of a level playing field.
  • Anonymity of Donations via Promissory Notes: An area of concern highlighted by the court was the provision in the EBS allowing for anonymous donations to political parties through promissory notes issued by recognised banks.
    • This mechanism raised significant issues regarding transparency and accountability, as it enabled substantial financial backing to political entities without disclosing the identity of the contributors.
  • Exemption of Corporate Donors from Disclosure Requirements: The EBS faced scrutiny for exempting corporate donors from the obligation to disclose their contributions in balance sheets, a highly contentious feature.
    • This exemption created opacity surrounding corporate funding of political parties, undermining the transparency necessary for a robust democratic process.

SC’s Analysis of the Proportionality Doctrine: Its Implications on Legislative Goals and the Restriction of FR

  • Evolution of the Proportionality Doctrine: The judgment highlights the proportionality doctrine as a tool for self-discipline in constitutional judicial review, aimed at balancing governmental powers with individual rights
    • Serving as a foundational aspect of constitutional discipline, it establishes parameters applicable to all governance institutions.
  • Differentiation Between Manifest Arbitrariness and Reasonable Exercise of Power: A crucial distinction is drawn between manifest arbitrariness and the reasonable exercise of power, with the court emphasizing that restricting a fundamental right does not equate to abrogating it entirely.
    • This distinction safeguards against arbitrary exercise of governmental authority, stressing the necessity for reasonable and proportionate limitations on rights.
  • Legitimate Goals and Appropriate Means: Applying the proportionality test, the court scrutinizes the legislative objectives behind the Electoral Bond Scheme, mandating that any restriction on a fundamental right must serve a legitimate goal and utilize suitable means.
    • Questions are raised regarding the legitimacy of curbing black money as a specific ground under Article 19(2), emphasizing the need for the state to justify its actions with reasonable objectives.
  • Nexus Between Law and Stated Objectives: Introducing the concept of a reasonable nexus, the court holds that laws should demonstrate a rational connection between means employed and objectives sought to be achieved.
    • This requirement ensures that restrictions on fundamental rights are directly related to their intended purpose, avoiding arbitrary infringements.
  • Balancing Conflicting Rights: A notable development is the introduction of the double proportionality test, addressing conflicts between equal rights such as donor privacy and voter information and influence.
    • The court mandates a secondary proportionality assessment to ensure that any infringement on one right is justified and not disproportionate in impact.
  • Alternative Measures and Judicial Restraint: While advocating proportionality, the court suggests alternative measures to achieve legislative goals, such as setting up electoral trusts or imposing caps on corporate funding.
    • Additionally, it exercises judicial restraint, respecting the autonomy and powers of the executive and legislative branches.
  • Chief Justice M C Chagla's Warning: The judgment recalls Chief Justice M C Chagla's 1958 caution regarding the influential role of big business and money in democracy, highlighting a long-standing concern about corporate influence.
    • Chagla's foresight underscores the judiciary's role in preventing improper or corrupt influence, emphasizing the need to safeguard democratic values.
  • Historical Perspectives by the CJI: Chief Justice Chandrachud's historical perspective underscores the judiciary's responsibility to prevent improper influences on democracy, advocating for a proactive role in safeguarding democratic values.
    • The court's assertion aligns with the idea of acting as a check against attempts to compromise the democratic process, particularly by powerful corporate entities.

Conclusion

The Supreme Court's nullification of the Electoral Bond Scheme is a staunch defense of democratic principles. By rejecting elements that undermine transparency, equality, and accountability, the court reaffirms core democratic values. This landmark ruling signifies a crucial juncture in India's legal narrative, establishing a precedent for safeguarding democracy against opaque financial influences.

India's Journey to Net-Zero Amidst Mineral Shortages and Technological Challenges

  • 05 Mar 2024

Why is it in the News?

By 2030, India wants to set up 500 GW of non-fossil fuel power generating capacity but the problem is that the availability of the minerals is not enough. One needs to process it and manufacture the final product which also means access to technology.

Background:

  • As the world shifts towards decarbonization and faces growing demand for critical minerals, governments worldwide are strategically securing access to these vital resources.
  • In alignment with this trend, the Indian government has amended mining laws to encourage private sector involvement in the extraction and processing of critical minerals.

Importance of Critical Minerals:

  • Driving Decarbonization and Clean Energy Technologies: Critical minerals are pivotal for clean energy technologies such as solar PV plants, wind farms, and electric vehicles, essential for global decarbonization efforts.
    •   According to the International Energy Agency (IEA), a substantial portion of minerals like copper, rare earths, nickel, cobalt, and lithium will be crucial for meeting Paris Agreement targets.
  • Transforming the Transportation Sector: Electric vehicles (EVs) rely heavily on critical minerals like lithium, cobalt, and nickel for their battery production.
    •  As countries shift towards EV adoption, the demand for these minerals is expected to soar, driving sustainable transportation initiatives.
  • Essential in Consumer Electronics: Critical minerals are vital for producing consumer electronics such as smartphones, laptops, and tablets.
    • Rare earth elements and other minerals enable the miniaturization and enhanced performance of electronic devices.
  • Supporting the Construction Industry: Critical minerals contribute to the production of high-strength alloys, cement, and other building materials in the construction sector.
    • These minerals enhance the durability and efficiency of construction materials, promoting sustainability in infrastructure projects.
  • Ensuring Defence and National Security: In the defense sector, critical minerals are indispensable for advanced weaponry and communication systems.
    • Securing a stable supply of these minerals is critical for maintaining national security and technological superiority.
  • Vital for Fertilizers and Agriculture: Minerals like phosphorus and potassium are essential components in fertilizers, crucial for enhancing crop yields and ensuring global food security.
  • Crucial for Industrial Magnets: Neodymium, praseodymium, and dysprosium, critical minerals, are crucial for manufacturing magnets used in various industries.
    • These magnets are integral components in technologies ranging from electric motors to medical devices.

Geopolitical Dynamics of Critical Minerals and Global Ramifications:

  • Economic Dynamics: The geographical concentration of critical mineral resources in select countries like Australia, China, the Democratic Republic of Congo (DRC), Indonesia, and Chile fosters economic dependencies.
    • Nations with substantial reserves enjoy advantages in revenue generation, job creation, and overall economic development, potentially leading to global economic disparities.
  • Geopolitical Power Play: The strategic significance of critical minerals turns their extraction and processing into geopolitical instruments, enabling nations to wield influence on the global stage.
    • China, notably, has leveraged its dominance in rare earths to exert political pressure, exemplified by restrictions on exports to countries such as the US and Japan.
    • China's control over critical minerals, coupled with its monopolized processing capacity, carries significant geopolitical implications, prompting international collaborations like the US-led Minerals Security Partnership (MSP) to secure supply chains and reduce dependence on authoritarian regimes.
  • Supply Chain Vulnerability: The concentration of critical mineral resources in specific regions raises concerns about the vulnerability of global supply chains.
    • Political instability, trade conflicts, or other geopolitical events in major producing nations can disrupt the supply of critical minerals, adversely affecting industries reliant on them.

India's Objectives and Hurdles in Acquiring Critical Minerals:

  • Pursuit of Decarbonization Goals and Energy Transition: India has outlined ambitious objectives for decarbonization, aiming for net-zero emissions by 2070 and establishing 500 GW of non-fossil fuel power generation capacity by 2030.
    • Embracing renewable energy sources, electric vehicles, and sustainable practices underscores India's dedication to combatting climate change.
  • Heavy Reliance on Imports: Despite possessing identified reserves, India heavily depends on imports to meet its demand for critical minerals.
    • This import dependency presents significant challenges, exposing the nation to global market fluctuations, supply chain disruptions, and potential geopolitical tensions.
  • Strategic Agreements for Exploration: Acknowledging the necessity to reduce import reliance, India has forged strategic agreements, such as the one with Australia, to jointly explore critical minerals like lithium and cobalt.
    • Collaborations with resource-rich nations aim to secure access to raw materials and diversify sources beyond traditional suppliers.
  • Lack of Domestic Processing Capacity: Identifying critical minerals marks only the initial step; subsequent processing and manufacturing require advanced technology and infrastructure.
    • India encounters challenges in building domestic processing capacity, contributing to an extended gestation period before achieving self-reliance.
    • Apart from raw material availability, accessing advanced processing technology remains crucial, emphasizing the importance of technology transfer and collaborative ventures with proficient countries.
  • Participation in International Collaborations: India's engagement in the US-led MSP illustrates its dedication to fostering strategic partnerships for securing the critical minerals supply chain.
    • The MSP encompasses countries with critical mineral deposits and access to processing technology, fostering a collective endeavor to surmount challenges.

Noteworthy Actions Undertaken by the Indian Government:

  • Identification of Critical Minerals: In July 2023, India took a significant stride by identifying a list of 30 critical minerals, distinct from rare earths.
    • Each mineral was selected based on criteria such as disruption potential, substitutability, cross-cutting usage, import reliance, and recycling rates.
    • The identified minerals are predominantly concentrated in states and union territories, including Bihar, Gujarat, Jharkhand, Odisha, Tamil Nadu, Uttar Pradesh, Chhattisgarh, and Jammu and Kashmir.
  • Amendment of Existing Mining Laws: Subsequently, in November 2023, the Indian government amended existing mining laws to facilitate private sector participation in the auction of 20 blocks containing critical minerals and rare earths.
    • This amendment signifies a notable shift in India's mineral sector, unlocking opportunities for private enterprises to engage in the extraction and processing of these vital resources.

Conclusion

There is a mounting concern that the limited access to critical minerals could pose a substantial obstacle to India's ambitious journey towards decarbonization. The achievement of decarbonization objectives hinges on surmounting challenges associated with import reliance, processing capabilities, and technological advancements.

Are States getting funds they are entitled from the Centre?

  • 29 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

The recent agitations by the governments of Kerala and Karnataka, and the support extended by several State governments, have highlighted many disquieting issues in the practice of fiscal federalism in India.

Context:

  • The recent protests by the governments of Kerala and Karnataka, supported by several other state governments, have brought to light several concerning issues regarding fiscal federalism in India.
  • These protests underscore the pressing need for the newly constituted 16th Finance Commission (FC) to approach the matter with seriousness and innovation to address grievances related to growing vertical and horizontal inequalities in resource allocation.

What is Fiscal Federalism?

  • Fiscal federalism refers to the distribution of financial authority and obligations among various tiers of government within a nation.
  • It encompasses considerations like determining the roles and responsibilities of the central and state governments in delivering services, devising mechanisms for revenue generation and allocation among these entities, and establishing fair and efficient systems for transfers or grants distribution to promote equity and effectiveness.

Fiscal Federalism in India:

  • The framers of the Constitution stipulated that the Central government would share its tax revenues with the states and provide grants from the Consolidated Fund based on a formula determined by the Finance Commission every five years.
  • India operates under a three-tier federal tax system, delineating the powers of the Central government, state governments, and local bodies to levy taxes.
  • The Central government possesses the authority to impose taxes on individual and corporate incomes, along with indirect taxes like central goods and services tax (CGST), integrated goods and services tax (IGST), and customs duties. Additionally, it collects surcharges and cesses on various taxes.
  • State governments are responsible for levying state goods and services tax (SGST), stamp duties, land revenue, state excise duties, and professional taxes.
  • Local bodies exercise jurisdiction over taxes such as property or house taxes, tolls, and utility taxes on services like electricity and water.

What are the Constitutional Provisions?

  • The Constitution of India outlines the taxation authority of both the Union and States, categorizing them into the Union List and the State List respectively (as outlined in the Seventh Schedule under Article 246).
    • Initially, there was no taxation provision in the Concurrent List.
  • However, with the introduction of GST, the need for a concurrent taxation framework arose, leading to the insertion of Article 246A (as the 101st Amendment in August 2016).
  • This amendment empowered the Union to legislate for CGST (Central GST) and IGST (Integrated GST), while the States were granted the authority to enact SGST laws.
  • Article 270 of the Constitution outlines the mechanism for distributing net tax proceeds collected by the Union government among the Centre and the States.

What are the Concerns with the States?

  • Growing Vertical and Horizontal Inequalities: States have raised concerns about increasing disparities both vertically, pertaining to the sharing of resources between the Union and States, and horizontally.
    • The Union government's inclination to retain a larger share of its proceeds outside the divisible pool has exacerbated these inequalities.
  • Retention of Proceeds: The Union government's practice of withholding a greater portion of its proceeds from the divisible pool has diminished the share allocated to States, contravening mandates from successive Finance Commissions.
  • Proliferation of Cesses and Surcharges: Various cesses and surcharges, such as the Agriculture Infrastructure and Development Cess, have been introduced by the Union government, leading to an expansion of these revenue streams.
    • This expansion has resulted in a larger portion of the gross tax revenue being excluded from net proceeds, thereby depriving States of their rightful share.
  • Financial Exclusion of States: Over the period from 2009-10 to 2023-24, the Union government collected a substantial cumulative amount of ?36.6 lakh crore through cesses and surcharges, all of which remained unshared with the States.
    • The imposition of cesses and surcharges has faced criticism from the Comptroller and Auditor General (CAG), further highlighting concerns about their impact on state finances.

Way Forward

  • Rectifying disparities in resource sharing and addressing the proliferation of cesses and surcharges are critical imperatives for the 16th Finance Commission (FC).
  • The FC should proactively address historical imbalances in vertical devolution by compensating States appropriately and ensuring accurate estimates of "net proceeds" in budgetary documents.
  • Moreover, it should consider providing lump sum untied grants to States to offset shortfalls in devolution over the past decade.
  • Simultaneously, legislative measures must be enacted by the Union government to impose strict limits on the collection of cesses and surcharges, ensuring their automatic expiration after a defined period and preventing their rebranding under different names.
  • Furthermore, States must adhere to the principles of fiscal federalism by allocating sufficient resources to local bodies and promoting dynamic and transparent development initiatives at the grassroots level.

What is the Finance Commission?

  • The Finance Commission is constituted by the President under Article 280 of the Constitution, mainly to give its recommendations on the distribution of tax revenues between the Union and the States and amongst the States themselves.
  • Two distinctive features of the Commission’s work involve redressing the vertical imbalances between the taxation powers and expenditure responsibilities of the center and the States respectively and equalization of all public services across the States.

Functions of the Finance Commission:

  • It is the duty of the Commission to make recommendations to the President as to the distribution between the Union and the States of the net proceeds of taxes which are to be:
    • Divided between them and the allocation between the States of the respective shares of such proceeds;
    • The principles which should govern the grants-in-aid of the revenues of the States out of the Consolidated Fund of India;
    • The measures needed to augment the Consolidated Fund of a State to supplement the resources of the Panchayats in the State based on the recommendations made by the Finance Commission of the State;
    • The measures needed to augment the Consolidated Fund of a State to supplement the resources of the Municipalities in the State based on the recommendations made by the Finance Commission of the State;
    • Any other matter referred to the Commission by the President in the interests of sound finance.
  • The Commission determines its procedure and has such powers in the performance of its functions as Parliament may by law confer on them.

Appointment of the Finance Commission and Qualifications for Members:

  • The Finance Commission is appointed by the President under Article 280 of the Constitution.
  • As per the provisions contained in the Finance Commission Act, 1951 and The Finance Commission (Salaries & Allowances) Rules, 1951, the Chairman of the Commission is selected from among persons who have had experience in public affairs, and the four other members are selected from among persons who:
    • (a) are, or have been, or are qualified to be appointed as Judges of a High Court; or
    • (b) have special knowledge of the finances and accounts of the Government; or
    • (c) have had wide experience in financial matters and administration; or
    • (d) have special knowledge of economics

How are the recommendations of the Finance Commission implemented?

  • The recommendations of the Finance Commission are implemented  as under:
    • Those to be implemented by an order of the President:
    • The recommendations relating to the distribution of Union Taxes and Duties and Grants-in-aid fall in this category.
    • Those to be implemented by executive orders:
    • Other recommendations to be made by the Finance Commission, as per its Terms of Reference

When was the first Commission Constituted and how many Commissions have been Constituted so far?

  • The First Finance Commission was constituted under the chairmanship of Shri K.C. Neogy on 6th April 1952.
  • 15th Finance Commissions have been Constituted so far at intervals of every five years.
  • The 16th Finance Commission was constituted on 31 Dec 2023 with Shri Arvind Panagariya, former Vice-Chairman, NITI Aayog as its Chairman.
    • The 16th Finance Commission is required to submit its recommendations by October 31st, 2025.
  • However, the recommendations of the 15th FC cover the six years up to 31st March 2026.

 

Sustainable Practices and Urging for Eco-Friendly Elections in India

  • 28 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

In August 2023, ahead of the Assembly elections in five States, the Election Commission of India (ECI) voiced its concern over the environmental risks associated with the use of non-biodegradable materials in elections.

Context:

  • The Election Commission of India (ECI) has emphasized the environmental impact of traditional election materials, urging a shift towards eco-friendly practices, particularly given India's status as the world's largest democracy.
  • India must prioritize environmental sustainability in its electoral procedures, recognizing successful eco-friendly initiatives in Kerala, Sri Lanka, and Estonia, and strategizing a comprehensive green transition involving diverse stakeholders.

Why Conducting Elections Require a Paradigm Shift?

  • Unrecognized Environmental Impact of Elections: The emissions generated by campaign flights in the 2016 US presidential elections underscore the substantial carbon footprint linked to conventional election methodologies.
    • Conventional election practices, marked by paper-based materials, energy-intensive rallies, and disposable items, contribute to environmental harm and affect public health.
    • Given the colossal scale of India's elections, these concerns become more pressing, calling for a shift towards eco-friendly election processes.
  • Startling Research Findings: Recent research from Estonia (2023) pinpoints transportation to and from polling booths as the primary contributor to carbon emissions in elections, closely followed by the operational footprint of polling booths.
    • Adopting digital voting systems has the potential to slash the overall carbon footprint by as much as 40%.

What are Some Successful Models of Eco-Friendly Elections?

  • Pioneering Initiatives in Kerala and Goa: During the 2019 general election, the Kerala State Election Commission spearheaded efforts to eliminate single-use plastic materials from campaign activities.
    • Subsequently, the Kerala High Court enforced a ban on non-biodegradable materials, leading to the adoption of eco-friendly alternatives like paper posters and wall graffiti.
    • Collaborative endeavors between government bodies and district administrations in Thiruvananthapuram ensured the implementation of green election practices, including training sessions for election workers in rural areas.
    • In 2022, the Goa State Biodiversity Board showcased eco-friendly election booths crafted from biodegradable materials by local artisans during the Assembly elections.
  • Innovative Strategies from Sri Lanka: In 2019, the Sri Lanka Podujana Peramuna (SLPP) party initiated the world's first carbon-sensitive, environmentally friendly election campaign.
    • This groundbreaking campaign measured carbon emissions from campaign vehicles and electricity usage, offsetting them by planting trees across districts with public participation.
    • By addressing the immediate carbon footprint of the campaign and raising awareness about the importance of forest cover, Sri Lanka set a notable example for sustainable election practices.
  • Estonia's Digital Voting Model: Estonia pioneered digital voting as an online alternative, significantly enhancing voter participation while reducing environmental impact.
    • The success of Estonia's approach underscores the feasibility of digital voting, complemented by stringent security measures, as an eco-friendly and voter-centric solution.

A Roadmap for Sustainable Green Elections:

  • Political Leadership and Digital Campaigning: Political parties should enact legislation mandating eco-friendly election practices, integrating them into the Model Code of Conduct governing campaign activities.
    • Encouraging the adoption of digital platforms for campaigning and door-to-door outreach can substantially reduce the carbon footprint associated with traditional public rallies.
  • Incentivizing Sustainable Practices and Infrastructure Development: Offering incentives for political parties to use sustainable materials like natural fabrics and recycled paper in place of plastic and paper-based campaign materials, alongside supporting waste management and local artisans.
    • Government investment in digital voting infrastructure, particularly in rural areas, ensures reliable internet access and accessible digital devices for all voters.
  • Role of the Election Commission of India (ECI) with Government Backing: The ECI can advocate for digital voting systems, highlighting their environmental benefits and addressing security concerns through comprehensive measures.
  • Public Awareness and Civil Society Engagement: Civil society organizations can lead public awareness campaigns, educating citizens about the environmental impact of traditional election methods and advocating for eco-friendly alternatives.
    • Monitoring the implementation of green initiatives and advocating for transparency and accountability in the electoral process.
  • Media's Advocacy Role: Media outlets can spotlight the environmental consequences of conventional election methods through investigative reporting and by showcasing successful eco-friendly initiatives.
  • Global Collaboration for Sustainable Elections: Collaborating with countries like Sri Lanka and Estonia, which have successfully implemented eco-friendly election practices, to share insights and support international platforms for exchanging best practices in sustainable electoral initiatives.

Hurdles and Potential Solutions for Conducting Eco-Friendly Elections:

  • Technology Barriers: Ensuring a seamless transition to digital voting demands robust technological infrastructure, particularly in remote regions where connectivity may be sparse.
    • Upholding the integrity and security of digital systems is paramount, requiring comprehensive safeguards against cyber threats and manipulation to uphold public trust.
  • Financial Impediments: Embracing eco-friendly materials and technologies entails significant initial investments, posing challenges for governments constrained by budgetary limitations.
    • Competing priorities may hinder the allocation of funds toward sustainable electoral practices, despite their long-term environmental advantages.
  • Cultural Shifts and Public Doubts: Cultural norms often associate physical polling booth presence with democratic participation, necessitating efforts to shift perceptions towards digital methods.
    • Addressing public skepticism regarding new technologies, particularly concerns about security and reliability, requires proactive measures to build trust and confidence.
  • Promoting Transparency and Accountability: The adoption of eco-friendly and digital strategies must be accompanied by transparent processes and robust auditing mechanisms.
    • Establishing clear protocols for auditing new practices fosters accountability and addresses concerns about fairness and impartiality, enhancing public trust.
  • Tackling Logistical Complexities: Executing large-scale electoral reforms demands meticulous planning and coordination across various stages.
    • From sourcing eco-friendly materials to training personnel, addressing logistical challenges systematically is essential for smooth implementation.

Conclusion

Adopting environmentally conscious electoral practices represents not only an imperative for India but also a chance to lead by example on the global stage. Harmonizing high-level policies with ground-level efforts and engaging various stakeholders—political entities, Election Commissions, governments, citizens, media, and civil society—can position India as a trailblazer in conducting sustainable elections. This transformative approach not only integrates environmental responsibility but also reinforces the connection between ecological stewardship and the core tenets of democracy.

Upholding Constitutional Values: A Call Beyond Celebration

  • 23 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

While SC judgments on electoral bonds and Chandigarh mayoral election are welcome, they ought not to merely be an episodic legitimisation of the façade of constitutionalism.

Recent Indian Supreme Court Rulings Questioning Government Actions:

  • Invalidating the Electoral Bonds Scheme: The Supreme Court ruled the electoral bonds scheme unconstitutional, posing a challenge to a major government initiative concerning political funding.
  • AAP Victory in Chandigarh Mayoral Election: The Court affirmed the Aam Aadmi Party's (AAP) victory in the Chandigarh mayoral race, overturning a local electoral outcome and directly challenging administrative actions in the election process.

Analyzing the Supreme Court's Balancing Act:

  • Observe the Executive's Activities to Sustain Its Own Lawfulness: The Supreme Court of India, as the highest judicial authority, bears the weighty responsibility of interpreting and upholding the Constitution.
    • In fulfilling this duty, it frequently engages in a precarious balancing act, striving to negotiate the intricacies of challenging executive decisions while safeguarding its own credibility.
    • This intricate dance between the judiciary and the executive mirrors the broader constitutional framework, wherein checks and balances play a pivotal role in preventing the dominance of any single branch.
  • Significance of Upholding Legitimacy: A fundamental aspect of this delicate balancing act is the imperative to avoid antagonizing the executive to the extent that it imperils the Court's legitimacy.
    • The Court recognizes that maintaining this delicate equilibrium is indispensable for the institution’s continued existence.
    • A collapse in the Court's credibility could undermine the very fabric of the constitutional order it endeavours to uphold.
    • This consideration often influences the Court's deliberations, prompting careful consideration of the potential ramifications for its stature.

What are the Issues with the Court's Balancing Act Against the Executive?

  • The Court grapples with the intricate balance between its roles as a legal arbiter and guardian of constitutional integrity, particularly when confronted with executive actions that may encroach upon constitutional principles.
  • Recent decisions, like invalidating the electoral bonds scheme, highlight the Court's assertion in safeguarding democratic norms while cautiously avoiding confrontation to preserve its legitimacy.
  • However, concerns arise when the Court's reluctance to challenge the executive overshadows its commitment to constitutional values, potentially legitimizing authoritarian agendas.
  • Maintaining a facade of constitutionalism can lead to questions regarding the Court's consistent commitment to curbing executive power.
  • The Court must uphold constitutional principles robustly, even if it means challenging the executive's authority uncomfortably, to ensure justice and democracy prevail.
  • Success in this delicate balancing act lies not only in the decisions rendered but also in the Court's unwavering dedication to justice and democracy, despite formidable executive pressures.

Analysing Political Culture, Public Sentiment, and the Court's Influence:

  • Disparity Between Legal Pronouncements and Public Opinion: Recent Supreme Court rulings against government initiatives, such as invalidating the electoral bonds scheme, fail to resonate as significant concerns within public sentiment, highlighting a disconnection between legal decisions and public perception.
  • Normalization of Institutional Decline: The lack of public outcry over decisions challenging government actions reflects a worrying normalization of institutional decay, where issues like electoral malpractice are perceived as minor errors rather than threats to democracy.
  • Aestheticization of Politics: Rather than prompting political concern, events like the Chandigarh mayoral race are often viewed as entertainment, illustrating a shallow engagement with political developments that overlook their implications for governance.
  • Opposition Fragmentation and Political Dynamics: The Opposition's fragmented state impedes its ability to leverage judicial decisions against the government, weakening efforts to hold the ruling party accountable and allowing it to diminish the significance of adverse legal rulings.
  • Courts' Influence on Political Culture: While the Court delivers commendable decisions, it operates within a political culture seemingly immune to the erosion of democratic norms, limiting its ability to shape broader perceptions.
    • Legal victories, though sound, struggle to spark the necessary public mobilization to impact the prevailing political climate.

Way Ahead:

  • Embracing Civic Courage and Critical Inquiry: Amidst institutional erosion and a dearth of political engagement, there is a pressing need for civic courage, critical thinking, and a commitment to holding the government to account.
    • Instances of institutional impropriety, whether through overreach, repression, or communalisation, often fail to provoke a robust public response.
    • The reluctance to critically engage with such issues perpetuates a political climate where even pro-democracy decisions are seen as rare anomalies rather than normative outcomes.
    • As such, the public's reception of these rulings becomes pivotal in shaping their enduring impact.
  • Calling for a Reassessment of Institutional Roles: Recent legal verdicts must be part of a broader effort to challenge the consolidation of authoritarianism and communalism.
    • The prevailing political climate necessitates critically reassessing institutional roles in fostering genuine accountability.

Conclusion

Recent Supreme Court rulings, while potentially positive, warrant cautious consideration amid broader institutional challenges. Navigating issues like legitimacy balancing, fragmented opposition, and institutional normalization presents formidable obstacles. The enduring impact of these decisions hinges on both public reception and the Court's steadfast dedication to constitutional principles, determining whether they signify substantive progress or fleeting glimpses of hope amidst broader democratic challenges in India.

 

Greece’s gateway to Asia, India’s gateway to Europe

  • 20 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

The state visit by Greek Prime Minister Kyriakos Mitsotakis to India will be another important step in building a strategic relationship between India and Greece — a process which began with the historic visit of the Indian Prime Minister, Narendra Modi, to Greece in August 2023.

Context:

  • The upcoming state visit of Greek Prime Minister Kyriakos Mitsotakis to New Delhi signifies a pivotal milestone in the ongoing initiatives to forge a strategic partnership between Greece and India.
  • This diplomatic initiative follows the landmark visit of the Indian Prime Minister to Greece in August 2023, which generated enthusiasm among Greek political and business circles.
  • The anticipation surrounding the visit of the Greek Prime Minister underscores the mutual dedication to enhancing bilateral relations and collaboration across diverse sectors.

Historical Connections:

  • India and Greece share a rich historical bond spanning more than 2500 years, characterized by cultural exchanges and a mutual embrace of democratic values.
  • Presently, their bilateral relations are multifaceted, covering political, economic, and military cooperation.
  • Trade Routes: Ancient maritime trade routes linked the Indus Valley Civilization with the Aegean region, facilitating the exchange of commodities such as spices, textiles, and intellectual ideas.
    • Archaeological evidence, including the discovery of Indus seals in Mesopotamia, suggests the existence of trade connections between the two civilizations.
  • Alexander the Great (326 BCE): Alexander's conquest of parts of northwest India fostered cultural and diplomatic exchanges between Greece and India.
    • Greek philosophies and ideologies potentially influenced various aspects of Indian art, mathematics, and astronomy during this period.
  • Indo-Greek Kingdoms (2nd century BCE – 1st century CE): Hellenistic kingdoms established in northwest India witnessed a fusion of Greek and Indian cultures.
    • This blending is evident in Gandhara art, which exhibits Greco-Buddhist influences and serves as a testament to the cultural interplay between the two civilizations.

The Current Status of Bilateral Relations between India and Greece:

  • Steady Progress in Bilateral Relations: While India and Greece share a historical connection and mutual enthusiasm, the pace of their bilateral cooperation has been characterized by gradual progress.
    • In this context, it is essential to delve into the various facets of collaboration, recognizing both the positive developments and the need for enhanced momentum.
  • Military Cooperation: Over time, military collaboration between the two nations has witnessed notable advancements.
    • Joint exercises involving the Indian Navy, Indian Air Force, and the Greek armed forces have been conducted, underscoring a shared commitment to fostering mutual understanding and coordination.
    • Reciprocal exercises are in the pipeline, illustrating an ongoing endeavour to deepen military bonds.
    • These joint military endeavours not only bolster regional security but also signify an increasing level of confidence and collaboration between the armed forces of Greece and India.
  • Economic Engagement: On the economic front, there have been significant instances of collaboration signalling a burgeoning partnership.
    • For instance, an Indian construction company has joined forces with a prominent Greek construction firm to undertake a significant project: the construction of a new airport on the island of Crete.
    • Such initiatives highlight the potential for cross-border investments and partnerships that can contribute to economic development and diversification.

Advancing Economic Reforms And Greece's Role:

  • Greece's proactive stance in promoting deeper EU-India relations adds another layer of importance to ongoing economic reforms.
  • As Greece endeavours to swiftly finalize the EU-India bilateral trade and investment agreement (BTIA), it underscores its dedication to establishing a conducive environment for heightened economic cooperation.
    • The BTIA is poised to act as a catalyst, providing a structured framework for trade and investment, thereby nurturing closer economic bonds between the EU and India.

A Path to Closer Ties: Economic Reforms in Greece

  • The economic facet of the Greece-India relationship assumes greater prominence as Greece, under the leadership of Prime Minister Kyriakos Mitsotakis, embarks on substantial economic reforms.
  • Over the past half-decade, the Mitsotakis administration has implemented measures aimed at steering the Greek economy towards a more sustainable growth trajectory.
  • This transformation positions Greece not only as a dependable eastern frontier of the European Union (EU) but also as a potential linchpin in broader geopolitical and economic strategies.

IMEEC Corridor: A Vision of Significance

  • As Greece solidifies its role in the Eastern Mediterranean, the concept of establishing the India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor (IMEEC) emerges as a compelling vision.
  • The IMEEC embodies a comprehensive economic initiative aimed at seamlessly connecting India, the Middle East, and Europe, thereby stimulating trade, investment, and economic collaboration.
  • This ambitious proposition aligns with the shared vision of both nations to deepen their economic bonds and explore novel avenues for cooperation.

The Geopolitical Significance of the Indo-Greek Relationship:

  • A Robust Foundation Rooted in Historical Bonds: The historical backdrop of the evolving ties between Greece and India (with diplomatic relations established in 1950) enriches their contemporary diplomatic endeavours.
    • Furthermore, these diplomatic exchanges acquire significance amidst India's ascent as a global power, being perceived not only as an enduring ally but also as a dynamic and influential player on the world stage.
  • Contemporary Diplomacy: The momentous visit of the Indian Prime Minister to Greece in August 2023 served as a watershed, laying the groundwork for enhanced collaboration.
    • The enthusiasm witnessed in Greece, particularly among political and business circles, underscores the perceived opportunities in forging a strategic partnership with India.
  • Strategic Importance of Both Nations' Locations: The geopolitical relevance of this burgeoning relationship is amplified by the strategic locations of Greece and India.
    • Situated in regions pivotal to the global system, both nations grapple with geopolitical complexities and volatility.
    • Recent events in the Red Sea highlight the interconnectedness of the East Mediterranean, where Greece is positioned, and the Indian Ocean region, accentuating the imperative for collaboration to promote security, stability, and prosperity.
  • A Strategic Vision: Gateway to Europe and Asia: The Greek Prime Minister's assertion that "India will find no better gateway to Europe than my country, and for Greece, there is no better gateway to Asia than a close strategic relationship with India" encapsulates the acknowledgement of each nation's unique role in bridging the other's region.
    • This pragmatic understanding not only acknowledges geographical realities but also reflects a strategic vision to leverage mutual strengths for collective advancement.

Way Forward to Enhance Indo-Greek Relations:

  • Promoting Cross-Cultural Understanding: By expanding university student exchange programs, deliberate steps will be taken to familiarize the younger generation with the cultures, traditions, and educational systems of both nations.
    • This fosters not only cross-cultural appreciation but also establishes a groundwork for future collaborations and friendships.
  • Fostering Cultural Exchanges: Cultural exchanges serve as a cornerstone in fortifying the bonds between Greece and India.
    • Through the promotion of cultural events, exhibitions, and festivals, both countries create platforms for their citizens to immerse themselves in and celebrate the richness of each other's cultural heritage.
    • These initiatives act as bridges, connecting hearts and minds, and nurturing a sense of shared identity and mutual respect for cultural diversity.
  • Media Collaboration: Bridging Information Gaps: Media collaboration emerges as a pivotal avenue to bridge geographical distances and keep the citizens of both nations abreast of developments, cultural nuances, and societal trends.
    • Joint efforts in media, including co-productions, cultural documentaries, and news coverage, facilitate a nuanced understanding of each other's realities.

Conclusion

The swift exchange of visits between the political leadership of Greece and India underscores their commitment and the urgency in advancing their strategic partnership. As the world navigates through a pivotal year in 2024, the onus lies on policymakers and businesses to capitalize on this momentum and fortify the strategic partnership between Greece and India.

A Privileged Strategic Partnership, Without a Gulf (The Hindu)

  • 12 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

PM Modi is scheduled to pay an official visit to the United Arab Emirates (UAE) from February 13-14, 2024 which will include inaugurating a temple built by the Bochasanwasi Shri Akshar Purushottam Swaminarayan Sanstha in Abu Dhabi.

Background:

  • The upcoming official visit of the Indian Prime Minister to the United Arab Emirates (UAE) scheduled for February 13-14, 2024, signifies a pivotal moment in the evolving rapport between the two countries.
  • This visit offers an opportunity to examine the diverse dimensions of the strategic partnership between India and the UAE, encompassing diplomatic, economic, cultural, and geopolitical connections that have matured over time.
  • The Prime Minister will address the World Government Summit in Dubai as the ‘Guest of Honour’.

The Nature of India-UAE Special Diplomatic Relations:

  • Elevated Diplomatic Engagements and Mutual Gestures: The essence of the India-UAE strategic partnership in diplomacy is marked by a sequence of notable visits, reciprocal actions, and joint endeavours, underscoring the depth of their association.
    • The forthcoming seventh visit of the Indian Prime Minister to the UAE, scheduled for February 13-14, 2024, reinforces the diplomatic bonds between the two countries.
  • Personal Connection: The close and amicable bond between Prime Minister Modi and UAE President Sheikh Mohamed bin Zayed Al Nahyan serves as a cornerstone in diplomatic interactions.
    • This personal connection has evolved through frequent encounters, discussions, and collaborative initiatives across various domains.
    • Their shared vision acts as a catalyst for expanding cooperation across diverse sectors.
  • Special Collaborative Ventures: The diplomatic cooperation extends beyond regular interactions to encompass special events and joint initiatives that highlight the importance of their partnership.
    • For instance, the felicitation of the UAE President in Gandhinagar during the Vibrant Gujarat Summit is a notable instance.
    • This reciprocal gesture underscores the mutual respect and camaraderie between the leaders.
  • Global Environmental Endeavours: Both nations actively contribute to global endeavours addressing climate change.
    • Their joint involvement in the Global Green Credit Initiative underscores their dedication to environmental sustainability.
    • This shared commitment to global issues demonstrates a diplomatic convergence that transcends bilateral interests, positioning India and the UAE as responsible global participants.
  • Strategic Partnerships: The strategic alignment between India and the UAE is evident in their engagement in various international forums and alliances.
    • Their participation in the West Asian Quad (I2U2) and the India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor highlights a shared commitment to regional stability and economic progress.
    • These partnerships further solidify their diplomatic collaboration in shaping geopolitical dynamics.
  • Crisis Management: The diplomatic ties between India and the UAE are tested during critical junctures, such as the ongoing conflict in Gaza.
    • The scheduled visit presents an opportunity for both leaders to discuss pressing regional issues, showcasing their dedication to addressing challenges and preserving regional stability.
  • People-Centric Diplomacy: Cultural exchanges and people-to-people connections significantly contribute to diplomatic relations.
    • Instances like the UAE conferring the Order of Zayed on Prime Minister Modi and India's role as the 'Guest of Honour' at the Abu Dhabi Festival underscore the cultural aspects of the partnership.
    • Such gestures foster mutual understanding and goodwill among the citizens of both nations.

Additional Highlights of the UAE-India Strategic Partnership:

  • Energy Security: The UAE's role as a vital partner in India's energy security is underscored by agreements on strategic oil reserves stored in India and collaborations on crude oil storage facilities.
    • The partnership between Indian Strategic Petroleum Reserves Ltd and the Abu Dhabi National Oil Company reflects a shared commitment to securing energy resources.
  • Defence and Security Collaboration: Both nations actively engage in defence and security cooperation, demonstrating mutual trust and a dedication to regional stability.
    • Instances such as India's special invitation to the OIC Foreign Ministers’ Meeting and the UAE's participation in the G-20 summit under India’s presidency exemplify a unique level of diplomatic understanding.
  • Cultural and People-to-People Connections: Cultural exchanges, exemplified by India's role as the 'Guest of Honour' at the Abu Dhabi Festival and the conferral of the Order of Zayed on PM Modi, strengthen people-to-people bonds.
    • Initiatives like the establishment of the IIT Delhi Abu Dhabi campus and the opening of a UAE consulate in Hyderabad further enrich the cultural and educational facets of the partnership.
  • The BAPS temple: Constructed on a generous donation of a 27-acre land parcel by the UAE President
    • It stands as the UAE's second prominent Hindu temple, following the inauguration of the Hindu Temple in Dubai in 2022.
  • Geopolitical Alignment: Both countries' participation in significant groupings like I2U2 and the India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor underscores their shared geopolitical interests.
    • The UAE's involvement in the corridor, aimed at linking India to Europe, presents a potential alternative to China’s Belt and Road Initiative.
  • Fintech: The RuPay card, an integral part of India’s Digital Public Infrastructure (DPI), has been operational in the UAE since 2019.           Starting from July 2023, transactions using the Indian rupee have been facilitated at Dubai’s airports.
  • Regional Dynamics: The ongoing conflict in Gaza introduces an additional layer of complexity to regional dynamics, offering an opportunity for leaders to address pressing issues.

Way Forward:

  • Both nations maintain close coordination within the region and participate in several significant groupings, including the I2U2.
  • The UAE's involvement in the India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor (IMEEC) infrastructure project, established during the G-20 summit in Delhi, aims to link India to Europe via the Arabian peninsula.
    • This corridor presents a potential alternative to China’s Belt and Road Initiative.
  • India boasts numerous strategic partnership agreements globally, yet none exhibit the depth of convergence and mutual respect as the one with the UAE.
  • While India acknowledges and appreciates the UAE’s regional role, the UAE also acknowledges India's forthcoming 'global leadership' role.
  • Both nations anticipate the continued strengthening of this privileged strategic partnership in the years to come.

Conclusion

The India-UAE strategic partnership exemplifies the extensive and varied connections that have developed over time. Spanning diplomatic, economic, and cultural spheres, as well as shared geopolitical goals, this relationship serves as a paradigm of harmony and mutual regard.

With a shared vision for continued advancement, the privileged strategic partnership is positioned for further enhancement in the future.

 

The Call for a Progressive Outlook in India's Bilateral Investment Treaties (Indian Express)

  • 10 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

While presenting the interim Union budget, Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman stated that India will be negotiating Bilateral Investment Treaties (BITs) with its trade partners to boost the inflow of foreign direct investment.

Background:

  • India's economic terrain is undergoing a significant shift following the Finance Minister's announcement of plans to negotiate Bilateral Investment Treaties (BITs) during the interim Union budget presentation.
  • This decision arrives at a critical juncture, coinciding with India's struggle to address declining levels of foreign direct investment (FDI) and the aftermath of adopting the 2016 Model BIT.
  • Given these circumstances, it becomes imperative to explore the evolution of India's BITs, assess the implications of the 2016 model, and analyze the recent policy shift to gauge its potential impact on FDI.

Evolution of Bilateral Investment Treaties (BITs) in India:

  • Origins of BITs in India (1990s): During the mid-1990s, India embarked on a significant economic policy shift by initiating Bilateral Investment Treaties (BITs) to attract foreign direct investment (FDI) and create an enabling environment for economic growth.
    • The primary aim was to demonstrate India's commitment to protecting investments made by individuals and companies from partner countries.
    • The signing of the first BIT between India and the UK in 1994 laid the groundwork for a series of agreements that would play a pivotal role in India's global economic integration.
  • Expansion of BITs as Economic Diplomacy (Late 90s to 2000s): BITs in India evolved into strategic tools to mutually encourage and safeguard investments in each other's territories.
    • As India sought to position itself as a premier investment destination, these treaties became instrumental in signaling its dedication to safeguarding the rights and interests of foreign investors.
    • This period witnessed a proliferation of BITs, reflecting India's acknowledgement of the importance of foreign capital in stimulating domestic industries and infrastructure development.
  • Emerging Challenges and Disputes (2010s): The significance of BITs became evident in 2010 with the settlement of the first-ever investor treaty claim in India.
    • Subsequent events, including the unfavorable award in the Australia-India BIT dispute (White Industries v Republic of India) in 2011, underscored the complexities and challenges associated with managing disputes arising from these agreements.
    • By 2015, India found itself embroiled in 17 known BIT claims, with the Cairn Energy Plc case being particularly notable.
    • These challenges prompted a critical reassessment of India's approach, leading to the adoption of the 2016 model BIT.
  • Adoption of the 2016 Model BIT and Policy Shift: The adoption of the 2016 model BIT signalled a significant shift in India's approach to BITs.
    • It was viewed as a protective measure, resulting in the termination of numerous existing treaties.
    • However, the 2016 model BIT faced criticism for its exclusion of key international law principles, such as 'fair and equitable treatment' and 'most favoured nation.'
  • Additionally, it introduced a requirement for investors to exhaust local remedies before resorting to international arbitration, potentially delaying the dispute resolution process.

Issues with the 2016 Model of BIT and their Consequences:

  • Protective Nature: The introduction of the 2016 Model BIT marked a significant shift in India's approach to bilateral investment treaties, aiming for greater protection.
    • Positioned as a response to past disputes, it led to the termination of numerous existing treaties, signalling a desire to recalibrate engagement terms with foreign investors.
    • However, concerns arose about its potential impact on India's attractiveness as an investment destination.
  • Absence of Key International Law Doctrines: Criticism was directed at the 2016 model BIT for deviating from established international law doctrines.
    • Notably, it lacked principles like "fair and equitable treatment" and "most favoured nation," raising doubts about fairness and protection for foreign investors.
    • This omission complicated the interpretation and enforcement of investment agreements, adding uncertainty for investors.
  • Requirement for Exhausting Local Remedies: The 2016 model BIT introduced a requirement for investors to exhaust local remedies before pursuing international arbitration.
    • While this aimed to promote domestic dispute resolution, it created delays and challenges.
    • Investors found navigating local legal systems time-consuming and ineffective, potentially discouraging investment.
  • Adverse Impact on FDI and Renegotiation Challenges: The consequences of the 2016 model BIT were evident in declining FDI in India.
    • FDI equity inflows dropped by 24% to $20.48 billion in April-September 2023, reflecting investor concerns.
    • The termination of existing treaties and challenges with the new model hindered India's ability to renegotiate terms, affecting its attractiveness to foreign investors.
    • The Cairn Energy Plc case, resulting in a significant award against India, highlighted the difficulties under the 2016 model BIT.

Government Recommendations and Policy Reforms Following Challenges with the 2016 BIT Model:

  • Acknowledgement of Limitations and Policy Adjustment: Recognizing the constraints and hurdles posed by the 2016 Model BIT, the Indian government has signalled a shift towards more adaptable and practical strategies.
    • The announcement during the presentation of the interim Union budget, highlighting the negotiation of Bilateral Investment Treaties with trading partners, signifies a departure from rigid approaches.
    • This acknowledgement underscores the necessity for a nuanced approach that considers evolving international investment dynamics and global economic shifts.
  • Parliamentary Standing Committee Proposals: In 2021, the Parliamentary Standing Committee on External Affairs proposed several key recommendations to reevaluate the existing BIT framework.
    • These recommendations aimed to tackle challenges associated with the 2016 model BIT and foster a more investor-friendly environment.
    • One notable recommendation emphasized the importance of timely dispute resolution through pre-arbitration consultations and negotiations.
    • This proactive stance aims to streamline the dispute-resolution process and alleviate pressure on both foreign investors and the Indian legal system.
  • Addressing India's Contract Enforcement Ranking: India's low ranking in contract enforcement, currently at 163 out of 190, remains a significant concern.
    • Recognizing the link between an efficient legal framework and foreign investment attractiveness, recommendations from the Parliamentary Standing Committee serve as a call to action.
    • A timely review of treaties and alignment with global best practices becomes crucial to improving the ease of doing business, reinforcing India's commitment to fostering an investment-friendly climate.
  • Free Trade Agreement (FTA) with the UK: As part of ongoing policy reforms, India is working towards finalizing a free trade agreement (FTA) with the UK.
    • This strategic endeavour has undergone over 14 rounds of negotiations, with disputes being a major obstacle.
    • The proposed FTA is expected to eliminate the requirement for exhausting local remedies, offering a mechanism for swift dispute resolution through international arbitration.
  • This pragmatic approach acknowledges the importance of rapid dispute resolution in nurturing international trade relationships.

Conclusion

Achieving a $5 trillion economy hinges on robust international trade and secure investments in India. A forward-looking strategy for BITs is essential to attract and maintain long-term foreign investments, and the government's recent initiative is a positive move. Nevertheless, adopting a more tailored approach, rather than a one-size-fits-all model, is necessary to facilitate rapid yet sustainable growth in cross-border flows.

 

Contribution of Dr MS Swaminathan Towards Indian Agriculture (Indian Express)

  • 09 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

Recently, Prime Minister Modi announced that the agriculture scientist M S Swaminathan will be honoured with the Bharat Ratna.

Who was MS Swaminathan?

  • Monkomb Sambasivan Swaminathan (MS Swaminathan) was born on August 7, 1925, in Kumbakonam, Madras Presidency (now Tamil Nadu).
  • He was an agronomist, agricultural scientist, plant geneticist, administrator, and humanitarian.
  • He was known as the ‘father of the Green Revolution’ in India.
  • Swaminathan began his career in 1949 researching the genetics of potatoes, wheat, rice, and jute.
    • He played a crucial role in developing high-yielding varieties of paddy that helped ensure India’s low-income farmers produced more yield.
  • Also known as the ‘father of economic ecology’ by the United Nations Environment Programme, he worked with agriculture ministers including C Subramaniam and Jagjivan Ram during the 1960s and 70s for the success of the ‘Green Revolution’ in India.
    • An initiative that paved the way for an exponential rise in the productivity of wheat and rice through the adaptation of chemical-biological technology.
  • Career: Swaminathan also held administration positions in various agricultural research laboratories.
    • He served as the director general of the Indian Council of Agricultural Research and International Rice Research Institute.
    • He also worked as the principal secretary of the Ministry of Agriculture in 1979.
    • Later, he also served as the President of the International Union of the Conservation of Nature and Natural Resources.
    • In 2004, Swaminathan was appointed as chairman of the National Commission on Farmers.
  • Awards and Recognition: He was awarded with the Ramon Magsaysay Award in 1971 and the Albert Einstein World Science Award in 1986.
    • He was awarded the first World Food Prize in 1987, following which he set up the MS Swaminathan Research Foundation in Chennai.
    • Swaminathan has also been conferred with the Padma Shri, Padma Bhushan, and Padma Vibhushan - the three most prestigious awards.
    • Apart from these, he was also given the H K Firodia Award, the Lal Bahadur Shastri National Award, and the Indira Gandhi Prize.
  • Swaminathan also contributed to various agricultural and environmental initiatives globally.
    • He was named one of the 20 most influential Asians of the 20th century by Time magazine.
  • He also served as a Member of Parliament in the Rajya Sabha from 2007 to 2013.
  • MS Swaminathan passed away in September 2023 at the age of 98.
  • His decision to focus on ensuring India's food security led him to become a key figure in the Green Revolution of the 1960s, which transformed India from a food-deficient nation to one of the world's leading agricultural producers.
    • His collaboration with Nobel laureate Norman Borlaug introduced high-yielding varieties of wheat and rice, saving millions from starvation.
  • Dr Swaminathan's transformative influence on Indian agriculture began to emerge when he championed the introduction of high-yielding crop varieties.
    • His visionary approach was instrumental in pioneering the Green Revolution in India when the country was still grappling with poverty and a lack of social security.
  • The impact of Dr. Swaminathan's efforts was nothing short of revolutionary.
  • India's food production skyrocketed, and the nation moved from a state of food scarcity to food self-sufficiency.
  • His work not only averted potential famines but also elevated the economic conditions of countless farming communities.

How MS Swaminathan Contributed to the Green Revolution?

  • MS Swaminathan was greatly influenced by Mahatma Gandhi's teachings of selfless service to the poor and the nation.
  • He was very much influenced by the 1943 Bengal famine, which killed up to three million people and realised the need to improve agriculture and food security in India.
  • After Swaminathan’s work on rice, he and other scientists worked on doing the same to enhance productivity for the wheat crop.
  • India had to get Norin dwarfing genes from Norman Borlaug in Mexico to enhance the productivity and adaptability of its wheat crops.
    • These genes, known for their ability to produce shorter wheat plants, were instrumental in the Green Revolution, as they helped increase yield potential and improve resistance to lodging (falling over) in wheat plants.
    • By acquiring these genes, India aimed to replicate the success of the Green Revolution and address food security challenges by boosting wheat production.
  • Norman Borlaug was an American scientist who was working on developing more productive crop varieties.
    • It led to him winning the Nobel Peace Prize in 1970 for his work in developing High Yielding Varieties (HYVs) of wheat.
  • Many researchers and scientists were involved in this work but there isn’t any doubt that the basic strategic vision underpinning the Green Revolution in India, introducing a new genetic strain or ‘plant type’ responsive to increased fertiliser and water application came from MS Swaminathan.
  • The problem with the traditional wheat and rice varieties was that they were tall and slender.
    • These ‘lodged’ – fell flat on the ground — when they grew and their heads were heavy with well-filled grains produced in response to high fertiliser doses.
    • Through Swaminathan’s research on rice, a reduction in plant height was sought to make them less lodging-prone but this was not easy to do.
  • His strategy of developing semi-dwarf wheat varieties using mutagenesis exposing plants to chemicals or radiation to introduce desirable modifications in their DNA did not, however, work.
    • The lowering of plant heights led to a simultaneous reduction in the size of the grain-bearing panicles or earheads.
  • The search for an ideal variety led him to contact American scientist Orville Vogel.
    • He played a role in developing a ‘dwarf wheat’ called Gaines, which had a high yield.
    • It contained dwarfing genes from a dwarf wheat called the Norin-10.
  • Vogel agreed but was unsure of the wheat’s potential in the Indian climate and thus advised Swaminathan to approach Norman Borlaug, who had incorporated the same dwarfing genes through Vogel’s lines into his spring wheat varieties in Mexico that were better suited for India.
    • Borlaug also later visited India, after Swaminathan proposed so to the Indian Agricultural Research Institute, allowing for the wheat breeding programme to commence.
  • In 1963, they began a serious effort to breed dwarf wheat and within five years, this initiative led to what became known as the "Wheat Revolution."
    • Indira Gandhi, the then Prime Minister of India, released a special stamp to mark the achievement.

The Side Effects of the Green Revolution:

  • Despite its landmark role in achieving food sufficient in India, the Green Revolution has been criticised on multiple counts, such as:
    • Benefiting the already prosperous farmers as it was introduced in states with higher productivity.
  • Swaminathan recognised such issues as early as January 1968, addressing the Indian Science Congress at Varanasi.
  • He highlighted concerns about the rapid spread of a few high-yielding crop varieties replacing diverse local ones, leading to potential problems like soil degradation, desertification, excessive pesticide use, and unsustainable groundwater extraction.
    • Unfortunately, many of these concerns have materialised today.
  • He also lent his support to farmers as the head of the National Commission on Farmers from 2004-06, he recommended that the Minimum Support Price at which farmers sell their crops to the government should be at least 50 per cent more than the weighted average cost of production.
  • For his contributions, Swaminathan was awarded the first World Food Prize Laureate in 1987, for “developing and spearheading the introduction of high-yielding wheat and rice varieties into India during the 1960s when that country faced the prospect of widespread famine.
  • Wheat production doubled in just a few years, making the country self-sufficient and saving millions from extreme food deprivation.

Navigating the Risks and Benefits Associated with Internationalisation of Government Bonds (The Hindu)

  • 03 Feb 2024

Why is it in the News?

There is a serious underestimation of the risks involved in the internationalisation of bond markets and currencies of emerging economies.

Context:

  • In recent times, there have been noticeable changes in the global financial landscape, specifically regarding the inclusion of government bonds from emerging economies in global indices.
  • It is crucial to evaluate the actions taken by J.P. Morgan, Bloomberg, and FTSE Russell in incorporating Indian local currency government bonds (LCGBs) into global indices amidst these developments.
  • Exploring the reasons behind these moves and understanding the potential advantages and risks associated with such initiatives is essential.

J.P. Morgan's Influence on India's Financial Landscape:

  • The inclusion of Indian local currency government bonds (LCGBs) in J.P. Morgan's Government Bond Index-Emerging Markets (GBI-EM) Global index suite in September 2023 marked a significant milestone.
  • This step not only underscored India's financial stature but also raised expectations within the Indian financial sector.
  • It spurred interest from other major index providers such as Bloomberg-Barclays and FTSE Russell.
  • Subsequently, Bloomberg Index Services announced in January 2024 that India's fully accessible route (FAR) bonds would be incorporated into the Bloomberg Emerging Market Local Currency Index, further bolstering this trend.
  • All eyes are now on FTSE Russell, highlighting the increasing influence and anticipation of reforms in India's government bond market.

What is the Process of Opening Local Bond Markets?

  • Opening local bond markets to foreign investors is a strategic move by emerging economies to bolster their global financial integration.
  • In India, this journey began in 2019 and gained momentum by 2020 with the introduction of the fully accessible route (FAR).
  • Despite facing challenges like delays due to government policies on capital gains taxes and local settlement, the core policy remained unchanged, showcasing a dedication to promoting global financial inclusivity.

Advantages of Internationalising Bond Markets:

  • Reduced Reliance on Domestic Institutions: By integrating local currency government bonds into global indices, emerging economies like India aim to lessen their dependence on domestic financial institutions.
    • This diversified funding base can contribute to financial stability.
  • Stability in Funds Tracking Indices: Inclusion in global indices can result in a more stable inflow of funds, as funds tracking indices typically have a longer investment horizon compared to short-term speculative flows.
    • This stability can help mitigate volatility in local financial markets, providing a secure environment for both domestic and foreign investors.
  • Lower Cost of Public Borrowing: Increased demand for local currency government bonds from global investors may lead to a decrease in domestic interest rates.
    • As a result, the cost of public borrowing for the government can decline.
  • Relief for Local Financial Institutions: Higher participation by foreign investors in local bond markets can alleviate the balance sheets of local financial institutions holding these bonds.
    • This increased liquidity may encourage more lending and private investment.
  • Mitigation of "Original Sin": Bond market internationalization helps mitigate the "original sin" problem faced by emerging economies, where they are unable to borrow internationally in their currencies.
    • By issuing bonds in their currencies, these countries shift the exchange rate risk onto international lenders, potentially avoiding widespread private insolvencies during sharp currency declines.

Risks Involved with Internationalising Bond Markets:

  • Loss of Control and Heightened Interest Rate Risks: Internationalizing bond markets poses the risk of losing control over long-term interest rates, leaving emerging economies more vulnerable to global interest rate fluctuations.
    • This can negatively impact domestic bond markets and overall economic stability.
  • Exchange Rate Volatility and Spillover Effects: Increased participation by foreign investors exposes local currency bond markets to exchange rate volatility.
    • During periods of global risk aversion or liquidity challenges, adverse spillover effects can occur, as seen in events like the Lehman collapse in 2008 and recent shifts in U.S. monetary policy.
  • Volatility in Inflows of Local Currency Bonds: Instances such as the rapid exit of investors from local currency assets in Malaysia during 2014-15 and the total withdrawal of foreigners from the bond market in Türkiye since Spring 2018 underscore the unpredictability of capital flows.
    • These sudden stops and exits can lead to large reserve losses and currency declines, highlighting the potential for rapid market fluctuations.

Efforts by the Inter-Departmental Group (IDG) and RBI to Integrate Government Bonds into Global Indices:

  • Indian LCGBs Integration into Global Indices: The RBI's journey towards internationalization commenced in October 2022 with an Inter-Departmental Group (IDG) report outlining efforts to integrate Indian local currency government bonds (LCGBs) into global indices.
  • Diversification of Funding Channels: The inclusion of Indian LCGBs in global indices aims not only to attract foreign capital but also to diversify funding sources, reducing reliance on domestic institutions and tapping into large international resources.
  • Stability Enhancement and Investment Allocation: The IDG report highlights the potential benefits of LCGB inclusion in global indices, such as enhancing the stability of funds tracking these indices.
    • This stability can foster a more predictable investment environment, attracting long-term investors and improving investment allocation within the Indian financial market.
  • Rupee Internationalization Beyond Bonds: Integrating LCGBs into global indices is just one aspect of a broader effort to internationalize the Indian rupee, as outlined in the IDG report.
    • Another crucial component involves allowing banking services in the rupee (INR) outside the country.

Moving Forward:

  • Striking a Delicate Balance: While the opening of local bond markets presents abundant opportunities, it necessitates careful balancing.
    • Countries must balance the attraction of foreign capital with the management of potential risks.
  • Drawing from Past Experiences: The experiences of Malaysia and Türkiye offer valuable lessons, emphasizing proactive management of offshore markets to prevent excessive speculation and maintain currency stability.
    • These lessons underscore the importance of regulatory vigilance, timely interventions, and a balanced approach to fostering internationalization while preserving macroeconomic stability.

Conclusion

The process of opening local bond markets marks a crucial stride for emerging economies aiming for deeper integration into the global financial realm.

Recent developments involving J.P. Morgan, Bloomberg, and FTSE Russell underscore the growing recognition of India's financial market potential.

As India embarks on this journey, it must adeptly navigate complexities, carefully weigh risks and benefits, and adapt to the evolving global financial landscape for enduring success and stability.

Hybrid Vehicles Could be a Cleaner Solution for India than EVs for the Next Decade (Indian Express)

  • 31 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

Calculations by HSBC Research show overall carbon emissions are lower in hybrids compared to electrics. India's electric mobility plan is currently focused on battery electrics. But as global examples show, there are challenges to the wider adoption of EVs in India.

Context:

  • HSBC Research recommends India prioritize hybrid vehicles as a crucial step towards full electrification over 5-10 years.
  • Hybrid cars offer lower emissions compared to traditional and electric vehicles, with emissions likely to converge within a decade.
  • Combining internal combustion engines with onboard electric motors, hybrids provide a balanced propulsion approach.
  • This strategy aligns with India's sustainability goals, bridging the gap towards complete electrification in transportation.

Why does Hybrid Vehicles are a Good Medium-term Solution?

  • Hybrid vehicles are an effective medium-term solution for India's transportation needs as it progresses towards full electrification.
  • Hybrids, along with compressed natural gas cars, offer practical advantages over the next 5-10 years.
  • They are deemed critical not only for cost-effectiveness but also for India's decarbonization efforts.
    • Hybrids emit 133 g/km of total (well-to-wheel) carbon emissions, compared to 158 g/km for electric vehicles, making hybrids at least 16% less polluting.
  • This analysis factors in not just tailpipe emissions but also considers emissions from vehicle operations (tank-to-wheel) and the entire lifecycle, including crude mining, refining, and power generation.

For How Long Is This Situation Expected to Hold?

  • The convergence of emissions between electric vehicles (EVs) and hybrids is anticipated within 7-10 years.
    • Currently, in India, non-fossil fuel sources account for 26% of power generation, with a blended emission rate of 716g/kWh.
    • The emissions from hybrid cars and EVs will align once non-fossil fuel power generation in India reaches 44%.
  • Even with a projected 40% share of non-fossil fuels by 2030, hybrids are predicted to emit 8% less than EVs, although this reduction will be half of the current 16%.

What are the Challenges Faced by Battery Electric Vehicles (BEVs)?

The global push for battery electric vehicles (BEVs) faces several challenges:

  • Upfront Subsidy: BEV adoption, as seen in Norway, the US, and China, heavily relies on state subsidies.
    • However, in countries like India, direct subsidies often benefit middle or upper-middle-class buyers, raising equity concerns.
  • Charging Infrastructure: Investing in charging networks, as demonstrated by Norway and China, significantly boosts EV adoption.
    • However, India's charging infrastructure lags, with only about 2,000 operational public charging stations, posing a challenge, especially considering the dominance of two- and three-wheelers.
  • Electricity Source: Unlike countries with renewable-heavy grids, India largely relies on coal-fired plants.
    • This raises questions about the environmental benefits of EVs and highlights the need for cleaner energy generation.
  • Value Chain: India's reliance on lithium-ion batteries exposes the vulnerability in the global supply chain, primarily dominated by a few countries.
    • Diversification strategies are crucial to mitigate risks and ensure sustainable battery production.

What are the Difference Between Hybrid and Electric Vehicles?

  • Hybrid Vehicles: Hybrid vehicles utilize a combination of an internal combustion engine (usually gasoline-powered) and an electric motor.
    • These vehicles can operate on both gasoline and electricity, either separately or in tandem.
    • The environmental impact of hybrid vehicles is typically lower than that of traditional gasoline-powered vehicles due to their ability to switch to electric power, reducing fuel consumption and tailpipe emissions.
    • However, they still rely partially on fossil fuels and produce emissions during combustion.
  • Electric Vehicles: Electric vehicles (EVs) are powered solely by electricity stored in batteries.
    • They produce zero tailpipe emissions, making them cleaner and more environmentally friendly than hybrid vehicles and traditional internal combustion engine vehicles.
      • However, the overall environmental impact of EVs depends on factors such as the source of electricity generation.
    • If the electricity comes from renewable sources like solar or wind, EVs can have a significantly lower environmental footprint compared to hybrid vehicles.

Does Electric Vehicles Pollute More than Hybrid Vehicles?

It's not accurate to say that electric cars pollute more than hybrid cars in general. However, there are specific contexts where electric cars might appear to have a higher environmental impact than hybrids.

  • One such context is during the manufacturing process. Electric cars typically require large batteries, which involve the extraction of raw materials like lithium and cobalt.
    • The extraction and processing of these materials can result in environmental degradation and pollution.
    • Additionally, the manufacturing process for electric cars may require more energy compared to hybrid vehicles.
  • Another factor is the source of electricity used to charge electric cars.
    • If the electricity comes from fossil fuels like coal or natural gas, then the overall environmental impact of electric cars may be higher than that of hybrids, which can partially rely on gasoline.
    • However, as renewable energy sources like solar and wind power become more prevalent, the environmental benefits of electric cars increase significantly.
  • In terms of operational emissions, electric cars produce zero tailpipe emissions, while hybrids emit pollutants when running on gasoline.
    • However, hybrids still produce fewer emissions than traditional gasoline-powered vehicles.

What About Other “Clean Vehicles”?

  • Apart from electric cars, hydrogen fuel cell vehicles offer another zero-emission alternative.
  • Unlike electric vehicles, which draw power from charging stations, hydrogen fuel cell cars generate electricity internally.
  • They utilize a fuel cell that combines hydrogen from an onboard tank with oxygen from the air, emitting only water vapour and warm air.
  • While hydrogen fuel cell cars hold promise for decarbonizing industries like aviation and shipping, they face challenges.
  • They are less common and pricier than electric cars, with lower energy efficiency.
  • Moreover, the environmental impact of hydrogen production varies: "green hydrogen" sourced from renewable energy is scarce, while most hydrogen is currently derived from "grey" or "blue" processes, which involve emissions or carbon capture complexities.

Conclusion

While hybrid vehicles offer a transitional solution, electric vehicles remain pivotal in reducing emissions. Overcoming challenges in charging infrastructure and energy sourcing is vital for maximizing their environmental benefits. Hydrogen fuel cell vehicles show promise but require significant advancements. A holistic approach, including innovation and policy support, is crucial for realizing the potential of clean mobility solutions.

 

 

The problem with India’s science management (The Hindu)

  • 20 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

As India remoulds its scientific establishment, the utility of scientists being given administrative tasks needs to be questioned.

Context:

  • Sustained economic progress which can satisfy national ambition is invariably fuelled by scientific advances translated into deployable technologies.
  • This has been the inevitable global experience since the onset of the Industrial Revolution.
  • The government is overhauling India’s science establishment, which includes setting up the new National Research Foundation (NRF) and restructuring the Defence Research and Development Organisation (DRDO).
  • In this scenario, a frank assessment of the current administrative ability to simultaneously optimise Indian science’s efficiency and resilience is necessary.

What are the Problems with India’s Scientific Advancement?

India has a long and rich history of scientific innovation. However, in recent years, the country's science management has come under increasing scrutiny. There are several problems with India's science management including:

  • Lack of Funding in Research and Development (R&D): One of the most pressing issues is a lack of funding.
    • India spends a relatively small percentage of its GDP on research and development, compared to other developed countries.
      • For instance, India allocates only about 0.7% of its GDP to R&D, a considerably lower figure compared to global leaders like the United States (3.5%) and China (2.4%).
    • This lack of funding has led to a brain drain of talented scientists, who are leaving India in search of better opportunities.
  • Budgetary Challenges: The modest commitment to R&D stems from broader budget constraints, competing priorities, and a historical emphasis on immediate socio-economic needs.
    • This presents a challenge in fostering a robust scientific ecosystem on a limited budget.
  • Lack of Coordination: Another problem with India's science management is a lack of coordination.
    • There are many different government agencies and departments that are involved in science and technology, but there is often a lack of communication and cooperation between them.
    • This can lead to duplication of effort and a waste of resources.
  • Inadequacies in Budget Allocation by Scientific Administration: The current scientific administration struggles to identify and invest in high-impact projects.
    • For instance, in 2022, the Indian Space Research Organisation ranked eighth in space launches, lagging in key technologies.
    • Similar setbacks are evident in nuclear energy, genomics, robotics, and artificial intelligence.
  • Lack of Strategic Planning and Execution: Beyond expenditure, the challenge extends to strategic planning and execution of scientific projects.
    • Failure to adapt swiftly to emerging technologies and allocate resources judiciously has resulted in India falling behind in crucial fields.
  • Inconsistent Long-Term Funding: A major concern is the absence of consistent long-term funding for vital projects, especially when faced with occasional setbacks.
    • Steady funding, despite occasional failures, is crucial for a resilient and effective scientific management system.
  • Finally, India's science management is often criticized for being too bureaucratic. The process of getting funding for research projects can be long and complex, and it can be difficult for scientists to get the support they need to succeed.

The Role of Senior Scientists in India’s Science Administration:

  • Diverse Responsibilities Impacting Focus: Senior scientists in India often juggle multiple responsibilities, including academic pursuits, administrative duties, and leadership positions.
    • This dispersion of focus can lead to inefficiencies and a lack of dedicated attention to critical administrative tasks.
  • Lack of Administrative Skills: The assumption that successful scientists can seamlessly transition into effective administrators overlooks the distinct skills required for scientific work versus administration.
    • Managing institutions, allocating resources, and making organizational decisions demand specific skills not necessarily possessed by accomplished scientists.
  • Insufficient Training for Administrative Roles: Inadequate training makes it challenging for scientists to excel in administrative roles.
    • Tasks like metric selection, conflict resolution, and setting priorities require skills not inherently developed through scientific training.
    • Administration involves translating policy into outcomes, a skill not typically prioritized in scientific training.
  • Conflicts of Interest and Quality Control Issues: The dual roles of scientists as academics and administrators can result in conflicts of interest within institutions.
    • Academic rivalries, bureaucratic challenges, and compromised quality control may emerge, leading to issues like plagiarism, unethical publication practices, and compromised scientific outcomes.
  • Nationwide Transfer System Absence: The absence of a nationwide transfer system for scientists and science administrators exacerbates issues such as competition and egotism.
    • The lack of mobility within the system can contribute to internal divisions and hinder the progress of scientific careers and projects.
  • Internal Control Challenges: Allowing individuals within the system to regulate it can lead to clear drawbacks, impacting the impartiality and effectiveness of science administration in India.

Challenges in India's Science Administration: A Historical Perspective

  • Concentration of High-End Equipment: Economic constraints post-independence led India to concentrate on high-end scientific equipment, notably in institutions like the IITs.
    • This concentration birthed gatekeepers, controlling access to critical resources and establishing a hierarchical structure where a few institutions wielded disproportionate influence.
  • Gatekeepers and Institutional Captures Concept: Over time, these gatekeepers solidified their positions, accumulating power, government support, and institutional control.
    • This system created an environment where young scientists navigated a complex web of influence, paying tributes to those controlling vital resources.
  • Impact on Scientific Careers: The gatekeeping system not only influenced resource access but also shaped career trajectories.
    • The nexus between institutional power and individual careers became pivotal, with appointments, awards, and international recognition often tied to maintaining favourable relations with gatekeepers.
  • Normalization of Unethical Practices: The gatekeeping system has normalized unethical practices within Indian science.
    • High plagiarism rates, paid publications in questionable journals, and undisclosed dealings for government funding have become ingrained, compromising the ethical standards of scientific research.
  • Stifling Genuine Scientific Outcomes: This erosion of ethical standards doesn't just compromise research quality but stifles genuine scientific outcomes.
    • Scientists in conflict with this system face hurdles, hindering promising careers and perpetuating a culture where personal connections often outweigh merit.

A Comparative Analysis of the U.S. Model and Indian Science Administration:

  • U.S. Model: In the U.S., scientists chosen for administrative roles are identified early in their careers and undergo targeted training for managerial tasks.
    • The emphasis is on maintaining a distinct separation between scientific pursuits and administrative responsibilities.
  • Indian Scenario: In contrast, India's science administration traditionally involves senior scientists taking up administrative roles without a clear separation between scientific and administrative functions.
    • This integrated approach poses challenges, as the skill sets needed for effective scientific research often differ significantly from those crucial for efficient administration.

Conclusion

As India pursues economic and strategic progress, challenges in science management hinder its research and development, causing a lag in innovation compared to other developed nations. To remedy this, increasing funding for research and development is crucial, along with enhancing coordination among government agencies and streamlining the funding process for research projects. By addressing these issues, India has the potential to emerge as a global leader in science and technology, bringing substantial benefits to its economy and society.

Govt disburses Rs 4,415 crore under PLI scheme; low job creation a concern (Indian Express)

  • 18 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

Recently, the central government has disbursed an incentive amount of Rs 4,415 crore under its flagship Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) schemes for as many as eight sectors.

News Summary:

  • The central government, through its flagship Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) schemes, has disbursed an incentive amount of Rs 4,415 crore until October in the current fiscal year across eight sectors.
    • In the fiscal year 2023-24, Rs 1,515 crore has been disbursed, compared to Rs 2,900 crore in 2022-23 when payments under the scheme commenced.
  • The government aims to achieve a disbursal target of Rs 11,000 crore by the end of this fiscal year.
    • According to official statements, the employment generation, both direct and indirect, has exceeded 6.78 lakh.
  • As of now, 746 applications have received approval in 14 sectors, with an expected investment exceeding Rs 3 lakh crore.
    • Notably, 176 MSMEs are among the beneficiaries of the PLI schemes, particularly in sectors like pharma and telecom.

What is the Production Linked Incentive Scheme (PLI)?

  • Production-linked incentive (PLI) schemes were first introduced in India in March 2020, mainly targeting three industries – Mobile Manufacturing and Electric Components, Pharmaceutical and Medical Device Manufacturing.
  • The PLI concept has since expanded to 14 sectors to boost India’s manufacturing capabilities and encourage export-oriented production.
  • The PLI schemes aim to develop capacities in the local supply chain, introduce new downstream operations, and incentivise investments into high-tech production.
  • Mechanism: Under the PLI scheme, both domestic and foreign companies receive financial incentives for manufacturing within India, with rewards calculated as a percentage of their revenue over up to five years.
  • Targeted Sectors: The 14 sectors covered by the scheme include mobile manufacturing, medical devices, automobiles and auto components, pharmaceuticals, drugs, speciality steel, telecom & networking products, electronic products, white goods (ACs and LEDs), food products, textile products, solar PV modules, advanced chemistry cell (ACC) batteries, and drones and drone components.
  • Incentive Structure: Incentives are determined based on incremental sales, with certain sectors like advanced chemistry cell batteries, textile products, and the drone industry having calculations considering sales, performance, and local value addition over five years.
    • Emphasizing research and development (R&D) investments aims to align the industry with global trends and enhance competitiveness in the international market.

Performance of the PLI Schemes:

  • Positive Export Growth: India has experienced a substantial boost in mobile handset exports, doubling from Rs 45,000 crore in FY22 compared to FY21, and further estimating exports to reach Rs 90,000 crore in FY23.
    • Additionally, in the pharmaceutical industry, India has successfully manufactured 35 active pharmaceutical ingredients (APIs), reducing reliance on imports, particularly from countries like China.
    • Overall, the PLI schemes have contributed to exports exceeding Rs 3.2 lakh crore, notably driven by sectors such as electronics, pharmaceuticals, food processing, and telecom.
  • Challenges in Implementation: Despite positive outcomes, the implementation of PLI schemes has faced sluggish progress.
    • In the fiscal year 2021-22, the government disbursed a mere Rs 10 crore in incentive payouts for mobile handsets, white goods (ACs and LEDs), and the food processing industries combined.
    • However, this figure increased to Rs 2,874 crore in 2022-23, according to DPIIT.
    • During the initial two years of the seven-year initiative, only 1.46 per cent of the total Rs 1.97 lakh crore incentive outlay was disbursed.
    • Some major industries are yet to fully embrace the scheme or initiate significant activities under it.
  • Limited Job Creation: The slow start in implementation has resulted in a lower-than-projected number of jobs created.
    • While the PLIs were anticipated to generate 6 million new jobs over seven years, the actual figure stands at approximately 300,000 jobs, representing only 5 per cent of the total projection, between 2020 and early 2023.

Challenges in the PLI Scheme:

  • Assembly Emphasis Over Value Addition: The subsidy structure within the Mobile and allied Component Manufacturing segment of the PLI scheme primarily incentivizes the completion of phone assembly in India, neglecting the consideration of the actual value added through manufacturing processes.
    • Consequently, many mobile phone components are still imported, encompassing critical elements such as display screens, cameras, batteries, and printed circuit boards.
  • WTO Constraints and Limited Value Addition: India faces constraints imposed by WTO rules, preventing the tying of PLI subsidies to domestic value addition.
    • While India aspires to produce chips domestically, the intricate nature of chip manufacturing and the inability to mandate significant domestic value addition present challenges to realising this goal.
  • Ambiguity in Incentive Disbursement: Despite the establishment of an Empowered Committee to oversee fund disbursement across various sectors, the process lacks transparency and clear criteria.
    • The absence of well-defined parameters for ministries and departments to determine incentive allocations raises concerns about the fairness and effectiveness of the scheme.
  • Absence of a Centralized Database: A notable deficiency in the PLI scheme is the lack of a centralized database that comprehensively captures critical information such as increased production, exports, and the creation of new jobs.
    • This information gap complicates the evaluation process, introducing administrative complexities.
    • The resulting ambiguity impacts transparency, potentially leading to mischief, thereby weakening the overall policy structure.

Way Forward

The government should evaluate the efficacy of the PLI scheme, taking into account factors such as job creation, cost per job, and the identified challenges contributing to its limited success. Before expanding the scheme to encompass additional sectors, a thorough understanding of its limitations is essential, along with proactive measures to address the underlying issues.

 

India’s multidimensional poverty rate is down to 11.28% in 2022-23 from 29.17% in 2013-14 (Indian Express)

  • 16 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

The share of India’s population living in multidimensional poverty is estimated to have fallen to 11.28 per cent in 2022-23 from 29.17 per cent in 2013-14, according to a discussion paper released by NITI Aayog on Monday.

Context:

  • According to the NITI Aayog’s discussion paper, multidimensional poverty in India declined from 29.17% in 2013-14 to 11.28% in 2022-23, with about 24.82 crore people moving out of this bracket during this period.
  • The national multidimensional poverty measures simultaneous deprivations across three equally weighted dimensions of health, education, and standard of living that are represented by 12 sustainable development goals-aligned indicators, according to NITI Aayog.

Key Highlights of the MPI in India Since 2005-2006:

  • Overall Decline in Multidimensional Poverty: As per the NITI Aayog discussion paper, India's multidimensional poverty has decreased from 29.17% in 2013-14 to 11.28% in 2022-23.
    • The trend signifies the upliftment of 24.82 crore people from this bracket during the specified period.
  • State-wise Decline: "Uttar Pradesh registered the largest decline in the number of poor with 5.94 crore people escaping multidimensional poverty during the last nine years followed by:
    • Bihar at 3.77 crore
    • Madhya Pradesh at 2.30 crore and
    • Rajasthan at 1.87 crore.
  • NITI Aayog's approach to measuring multidimensional poverty involved considering 12 indicators aligned with the sustainable development goals.
    • These indicators encompass crucial aspects such as nutrition, child and adolescent mortality rates, maternal health, educational attainment, access to basic amenities like clean cooking fuel, sanitation, safe drinking water, electricity, and housing, as well as possession of assets and bank accounts.
  • "Significant initiatives covering all dimensions of poverty have led to 24.82 crore individuals escaping multidimensional poverty in the last 9 years.
    • As a result, India is likely to achieve its SDG target of halving multidimensional poverty well before 2030.
  • The report emphasized impactful programs, such as Poshan Abhiyan and Anemia Mukt Bharat, which have markedly improved accessibility to healthcare services, significantly reducing deprivation.
    • Managing one of the globe's largest food security initiatives, the targeted Public Distribution System (PDS) under the National Food Security Act encompasses 81.35 crore beneficiaries, ensuring the distribution of food grains to both rural and urban populations.
  • "The government's persistent dedication and resolute commitment to enhancing the lives of the most vulnerable and deprived have been instrumental in this accomplishment.

What is Multidimensional Poverty?

  • Poverty can have several negative effects at once. Some of these include inadequate nutrition or health, a lack of power or clean water, low-quality employment, or insufficient education.
  • The true nature of poverty cannot be fully captured by concentrating only on one aspect, such as income.
  • Multidimensional Poverty, as a metric, goes beyond income or consumption alone.
    • It encompasses deprivations in education and access to essential infrastructure, considering factors beyond the monetary aspect.
    • The measurement is conducted at the $2.15 international poverty line, as defined by the World Bank (in 2017 purchasing power parity terms), ensuring a comprehensive assessment of poverty that extends beyond monetary value.

What is the National Multidimensional Poverty Index (MPI)?

  • Prepared By: NITI Aayog
  • Objective: The aim is to gauge poverty across various dimensions, complementing existing statistics based on per capita consumption expenditure.
  • Purpose of the National MPI: Provides an enhanced, high-level overview of poverty at the national level.
    • Acts as a complement to monetary poverty measures.
    • Furnishes information crucial for shaping effective policy initiatives.
    • The MPI is founded on the individual or household profile of overlapping or "joint" deprivations experienced by each person.
  • Key Features: Serves as an incentive for leaving no one behind and prioritizing the most marginalized.
    • Adaptable to the national context and maintains transparency.
  • Credible Methodology: India's national MPI employs a methodology developed by the Oxford Poverty and Human Development Initiative (OPHI) and the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP), aligning with the globally accepted and robust standards used in the publication of the Global Multidimensional Poverty Index.
  • Three Macro Dimensions: The National MPI is structured around three macro dimensions, each with specific indicators and weights, outlined below –

Significance of the MPI:

  • Crucial Public Policy Instrument: The establishment of India's National MPI introduces a pivotal public policy instrument that monitors multidimensional poverty, facilitating evidence-based and targeted interventions to ensure inclusivity and prevent any individuals from being left behind.
  • Assesses the Efficacy of Multi-Sectoral Interventions: It offers valuable insights into the effectiveness of multi-sectoral interventions aimed at addressing diverse facets of poverty.
  • Encompasses Diverse Deprivations: Notably, functioning as a metric for multidimensional poverty, it captures the myriad and simultaneous deprivations experienced by households.
  • Comprehensive Analysis Across All Tiers: This report conducts a thorough analysis of the headcount ratio and intensity of multidimensional poverty, encompassing national, State/UT, and district levels.

Conclusion

The National MPI in India has been conceived as an all-encompassing tool, expediting purpose-driven initiatives to gauge and systematically eliminate multidimensional poverty. The dimensions of the index have demonstrated their efficacy in identifying and facilitating precise policy interventions aimed at achieving targeted goals.

NITI Aayog

  • NITI Aayog, established on January 1, 2015, succeeded the Planning Commission with a distinctive focus on a 'Bottom-Up' approach.
  • Embracing the vision of 'Maximum Governance, Minimum Government' and echoing the ethos of 'Cooperative Federalism,' NITI Aayog serves as a dynamic institution facilitating collaborative decision-making.

Functional Components: NITI Aayog operates through two principal hubs-

  • Team India Hub: This hub is a crucial interface, fostering effective communication and collaboration between the states and the central government.
    • It plays a pivotal role in aligning the diverse interests of different regions in the spirit of cooperative federalism.
  • Knowledge and Innovation Hub: This hub is dedicated to enhancing the intellectual capacity of NITI Aayog. It functions as a think tank, driving innovative ideas and knowledge creation to inform policy decisions and contribute to the overall development agenda.

INDICES of NITI Aayog:

  • Composite Water Management Index
  • District Hospital Index
  • Export Preparedness Index
  • Global Innovation Index
  • India Innovation Index
  • Multidimensional Poverty Index
  • School Education Quality Index
  • SDG India Index
  • State Energy Index
  • State Health Index

Muizzu asks India to withdraw troops by March 15: Why are Indian soldiers in Maldives? (Indian Express)

  • 15 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

Maldivian President Mohamed Muizzu has asked India to withdraw its military personnel from his country by March 15, a senior official said in Male on Sunday, nearly two months after Maldives sought their removal.

Context:

  • Maldives President Mohamed Muizzu has asked India to withdraw its military personnel from the Indian Ocean archipelago nation by mid-March.
  • A high-level core group, set by both nations, to negotiate the withdrawal of troops held its first meeting at the Foreign Ministry in Male on Sunday with Indian High Commissioner Munu Mahawar present.
  • President Muizzu had, during his presidential campaign, asserted that he would accomplish the removal of Indian troops from the Maldives, and had made a formal request to India to withdraw its military personnel soon after assuming office.

How many Indian troops are in the Maldives?

  • India does not have a large military presence in the Maldives contrary to claims by “India Out” protesters that thousands of Indian troops were stationed.
  • There are only 88 Indian military personnel in the Maldives, according to the latest government figures.
    • They have been based there for more than a decade.

What are Indian troops doing in the Maldives?

  • India and Maldives have been allies and defence cooperation has been a crucial part of the relationship.
  • Indian soldiers have been training Maldivian troops in combat and reconnaissance and helping in rescue operations.
  • According to the terms of the bilateral agreement between the two nations, Indian officers were sent to train the Maldivian National Defence Force.
  • The Indian troops are unarmed and mostly assist the Maldivian government with search and evacuation operations, (and) medical evacuation operations.
  • From January 2019 until late 2023, 495 lives have been saved because of medical evacuations and special training conducted by the Indian personnel in the Maldives with the help of two helicopters gifted by India.
  • Also, at least 50 joint search and rescue missions have been conducted.

Have Indian troops conducted military operationss in the Maldives?

  • Yes, Indian troops conducted one military operation in the Maldives in November 1998 called “Operation Cactus”.
  • A group of Maldivians led by businessman Abdullah Luthufi attempted a coup to overthrow the government of Maumoon Abdul Gayoom.
    • They had the backing of Sri Lanka’s People’s Liberation Organisation of Tamil Eelam (PLOTE), a Tamil secessionist group.
  • At least 80 mercenaries of the group entered Male on 3 November 1988 on board a hijacked Sri Lankan fighter.
    • They captured key infrastructure – airports, ports, television and radio stations.
    • While Gayoom was escorted to a safe house, the mercenaries took several hostages including ministers.
  • As the situation escalated in the Maldives, India’s chief of army staff General VN Sharma got a call from the foreign service officer at the Prime Minister’s Office.
    • He asked if the Indian army could help as there was an emergency in the Maldives.
  • Indis agreed and three armed forces – the army, navy, and air force came to the neighbour's rescue.
    • Two hostages were among 19 killed during Operation Cactus.
    • The rest of the casualties were mercenaries.
  • India, thus, helped in thwarting a major political crisis in the Indian Ocean Region.

Anti-India sentiments among a section of the Maldives’ population:

  • In 2020, the “India Out” campaign started as on-ground protests in the Maldives which later spread widely across social media platforms.
    • By the second half of 2021, it had developed into an active and visible political campaign.
  • The supporters of the campaign had claimed that it had been started to protest against what they called Indian military presence in the country.
  • They had actively targeted all aspects of India-Maldives bilateral relations.
  • During the International Yoga Day celebration in 2022, organised by the Indian High Commission in the capital Male which was held at the Galolhu Stadium was disrupted by a group around 150 of protesters.
    • The mob attacked participants practising yoga and vandalised property.

What are the major factors behind the fear and suspicion?

  • The controversy started after two Dhruv Advanced Light Helicopters were given by India to the Maldives in 2010 and 2015.
    • These were used for search and rescue operations, maritime weather surveillance and for airlifting patients.
    • However, some in Progressive Party of Maldives  (PPM) hinted that India was attempting to create a military presence in Maldives as these were military choppers.
  • The other causes of concern are the perceived lack of transparency in dealings with India under the rule of Ibrahim Mohamed Solih and the reliance on India for maritime security.
  • UTF Harbour Project: Under this agreement, India was to develop and maintain a coastguard harbour and dockyard at Uthuru Thilafalhu, a strategically located atoll near the capital Malé.
    • Sections of Maldivian media had speculated that the UTF project would be turned into an Indian naval base.

India-Maldives Bilateral Relations:

  • India and Maldives share strong ties encompassing ethnic, linguistic, cultural, religious, and commercial dimensions, fostering close and multi-faceted relations.
  • The historical trajectory of their relationship is marked by significant milestones:
  • Diplomatic Relations: India, recognizing Maldives' independence in 1965, established diplomatic ties promptly.
    • During the 1988 coup attempt, India's rapid intervention under Operation Cactus solidified trust and laid the groundwork for enduring bilateral relations.
    • Timely assistance during natural calamities, such as the 2004 Tsunami and the 2014 water crisis, showcased India's commitment to the well-being of the Maldives.
    • The Swift dispatch of medical aid in 2020 during a measles outbreak demonstrated India's continuous support.
  • Security and Defence Cooperation: A comprehensive Defence Action Plan was signed in April 2016, consolidating defence collaboration.
    • India plays a crucial role in training the Maldivian National Defence Force, meeting 70% of their training needs over the last decade.
    • Annual Defence Cooperation Dialogues, initiated in July 2016, underscore the strategic partnership.
  • Development Cooperation: India's significant developmental contributions include projects like:
    • Indira Gandhi Memorial Hospital
    • Maldives Institute of Technical Education (now Maldives Polytechnic)
    • India-Maldives Faculty of Hospitality & Tourism Studies
    • Technology Adoption Programme in the Education Sector
    • National College for Police and Law Enforcement
    • Infrastructure & Connectivity Projects under Exim Bank Line of Credit ($800 million)
  • Economic and Trade Relations: India emerged as Maldives' second-largest trade partner in 2022, with bilateral trade totalling $501.82 million.
    • In November 2022, India provided financial assistance of US$ 100 million to address economic challenges.
    • The RBI-Maldives Monetary Authority Currency Swap Agreement in December 2022 further strengthened economic ties.
  • Tourism and Indian Community: Indians constitute the largest group of tourists in the Maldives, with over 200,000 visitors in 2023.
    • The Indian community, the second-largest expatriate group, contributes significantly to various sectors, with approximately 22,000 individuals.
    • Notably, 25% of doctors and teachers in the Maldives are Indian nationals.
    • The India-Maldives relationship continues to evolve, reflecting shared values, mutual interests, and a commitment to fostering prosperity and stability in the region.

What does President Muizzu want?

  • Muizzu is a pro-China leader and wants Indian troops to leave the country.
  • This was among the pre-poll promises he made during his campaign.
  • His main theme was about an alleged threat to the Maldives’ sovereignty by some Indian military personnel on an island, part of his party’s years-long “India out” strategy.
  • After his just-concluded visit to China, President Muizzu, announced plans to reduce the country’s dependency on India, including securing imports of essential food commodities and medicine and consumables from other countries.
  • Maldives is also reportedly reviewing more than 100 bilateral agreements with India signed by the previous government.

Way Forward

The trajectory of India-Maldives relations is shaped by evolving geopolitical dynamics, leadership shifts, and shared regional interests. India's steadfast commitment to the Maldives involves going beyond customary measures to foster a comprehensive partnership. Any abrupt actions jeopardizing this carefully cultivated alliance would potentially inflict more harm on the Maldives than on India. Recognizing and proactively addressing these challenges, both nations can skillfully navigate the intricacies of their relationship, paving the way for a more robust, resilient, and mutually advantageous partnership in the future.

Optimizing Logistics Costs in India and the Critical Role of Accurate Data (Indian Express)

  • 11 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

Logistics has been talked about for a long time and India has also focused on improving performance. We are now getting some precise data on measurement and quantification.

Context:

  • The logistics sector plays a vital role in shaping a nation's economic dynamics, and its intricacies are of paramount importance.
  • India's steady progress in the Logistics Performance Index (LPI) rankings reflects positive advancements in its logistics sector, showcasing a dedicated effort to boost global competitiveness and streamline trade logistics efficiency.
  • Consequently, a comprehensive examination of India's logistics landscape, involving the analysis of key indicators, methodologies, and recent reports, becomes essential for a nuanced comprehension of its achievements and hurdles.

The Logistics Performance Index (LPI):

  • Developed by the World Bank, the Logistics Performance Index (LPI) stands as a crucial tool for evaluating a country's trade logistics efficiency and effectiveness.
  • Comprising six key dimensions—customs, infrastructure, international shipments, logistics competence, tracking and tracing, and timeliness—the LPI offers a comprehensive insight into a nation's logistical capabilities.

India's Position in the LPI:

  • Despite inherent methodological considerations in survey-based indices, the 2023 LPI places India at the 38th position out of 139 countries, showcasing an improvement from its 2014 rank of 54.
  • This positive trajectory aligns with India's 2022 vision to reduce logistics costs, enhance LPI rankings, and establish a data-driven decision support mechanism.
  • Furthermore, the introduction of PM Gati Shakti in 2021, though its impact is not immediately reflected in the LPI 2023 due to understandable time lags.

Assessing Logistics Costs in India:

  • Economic Survey 2022-23: The Economic Survey 2022-23 reveals a consistent range of logistics costs in India, hovering between 14-18% of the Gross Domestic Product (GDP).
  • This starkly contrasts with the global benchmark of 8%, highlighting the challenges in achieving optimal efficiency in India's logistics operations.
  • The survey emphasizes the need for strategic interventions to address the significant gap between India's logistics costs and international standards.
  • Dun and Bradstreet (D&B) 2018 Report: An in-depth examination of seaport business costs by a Dun and Bradstreet (D&B) 2018 report indicates that the cost is approximately 15-16% of the consignment value.
  • Notably, there is considerable variation across ports, emphasizing the necessity of a nuanced approach in evaluating logistics costs within specific segments of the supply chain.
  • NCAER Report (December 2023): The National Council of Applied Economic Research (NCAER) introduces a fresh perspective in its report on logistics costs in India.
  • Acknowledging the absence of official estimates, the report references various private sector and academic institutions' estimates.
  • Employing meticulous methodology, including supply and use tables, the report provides a nuanced and precise estimation.
  • According to this report, logistics costs in 2021-22 ranged between 7.8% and 8.9% of GDP, showcasing a decline over time with a transient increase in 2017-18 and 2018-19.
  • CII-Arthur D Little Report (2020): Delving into logistics costs throughout the supply chain, the CII-Arthur D Little Report (2020) estimates them to be around USD 400 billion, equivalent to 14% of India's GDP.
  • Comparative assessments with global peers, including the United States, Europe, and China, expose a competitiveness gap of USD 180 billion.
  • The report underscores the urgency of addressing these high logistics costs to bolster India's economic competitiveness globally.

Logistics Cost Performance Across States:

  • As per the Commerce Ministry's LEADS (Logistics Ease Across Different States) report for 2023:
  • States are categorized into four groups - coastal, landlocked, north-east, and Union Territories.
  • States exhibiting strong performance are termed achievers.
  • States with moderate performance are referred to as fast movers.
  • States with below-average performance are labelled as aspirers.
  • Performance of Coastal States:
  • Approximately 75% of export cargo is traced back to coastal states.
  • Among coastal states, Andhra Pradesh, Gujarat, Karnataka, and Tamil Nadu are notably successful.
  • However, lagging behind in performance are Goa, Odisha, and West Bengal.
  • While most states, including Goa and Odisha, have implemented a state-level logistics policy, West Bengal, ranking lowest in the coastal category, lacks one.

Difficulties and Variations for Policymakers in Developing a Successful Plan for India's Logistics Sector:

  • Methodological Variations: A key challenge in deciphering logistics cost reports stems from the diverse methodologies employed across different studies.
  • These reports adopt varied approaches, ranging from consignment value percentages to supply and use tables, to estimate logistics costs.
  • The resulting disparities in methodologies contribute to variations in reported figures, necessitating careful consideration when drawing conclusions.
  • India's Global Competitiveness: The consistent comparison with global benchmarks, particularly the 8% GDP threshold for logistics costs, prompts questions about India's competitiveness on the international stage.
  • Reports consistently highlight a competitiveness gap, with logistics costs surpassing global averages.
  • This has implications for India's capacity to attract investment, participate in global trade, and position itself advantageously in the interconnected world economy.

Shifting Perspectives on India’s Logistics Costs:

  • Reassessing Established Views: The evolving discourse on logistics costs in India challenges conventional perceptions regarding the country's logistics expenses.
  • As methodologies advance and newer reports offer more accurate estimations, the narrative may transition from a broad acknowledgement of high costs to a more nuanced comprehension of the sector's intricacies.
  • This evolving narrative carries implications for businesses, investors, and policymakers, prompting them to stay informed of the latest data and adjust strategies accordingly.
  • Encouraging Trends Amid Challenges: While challenges persist, positive trends also emerge from the data.
  • The improvement in India's Logistics Performance Index (LPI) rankings over time and the downward trend in logistics costs, as highlighted by the NCAER report, present a more optimistic outlook.
  • These positive signals indicate that endeavors to enhance logistics efficiency and reduce costs may be gaining momentum, pointing towards a positive trajectory for India's logistics landscape.

Conclusion

The logistics landscape in India is intricate, featuring indices like LPI, varied cost assessments, and state-level nuances that collectively contribute to a holistic understanding.

The recent NCAER report establishes a crucial methodological groundwork for future deliberations, challenging existing perceptions and emphasizing the importance of accurate measurement in assessing India's logistics capabilities.

In the pursuit of elevating its global position in logistics, India must adopt a nuanced approach that considers both macro and micro perspectives. This approach is vital for fostering sustainable growth and driving efficiency improvements throughout the nation.

After ECI guidelines, charting a path to disability inclusion in politics (Indian Express)

  • 10 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

Recently, the Election Commission of India released an advisory for political parties to follow disability-sensitive terminologies and be more inclusive of persons with disabilities.

Context:

  • On December 21, the Election Commission of India released a significant advisory, encouraging political parties to embrace terminology that is sensitive to disability issues.
  • This initiative is designed to enhance communication that is inclusive of individuals with disabilities, guarantee the accessibility of information, and advocate for inclusion within the structures of political parties.
  • This proactive measure is especially noteworthy in light of recent instances where national leaders have used disparaging language about disabilities in their election speeches, contributing to the creation of an "attitudinal barrier" as defined by the Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act, 2016.
    • For example, in September 2023, Tamil Nadu leader A Raja compared Sanatan Dharma to people with leprosy and HIV in a derogatory manner.

What is Disability?

  • Disability is characterized by a limitation or absence of capacity to engage in typical human activities, often resulting from an impairment.
  • According to the United Nations Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities (UN CRPD), individuals with disabilities are those facing long-term physical, mental, intellectual, or sensory challenges, which, in conjunction with societal barriers, hinder their complete involvement in community life.
  • This issue holds substantial importance in public health, particularly in nations undergoing development, such as India.
  • The International Day of Persons with Disabilities, marked on December 3rd by the United Nations, is dedicated to globally raising awareness about challenges related to disabilities.

About the Rights of Persons with Disabilities (PwD) Act, 2016:

  • An Important Legislative Framework for PwD: This legislation plays a significant role in safeguarding and advancing the rights and privileges of persons with disabilities (PwD).
    • Replacing the Persons with Disabilities (Equal Opportunities, Protection of Rights and Full Participation) Act, 1995, the 2016 Act marks a significant stride toward promoting the rights and inclusivity of persons with disabilities across India.
  • Rights and Entitlements: Clearly articulating the rights and entitlements of persons with disabilities, the Act ensures their right to equality, protection against discrimination, and active participation in society.
  • Education: The Act guarantees free education for persons with disabilities up to 18 years of age and advocates for inclusive educational practices.
  • Employment: Promoting equal opportunities, the Act prohibits discrimination and mandates both government and private sector establishments to reserve a designated percentage of jobs for persons with disabilities.
  • Reservation in Higher Education: The Act advocates for the reservation of seats in higher educational institutions for persons with disabilities.
  • Special Employment Exchanges: Recognizing the importance of facilitating employment, the Act mandates the establishment of special employment exchanges.
  • Accessibility: Highlighting the significance of barrier-free access, the Act stresses the need for inclusive designs in public buildings, transportation, and information and communication technologies.
  • Healthcare: Ensuring access to affordable and quality healthcare services, the Act prioritizes the healthcare needs of persons with disabilities.
  • Legal Capacity: Acknowledging the right to equal recognition before the law, the Act supports the decision-making capacity of persons with disabilities.
  • Social Security: The Act advocates for social security and welfare measures to support the well-being of persons with disabilities.
  • National and State Advisory Boards: To oversee effective implementation, the Act calls for the establishment of National and State Advisory Boards.
  • Offences and Penalties: Prescribing penalties for offences against persons with disabilities, the Act ensures accessible legal proceedings for their protection.

Important Features of the Disability-Inclusive Communication Guidelines from ECI:

  • Prohibition of Ill-Health Terminologies: The guidelines emphasize refraining from using ill-health terminologies when referring to individuals with disabilities.
    • This prohibition aims to counteract the use of language that may stigmatize or marginalize people with disabilities, as demonstrated by instances such as Tamil Nadu leader A Raja's derogatory comparison in September 2023, highlighting the urgent need for corrective measures.
  • Prevention of Dehumanization and Stereotyping: Another vital aspect of the guidelines is the call to avoid dehumanizing portrayals and the perpetuation of stereotypes related to Persons with Disabilities (PwDs).
    • Instances of national leaders using disability as a demeaning tool during election speeches underscore the deep-rooted problem these guidelines aim to address.
    • By discouraging language that fosters stereotypes, the guidelines work to dismantle attitudinal barriers identified under the Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act, 2016.
  • Recognition of Legal Implications: The advisory acknowledges the legal implications of violating these communication guidelines.
    • Breaches, especially in disability-inclusive communication, could subject political parties and their members to action under section 92 of the Rights of PwD Act.
    • This section, a punitive provision for offences against PwDs, underscores the severity of the issue.
    • Therefore, the guidelines not only aim to enhance communication but also contribute to legal measures protecting the rights and dignity of PwDs.

Ideas to Improve the Effectiveness of ECI's Guidelines:

  • Need for a Uniform Mandate: Despite the critical nature of these guidelines, a thorough analysis reveals a potential area for improvement.
    • While guidelines within the disability-inclusive communication category use mandatory language like ‘should’ and ‘shall,’ others, especially those related to inclusion within the political party framework, employ discretionary terms such as ‘may.’
    • To bolster their impact, a uniform mandate across all categories is essential, establishing a consistent and enforceable framework for political parties.
  • Incorporate Guidelines into Model Code of Conduct (MCC): These guidelines are not yet part of the MCC.
    • The advisory notes that a breach of guidelines related to disability-inclusive communication could lead to action under section 92 of the Rights of PwD Act, but it remains unclear whether other breaches will invoke this provision.
    • Section 92 serves as a punitive measure for offences against PwDs, and the guidelines should be integrated into the MCC, similar to gender guidelines, to fortify their enforcement.
  • Address Ambiguity in Phraseology: There is some ambiguity within the guidelines regarding specific phraseology, such as the mention of words like "blind," "deaf," and "dumb" as incorrect terminologies.
    • While their translation in Hindi or another language might be derogatory, these are technical terms for people with visual, hearing, and speech disabilities.
    • A detailed list of disability-sensitive words and phraseology, aligned with the UN Disability Inclusion Strategy, could guide the ECI in providing clarity.
  • Incorporate a Chapter on Political Inclusion in the National Policy: The draft National Policy for PwD released last year lacked a dedicated chapter on political inclusion.
    • The ECI advisory emphasizes that political parties must strive to include PwDs at all levels and adhere to accessibility norms.
    • To catalyze the political inclusion of PwDs, a dedicated chapter on political inclusion should be integrated into the national policy, aligning with the principles of Article 29 of the UN Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities.
  • Creation of a Database on Legislators with Disabilities: Currently, there is no data on the number of legislators with disabilities, and the ECI's nomination forms lack a column on disability.
    • This absence of data significantly contributes to the political exclusion of PwDs.
    • The ECI must address this gap, possibly by introducing a column on disability in nomination forms and affidavits during elections, as a second step towards fostering the political inclusion of PwDs.

Conclusion

The Election Commission of India's recent advisory introducing disability-sensitive guidelines for political parties marks a significant stride towards fostering inclusivity in the political sphere. Nevertheless, to unlock the complete potential of these guidelines, key improvements are imperative. These include adopting a uniform and obligatory language, integrating the guidelines into the Model Code of Conduct (MCC), and adopting a holistic approach to political inclusion within national policies. By addressing these facets, India has the opportunity to shape a more inclusive political landscape that upholds and empowers individuals with disabilities.

Why is child marriage still high in West Bengal? (The Hindu)

  • 08 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News

A recent study on child marriage in India published in the Lancet noted the overall decrease in child marriage across the country but pointed out that four States, mainly Bihar (16.7%), West Bengal (15.2%), Uttar Pradesh (12.5%), and Maharashtra (8.2%) accounted for more than half of the total headcount burden of child marriages in girls.

Key Findings of the Report:

  • In a recent study published in the Lancet Global Health, findings reveal that one in five girls and one in six boys in India are still marrying below the legal age.
  • Utilizing data from five National Family Health Surveys spanning 1993 to 2021, researchers underscore the urgent need for strengthened national and state-level policies to eradicate child marriage by 2030.
  • Notable disparities in the prevalence of girl and boy child marriages across states and Union Territories were observed during the study period.
  • While all states, except Manipur, showed a decline in girl child marriage between 1993 and 2021, specific states like Bihar, West Bengal, Uttar Pradesh, and Maharashtra accounted for over half of the total burden.
  • For boys, Gujarat, Bihar, West Bengal, and Uttar Pradesh accounted for more than 60% of the burden.
  • Jharkhand exhibited the largest percentage increase in child marriage headcount (53.1%) between 1993 and 2021.
  • Despite most states and Union Territories witnessing a decrease in the headcount of girl child marriage, Uttar Pradesh demonstrated the most substantial absolute decrease, contributing to about one-third of the nationwide decrease from 1993 to 2021
  •  Conversely, West Bengal saw the largest absolute increase, with over 500,000 more girls married as children during the same period.

What is Child Marriage?

  • Child marriage is a social phenomenon prevalent in some Indian societies, where adults marry young children, usually girls under the age of fifteen.
  • Another form involves parents arranging future marriages for children who only meet when reaching marriageable age, at which point the wedding ceremony occurs.

Child Marriages in India have undergone significant change:

  • From 47.4% in 2005-06, child marriage decreased to 26.8% in 2015-16.
  • In the last five years, it further declined by 3.5% points, reaching 23.3% in 2020-21, as per the latest National Family Health Survey-5 data.
  • Despite an overall trend of decline, the current rate of 23.3% remains distressingly high in a country with a population of 141.2 crore.
  • Eight states surpass the national average in child marriage prevalence, with West Bengal, Bihar, and Tripura having over 40% of women aged 20-24 married below 18, according to NFHS data.
  • Some states, like Madhya Pradesh (23.1% in 2020-21 from 32.4% in 2015-16), Rajasthan (25.4% from 35.4%), and Haryana, have demonstrated a reduction in child marriages.

What is the Global Scenario?

  • UNICEF data reveals that annually, 12 million girls enter childhood marriages.
  • The 2030 UN Sustainable Development Goals target the eradication of harmful practices, including child, early, and forced marriages, along with female genital mutilations, under goal 5.
  • Despite notable progress in South Asia over the past decade, where the risk of a girl marrying before 18 has decreased by over a third, dropping from nearly 50% to below 30%, the advancements are insufficient, and progress remains uneven.

Impact of Child Marriage:

  • Beyond being a human rights violation and a recognized form of sexual and gender-based violence, child marriage significantly affects maternal and child health.
    • A recent tragedy at Murshidabad Medical College and Hospital saw 10 infants die within 24 hours, with the majority born with extremely low birth weight.
    • Murshidabad, an economically challenged district, grapples with a high prevalence of child marriages in West Bengal.
  • NFHS-5 highlights that 55.4% of women aged 20-24 years in the district are married before the age of 18, marking an increase from NFHS-4, which reported a figure of 53.5%.

Legal Measures in India:

  • Various laws, such as the Prohibition of Child Marriage Act, 2006, and the Protection of Children from Sexual Offences Act, 2012, work toward safeguarding children from human rights violations.
  • The Prohibition of Child Marriage (Amendment) Bill, 2021 aims to raise the minimum marriage age for women from the current 18 years to 21 years.

Reasons to Raise the Minimum Age of Marriage for Females:

  • Addressing Education and Employment Disparities: Women often face inequalities in accessing education and employment due to early marriages.
    • Early marriage can restrict women from pursuing education and economic opportunities.
    • Raising the minimum age for marriage can encourage more women to pursue higher education and seek employment.
  • Impact of Early Marriage on Women's and Children's Health: Early marriages and subsequent early pregnancies have significant implications for the nutritional levels, overall health, and mental wellbeing of both mothers and children.
    • Underage mothers are more vulnerable to reproductive health challenges, malnutrition, postpartum hemorrhage, and susceptibility to sexually transmitted diseases.

Govt. Initiatives for Preventing Girl Child Marriage:

  • Beti Bachao Beti Padhao: Among various girl child welfare schemes, Beti Bachao Beti Padhao is widely recognized.
    • Translating to "Save the Girl Child, Educate the Girl Child," it focuses on women empowerment and creating an inclusive ecosystem.
    •  The scheme aims to promote the safety of girl children before and after birth.
  • Sukanya Samriddhi Yojana (SSY): Launched in 2015, SSY promotes the welfare of girl children.
    • It encourages parents to invest in funds for the girl's future studies and marriage expenses.
  • Balika Samriddhi Yojana: This central government scheme supports girls in financially vulnerable sections.
    • Ensures the enrollment and retention of girl children in primary and secondary schools, emphasizing quality education.

To avoid worst-case scenarios, the need for fiscal correction is all the more vital this election year (The Hindu)

  • 05 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News

The recent observations by the International Monetary Fund (IMF) sparked reactions from the Indian Government in which it states that India’s general government debt, including the Centre and States, could be 100% of GDP under adverse circumstances by fiscal 2028.

Context:

  • India’s economic landscape has undergone scrutiny as the International Monetary Fund (IMF) made two noteworthy observations.
  • The IMF report not only acknowledged India’s effective inflation management but also presented a balanced outlook for the country’s economic growth.
  • To analyze the IMF’s insights on India’s economic situation, one must understand the broader global context in which these observations were made.

Insights from the IMF on India's Economic Landscape:

Exchange Rate Reclassification:

  • A pivotal observation by the IMF is the reclassification of India's exchange rate regime from floating to a stabilised arrangement.
  • This reclassification raises questions about the flexibility of the currency and its alignment with market forces, indicating a perception of a more controlled and stabilised environment, potentially influenced by central bank (RBI) interventions.

Debt Sustainability Concerns:

  • The IMF expresses significant concerns about the long-term sustainability of India's debts.
  • The report projects that, under adverse circumstances, India's general government debt could reach 100% of GDP by fiscal 2028.
  • This highlights the imperative for careful debt management strategies, particularly as India confronts substantial investment requirements to meet climate change mitigation targets and enhance resilience to climate stresses and natural disasters.
  • It's crucial to note that these IMF insights are framed within the global context of increasing public debts, recognizing that India's economic challenges are interconnected within a complex web of global economic phenomena.

The Global Debt Scenario in a Broader Context:

Dual Nature of Debt: Accelerator vs. Drag on Development:

  • Globally, government borrowings have been instrumental in fostering development, supporting infrastructure projects, social programs, and economic growth.
  • However, the IMF's concerns emphasize the potential drawbacks of this strategy, as limitations in accessing financing, rising borrowing costs, currency devaluations, and sluggish growth can transform debt from a catalyst into a hindrance.
  • The United Nations' assertion that countries face a challenging dilemma between servicing their debt or serving their people encapsulates the inherent difficulty in managing debt for sustainable development.

Surging Global Public Debt Trends:

  • According to the UN, global public debt has surged more than fourfold since 2000, surpassing the tripling of global GDP over the same period.
  • In 2022, global public debt reached USD 92 trillion, with developing countries contributing nearly 30% to the total, and China, India, and Brazil accounting for a significant portion (70%).
  • The acceleration of debt in developing nations over the past decade is attributed to heightened development financing needs exacerbated by the COVID-19 pandemic, the cost-of-living crisis, and the impact of climate change.

Asymmetric Burden on Developing Countries:

  • The burden of debt is unevenly distributed between developed and developing nations, with developing countries often facing higher interest rates even without considering exchange rate fluctuations.
  • This well-documented disparity reveals that countries in Africa, for instance, borrow at rates four times higher than the United States and eight times higher than Germany, undermining the debt sustainability of developing economies.

Increasing Debt Levels and the IMF's Perspective:

  • The number of countries grappling with high levels of debt has surged from 22 in 2011 to 59 in 2022, highlighting persistent debt challenges in developing nations.
  • The IMF's projections for India should be understood in the broader context of a global debt conundrum.

Challenges Facing India's Economic Landscape:

Increasing Public Debt:

  • The central government's debt, amounting to ?155.6 trillion, constitutes 57.1% of GDP as of March 2023, with state government debts accounting for about 28% of GDP.
  • Despite claims by the Finance Ministry that India's public debt-to-GDP ratio has marginally increased from 81% in 2005-06 to 84% in 2021-22, the 2022-23 figures indicate a return to 81%, surpassing targets set by the Fiscal Responsibility and Budget Management Act (FRBMA).

Balancing Public Debt for Sustainability:

  • A significant challenge for India lies in achieving a delicate balance to ensure that public debt remains within sustainable levels.
  • IMF projections indicate that India's general government debt, inclusive of both central and state governments, could reach 100% of GDP by fiscal 2028 under adverse circumstances, underscoring the need for meticulous debt management strategies.

Stagnant Credit Ratings:

  • Despite being acknowledged as the fastest-growing major economy globally, India's sovereign investment ratings have remained stagnant since August 2006.
  • Both Fitch Ratings and S&P Global Ratings have maintained India's credit rating at 'BBB-' with a stable outlook, the lowest investment-grade level, attributed to factors like weak fiscal performance and a burdensome debt stock.

Emerging Fiscal Challenges:

  • Disruptions caused by the COVID-19 pandemic contribute to the current high debt-GDP ratio, with potential fiscal slippage in FY24 according to India Ratings and Research.
  • Increased expenditure on employment guarantee schemes and subsidies, such as a higher fertiliser subsidy and overspending on the MGNREGA, pose challenges to fiscal stability.

Managing Short-Term Challenges and Election Dynamics:

  • As India approaches general elections, increased subsidies are expected, but questions arise about the impact on employment growth and livelihoods in rural areas.
  • Navigating these short-term challenges in an election year becomes a critical test for maintaining fiscal discipline and avoiding worst-case scenarios.

Way Forward:

  • While the exchange rate reclassification raises potential concerns about excessive management, the focus on debt sustainability underscores the broader call for prudence in managing fiscal policies.
  • The IMF's observations highlight the delicate balancing act India must perform—maintaining a stable exchange rate while ensuring long-term debt sustainability.
  • There is a pressing need for new and preferably concessional sources of financing, increased private sector investment, and the implementation of carbon pricing or equivalent mechanisms to address long-term risks.

Conclusion:

Navigating the multifaceted challenges outlined by the IMF, India finds itself at a crucial juncture, necessitating a strategic approach to economic management. The IMF's observations, addressing concerns about debt sustainability and the reclassification of the exchange rate regime, underscore the importance of nuanced decision-making and long-term planning.

Qatar court drops death penalty for 8 Indians, Govt says sentences reduced (Indian Express)

  • 29 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

A Qatar court has reduced the death sentences awarded to eight former Indian Navy personnel last month in connection with an alleged case of espionage.

What is the Case?

  • Arrest of Eight Navy Personnel: On August 30, 2022, eight former Indian Navy personnel, accompanied by two others, were apprehended under undisclosed charges and subsequently placed in solitary confinement.
    • These individuals were affiliated with Al Dahra Global Technologies and Consultancy Services, a defense services provider company.
    • Sources indicate that the Indian nationals were privately engaged with the company to supervise the induction of Italian small stealth submarines U2I2.
    • The company's previous website, now defunct, mentioned its provision of training, logistics, and maintenance services to the Qatari Emiri Naval Force (QENF).
  • Charges Against the Men: The specific charges against the individuals have not been publicly disclosed; however, media reports suggest that the eight Indians are accused of espionage on behalf of Israel.
  • Death Penalty for Navy Veterans: In March 2023, after multiple unsuccessful bail pleas, the trial for the Navy veterans commenced, culminating on October 26, 2023, with the imposition of the death sentence on all eight men.
  • India's Appeal: In November 2023, the Ministry of External Affairs (MEA) announced the filing of an appeal, revealing that its legal team possessed details of the charges.
    • The Indian ambassador in Doha visited the incarcerated individuals on December 3, providing consular access.
    • This access occurred shortly after Prime Minister Modi met Qatar’s Emir Sheikh Tamim bin Hamad Al-Thani during the COP28 summit in Dubai on December 1.

What Options Has India Explored?

  • One avenue involves legal challenges, a step that has been acknowledged and has temporarily mitigated the sentence.
  • Concurrently, India has actively utilized diplomatic channels to engage with the Qatari authorities.
  • The families have submitted a mercy plea to the Emir of Qatar, leveraging the tradition of pardons granted during Ramadan and Eid, with support from the Indian government.

India-Qatar Bilateral Relations:

  • Economic Ties: In recent years, the trade volume between India and Qatar has witnessed fluctuations.
    • During the fiscal year 2015-2016, trade between the two nations reached an impressive $10 billion.
    • However, recent years have seen a slight decline in trade due to falling gas and oil rates in the international market.
  • Trade Statistics and Import Dependence: In the fiscal year 2022-23, India's total imports from Qatar amounted to $16.81 billion, primarily in fossil fuels like liquefied petroleum gas (LPG), plastics, and petrochemical products.
    • Conversely, India's exports to Qatar during the same fiscal year were valued at $1.97 billion, covering items such as cereals, copper articles, iron and steel products, vegetables, fruits, spices, and processed food items.
  • Investment Interests and Collaborative Projects: Qatari authorities, particularly the Qatar Investment Authority, express interest in investing in India, focusing on infrastructure development, roads, highways, economic corridors, and projects related to gas and fertilizers.
    • India reciprocates with a keen interest in direct investments in liquefied natural gas, chemical industries, fertilizer production, urea, petrochemicals, and infrastructure projects.
  • India's Growing Energy Needs: India, with its growing energy needs, has a robust energy partnership with Qatar, dating back to a 1990 agreement.
    • This commitment involves India purchasing 7.5 million tonnes of LNG annually for 25 years.
    • The collaboration was further strengthened in December 2015, with Qatar agreeing to augment its LNG supply to India by an additional one million tonnes annually.
  • Collaboration in Defence Affairs: India's defense collaboration with Qatar focuses on training, mutual participation in conferences and events, and visits by Indian Navy and Coast Guard vessels.
    • Notably, the joint naval exercise 'Zair-Al-Bahr' showcases significant cooperation between the Indian and Qatari Navies.
    • Both nations are committed to combating the financing of terrorism.
  • Cultural Interaction: The Indian Cultural Centre (ICC) plays a crucial role in overseeing Indian community associations in Doha.
    • Qatar's role as a co-sponsor of the United Nations General Assembly Resolution designating June 21 as the International Day of Yoga is highly valued by India.
  • Indian Diaspora in Qatar: The Indian community in Qatar, numbering approximately 700,000, constitutes the largest expatriate group.
    • Their contributions span diverse sectors, including projects related to the Qatar 2022 FIFA World Cup, and annual remittances to India are estimated at around 750 million dollars.
  • Indispensable Role of Qatar as an LNG Supplier: The cornerstone of the bilateral trade relationship lies in liquefied natural gas (LNG), where Qatar plays a pivotal role by meeting 80% of India's LNG requirements.
    • India imported a total of 19.85 million tonnes of LNG in the fiscal year 2022-23, with approximately 54% of this LNG.
    • This significant reliance on Qatar, both through long-term contracts and spot purchases, underscores the challenge of diversifying India’s sources of LNG.

Challenges in India-Qatar Bilateral Relations:

  • BJP Spokesperson's Controversy: The initial strain in the relationship arose in June 2022 when BJP spokesperson Nupur Sharma made derogatory references to the Prophet on a TV show.
    • Qatar was the first country to object and demanded a public apology from India.
  • Jailing of Navy Personnel: The second significant challenge involves the imprisonment of eight ex-Navy personnel.
    • This development caught New Delhi off guard, particularly given the substantial Indian expatriate community in Qatar, where 800,000 Indians live and work.
  • Israeli-Gaza Conflict: The news of the death penalty for the Indians coincided with heightened tensions in the Middle East due to the Israeli bombardment of Gaza.
    • Qatar, with its strong sympathy for the Palestinians, has played a mediating role, including securing the release of American hostages from Hamas captivity.
    • Qatar's diplomats are actively engaged as regional mediators in the ongoing crisis.

Maximizing Opportunities for Strengthened Relations:

  • Safeguarding Expatriate Workers: India must engage in negotiations aimed at ensuring the protection of the rights and well-being of its expatriate workers in Qatar, who have encountered various labour-related challenges.
  • Cultural Exchange and Soft Power: Recognizing the widespread popularity of Bollywood among Qataris, India should actively explore diverse avenues for cultural exchange to amplify its soft power influence.
    • This cultural diplomacy can serve as a bridge for deeper understanding between the two nations.
  • Cooperation in the Education Sector: The presence of esteemed Western universities in Qatar presents an opportunity for Indian students to access quality education abroad without the usual constraints of long distances and high living costs.
    • Strengthening cooperation in the education sector can further elevate the resilience and depth of the India-Qatar relationship, even in the face of seemingly intractable diplomatic challenges.
  • Collaborative Environmental Sustainability: India and Qatar can forge a collaborative path towards fostering a cleaner and more energy-efficient environment.
    • Joint efforts in environmental sustainability can contribute to shared global goals.

Indian banks reports card: Asset quality improves to fresh 10-year high, balance sheet grows by highest in 9 years (The Hindu)

  • 28 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

Indian banks continued to show improvement in their asset quality, with the gross non-performing asset (GNPA) ratio reaching a new decadal low as of September-end, according to a report by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI).

Key Points from the 'Trend and Progress of Banking in India' Report:

  • The Gross Non-Performing Assets (GNPA) ratio of Scheduled Commercial Banks (SCBs) reached a decade-low of 3.9% by the end of March 2023, further declining to 3.2% by the end of September 2023.
  • In the fiscal year 2022-23, approximately 45% of the reduction in Gross Non-Performing Assets (GNPAs) of SCBs was attributed to recoveries and upgrades.
    • The consolidated balance sheet of banks witnessed a notable growth of 12.2% in 2022-23, marking the highest in 9 years.
  • The share of Public Sector Banks (PSBs) in the consolidated balance sheet decreased from 58.6% in March 2022 to 57.6% in March 2023, while private banks saw an increase from 34% to 34.7%.
    • As of March 2023, PSBs accounted for 61.4% of total deposits and 57.9% of total advances.
  • With inflation persisting above the target, there is a possibility that monetary policy could remain in restrictive territory for an extended period.
  • Acknowledging the growing interconnectedness between banks and Non-Banking Financial Companies (NBFCs), the report suggests that NBFCs diversify their funding sources and reduce reliance on bank funding.
  • The central bank expresses concerns about banks lending to borrowers with influence, highlighting moral hazard issues that may compromise pricing and credit management.
  • The Indian banking system is well-positioned for improvement, boasting better asset quality, high capital adequacy, and robust profitability.
  • The financial indicators of NBFCs are anticipated to strengthen further, contributing to the overall resilience of the financial sector.

What are Non-Performing Assets (NPAs)?

  • Non-performing assets (NPAs) refer to loans or advances in which the principal or interest payments have been overdue for a period exceeding 90 days.
    • In the context of banks, loans are considered assets due to the significant income generated through interest payments.
  • When borrowers, whether individuals or corporations, fail to meet their interest obligations, the asset turns 'non-performing' for the bank, as it ceases to contribute to the bank's earnings.
  • As per the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) guidelines, banks must publicly disclose their NPAs and report them to the RBI regularly.

The classification of NPAs includes:

    • Substandard assets: Loans that have been non-performing for up to 12 months.
    • Doubtful assets: Assets that have remained in the substandard category for a period of 12 months.
    • Loss assets: Assets deemed uncollectible, with little value, making their continuation as bankable assets unwarranted.
  • NPA Provisioning involves setting aside a certain percentage of the loan amount as a provision.
    • The standard rate of provisioning in Indian banks ranges from 5-20%, depending on the business sector and borrower's repayment capacity.
    • In the case of NPAs, Basel-III norms require 100% provisioning.

Key metrics for understanding the NPA situation include Gross NPA (GNPA) and Net NPA (NNPA):

  • GNPA: Represents the total value of gross NPAs for a bank in a specific quarter or financial year.
  • NNPA: Obtained by subtracting the provisions made by the bank from the gross NPA, providing the precise value of NPAs after specific provisions.
    • NPA Ratios express NPAs as a percentage of total advances, offering insights into the recoverability of total advances. For example:
  • GNPA ratio: The ratio of total GNPA to total advances.
  • NNPA ratio: Utilizes net NPA to determine the ratio to total advances, considering the specific provisions made by the bank.

Government and RBI Initiatives to Address NPAs:

To tackle the issue of Non-Performing Assets (NPAs), the Indian government has implemented a series of comprehensive measures in collaboration with the Reserve Bank of India (RBI).

  • Establishment of a Bad Bank: National Asset Reconstruction Ltd (NARC), operates as an asset reconstruction company with the primary objective of purchasing distressed loans from banks, thereby alleviating them of the burden of NPAs.
    • Once acquired, NARC endeavors to sell these problematic loans to distressed debt buyers.
    • Additionally, the government has established the India Debt Resolution Company Ltd (IDRCL) to facilitate the sale of stressed assets in the market.
  • Empowering Banks through the SARFAESI Act, 2002: The Securitization and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security Interest (SARFAESI) Act, enacted in 2002, empowers banks and financial institutions to take possession of collateral assets and execute their sale for the recovery of outstanding dues.
    • Crucially, this process does not necessitate intervention from the court.
    • The SARFAESI Act also provides provisions for enforcing security interests, allowing banks to issue demand notices to defaulting borrowers.
  • Holistic Approach with the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC), 2016: The Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC) establishes a comprehensive framework for the resolution of insolvency and bankruptcy in India.
    • It is designed to expedite the resolution process for stressed assets, fostering a creditor-friendly environment.
    • Under the IBC, both debtors and creditors have the authority to initiate insolvency proceedings against defaulting borrowers.
    • The creation of the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) and the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (IBBI) ensures effective oversight of the resolution process.

Significance of NPA Recovery:

  • The recovery of NPAs assumes paramount importance in safeguarding the interests of depositors and stakeholders.
  • Emphasizing compromise settlements, the focus should be on achieving maximum dues recovery with minimal expenses and within an expedited timeframe.
  • In the pursuit of compromise settlements, public sector banks are urged to prioritize the interests of the tax-paying public over the borrowers.
  • This aligns with the broader goal of ensuring that resolutions serve the greater public good.

 

PLI is good for high-end manufacturing, but industrial policy is the best bet for mass job creation (Indian Express)

  • 27 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

  • While India has experienced positive outcomes from liberalization efforts, it is important to acknowledge a significant shortcoming—the country did not successfully establish a robust manufacturing foundation and underwent premature de-industrialization.
  • It's crucial to recognize that no nation has achieved industrialization solely through deregulation.
  • To facilitate the structural transformation of the economy, the implementation of a well-crafted industrial policy becomes imperative, with thoughtfully selected import restrictions serving as a key component of this policy mechanism.

The Make in India (MII) Initiative and Its Goals:

  • Make in India Campaign: Officially inaugurated by Prime Minister Modi in September 2014, the Make in India campaign is a strategic effort aimed at advancing manufacturing, attracting foreign direct investment (FDI), fostering innovation, and generating employment opportunities within the nation.

Objectives of the Make in India:

  • Advancing Manufacturing: The initiative strives to elevate India's status to a global manufacturing hub by encouraging both domestic and international companies to establish manufacturing units within the country.
  • Attracting Foreign Investment: Make in India seeks to allure foreign direct investment by streamlining the business environment, simplifying regulatory norms, and providing incentives to foreign companies for investing in India's manufacturing sector.
  • Infrastructure Enhancement: Emphasizing infrastructure development, the campaign focuses on improving key elements such as roads, ports, and logistics to ensure the seamless operation of manufacturing units.
  • Skill Development: Recognizing the pivotal role of a skilled workforce in a thriving manufacturing sector, Make in India incorporates initiatives to enhance the skill sets of the Indian workforce, aligning them with the requirements of modern manufacturing.
  • Innovation and Technology: The campaign places a significant emphasis on fostering innovation and integrating modern technology into manufacturing processes.
    • This strategic approach aims to enhance efficiency and competitiveness in the manufacturing sector.

Differentiating Made in India (MII) from Previous Policies:

  • The Make in India campaign, launched in 2014, represents a departure from the self-sufficiency doctrine that India adopted in the 1970s.
    • It does not bring back memories of the licensing raj or import-substituting industries of the past.
  • While concerns have been expressed about the implementation of Make in India, particularly in certain sectors where tariff duties are raised to provide protection and incentivize the establishment of domestic industries, it is crucial to note that the campaign is fundamentally different.
    • Worries about a potential spread of protectionist tendencies to other sectors, though possibly overstated, are not entirely unfounded, especially for those who experienced the challenges of the 1970s and 1980s.
  • During those years, indiscriminate protectionism led to shortages, black markets, and widespread rent-seeking, all ostensibly in the name of the poor and distributive justice.
    • Producers who benefited from such protection actively advocated for its continuation.
    • Importantly, considering that an average mobile phone manufactured in India consists of 80-85 percent imported content (India Cellular and Electronics Association, 2022), it is empirically evident that Make in India significantly differs from the concept of self-sufficiency.
  • Given these empirical distinctions, it is imperative to move beyond baseless comparisons and recognize the unique nature of the Make in India initiative.

Evaluation of Commitments and Performance of Make in India:

  • A Sizeable Domestic Market Falls Short of Competitiveness in Exports: Make in India (MII) encompasses two related concepts, namely Made in India and Make for India, with MII serving as the foundational and overarching policy.
    • While Made for India focuses on manufacturing for the domestic market, it is essential to recognize that a substantial domestic market alone does not substitute for the crucial aspect of export competitiveness.
      • Historical examples, such as Japan, Korea, and China, underscore that export competitiveness has been a common feature of nations that have experienced significant economic growth.
  • The necessity of an Effective Make in India Operation: Made in India functions as a branding strategy, promoting manufacturers rooted in Indian factors of production—land, labor, capital, entrepreneurship, technology, etc.
    • However, the success of Made in India hinges on the effectiveness of the broader Make in India operation.
  • Alignment with National Manufacturing Policy (NMP 2011): Make in India was launched as a follow-up to prior initiatives, particularly the National Manufacturing Policy (NMP) of 2011, which aimed to cultivate a robust and competitive manufacturing sector.
    • The NMP 2011 identified challenges such as inadequate physical infrastructure, a complex regulatory environment, and insufficient availability of skilled manpower hindering manufacturing growth.
    • The policy set ambitious targets, including raising the manufacturing contribution to GDP from a stagnant 15 percent since the 1980s to at least 25 percent and generating 100 million additional jobs.
  • Dynamic Objectives of Make in India: Beyond the objectives outlined in the NMP 2011, Make in India aspires to elevate India into a global design and manufacturing export hub.
    • In essence, Make in India envisions a transformation where India becomes a manufacturing powerhouse catering to the global market.

Requirement for Supplementary Industrial Policy Measures During Ongoing PLI Implementation:

  • Diversified Articulation Beyond Production Linked Incentive (PLI): Beyond the current implementation of the Production Linked Incentive (PLI) scheme, there is a crucial need for an additional industrial policy tailored to sectors such as toys, readymade garments, and footwear.
    • A more nuanced and sector-specific articulation of industrial policies is essential to meet the unique requirements of diverse sectors.
  • Emphasis on Job Creation: Industrial policy must prioritize job creation, especially in a country abundant in labour but with average educational attainments and skills.
    • Policies should be designed to create productive job opportunities, particularly focusing on labour-intensive manufacturing and opening avenues for women in the workforce.
  • Addressing the Jobless Growth Critique: Acknowledging the criticism of jobless growth, the absence of quality jobs with social protection has contributed to this narrative.
    • Industrial policies should explicitly target mass job creation, considering both job quality and the provision of social protection.
  • Navigating the Challenges of Inclusive Policy Formulation: The government should confront the complexities of formulating industrial policies that foster mass job creation, especially in comparison to policies solely focused on exports.
    • Inclusive policies that align with the overarching goal of creating high-quality jobs and ensuring social protection are essential.
  • Treating Job Creation as the Benchmark: The effectiveness of industrial policies should be assessed based on their impact on mass job creation in India.
    • This underscores the significance of addressing concerns related to jobless growth and prioritizing policies that generate inclusive and high-quality employment opportunities.
  • Confronting Labor Market Challenges: India's labour market research indicates the prevalence of low-paying, low-productivity, and largely informal jobs in the unorganized sector.
    • With more than 99 percent of India's 63 million micro, small, and medium enterprises (MSMEs) in the unorganized sector, there is limited flexibility for creating productive jobs.
  • The assessment of how Make in India, complemented by other policies, has addressed these challenges is crucial.
    • However, the lack of frequent and short-interval official data poses a significant hurdle, necessitating attention to enhance policy efficacy through more regular and timely data collection.

Conclusion

A thorough examination of the nation's circumstances and capabilities is imperative for effective government decision-making.

  • India must formulate an industrial policy that extends the advantages of technological advancements beyond just the privileged laptop class.
  • However, it is essential to exercise caution in steering discussions on industrial policy, avoiding the pitfalls of showmanship, theoretical oversimplification, or misleading historical comparisons.
  • The global landscape demands that India adopt a substantive industrial policy, placing a genuine emphasis on the significance of manufacturing.
  • In this context, it is evident that there is no substitute for a well-considered and serious industrial policy.

Why India cannot Afford to Repeat its Nuclear Weapons Mistakes with AI (Indian Express)

  • 07 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

As India hosts the GPAI summit 2023, discussions are raised on the comparison of the nuclear revolution with advancement in Artificial Intelligence.

Context:

  • As India prepares to host the GPAI summit next week, the current discourse on the geopolitics of Artificial Intelligence inevitably revolves around the nuclear experience.
  • India, with its complex nuclear history, now has the opportunity to reflect on and apply lessons from its nuclear journey in addressing the challenges and opportunities presented by AI.

What is Artificial intelligence (AI)?

Artificial Intelligence (AI) is the development of computer systems that emulate human intelligence, encompassing tasks like learning, reasoning, and problem-solving.

  • Significance in Healthcare: AI aids in disease diagnosis, treatment planning, and data-driven healthcare solutions.
  • Economic Impact: AI optimizes financial processes, enhancing trading strategies, risk management, and overall efficiency in various industries.
  • Automation and Efficiency: In manufacturing and logistics, AI-driven automation streamlines processes, improving productivity.
  • Personalized Experiences: AI enhances user experiences through personalized content recommendations, virtual assistants, and language translation.
  • Research and Development: AI accelerates scientific discoveries, innovation, and problem-solving across diverse fields.
  • Autonomous Vehicles: AI contributes to the development of autonomous vehicles, improving safety and efficiency in transportation.
  • Global Impact: AI is a transformative force with the potential to reshape industries, and decision-making, and address complex challenges, underlining its significance in the technological and societal landscape.

Despite its benefits, ethical concerns include data privacy, bias, and potential job displacement, requiring careful management.

Comparisons Between Nuclear Revolution and Ongoing AI Revolution:

  • Profound Consequences: While inherently distinct, the nuclear revolution characterized by atomic bombs in 1945 shares notable similarities with the ongoing AI revolution.
  • Both revolutions carry far-reaching implications, with AI being perceived as potentially exerting even more sweeping and transformative impacts on the economy, society, and polity.
  • Resembling Governance Challenges: Issues surrounding AI governance closely parallel those faced at the onset of the nuclear age.
  • Common challenges encompass managing geopolitical implications, preventing misuse, and establishing international norms and institutions to govern AI.
  • Military AI Regulation Advocacy in Both Contexts: Similar to the nuclear era, there are calls to regulate military applications of AI, including proposals for a freeze on research and development pending a thorough assessment.
  • Despite these concerns, rapid advances in AI persist, echoing the historical trajectory of nuclear technology.
  • AI Dominance Race Discourse: In the discourse on AI, the US and China, akin to the US-Soviet dominance in the nuclear era, emerge as central figures.
  • Agreements between the US and China on AI are considered crucial for navigating the technological revolution.

Actions Taken to Tackle AI Governance Challenges:

  • Efforts to Navigate Competition: The United States is actively addressing competition in military AI with China, initiating discussions on regulatory measures.
  • This includes implementing restrictions on the supply of advanced chips to China, with the aim of slowing down AI development.
  • Proposals for Establishing International Norms and Initiatives: In response to potential negative consequences of the AI revolution, there is a proposal for the creation of international norms, drawing inspiration from the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) established for nuclear energy regulation.
  • Concepts such as the 'International Agency for Artificial Intelligence' (IAAI) and initiatives like the Global Partnership for Artificial Intelligence (GPAI) have been put forward.
  • Formation of Coalitions and Emphasis on Military Deterrence: The United States is actively building coalitions with like-minded partners to discuss AI development and effectively manage its impacts.
  • Initiatives such as GPAI, comprising 28 members, are integral to broader efforts, and alliances are being strengthened for military deterrence, particularly in relation to Russia and China.
  • Global Partnership on AI (GPAI): GPAI, a multi-stakeholder initiative launched in June 2020 with 15 members, seeks to bridge the gap between theory and practice in AI.
  • It supports cutting-edge research and applied activities on AI-related priorities and has since expanded to 29 members, including India.
  • The OECD serves as its secretariat.
  • Recent London AI Summit: The summit, held recently, aimed to harness the potential of AI for new knowledge, economic growth, advancements in human capabilities, and problem-solving.
  • A discussion paper released by the British government highlighted AI-related risks, from the spread of disinformation to potential misuse for harmful purposes.
  • The British Prime Minister emphasized the direct addressing of these concerns, assuring people that their safety would be prioritized while seizing the opportunities for a better future offered by AI.

Guiding Principles for India: Drawing Insights from Nuclear History to Navigate the AI Landscape

  • Pragmatic Stance over Idealism: India's historical pursuit of the "time-bound elimination of nuclear weapons" incurred significant costs, emphasizing the need for a pragmatic and strategic approach in dealing with the complexities of AI.
  • Seizing Collaborative Opportunities: Learning from past missed opportunities in nuclear cooperation, India should actively foster partnerships, particularly with the US, capitalizing on the existing momentum in joint efforts related to AI and emerging technologies.
  • Avoiding Exceptionalism: India's historical inclination towards exceptionalism and pursuing a third way in technological development poses challenges.
  • In the context of AI, recognizing the universality of science and technology is essential, promoting collaboration over isolationist postures.
  • Empowering the Private Sector: Unlike the government-led progress in nuclear and space endeavours, AI's evolution is primarily driven by the private sector in the West.
  • India must enhance the role of the private sector in AI research, development, and innovation for sustained growth.
  • Urgent Reforms for Global Competitiveness: While recent efforts to open up science and technology sectors are commendable, India must prioritize urgent and comprehensive reforms to strengthen its position in the global AI landscape.

Conclusion

When it comes to AI, India's policy is not characterized by the disarmament idealism that shaped its approach to nuclear weapons. Emphasizing pragmatic strategies and harnessing international partnerships are crucial elements that should underpin India's strategic approach to AI development. Recognizing the strategic significance of AI, it is imperative for India to avoid replicating past mistakes made in the realm of nuclear weapons with regard to AI.

Beyond Jammu and Kashmir: Why many states in India enjoy special provisions (Indian Express)

  • 16 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

On December 12, 2023, a unanimous decision by a 5:0 majority of Supreme Court judges clarified that Article 370 of the Indian Constitution is a facet of asymmetric federalism and does not imply internal sovereignty.

What is Asymmetric Federalism?

  • Asymmetric federalism involves the uneven distribution of powers and relationships within the political, administrative, and fiscal domains among the federal units comprising a federation.
  • This asymmetry can manifest in both vertical (between the center and states) and horizontal (among the states) dimensions.
  • It can arise not only from constitutional provisions but also from the practical implementation of administrative, political, and fiscal systems within a federation.
  • India's founding fathers acknowledged the importance of a diverse governance model that respects the unique cultural differences across the nation, allowing for a blend of self-rule within the framework of shared governance.

Why is it stated that India practices Asymmetric Federalism?

  • India's administrative structure comprises the Centre and the States as primary forms of administrative units.
    • However, additional forms exist, each designed to cater to specific local, historical, and geographical contexts.
  • In addition to the Centre and the States, India features Union Territories with a legislature, as well as Union Territories without a legislature.
    • Notably, territories like Puducherry and Delhi possess legislatures, while others under the Centre lack legislatures or a ministerial council for advisory purposes.
  • Even among territories with legislatures, distinctions arise.
    • Puducherry holds legislative powers over matters in the State List or Concurrent List applicable to the Union Territory.
    • In contrast, Delhi, with a similar scope, has exceptions in three areas: police, land, and public order are beyond its jurisdiction.
      • However, Parliament retains overriding powers over laws enacted by the Assembly in Union Territories.
  • Much like the non-identical powers of the Centre and the States, variations exist in the relationships between certain States and other constituent units of the Indian Union and the Centre.
  • This introduces a noticeable asymmetry in the functioning of India's federal system.

What is Article 370 of the Indian Constitution?

  • The most prominent illustration of asymmetry in Centre-State relations was evident in the special status enjoyed by Jammu and Kashmir until August 6, 2019, when the President announced the cessation of its special privileges.
  • Under Article 370, the State had the authority to maintain its separate Constitution, establish its criteria for 'permanent residents,' restrict outsiders from owning property, and have the prerogative to not automatically apply any Indian law to its territory.
    • Specific approval by its Assembly was required for the operation of Indian laws.
  • Jammu and Kashmir had the autonomy to formulate its Penal and Criminal Procedure Codes.
  • The President had the authority to notify, at intervals, the constitutional provisions that could be extended to the State, with or without modifications.

Is Jammu and Kashmir the only state to enjoy special powers under the constitution?

  • No, its not the only Indian state to enjoy such special provisions — 11 other states still continue to do as per the Indian Constitution.
  • The Part XXI of the Constitution consists of articles on Temporary, Transitional and Special Provisions of some states, other than Jammu and Kashmir.
    • In the Part, apart from Article 370, there are also Articles 371, 371A, 371B, 371C, 371D, 371E, 371F, 371G, 371H, 371I, and 371J – which provide special provisions to Maharashtra, Gujarat, Andhra Pradesh, Karnataka, Goa and six of the seven sister states of North East India — Nagaland, Assam, Manipur, Sikkim, Mizoram, Arunachal Pradesh.
  • However, Article 371I and Article 371E which deal with Goa and Andhra Pradesh respectively, do not offer any such special provisions to the state – and stand out from the rest.
  • Articles 370 and 371 have been the part of Indian Constitution since it came into force on January 26, 1950.
    • But Articles 371 A- I was incorporated later through various amendments under Article 368, which is described as the “power of Parliament to amend the Constitution and procedure therefor”.

The states and the Articles under which they enjoy special provisions:

  • Maharashtra and Gujarat (Article 371): The Governor of Maharastra has a special responsibility to establish “separate development boards” for regions like Vidarbha and  Marathwada, in Maharashtra; while Gujarat has the power to do so in Saurashtra and Kutch.
    • This was done to ensure “equitable allocation of funds for developmental expenditure over the said areas”, and “equitable arrangement providing adequate facilities for technical education and vocational training, and adequate employment opportunities” under the state government.
  • Nagaland (Article 371A): In Nagaland, the Indian Parliament cannot legislate in matters of Naga religion or social practices, Naga customary law and procedure, administration of civil and criminal justice involving decisions according to Naga customary law, and ownership and transfer of land and its resources, without the state Legislative Assembly’s nod.
    • These provisions were included in the Constitution after a 16-point agreement between the Centre and the Naga People’s Convention in 1960, which led to the creation of Nagaland in 1963.
    • It also gives the Governor a special responsibility for law and order situations in Nagaland, especially in case of internal disturbances occurring in the Naga Hills-Tuensang Area.
    • Also, there is a provision for a 35-member Regional Council for Tuensang district, which elects the Tuensang members in the Assembly.
    • A member from the Tuensang district is Minister for Tuensang Affairs.
  • Assam (Article 371B): Quite like Nagaland, The President of India may provide for the constitution and functions of a committee of the state Legislative Assembly consisting of members elected from the tribal areas of the state.
  • Manipur (Article 371C): Similar to Assam here as well, the President may provide for the constitution and functions of a committee of elected members from the Hill areas of the state in the Assembly for the modifications to be made in the rules of business of the Government.
    • It also entrusts “special responsibility” to the Governor to ensure its proper functioning, and report to the President every year regarding the administration of the Hill Areas of the State.
  • Andhra Pradesh (Article 371D, 371E): The President of India must ensure “equitable opportunities and facilities for the people” or ensure reservation in the matter of government jobs, education and other schemes by the state government.
    • The President also has power for direct recruitment to posts in any local cadre of the state government, and admissions in any university or educational institution in the state.
    • He is also entrusted for setting up an administrative tribunal outside the jurisdiction of the High Court to deal with issues of appointment, allotment or promotion in state civil services.
    • Article 371E allows the establishment of a Central University in Andhra Pradesh by a law of Parliament.
  • Sikkim (Article 371F): The Article gives Sikkim to hold a Legislative Assembly of minimum 30 members, notwithstanding anything this the Constitution.
    • These members shall elect the representative of Sikkim in the Indian Parliament.
    • To protect the rights and interests of various sections of the population of Sikkim, Parliament may provide for the number of seats in the Assembly, which may be filled only by candidates from those sections.
    • The Governor of the state also has “special responsibility for peace and for an equitable arrangement for ensuring the social and economic advancement of different sections of the population”.
    • It also states that any existing laws in Sikkim during its formation shall continue, and any adaptation or modification shall not be questioned in any court.
  • Mizoram (Article 371G): According to the Article, the Legislative Assembly of AP should not contain less than 40 members.
    • Apart from that, similar to Nagaland in Mizoram as well the Parliament can not make laws on “religious or social practices of the Mizos, Mizo customary law and procedure, administration of civil and criminal justice involving decisions according to Mizo customary law, ownership and transfer of land” unless the state Assembly decides to do so.
  • Arunachal Pradesh (Article 371H): This article vests the Governor with special responsibility for law and order of the state, but he will have to consult the Council of Ministers in the state before exercising his individual judgment.
    • However, if a matter arises where the Governor is required to act in the exercise of his individual judgment, then it should be considered as final and “shall not be called in question.”
  • Karnataka (Article 371J): Article 371J allows the establishment of a separate development board for the backward districts in the Hyderabad-Karnataka region — similar to the provisions made for Maharashtra and Gujarat.
    • This board will have to report to the state Assembly every year.
    • It also ensures reservation for people of this region, in government jobs and education.

Multidimensional Poverty Index reduction under the NDA is flawed (The Hindu)

  • 08 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

The Multidimensional Poverty Index exaggerates the National Democratic Alliance’s success in fighting deprivation.

Context:

  • Some critics argue that the initiatives undertaken by the NDA Government might not have comprehensively tackled the various dimensions of poverty.
  • Additionally, there are concerns that the reported successes may not be accurately reflected in the Multidimensional Poverty Index (MPI), raising questions about its alignment with the ground reality of deprivation.
  • It is crucial to delve deeper into the methodologies and criteria employed for measuring multidimensional poverty to ascertain their resonance with the nuanced challenges confronted by the population.
  • Nobel Laureate Amartya Sen introduced a comprehensive and innovative outlook on well-being, emphasizing capabilities and functionings, commonly referred to as the capability approach.

What is Amartya Sen's Capability Approach?

  • Amartya Sen's Capability Approach serves as a normative framework for assessing individual well-being and societal arrangements.
    • Rather than focusing on happiness, preferences, or resources, this approach directs attention to the genuine opportunities and freedoms available to individuals in realizing lives aligned with their values.
  • Sen's Capability Approach comprises two central elements: functionings and capabilities.
    • Functionings represent valuable states of being and doing that an individual can attain, such as good health, education, or social engagement.
    • On the other hand, capabilities encompass the array of alternative functionings that individuals can choose from within their personal and social contexts.
  • Illustratively, an individual's capability may extend to being either well-nourished or undernourished, contingent upon factors like access to food and dietary choices.
    • Sen argues that the capability approach offers a superior means of evaluating human welfare compared to other approaches like utilitarianism and resourcism, which he deems either excessively narrow or insufficiently attuned to the diversity and intricacy of human experiences.
  • Utilitarianism centres around choices leading to the greatest happiness or satisfaction of desires, while resourcism concerns the distribution of resources like income, wealth, or goods in society.
    • According to Sen, the ultimate aim of development should be the expansion of people's capabilities, surpassing mere considerations of income or utilities.
  • Amartya Sen's Capability Approach has notably influenced the development of the Human Development Index.

What is the Human Development Index (HDI)?

  • HDI serves as a statistical tool employed to assess a country's overall achievements across its social and economic dimensions.
  • It is published by the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP).
  • It stands as the second most widely utilized indicator for gauging economic progress, following national income statistics (GDP).
  • Components: HDI comprises three key components, namely:
    • Health, quantified by life expectancy at birth;
    • Education, determined by a combination of mean years of schooling and expected years of schooling; and
    • Income, evaluated by gross national income per capita (at purchasing power parity).
  • Calculation: The ultimate score is computed as a geometric mean of the aforementioned three categories.

What is the Multidimensional Poverty Index (MPI)?

  • The Multidimensional Poverty Index (MPI) is an indicator of poverty that takes into account diverse aspects of well-being, extending beyond monetary considerations or income alone.
    • Originating from collaborative efforts between the Oxford Poverty and Human Development Initiative (OPHI) and the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP), the MPI offers a holistic perspective on poverty by incorporating a range of factors contributing to deprivation.
  • In assessing poverty, the MPI identifies individuals or households as multidimensionally poor when they experience deprivation across various indicators within different dimensions of well-being.
    • These dimensions typically encompass health, education, and the standard of living. By considering a broad spectrum of factors, the MPI provides a nuanced and comprehensive understanding of poverty.

What is the Current Status of MPI?

  • Regrettably, the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP) has chosen to adopt a capabilities-based approach to formulate a comprehensive measure of human development, applying uniform weights to the three primary components—health, education, and standard of living, along with their sub-indices.
    • Under this methodology, both NITI Aayog and the UNDP recently released the National Multidimensional Poverty Index/MPI: A Progress Review 2023, mirrored in the UNDP Report titled "Making Our Future: New Directions for Human Development in Asia and the Pacific," unveiled on November 7, 2023.
  • However, these reports share the same shortcomings as the UNDP human development index, primarily stemming from aggregation with uniform weighting.
    • Notably, the narrative surrounding the MPI exacerbates these distortions.
  • Surprisingly, the MPI 2023 estimates indicate a nearly halved value for India's national MPI and a decline from 24.85% to 14.96% between 2015-16 and 2019-21.
    • This substantial reduction of 9.89 percentage points suggests that approximately 135.5 million people have transitioned out of poverty during this period.
    • Furthermore, the intensity of poverty, gauging the average deprivation among individuals in multidimensional poverty, decreased from 47.14% to 44.39%.

Why the Reduction in MPI Numbers Under the Current Government is Flawed?

  • Misleading and Inadequate Information: The MPI relies on data from the National Family Health Surveys (NFHS) 4 and 5, which are deemed insufficiently detailed for accurate estimation.
    • NFHS 5 data is particularly questionable due to its suppression, driven by discrepancies in open defecation estimates conflicting with official claims of complete elimination.
  • Ideally, combining NFHS 4 and 5 with the 75th Round of the National Sample Survey (NSS) on household consumption expenditure should have provided a more comprehensive perspective.
    • However, this was abandoned as leaked poverty estimates indicated an increase.
  • Compounding the skepticism is the profound impact of the COVID-19 pandemic in 2020-21.
    • The widespread loss of livelihoods, reverse migration fatalities, and inadequate access to vaccines and medical care have created a substantial economic shock, hindering India's recovery.
    • For instance, GDP growth has plummeted from 8% in 2015-16 to 3.78% in 2019-20, reaching -6.60% in 2020-21, along with a decline in per capita income.
  • Greater Emphasis on Covariates: Comparing the elasticities of MPI with respect to various covariates reveals that the most significant reduction in MPI is attributed to higher State per capita income.
    • However, due to a drastic income decrease, MPI has spiked.
    • Urban location follows in importance, with a 1% increase resulting in a 0.90% MPI increase, reflecting the challenges associated with rural-urban migration and the growth of substandard living conditions.
  • Both healthcare and education expenditure are associated with lower MPI, with education exhibiting a higher elasticity, implying that a 1% increase in education spending reduces MPI more than a comparable increase in healthcare spending.
  • Reduction Between 2015 and 2019-21 is Considerably Lower than the Official Estimate:
    • Some research suggests that the reduction between 2015 and 2019-21 is notably lower than the official estimate, standing at 4.7 percentage points compared to the reported 9.89 percentage points.
    • A selective review of MPI estimates indicates a rise in poverty in Uttar Pradesh, India's most populous state, by over seven percentage points.
    • Among states that went to elections in November (Chhattisgarh, Madhya Pradesh, Mizoram, Rajasthan, and Telangana), MPI fell in Chhattisgarh (by over six percentage points), in Rajasthan (by two percentage points), and significantly in Madhya Pradesh (by about eight percentage points).

What Steps Should Be Taken in order to Improve MPI?

  • Adjustment for Income Variability: Given the substantial decrease in State per capita income causing a surge in MPI, consider implementing mechanisms to account for income fluctuations.
    • This may involve incorporating smoothing techniques or introducing a lagged income variable to capture economic effects over time.
  • Dynamic Impact of Urban-Rural Migration: Recognize the dynamic impact of factors on urban locations, particularly in light of the reverse migration during the COVID-19 pandemic.
    • Develop models that reflect changing patterns of rural-urban migration and its influence on living conditions and MPI.
  • Focus on Education Expenditure: Emphasize expenditure on education, as both healthcare and education spending are linked to lower MPI.
    • Notably, the elasticity of education is higher, suggesting that a 1% increase in education reduces MPI more than a comparable increase in healthcare.
    • Given the reported decline in state-level educational expenditure, a rise in MPI is likely.
  • Mitigate the Impact of MPs with Criminal Cases: Recognize and address the correlation between the share of Members of Parliament with criminal cases and higher MPI.
    • Explore strategies such as policy initiatives to curb corruption, enhance transparency, and address challenges posed by criminal elements within legislative bodies.
    • Studies indicate that when the share of MPs with criminal cases exceeds 20%, the MPI tends to be higher.
  • Sensitivity Analysis: Conduct sensitivity analyses to test the robustness of the MPI model.
    • This involves varying key parameters to understand how changes in inputs impact results, providing insights into the stability and reliability of MPI calculations.
  • Policy Recommendations: Utilize findings to inform policy recommendations targeting identified drivers of poverty.
    • Advocate for policies promoting income stability, targeted investments in education and healthcare, and measures to combat corruption and criminality within legislative bodies.

Conclusion

Enhancing the Multidimensional Poverty Index (MPI) requires proactive measures. Addressing income variability, acknowledging dynamic urban-rural migration impacts, and prioritizing education expenditure is pivotal. Additionally, mitigating the influence of MPs with criminal cases and conducting sensitivity analyses for robustness are essential steps. Ultimately, informed policy recommendations should focus on promoting income stability, targeted investments in education and healthcare, and tackling corruption to advance holistic poverty reduction strategies.

India and Japan Converge in Southeast Asia (The Hindu)

  • 23 Nov 2023

Why is it in the News?

The Philippines is now exploring Japan and India as alternative partners for development and security cooperation.

Concerns between the China and Philippines:

  • The relationship between the Philippines and China has been strained for decades due to long-standing territorial disputes in the South China Sea.
  • The Philippines claims sovereignty over several islands and reefs in the South China Sea, while China maintains a sweeping claim over the entire area, known as the "nine-dash line."
  • These competing claims have led to numerous incidents of Chinese vessels blocking or harassing Philippine fishing boats and military vessels.
  • In 2012, the Philippines filed an arbitration case against China under the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS) challenging the legality of China's nine-dash line claim.
  • In 2016, the Permanent Court of Arbitration ruled in favor of the Philippines, finding that China's nine-dash line claim had no legal basis.
  • However, China has refused to accept the ruling.
  • The South China Sea is a strategically important waterway, with an estimated $3.3 trillion in trade passing through it annually.
  • It is also believed to be rich in natural resources, including oil and gas.
  • The ongoing territorial disputes have raised tensions in the region and have the potential to escalate into conflict.
  • In addition to the territorial disputes, there have been other issues that have strained relations between the Philippines and China including China's militarization of the South China Sea, its fishing practices in Philippine waters, and its human rights record.

Bilateral Relations Between India and the Philippines:

India and the Philippines have enjoyed a warm and cordial relationship since establishing diplomatic ties in 1949, shortly after both countries gained independence. The relationship is rooted in shared values of democracy, pluralism, and the rule of law, as well as a growing economic partnership.

Political and Strategic Cooperation:

  • India and the Philippines have maintained regular high-level visits and engagements, fostering a strong political and strategic partnership.
  • The two countries have cooperated on a range of issues, including maritime security, counterterrorism, and defense.
  • Intensification of relations with the Philippines resulted from India’s Look East Policy (1992) and further diversified with the Act East Policy (2014).

Economic Partnership:

  • India and the Philippines have a growing economic partnership, with bilateral trade reaching over $3 billion in 2022.
  • India is currently the Philippines' fifteenth-largest trading partner.
  • The two countries have signed several agreements to enhance economic cooperation, including the Comprehensive Economic Partnership Agreement (CEPA), which is expected to further boost trade and investment.

Cultural and People-to-People Exchanges:

  • Both countries have active diaspora communities that contribute to cultural exchange and people-to-people linkages.
  • India and the Philippines have signed agreements on cultural cooperation and education exchange.

Recent Developments:

  • In recent years, India and the Philippines have elevated their relationship to a "Strategic Partnership."
  • This reflects the growing convergence of their interests in the Indo-Pacific region and their commitment to promote a rules-based international order.

Key Areas of Cooperation:

  • Maritime Security: India and the Philippines have a shared interest in maintaining peace and stability in the maritime domain.
  • The two countries have conducted joint naval exercises and collaborated on maritime surveillance and information sharing.
  • Counterterrorism: India and the Philippines have pledged to cooperate in combating terrorism and preventing the spread of violent extremism.
  • They have shared intelligence and expertise in counterterrorism operations and training.
  • Defense Cooperation: Key developments include the BrahMos missile deal, the establishment of a resident Defense Attache office in Manila, and the consideration of India's proposal for a concessional Line of Credit to fulfill the defense needs of the Philippines.
  • Additionally, collaboration extends to maritime domain awareness (MDA), joint patrols, and the exchange of information.
  • The two countries have also conducted joint military exercises to enhance interoperability and strengthen defense ties.

Japan and India's Involvement in Southeast Asia:

  • Free and Open Indo-Pacific: A joint effort to counter China's growing assertiveness in the Indo-Pacific region.
  • Free and Open Indo-Pacific is an umbrella term that encompasses Indo-Pacific-specific strategies of countries with similar interests in the region.
  • Japan's Free and Open Indo-Pacific aligns with India's Indo-Pacific Oceans Initiative.
  • Partnership with ASEAN: Strengthening economic, political, and cultural ties with ASEAN member nations.
  • Infrastructure Development: Japan's Partnership for Quality Infrastructure involvement in Southeast Asian projects (ports, roads, and energy facilities).
  • India also expresses interest in regional infrastructure projects.
  • Connectivity Projects: Both nations actively promote connectivity, with India contributing through projects like the Trilateral Highway (connecting India, Myanmar, and Thailand).
  • Economic Assistance: Providing economic assistance and development aid to support socio-economic growth in Southeast Asia.
  • Assistance includes financial support, capacity building, and technology transfer.
  • Security Cooperation: Engaging in security dialogues and joint military exercises with Southeast Asian countries.
  • Collaborating on common security challenges such as maritime security and counter-terrorism.
  • Human Resource Development: Joint efforts in human resource development programs, including scholarships and training opportunities.
  • Aimed at enhancing skills and knowledge across various sectors.
  • Regional Forums: Active participation in regional forums like the East Asia Summit (EAS) and ASEAN Regional Forum (ARF).
  • Addressing regional challenges and fostering dialogue on a variety of issues.

India-Japan Relations:

The roots of the relationship trace back to ancient times when Buddhism was introduced to Japan in the 6th century. A robust partnership emerged from India's Look East Policy, evolving into a 'Special Strategic and Global Partnership' in 2014.

  • Economic Cooperation: Strong trade and investment ties with significant bilateral investments.
  • Initiatives like Delhi Mumbai Industrial Corridor (DMIC) and Neemrana Industrial Park for Japanese firms.
  • Collaboration in the automobile sector, exemplified by Maruti Suzuki.
  • Infrastructure Investment: Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA) plays a pivotal role in investing in India's infrastructure projects.
  • Contributions range from the Delhi Metro to water and sanitation projects.
  • Strategic Cooperation: Shared commitment to a free, open, and inclusive Indo-Pacific.
  • Highlighted in Japan's National Security Strategy (NSS-2022) and 2021 Acquisition and Cross-Servicing Agreement (ACSA).
  • Defence Collaboration: Steadily growing cooperation in response to regional security challenges.
  • Initiatives like the 2015 Agreements on the transfer of defence Equipment and Technology..
  • In terms of security, India and Japan constantly engage in varied platforms ranging from regular bilateral military exercises and two-plus-two meetings to multilateral frameworks such as the Quad and the G20.
  • Technology Partnership: Collaboration on cutting-edge technologies like robotics, artificial intelligence, and renewable energy.
  • Examples include the India-Japan Digital Partnership (I-JDP) and cooperation in nuclear technology.
  • Regional and Global Cooperation: Active collaboration on climate change, counterterrorism, and United Nations reforms.
  • Joint development of the Asia-Africa Growth Corridor for economic collaboration and capacity-building in African countries.
  • Cultural and People-to-People Ties: Promotion of tourism, educational exchanges, and scholarships.
  • Initiatives like the Japan Exchange and Teaching (JET) Programme and the India-Japan Global Partnership Summit foster personal bonds between citizens.

Accordingly, as India is significantly deepening and broadening its ties with Southeast Asian countries, such as the Philippines, India should consider taking its third-country developmental model with Japan into the sub-region of the greater Indo-Pacific at a time when resident countries are looking for alternative sources of development and security amidst the polarising dynamics of the U.S.-China power competition.

India, UK Proposed Free Trade Agreement (FTA) (Indian Express)

  • 18 Nov 2023

Why is it in the News?

India and the UK officials are expected to soon hold the next round of talks for the proposed free trade agreement (FTA) to iron out differences on issues such as social security pact, automobiles, medical devices, and the movement of professionals.

Context:

  • External Affairs Minister S Jaishankar discussed the India-UK Free Trade Agreement (FTA) with Britain’s Prime Minister Rishi Sunak and Foreign Secretary David Cameron recently.
  • These talks were held as the bilateral trade between India and the UK increased to USD 20.36 billion in 2022-23 from USD 17.5 billion in 2021-22.
  • When signed, the India-UK FTA will serve as a template for an agreement with India’s second-largest trade partner, the European Union (EU).
  • Breaking from the look east policy for trade deals under the UPA that saw widening deficits with Japan, South Korea, and ASEAN countries, the government is counting on economic integration with Western and African nations to fuel export growth.

What is a Free Trade Agreement?

  • A Free Trade Agreement (FTA) is a deal between two or more countries aimed at lessening obstacles to the exchange of imports and exports.
  • In a free trade arrangement, goods and services can move across borders with minimal government tariffs, quotas, subsidies, or prohibitions.
  • This concept stands in contrast to trade protectionism or economic isolationism.
  • FTAs can take various forms, such as Preferential Trade Agreements, Comprehensive Economic Cooperation Agreements, and Comprehensive Economic Partnership Agreements (CEPAs).

Expectations from the India-UK Free Trade Agreement:

  • Merchandise Trade: Indian products like petroleum, medicines, diamonds, machine parts, airplanes, and wooden furniture worth $6 billion already enjoy tariff-free access to the UK, even without the FTA, so there might be limited additional benefits.
  • Services: India aims for immediate advantages, such as obtaining priority visas for Indian professionals on short-term assignments in the UK.
  • However, acquiring a substantial number of short-duration business visas may be challenging, given the UK's cautious approach post-Brexit, associating visas with immigration.
  • Rules of Origin: Ensuring that products from third countries receive FTA benefits only if they undergo significant transformation in the exporting country.
  • India's preference for conservative rules of origin may lead to prolonged discussions and negotiations.
  • Government Procurement: Allowing UK producers to sell to India’s government procurement sector would create a level playing field.
  • Conversely, Indian firms may face a competitive and restricted government procurement market in the UK, necessitating a cautious approach.
  • Labour Standards, Gender, Environment, Digital Trade, IPRs: India should establish domestic rules/standards before committing to these aspects under the FTAs.
  • Until then, India must avoid undertaking burdensome obligations on non-trade issues.

Factors Behind the India-UK Free Trade Agreement:

  • The China Factor: Disruptions in supply chains during the pandemic highlighted the risks of excessive reliance on China, leading Western companies to adopt a 'China-plus one' approach.
  • Australia's tensions with China and the complementary nature of the Indian economy created a compelling case for a trade deal between India and the UK.
  • India's RCEP Exit: Following its withdrawal from the China-dominated Regional Comprehensive Economic Partnership (RCEP), India has been actively pursuing trade agreements with the UK, Australia, and the EU to balance its regional engagement against China.
  • Brexit Impact: The UK, facing a challenging election in early 2025, sees a trade deal with India as crucial.
  • The negotiations are influenced by the post-Brexit landscape as the UK seeks to strengthen its economic ties globally.

What India will Gain from this FTA?

  • India’s labour-intensive sectors such as apparel and gems and jewellery have seen a steep decline in market share over the last five years.
  • Indian textile exports face tariffs walls as high as 10% in the UK; a trade deal could put India on par with competition such as Bangladesh, and revive textile exports.
  • However, the British Parliament has been warned in a report that granting zero-duty access to Indian textiles under the FTA could bring stress on Least Developed Countries such as Bangladesh.

UK Gain in this Deal:

  • Past deals with Japan and the ASEAN countries have shown that the elimination of duty does not automatically result in export growth.
  • Also, many Indian exports to the UK already enjoy low or zero tariffs, while British exports to India such as cars, Scotch whisky, and wines, face considerable tariffs of 100-150%.
  • Tariff reductions on these goods will potentially offer them deeper access into Indian markets.
  • Notably, the average tariff on goods imported from India into the UK is 4.2% but the average tariff in India on goods imported from the UK is 14.6%

What are the Challenges in the India-UK FTA?

  • Non-tariff barriers: Modern FTAs go beyond tariff reduction. India could use the negotiations to eliminate non-tariff barriers (NTBs) that have historically been a concern for exporters, especially for agri exports.
  • NTBs often come in the form of regulations, standards, testing, certification, or pre-shipment inspection that are aimed at protecting human, animal, or plant health and the environment.
  • Vegetable and fruit exporters often face strict limits imposed by European economies on pesticides and other contaminants in agri imports.
  • In manufacturing too, Indian products face high rejection based on conformity assessments and technical requirements.
  • Issue of carbon tax: Like the EU, the UK is looking to impose a levy on metal imports based on carbon emissions.
  • An EU-style carbon border adjustment mechanism (CBAM) will hurt India’s exports to the UK even if India wins significant removal of tariffs.
  • The UK’s carbon tax could be harsh, as one of its aims is to reduce dependence on Russian energy imports.

Extension of PM Garib Kalyan Ann Yojana (PMGKAY) (Indian Express)

  • 06 Nov 2023

Why is it in the News?

Recently, Prime Minister Narendra Modi said that the Pradhan Mantri Garib Kalyan Anna Yojana, the Centre’s free ration scheme that aids 80 crore poor, will be extended for five more years.

News Summary

  • Prime Minister Narendra Modi, announced the extension of the free foodgrain provision under the National Food Security Act, 2013 for the next five years.
  • The PM Garib Kalyan Ann Yojana (PMGKAY) scheme, which was originally set to end in December 2023, will now continue.
  • This scheme was introduced in 2020 during the COVID-19 pandemic to provide free food grains to beneficiaries under the National Food Security Act, 2013.

What is Pradhan Mantri Garib Kalyan Ann/Anna Yojana (PM-GKAY)?

  • The Pradhan Mantri Garib Kalyan Anna Yojana (PMGKAY) was launched in April 2020 as a part of the Atmanirbhar Bharat initiative to help the poor people whose livelihoods were shuttered by a countrywide lockdown aimed at containing the spread of the Covid-19.
  • It was a part of Pradhan Mantri Garib Kalyan Package (PMGKP) to help the poor fight the battle against Covid-19.
  • Under this scheme, about 80 crore beneficiaries covered under the National Food Security Act (NFSA) get free 5 kg foodgrains per person per month.
  • This assistance is in addition to the subsidised ration provided under the National Food Security Act (NFSA), allowing families covered under the Public Distribution System (PDS) to access essential food items at a nominal cost ranging from Rs 1 to Rs 3 per kilogram.
  • Objective of PM-GKAY: To feed India's poorest citizens by distributing food grain to all priority households—those with ration cards and those designated by the Antyodaya Anna Yojana scheme—through the Public Distribution System.
  • The Antyodaya Anna Yojana is a centrally sponsored scheme that was introduced in 2000 with the goal of giving millions of the poorest households access to heavily subsidized food.
  • To ensure the availability of protein, 1 kg of pulses were provided to families (as per regional preferences)
  • Implementing Agency: Department of Food and Public Distribution, Ministry of Consumer Affairs, Food and Public Distribution.

Who is eligible for the scheme?

  • Families eligible for PM-GKAY include those under the Antyodaya Anna Yojana (AAY) and Priority Household (PHH) categories.
  • PHH beneficiaries are identified by state governments and Union territory administrations based on their specific criteria.
  • This ensures that households in most need receive the necessary support.
  • AAY families, comprising widows, terminally ill persons, disabled individuals, elderly individuals without means of subsistence or societal support, primitive tribal households, and various vulnerable categories, are also eligible for the scheme.

The merger of PMGKAY and NFSA:

  • In January 2023, the government approved the integration of PM-GKAY benefits with the provisions of the NFSA Act.
  • This integration will streamline the delivery of free food grains.
  • It also ensures that families falling under the Antyodaya Ann Yojana (AAY) and priority households (PHH) categories receive free food grains according to their entitlement under NFSA.
  • For the financial year 2023-24, the central government has allocated around 60 mt of food grain under the NFSA.
  • This includes around 40 mt of rice, 19 mt of wheat, and 1 mt of coarse grains.
  • The central issue price (CIP), the rate at which grains are made available to NFSA beneficiaries, is Rs 3 per kg for rice, Rs 2 per kg for wheat, and Rs 1 per kg for coarse cereals.

Pradhan Mantri Garib Kalyan Package (PMGKP) vs PMGKAY:

  • The Pradhan Mantri Garib Kalyan Package (PMGKP) was introduced in the wake of the Covid-19 pandemic to provide economic relief to the vulnerable sections of society.
  • Launched in March 2020, the scheme included various measures such as free food grains, cash transfers, and insurance coverage for healthcare workers, among others, to support those affected by the pandemic and the subsequent lockdown measures.
  • The insurance scheme under PMGKP covered Rs 50 lakh per health worker fighting Covid-19.
  • This insurance scheme was further extended by 180 days in April 2022.

What is National Food Security Act (NFSA), 2013?

  • The National Food Security Act (NFSA) was notified on 10th September, 2013.
  • The objective of this scheme was to provide for food and nutritional security in the human life cycle approach, by ensuring access to adequate quantities of quality food at affordable prices for people to live a life with dignity.
  • Coverage: 75% of the rural population and up to 50% of the urban population for receive subsidized food grains under the Targeted Public Distribution System (TPDS).
  • Overall, NFSA caters to 67% of the total population.
  • State governments are tasked with identifying Antyodaya Anna Yojana (AAY - poorest of the poor) and priority households (PHH) beneficiaries within the Targeted Public Distribution System (TPDS)-covered population.
  • Provisions: 5 Kg of foodgrains per person per month at Rs. 3/2/1 per Kg for rice/wheat/coarse grains.
  • The existing AAY household will continue to receive 35 Kg of foodgrains per household per month.
  • Meal and maternity benefits of not less than Rs. 6,000 to pregnant women and lactating mothers during pregnancy and six months after childbirth.
  • Meals for children up to 14 years of age.
  • Food security allowance to beneficiaries in case of non-supply of entitled foodgrains or meals.
  • Setting up of grievance redressal mechanisms at the district and state levels.

What are the Challenges and the Issues?

  • Inadequate Coverage: The National Food Security Act relies on data from the last census in 2011, leaving out a growing number of food-insecure individuals who have emerged since then.
  • Financial Burden: Sustaining the program imposes a significant financial burden on the government, necessitating a continuous supply of affordable grains.
  • In 2022, India had to impose restrictions on wheat and rice exports due to unpredictable weather conditions affecting harvests, adding pressure to food prices and unsettling global agricultural markets.
  • Fiscal Deficit Concerns: The extension of the program could potentially jeopardize the government's goal of further reducing the fiscal deficit to 6.4% of the gross domestic product.
  • Impact on Inflation: The program's continuation may also influence inflation rates, particularly in the case of rice and wheat, which contribute around 10% to India's retail inflation.
  • Decreased production caused by factors like heatwaves and irregular monsoons has led to rising prices for these essential food items.

Biofuels and Global Biofuels Alliance (TOI)

  • 01 Nov 2023

Why is it in the News?

The Global Biofuel Alliance, formed during the recent G20 summit in India, aims to support the development and deployment of sustainable biofuels.

What are Biofuels?

  • Biofuels are sustainable fuels made from a variety of organic materials (e.g. wood, crops, oil, algae, organic residues, etc.) called biomass.
  • According to the International Energy Agency (IEA), biofuels are liquid fuels derived from biomass.
  • It can be used as an alternative to fossil fuel-based liquid transportation fuels such as gasoline, diesel and aviation fuels.

How are Biofuels Produced?

  • Biofuels can be produced from several methods or production pathways, including transesterification, hydrotreating, gasification, Fischer-Tropsch synthesis, fermentation and pyrolysis.
  • Biofuels are generally divided into four categories – or generations – according to feedstock – or the type of biomass – used.
  • First-generation biofuels, known as conventional biofuels, are produced from agricultural food crops, vegetable oil, and food waste.
  • Higher carbon content and emit greenhouse gases.
  • Second-generation biofuels, called advanced biofuels, are made from energy crops, agricultural or forest residue, known as lignocellulosic biomass.
  • Greenhouse content less than 1st generation biofuel
  • Third-generation biofuels are made from the byproducts of microorganisms, such as algae, natural organisms that can be rapidly produced with little energy and without disrupting ecosystems.
  • Carbon Neutral (CO2 emitted=CO2 sequestered)
  • 4th Generation biofuels are produced from genetically engineered crops like GM crops, pyrolysis, gasification etc. and are Carbon Negative.

What are the advantages of Biofuels?

  • Biofuel Availability: Biofuels can be produced in multiple locations and from diverse sources, making global production and distribution realistic.
  • Renewable Energy: Biofuels come from plants, so we can keep growing them, making biofuels a sustainable energy source.
  • Energy Independence: Using biofuels means we rely less on foreign oil, saving money on imports and boosting our energy security.
  • Cleaner Environment: Biofuels produce fewer harmful gases compared to fossil fuels, which helps keep our environment cleaner.
  • Income for Farmers: Biofuels can give farmers extra income, which aligns with the goal of doubling their earnings.
  • Plenty of Biofuel Sources: We can make biofuels from different things like plants, waste, and algae, so there's a lot of it available.

What are the disadvantages of Biofuels?

  • Biofuel sustainability: End-to-end sustainability is a key question, as biofuels must come from a green supply chain, starting with sustainable biomass production.
  • Land used for biofuel production needs to be closely monitored, ensuring sustainable management practices and avoiding crop displacement.
  • Resource Demand: Making biofuels needs a lot of land and water.
  • In countries like India, where there's not much extra land for farming, it might not be a good idea to use it for biofuels.
  • Competition with Food: Biofuel production and food production sometimes fight for the same land and resources.
  • This can lead to higher food prices and make it hard for people to get enough to eat.
  • Greenhouse Gases: Surprisingly, some biofuels can produce even more greenhouse gases than regular fossil fuels.
  • This happens when we use land that was once covered in forests to grow crops for biofuels.

Are Biofuels a Replacement for Fossil Fuels?

  • There is a difference between biofuels and sustainable biofuels according to experts.
  • While 1G ethanol is considered a biofuel, experts categorize 2G ethanol as sustainable biofuels.
  • The problem has gained significant attention recently due to the acceleration of climate change, raising worries about the threat to food security and the increasing loss of forests and biodiversity as a result of the increased area required for farming.
  • Estimates show that far over half of all vegetated land is currently under cultivation, making agriculture one of the primary global sources of carbon emissions.
  • The Global Biofuels Alliance (GBA) has said unequivocally that producing 2G ethanol would be its primary objective.

Biofuels and the Energy Shift:

When it comes to changing our energy sources, biofuels play a role:

  • Right now, most biofuels are mixed with regular gasoline or diesel to some extent.
  • India, for example, is increasing the use of 20% ethanol-blended petrol across the country by 2025.
  • Some experts think that electric vehicles (EVs) and green hydrogen are the main focus for our energy future.
  • But others believe that 2G ethanol can help in the transition. It can reduce greenhouse gas emissions and keep internal combustion engines in use longer.
  • This gives time for new alternatives to develop, helps farmers, and creates jobs.

What is the Global Biofuels Alliance (GBA)?

  • The Global Biofuel Alliance (GBA) is an initiative by India as the G20 Chair.
  • The Alliance intends to expedite the global uptake of biofuels through facilitating technology advancements, intensifying the utilization of sustainable biofuels, and shaping robust standard setting and certification through the participation of a wide spectrum of stakeholders.
  • The alliance will also act as a central repository of knowledge and an expert hub.
  • GBA aims to serve as a catalytic platform, fostering global collaboration for the advancement and widespread adoption of biofuels.
  • This transition aims to reduce reliance on fossil fuels, create employment opportunities, and stimulate economic growth.
  • Members: The GBA has already gained support from 19 countries and garnered the interest of 12 international organizations.
  • Notably, seven G20 countries, including Argentina, Brazil, Canada, India, Italy, South Africa, and the United States, are actively supporting the GBA
  • Additionally, four G20 invitee countries (Bangladesh, Singapore, Mauritius, UAE) are also backing this initiative.
  • Furthermore, eight non-G20 countries (Iceland, Kenya, Guyana, Paraguay, Seychelles, Sri Lanka, Uganda, and Finland) have agreed to be initiated members of the GBA.
  • International organizations including, the World Bank, Asian Development Bank, World Economic Forum, World LPG Organization, UN Energy for All, UNIDO, Biofutures Platform, International Civil Aviation Organization, International Energy Agency, International Energy Forum, International Renewable Energy Agency, World Biogas Association.

How the GBA Operate?

  • The GBA has a multifaceted approach to support the global development and deployment of sustainable biofuels.
  • It provides capacity-building exercises across the entire biofuel production value chain and offers technical support for national biofuel programs.
  • Moreover, the GBA aims to foster knowledge sharing regarding policy best practices among its members.
  • The GBA plans to establish a virtual marketplace that helps industries, countries, ecosystem participants, and key stakeholders connect by mapping the demand and supply of biofuels.
  • It will also facilitate the development, adoption, and implementation of internationally recognized standards, codes, sustainability principles, and regulations.
  • These efforts are designed to incentivize the adoption and trade of biofuels on a global scale.

Significance for India:

  • The GBA holds particular significance for India.
  • It is a tangible outcome of India's G20 presidency, reinforcing the nation's global presence.
  • Collaboration within the alliance provides additional opportunities for Indian industries, allowing them to export technology and equipment related to biofuels.
  • This collaboration also accelerates existing Indian biofuel programs, such as PM-JIVAN Yojna, SATAT, and the GOBARdhan scheme.
  • By doing so, it contributes to increasing farmers' income, creating job opportunities, and fostering overall development within the Indian ecosystem.

Steps taken by GOI to promote biofuels:

  • Pradhan Mantri JI-VAN Yojana (2019): This scheme aims to create a system for commercial projects and boost Research and Development in 2G Ethanol production.
  • GOBAR DHAN Scheme (2018): This scheme focuses on managing cattle dung and farm waste to create useful compost, biogas, and bio-CNG.
  • This not only keeps villages clean but also increases the income of rural households.
  • It was launched under the Swachh Bharat Mission (Gramin).
  • Ethanol Blending: The 2018 Biofuel Policy set a goal to reach 20% ethanol blending and 5% biodiesel blending by 2030.
  • However, the government now plans to achieve the 20% ethanol blending target by 2025-26 instead of 2030.
  • National Policy on Biofuels (2018): This policy classifies biofuels into "Basic Biofuels" like 1G bioethanol and biodiesel and "Advanced Biofuels" like 2G ethanol, converting municipal solid waste into drop-in fuels, 3G biofuels, and bio-CNG.
  • It provides financial and fiscal incentives to promote each category of biofuels.
  • Repurpose Used Cooking Oil (RUCO): This initiative, launched by the Food Safety and Standards Authority of India (FSSAI), aims to collect and convert used cooking oil into biodiesel.

Conclusion

While biofuels hold potential in the fight against climate change, their practical viability remains uncertain. In countries like India, where agricultural surplus is limited, their role as a major energy source may be challenging. Nevertheless, biofuels can still contribute to a greener future through sustainable production and consumption practices. The success of the GBA will determine the extent to which biofuels can play a meaningful role in addressing climate change and energy needs.

Vision document to make India a $30 trillion economy by 2047 (TOI)

  • 31 Oct 2023

Why is it in the News?

India will aim to become a ‘developed nation’ by 2047, with an economy of $30 trillion in its 100th year of independence, which will be propelled by radical policy changes and reforms in governance by 2030.

News Summary:

  • The 'Viksit Bharat @2047' document, which outlines this vision, is nearing completion, following its inception in December 2021 by Prime Minister Narendra Modi.
  • Ten sectoral groups of secretaries (SGoSs) were entrusted with the task of preparing sector-specific visions, and these are nearly finalized.
  • Niti Aayog will consolidate these sectoral visions into a single comprehensive document by December, following consultations with SGoSs and thought leaders, including industry leaders.
  • Prime Minister Modi is expected to unveil this vision document in December or January.

What is the Current State of the Indian Economy?

  • India’s economy was $3.5 trillion in FY23, but currently with a GDP of $3.7 trillion, it is estimated to be the 5th largest economy in the world and according to some projections, India's GDP will surpass that of Germany and Japan by 2030.
  • The country’s per capita income was estimated at around $2,500 in FY23.
  • Nations with per capita income beyond a threshold of $17,000 are considered as developed.
  • This rapid rate of economic expansion would result in India becoming the second-largest economy in the Asia-Pacific region.

NITI Aayog Vision India@2047 Document:

  • The process of shaping the Vision India@2047 document commenced in December 2021.
  • To ensure comprehensive coverage, ten groups of secretaries were assembled, each focused on distinct sectors such as rural and agriculture, infrastructure, social vision, welfare, technology, governance, security, foreign affairs, and more.
  • This document will provide a blueprint for achieving the ambitious goal of transforming India into a $30-trillion developed economy by 2047, with a per-capita income ranging from $18,000 to $20,000.
  • It will encompass a range of crucial elements, including re-engineering government processes, implementing reforms, and streamlining the efforts of various ministries and departments to eliminate redundancy.
  • Expect insights into India's global involvement in areas like trade, investment, technology, capital flows, and research and development.
  • Furthermore, the document will shed light on which Indian companies are poised to lead on the global stage and the strategic approach for nurturing the ecosystem required to realize this vision.
  • It will also delve into matters related to human capital development, leveraging the nation's vast market size, and addressing regional disparities.
  • The vision document will also provide a roadmap, delineating where India aims to be in 2030 and, ultimately, in 2047."

What are the obstacles ahead in implementing the Vision India@2047?

  • NITI Aayog is assisting Gujarat and Andhra Pradesh in preparing their vision documents in order to bring them into compliance with the national vision document.
  • While other states, such as Uttarakhand, Goa, Tamil Nadu, and Uttar Pradesh, are working on their own documents.
  • Middle-income trap: The plan will include safeguards to make sure the economy stays out of the "middle-income trap".

What is the middle-income trap?

  • According to the World Bank, the term "middle-income trap" describes a scenario in which a nation with a middle-class income is unable to make the transition to a high-income economy because of growing expenses and a decrease in its competitiveness.
  • It's when per capita income reaches around $5,000 to $6,000, and then progress slows down.
  • Low-income countries often tend to transition faster to middle-income levels, driven by low wages, cheap labour and basic technology catch-up.
  • However, only a few countries manage to achieve high-income status.

What are the reasons for the middle-income trap?

  • An example of what is known as the "middle-income trap" is when labour wages become so high that a middle-income nation is unable to compete on a global scale in the production of standardized, labour-intensive goods.
  • But because of its relatively low productivity, it is also unable to compete on a large enough scale in higher value-added activities.
  • As a result, growth is slowing, wages are stagnant or falling, and the informal economy is expanding.

Countries that are stuck in the middle-income trap:

  • Historically, some evidence suggests that Latin American and Middle Eastern countries suffered middle-income traps for at least four or five decades.
  • According to a World Bank report, out of 101 middle-income countries in 1960, only 13 countries achieved high-income status by 200
  • The most recent examples are Brazil and Mexico, which were touted to transition to developed economies but failed to achieve the same success as Japan or some countries in Eastern Europe.

What Strategies Can Help India Overcome Middle-Income Traps?

  • Investment: India should aim for an investment-to-GDP ratio of 35%. Achieving this goal requires boosting savings to 32% of GDP.
  • In the fiscal year 2022, savings and investment rates were 30.2% and 29.6%, respectively, indicating the need for further growth.
  • Balancing Fiscal Consolidation with Growth: India faces a challenge with a general public debt of 83% of GDP and high fiscal deficits.
  • Balancing fiscal consolidation while meeting targets set under the Fiscal Responsibility and Budget Management (FRBM) framework is crucial.
  • Structural Reforms: The Asian Development Bank (ADB) emphasizes the need for structural reforms in India to address issues like structural bottlenecks, declining investment, and an increasing current account deficit.
  • Notable reforms include the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC), which has strengthened the country's banking systems.
  • Education and Skill Development: Skill development is vital for enhancing labour productivity and promoting inclusive growth.
  • Recent reports suggest that employability among young people needs improvement, emphasizing the importance of education and skill enhancement programs.
  • Research, Development, and Innovation: Innovation plays a significant role in transforming India's economy. India's progress in the Global Innovation Index reflects its potential.
  • Initiatives like the CoWin platform for monitoring vaccination programs and the development of data ecosystems through platforms like UPI and Aadhaar are driving India's growth.
  • Climate Change Adaptation: India should focus on developing and customizing adaptation technologies and solutions to address climate-induced vulnerabilities.
  • This includes addressing challenges in agricultural production, food security, disaster risks, resource access (water, power, coastal resources), and human health in the face of climate change.

India-Qatar Relations: Death Sentence to Eight Former Indian Navy Officers (Indian Express)

  • 28 Oct 2023

Why is it in the News?

In a setback to India’s efforts at securing their release, eight former personnel of the Indian Navy, arrested in an alleged case of espionage, were handed the death sentence by a court in Qatar.

About India- Qatar Relations:

  • Economic Cooperation: Economic cooperation is a cornerstone of the India-Qatar relationship.
  • Qatar exports products like LNG, LPG, chemicals, petrochemicals, fertilizers, plastics, and aluminum articles to India.
  • India exports cereals, copper articles, iron and steel articles, vegetables, and fruits to Qatar.
  • In 2021, India ranked among the top four largest export destinations for Qatar and is among the top three sources of Qatar's imports, with bilateral trade totaling approximately $15 billion.
  • The India-Qatar Start-up Bridge is a collaborative initiative to connect the startup ecosystems of both nations.
  • Energy Partnership: Qatar is a significant supplier of LNG to India, and this energy partnership has grown over the years.
  • India's total imports from Qatar in FY2022-23 were valued at $16.81 billion, of which LNG imports alone were worth $8.32 billion.
  • Political and Diplomatic Relations: Both countries maintain strong political ties. High-level visits by leaders from both sides have led to the signing of various agreements and Memorandums of Understanding (MoUs) covering diverse areas, including defense, trade, and investment.
  • For instance, former PM Manmohan Singh’s visit in November 2008
  • In November 2022, Vice President Jagdeep Dhankar traveled to Doha for the FIFA World Cup and addressed the Indian diaspora.
  • Cultural and People-to-People Exchanges: The cultural aspect of the relationship is strengthened by the presence of a large Indian community in Qatar.
  • An extensive Indian community of over 800,000 individuals resides in Qatar, fostering strong ties between the two nations through expatriates.
  • The Qatar Fund for Development (QFFD) provided COVID-19 medical relief materials to India.
  • Defense Collaboration: The two countries have explored defense collaboration and joint military exercises, strengthening their defense ties and strategic partnerships.
  • For instance, Joint military exercises, such as the Za’ir-Al-Bahr (Roar of Sea) naval exercise, promote cooperation between the Indian and Qatari Navies.
  • The 2008 Defense Cooperation Agreement is a pivotal aspect of India-Qatar relations, involving mutual training and visits, notably for the Qatari Emiri Naval Forces in India.
  • Maritime collaboration includes interactions between Indian and Qatari ports.
  • Education and Skill Development: Qatar has also partnered with India in the field of education and skill development, providing opportunities for Indian workers to enhance their skills and employability.
  • For instance, 14 Indian schools in Qatar are offering CBSE curricula.

What are the challenges associated with the India-Qatar relationship?

  • Detention of 8 Ex-Navy Personnel: Eight former Indian Navy personnel are imprisoned in Qatar, with some facing the death sentence.
    • This is a significant concern, particularly as a large Indian expatriate community resides in Qatar.
  • Strained Relations Post-2017 Qatar Blockade: India's engagement with nations like Saudi Arabia and the UAE has strained its relationship to some extent with Qatar due to the Gulf blockade in 2017.
  • Geopolitical Complexities within OIC: Qatar, in collaboration with Turkey, Pakistan, and Malaysia, has challenged the UAE and Saudi Arabia within the Organization of Islamic Cooperation (OIC), raising concerns for India.
  • Support for Militant Groups: Qatar's alignment with Iran and its support for groups like the Muslim Brotherhood and Hamas have caused tensions with India.
  • Historical Rivalry with Israel: Qatar and Israel have a historical enmity, and India's growing ties with Israel have not been well-received by the Qatari leadership.
  • Controversy Over Prophet Comments: Controversy arose due to comments by an Indian ruling party spokesperson against the Prophet.
    • Qatar demanded a public apology, which was resolved after the spokesperson was removed from their position.
  • Media Concerns About Minorities: Qatar's media (i.e. Al Jazeera) has expressed concerns about the treatment of minorities by the ruling government, further impacting bilateral relations.
  • Participation in US-Led Initiatives: India's involvement in U.S.-led initiatives like I2U2 and the IMEEEC has contributed to strained relations with Qatar, particularly in light of the Hamas attacks and the Abraham Accords.

Why is Qatar important to India's Look West Policy despite these challenges?

  • Geopolitical Significance: Qatar hosts leaders from various opposition and militant movements, including Hamas, the Muslim Brotherhood, and the Taliban, positioning itself as a key player in the intricate dynamics of the Islamic world.
  • Global and Regional Interests: Qatar houses American and Turkish military bases while maintaining diplomatic ties with Iran, which significantly influences the geopolitics of the region.
  • Soft Power Influence: Qatar wields substantial soft power through the government-owned Al Jazeera broadcaster, allowing it to shape opinions across the region.
  • GCC Membership: Qatar's membership in the Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC) holds strategic importance for India, especially concerning regional matters such as Kashmir.
  • UNSC Support: Qatar's support is crucial for India's pursuit of a permanent seat on the United Nations Security Council.
  • Business Relationships: Numerous major Indian companies operate in Qatar, fostering economic ties between the two nations.
  • Gulf Stability: The stability of the Gulf region is of paramount importance to India's energy and maritime security, underscoring the significant role Qatar plays in this context.

What are the options available for India in the present case?

  • Legal Recourse and Diplomatic Pressure: In response to the verdict, India is actively pursuing a range of legal options and retains the possibility of escalating the matter to the International Court of Justice (ICJ) if due process is not followed.
  • Transfer of Sentenced Persons: There exists a bilateral agreement for the transfer of sentenced prisoners, enabling Indian nationals sentenced in Qatar to serve their sentences in India.
  • Economic Influence: India's substantial market for Qatar's LNG stands as a potent economic leverage.
  • Given India's sustained growth and energy demands, Qatar maintains a vested interest in nurturing a robust economic relationship.
  • This opens avenues for potential concessions and a review of trade agreements that could mutually benefit both nations.
  • Prudent Diplomacy: Effectively navigating challenges and engaging in constructive dialogue underscores the importance of diplomacy in resolving international disputes.
  • For instance, India is dedicated to providing consular and legal support and has raised the verdict issue with Qatari authorities, particularly in light of families filing a mercy plea with the Emir of Qatar.

Conclusion

The situation involving the 8 Indian citizens and former naval servicemen necessitates a concerted effort involving legal, diplomatic, and humanitarian actions. The government must place a strong emphasis on negotiations with Qatari authorities, potentially warranting high-level intervention. At this juncture, a swift and diplomatic approach, rather than brinkmanship, is of utmost importance.

Women, Marriage and Labour Market Participation (The Hindu)

  • 26 Oct 2023

Why is it in the News?

  • With the high percentage of married women in the working-age population, there is growing concern about the economic impact of their non-participation in India's workforce.
  • Women who work have better economic opportunities and more household decision-making authority.
  • The work of Nobel laureate Claudia Goldin draws attention to differences in women's employment outcomes.

What is the Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR)?

  • The Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR) is an important indicator in labor market studies because it represents the proportion of a country's working-age population that is either employed or actively looking for work.
  • The female labor force participation rate (FLFPR) is the percentage of working-age women who are currently employed or looking for work.

Data on Women’s Labour Participation:

  • In 2022, the global LFPR for women was 47.3%.
  • Women's LFPR decreased in developing nations;
  • For example, in India it fell from 28% in 1990 to 24% in 2022.
  • Based on data from India's NSSO Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS) for individuals aged 25 to 49, the following trends have been noted::
  • Compared to the Usual Principal and Subsidiary Status (UPSS) status, married women exhibit a significantly lower employment proportion under the Usual Principal Status (UPS) status.
  • Marriage has a significant impact on women's labor-force outcomes.
  • The female labor force participation rate (FLFPR) among married women between the ages of 25 and 49 decreased by 5% in 2022–2023.
  • The FLFPR for this group decreased to 45% in 2022–2023 from 50% in 2004–05.
  • Most of the FLFPR decline is concentrated in the 25–29 age range.

What is the Periodic Labour Force Survey?

  • The Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS) was introduced by the NSO in April 2017 in response to the growing need for labor force data to be available at more frequent intervals.
  • PLFS aims to accomplish two main goals:
  • to estimate, for the urban areas only in the CWS, the major employment and unemployment indicators (i.e., the worker population ratio, labor force participation rate, and unemployment rate) in a brief period of three months.
  • to annually estimate the indicators of employment and unemployment in both CWS and usual Status in both rural and urban areas.

What is NSSO?

  • The National Sample Survey Office (NSSO) is an organization within the Government of India's Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation.
  • It is in charge of carrying out extensive nationwide sample surveys on a range of socioeconomic topics.
  • The NSSO was established in 1950 to meet the data needs of post-independence India.
  • The National Sample Survey (NSS) Commission, which is composed of state officials, academics, and subject-matter experts, provides overall direction for the organization's operations.
  • Regular "rounds" of surveys are carried out by the NSSO, and they typically last for a year. These rounds are usually named after the year they begin, such as "68th round" or "75th round."
  • In 2019, the NSSO merged with the Central Statistics Office (CSO) to form the National Statistical Office (NSO) in order to streamline and consolidate the country's statistical system.

What is the reason behind the decline/low participation rate of women in labor force?

  • Movement of Production: According to economist Claudia Goldin (1994), adult women's LFPR shows a U-shaped pattern during periods of economic expansion.
  • She also mentioned that the shift in production from the family farm, small business, and home to the larger market is the reason for the initial drop in the participation rate.
  • Marriage Issues: When married women indicate a desire to enter the workforce, the problem gets worse.
  • Women's LFPR tends to decline after marriage for a variety of reasons.
  • When comparing the Usual Principal Status (UPS) to the Usual Principal and Subsidiary Status (UPSS), married women exhibit a significantly lower employment proportion, according to the PLFS data (25 to 49 years).
  • The age range of 25 to 29 is where the majority of the decline in the female LFPR is found.

What are the Problems Faced by Married Women?

  • Growing Family Obligations: Due to women's lower educational attainment and restricted mobility, there is a growing social disapproval of women working outside the home, which in turn leads to an increase in family obligations.
  • Marriage Increases Domestic Responsibilities: In addition to increasing women's domestic responsibilities, the institution of marriage places numerous social and cultural constraints on them that limit their ability to engage in the workforce.
  • Social Elements: Women's limited labor participation is also influenced by a number of other societal factors, including their location and affiliations with particular castes and religions.
  • The level of wealth in their home and the social norms that are in place regarding women working outside the home also influence how many women enter the workforce.

Other challenges faced by married women:

  • When women choose to return to the workforce after marriage, they typically show a preference for jobs that are located close to their homes and provide more flexibility.
  • Due to a number of social restrictions, women also face gender-asymmetrical professional costs.
  • It causes gender differences in decisions about fertility, age at marriage, income inequality, and premarital career choices.
  • It has been noted that women in higher social classes typically fulfill home duties in order to conform to strict social norms.
  • Women from lower socioeconomic classes are more likely to work, mainly due to financial limitations brought on by poverty.
  • When compared to their more educated counterparts, women who are illiterate are more likely to enter the workforce following marriage.
  • According to empirical research on the distribution of female labor across various industry sectors in India, the agricultural sector continues to be the most popular choice for women seeking employment.

What can be solutions to promote greater participation of married women in the labour market?

  • Offering Child Care Services: By helping women handle their caregiving duties, this program will allow them to dedicate enough time to gainful employment.
  • It is also crucial to invest in the establishment of childcare services in office buildings through cooperative models and in industrial corridors with industry associations.
  • Public crèches can be run in worksite clusters like labor nakas, close to markets, industrial areas, and densely populated low-income residential areas.
  • Additionally, the establishment of work environments that give precedence to the requirements and welfare of female employees, the supply of safe modes of transportation, and the growth of opportunities for part-time employment would function as inducers for increased female participation in the Indian labor market.

Government Initiatives to increase female labor participation rate:

The government has targeted the issue by taking various prominent steps to increase the female labour participation rate which includes:

  • Enactment of the Maternity Benefit (Amendment) Act, 2017 which provides for enhancement in paid maternity leave from 12 weeks to 26 weeks.
  • Provisions for mandatory crèche facility in establishments having 50 or more employees.
  • Issue of an advisory to the States under the Factories Act, 1948 for permitting women workers in the night shifts with adequate safety measures.

Conclusion

  • Married women's lower participation in the labor force and their propensity to leave the workforce after marriage are caused by a variety of factors.
  • In light of this, it is critical to consider appropriate strategies for advancing women's empowerment during this period of rapid economic expansion.
  • Empowering women in the workforce is not only economically necessary, but also a crucial first step toward achieving gender equality and inclusive economic growth.

Canada-India Standoff and Vienna Convention (Indian Express)

  • 25 Oct 2023

Why is it in the News?

  • Relationships between India and Canada, which were already tense, have gotten worse as a result of Canada's most recent accusation that India has unilaterally revoked the diplomatic immunity of Canadian diplomats based in India.
  • According to Canada, India has violated both the Vienna Convention on Diplomatic Relations (VCDR) and international law.

Context:

  • The recent diplomatic dispute between India and Canada arose due to controversial comments by Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau linking Indian agents to the killing of a Khalistani separatist leader.
  • In response, India demanded that Canada withdraw 41 of its diplomats to ensure parity in diplomatic representation.
  • India cited provisions of the Vienna Convention on Diplomatic Relations to justify its demand.
  • The convention allows the receiving state to limit the size of a diplomatic mission to a reasonable number.
  • Canada complied with India's demand, withdrawing the 41 diplomats, but expressed concerns about potential violations of the Vienna Convention.
  • This ongoing dispute between India and Canada has brought attention to the Vienna Convention and its rules governing diplomatic relations between states.

What is the Vienna Convention on Diplomatic Relations?

  • The Vienna Convention on Diplomatic Relations (1961) is a United Nations treaty that set some common principles and terms on how countries must treat each other’s diplomatic representatives, in order to ensure friendly relations and maintain proper communication channels between countries.
  • It was approved on April 14, 1961, at the Neue Hofburg in Vienna, Austria, during the United Nations Conference on Diplomatic Intercourse and Immunities.
  • 193 nations have ratified the convention as of right now.
  • India ratified it through the Diplomatic Relations (Vienna Convention) Act of 1972.

Major Provisions of the Vienna Convention:

  • Diplomatic immunity is one of the Convention's guiding principles.
  • It guarantees that ambassadors can carry out their responsibilities without intimidation, fear, or threat.
  • Diplomats are exempt from arrest and detention under Article 29 of the Convention.
  • The host nation is obliged to treat the diplomatic agent with due respect and to take all reasonable precautions to shield the diplomat's person, liberty, or dignity from any harm or violation.

Does India Have the Right to Ask Any Country to Reduce the Size of its Mission?

  • Yes, India has every right to make unilateral decisions and it’s actions are entirely compliant with the parity clause.
  • According to the Ministry of External Affairs, India's action is consistent with Article 11(1) of the Vienna Convention on Diplomatic Relations (VCDR).
  • According to Article 11.1 of the Convention, the host nation may set reasonable and suitable restrictions on the size of a foreign diplomatic mission, taking into account the specific needs of the mission as well as the conditions and circumstances that currently exist in the host country.
  • The receiving State may, at any time and without cause, declare the head of the mission or any member of the diplomatic staff persona non grata, or unwelcome, in accordance with Article 9 of the Convention.
  • According to MEA, India feels that a reciprocal diplomatic presence in both nations is necessary due to the significantly greater number of Canadian diplomats in India and their ongoing meddling in (India's) internal affairs.
  • People with diplomatic privileges and immunities are required by Article 41(1) of the VCDR to refrain from meddling in the domestic affairs of the receiving state.
  • Therefore, it would be a violation of Canada's VCDR if these Canadian diplomats were meddling in internal matters in India.
  • Additionally, this may be cause to revoke or limit diplomatic immunity.
  • In Line with India’s Diplomatic Relations Act of 1972,
  • India passed this law in accordance with the Diplomatic Relations Act of 1972 to give the VCDR effect.
  • According to Section 4 of this Act, if a nation violates the VCDR, the central government may limit diplomatic privileges and immunities granted to that nation.

International Precedents and Legal Grounds for India's Actions:

  • UK's Restriction on the Soviet Mission: The United Kingdom imposed restrictions on the Soviet Union's mission in the UK due to the discovery of Russian diplomats involved in unacceptable activities.
  • The UK invoked Article 11 of the VCDR to substantiate its decision.
  • US Measures against the Iranian Mission (1979): In 1979, the United States exercised its authority to limit the number of Iranian diplomats stationed in Washington.
  • Estonia and Moldova's Approach to the Russian Mission: Earlier this year, Moldova and Estonia both requested Russia to reduce the size of its mission, emphasizing the principle of parity.
  • In justifying their actions, both Moldova and Estonia relied on Article 11 of the VCDR.
  • Moldova alleged the involvement of Russian diplomats in destabilizing Moldova's internal situation, while Estonia argued that Russian diplomats were actively undermining its security.

Conclusion

Beyond the legal aspects, a larger issue is the current lack of trust between Ottawa and New Delhi. Both sides should focus on adopting confidence-building measures to address this issue.

Allegations of breaching international law could further strain the situation and hinder diplomatic relations.

Allocation of Election Symbols to Political Parties in India (Indian Express)

  • 24 Oct 2023

Why is it in the News?

  • The Supreme Court declined to hear a petition that the ruling Telangana's Bharat Rashtra Samiti (BRS) party filed challenging the attribution of election symbols to two other parties.
  • BRS contended that the symbols 'road roller' and 'chapatti roller' given to 'Yuga Thulasi Party' and 'Alliance of Democratic Reforms Party' resembled BRS's car symbol, potentially causing confusion among voters during elections.
  • The Supreme Court declined the petition, expressing confidence in voters' ability to distinguish between the symbols.

How are Election Symbols Allotted to Political Parties in India?

  • The Election Commission of India (ECI) is responsible for symbol allotment, operating under The Election Symbols (Reservation and Allotment) Order, 1968.
  • This order aims to specify, reserve, choose, and allocate symbols for elections in Parliamentary and Assembly Constituencies, primarily for recognized political parties.
  • Symbols can be either reserved for exclusive use by recognized political parties or 'free' for unrecognised registered parties.
  • Unrecognized registered parties or candidates can choose from 'free' symbols because they have not secured enough percentage of votes to fulfill the prescribed criteria to become a recognised party.
  • Once selected by parties, these symbols become 'free' for others to choose in subsequent elections.
  • Recognized national and state parties receive exclusive symbols.
  • For instance, the Samajwadi Party leader Mulayam Singh Yadav chose the symbol of a bicycle for the 1993 Uttar Pradesh Assembly polls.
  • The ECI announces party symbols through notifications published in the Gazette of India.
  • As per recent notifications, there are six national parties, 26 state parties, and 2,597 registered unrecognised parties in India.

Do political parties get to state their preferences?

  • The 1968 order empowers the Election Commission (EC) to manage the specification, reservation, choice, and allocation of symbols for parliamentary and assembly elections, particularly for recognizing political parties.
  • Unregistered parties are required to provide a list of ten symbols in order of preference from the set of free symbols published by the EC.
  • Parties have the option to propose up to three new symbols of their choice.
  • These proposals should include names and clear designs, ranked in order of preference.
  • The EC may consider these proposals for allocation as a common symbol if no objections arise.
  • Proposed symbols must not resemble existing reserved or free symbols, have no religious or communal connotations, and should not depict birds or animals.

What happens when a recognised political party splits?

  • When a recognised political party splits, the Election Commission takes the decision to assign the symbol.
  • For instance, the Congress party, in the first elections of 1952, had a pair of bulls as its symbols. Following splits in the party over the years, the current symbol of hand eventually went to the party.
  • More recently, the EC allowed the Eknath Shinde faction of the Shiv Sena to retain the party’s traditional bow and arrow symbol, while the Udbhav Tackeray faction was allotted a flaming torch.
  • The factions had asked for the trident (Trishul) and the mace (Gada), which were rejected citing religious connotations.
  • Both factions had also wanted the ‘rising sun’, which the EC pointed out was the DMK’s election symbol.
  • In case of a split, the EC is empowered to decide on the claims of opposing factions under Paragraph 15 of the Symbols Order, 1968.
  • After considering all of the relevant information, considering the circumstances of the case, and consulting with the parties' representatives, the EC makes a decision.
  • All of these rival sections or groups are bound by the Commission's decision.
  • When registered but unrecognized parties split, the ECI usually advises the warring factions to settle their differences internally or go to court.

Sadiq Ali Case

  • In the Sadiq Ali v. Election Commission of India (1971), it was decided that in matters of disputes among groups of a political party, the test of majority support among members of the party's "organizational and legislative wings" was the critical test to decide the dispute.
  • It includes the Party Constitution Test, Party Constitution Aims and Objectives Test, and Majority Test.

What happens to the faction that doesn't receive the symbol of the parent party?

  • Before 1997, the Election Commission recognized the group not obtaining the symbol based on specific criteria defined in Paras 6 and 7 of the Symbols Order.
  • This recognition depended on whether the breakaway party had the support of a sufficient number of MPs/MLAs according to those criteria, leading to their recognition as a National or State Party.
  • However, in 1997, the Election Commission determined that merely having MPs and MLAs was insufficient.
  • This was because these elected representatives had contested and won elections on the tickets of their parent (undivided) parties.
  • Consequently, the Election Commission introduced a new rule.
  • Under this rule, the splinter group of the party, different from the group that received the party symbol, was required to register itself as a separate political party.
  • These newly registered parties could only attain national or state party status based on their performance in elections at the state or central level following their registration.

Registration of Political Parties:

  • According to the Election Commission of India (ECI), any party seeking registration must submit an application to the Commission within 30 days of the date of its formation in accordance with the Commission's rules.
  • It acts in accordance with Article 324 of the Indian Constitution and Section 29A of the Representation of the People Act, 1951.
  • According to Section 29A of the Representation of the People Act of 1951, all political parties must register before participating in elections.

Dam Safety Act (The Hindu)

  • 23 Oct 2023

Why is it in the News?

  • India has nearly 6,000 large dams, 80% of which are over 25 years old and pose safety risks.
  • A new Dam Safety Act (DSA) was enacted in late 2021.
  • On October 4, 2023, the Teesta III dam at Chungthang, one of the largest hydropower projects in India, was destroyed by a glacial lake outburst flood (GLOF) in North Sikkim's South Lhonak Lake.
  • Since then, reports have shown there were no early warning systems, risk assessments, or preventive measures implemented as required by the Act.

What are the provisions of the Dam Safety Act, 2021?

  • The Dam Safety Act was introduced in the Rajya Sabha in December 2021 in response to inadequate surveillance and maintenance, which resulted in dam failure-related disasters.
  • The Act outlined important duties and required the creation of bodies at the federal and state levels to carry them out.
  • Key provisions:
  • Dam safety policies and rules would be supervised by a National Committee on Dam Safety;
  • State-level disputes would be handled by a National Dam Safety Authority, which would also be responsible for implementation;
  • The Chairman of the Central Water Commission (CWC) would be in charge of dam safety protocols on a national scale.
  • There would be a State Committee on Dam Safety (SCDS) and a State Dam Safety Organization (SDSO).

What do the States need to do?

  • States are required by provisions to: categorize dams according to risk of hazards; carry out routine inspections; develop emergency action plans; implement emergency flood warning systems; and carry out safety reviews and period risk assessment studies.
  • States were asked to report and document incidents of dam failures.
  • Until now, no statutory provision required systemic reporting of failures, and no single agency was in charge of tracking this information.
  • The CWC maintains a list, but it is not consistently updated.

Is there any action taken for failing to comply?

  • Any provision of the Act that is broken is punishable by imprisonment and/or monetary penalties.
  • The entity shall be punished with imprisonment for a term which may extend to two years if such obstruction or refusal to comply with directions results in the loss of lives or imminent danger.
  • For failing to comply with the Dam Safety Act, the Sikkim High Court ordered the Gati Hydropower Project company to pay two widowed mothers 70 lakh in February 2023.

What are the challenges?

  • Blind spots in the implementation of the law
  • The Dam Safety Act (DSA) fails to encourage transparency and does not support risk-based decision-making.
  • Such disasters occur frequently, and their size reveals a pattern of neglect.
  • Access to Information
  • A strong Dam Safety Act (DSA) should make it simple for various stakeholders to access information, but India's framework falls short.
  • Safety at dams serves a public purpose.
  • The general public should have immediate access to all information regarding dam safety, including the roles played by all institutions, committees, and authorities, as well as their reports, decisions, minutes, and agendas.
  • Nothing is, however, in the public domain.
  • Absence of a cyclical review
  • Periodic reviews are frequently not carried out, or if they are, the results are not readily accessible to the public.
  • Comprehensive dam safety evaluations are mandated by the Act for dam builders. The failure's analysis and reporting, however, are not standardized.

How is dam safety undertaken?

Dam safety is a function of many parts:

  • Design and Construction: Building dams with safety margins is the initial step.
  • Dams should be designed and constructed to withstand potential hazards.
  • Maintenance and Operation: Dams need regular upkeep and should be operated following safety guidelines to ensure their long-term stability.
  • Real-Time Data: Continuous monitoring and recording of dam data in an easily accessible format is crucial for prompt action in case of emergencies.
  • Hazard Forecasting: Being prepared for hazardous events is key. This includes forecasting potential risks and having emergency plans in place.
  • The incident in Sikkim revealed poor compliance with safety measures, ranging from dam design to the capacity of spillways that manage water release.
  • Hazard Profiling: Regular assessment and profiling of potential hazards are mandated.
  • Hazards can change due to factors like climate change, urbanization, and water usage patterns.
  • Periodic Reviews: Periodic reviews are essential to update inundation maps and dam reservoir capacity rules.
  • This contributes to downstream safety.
  • Review Frequency: Spillway capacity and safety metrics should be reviewed approximately every five years.
  • However, these reviews may not be conducted as required.
  • Dam Safety Evaluations: The Act requires comprehensive dam safety evaluations by dam builders.
  • Unfortunately, there's a lack of standardization in how failure analysis and reporting are carried out.
  • Non-Compliance: In certain cases, such as the July-August floods in Himachal Pradesh, dam builders were found guilty of non-compliance with dam safety regulations, leading to government notices.

How to read the NCRB 2022 report on crime in India (Indian Express)

  • 05 Dec 2023

Why is it in the News?

  • The National Crime Records Bureau (NCRB) released its annual report on crime in India for the year 2022 on Sunday (December 3).
  • The report is a compilation of data on reported crime from across the country, and provides the big picture of broad trends in crime registration.
  • Reports by the NCRB, which functions under the Union Ministry of Home Affairs, include statistics on offences ranging from crimes against women to economic and financial crimes.

What does the 2022 NCRB report say?

  • Overall Crime Statistics: In 2022, a total of 58,24,946 cognizable crimes, including 35,61,379 Indian Penal Code (IPC) crimes and 22,63,567 Special & Local Laws (SLL) crimes, were officially recorded.
    • This marked a 4.5% decrease in case registrations compared to the challenging pandemic year of 2021.
  • The crime rate has declined: The crime rate, indicating crimes registered per lakh population, saw a decline from 445.9 in 2021 to 422.2 in 2022.
    • This shift is considered a more insightful indicator, recognizing that absolute crime numbers tend to rise with population growth.
  • Increase in crime against women: Crime against women witnessed an uptick in 2022, with 4,45,256 reported cases, reflecting a 4% increase from the figures recorded in 2021.
    • Notably, the major share of these crimes under IPC sections included 'Cruelty by Husband or His Relatives' (31.4%), 'Kidnapping & Abduction of Women' (19.2%), and 'Assault on Women with Intent to Outrage her Modesty' (18.7%).
  • Increase in reporting of cybercrime: Cybercrime reporting witnessed a substantial surge, increasing by 24.4 percentage points compared to 2021, with a total of 65,893 cases.
    • Predominantly, 64.8% of these cases involved fraud, followed by extortion (5.5%), and sexual exploitation (5.2%).
  • Significant increase in suicides cases: Suicides reported during 2022 increased by 4.2% compared to 2021, totaling 1,70,924 cases.
    • Major contributing factors were 'Family Problems (other than marriage-related problems)' (31.7%), 'Marriage Related Problems' (4.8%), and 'Illness' (18.4%), collectively accounting for 54.9% of total suicides.
    • The overall male-to-female ratio of suicide victims stood at 71.8:28.2.

What are the headline trends in state-wise data in the report?

  • The states/ UTs reporting the highest chargesheeting rate under IPC crimes are Kerala (96.0%), Puducherry (91.3%), and West Bengal (90.6%).
  • This is the percentage of cases in which the police reached the stage of framing charges against the accused, out of the total true cases (where a charge sheet was not laid but a final report submitted as true, plus the total cases chargesheeted).

Does this mean that these states are more crime-prone than others?

  • Not necessarily. The NCRB report underlines that the data record the incidence of registered crime, not the actual occurrence of crime.

  • This is an important distinction — and also an acknowledgement of the fact that there are limitations to the data.
  • So, when reported crimes against women in Delhi rose significantly in the aftermath of the 2012 bus gangrape case, it may have been a reflection of increased awareness about the need for registering crimes, both among those affected and the police, rather than an actual increase in the incidence of crime against women.

What are the limitations to the data compiled by NCRB?

  • Data Reflects Registered Crimes, Not Actual Occurrence: The NCRB report captures registered crimes, not the actual occurrence of crime.
    • Instances like the reported rise in crimes against women in Delhi post the 2012 bus gangrape may indicate increased awareness rather than an actual surge in crime.
  • Limitations Due to Principal Offence Rule: NCRB employs the Principal Offence Rule, counting the most severe crime in a single FIR.
    • This may lead to undercounting, as in cases like 'Murder with Rape' being categorized as 'Murder' rather than rape.
  • Local-Level Inefficiencies Impact Report Accuracy: Inefficiencies at the local level influence report accuracy as the NCRB data relies on submissions from local sources.
    • The recording of details in an FIR, for example in suicide cases, depends on the understanding of the local police officer visiting the scene.
  • Socio-Economic Causative Factors Not Captured: The NCRB acknowledges the omission of socio-economic causative factors or reasons for crimes in its data compilation.
    • Important factors influencing criminal behavior may be overlooked.
  • Factors Affecting Data Collection: Certain groups may refrain from reporting crimes due to reasons such as fear of an uncooperative or hostile response from the police.
    • Shortage of police officers or unfilled vacancies at the local level can hinder effective data collection.
    • These limitations underscore the need for a nuanced interpretation of NCRB data, recognizing the potential biases and gaps inherent in its compilation process.

About National Crime Records Bureau (NCRB):

  • The NCRB was established in January 1986 as a body mandated to compile and keep records of data on crime.
  • It’s headquartered is in New Delhi and is part of the Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA), Government of India.
  • It was set up based on the recommendation of the National Police Commission, 1977 and a Task force, 1985.

Function of the NCRB:

  • The NCRB functions as a crucial repository, aiding investigators in tracing crimes and criminals.
  • It serves as a national warehouse for fingerprint records, encompassing both Indian and foreign criminals.
    • This facilitates the identification and tracking of interstate criminals through fingerprint searches.
  • Entrusted in 2009, the NCRB is responsible for monitoring, coordinating, and implementing the Crime and Criminal Tracking Network & Systems (CCTNS) project.
  • In 2017, the NCRB introduced the National Digital Police Portal, empowering police officers to search for criminals or suspects in the CCTNS database.
    • Additionally, it provides citizens with services like online complaint filing.

Reports Published:

  • Apart from the esteemed Crime in India report, the NCRB publishes:
    • Prisons Statistics India Report.
    • Accidental Deaths and Suicides
    • Prison Statistics
    • Reports on Missing Women and children in India

Compilation of Data for NCRB Reports:

  • For the NCRB’s flagship annual Crime in India reports, information is obtained from the police forces of 36 states and Union Territories.
    • Similar data are furnished for 53 cities with populations exceeding 10 lakh each as per the 2011 Census, by respective state-level crime records bureaus.
  • The information is entered by state/UT police at the level of the local police station, and is validated at the levels of the district and state, and finally, by the NCRB.

How to Enhance the Effectiveness of NCRB's Operations:

  • States should leverage NCRB's data in crafting their annual police strategies, ensuring its multi-dimensional use in crime control to achieve tangible outcomes.
  • Despite the connection of 16,390 police stations on CCTNS, it's crucial for central agencies like the CBI, NCB, and NIA to integrate with it, fostering comprehensive data sharing.
  • It is imperative for all agencies to promptly join the CCTNS, striving for 100 percent completeness in data to enhance the network's efficiency.
  • With the conclusion of phase 2 of ICJS, there is an opportunity to augment its utility further.
  • This can be achieved through the integration of cutting-edge technologies such as Artificial Intelligence, Blockchain, analytical tools, and an enhanced fingerprint system.

Presidential Election in Maldives and India (The Hindu)

  • 02 Oct 2023

Why is it in the News?

Mohamed Muizzu, the leading candidate from the Opposition, has secured the position of President in the Maldives. He emerged victorious in a closely contested election, defeating the incumbent Ibrahim Mohamed Solih, who had friendly relations with India.

News Summary About Maldives Presidential Election:

  • The Maldives has chosen Mohamed Muizzu as its new president, ousting the incumbent Ibrahim Mohamed Solih, known for his pro-India stance.
  • President Solih faced criticism from the Opposition for his 'India first' policy.

Key Points:

  • In the second round of the Presidential Election, Mr. Muizzu secured approximately 54% of the vote, while Mr. Solih garnered nearly 46%.
  • The run-off election witnessed a higher voter turnout of 86%, surpassing the 79.85% recorded in the first round, which was the lowest in Maldivian presidential election history.
  • The initial round did not produce a clear winner, as no candidate managed to obtain more than 50% of the votes.

Electoral System in the Maldives:

  • Parliament Name: The legislative body in the Maldives is known as Majlis or People's Majlis.
  • Parliament Structure: Maldives follows a unicameral parliamentary structure.
  • First-Past-the-Post Majority System: In the Maldives, both Parliament and Council elections utilize the first-past-the-post majority system, where voters cast their ballots for a single candidate.
  • Term Duration: The Majlis consists of 87 members, each directly elected for a five-year term from 87 individual single-member constituencies.
  • Two-Round System: The President of the Maldives is elected using a two-round system.
  • If no candidate secures more than 50% of the votes in the first round, a second round or run-off is conducted.
  • 2023 Maldives Election: The initial round of the election featured eight candidates, marking the highest number of candidates so far.
  • The Maldives has a population of approximately 5.2 lakh people.
  • As per the Election Commission of the Maldives, there are 2.8 lakh eligible voters, with around 1.6 lakh being members of various political parties.

Evolution of the Executive Presidency System in the Maldives:

  • Single-Party System Until 2008: The Maldives operated under an Executive Presidency system since 1968.
  • It adhered to a single-party system until 2008, where the President was elected for a five-year term through a referendum.
  • Maumoon Abdul Gayoom's 30-Year Rule: Ibrahim Naseer served as the first executive President from 1968 to 1978.
  • Due to political protests in 1978, Naseer did not seek re-election for a third term.
  • In 1978, the Maldivian parliament selected Maumoon Abdul Gayoom as the succeeding President.
  • Gayoom led the nation for an astonishing 30 years, until 2008, effectively managing protests and famously thwarting a coup attempt with India's assistance in 1988.
  • Era of the Multi-Party System: In response to protests by various factions, Gayoom initiated political reforms in 2004.
  • Political parties were officially registered in 2005, and a new Constitution was adopted in 2008.
  • These changes paved the way for Presidential elections every five years, embracing a multi-party system.

India's Engagement with Maldivian Politics:

  • India's relationship with Maldivian politics has been a blend of experiences, with the Solih government being the most favorable thus far.
  • India collaborated closely with Abdul Gayoom's administration for three decades.
  • When Mohamed Nasheed assumed power in 2008, India expressed its support through then Vice President Hamid Ansari's attendance at his inauguration ceremony.
  • Tensions arose in 2012 when the Maldivian government terminated the GMR contract for the Maldives' airport, straining the bilateral relationship significantly.
  • Following Yameen's rise to power in 2013, he pursued a more aggressive courtship with China.
  • During his tenure, the Maldives joined President Xi Jinping's Belt and Road Initiative.
  • When India and Western lenders hesitated to extend loans to Yameen's government due to allegations of human rights violations, he turned to Beijing, which provided funding without stringent conditions.
  • Solih's victory in the 2018 elections was met with relief in Delhi.
  • Prime Minister Modi even attended Solih's swearing-in ceremony during his visit to the Maldives.

Potential Shift in Maldives' Foreign Policy:

  • The victory of Muizzu might indicate a possible adjustment in the Maldives' foreign policy.
  • He enjoys the support of former President Abdulla Yameen, known for his pro-China stance and 'India out' campaign.
  • Despite this, local observers in the Maldives believe that Mr. Muizzu is unlikely to abruptly sever ties with India.
  • The newly elected leader is expected to pursue a balanced approach in managing India-China relations.
  • Meanwhile, India hopes for the continuity of its various infrastructure projects in the Maldives.
  • India's recent initiatives in the Maldives encompass a wide range of projects, including water and sanitation in 34 islands, road construction, land reclamation as part of the Addu development project, a cancer hospital, a port project, a cricket stadium, two airport development projects, the Greater Male connectivity project with bridges, causeways, and roads, social housing projects, mosque renovations, and the establishment of the national college for police.
  • Estimates indicate that Indian aid to the Maldives from 2018 to 2022 exceeded Rs 1,100 crore, more than double the amount provided in the preceding five-year period (approximately Rs 500 crore).

Mains Question:

  • Evaluate the potential shifts in the Maldives' foreign policy under President Mohamed Muizzu, and elucidate the impact on its relationship with India, given historical dynamics and infrastructure projects. (15M)

Parliament Panel Findings on the New Education Policy, 2020 (The Hindu)

  • 27 Sep 2023

Why is it in the News?

The Education Committee of the Parliament has just presented a report about how the National Education Policy (NEP) from 2020 is being put into action in higher education.

Assessment in the report:

  • The report checks how well the National Education Policy (NEP) from 2020 is being used in higher education and what progress has been made.
  • In India, there are currently 1043 universities.
  • Most of them, around 70%, are run by state laws, while about 18% are managed by the Central Government.
  • When it comes to students, 94% of them study at state or private institutions, and only 6% are in central institutions.
  • The report says that more students are going to college now compared to a few years ago. This is measured using something called Gross Enrollment Ratio (GER), which has gone up from 24.1% in 2016-17 to 27.3% in 2020-21. It's also improved for ST and SC students during this time.
  • GER is like a way to see how many students in the right age group (18-23 years) are in higher education compared to the total population.

Report's Status of Implementation:

  • Things are going well with the implementation of NEP 2020, thanks to different initiatives like PM Schools for Rising India (PM SHRI), e-VIDHYA, and NIPUN Bharat. The goal is to change higher education to be more inclusive, flexible, and meet global standards.
  • Jammu and Kashmir is leading the way by being one of the first places in India to start using NEP 2020 in all Higher Education Institutions starting from 2022.
  • NEP 2020 wants students to become more creative and innovative. It encourages connections between colleges and industries and works on joint programs.
  • Indian universities will get more freedom to set up campuses in other countries and welcome top 100 universities from around the world to work in India.
  • NEP 2020 also allows students more flexibility with something called "Multi Entry and Multiple Exit (MEME)" options, which gives them more choices in their education.

Issues Related to NEP:

  • Accessibility: Some students in economically disadvantaged areas can't easily access higher education because of money problems, where they live, and because they might feel like they don't belong due to stereotypes.
  • Multiple Entry And Multiple Exit (MEME)System: Even though the MEME system seemed flexible, the report suggests it might not work as well in India as it does in Western countries.
  • Language Barrier: Most higher education institutions use English to teach, but not many teach in local languages. This can be a problem for students who are more comfortable in their local language.
  • Lack of Funding: India needs to spend more on education. Right now, it's only about 2.9% of the country's total income (GDP), but experts say it should be 6%. This means there's not enough funding for education.

Way Forward

  • By 2030, the goal is to have at least one multi-purpose higher education institution in every district in India. And by 2035, they want 50% of students to be in higher education, including vocational training.
  • They want to focus more on research and innovation to help India file more patents and improve its global ranking.
  • To get more money for education, Higher Education Financing Agency (HEFA) should look for funds from sources other than the government, like private companies, foundations, and international banks.
  • They plan to make better use of technology in education. Creating a National Educational Technology Forum (NETF) will help expand digital resources and make India a top place for knowledge.
  • They also want to make it easier for students who study different subjects to get credit for their work. This will help them move between schools and colleges more smoothly.

National Education Policy (NEP) 2020:

  • The National Education Policy, created in July 2020, shows what India's new education system will look like.
  • A group led by Shri K. Kasturirangan made this policy.
  • NEP 2020 has five important ideas: making education affordable, easy to access, high-quality, fair for everyone, and making sure everyone is responsible for learning.
  • It's like a big plan to change both basic and higher education in India by 2040.
  • This is the third big education plan since India became independent. The earlier ones were made in 1968 and 1986.
  • The new policy focuses on things like studying different subjects, using technology, writing well, solving problems, thinking logically, and getting experience in different jobs.

Canada Needs to See India – Not Just the Diaspora (Indian Express)

  • 22 Sep 2023

Why is it in News?

The Canadian Prime Minister's statement in Parliament, accusing Indian agents of the death of Hardeep Singh Nijjar, has significantly strained India-Canada relations. Rebuilding trust will necessitate a thorough and open political dialogue on the role and politicization of Canada's Indian diaspora and its impact on bilateral relations.

Recent Developments Leading to the Current Standoff:

  • Death of Khalistan Tiger Force (KTF) Chief:
  • Hardeep Singh Nijjar, wanted by the Indian government, was killed in a shooting in Surrey in June.
  • The National Investigation Agency (NIA) had announced a Rs 10 lakh reward for Nijjar in 2022, accusing him of conspiring to kill a Hindu priest in Jalandhar, Punjab.
  • G20 Summit Discussions:
  • During the G20 Summit in Delhi, the Canadian PM and the Indian PM discussed Khalistani extremism.
  • The Canadian PM raised concerns about foreign interference in Nijjar's murder and sought India's cooperation in the investigation.
  • The Indian PM expressed deep concerns about ongoing anti-India activities by extremist elements in Canada.
  • Canadian Parliament Statement and Diplomatic Expulsions:
  • Canada's PM accused "agents of the Indian government" in Nijjar's killing.
  • Canada expelled the top Indian diplomat, the head of RAW, from the country.
  • In response, the Indian government summoned the High Commissioner of Canada and expelled a senior Canadian diplomat from India.

The Evolution of India-Canada Relations:

  • During the Cold War:
  • During the Cold War, India and Canada enjoyed a positive relationship, driven by their shared Commonwealth status and common views on the importance of the United Nations, multilateralism, and global development.
  • However, differences arose during Cold War conflicts like Korea, Hungary, and Vietnam, straining relations. India's pursuit of a nuclear program also added complexity.
  • Post-Cold War (1980s):
  • Increasing immigration from India began to improve relations, but limited opportunities for trade and security cooperation hindered substantial diplomatic engagement.
  • Post-1998:
  • Significant efforts were made to reinvigorate the relationship after 1998 when Canada rejected India's nuclear status.
  • Current Status:
  • Today, the focal point of the relationship is investment and trade.
  • However, it's important to note that certain segments of the diaspora community harbor strong negative sentiments towards India, reject its territorial integrity, and aim to fragment it.

Canada's Role in Straining India-Canada Relations:

  • Failure to Address Anti-India Activities:
  • Canada's reluctance to take action against anti-India activities on its soil has contributed to the deterioration of relations.
  • The Canadian PM's emphasis on the rule of law overlooks the impact of individuals like Nijjar and his separatist associates, who have engaged in activities affecting both Canada and India.
  • Instances of violence against Indian diplomats were not adequately addressed, and some individuals continued vandalizing places of worship in Canada while disregarding Indian legal processes, as seen during the farmer protests.
  • Appeasement of Diaspora Politics:
  • The Canadian government, both Liberal and Conservative parties, has shown sympathy toward Khalistani groups and other diaspora elements, influencing its foreign policy.
  • These policies have accommodated diaspora groups using Canadian soil for activities that pose risks to the interests and security of other nations, notably India.

Significance and Hurdles in Engaging with the Indian Diaspora:

  • Importance to the Indian Economy and Strategic Relations:
  • The current Indian government has intensified diaspora engagement, encouraging them to invest in India's economic development.
  • Wealthy NRIs play a crucial role in sending remittances, establishing networks, and contributing ideas to India.
  • Diaspora support has strengthened India's strategic alliances, including with the US, and has furthered national initiatives like Make in India and Digital India.
  • Challenges:
  • The Indian government is concerned about the views of pro-Khalistan groups within the diaspora, which challenge India's territorial integrity and criticize its treatment of ethnic minorities.
  • These challenges are growing, posing a significant issue for Indian foreign policy that traditionally had a strategic perspective on most diaspora groups.
  • Indian PM's foreign visits are increasingly met with civil society groups advocating for human rights.
  • Recent pro-Khalistan protests in the US, UK, Canada, and Australia have become
  • increasingly contentious and sometimes violent.

Realigning India's Diaspora Engagement:

  • The digital age has reshaped the way Indian immigrants connect with their homeland, influencing their political views, language preferences, and ideological inclinations.
  • Ideas disseminated online can have cross-border consequences, as evident in the Khalistani context.
  • In the era of social media, the impact and influence of diaspora groups are magnified.
  • India should move beyond conventional approaches that emphasize engaging and mobilizing the Indian diaspora for national objectives.
  • It's essential to recognize that certain groups actively oppose India's interests and foreign policy goals.

Steps to Improve India-Canada Relations:

  • Focus on Engaging India, Not Diaspora Politics:
  • The root cause of strained India-Canada relations lies in a problematic form of diaspora politics, where Canadian political parties engage with and appease groups involved in anti-India activities.
  • Canadian governments should prioritize national security and foreign policy interests over short-term electoral gains, moving away from this type of diaspora politics.
  • Ottawa should engage with New Delhi without viewing it solely through the lens of diaspora politics.
  • Establish a Political Agreement:
  • India is essential for Canada's Indo-Pacific strategy to remain relevant.
  • Both nations have shared interests in upholding the international order, managing China's rise, collaborating on climate change, global health, and addressing challenges related to digital technologies.
  • Addressing these challenges requires a political agreement that considers how both countries perceive Canada's Indian diaspora and curbs any negative influences, particularly those fueling India's separatist agenda.

In conclusion, bridging the gap between Ottawa and Delhi requires addressing India's concerns and establishing direct communication with India. This divide should be measured not only in terms of geography but also in terms of mindset.

Enhancing the Benefits of Research for Basmati Rice in India (Indian Express)

  • 19 Sep 2023

Why is it in News?

Over the past three decades, the yearly exports of Basmati Rice have surged from 0.3-0.35 million tonnes (valued at $200-250 million) to 4.5-4.6 million tonnes, with a value of $4.7-4.8 billion.

Transforming the Rice Industry in India:

  • Until the late 1980s, Indian farmers cultivated traditional tall basmati rice varieties, which reached heights of 150-160 cm.
  • However, these tall plants were susceptible to lodging, bending over when laden with well-filled grains, and they produced a meager 10 quintals of paddy per acre over a lengthy period of 155-160 days, from nursery sowing to harvesting.
  • Some of these traditional varieties included Taraori (also known as Karnal Local or HBC-19) and Dehraduni (Type-3).
  • The turning point occurred when the Indian Agricultural Research Institute (IARI) introduced Pusa Basmati-1 (PB-1), an improved variety released in 1989.
  • By the early 21st century, India was exporting 0.6-0.7 million tonnes of basmati rice, generating annual revenues of $400-450 million, with PB-1 accounting for approximately 60% of this success.

Evolution of the Rice Sector in India:

  • The first significant change occurred with the introduction of Pusa Basmati-1 (PB-1), which led to a doubling of India's basmati exports.
  • However, the true transformation took place in 2003 when Pusa Basmati-1121 (PB-1121) was released.
  • PB-1121's standout feature was its grain quality: each kernel averaged 8 mm in length but elongated 2.7 times to approximately 21.5 mm when cooked.
  • One cup of milled PB-1121 grains yielded 4.5 cups of cooked rice, compared to 4 cups for PB-1 and 3.7 cups for Taraori.
  • Following the introduction of PB-1121, India's basmati rice exports surged from 0.7 million tonnes to 3.7 million tonnes and from $390 million to $4.9 billion in value terms between 2001-02 and 2013-14.
  • Another significant development occurred in 2013 when the IARI released Pusa Basmati-1509 (PB-1509).
  • PB-1509 had a shorter seed-to-grain duration of just 115-120 days, making it advantageous for farmers as they could cultivate an extra crop.
  • After harvesting PB-1509, farmers began adopting various crop combinations, including planting a three-month potato crop in early October, followed by sunflower, sweet corn, or onion in early January, all of which matured in 90-100 days.

Enhancing Disease Resistance in Basmati Rice:

  • In recent years, scientists at IARI have been dedicated to safeguarding the improved yield of their basmati varieties by introducing genes for disease resistance.
  • An example is PB-1121, which became vulnerable to bacterial leaf blight. To combat this, IARI introduced Pusa Basmati-1885 and Pusa Basmati-1847.
  • These varieties were essentially PB-1121 and PB-1509 but equipped with "built-in resistance" to both bacterial blight and rice blast fungal disease.
  • The incorporation of resistance traits through marker-assisted backcross breeding eliminates the need for farmers to use fungicides.
  • This reduction in the application of crop protection chemicals not only promotes sustainable farming but also preserves the premium reputation of Indian basmati in the global market.

Challenges Faced by Basmati Rice:

  • Basmati Rice encounters two primary challenges:
  • Lack of Minimum Support Price (MSP): Unlike other crops, basmati paddy does not have a minimum support price (MSP) established by the government, which can affect the income security of farmers.
  • Export Dependency: The majority of basmati rice is exported, with a limited domestic market. This export-centric nature exposes farmers to market fluctuations and government export policies.
  • For instance, the Union government recently imposed restrictions, disallowing basmati shipments priced below $1,200 per ton.

India's Rice Exports in 2023:

  • India holds the title of the world's largest rice exporter, commanding a substantial 45% share of the global rice market.
  • During April-May 2023, the nation's rice exports surged by 21.1% compared to the same period in the previous fiscal year.
  • In May 2023, the export of Basmati rice experienced a notable increase of 10.86% compared to its exports in May 2022.
  • Non-Basmati rice shipments have been consistently growing for the past three years, and the export of Basmati rice in 2022-2023 exceeded the figures of the previous year.
  • Government data up to August 17, 2023, reveals that total rice exports (excluding broken rice) reached 7.3 million tonnes, marking a 15% increase compared to the 6.3 million tonnes exported during the corresponding period last year.

Ridding India of Food Insecurity (The Hindu)

  • 13 Sep 2023

Why it is in News?

  • While India is currently the world's fastest-growing major economy, it is also grappling with a rapid increase in food-price inflation.
  • The surge in food prices began to intensify notably in 2019 and has continued to rise in most subsequent years.
  • In July of this year, annual inflation surpassed 11%, reaching its highest level in the past decade.
  • One consequence of this sustained high food-price inflation is the possibility that a portion of the population may encounter difficulties in accessing food with sufficient nutritional value.

Key Findings of Concern:

  • The 'State of Food Security and Nutrition in the World' report by the Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO) assesses the percentage of people in different countries who cannot afford a nutritious diet.
  • Approximately 74% of the population is unable to afford a healthy diet.
  • This likely results in decreased food consumption due to reduced purchasing power.
  • Food prices in India have been on a consistent upward trend since 2019, with annual inflation exceeding 11% in July 2023, the highest rate in a decade.
  • There has been a notable increase in the prevalence of anaemia, with over 50% of adult women estimated to be affected according to the latest National Family Health Survey conducted between 2019 and 2021.
  • Critics argue that macroeconomic policies, including the Reserve Bank of India's focus on inflation control through measures like inflation targeting, are ineffective in addressing food inflation, which is primarily driven by supply-side factors.

Importance of Food Security:

  • Enhanced Health and Nutrition: Food security plays a crucial role in improving the health and well-being of individuals by preventing malnutrition and its associated health issues, including stunted growth, cognitive impairment, and increased susceptibility to diseases.
  • It's worth noting that malnutrition is responsible for the deaths of approximately 3.1 million children each year, accounting for nearly half of all child deaths under the age of 5.
  • Economic and Social Stability: Food security contributes to the economic and social stability of individuals and nations by enabling increased productivity, income generation, and participation in trade.
  • According to a World Bank study, the global cost of undernutrition, in terms of lost productivity and human capital, amounts to USD 3.5 trillion per year.
  • Additionally, a United Nations report highlighted that food insecurity played a pivotal role in 58% of conflicts between 2017 and 2019.
  • Poverty Alleviation: Food security is instrumental in reducing poverty as it enables people to afford and access nutritious food while also investing in other essential needs such as education and healthcare.
  • These factors help break the cycle of poverty.
  • National Security: Food security bolsters national security by ensuring a reliable food supply that is not vulnerable to external factors like global food prices or supply chain disruptions.
  • Food insecurity can make nations susceptible to such factors, compromising their sovereignty.
  • Sustainable Development: Food security aligns with sustainable development goals, particularly Goal 2: Zero Hunger.
  • It also supports related goals such as poverty reduction, improved health, gender equality, and environmental sustainability, contributing to a holistic approach to sustainable development.

Causes of Food Insecurity:

  • Impact of Russia-Ukraine Conflict: The Russia-Ukraine conflict has disrupted the global supply chain due to trade-related policies imposed by countries, exacerbating the global food crisis.
  • Several nations have implemented food trade restrictions to bolster domestic supply and reduce prices.
  • Rising Domestic Inflation: Many countries are grappling with domestic food inflation, which has intensified the issue of food insecurity.
  • For instance, India has imposed bans on wheat and rice exports to support its domestic population.
  • Climate Variability and Extremes: Climate change has significantly affected the availability and quality of critical resources like water, land, and biodiversity essential for food production.
  • It has also led to shifts in the patterns and severity of pests, diseases, and natural disasters, resulting in reduced crop yields and livestock productivity.
  • The Global Report on Food Crises highlights that weather and climate extremes were the primary drivers of acute food insecurity in 12 countries in 2021, impacting nearly 57 million people.
  • Economic Slowdowns and Downturns: Economic slowdowns have diminished the income and job prospects of vulnerable populations, who typically allocate a substantial portion of their income to food purchases.
  • These economic shocks have disrupted both the supply and demand for food, leading to increased food prices and reduced food quality.

Learning from the Green Revolution:

  • India boasts a rich historical backdrop of the Green Revolution, a transformative period during the 1960s.
  • The government initiated a supply-side approach, providing farmers with high-yield seeds, accessible credit, and guaranteed prices through procurement.
  • This initiative achieved remarkable success, swiftly liberating India from dependence on food imports and fulfilling its ambition of self-sufficiency.
  • However, certain strategic errors were made during this period.
  • Excessive use of chemical fertilizers resulted in soil degradation.
  • An overemphasis on procurement prices, rather than prioritizing productivity to enhance farm incomes, contributed to inflation.
  • The policy primarily focused on cereals, neglecting pulses, a vital source of protein for the majority of Indians.

The Path Ahead: Suggested Actions

  • Enhanced Agricultural Investment: Evaluate and optimize public expenditure on irrigation to improve its efficiency.
  • Revitalize Research Institutes: Revamp India's network of public agricultural research institutes to rekindle their pivotal role, reminiscent of their contributions during the 1960s.
  • Reinvigorate the Role of Local Village Representatives (Gram Sevak): Empower and elevate the role of the gram sevak in villages, making them instrumental in disseminating best agricultural practices.
  • Boost Protein-Based Crop Production: Implement a comprehensive program to significantly increase protein production by incorporating various initiatives.
  • Foster Cooperative Federalism: Encourage states to actively contribute to enhancing agricultural productivity rather than relying solely on food allocations from the central pool for their Public Distribution System.
  • Ensure Permanent Access to a Balanced Diet: Prioritize measures consistent with ecological sustainability to ensure that all Indians have continuous access to a nutritious diet.
  • Supply-Side Interventions: Implement interventions on the supply side to stabilize food prices by improving land yield.
  • Focus on Cost Reduction: Concentrate on the specific objective of reducing food production costs.
  • Multifaceted Approach: Extend irrigation coverage to 100% of the net sown area, eliminate land leasing restrictions, accelerate agricultural research efforts, and reinstate agricultural extension services.

Mains Question:

  • Examine the key agricultural issues in India today, encompassing food security, sustainability, and economic stability. Propose a holistic approach that integrates government funding, research, inter-state collaboration, and supply-side interventions to pave the way for a resilient and prosperous future in Indian agriculture. (15M)

African Union Joined G20 (G20 Becomes G21) (The Hindu)

  • 11 Sep 2023

Why it is in News?

At the 18th G20 Summit in India, the African Union (AU) became a new member of the G20, just three months after India proposed the idea of their inclusion.

Context:

  • In June of this year, Prime Minister Modi suggested to G20 leaders that the African Union should be granted full membership at the upcoming G20 Summit in Delhi.
  • This idea was born after the 'Voice of the Global South' Summit in January 2023, which saw participation from most of the African Union's 55 member countries.
  • Up to that point, only one country from the African Union, South Africa, was a part of the G20.
  • Several African leaders had emphasized that Europe had representation from five countries and the European Union (EU) within the G20, and they believed the African Union deserved similar representation.

What is the African Union (AU)?

  • The African Union (AU) is a group of 55 member states representing the countries of the African Continent.
  • In essence, it's a union that has various objectives aimed at enhancing the well-being of its member countries, both on their own and as a collective.
  • It was formally established in 2002, succeeding the Organisation of African Unity (OAU, 1963-1999).
  • The AU's main offices are located in Addis Ababa, Ethiopia.

Vision of the African Union (AU):

  • The AU is driven by its vision of "A united, prosperous, and peaceful Africa, led by its own people and serving as a dynamic force on the global stage."
  • To accomplish this mission, a target year of 2063 has been established, marking the 100th anniversary of the OAU's establishment.
  • Agenda 2063's key objectives include:
  • Fostering prosperity in Africa through inclusive growth and sustainable development.
  • Achieving a politically unified and integrated continent, inspired by the principles of Pan-Africanism.
  • Cultivating a Africa characterized by good governance, democracy, human rights, justice, and the rule of law.
  • To realize the aims outlined in Agenda 2063, the AU has devised a series of five 10-year plans, with the initial plan spanning from 2014 to 2023.

Objectives of the African Union (AU):

  • The AU dedicates its efforts and resources to fostering stronger unity and solidarity among African nations and their citizens.
  • Its goal is to expedite the political and socio-economic integration of the continent, addressing the diverse social, economic, and political challenges faced by African nations.
  • Additionally, the AU actively works to promote peace, stability, and security throughout the region.

The Role of the AU in Promoting Peace on the Continent:

  • The AU strongly believes that resolving conflicts is essential for achieving prosperity.
  • In pursuit of this goal, it established a Peace and Security Council in 2004.
  • This council has the authority to intervene in conflicts, replacing the principle of non-interference with one of non-indifference.
  • It can deploy military forces in situations involving genocide and crimes against humanity and can authorize peacekeeping missions.
  • The AU also oversees the New Partnership for Africa's Development (Nepad), an anti-poverty plan that offers a partnership with the West.
  • It promotes good political and economic practices in exchange for increased aid and investment.
  • Many of the AU's peacekeeping missions have been instrumental in helping governments combat terrorism across Africa, from the Sahel to northern Mozambique.
  • Diplomatic efforts by the AU have also successfully resolved conflicts in Africa, such as brokering a peace deal between the Ethiopian Government and the Tigray People's Liberation Front (TPLF) in South Africa in 2022.
  • Another notable achievement is the establishment of the African Continental Free Trade Area (AfCFTA), which became operational in 2021.
  • With 54 member countries as signatories, AfCFTA is the world's largest new free trade area since the creation of the WTO in 1994.
  • Its aim is to boost intra-African trade by implementing deeper trade liberalization and improved regulatory harmonization.
  • The AfCFTA is projected to increase Africa's income by $450 billion by 2035 and elevate intra-African exports by more than 81%.

Limitations of the African Union (AU):

  • The AU has faced challenges in preventing coups in Africa, with over 200 coups occurring on the continent since the 1960s. Some of the most recent ones happened in Gabon and Niger.
  • Another issue is the AU's struggle to ensure that its member nations fulfill their annual financial obligations.
  • This has led to financial constraints, forcing the organization to rely on external funding, which can affect its independence.

Equatorial-Origin Cyclones and Pacific Decadal Oscillation (The Hindu)

  • 02 Sep 2023

Syllabus: Mains – GS I (Geography)

Why in the News?

  • In recent decades, tropical cyclones starting near the Equator have been less destructive.
  • The most recent big cyclone like this in the Indian area was Cyclone Okchi in 2017. It caused a lot of damage in Kerala, Tamil Nadu, and Sri Lanka.
  • But, in the future, these cyclones might happen more often. This is because of two things: global warming and a repeating event called the Pacific Decadal Oscillation (PDO). The PDO comes back every 20-30 years.

What are Equatorial-Origin or Low Latitude Cyclones?

  • Equatorial-Origin or Low Latitude Cyclones (LLCs) are cyclones that start between 5°N and 11°N.
  • They are smaller in size than cyclones in higher areas but can get much stronger very quickly.
  • Normally, cyclones don't form near the equator (low latitude), but when the water is warm, they can gather more moisture and become more powerful.
  • Most of these cyclones begin in the Western Pacific Ocean.
  • The last big cyclone like this in the Indian area was Cyclone Ockhi in 2017.
  • It traveled more than 2000 km and caused a lot of damage in Kerala, Tamil Nadu, and Sri Lanka.
  • In the post-monsoon season (Oct-Nov-Dec), the north Indian Ocean (NIO) is a hotspot for LLCs.
  • They make up about 60% of all Tropical Cyclones in the NIO since 1951. However, they haven't received as much attention as they should have.

What is the Pacific Decadal Oscillation (PDO)?

  • The Pacific Decadal Oscillation (PDO) is a long-term change in the Pacific Ocean.
  • It's like a cycle that happens every 20-30 years, and it has both "cool" and "warm" phases.
  • Positive (Warm) PDO: During this phase, the western part of the Pacific Ocean becomes cooler, while the eastern part gets warmer. It's the opposite during a negative PDO.
  • The term Pacific Decadal Oscillation (PDO) was first used around 1996 by a scientist named Steven Hare.
  • Impact of PDO:
  • On Global Climate: The PDO's phase can have a big impact on the world's weather. It affects things like hurricanes in the Pacific and Atlantic, droughts and floods around the Pacific, how well marine life does, and patterns in global land temperatures.
  • On Cyclones: When the PDO is warmer (positive phase), there tend to be fewer cyclones that start near the equator.
  • In 2019, the PDO started getting cooler, going into a negative phase.
  • If this continues, it could mean more of those equatorial-origin cyclones in the months after the monsoon.

ENSO and PDO:

  • Positive PDO with ENSO is generally unfavorable, but a negative PDO brings more rain to India.
  • When the Pacific Decadal Oscillation (PDO) is in a positive phase along with the El Niño-Southern Oscillation (ENSO), it's often not good.
  • However, when the PDO is negative, it brings more rain to India.
  • When Both ENSO and PDO Match:
  • If both ENSO and PDO are in the same phase, it's believed that the impacts of El Niño or La Niña events may be stronger.

PDO vs. ENSO:

  • Difference in Repeating:
  • El Niño or La Niña events happen in the Pacific Ocean every 2-7 years, but the PDO has a pattern that lasts much longer, often over decades.
  • Identifying Positive PDO Takes Time:
  • You can figure out if the PDO is in a "positive" or "warmer phase," but it takes several years of measuring ocean temperatures and their interaction with the atmosphere.
  • In contrast, you can determine the stage of an ENSO event in any given year.

What is El Niño-Southern Oscillation (ENSO)?

ENSO is one of the most important climate phenomena on Earth due to its ability to change the global atmospheric circulation, which in turn, influences temperature and precipitation across the globe.  We also focus on ENSO because we can often predict its arrival many seasons in advance of its strongest impacts on weather and climate.

  • The El Niño-Southern Oscillation (ENSO) is a recurring climate pattern involving changes in the temperature of waters in the central and eastern tropical Pacific Ocean.
  • On periods ranging from about three to seven years, the surface waters across a large swath of the tropical Pacific Ocean warm or cool by anywhere from 1°C to 3°C, compared to normal.
  • This oscillating warming and cooling pattern, referred to as the ENSO cycle, directly affects rainfall distribution in the tropics and can have a strong influence on weather across the United States and other parts of the world.
  • El Niño and La Niña are the extreme phases of the ENSO cycle; between these two phases is a third phase called ENSO-neutral.
  • El Niño:  A warming of the ocean surface, or above-average sea surface temperatures (SST), in the central and eastern tropical Pacific Ocean.
  • Over Indonesia, rainfall tends to become reduced while rainfall increases over the central and eastern tropical Pacific Ocean.
  • The low-level surface winds, which normally blow from east to west along the equator (“easterly winds”), instead weaken or, in some cases, start blowing the other direction (from west to east or “westerly winds”).
  • In general, the warmer the ocean temperature anomalies, the stronger the El Niño (and vice-versa).
  • La Niña:  A cooling of the ocean surface, or below-average sea surface temperatures (SST), in the central and eastern tropical Pacific Ocean.
  • Over Indonesia, rainfall tends to increase while rainfall decreases over the central and eastern tropical Pacific Ocean.
  • The normal easterly winds along the equator become even stronger.
  • In general, the cooler the ocean temperature anomalies, the stronger the La Niña (and vice-versa).
  • Neutral: Neither El Niño or La Niña. Often tropical Pacific SSTs are generally close to average.
  • However, there are some instances when the ocean can look like it is in an El Niño or La Niña state, but the atmosphere is not playing along (or vice versa).

Mains Question:

  • What are the key environmental and geographical factors that influence the formation and distribution of tropical cyclones in various ocean basins around the world, and how do they differ? (15M)

India and the Asian Development Bank to establish a climate change and health hub in Delhi (The Hindu)

  • 28 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

India's G-20 document states that the climate change and health hub will facilitate knowledge sharing, partnerships, and innovations to assist developing countries, while health systems will face challenges from infectious diseases and natural disasters driven by climate change.

Why in the news?

  • India, in collaboration with the Asian Development Bank (ADB), is gearing up to inaugurate a climate change and health hub in the national capital.
  • This initiative follows India's earlier achievement in hosting the inaugural WHO Centre for Global Traditional Medicine, located in Jamnagar, Gujarat.
  • The forthcoming hub's mission is to foster knowledge exchange, cultivate partnerships, drive innovations, and extend support to nations beyond the G-20, with a special focus on developing countries.

The Significance of the Climate Change and Health Hub:

  • Fostering Collaboration: This center holds paramount significance as it brings together diverse partners to engage in vital discussions regarding the far-reaching impacts of climate change.
  • It provides a unique platform for shared learning and collaboration among stakeholders.
  • Addressing Health Emergencies: India's recent G-20 outcome document highlights that climate change remains a key driver of health emergencies, including the resurgence of infectious diseases.
  • Moreover, it exacerbates the frequency and severity of natural disasters, posing a significant threat to the capability of health systems to provide essential services.
  • Boosting Resilience: Given this backdrop, it is imperative to bolster the resilience of health systems against the adverse effects of climate change.
  • The G-20 outcome document outlines a commitment to prioritize the development of climate-resilient health systems, establish sustainable and eco-friendly healthcare supply chains, mobilize resources for resilient, low-carbon health systems, and promote collaboration through initiatives like the WHO-led Alliance for Transformative Action on Climate and Health (ATACH).
  • Tackling Zoonotic Spillovers: The recent G-20 Health Ministers' meeting expressed concern about the rising incidence of zoonotic spillovers, leading to the emergence of new diseases.
  • In this context, there is an urgent need to identify both new and existing drivers using a scientific and risk-based approach while reinforcing existing infectious disease surveillance systems.
  • Global Impact: Situated in New Delhi, the Climate Change and Health Hub is poised to address these pressing issues on a global scale, serving as a hub for international collaboration and solutions.

About Asian Development Bank (ADB):

  • Founded in 1966, the Asian Development Bank (ADB) is a multilateral institution that counts 68 members among its ownership, with 49 hailing from the Asian and Pacific region.
  • ADB is unwavering in its commitment to fostering a prosperous, inclusive, resilient, and sustainable future for Asia and the Pacific, all while maintaining its steadfast resolve to eliminate extreme poverty.
  • To achieve its noble objectives, ADB extends its support to member nations and partners through a comprehensive suite of financial instruments.
  • This includes loans, technical assistance, grants, and equity investments, all aimed at catalyzing social and economic development across the region.
  • In essence, ADB stands as a stalwart advocate for advancing social and economic development in Asia and the Pacific.
  • As of December 31, 2019, ADB's five largest shareholders are Japan and the United States, each possessing 15.6% of total shares, followed by the People's Republic of China (6.4%), India (6.3%), and Australia (5.8%). The institution's headquarters are situated in Manila, Philippines.

About WHO Global Centre for Traditional Medicine (GCTM):

  • The WHO Global Centre for Traditional Medicine (GCTM) is a pioneering knowledge hub dedicated to traditional medicine, recognized as the world's premier center of its kind.
  • Situated in Jamnagar, Gujarat, it represents a remarkable collaboration between nations.
  • India, as the primary investor in GCTM, has committed an approximate sum of US$ 250 million to facilitate the center's establishment, infrastructure development, and operational activities.

The GCTM is designed to achieve five key objectives:

  • Archiving Traditional Wisdom: GCTM seeks to harness technology to construct a comprehensive database of traditional knowledge systems.
  • Setting International Standards: It aspires to establish global standards for the testing and certification of traditional medicines, enhancing confidence in these age-old remedies.
  • Global Knowledge Exchange: The center aims to serve as a global platform where experts in traditional medicine converge to share their experiences and expertise.
  • Funding Research: GCTM endeavors to mobilize resources and funding for research in the field of traditional medicines, fostering innovation and scientific exploration.
  • Holistic Healing Protocols: The center is dedicated to developing holistic treatment protocols for specific diseases, enabling patients to benefit from the complementary strengths of both traditional and modern medicine approaches.

Chandrayaan-3 Successfully Lands on the Moon (The Hindu)

  • 24 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

India's Chandrayaan-3 mission made an indelible mark in history with its successful lunar landing. Achieving a 'soft landing' at the Moon's south pole, India now stands as the sole nation to have accomplished this remarkable feat.

Nearly sixty years after the Soviet Union’s Luna 9 mission made history as the first soft landing on the Moon, a lunar landing remains elusive for many countries. Russia’s Luna-25 mission failed earlier this week, in the same year that the Japanese Hakuto mission crash-landed. In 2019, Chandrayaan-2’s crash was preceded by Israel’s Beresheet facing a similar fate.

What is Soft Landing?

  • A 'soft landing' refers to the precise and controlled landing of a spacecraft at a gentle speed, ensuring minimal or no damage to the craft.
  • This achievement highlights the technical prowess of the spacecraft.
  • During a soft landing, the spacecraft executes a sequence of maneuvers and braking procedures aimed at diminishing its velocity and aligning it with the chosen landing area.
  • Typically, this involves activating retro-rockets or thrusters to gradually reduce descent speed and maintain a carefully managed approach.
  • The ultimate objective is to guide the spacecraft to the surface in a manner that avoids significant damage, showcasing the precision and expertise of the mission.

But why is it so difficult?

  •  The Moon has an extremely thin atmosphere. This means that spacecraft cannot rely on atmospheric friction to slow down considerably ahead of a landing which means that they will have to rely heavily on their propulsion systems to make a safe landing.
  • Also, there is no GPS on the Moon, unlike here on Earth.
  • This means that onboard computers will have to make quick calculations and maneuvers to land at a safe location without guidance from a massive network of satellites.

Why is ISRO Aiming for the Southern Pole?

  • All of the spacecraft that have landed on the Moon previously have landed in the equatorial region, either a few degrees of latitude north or a few degrees south of the lunar equator.
  • NASA’s Surveyor 7 is the mission that went farthest from the equator in history, landing as far away as 50 degrees south of the equator.
  • It is not without reason that so many missions land near the equator.
  • The terrain and temperature there are more welcoming, making the long and sustained operations of instruments easier.
  • Also, the surface there is relatively smooth with very few steep slopes, hills, and craters.
  • Due to the difficult environment, the polar regions of the Moon have largely remained unexplored.
  • But if the data from many previous orbiter missions is anything to go by, these regions could be very interesting to explore.
  • Chandrayaan-1 observed some evidence of the presence of ice molecules in the deep craters in the region.
  • Also, the cold temperatures of the region mean that things trapped there would remain frozen for a long time.
  • Essentially, that part of the Moon could act as a “time capsule.”
  • This could help scientists discover clues about the early history of the solar system, including how the Earth and the Moon formed.

Why the South Pole of the Moon Holds Significance?

  • Abundant Water Resources: Compelling evidence suggests the presence of water ice within the perpetually shadowed craters at the moon's south pole.
  • This water resource holds immense value for future human lunar exploration, serving potential uses such as drinking water, food cultivation, and the production of rocket fuel.
  • Various Volatiles: Beyond water ice, the moon's south pole may house other volatiles like methane and ammonia, offering additional resources for prospective lunar missions.
  • Geological Fascination: The lunar south pole boasts intriguing geological features, notably the South Pole-Aitken basin, the moon's largest impact basin.
  • Studying this basin could yield valuable insights into the moon's formation and evolutionary history.
  • Prime for Astronomical Observations: The permanently shadowed craters at the moon's south pole provide an excellent vantage point for astronomical observations.
  • Shielded from the Sun's radiation, these craters offer ideal conditions for studying radio waves and other forms of radiation that Earth's atmosphere tends to block.

What Has Changed Since the Chandrayaan-2 Setback?

  • Enhanced Landing Gear: Chandrayaan-3's landing legs have been fortified to guarantee stability and secure touchdown, even at a velocity of 3 meters per second, equivalent to 10.8 kilometers per hour.
  • Expanded Landing Flexibility: Unlike wheeled vehicles, a lunar lander employs stilts or legs to land.
  • The potential landing area has been broadened, with Chandrayaan-3 now programmed to touch down safely within a 4-kilometer by 2.4-kilometer zone, rather than aiming for a specific 500-meter by 500-meter patch as previously targeted by Chandrayaan-2.
  • Ample Fuel Reserves: Chandrayaan-3 carries an increased fuel load compared to Chandrayaan-2.
  • This surplus fuel is on standby for last-minute adjustments to the landing site if required.
  • Enhanced Solar Panels: The Chandrayaan-3 Lander is equipped with solar panels on all four sides, a significant upgrade from Chandrayaan-2's two-sided configuration.
  • This design ensures the Lander can harness solar power consistently, even if it lands incorrectly or experiences tumbling.
  • At least one or two sides will continually face the Sun, ensuring uninterrupted power generation.

What Next After Chandrayaan-3 successfully lands on the Moon?

  • Payloads in Action: Typically, spacecraft carry specialized instruments and experiments, known as payloads, to observe and record events in space.
  • Data Transmission to Earth: The data collected by these payloads is then transmitted back to Earth, where scientists analyze and study it for valuable insights.
  • Consistent Payloads: In Chandrayaan-3, the six payloads on the Vikram lander and rover Pragyan remain consistent with the previous mission.
  • Scientific Payloads on Lander: The lander hosts four scientific payloads that focus on various aspects, including the study of lunar quakes, thermal properties of the lunar surface, changes in the plasma near the surface, and a passive experiment aimed at precise measurements of the Earth-Moon distance. One of these payloads comes from NASA.

Rover Payloads: The rover carries two payloads designed to examine the chemical and mineral composition of the lunar surface. They are tasked with determining the presence and composition of elements like magnesium, aluminum, and iron in lunar soil and rocks.

India’s Smartphone Manufacturing Dreams and PIL Scheme (The Hindu)

  • 23 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

In recent months, there has been an ongoing exchange of viewpoints between former RBI governor Raghuram Rajan and Minister of State for Electronics Rajeev Chandrasekhar regarding the performance of a Central government initiative aimed at enhancing the electronics manufacturing sector.

Context:

  • In the backdrop of this discussion, it's important to highlight that former RBI governor Raghuram Rajan, along with two fellow economists, released a concise research paper in which they posited that the Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) program might not be effectively driving India toward self-reliance in manufacturing.
  • They contended that taxpayer funds were potentially being used to establish an ecosystem centered around low-level assembly jobs, which could still heavily rely on imports.

What Is the Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) Scheme?

  • The PLI scheme was designed with the overarching goals of bolstering domestic manufacturing capacity, augmenting import substitution, and fostering employment generation.
  • Launched in March 2020, this initiative initially focused on three key industries:
  • Mobile and related Component Manufacturing
  • Electrical Component Manufacturing
  • Medical Devices
  • Incentives Offered by the Scheme:
  • The incentives provided under this program are contingent on incremental sales and vary across sectors.
  • They range from as low as 1% for electronics and technology products to as high as 20% for the production of critical key starting drugs and certain drug intermediaries.
  • In certain sectors like advanced chemistry cell batteries, textile products, and the drone industry, incentives are calculated based on sales performance and local value addition over five years.
  • Sectors Covered by the PLI Scheme:
  • To date, the government has unveiled PLI schemes encompassing 14 sectors, including but not limited to the automobile and auto components industry, electronics and IT hardware, telecom, pharmaceuticals, solar modules, metals and mining, textiles and apparel, white goods, drones, and advanced chemistry cell batteries.
  • The introduction of this scheme aligns with several key objectives:
  • Reducing India's reliance on imports from countries like China and other foreign nations.
  • Bolstering labor-intensive sectors to enhance the employment ratio within India.
  • Mitigating import bills while promoting domestic production.
  • It's important to note that the PLI Yojana also extends an invitation to foreign companies to establish their operations in India and encourages domestic enterprises to expand their manufacturing capabilities.

What is the PLI Program in the Smartphone Manufacturing Sector?

  • Among the sectors, the smartphone manufacturing industry has exhibited remarkable enthusiasm for the PLI program.
  • Companies such as Micromax, Samsung, and Foxconn (known for manufacturing Apple phones) stand to benefit by receiving incentives of up to 6% of their incremental sales revenue through the PLI initiative.
  • This program has yielded remarkable results, as evidenced by the staggering growth in mobile phone exports.
  • The exports of mobile phones surged from a modest $300 million in FY2018 to an astonishing $11 billion in FY23.
  • Additionally, the import figures tell a compelling story; while India imported mobile phones valued at $3.6 billion in FY2018, this figure significantly dwindled to just $1.6 billion in FY23.
  • Central government Ministers, including Mr. Chandrasekhar, frequently cite these statistics as compelling evidence of the resounding success of the PLI scheme.

Former RBI Governor Raghuram Rajan's Perspective:

  • In his research paper, the former head of the Central Bank presented the argument that while the imports of fully assembled mobile phones have indeed decreased, the imports of mobile phone components, encompassing items such as display screens, cameras, batteries, and printed circuit boards, experienced a significant upsurge between FY21 and FY23.
  • Interestingly, these two years also marked the period during which mobile phone exports experienced their most substantial growth.
  • His contention revolves around the observation that manufacturers in India are not fundamentally engaged in the traditional sense of mobile phone production, which would involve the localization of the entire supply chain and the domestic production of most components.
  • Instead, what these companies are primarily doing is importing all the requisite parts and subsequently assembling them in India to produce a product labeled as 'Made in India.'
  • Furthermore, Rajan's critique extends to the assertion that low-level assembly work, as opposed to comprehensive manufacturing, does not generate well-paying jobs and lacks the robust multiplier effect that genuine manufacturing might provide to the economy.

What is the Union Government Response:

  • Minister of State for Electronics, Rajeev Chandrasekhar, presents a two-part counter-argument.
  • Firstly, he contends that Mr. Rajan's assumption that all imports of items like screens and batteries are exclusively intended for mobile phone manufacturing is inaccurate.
  • These imported components could also be utilized in the production of other devices such as computer monitors, DSLR cameras, and electric vehicles, among others.
  • Secondly, he points out that not all mobile phone production in India benefits from the PLI scheme; only approximately 22% of the industry has been covered by the scheme thus far.
  • The Minister's primary assertion is that import dependency isn't as severe as Mr. Rajan portrays it to be, given the potential diversity of applications for these imported components and the limited coverage of mobile phone production under the PLI scheme.

In Conclusion:

  • The former RBI Governor contends that even if we assume that only 60% of imports are utilized for production, India's net exports would remain in the negative territory.
  • This means that even if just 60% of components like screens and batteries are dedicated to mobile phone manufacturing, the total imports would still surpass the overall exports.
  • The fundamental divide in this debate revolves around the question of whether the PLI program can effectively generate sustainable employment opportunities and firmly position India as a manufacturing and supply hub that contributes substantial value to the production process.
  • The Union Government's perspective is that the results of the PLI Scheme may require time to become fully apparent and impactful.

Why India Needs an Industrial Policy? (Indian Express)

  • 11 Aug 2023

Why in the News?

  • India's move to impose import limitations on personal computers, laptops, and a variety of commodities has sparked a discussion about the trajectory of the nation's industrial policy.
  • Detractors view these restrictions as reminiscent of a bygone era when the Indian economy was constrained by the license permit regime.

The Government's Directive Regarding Laptop Import Ban:

  • On August 3rd, the Union Government introduced measures to restrict the import of laptops, tablets, all-in-one personal computers, ultra-small computers, and servers, effective immediately.
  • Entities or businesses intending to import laptops and computers for sale within India will now require government permission or a license for their importation.
  • This directive was issued by the Directorate General of Foreign Trade (DGFT).
  • The restrictions have been enacted under HSN Code 8471, affecting seven categories of electronic devices.
  • The Harmonized System of Nomenclature (HSN) code is an organizational system utilized for tax-related product identification.
  • HSN Code 8471 is employed to categorize devices specifically designed for data processing functions.
  • However, due to issues arising at ports where customs officials were detaining shipments of the specified electronic goods, the DGFT opted to suspend the enforcement of this measure until November 1st, 2023."

Concerns Regarding the Laptop Import Restrictions:

  • These limitations have raised concerns about a potential regression of the Indian economy into the period characterized by the license permit system, during which discretionary and authoritarian bureaucratic control prevailed, sometimes accompanied by corruption.
  • During that era, citizens encountered scarcities, substandard products, or attempts to circumvent government regulations.
  • The manner in which the government introduced the import ban on laptops, subsequently revising the deadlines, has evoked familiar concerns about bureaucrats who seem to "act first and inquire later."
  • Nonetheless, proponents of the policy contend that its implementation was long overdue.

How these Restrictions are Different from Regulations in the 1960s-70s?

  • Shift in Circumstances
  • Indian industrial policy of the past yielded moderate outcomes, However, the historical context has undergone a transformation.
  • Factors such as energy availability, logistics, human capital, and global geopolitical dynamics are no longer as constricting for India as they once were.
  • The expanded market size, particularly in certain sectors, grants India greater negotiating power than in the past.
  • Enhancement of Government Capacity:
  • The current imposition of import restrictions is distinct due to the enhancement of government capacity, setting it apart from the circumstances of the 1960s.
  • Those earlier restrictions were significantly more extensive, governing the entire import and production landscape in a way that hindered domestic productive and allocative efficiencies.
  • Altered Objective:
  • Today's objective diverges from simply reducing import reliance; it aims to reshape the import structure to support India's journey towards self-reliance (Aatma Bharat).
  • If the government can effectively communicate and uphold this distinction, the nation may avoid reliving the challenges posed by prior industrial policies."

Importance of Instituting an Industrial Policy in India:

  • While India has witnessed the fruits of liberalization, the reality persists that the country struggled to cultivate a robust manufacturing foundation and experienced premature de-industrialization.
  • Across the globe, no nation has achieved industrialization solely through deregulation. An industrial policy is pivotal for orchestrating a fundamental reconfiguration of the economy's structure.
  • Strategically devised import restrictions can constitute an integral element of such a policy framework.
  • Given the contemporary global landscape, a robust industrial policy is imperative. Various countries are already adopting this approach, and considering the prevailing geopolitics and security concerns, it's crucial for India to formulate a comprehensive industrial policy and place a heightened emphasis on manufacturing."

Suggestions for Developing a Strong Industrial Policy:

  • Balancing Competition and Collaboration:
  • Advocates of an industrial policy assert that India should prioritize the fundamental attributes that enhance competitiveness within an economy.
  • Such a policy can engender favorable external effects, address coordination hurdles, and stimulate agglomeration advantages.
  • Shifting Away from Subsidies and Safeguards:
  • Despite increased state capacity, the dynamics of bureaucratic discretion must not be underestimated, particularly within a context where certain companies receive disproportionate state favoritism.
  • Furthermore, Indian states should progressively transition from reliance on subsidies and moderate safeguards.
  • Embracing Export-Oriented Strategies Over Import Substitution:
  • A noteworthy feature of successful Chinese and East Asian industrial policies was their emphasis on export-driven development.
  • India faces a dual challenge in this regard. Achieving export orientation necessitates an open global trade framework. Yet, global support for this system is waning.
  • India's effectiveness in advocating for an open trade system could be compromised if it resorts to protectionist measures.
  • Thus, the design of India's industrial policy should promote exports rather than replicate import substitution tactics.
  • Minimizing Spectacle
  •  
  • For instance, the current emphasis on the Micron deal, wherein the government contributes 70% of the investment, warrants consideration.
  • Simultaneously, it's crucial for the government to recognize that chip companies are relocating manufacturing to more expensive locales with fewer subsidies.

Moving forward, the government must undertake a meticulous assessment of the nation's unique conditions and capacities. Crafting an effective industrial policy for India involves ensuring that the advantages of laptops extend beyond a specific class.

Nonetheless, it's essential to maintain a perspective that prevents the discourse on industrial policy from being swayed by ostentatious displays, oversimplified theories, or deceptive historical parallels.

India's Digital Personal Data Protection Bill 2023 (TOI)

  • 04 Aug 2023
  •  
  • The central government will notify countries where data fiduciaries may transfer personal data.
  • Such transfers will be subject to prescribed terms and conditions.
  • Exemptions:
  • Certain specified cases will be exempt from certain rights of data principals and obligations of data fiduciaries, excluding data security. These cases include:
  • Prevention and investigation of offenses.
  • Enforcement of legal rights or claims.
  • The central government may, through notification, exempt certain activities from Bill's application, such as
  • Processing by government entities for national security and public order.
  • Data processing for research, archiving, or statistical purposes.
  • Data Protection Board of India:
  • The central government will establish the Data Protection Board of India.
  • Key functions of the Board include:
  • Monitoring compliance and imposing penalties.
  • Directing data fiduciaries to take necessary measures in the event of a data breach.
  • Addressing grievances made by affected individuals.
  • Penalties:
  • The Bill outlines penalties for various offenses, including
  • Fines of up to Rs 200 crore for non-compliance with obligations related to children's data.
  • Fines of up to Rs 250 crore for failure to implement adequate security measures to prevent data breaches.

Importance of the Digital Personal Data Protection Bill, 2023:

  • The Digital Personal Data Protection Bill 2023 holds significant value as it aims to ensure the safety and privacy of users’ personal data while granting them greater control over its portability. The bill sets forth stringent measures and norms that will hold big corporations and consumers accountable, imposing substantial fines on those who fail to comply.
  • The primary objective of the bill is to enhance the accountability of entities, including internet companies, mobile apps, and businesses, in their collection, storage, and processing of citizens' data, safeguarding the citizens' "Right to Privacy." Once approved, various public and private entities will be obligated to obtain explicit consent from users before collecting and processing their data.
  • This landmark legislation signifies a major step towards valuing and protecting the privacy of each consumer, ensuring that their personal data is handled with utmost care and responsibility, creating a safer and more secure digital environment for all.

Concerns regarding the Digital Personal Data Protection Bill, 2023, include several contentious issues:

  • The government and its agencies are granted wide-ranging exemptions.
  • The powers of the data protection board might be diluted.
  • The proposed amendment to the Right to Information Act, of 2005, is causing worries, particularly due to the removal of the public interest caveat that could restrict sharing of government officials' personal information.
  • The bill overrides Section 43A of the Information Technology Act, 2000, which mandates compensation for mishandling user data by companies. The new compensation mechanism has been questioned, as it may impact users' ability to seek adequate redress.
  • Addressing these concerns is essential to ensure a comprehensive and balanced approach to safeguarding personal data in the digital realm.

What are Data Privacy Regulations in Other Countries?

  • Approximately 70% of countries worldwide have implemented data protection legislation, as reported by the United Nations trade agency UNCTAD.
  • The EU's General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), enforced in 2018, is considered the most stringent privacy and security law globally and serves as a benchmark for data protection regulations.
  • Several countries, such as China and Vietnam, have recently strengthened their laws concerning the cross-border transfer of personal data to enhance data privacy.
  • In 2018, Australia passed a bill granting police access to encrypted data.

In conclusion, the Digital Personal Data Protection Bill, 2023, offers extensive rights to individuals, granting them enhanced visibility, awareness, decision-making autonomy, and control over their data. It imposes strict obligations on companies to adhere to individual rights and establishes robust redressal mechanisms, backed by significant penalties for non-compliance.

Moreover, the Bill reinforces the landmark judgment of the Supreme Court in the case of Justice K. S. Puttaswamy (Retd) Vs Union of India (2017). In this judgment, a nine-judge bench unanimously recognized the constitutionally protected fundamental right to privacy for Indians, affirming that privacy is an intrinsic aspect of life and liberty under Article 21 of the Constitution. The Digital Personal Data Protection Bill, 2023, is a crucial step towards upholding this fundamental right and ensuring better protection of personal data in the digital age.

Mains Question:

  • Examine the provisions and significance of the Digital Personal Data Protection Bill, 2023, comparing it to global data privacy regulations and its alignment with the Indian Supreme Court's right to privacy ruling. (15M)